Magellan CCS Navigator: Installation and Operation Manual

Installation
and Operation Manual
MagellanTM CCS Navigator
Advanced Graphical Navigation Application
Volume 1: Device control
Edition AH
175‐000114‐00
Publication Information
© 2014 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential.
Imagine Communications considers this document and its contents to be proprietary and
confidential. Except for making a reasonable number of copies for your own internal use, you
may not reproduce this publication, or any part thereof, in any form, by any method, for any
purpose, or in any language other than English without the written consent of Imagine
Communications. All others uses are illegal.
This publication is designed to assist in the use of the product as it exists on the date of
publication of this manual, and may not reflect the product at the current time or an unknown
time in the future. This publication does not in any way warrant description accuracy or
guarantee the use for the product to which it refers. Imagine Communications reserves the
right, without notice to make such changes in equipment, design, specifications, components,
or documentation as progress may warrant to improve the performance of the product.
Trademarks
CCS Navigator™ is a trademark of Imagine Communications or its subsidiaries.
Portions © 1994‐1996, QLogic Corporation. All rights reserved. Portions © 2004‐2007 Amino
Communications Ltd. All rights reserved. Portions © 1989, 1991, 1992, 1998 Carnegie Mellon
University. All rights reserved. Derivative Work ‐ 1996, 1998‐2000 Portions © 1996, 1998‐2000
The Regents of the University of California. All Rights Reserved. Portions © 2001‐2003,
Networks Associates Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. Portions © 2001‐2003, Cambridge
Broadband Ltd. All rights reserved. Portions © 2003 Sun Microsystems, Inc., 4150 Network
Circle, Santa Clara, California 95054, U.S.A. All rights reserved. Portions © 2003‐2008, Sparta,
Inc. All rights reserved. Portions © 2004, Cisco, Inc and Information Network. All rights reserved.
Portions © Fabasoft R&D Software GmbH & Co KG, 2003. All rights reserved.
Microsoft® and Windows® are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. All other
trademarks and trade names are the property of their respective companies.
Contact Information
Imagine Communications has office locations around the world. For locations and contact
information see: http://www.imaginecommunications.com/contact‐us/
Support Contact Information
For support contact information see:
Support Contacts: http://www.imaginecommunications.com/services/technical‐support/
eCustomer Portal: http://support.imaginecommunications.com
iii
Contents
Preface ........................................................................................................................ xv
Manual Information ..................................................................................................... xv
Purpose .................................................................................................................... xv
Audience .................................................................................................................. xv
Revision History ........................................................................................................ xv
Writing Conventions ................................................................................................... xvi
Obtaining the User Manuals ...................................................................................... xvi
Chapter 1 Introduction to Magellan CCS Navigator Device Control ................... 1

Magellan™ CCS Magellan CCS Navigator Overview ................................................. 1
Navigator Licenses ........................................................................................................ 2
NAVIGATOR-DEV License .......................................................................................... 2
NAVIGATOR-SRV License ........................................................................................... 3
NAVIGATOR-SNMP License ........................................................................................ 5
NAVIGATOR-INT License ............................................................................................ 5
NAVIGATOR-CLI License ............................................................................................ 5
NAVIGATOR-RTR License ........................................................................................... 5
ICONM-SCP License ................................................................................................... 6
ICONM-SCP-LITE License ........................................................................................... 6
NAVIGATOR-NX License ............................................................................................ 6
Basic CCS Magellan CCS Navigator System (No Licenses) ........................................... 6
Chapter 2 Installation ............................................................................................................... 7

Software Installation Overview ................................................................................... 7
Required Hardware ....................................................................................................... 7
Configuring a PC Monitor for Best Display ................................................................. 8
Required Operating System and Software ................................................................. 9
Installing Other Required Software .......................................................................... 10
Order of Installation for Software and Firmware ...................................................... 11
Requirements for Using MPEG-4 Streaming ............................................................. 12
Requirements for Using the Signal Monitor Tool ...................................................... 12
Preparing the PC for Installation .............................................................................. 12
Installing the CCS Magellan CCS Navigator Software .............................................. 12
iv Contents
If Setup Detects No Previous Installations ................................................................. 15

If Setup Detects a Previous Installation ..................................................................... 15
Removing the CCS Magellan CCS Navigator Software ............................................. 16
Using the Add or Remove Programs Application ...................................................... 17
Using the Uninstall Program ..................................................................................... 17
Manually Removing the CCS Magellan CCS Navigator Software .............................. 18
Managing Magellan CCS Navigator Licenses ............................................................ 19
Viewing Your License Key ........................................................................................ 20
Changing a License Key ........................................................................................... 20
Backup and Restore Utility ......................................................................................... 21
Chapter 3 Logging In and Account Administration .................................................. 23

User Account Overview .............................................................................................. 23
Logging On .................................................................................................................. 23
Logging Off or Exiting ................................................................................................ 25
Managing User Groups ............................................................................................... 25
Adding a User Group ............................................................................................... 26
Assigning Access Rights ........................................................................................... 28
Removing a User Group ........................................................................................... 31
Modifying Group Properties ..................................................................................... 31
Managing User Accounts ............................................................................................ 32
Adding a User Account ............................................................................................ 32
Removing a User Account ........................................................................................ 33
Changing User Account Information ........................................................................ 34
Viewing User Account Information ........................................................................... 34
Changing a Password .............................................................................................. 34
Administering User Logs ............................................................................................. 35
Creating a User Log ................................................................................................. 35
Viewing the User Log ............................................................................................... 36
Chapter 4 Interface Overview .............................................................................................. 37

Main Interface ............................................................................................................. 37
Setting the Operational Mode ................................................................................... 37
Setting the Operational Language ............................................................................ 39
Installing Files for East Asian Languages ................................................................... 40
Changing the Operational Language ........................................................................ 41
Tools ............................................................................................................................. 41
Toolbars ................................................................................................................... 41
Built-In Tools ............................................................................................................ 43
Status Bar ................................................................................................................ 49
Plug-ins .................................................................................................................... 49
Standalone Tools ..................................................................................................... 51
Using Interface Dialog Boxes ..................................................................................... 52
Docking or Floating a Tool Dialog Box ...................................................................... 53
Showing and Closing a Tool Dialog Box ................................................................... 53
Using the Window Menu ......................................................................................... 55
Navigator Device Control v
User Manual
Working with Layouts .............................................................................................. 56

Property Sheets ....................................................................................................... 57
Using Menus ................................................................................................................ 58
Shortcut Menus ....................................................................................................... 58
Chapter 5 Communication Options and SNMP Configuration .............................. 59

Communication Options Overview ........................................................................... 59
Setting Communication Options ................................................................................ 59
Setting Serial Connection Preferences ...................................................................... 60
Creating a New Device in the Serial Settings Tab ..................................................... 61
Editing a Previously Created Device in the Serial Settings Tab ................................... 61
Setting SNMP Options ................................................................................................ 62
SNMP Monitoring and Control Using Magellan CCS Navigator ................................ 62
SNMP Agent Configuration Using Magellan CCS Navigator ..................................... 70
Chapter 6 CCS Device Discovery.......................................................................................... 75

Discovery Overview .................................................................................................... 75
Summary of Discovery Tasks ...................................................................................... 76
Entering Network Address Information .................................................................... 76
Setting Discovery Options .......................................................................................... 77
Setting Host IP Addresses for a Discovery ................................................................. 77
Modifying a Previously Used Discovery ..................................................................... 82
Setting Discovery Save Options ................................................................................ 83
Pinging the IP Address of a CCS Device ................................................................... 84
Running a Discovery ................................................................................................... 85
Running a Full Discovery .......................................................................................... 85
Running a Partial Discovery ...................................................................................... 86
IP Settings and Device ID Configuration ................................................................... 88
Finding a Device ...................................................................................................... 89
Configuring Multiple Devices ................................................................................... 89
Rediscovery ................................................................................................................. 91
Copying Discovery Results ......................................................................................... 91
Using the Discovery Shortcut Menu .......................................................................... 92
Using the Discovery Column in the Tree View .......................................................... 92
Chapter 7 Network View Construction ............................................................................ 93

Network View Overview ............................................................................................ 93
Updating the Navigation Pane on a Client PC .......................................................... 94
Resource Folders ...................................................................................................... 94
Sorting Items in the Resource Tree ........................................................................... 95
Resource Icons ......................................................................................................... 95
Navigating the Resource Tree .................................................................................. 97
Finding Items in the Navigation Pane ....................................................................... 98
Starting Software From the Navigation Pane ............................................................ 98
vi Contents
Adding Resources to the Navigation Pane ................................................................ 99

Using the Create Tool to Add a Resource Icon .......................................................... 99
Copying and Pasting a Resource Icon ..................................................................... 100
Deleting a Resource Icon ........................................................................................ 101
Setting Navigation Properties .................................................................................. 103
Setting General Navigation Properties for a Device ................................................. 104
Setting the Device Tab ........................................................................................... 105
Setting the Command Tab ..................................................................................... 107
Setting the Monitor Point Properties ...................................................................... 108
Setting HTTP Properties .......................................................................................... 108
Viewing the Preset Tab .......................................................................................... 109
Viewing the Shortcut Tab ....................................................................................... 109
Viewing the Communication Settings Tab .............................................................. 109
Setting SNMP Navigation Properties ....................................................................... 110
Setting the Amino STB Tab .................................................................................... 111
Sample Resource Tree Views .................................................................................... 114
Using Navigation Shortcut Menus ........................................................................... 117
Checking the Control Access Rights for a Device .................................................... 119
Showing Product Information for a CCS Device ...................................................... 119
Setting Navigation Options ...................................................................................... 120
Using the Optional Columns in the Navigation Pane ............................................... 122
Using Navigation Shortcuts ...................................................................................... 124
Chapter 8 CCS Device Configuration ............................................................................... 127

CCS Device Configuration Overview ....................................................................... 127
CCS Devices Requiring Special Configuration ......................................................... 127
Opening and Closing a Configuration Dialog Box ................................................... 128
Using the Configuration Status Bar ........................................................................ 128
Configuring Network Settings for a CCS Device ..................................................... 129
Setting the IP Address of a CCS Device .................................................................. 129
Changing the Network Settings of a Device ........................................................... 129
Setting the IP Address of a New CCS Device .......................................................... 130
Adding a Route to the PC Routing Table ................................................................ 132
Reading the Network Configuration from a Device ................................................ 134
Writing Network Information to a CCS Device ....................................................... 135
Upgrading Software .................................................................................................. 135
Stopping a Transfer Task ........................................................................................ 139
Upgrading a NEO SuiteView Using the Wizard ....................................................... 139
Using the Software Upgrade Progress Tab .............................................................. 140
Correcting a Failed Upgrade Procedure .................................................................. 142
Using the Configuration Dialog Box’s File Transfer Tab ......................................... 143
Backing Up Files From a CCS Device ....................................................................... 143
Transferring Files With the File Transfer Tab ........................................................... 144
Correcting a Failed Upgrading Procedure ............................................................... 145
Listing the Files Installed on a CCS Device .............................................................. 147
Restarting a CCS Device from the PC ....................................................................... 148
Setting Device Options ............................................................................................. 149
Navigator Device Control vii
User Manual
Setting SNMP Options .............................................................................................. 150

Adding New Addresses for SNMP Traps ................................................................. 151
Modifying an SNMP Trap Destination .................................................................... 152
Getting Version Information .................................................................................... 152
Logging Configuration Activity ............................................................................... 154
Viewing a Configuration Log ................................................................................. 154
Setting Configuration Options ................................................................................. 155
Using the Configuration Shortcut Menu ................................................................. 156
Finding the Resource Icon for a CCS Device ........................................................... 156
Returning a Configuration Dialog Box to its Default Size ........................................ 156
‘Remembering’ Telnet Information ........................................................................ 157
‘Remembering’ FTP Information ............................................................................. 157
Showing the User Manual for a CCS Device ........................................................... 157
Using the Configuration Folder ............................................................................... 157
Getting Help with Configuration Hierarchies .......................................................... 158
Creating Configuration Hierarchies ........................................................................ 158
Ordering Devices in a Configuration Hierarchy ....................................................... 159
Renaming Configurations ...................................................................................... 159
Chapter 9 NUCLEUS Configuration .................................................................................. 161

NUCLEUS Configuration Overview .......................................................................... 161
Devices Configured using Magellan CCS Navigator ................................................ 161
Devices Configured Using the Control Panel Interface .......................................... 162
Activating NUCLEUS License Keys ........................................................................... 162
Configuring a NUCLEUS Control Panel Using Magellan CCS Navigator ............... 163
Creating a NUCLEUS Configuration Folder ............................................................. 163
Adding CENTRIO Systems to a NUCLEUS Configuration ......................................... 164
Adding a Routing View to a NUCLEUS Configuration ............................................ 164
Adding Processing or SNMP Devices to a NUCLEUS Configuration ......................... 165
Creating Routing Panels for a NUCLEUS Configuration ......................................... 171
Starting the Routing Panel Configuration Wizard ................................................... 171
Selecting Sources for your NUCLEUS Routing Panel ............................................... 173
Selecting Destinations for your NUCLEUS Routing Panel ........................................ 174
Selecting Destination Statuses for your NUCLEUS Routing Panel (Multi-Bus Only) ... 175
Selecting Levels for your NUCLEUS Routing Panel ................................................. 175
Selecting Destination Categories (Cat/Index mode only) ......................................... 175
Selecting Destination Indexes (Cat/Index mode only) .............................................. 176
Selecting Source Categories (Cat/Index mode only) ................................................ 178
Selecting Source Indexes (Cat/Index mode only) ..................................................... 178
Selecting Levels for your NUCLEUS Routing Panel .................................................. 178
Selecting Salvos for your NUCLEUS Routing Panel .................................................. 178
Editing a Routing Panel .......................................................................................... 179
Auto Validation ......................................................................................................... 179
Creating a CENTRIO Panel for a NUCLEUS Configuration ...................................... 180
Using the CENTRIO Panel Configuration Wizard .................................................... 180
Selecting PIP Attributes .......................................................................................... 181
Selecting the Sources and PIPs for Your CENTRIO Panel ......................................... 182
viii Contents
Selecting Displays for Your CENTRIO Panel ............................................................. 183

Selecting Source Categories for Your CENTRIO Panel ............................................. 184
Selecting Source Indexes for Your CENTRIO Panel .................................................. 185
Creating a NUCLEUS Configuration ......................................................................... 186
Assigning Parameters With NUCLEUS Configuration Wizard .................................. 191
Creating a Configuration Without Using a Wizard ................................................. 193
Editing a Panel Configuration ................................................................................. 202
Configuring Router TRAX for NUCLEUS .................................................................. 202
Setting Destination Mode Options ......................................................................... 205
Transferring NUCLEUS Configuration files .............................................................. 205
Transferring Configurations to Multiple Control Panels .......................................... 207
Exporting a NUCLEUS Configuration file to XML .................................................... 208
Importing a NUCLEUS Configuration file from XML ................................................ 208
Getting a Configuration File From a NUCLEUS ....................................................... 208
Transferring MIBs to NUCLEUS ............................................................................... 209
Deleting a Configuration File from a NUCLEUS ....................................................... 210
Listing the Configuration Files on a NUCLEUS ........................................................ 210
Chapter 10 EDGE-DPS575 Gateway

Configuration and Control ............................................................................. 211
EDGE-DPS575 Overview ............................................................................................ 211
Creating an EDGE-DPS575 Configuration File ......................................................... 211
Editing an EDGE-DPS575 Configuration ................................................................. 213
Deleting a Configuration from an EDGE-DPS575 .................................................... 214
Adding DPS-575 Parameters to NUCLEUS Configurations ...................................... 214
Controlling an EDGE-DPS575 Gateway .................................................................... 215
Using the DPS-575 Control Interface ........................................................................ 215
Configuring a DPS-575 for HTTP Control and Monitoring ..................................... 216
Using the DPS-575 Updater ...................................................................................... 218
Connecting the DPS Uploader Utility to a Specific DPS-575 .................................... 219
Chapter 11 NEO Frame Configuration ............................................................................. 221

Frame Configuration Overview ................................................................................ 221
Creating a Configuration File for a NEO Frame ....................................................... 222
Transferring a Configuration File to a NEO Frame .................................................. 223
Cancelling the Transfer of a NEO Frame Configuration File ..................................... 223
Using the Configuration Status Bar and Log ........................................................... 224
Refreshing the NEO Frame Configuration ............................................................... 224
Working With Configurations on a NEO Frame ...................................................... 224
Listing the Configuration File Stored on a NEO Frame ............................................ 224
Getting a Configuration File from a NEO Frame ..................................................... 225
Deleting a Configuration File from a NEO Frame .................................................... 225
Clearing the Configurations List from the Frame Tab .............................................. 225
Navigator Device Control ix
User Manual
Chapter 12 LCP and RCP Configuration ........................................................................... 227

LCP and RCP Configuration Overview ..................................................................... 227
Creating a Configuration file for a CCS LCP or RCP ................................................ 227
Configuring Favorites for a Device ......................................................................... 229
Transferring a Configuration File to a CCS LCP or RCP ........................................... 231
Using the Configuration Status Bar and Log .......................................................... 233
Refreshing a CCS Control Panel Configuration ...................................................... 233
Using the Configuration List on a CCS Control Panel ............................................. 233
Filtering Alarms for a CCS LCP or RCP ...................................................................... 235
Using Alarm Filtering ............................................................................................. 236
Using Alarm Filtering Contents .............................................................................. 236
Removing Forgotten Passwords from LCPs and RCPs ............................................ 236
Chapter 13 Network Event Diagnostics ........................................................................... 237

Diagnostics Overview ............................................................................................... 237
Showing the Diagnostics Dialog Box ...................................................................... 237
Using Alarm Tables ................................................................................................... 238
Selecting a Row in an Alarm Table ......................................................................... 238
Reordering Columns in the Alarm List .................................................................... 239
Saving Column Order Changes .............................................................................. 239
Resizing Columns .................................................................................................. 240
Sorting Columns .................................................................................................... 240
Interpreting Fields in the Alarm Lists ...................................................................... 241
Interpreting Alarm Colors ......................................................................................... 241
Using the Diagnostics Shortcut Menus ................................................................... 242
Finding a CCS Device from an Alarm Record .......................................................... 243
Locally acknowledging SNMP traps ........................................................................ 244
Opening a Device Control Dialog Box from an Alarm Record ................................. 244
Ignoring Alarms ..................................................................................................... 244
Refreshing the Alarm Lists ..................................................................................... 245
Clearing Alarms ..................................................................................................... 245
Saving Alarms to a File ........................................................................................... 245
Loading an Archived Alarm Log into the Offline Tab .............................................. 246
Setting Diagnostics Properties for an Alarm Message ............................................. 246
Setting Diagnostics Options ..................................................................................... 247
Setting the Behavior of the Diagnostics Dialog Box ................................................ 248
Setting Alarm Filtering Options .............................................................................. 249
Setting E-Mail Notification of Alarms ..................................................................... 251
Setting Alarm Log Options ..................................................................................... 252
Setting Options for Offline Viewing of Alarm Logs ................................................. 253
Chapter 14 CCS Device Control............................................................................................. 255

Control Overview ...................................................................................................... 255
Opening and Closing Control Dialog Boxes ............................................................ 255
Using Generic and Specific Control Dialog Boxes ................................................... 257
x Contents
Checking the Active Window Type ......................................................................... 258

Showing a Container Device’s Control Dialog Boxes ............................................... 258
Using Older Generic Control Dialog Boxes .............................................................. 263
Checking a Device’s Control Status .......................................................................... 265
Using the Control Shortcut Menu ............................................................................ 266
Using a Control Dialog Box to Find a Resource Icon ................................................ 267
Refreshing the Connection Status of a CCS Device ................................................. 267
Clearing an ‘Alarm Query Failed’ Message ............................................................. 267
Getting Help with the Control Tool ........................................................................ 267
Showing the User Manual for a CCS-Enabled Device .............................................. 268
Checking the Access Rights for a CCS Device .......................................................... 268
Setting Control Options ............................................................................................ 268
Using Presets .............................................................................................................. 270
Working With Presets in a Control Dialog Box ........................................................ 271
Working With Presets in the Navigation Pane ......................................................... 272
Chapter 15 Streaming in Control Windows .................................................................... 277

Streaming Overview ................................................................................................. 277
Adding a License Key for MPEG-4 Streaming in QSEE6800+ ................................... 277
Multicasting ........................................................................................................... 278
Streaming in a Control Dialog Box ........................................................................... 278
QSEE6800+ Control Dialog Boxes .......................................................................... 278
Viewing Thumbnails from FR6802+QXF Frames ..................................................... 282
Viewing an X75 Streaming Source ......................................................................... 285
Playing MPEG-4 Video from the Navigation Pane ................................................... 285
Chapter 16 Video Output Monitoring................................................................................ 287

Signal Monitoring Overview .................................................................................... 287
Using the Signal Monitor Tool .................................................................................. 287
Showing the Signal Monitor Dialog Box ................................................................. 288
Monitoring Video Signals ......................................................................................... 288
Using the Signal Monitor Shortcut Menu ............................................................... 289
Setting Video Properties for the Signal Monitor ...................................................... 289
Setting Signal Monitor Options ............................................................................... 290
Chapter 17 Device Control through HTTP ....................................................................... 293

HTTP Device Control Overview ................................................................................ 293
Configuring an HTTP Server Node to Open a Web Browser .................................. 293
Controlling an HTTP Device ...................................................................................... 294
Appendix A Troubleshooting .................................................................................................. 295

Suggested Troubleshooting Steps ........................................................................... 295
Navigator Device Control xi
User Manual
Common Problems ................................................................................................ 295

Installation Problems ................................................................................................ 295
InstallShield Errors ................................................................................................. 296
Magellan CCS Navigator Install Fails during Router Database Upgrade ................... 296
Installation Exits without Finishing ......................................................................... 296
Installation Cannot Update Users Database ............................................................ 297
Module Firmware Needs to be Upgraded ............................................................... 297
SQL Server Re-installation Needs Authentication .................................................... 298
Windows Message Queuing Requests Installation CD ............................................ 298
Cannot Install Magellan CCS Navigator on Windows XP or Windows 2003 ........... 299
Problems at Startup .................................................................................................. 299
CCS Magellan CCS Navigator Fails to Start after Setup .......................................... 300
Magellan CCS Navigator Starts up with Build Mode Only ....................................... 300
Frames Fail to Communicate with PC after Power Failure ...................................... 300
PC Running CCS Magellan CCS Navigator Operates Sluggishly .............................. 300
Password Has Been Lost or Forgotten ................................................................... 302
Password Does Not Work ...................................................................................... 303
File Permissions Prevent Use of Magellan CCS Navigator ........................................ 303
File Share Handling From Magellan CCS Navigator Clients ..................................... 303
Managing Permissions ........................................................................................... 304
PC Turned Off While ‘On Air’ ................................................................................ 304
Online Help Hangs After User Selects ‘Properties’ .................................................. 304
"Windows Security Alert" Dialog Appears ............................................................. 304
PC Work Space Settings Need to be Returned to Default ....................................... 305
Serial Connection Error at Startup .......................................................................... 306
Menus or Tools Not Available ................................................................................ 306
Clearing the Internet Explorer Cache Closes Magellan CCS Navigator .................... 307
Configuration Problems ............................................................................................ 307
Telnet Fails During Device Configuration ................................................................ 308
Discovery Fails to Find a Device .............................................................................. 308
Magellan CCS Navigator Hangs While Discovering 6800+ Devices ......................... 308
Magellan CCS Navigator Has Problems Discovering a 6800+ Frame ........................ 308
Discovery Takes Too Long ...................................................................................... 309
FTP Fails During Device Configuration .................................................................... 309
NUCLEUS Device Firmware Upgrade Fails ............................................................... 310
Broadcast Communication Fails ............................................................................. 310
Device Can’t Be Controlled or Has No Version Information .................................... 310
IP Address Disappears from Icon Name .................................................................. 310
Detection of a Lost Network Connection Takes Too Long ...................................... 311
Difficulty Configuring an NSM card ....................................................................... 311
Router Control Fails to Unlock/Unprotect Destinations ........................................... 311
Serial Port Conflict ................................................................................................. 311
Validating Routing/CENTRIO Panels After Upgrading ............................................. 312
Folder Browser Dialogs Do Not Show Network Drives in Windows 8 ...................... 312
Alarm Problems ......................................................................................................... 312
Alarms Behave Differently on Card Edge than in Magellan CCS Navigator ............. 313
Disabled Alarm Remains Listed in Diagnostics Dialog Box ....................................... 313
Alarm Query Fails When a Device Reboots ............................................................. 313
Module Alarm is Difficult to Identify in Control Dialog Box ..................................... 313
xii Contents
Card Slot View Fails to Report Card Alarms ............................................................ 313

Diagnostics Dialog Box Fails to List Alarms for SNMP Traps ..................................... 314
SNMP MIB Load Errors Appear ............................................................................... 314
Network is Overloaded With Duplicate SNMP Traps ............................................... 316
SNMP Traps Do Not Appear to be Received ............................................................ 316
Alarms Not Appearing Correctly in Japanese or Chinese Language Interface .......... 316
Control Problems ....................................................................................................... 316
Magellan CCS Navigator Cannot Control a Module in the Navigation Pane ............ 317
No Alarms, Status, or Changes in Parameter Values Reported for an X75 Device .... 317
Device Status is Not Reported for X75 or X75-RCP Devices ..................................... 317
Navigation Tool Won’t ‘Undo’ or ‘Redo’ a Preset Load ........................................... 318
Problems With Presets in QSEE6800+ Modules ...................................................... 318
Device Status Column Reports No Status or ‘Not Ready’ ......................................... 318
Frame Control Dialog Box Shows Error or Warning for Slot .................................... 319
‘Unable to Open a New Control Window’ Message Appears .................................. 319
No Video Shows in the Signal Monitor Dialog Box .................................................. 319
Unable to get Streaming Video in Navigator Page or Device Control Dialog Box ..... 320
Getting Help With Magellan CCS Navigator ........................................................... 320
Getting Help from Customer Service ....................................................................... 321
Expediting a Software Solution .............................................................................. 321
Appendix B Frequently Asked Questions ......................................................................... 323

What are the CCS Magellan CCS Navigator Licensing Options? ............................ 323
Can I use CCS Software to Configure my Devices? ................................................. 323
Can I use Magellan CCS Navigator to Build a Graphical Network Model? ............... 323
What is the Navigation Pane? ................................................................................ 323
What is Graphical Navigation? ................................................................................. 324
What is the Graphical Navigation Window? ........................................................... 324
What is a Magellan CCS Navigator Page? .............................................................. 324
Can I Create my Own Magellan CCS Navigator Pages? .......................................... 324
What are Magellan CCS Navigator Actions? ........................................................... 324
Can CCS Magellan CCS Navigator Monitor the Overall Status of Network Devices?
325
Can CCS Magellan CCS Navigator Monitor Network Device Environments? ........... 325
Can CCS Magellan CCS Navigator Perform Router Operations? ............................ 325
Can I Keep the Application Always on Top? ........................................................... 326
Can I Select Multiple Check Boxes at Once? ............................................................ 326
Appendix C Copyright, Trademark, and Warranty Information ........................... 329

Copyrights .................................................................................................................. 329
Trademarks ................................................................................................................. 329
Software User License and Warranty Agreement ................................................... 330
License ................................................................................................................... 330
Limited Software Warranty .................................................................................... 330
NET SNMP License ................................................................................................. 331
Navigator Device Control xiii
User Manual
Appendix D Glossary ................................................................................................................... 337

Index to Terms ........................................................................................................... 337
Index......................................................................................................................... 349
xiv Contents
xv
Preface
Manual Information
Purpose This manual details the features, installation procedures, operational procedures, and
specifications of the Navigator software.
Audience This manual is written for engineers, technicians, and operators responsible for the
installation, setup, and/or operation of the Navigator software.
Revision History
Table i-1 Software Revision History
Edition Software Version Release Date Changes
A CCS Navigator 1.0 March 2003
Z CCS Navigator 4.6.1 June 2010 LRC and PredatorII support
AA CCS Navigator 4.6.3 November 2010 Magellan support
AB CCS Navigator 4.7 January 2011 Discontinuation of BOS device support
AC CCS Navigator 4.7.1 July 2011 Addition of custom properties window
AD CCS Navigator 4.8 March 2012 Enhanced salvos
AE CCS Navigator 4.9 July 2012 Support for HView SX Pro devices
AF CCS Navigator 5.0 January 2013 IP3 support
AG CCS Navigator 5.2 January 2014 Increased support for Nexio and Windows 8.1
xvi Preface
Writing Conventions
This documentation adheres to the following writing conventions:
Table i-2 Conventions

Term or Convention Description
Bold Indicates dialog box, property sheet, field, button, check
box, list box, combo box, menu, submenu, window, list,
and selection names
Italics Indicates email addresses, names of books and
publications, and first instances of new terms and
specialized words that need emphasis
CAPS Indicates a specific key on the keyboard, such as ENTER,
TAB, CTRL, ALT, DELETE
Code Indicates variables or command-line entries, such as a
DOS entry or something you type into a field
> Indicates the direction of navigation through a hierarchy
of menus and dialog boxes
hyperlink Indicates a jump to another location in the document or
elsewhere
Internet address Indicates a jump to a website or URL
Indicates important information that helps to avoid and
troubleshoot problems
[VersionNo.] Placeholder for a software version number
CCS Software A generic term for any CCS software applications,
Application including CCS Navigator, CCS Pilot, and CCS CoPilot
Obtaining the User Manuals

The documentation for your product is included in your Documentation and Product
Resources DVD as an Adobe Acrobat PDF file. The CCS Navigator Online Help is an
electronic document integrated into the software. While working in the application, you
can open the Online Help and print out individual topics.
The most up-to-date documentation and software is always available on our website.
1
1 Introduction to Magellan CCS

Navigator Device Control
Magellan™ CCS Magellan CCS Navigator Overview

Magellan CCS Navigator is a scalable Windows-based software tool for configuring and
controlling various devices that use industry-standard protocols, such as UDP, TCP/IP, SNMP,
FTP, and HTTP.
Figure 1-1 Magellan CCS Navigator Screen

Magellan CCS Navigator supports the following devices:
 CCS control panels

 CCS EDGE-DPS575 gateway
 NEO, 6800+, and Selenio frames, modules and resource modules
 DPS-575, X75, and X85 synchronizers
 SNMP-compliant devices
2 Chapter 1
Introduction to Magellan CCS Navigator Device Control
 HTTP-controlled devices
 IconMaster systems
 Router systems
 Imagine Communications Digital Legalizers
 Amino STB
 Imagine Communications Broadcast Multiviewers, including PlatinumTM SX Hybrid and
PlatinumTM SX Pro
 Suiteview and Predator multiviewers
 NEXIO servers
 NetVX devices
 SQM devices
Starting with Navigator 4.7, the following devices and device families are no longer
supported:
 Genesis
 Digibus
 DFS
 CCS Gateway
 CCS Router Gateway
The Magellan CCS Navigator interface can be configured to display text in English,
Japanese, or Chinese. See Setting the Operational Language on page 39 for more
information.
Navigator Depending on the licensing options you choose, your Magellan CCS Navigator software
may be able to fulfill various functions. License options are described in the following
Licenses sections:
 NAVIGATOR-DEV License on page 2

 NAVIGATOR-SRV License on page 3
 NAVIGATOR-SNMP License on page 5
 NAVIGATOR-INT License on page 5
 NAVIGATOR-RTR License on page 5
 ICONM-SCP License on page 6
 ICONM-SCP-LITE License on page 6
 NAVIGATOR-NX License on page 6
 Basic CCS Magellan CCS Navigator System (No Licenses) on page 6
To obtain a Magellan CCS Navigator license, or to add an option to an existing license,
please contact your sales representative.
NAVIGATOR-DEV License
This license supports the remote discovery, configuration, monitoring, control, and
diagnostics of supported devices.
The NAVIGATOR-DEV option will help you accomplish the following tasks from a PC:
Navigator Device Control 3
User Manual
 Centrally navigate, control, and monitor CCS devices over a local- or wide-area
network.
 Set alarms to signal visual, auditory, or e-mail alerts when CCS-enabled devices go
off-line or malfunction.
 Transfer software upgrades to CCS-enabled devices.
 Quickly diagnose and correct problems with the CCS-enabled network or devices.
 Monitor the integrity of video signals throughout a facility.
 Control CCS routing systems.
 Secure the network with user-login and access-level verification.
 Control and monitor routers for video monitoring.
 Control and monitor multiviewer systems, including HView SX Hybrid and HView SX
Pro.
In most cases, the remote controls that the NAVIGATOR-DEV license offers are more
intuitive and user-friendly than the local controls on the devices. From a Magellan CCS
Navigator PC, you can quickly survey the network from an array of PC monitors, avoiding
the need to track changes of hundreds of LEDs on racks of devices.
For example, using Magellan CCS Navigator’s control interfaces, operators can track
the status of multiple X75 Converters and Synchronizers, each with more than 1000
individual controls, with a simplified and more-intuitive interface.
NAVIGATOR-SRV License
This license includes all the functionality of the NAVIGATOR-DEV license. Magellan CCS
Navigator with a NAVIGATOR-SRV license can operate in Build and Control modes.
The NAVIGATOR-SRV license allows administrators to use Graphical Navigation tools to

create easy-to-use graphical pages that visually represent a network’s many devices,
systems, and environments. Pages can associate actions, such as loading a page or creating
a configuration, with graphical objects, such as buttons, symbols, and images, that
represent items in a network environment.
On these graphical pages, called Magellan CCS Navigator pages, an administrator user can
consolidate network wide status monitoring and troubleshooting tasks.
4 Chapter 1
A NAVIGATOR-SRV license includes a collection of buttons, symbols, and images for use in
creating the custom pages, each representing an interface to one network environment.
If the supplied library of images fails to satisfy a network’s needs, you can import other
image files, such as your corporate logo, to supplement that gallery.
Figure 1-2. Sample Magellan CCS Navigator Pages
A PC with a NAVIGATOR-SRV license will normally be operated by an Administrator user.

This PC can discover devices within the network, set up pages and link devices to pages.
The administrator user can add pages and discover new pages while clients are also using
the system.
Magellan CCS Navigator with a NAVIGATOR-SRV license stores the following resources:
 Graphical Navigation pages

 Device, preset and page user and user group access rights
 Presets
 Navigation pane data
 Layouts
Administrator users can grant or deny other PCs on the network which have
NAVIGATOR-CLI licenses access to pages, presets, and devices. The resources stored on a
Magellan CCS Navigator system with a NAVIGATOR-SRV license can be retrieved by users at
NAVIGATOR-CLI systems as needed, or as those resources are updated.
The tools available with a NAVIGATOR-SRV license are described in CCS RouterNAV: Router
Specific Plug-in.
User Manual
NAVIGATOR-SNMP License
The NAVIGATOR-SNMP license allows complete monitoring and control customization of
any SNMP-enabled device. When used in combination with an NAVIGATOR-INT license, you
can build Graphical Navigation pages with parameters and alarms generated by SNMP
traps.
NAVIGATOR-INT License
The NAVIGATOR-INT license lets you drag and drop parameters and alarms onto Graphical
Navigation pages. By mixing and matching multiple devices,you can build virtual device
control and monitoring surfaces, such as Alarm Network Walls. This license requires either
the NAVIGATOR-SRV or NAVIGATOR-SNMP license key on the same PC.
For more information about the NAVIGATOR-INT license key, see Volume 5.
NAVIGATOR-CLI License
This license includes the Control mode functionality of NAVIGATOR-DEV and the graphical
navigation capabilities of NAVIGATOR-SRV. A PC running NAVIGATOR-CLI is installed on a
network that also has at least one instance of NAVIGATOR-SRV. Users on a NAVIGATOR-CLI
PC can retrieve graphical navigation pages and presets, and access devices for control and
monitoring purposes, from the NAVIGATOR-SRV PC. Users can control devices and operate
pages to which they have been granted permissions, and they can load and create presets.
NAVIGATOR-CLI installations operate only in Control mode. A user with a NAVIGATOR-CLI

license does not configure the Navigation pane, create router configurations, run
discoveries or create Graphical Navigation pages.
Though some data is stored on the NAVIGATOR-SRV PC, a PC with a NAVIGATOR-CLI

license communicates directly with equipment. The NAVIGATOR-CLI PC receives alarms
directly from all devices the user is assigned to monitor. Assignments are done by an
Administrator user on a NAVIGATOR-SRV PC.
Information that is stored on a NAVIGATOR-CLI-licensed system includes:
 Alarm logs
 Product sheets and user manuals
 Control options settings
 Diagnostic options settings
 Standalone tools
 Dialog box placements
These settings and items will not travel with your User ID if you log into a different
NAVIGATOR-CLI PC.
NAVIGATOR-RTR License
The NAVIGATOR-RTR license does not work in cooperation with any other license keys.
Using this license in Build mode, you can configure any device and create control panels for
routers using the Wizard. In Control mode, you have CCS-P control of all Imagine
Communications routers, including Platinum, Integrator, and Panacea. You can control
devices using default software control panels and custom software control panels created in
Build mode.
6 Chapter 1
For more information on configuring and controlling routers, see Volume 6.
ICONM-SCP License
The ICONM-SCP (ISCP) license does not work in cooperation with any other license keys,
and is intended for use with a touch-screen monitor. Using this license, you can create a
feature-complete control panel for an IconMaster switcher. The control panel also has tools
for setting some IconMaster configuration options.
The control panel provides audio information for a selected channel and provides
sub-panels to adjust various settings on the channel. For more information, see CCS
Navigator: Enhanced Functionality .
ICONM-SCP-LITE License
The ICONM-SCP-LITE (ISCP-LITE) license is intended for use with a touch-screen monitor
and must be physically and logically paired with an IconMaster Hardware Remote Control
Panel. It does not work in cooperation with any other license keys. The control panel has
tools for setting some IconMaster configuration options, provides audio information for the
hardware control panel, and provides sub-panels to adjust various settings on that panel.
For more information, see CCS Navigator: Enhanced Functionality .
NAVIGATOR-NX License
When you have a NAVIGATOR-NX license, after discovering NEXIO devices, you can open
control windows for those devices.
The NAVIGATOR-NX license also enables a wizard for creating graphical pages for NEXIO™
systems. These pages allows you to monitor the health and operational parameters of your
NEXIO system. Working in conjunction with agents on the NEXIO server platform,
NAVIGATOR-NX enables you to monitor system notifications, to make setting adjustments,
and to control basic server configuration from a remote PC.
For more information, see Volume 4.
Basic CCS Magellan CCS Navigator System (No Licenses)

If you do not purchase any license keys, after the initial 30-day trial period Magellan CCS
Navigator will open in Build mode only, with no option to switch to Control mode.
With no licenses, you have tools to discover and set up CCS-enabled devices on a broadcast
network. You can establish IP settings (IP address, default gateway, and subnet mask)
for CCS-enabled devices and set up menu hierarchies for CCS-compliant control panels.
You can configure and monitor physical and logical routing devices. You can determine the
current version of software and/or firmware on each CCS device and to upload new
software or firmware to the devices.
7
2 Installation
Software Installation Overview

If you are installing Magellan CCS Navigator for the first time on your PC, it will
automatically install with a free 30-day license. For the trial period, all license keys will be
activated, so you can evaluate which licenses you need.
If you have a previous version of CCS software (Pilot, CoPilot, Magellan CCS Navigator, or
IconMasterNav), you can choose to install either a Client or Server version of Magellan CCS
Navigator. When your 30-day trial license expires, you must purchase a NAVIGATOR-CLI or
NAVIGATOR-SRV license to preserve the previous data.
This version of the Magellan CCS Navigator software requires NEO 3901RES-E, ICE6800+,
LCP-3901-1U, and RCP-CCS-1U to be upgraded to version 3.0 or higher software. The
recommended system upgrade procedure consists of first upgrading all NEO 3901-RES-E
and ICE6800+ modules, then the LCP-3901-1U or RCP-CCS-1U, and finally to install or
upgrade the Magellan CCS Navigator software.
You may need to install other required programs or components as well. Most of these are
handled as part of the Magellan CCS Navigator installation.
See the following topics to install the CCS Navigator software application and other required
software and hardware components:
 Required Hardware on page 7

 Required Operating System and Software on page 9
 Installing Other Required Software on page 10
 Requirements for Using the Signal Monitor Tool on page 12
 Installing the CCS Magellan CCS Navigator Software on page 12
 Removing the CCS Magellan CCS Navigator Software on page 16
 Managing Magellan CCS Navigator Licenses on page 19
Required Hardware
A Magellan CCS Navigator Client system normally connects to a Magellan CCS Navigator
Server for administrative purposes and to retrieve pages and panels, profiles, presets, and
layouts. Each Magellan CCS Navigator client PC normally has a NAVIGATOR-CLI license.
8 Chapter 2
Installation
Magellan CCS Navigator Servers are where administrator users will normally configure a
network and create pages and panels. These PCs will store pages and profiles, presets, and
layouts, and will normally have a NAVIGATOR-SRV and/or a NAVIGATOR-SNMP license.
They may additionally have NAVIGATOR-NX and NAVIGATOR-INT licenses.
Standalone Magellan CCS Navigator systems will normally connect to specific equipment,
or a network without a Magellan CCS Navigator Server system as an intermediary. They
may have a NAVIGATOR-NX, ICONM-SCP, ICONM-SCP-LITE, or NAVIGATOR-DEV license.
Install the CCS Navigator software on a PC that meets or exceeds the following hardware
requirements:
Table 2-1 PC Requirements for Magellan CCS Navigator Clients and Servers
Client Server
Minimum Supported Minimum Supported
Requirements Requirements
3 GHz Pentium IV Intel Core i5 3.20 GHz
Processor processor (Core 2 Duo -
2.39 GHz recommended)
8 GB DRAM 16 GB DRAM
System Memory
(16 GB recommended)
100-BaseT 10/100/1000 Gigabit Ethernet
Network Connection
Connection
HDD Drive 20 GB 160 GB Hard Disk Drive
Available Disk Space 1 GB 5 GB
Optical Drive DVD-ROM Drive DVD-ROM Drive
Super VGA supporting  Video graphic module with
1152 × 864 (19-inch 256MB DDR3 SDRAM
recommended) supporting up to a minimum
Display 1920x1080 resolutions
 LCD Monitor supporting up to
1920x1080 resolution
It is not recommended to run Magellan CCS Navigator Server on a PC that is running or

hosting other applications or servers. If Magellan CCS Navigator is installed remotely, the
clients should connect to the server through VPN, which offers a layer of protection.
For a routing system that contains Platinum TDM or is of size larger than 256x256 it is
recommend that you use a system that meets or exceeds the recommend system
requirements.
Configuring a PC Monitor for Best Display

For CCS software to show clearly and appropriately on a PC monitor, set the Display
Properties for the monitor to 1152 × 864 resolution with small fonts. Go to the Start
menu and select Settings > Control Panel > Display > Display Properties and. Also,
set the color palette to display either “High” (16-bit) or “True” (24-bit) color.
For best results, set the display to 96 DPI. This setting is found in Settings > Properties >
Settings > Advanced, on the General tab.
User Manual
Required Operating System and Software

For best results, use Microsoft Windows 8.1 Professional, 64 bit.
You can install Magellan CCS Navigator on a PC running one of the following operating
systems:
 Microsoft Windows 8.1 Professional, 64 bit

 Windows Vista
 Windows Server 2003 R2 Service Pack 2 (Standard or Enterprise Editions)
 Microsoft Windows 7 Professional 32 or 64 bit
 Windows 8, Windows Server 2008, and Windows 8.1
 Windows XP Service Pack 3
The CCS Navigator software does not support Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows NT, or
Windows 2000.
Before installing Magellan CCS Navigator Software on a PC running Windows XP

Service Pack 3, contact Customer Service. If you are running Windows XP Service
Pack 2, you must update to SP3 before installing Magellan CCS Navigator.
Before you install CCS Navigator, you should install the recommended third-party software
programs or components on the PC. Most of these programs are included on the
Documentation and Product Resources DVD, but you can download the others from the
Internet.
If a PC does not have installations of the prerequisite third-party software for its operating
system, the setup program will abort.
See the following topics for more information:
 Installing Other Required Software on page 10

 Requirements for Using the Signal Monitor Tool on page 12
10 Chapter 2
Installation
Installing Other Required Software

Most of the required software is available in the Third party folder on the Documentation
and Product Resources DVD. During your Magellan CCS Navigator install, if the following
software is not found, an installer for the missing program may start. This will not disrupt
your installation of Magellan CCS Navigator, which will continue once all the other required
software is found or installed.
Table 2-2 Required Third-Party Software

Software Description File Name and Location
Adobe® Acrobat® Reader Opens and prints user manuals and product Third Party\Adobe\
4.0 minimum; 8.0 preferred brochures included with CCS software AdbeRdr812_en_US.exe
applications and Online Help.
For best results, install Acrobat 8.0 for
Windows, available for free from Adobe
Systems Inc.
If you choose to install the latest version of
Acrobat Reader from the DVD, you should
first uninstall the previous version.
Microsoft Windows Installer Ensures that you are able to install Microsoft Third party\
3.1 XML Parser. Microsoft\Installer\
instMsiW.exe
Microsoft XML parser 3.0 Helps read XML configuration files and runs Third party\
the New Page Wizard. Microsoft\XML\
msxml3usa.msi
Microsoft Internet Explorer Enables you to read the Online Help and Third
7.0 other support documents. It also provides party\Microsoft\Ie7\ie7s
access to our website. etup.exe
The Windows XP operating system works
best with IE 7.0.
Note: For best results, do not use Internet

Explorer 10.
Windows XP Service Pack 3 Provides a higher level of security and all of Microsoft does not permit the
the latest updates to Windows XP. redistribution of this Service Pack
software. However, you can
download it from the Microsoft
website. If your PC is directly
connected to the Internet, visit
http://
windowsupdate.microsoft.com/.
Otherwise, select Download and
Deploy Service Pack 3 on http://
www.microsoft.com/downloads/
details.aspx?familyid=673A1019-8E
3E-4BE0-AC31-70DD21B5AFA7&di
splaylang=en, and follow the
download instructions.
User Manual
Table 2-2 Required Third-Party Software (Continued)

Software Description File Name and Location
Windows Server 2003 Provides a higher level of security and all of Microsoft does not permit the
Service Pack 2 the latest updates to Windows Server. redistribution of this Service Pack
software. However, you can
download it from the Microsoft
website. If your PC is directly
connected to the Internet, visit
http://
windowsupdate.microsoft.com/.
Otherwise, select Download and
Deploy Service Pack 2 to
Multiple Computers on http://
www.microsoft.com/technet/
prodtechnol/winxppro/maintain/
winxpsp2.mspx, and follow the
download instructions.
Microsoft .Net 2.0 Needed to support some of the components Third Party\Microsoft\Net
within the Magellan CCS Navigator 2.0\dotnetfx.exe
application
SQL Server Express 2005 A relational database management system. Third Party\Microsoft\SQL Server
(SP3) SQLEXPR.EXE
If the PC has SQL 2005, 2008, or 2012 then
(Magellan CCS Navigator Magellan CCS Navigator’s install will
Server installations only) proceed. If none of these is found, SQL 2008
R2 is installed as part of the Magellan CCS
Navigator installation procedure.
Microsoft Messaging Queue Needed for notifications between Magellan Part of your Windows XP, Windows
CCS Navigator Server and Client. Vista, or Windows 7 install; if this
option was not installed with the
rest of the operating system, an
attended install will start. In rare
cases you may need to insert the
Windows Installation DVD in your
DVD drive to complete the install.
To use the Signal Monitor tool, you must install additional hardware and software. See
Requirements for Using the Signal Monitor Tool on page 12.
Before you upgrade or install Magellan CCS Navigator software, you may need to upgrade
other compatible equipment on your network. See Order of Installation for Software
and Firmware on page 11.
Order of Installation for Software and Firmware

If you are upgrading from a version of CCS software prior to 3.0, you must upgrade your
entire network at the same time. This version of the Magellan CCS Navigator software
requires NEO 3901RES-E, ICE6800+, LCP-3901-1U, and RCP-CCS-1U to be upgraded to
version 3.0 or later software. The recommended system upgrade order is:
1 First, upgrade all NEO 3901-RES-E and ICE6800+ modules.

2 Next, upgrade the LCP-3901-1U or RCP-CCS-1U local and remote control units.
3 Finally, install or upgrade the current installation of the Magellan CCS Navigator software.
12 Chapter 2
Installation
Requirements for Using MPEG-4 Streaming

To use Magellan CCS Navigator with QSEE6800+ (with QSEE6800+HS option) and X75
(with X75OPT-STR module), you need to install.QuickTime 7.1 release. You can download
QuickTime directly from Apple's Website at http://www.apple.com/quicktime/win.html.
Requirements for Using the Signal Monitor Tool

The CCS Magellan CCS Navigator software uses any video card compatible with Microsoft
DirectX 8.1 or later for confidence monitoring of video signals on the CCS network. The
Windows XP operating system includes DirectX 8.1, so you do not need to install this
separately.
Ensure that your computer meets the minimum hardware requirements specified for the
video card you are installing, and install it according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
Preparing the PC for Installation

Prior to installing Magellan CCS Navigator Client, you must turn off Windows Firewall
(found at Start > Control Panel > Windows Firewall. Once installation is complete, you
can reactivate Windows Firewall and Magellan CCS Navigator Client will operate correctly.
Procedure-- Windows XP

Service Pack 3, contact Customer Service.
Procedure-- Windows 2003

If your PC is running the Windows 2003 operating system with Service Pack 2, before you
install Magellan CCS Navigator, you must remove MSXML6 sp2. To remove this file, use the
Add/Remove Programs tool.
To use Add/Remove Programs to prepare your PC for Magellan CCS Navigator installation,
follow these steps:
1 From the Start menu, choose Control Panel > Add or Remove Programs.
2 From the list that appears, choose MSXML6 SP2, and then click Remove.
3 When the process is finished, close the window.
You are now ready to install Magellan CCS Navigator.
Installing the CCS Magellan CCS Navigator Software

Magellan CCS Navigator can not be installed in a compressed drive. If the installation fails,
check whether the drive is compressed or not.
To install the CCS Magellan CCS Navigator software, complete these steps:
1 Close all other applications running on the PC and insert the Documentation and Product
Resources DVD into the PC DVD drive.
Select Software Applications > CCS Navigator > Navigator x.x Setup.exe.
User Manual
2 When the unpacking process finishes, click Next.

A Welcome box appears.
3 Exit all Windows programs, read the instructions in the Welcome box, and then click
Next>.
The Software License Agreement box appears.
4 Read the license agreement, and then click Yes to accept its terms.
The Magellan CCS Navigator install will continue in Chinese or Japanese if the PC is known
(to Magellan CCS Navigator) to be operating in either of those languages. Otherwise, the
installation will continue in English. To switch the language of the Magellan CCS Navigator
display after installation, see Setting the Operational Language on page 39.
5 A readme about licenses appears. Read the license information and then click Next> to
proceed.
6 The Client/Server box appears. Click the type of install you want.
 If Setup detects a CoPilot or Pilot install, or a previous version of Magellan CCS
Navigator Client, you should install Magellan CCS Navigator Client.
Note: if you are doing a client install, disable Windows Firewall during installation. After
installation is complete, you can re-enable Windows Firewall and Magellan CCS
Navigator Client will operate correctly.
 If Setup detects a previous version of Magellan CCS Navigator Server, you should
choose to install the newer version of Magellan CCS Navigator Server.
7 Click Next.
If the chosen type of install is not possible, you will see an error message. Go back and
choose your install type again.
If you are installing Magellan CCS Navigator Client, the Setup will try to connect to the
Server. Even if it fails, you can proceed with the install (or make the necessary changes).
Note however that the Magellan CCS Navigator Client will not start without a valid
Magellan CCS Navigator Server.
8 (Client installs only) If you choose a Client install, the Choose a Server box appears.
Choose the location of the Magellan CCS Navigator Server (either the IP address or
computer name).
Enter the SQL instance. By default, this is SQLEXPRESS.
Click Next.
9 Now the Select Components box appears. Select the check box of each component you
want to install.
14 Chapter 2
Installation
Table 2-3 Options in Select Components Box

Box Function Response
Program Files Enables installation of the CCS Leave the option
program files enabled.
Documentation Enables installation of the Leave the option
electronic version of user enabled unless the PC is
manuals for CCS Magellan almost out of hard drive
CCS Navigator and all space.
supported devices
The Mandatory Components box appears, listing third-party software that you must
install on the PC before you can install the CCS Navigator software.
10 Click OK.
The setup program will now search the PC for both the required and recommended
software, including SQL Server, MSMQ (Microsoft Messaging Queue), and Microsoft .Net
v2.0, and determine what version of the software is on the PC.
This search has three possible outcomes:
a Minimum Versions of the Required Software Not Installed—If the setup program
discovers that minimum versions of the required software programs are missing, it will
list the missing software and then start an installer to load each missing program.
b Recommended Versions of Required Software Not Installed—If the setup
program discovers that the recommended versions of one or more pieces of software
are missing, a warning box lists the newer version or versions and recommends that you
quit the setup program to install the newer version. However, the setup will continue if
you choose not to quit.
 To continue the setup, click Yes.
 To quit the setup, click No. Then, when the Exit Setup box appears, click Exit
Setup. Install the required or recommended software, and then restart the setup
program.
See Required Operating System and Software on page 9 and Installing Other
Required Software on page 10.
c Appropriate Installations of all Required and Recommended Software Found—
The setup program discovers that appropriate versions of all required and
recommended software programs are installed.
11 The setup program then searches the PC for previous CCS software installations. The two
possible outcomes to this search are as follows:
 No Previous CCS Control Software Installations —
A Choose Destination Location box appears. See If Setup Detects No Previous
Installations on page 15.
 Previous CCS Control Software Installations Exist —
A Previous Installation Detected box appears. See If Setup Detects a Previous
Installation on page 15.
User Manual
If Setup Detects No Previous Installations

This section continues the procedure for installing Magellan CCS Navigator software
for a PC that has all the required third-party software installed but no previous installations
of CCS control software.
When the Choose Destination Location box appears, complete these steps:
1 Either leave the default destination location as is or use the Browse dialog box to select
another destination for the installation, and then click Next>.
When the Select Program Folder box appears, a default program folder title appears in
the Program Folders box.
The default program folder is Harris Magellan CCS Navigator [VersionNo.].

(VersionNo. refers to the software version number.)
2 Click Next> to accept the default folder.

The Start Copying Files box appears, listing the destination folder for the installation.
3 Click Next.
The setup program will copy and register the components, and then the Setup Complete
box appears.
4 Click Finish.
Your installation is done. Magellan CCS Navigator is ready to use.
If Setup Detects a Previous Installation

An Administrator user must install, reinstall, or upgrade CCS software. The default
Administrator password for upgrades from Pilot 1.0 is Leitch. Pilot 1.1 and higher, all
CoPilot versions, and Navigator 1.0 have no default passwords—therefore, the Password
box remains blank or empty. All passwords are case-sensitive, so type UPPER and lower case
carefully.
This section continues the procedure for installing Magellan CCS Navigator on a PC that has
all the required third-party software installed and a current or previous version of a CCS
control software application.
When the Previous Installation Detected box appears, complete these steps:
1 Click Yes on the Previous Installation Detected box.

A query box asks if you want to continue installation.
2 Click Yes.
An Administrator Logon box appears.
3 Type in the appropriate password. (Passwords are case-sensitive.)

4 Click Log On.
The Database Upgrade box appears, showing three options:
 Upgrade existing databases

 Upgrade existing databases and alarm logs
 Start over with new databases (Overwrites the existing databases)
16 Chapter 2
Installation
5 Select an option, and then click Next>.

The SNMP Trap Conversion Rules Upgrade dialog box appears, showing two options:
 Replace overwrites the previous installed SNMPRuleBase.xml with a new version with
new "Traps to Alarms" conversion rules for new SNMP devices.
 Keep does not replace the SNMPRuleBase.xml database and retains local "Traps to
Alarms" conversion rules for your own SNMP devices that were created using the
SNMP Trap Configuration tool.
6 Select an option, and then click Next>.
The Previous Installation Folder Detected box appears.
7 Click Yes to accept this folder as the destination for the new setup.
The Start Copying Files box appears.
8 Click Next> to continue.

An information box advises that the setup application will save the existing users directory
to a specified backup directory.
Regardless of the option selected earlier in the Database Upgrade box, the setup
application will create a backup folder containing the old user database files.
9 Click OK to close the information box.

If you are upgrading the user database files, the setup application logs the conversion
activity and shows the log on the screen in the Database Upgrade box.
10 Read the log to check whether all files successfully converted, and then click OK to close
the log.
When the setup program finishes, click Finish.
If you are upgrading your Magellan CCS Navigator installation from a previous version, and
you have a configured CCS Router, and you have some pages with rules or objects referring
to the router, you may need to modify the router configuration. For more information,
please refer to Volume 6: Routing Configuration.
Your installation is done. Magellan CCS Navigator is ready to use.
After upgrading from a previous version of Magellan CCS Navigator, the positions of
docked windows may change. You will need to drag and drop the Navigation panel (on the
right) to the left side of your screen in Magellan CCS Navigator.
Removing the CCS Magellan CCS Navigator Software

Only an Administrator user can properly and entirely remove the Magellan CCS
Navigator software.
For best results, remove the Magellan CCS Navigator software by using the automatic Add/
Remove Programs application or the Uninstall program.
Only if both the automatic removal methods fail to delete all Magellan CCS Navigator
software components should you use the manual method for removing the software.
User Manual
 Using the Add or Remove Programs Application on page 17

 Using the Uninstall Program on page 17
 Manually Removing the CCS Magellan CCS Navigator Software on page 18
Using the Add or Remove Programs Application

If you remove a Magellan CCS Navigator Server that has connected Clients, those
Clients will stop working.
To remove the CCS Navigator software with the Windows Add/Remove Programs
application, an Administrator user must complete these steps:
1 Click Start, point to Settings, and click Control Panel.

This will show the Control Panel application icons, including the Add/Remove Programs
icon.
2 Double-click the Add/Remove Programs icon.

The Install/Remove tab of the Add/Remove Programs Properties box will appear.
3 Scroll down the list of installed programs, and select this program:
Magellan CCS Magellan CCS Navigator [VersionNo.]
VersionNo. represents a version number of the software targeted for removal.
4 Click Add/Remove.
A Confirm File Deletion box appears.
5 Click Yes.
6 (Magellan CCS Navigator Server only) Another warning appears letting you know that
removing the software will cause all connected Magellan CCS Navigator Clients to stop
operating.
7 Click Yes.
(Magellan CCS Navigator Servers only) Another warning may appear, informing you that
Router Service is operating.
8 Click Yes to disable the Routing Service.

9 Click Yes to continue the removal process.
10 When the program has finished removing the application from the computer, click OK on
each of the two open boxes to close them.
Using the Uninstall Program

To remove the CCS Navigator software using the Uninstall program, an Administrator user
must complete these steps:
1 Click Start, point to Programs (or All Programs for Windows XP), select Magellan CCS
Magellan CCS Navigator [VersionNo.], and then click Uninstall.
VersionNo. represents the CCS Navigator software version number.
18 Chapter 2
Installation
2 When a Confirm File Deletion box appears, click Yes.

3 When asked if you want to continue, click Yes.
4 When the program finishes removing the application, click OK to close the Remove
Programs from Your Computer box.
5 Click OK to close the Add/Remove Programs box.
Manually Removing the CCS Magellan CCS Navigator Software

If you remove a Magellan CCS Navigator Server that has connected Magellan CCS
Navigator Clients, those Clients will stop working.
Use this method for removing the CCS Navigator software only if both the automatic
methods for removing the software fail to remove all its components.
To manually remove the Magellan CCS Navigator software, complete these general steps:
1 Delete the Magellan CCS Navigator folder and its contents. See Deleting the Magellan
CCS Navigator Folder on page 18.
2 Remove the Magellan CCS Navigator software components from the Windows Registry. See
Removing Components from the Windows Registry on page 19.
Deleting the Magellan CCS Navigator Folder

To manually remove the Magellan CCS Navigator folder from the PC, an Administrator
user must complete these steps:
1 Double click on My Computer on your PC desktop.

2 On the system drive where your Magellan CCS Navigator Server software is installed,
browse to the location where the database files are stored.
The typical path is: c:\Program files\Harris\Magellan CCS Navigator. If
you have upgraded to CCS Navigator from an existing CoPilot or Pilot installation, first
locate the Pilot folder at c:\Program files\Leitch\Pilot, then right-click the
Pilot folder and select Delete from the shortcut menu.
3 Right-click the Magellan CCS Navigator folder icon and then select Delete
from the resulting shortcut menu.
4 When an alert box asks you to confirm deletion of the folder and its contents, click OK.
Deleting the Databases (Magellan CCS Navigator Server Only)

To manually remove the Magellan CCS Navigator databases from the PC, an Administrator
user must complete these steps:
1 Double click on My Computer on your PC desktop.

2 On the system drive where your Magellan CCS Navigator Server software is installed,
The typical path is: C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application
Data\Harris\CCS
3 Right-click the CCS folder icon and then select Delete from the resulting shortcut menu.
User Manual
Removing Components from the Windows Registry

To remove the CCS Navigator software components from the Windows Registry, complete
these steps:
1 Click Start and point to Run... to show the Run box.

2 Type regedit in the Run box, and then click OK to start the Registry Editor.
3 Locate the Navigator folder icon in these parts of the registry:
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Leitch\Magellan CCS Navigator
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Harris\Magellan CCS Navigator
4 Right-click the Navigator folder icon, and then select Delete from the resulting shortcut
menu.
5 A box will ask you to confirm deletion.
Click Yes.
6 Locate the Magellan CCS Magellan CCS Navigator [VersionNo.] folder icon in this part
of the registry:
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Windows\
CurrentVersion\Uninstall\Magellan CCS Magellan CCS
Navigator [Version No.]
VersionNo. represents the software version number.
7 Right-click the Magellan CCS Magellan CCS Navigator [VersionNo.] folder icon, and
then select Delete from the resulting shortcut menu.
8 When an alert box asks you to confirm the deletion, click Yes.
9 Click Close in the top right corner of the Registry Editor dialog box.
Managing Magellan CCS Navigator Licenses

When you install Magellan CCS Navigator, it will automatically start with a 30-day free
license with all keys enabled. When this license expires, unless you purchase a license, your
Magellan CCS Navigator installation will revert to Build mode only. No Control mode
functionality will be available.
If your license is temporary, you will see a notification on the bottom of the splash screen
during logon. This notification will indicate the number of days remaining before your
license expires. To acquire a license key, see Changing a License Key on page 20.
License keys are described in these sections:
 NAVIGATOR-DEV License on page 2

 NAVIGATOR-SRV License on page 3
 NAVIGATOR-INT License on page 5
 NAVIGATOR-CLI License on page 5
 NAVIGATOR-RTR License on page 5
 ICONM-SCP License on page 6
 NAVIGATOR-NX License on page 6
20 Chapter 2
Installation
Viewing Your To view your license information in Build or Control mode, choose Help > License from
License Key the main menu.
Items for which there is a key display Enabled in the Status field. Items for which no key is
available display Disabled. If your PC has a temporary license, the duration of that license is
displayed.
The number of days remaining in a temporary license are displayed on the splash screen
during Magellan CCS Navigator startup.
Changing a License Key

To alter the license key on your PC, you must be logged on to Windows as an administrator.
To add a new license, follow these steps:
1 In Build mode, choose Help > License from the main menu.
A dialog box appears:
Click here to open a

PDF license request
form.
Figure 2-1 License Dialog

2 Provide the serial number from the License Dialog dialog box to your sales representative.
There are two ways to provide the serial number and receive your license key:
 By phone. Contact your sales representative.

 By faxing or mailing a form to Imagine Communications. This form is available by
clicking License Form. The form includes information on where it should be sent.
Acrobat Reader is required.
3 Enter the provided key in the License Key field, and then click Apply.
4 Shut down and restart Magellan CCS Navigator.
The Magellan CCS Navigator license should be recognized. A restart of the PC is not
required.
User Manual
Backup and Restore Utility

You may sometimes need to return Magellan CCS Navigator to a previous configuration.
For this, Magellan CCS Navigator has a utility to create backups and install them. A backup
includes configured data in your Magellan CCS Navigator system.
Magellan CCS Navigator must be closed in order to use the Backup and Restore utility.
To launch the Backup and Restore utility, choose Start > Programs > Magellan CCS
Navigator x.x Server > Navigator Backup Restore Utility.
This window opens:
Browse
Figure 2-2 Navigator Backup Restore Utility Main Dialog Box

To create a backup:
1 (Optional) Enter Source information for the Magellan CCS Navigator server on your
network that you want to back up.
2 (Optional) Click Browse to choose a location to save your backup files.
3 Click Backup (backs up data locally) or Backup and Restore to Destination Server
(transfers data to an alternate server).
The Backup in Progress dialog box opens. The Log Details field documents the files that
are backed up.
When the backup is complete, message appears.
4 (Optional) Enter a name for the backup in the Backup Label field.
This field is not available until the backup has been successfully created.
If you do not enter a name for the backup, the default name includes the day and time.
5 Click Exit to close the Backup in Progress dialog box.

22 Chapter 2
Installation
To view the contents of a backup, first select an item in the Recent Backups list, and then
click View Log.
The Viewing Log File dialog box contains the same information as the Backup in Progress
dialog box. You can rename the backup here by entering a new name in the Backup Label
field.
Figure 2-3 Viewing Log File Dialog Box

To restore a backup:
1 Enter Destination information for the Magellan CCS Navigator server on your network
that you want to restore files to.
1 Do one of the following:
 Select an item in the Recent Backups list.
 Click Restore External Backup to open a dialog box where you can choose a
backup to restore, possibly from a memory card or another PC.
2 Click Restore Selected Backup.
When the process is complete, a Progress is Complete message appears.
3 Click OK, and then click Exit to close the Restore in Progress dialog box.
23
3 Logging In and Account

Administration
User Account Overview

All users are assigned to user groups, which can have varying levels of access to specific
devices on the CCS network.
Administrator users have access to all devices and all user accounts. However, access is
limited based on whether you are at a Magellan CCS Navigator Server (NAVIGATOR-SRV
license) or a Magellan CCS Navigator Client (NAVIGATOR-CLI) workstation. An
Administrator user on a Magellan CCS Navigator Client will be able to see User tabs in the
Navigation pane for all users, but will still not be able to use Build mode on the Magellan
CCS Navigator Client.
Administrators set up user accounts and user groups, which define the level of access the
other users have to devices on the network. Each user account is assigned to a user group
and inherits default access level assignments. Access privileges can, however, be altered on a
per-user account basis. All users can view their own user account information and change
their password.
Access privileges are divided into three groups: Presets, Devices, and Pages. These are
described in Assigning Access Rights on page 28.
Logging On For the first login after an installation or reinstallation of CCS Navigator, the User Name
box shows the name Administrator. At subsequent logins, the User Name box shows
the name of the person who last logged on.
If the previous user had Auto Login privileges, then the Logon box does not appear as
Magellan CCS Navigator starts. You can select File > Logout to log in as a different user.
 Logging Off or Exiting on page 25

 Adding a User Account on page 32
By default, a new CCS Navigator installation has no password. However, if you are
upgrading from CCS Navigator 1.0, the default password is Leitch.
To start CCS Navigator, complete these steps:
1 Find the CCS Navigator application icon in Windows Explorer and double-click the icon.
24 Chapter 3
Logging In and Account Administration
Or click Start, point to Programs > Magellan CCS Navigator [VersionNo.], and then
click Navigator [VersionNo.]. VersionNo. represents the CCS Navigator software
version number.
2 When the Logon box appears, perform one of these actions:

 If you are logging on as a user, enter your assigned user name. (You do not need to
re-enter your user name if it already appears.)
 If you are logging on as an Administrator user, type
Administrator
Or your user name.
 If you are logging on as a Support user, type
Support
3 Tab to the Password box, and then type in the password. (Passwords are case-sensitive.)
4 (Optional, available on NAVIGATOR-CLI-licensed PCs only) Click the Options button.
The Magellan CCS Navigator Server and Client must be using the same software revision in
order to for Client logon to be successful. Magellan CCS Navigator Client will not start
without a valid Server.
The Login dialog box expands to show a Server menu.
Figure 3-1 Client Login Dialog Box
When using Windows Vista or Windows 7, only a user with Administrative privileges can
change the designated Server.
5 From the Server menu, select the PC to which your Magellan CCS Navigator Client
connects to store and retrieve shared data, such as Navigator pages, panels, discoveries, etc.
6 (Optional) To modify the list of servers, select (Server Management).
The Server Management dialog box opens.
User Manual
Figure 3-2 Server Managemend Dialog Box
On this screen, you have the following options:

 Add—Opens a dialog box where you can add a new server.
 Modify—Opens a dialog box where you can modify the selected server
(highlighted in blue on the Server Management dialog box).
 Delete—Removes the highlighted server from the list. You are asked to confirm
the deletion.
Click Close to return to the Login screen.
7 (Windows Vista or Windows 7 only) A Permissions dialog appears. Click Allow to
complete the change. Only a user with Windows Administrator privileges can make this
change.
8 Click Log On.
Logging Off or Exiting

Logging off the application enables you to log on as a different user without closing the
application, while exiting closes the application.
To log off, select Log Off from the File menu.
To exit, choose one of the following methods:
 Click Close at the right end of the Title Bar.

 Select Exit from the File menu.
 Click Exit on the Log On box.
Managing User Groups

Only administrators can create or modify user groups. They can add, remove, and modify
the device, preset, and page access rights assigned to user groups.
26 Chapter 3
A member of the Administrator user group can selectively enable another user or user
group's access to individual devices and to individual parameters on a device, to Graphical
Navigation pages, and to Presets. By default, all device, page, and preset access is disabled
for all users and user groups other than the Administrator user group.
After creating user groups and selecting the access rights for each user group, the
administrators create individual users and assign each user to a user group. Each user starts
with the access rights of the users group they are assigned to. An administrator can then
adjust the access rights for each individual user. If the user group’s access rights are altered
after a user account is created, the user account will not inherit the changes from the user
group.
Only members of the Administrator user group can modify group permissions. However,
all users can view information about their own user account and user group.
Examples of user groups include the following.
 Administrators—a group of users who can assign and change permissions for other
users on the system
 Demo—a group of users who demonstrate the software
 Engineers—a group of users who design and implement the CCS network, have
responsibility for maintaining it, and troubleshoot problems
 Operators—a group of users who operate and monitor specific devices on the CCS
network
See the following topics for help with user groups:
 Adding a User Group on page 26

 Removing a User Group on page 31
 Modifying Group Properties on page 31
Adding a User Group

Only Administrator users can create user groups.
To add a user group, complete these steps:
1 From the main menu, choose Options > User Groups, or if the Login Options dialog
box is already open, click the User Groups tab.
The Login Options dialog box appears.
User Manual
Figure 3-3 Login Options Dialog Box’s User Groups Tab
2 Click Add Group.

The Add Group box appears.
Figure 3-4 Add Group Box
3 Type a group name in the Group Name box, or click the down arrow and select a Windows
user group name from the list.
The Group ID field is automatically populated with a unique ID number. You can
change the number. If the number you enter has been used by another group, when
you try to save the group, you will see an error message and will not be able to close
the dialog box until you either cancel or change the Group ID to an unused number.
You can also type a brief description of the group in the Description field.
28 Chapter 3
4 Under the Access rights section of the screen, select the access privileges members of this
group will have. See Assigning Access Rights on page 28 for more information.
5 Click OK to close the Add Group box.
6 Add additional user groups by repeating steps 2-6, or click OK to close the Login Options
box.
After you create a group, you can add users to it. See Adding a User Account on page 32
for more information.
Assigning User accounts inherit access rights from the user group to which they are assigned. See
Access Managing User Groups on page 25 and Managing User Accounts on page 32 for more
Rights information.
Access rights are assigned in three areas:
 Assigning Device Access Rights on page 28

 Assigning Preset Access Rights on page 29
 Assigning Page Access Rights on page 30
Assigning Device Access Rights

If you are an Administrator user, all the discovered and created devices appear on the
Devices tab of the User Account and User Group tab of the Login Options
dialog box. If you are a General user, you will only see the devices to which you have access
rights.
Device access privileges are defined per device, and all discovered or created devices appear
in the list.
The devices list on the Access Rights dialog box includes routers, salvos, frames, and
modules as discrete items.
Figure 3-5 Assigning Device Access Privileges

When Monitor is checked, Control and Configuration become available, if a device
has Control and Configuration options. Some devices may not have all three options. For
example, you cannot place a check beside Control for a NUCLEUS control panel, because it
doesn’t have control options.
User Manual
 Monitoring - Users with this access level can view device settings and receive alarms,
but not alter settings on the device. Users must be assigned Monitoring access in order
to have either Control or Configuration access. Device monitoring is described in
Network Event Diagnostics on page 237.
 Configuration - Users with this access level can alter the IP address and upload
firmware for the device. Device configuration id described in CCS Device
Configuration on page 127.
 Control - Users with this access level can alter control and alarm settings on the
device, as described in CCS Device Control on page 255
When you click Control for a particular device, if that device has parametric control,
the Parameters button becomes available.
If you click Parameters, the Parameter Access Rights dialog box appears:
Figure 3-6 Assigning Parameter Access Privileges for a User Group
By default, access to all parameters is enabled when Control for a device is enabled.
Check the Enabled box to enable any advanced access rights, or clear the Enabled
box to disable any advanced access rights.
You can also click Enable All or Disable All to make universal changes to this list.
If an access right is disabled for a control parameter, the user or user group can view
the value of the parameter but not change it.
If you select the row and press the spacebar on your keyboard, all three columns are
selected. See Can I Select Multiple Check Boxes at Once? on page 326 for ways to make
selecting and unselecting items in a table.
If a user does not have access (control, monitoring or configuration) for a frame, they will
not have access to the devices in that frame either.
Assigning Preset Access Rights

Presets are stored on the Magellan CCS Navigator Server. All users can create presets for the
devices to which they have access.
30 Chapter 3
Figure 3-7 Presets Tab of the User Group or User Account Dialog Box
By default, all presets are disabled for non-Administrator users. To change the status of a
preset, click in the Access Right Level column of the preset to be adjusted. The level
for that item becomes a drop-down menu. Click again to review the options.
 Read/Write - This user or user group will be able to load (apply) the preset and
modify (save) it.
 Read Only - This user or user group can load (apply) this preset, but cannot modify
(save) it.
 Disabled - The preset will not show under the Preset folder for this user or user
group.
See Using Presets on page 270 for more information.
Assigning Page Access Rights

If you have a NAVIGATOR-SRV or NAVIGATOR-SNMP license, users of
NAVIGATOR-CLI-licensed workstations can be assigned privileges to access pages. If a user
does not have access privileges to a page, that page will not appear within their interface at
all.
Figure 3-8 Pages Tab of the User Group or User Account

Dialog Box
By default, all pages are disabled for non-Administrator users. To change the status of a
page, place a check in the Access Right Level field.
User Manual
If a user does not have access to a page that is connected to another page that they do
have access to, they will receive an informative message.
Page access rights can also be assigned when an Administrator user on a Magellan CCS
Navigator Server creates a page. See Saving Graphical Navigation Pages on page 10 of CCS
RouterNAV: Router Specific Plug-in for more information.
Removing a Only an Administrator user can remove user accounts and user groups. Before removing a
User Group user group, you must first remove all user accounts associated with that group.
To remove a user account or user group, complete these steps:
1 (User accounts only) Remove all members listed in the group to be removed. (For
information on how to do this, see Changing User Account Information on page 34.)
2 Point to Options on the menu bar, and then click User Groups.
This shows the User Groups tab of the Login Options box.
3 Select the name of the group you want to remove, and then click Remove Group.
You cannot remove the Administrators user group, because it is required for operation of
the software. If you select the Administrators user group, the Remove button is
unavailable.
If you have not first deleted all members of the group, an alert box will advise you that
you must delete all group members before you can delete the group.
If you have already deleted all members of the group, an alert box asks you to confirm
removal of the group.
4 Click Yes to confirm removal of the group, or click No to cancel the action.
5 Click OK to close the User Groups box.
Modifying Group properties include the group name, description, and access rights to specific devices,
Group presets, and pages. Administrators can view and modify group properties. General users
Properties can view only their group properties and have no editing rights for those properties.
To change the properties of a user group, complete these steps:
1 From the main menu, choose Options > User Groups, or if the Login Options dialog
box is already open, click the User Groups tab.
The User Groups tab of the Login Options box will appear.
2 Select the group whose properties you want to modify, and then click Modify Group.
In the User Group dialog box that appears, you can change the Group ID,
Description, and access rights for presets, pages, and devices. You cannot change
the Group Name.
See Assigning Access Rights on page 28 for more information.
3 Click OK to save your changes and close each open box.
32 Chapter 3
Managing User Accounts

The Administrators are responsible for creating a user account and temporary password for
each person. However, users can change their passwords later.
Administrators also assign access permissions for pages, devices, and presets. Initially,
permissions are based on those assigned for the user group that a user is assigned to, but
they can be modified on an individual basis. See Managing User Groups on page 25 for
more information.
Any user can view their own user account information and change their own password.
Only Administrators can perform other tasks related to user accounts.
See these topics for further information on user accounts:
 Adding a User Account on page 32

 Changing User Account Information on page 34
 Changing User Account Information on page 34
 Changing a Password on page 34
Adding a To add, remove or modify a user account, an Administrator user must make changes
User Account in the User Accounts tab of the Login Options box.
To add a user account, an Administrator user must complete these steps:
1 Point to Options on the menu bar, and then click User Accounts to show the User
Accounts tab.
When Auto Login is

checked, users will
not be asked for a
user name or
password when
logging in. They will
be logged in
automatically as
members of the
Administrators group.
Figure 3-9 Login Options User Accounts Tab
2 Click Add User to show the User Account box.

User Manual
User IDs are

assigned
sequentially.
You can change
the user ID
number, but if
you select a
number that is
currently in use,
an alert box will
advise you to
select another
number.
Figure 3-10 User Account Dialog Box
3 Type the new user's name in the User Name box, or click the down arrow and select
a Windows user name from the drop-down list.
4 Select a user group for the new user from the Group list.
5 Type the user password twice, once in the New box and again in the Confirm box.
Passwords are case-sensitive, so type UPPER and lower case characters carefully.
6 Click OK to close the User Accounts dialog box, and then OK on the Login Options
dialog box to save your changes.
Removing a User Account

Only an administrator user can remove other user accounts.
To remove a user account, complete these steps:
1 Point to Options on the menu bar, and then click User Accounts.
This shows the User Accounts tab of the Login Options box.
2 Select the user name you want to remove, and then click Remove User to show the
Remove User Account box.
34 Chapter 3
Figure 3-11 Remove User Account Dialog Box
The Remove User button will activate when you select the name of a user account
that can be removed. You cannot remove an Administrator user.
3 Click Yes to confirm the account removal in the Remove User Account box.
Select the Make a Backup Directory on Removal box to create a backup of the
account information, or clear the box if you do not want a backup of the information.
4 Click OK to close the Login Options box.
Changing User Account Information

Administrators can change the user ID, group assignment, access privileges, and password
of any user account other than their own. To change user account information, an
Administrator user must complete these steps:
1 From the main menu, choose Options > User Accounts.

2 Select the name of the user whose information you want to change.
3 Click Modify User to open the User Account box for the selected user.
You can change all the information on the screen except the user name.
Viewing User Account Information

General users cannot change their own access privileges for devices, pages, or presets.
However, they can view the list of devices, pages, and presets they have been assigned
access to. If you are a general user and need to see this information, follow these steps:
1 Click User Accounts on the Options menu.

2 Click Modify User on the User Accounts tab.
In the Access Rights section of the screen, click on the Devices, Presets and Pages
tabs to see the items that are listed.
Changing a Password
Administrators can change other account and group information. General users can only
change their password.
An Administrator user will initially assign passwords, but general users can change the
assigned password. If a general user forgets their password, an Administrator user can
assign a new password. See Changing User Account Information on page 34.
User Manual
To change a password, complete these steps:
1 Click User Accounts on the Options menu.

2 Click Modify User on the User Accounts tab.
3 In the Password section of the User Account box, type the new password into the New
box.
4 Type the password again, exactly as before, into the Confirm box.
Passwords are case-sensitive, so use the same combination of upper and lower case
characters each time you type your password.
5 Click OK to close the User Account box and then click OK to close the Login Options
box.
Administering User Logs

If you are an Administrator user, you can document usage of the software application for
troubleshooting and security purposes. You can log information about user names,
passwords, log ons, log outs, and failed log on attempts in a logon database.
See these topics for further information on specific tasks:
 Creating a User Log on page 35

 Viewing the User Log on page 36
Creating a An Administrator user can configure the software to save user logon activity to a file. To
User Log create a User Log file, complete these steps:
1 Click Log On... on the Options menu.

This shows the Log On tab of the Login Options box.
Figure 3-12 Login Options Dialog Box’s Log On Tab

36 Chapter 3
2 Select the check boxes of the Event Logging Options you want to appear in your log;
clear the check boxes of any options you do not want to appear in your log. The options are
to log user logons, log user logouts, and log failed user logons.
3 Set the maximum size of your log file by typing in the desired number of megabytes.
When the log file reaches its maximum size, the application will rename the file and
begin a new log file with the current date stamp.
4 Click Clear Log to clear the current contents of the log file, if any.
5 Click OK to save your changes to the log file set up and close the Login Options box.
Viewing the General users cannot view the user log, but Administrators can view the log if they have
User Log enabled the log feature.
To view the user activity log, complete these steps:
1 Point to Options on the menu bar, and then click Log On.
2 When the Login Options box appears, select the Log tab.
The Previous and Next

buttons are only available
if the largest number of
events is more than the
Maximum number.
Hover the cursor over a

column divider to turn it
into a double-headed
arrow. In this state, you
can drag the divider to
make columns wider or
narrower.
Figure 3-13 Login Options Dialog Box’s Log Tab
Events are logged in the Log On Events section of the Log tab.
3 Click Load Events to refresh the list of log on events.
4 Select All logged events to show all the logged events at once, or enter a maximum
number of events to show at once in the Maximum number box.
37
4 Interface Overview
Main The CCS Magellan CCS Navigator interface enables you to discover, configure, upgrade,
monitor, and control CCS-enabled devices from a central PC, even if the devices are
Interface in different locations around the world.
Figure 4-1 CCS Magellan CCS Navigator
Setting the Operational Mode

There are two operational modes, each representing a different way of using the software
applications and their built-in tools. The operational modes are as follows:
 Build mode has tools to build graphical representations of the devices on the CCS
network and configure those devices.
 Control mode has tools for controlling and diagnosing problems with devices on the
CCS network.
On a PC running a NAVIGATOR-CLI license, only Control mode is available. PCs running
other Magellan CCS Navigator licenses can switch between Build and Control modes.
38 Chapter 4
Interface Overview
If you have activated the status bar, the name of the active operational mode shows in a cell
at the right end of the status bar.
Figure 4-2 Status bar Displaying Build Mode

The operational mode cell shows a colored background that changes with the operational
mode: yellow for Build mode, and green for Control mode.
Table 4-1 Tools Available in Each Operational Mode

Tool Build Control
Navigation Yes Yes
Diagnostics No Yes
Control No Yes
Graphical Navigation Yes Yes
Signal Monitor Yes Yes
Discovery Yes No
Parameters (with NAVIGATOR-INT license only) Yes No
Configuration Yes View only
Software Upgrade Yes No
Rules and Macros Yes Yes
Custom Properties No Yes
Standalone Yes Yes
SNMP Yes Yes
The tools you have available will depend on the licensing options purchased. See
Managing Magellan CCS Navigator Licenses on page 19 for more information.
CCS Magellan CCS Navigator provides two ways of setting the operational mode:
 To change operational mode from the Status Bar, right-click the Operational Mode
cell at the right end of the Status Bar, and select the name of the mode you want from
the resulting shortcut menu.
The active mode has a highlighted colored square to the left of its name.
Figure 4-3 Shortcut Menu for the Operational Mode Status Cell
 To change operational mode from the File menu, point to File > Operational Mode,
and then click the name of the operational mode you want.
A colored rectangle appears to the left of each of the operational modes. The Control
rectangle is green, and the Build rectangle is yellow. The rectangle of the current
operational mode is selected to indicate that it is active.
User Manual
If your license key expires, Magellan CCS Navigator will start in Build mode. You will be
unable to switch to Control mode. You cannot log into Magellan CCS Navigator if a
NAVIGATOR-CLI license has expired. For information on purchasing licensing keys, see
Managing Magellan CCS Navigator Licenses on page 19.
Setting the Operational Language

During Magellan CCS Navigator installation, the Setup language is configured to either
English, Japanese, or Chinese. When Magellan CCS Navigator is subsequently started, it
uses the Setup language as its operational language.
Figure 4-4. Magellan CCS Navigator Interface With Chinese Selected as Display Language
Static areas of Magellan CCS Navigator appear in the operational language when it is
different from English. The following areas of the interface appear in the Operational
language:
 Menus, tabs, column headers, dialog boxes, Wizards, and status bars
 Main folders of the Navigation pane, except the contents of the Catalog folder and
its sub-folders
 User messages, including alerts, warnings, informational notices, and questions
Magellan CCS Navigator displays data that is received from a device or module in English,
regardless of the selected operational language. Information that will always appear in
English includes the following:
40 Chapter 4
Interface Overview
 Magellan CCS Navigator user manuals and on-line help, and product sheets and user
manuals in the Catalog folder
 Some portions of some Configuration dialog boxes, including the Version tab and
special Configuration interfaces for NUCLEUS, NEO LCP/RCP, and NEO Frames (field
names in Japanese or Chinese only)
 Device-specific information such as parameters and alarms on Control dialog boxes
and in Access Rights interfaces, and alarm information
Entering data to a router database while in Japanese or Chinese language mode could
cause data corruption. Before entering router data, switch your keyboard settings to
English.
While text can be entered in Magellan CCS Navigator in any language, some areas of the
interface will only support data entry in English, even when an alternate operational
language is selected. When you enter text in some fields that can only accept data entry in
English, Magellan CCS Navigator automatically changes the keyboard layout from the
selected operational language back to English. Fields where this will happen include:
 X75 machine name

 QSEE6800+ channel name
 Alias (name) for any parameter in Favorites
 NUCLEUS name, category name, and Configuration submenu
 NEO SuiteView command string
If you change the keyboard to a different operational language to force alternate data entry
in one of these fields, data corruption could occur.
When Magellan CCS Navigator is the recipient of forwarded alarms or traps containing
Unicode text description, you need to configure Windows Regional and Languages
Options (in the Control Panel settings) for the alarm listening PC, in order to display
Unicode text properly. Select the corresponding language in the Language for
non-Unicode programs setting.
Magellan CCS Navigator Trap Agent does not support Japanese or Chinese.
Installing Files for East Asian Languages

If you will be switching the operational language to Japanese or Chinese, files for East Asian
languages must be installed. These are not part of the standard Windows install. To add
files for East Asian languages, follow these steps:
1 Open the Windows Control Panel.

In Windows XP in Classic mode, you can open the Control Panel from the task bar by
choosing Start > Settings > Control Panel.
2 Click Regional and Language Options, and then click the Languages tab.
3 Click Install Files for East Asian languages.
You may be prompted to insert a Windows CD/DVD, or to browse for the location of
files.
4 Follow the instructions that appear on the screen.
You may have to reboot the computer for changes to take effect.
User Manual
Changing the Operational Language

To change Magellan CCS Navigator’s operational language, do one of the following:
 Select Tools > English to set the operational language to English, and then reboot
Magellan CCS Navigator for the change to take effect.
 Select Tools > (Simplified Chinese) to set the operational

language to Chinese, and then reboot Magellan CCS Navigator for the change to take
effect.
 Select Tools > to set the operational language to Japanese, and then reboot
Magellan CCS Navigator for the change to take effect.
Tools The tools you have available will depend on the licensing options purchased. See
Magellan CCS Navigator has a number of built-in tools, but you can configure the
application to use standalone (non-Magellan CCS Navigator) tools as well.
For more information on various types of tools, see the following:
 Toolbars on page 41
 Built-In Tools on page 43
 Navigation Pane on page 44
 Status Bar on page 49
 Plug-ins on page 49
Toolbars Magellan CCS Navigator’s Standard toolbar has many familiar Windows-style tools.
Table 4-2 Tools on the Standard Toolbar

Alternate Keyboard
Tool Icon Function
Menu Item Shortcut
New In Build mode, opens the New Page Wizard; File > New
not available in Control mode (Not available with
NAVIGATOR-CLI license)
Open Opens a Browse dialog. Select a graphical File > Open
navigation page and then click Open (Not
available with NAVIGATOR-CLI license)
Delete Opens a Delete dialog box, where you can select File > Delete
Navigator pages for deletion
Save Saves the content in the currently active dialog File > Save
box
Save All Saves all unsaved content on all open dialog boxes File > Save All
42 Chapter 4
Interface Overview
Table 4-2 Tools on the Standard Toolbar (Continued)

Alternate Keyboard
Tool Icon Function
Menu Item Shortcut
Print Prints the current Magellan CCS Navigator page or File > Print
file; only available when a Graphical Navigation page
or panel is open
Print Preview Shows what the current Magellan CCS Navigator File > Print
page will look like when printed; only available Preview
when a Graphical Navigation page or panel is open
Refresh Updates the status of the selected Amino or SNMP
device
Reloads the data from a Magellan CCS Navigator View > Reload
Reload
Server
Undo Undoes the last action in the active Navigation, Edit > Undo CTRL + Z
Graphical Navigation, dialog box (you can
enable up to 10 levels of Undo actions)
Redo Redoes the last action in the active Navigation, Edit > Redo CTRL + Y
Graphical Navigation, dialog box
You can enable up to 10 levels of Redo actions

Cut Cuts a selected object or objects from the current Edit > Cut CTRL + X
location to the Clipboard for use in a subsequent
Paste operation
Copy Copies the selected object or objects to the Edit > Copy CTRL + C
Clipboard for possible use in multiple Paste
operations
Paste Pastes an object currently on the Clipboard Edit > Paste CTRL + V
as the result of a previous Cut or Copy operation
Delete Deletes the object or objects selected (Note: Edit > Delete CTRL + Z or
deleted objects cannot be pasted) DELETE
Help Contents Displays the Contents tab for Online Help
Context- Displays the associated help file for a right-clicked

Sensitive Help object
To show a toolbar, point to View > Toolbars on the menu bar and click the name of the
toolbar you want to display.
A check mark appears to the left of that toolbar’s name on the View > Toolbars submenu
when the toolbar is selected.
To hide a toolbar, click the View menu, point to Toolbars, and then click the name of the
toolbar you want to hide.
If you have a NAVIGATOR-SRV, NAVIGATOR-SNMP, NAVIGATOR-RTR, ICONM-SCP-LITE, or

ICONM-SCP license, Magellan CCS Navigator also has a Create Objects toolbar and a
Graphical Navigation toolbar, which appear across the top of the Graphical
Navigation page or panel. See Using the Graphical Navigation Toolbar on page 129 of
CCS RouterNAV: Router Specific Plug-in.
User Manual
Built-In Tools
The tools you have available will depend on the licensing options purchased. See
Built-in tools, accessible from the Tools menu, enable you to perform tasks by executing
actions in their tool dialog boxes.
Table 4-3 Built-in Tools

Tool Purpose Reference
Navigation Navigate the CCS devices on the network Network View
and build hierarchical views of the Construction on page 93
network
Graphical Creates an interactive graphical interface Introduction to Graphical
Navigation with your network that you can configure Navigation on page 1
to perform tasks
Discovery Discover the devices on the CCS network CCS Device Discovery on
page 75
Parameters View the favorite parameter and alarm NAVIGATOR-INT
lists for a device (available with the Overview on page 1
NAVIGATOR-INT license only)
Configuration Set the IP address of a CCS device, CCS Device
configure it, transfer files to it, and see Configuration on page 127
version information
Software Send new software to devices on the Upgrading Software on
Upgrade network page 135
Standalone Start standalone (non-CCS) programs Navigation Pane on
from the Tools menu page 44
Rules and Provides tools to use events to trigger Working with Macros on
Macros... actions page 86
Custom Displays variables that store CCS RouterNAV: Router
Properties Specific Plug-in
Utilities Depending on your PC's configuration, Creating a Routing System
provides access to plug-ins and utilities
that are installed in your PC
SNMP If you have a NAVIGATOR-SNMP license, Setting SNMP Options on
two sub-options will be available page 62
 Traps provides tools to create
parameters and alarms from trap data
sent to Magellan CCS Navigator
 Agent provides tools to configure
Magellan CCS Navigator to forward
trap information to other SNMP
devices
44 Chapter 4
Interface Overview
Navigation Pane
The Navigation pane contains the resource tree, a hierarchical representation of the
content and organization of the CCS devices. Administrator users on a PC with a
NAVIGATOR-SRV, NAVIGATOR-DEV, or NAVIGATOR-SNMP license can build custom views
of the resources on a network in this pane.
The Navigation tool provides resource icons to use as building blocks, customizable text
colors, and specialized informational columns. You can rename the icons and use them
to represent other objects.
Figure 4-5 Sample Navigation Pane
Figure 4-6 Navigation Pane with Open Network Folder

The Navigation pane has tabs, or pages, showing different views of the CCS network.
 Administrators have a System tab and a User tab for each general user that has been
defined. The System tab shows all the devices that are available on the network, and
each User tab shows only the devices that specific user can configure, control, or
monitor.
 General users have a User tab only, which is customized to show only the devices the
user can configure, control, or monitor.
Extensive information about the Navigation pane can be found in Network View
Construction on page 93.
Discovery Pane
The Discovery pane tracks the progress of the Discovery tool in finding CCS devices
connected to the network. You will use this pane and its options to control the discovery
process and narrow its scope of operation, thereby quickening the process.
User Manual
Figure 4-7 Discovery Pane after a Discovery

For information on using the Discovery pane, see Chapter 6, CCS Device Discovery on
page 75.
Parameters Panel
The Parameters panel appears if you have the NAVIGATOR-INT license only.
When you click on a device in the Navigation panel while in Build mode, the
Parameters panel updates to display the favorite parameters and alarms for that device.
If favorites are not defined for a device, the panel displays all parameters and alarms for that
device.
Figure 4-8 Favorites (Parameters) Panel

For information on using the Parameters panel, see Volume 5.
Custom Properties Viewer

The Custom Properties viewer appears in Control mode only. It is closed by default, but you
can open it by choosing Tools > Custom Properties from the main menu.
46 Chapter 4
Interface Overview
Figure 4-9 Custom Properties Panel
Table 4-4
Column Function
Name Each specific variable has a name that is either generated by
the wizard that created the page, or is created by the user
that created the rule.
Runtime Value The current value of the property; click Refresh to see the
most up-to-date value
Initial Value The value that the property had when it was defined in
Build mode
Scope The page(s) where the value is used; Global Properties apply
systemically to all pages
Description A user-defined or wizard-defined explanation of the
property
For information on using custom properties, see CCS RouterNAV: Router Specific Plug-in.
Configuration Dialog Boxes

A Configuration dialog box is where administrators can adjust the network settings
of a device, transfer files, see version information for the device hardware and software,
and perform other configuration tasks specific to the device. Topic tabs, appearing
at the top of the dialog box, divide the information into pages by subject.
User Manual
Figure 4-10 Configuration Dialog Box

For information on using Configuration dialog boxes, see Chapter 8, CCS Device
Software Upgrade Tool

The Software Upgrade tool allows you to select one or more devices of the same type to
be upgraded in parallel using the transferred software package. It automates the backup
and upgrade process so it can be run in the background, and includes event and error
logging.
Figure 4-11 Software Upgrade Dialog Box

For more information on upgrading software, see Upgrading Software on page 135 and
Transferring Files With the File Transfer Tab on page 144.
The types of devices you can control depends on the Magellan CCS Navigator licenses on
your PC. See Managing Magellan CCS Navigator Licenses on page 19 for more
information.
You will be able to open Control dialog boxes for all the items to which you have control or
monitoring access on your CCS network.
48 Chapter 4
Interface Overview
Graphical Navigation Dialog Boxes

You must have a NAVIGATOR-SRV or NAVIGATOR-SNMP license to create Graphical
Navigation pages in Build mode, and a NAVIGATOR-SRV, NAVIGATOR-SNMP, or
NAVIGATOR-CLI license to monitor and control pages and panels in Control mode.
If you want to create router pages only, you can also use a NAVIGATOR-RTR license. (Router
functionality is also included in the NAVIGATOR-SRV license.)
In Build mode, you can create Graphical Navigation dialog boxes, and you can
configure and update the content of Graphical Navigation pages.
General users, and administrator users when the software is in Control mode, can activate
and operate Graphical Navigation pages.
Graphical Navigation pages can provide control and monitoring access to devices, can
have rules made up of events and actions, You can configure a page to provide visual
feedback to let you know that CCS Magellan CCS Navigator has successfully completed
a task or action.
Figure 4-12 Graphical Navigation Pane Showing an FR-3903 Frame and its Component
Modules
In Control mode, you can set an active Graphical Navigation pane to Full Screen mode
from the main menu by selecting View > Full Screen. In Full Screen mode, toolbars and
scroll-bars are hidden. To return to a smaller, resizable page, either click the Close Full
Screen button on the Full Screen toolbar, or press ESC on your keyboard.
See CCS RouterNAV: Router Specific Plug-in for information on creating and operating
Graphical Navigation dialog boxes.
information.
information.
User Manual
Status Bar The Status Bar shows two cells, one on each end of the bar, located at the bottom of the
main application window.
Figure 4-13 Status Bar

The cell on the left end shows a message describing the operational status. The operational
status cell will also show a one-line Help message as you roll the mouse over menu options.
The operational mode cell on the right end of the Status Bar shows a colored background
that changes as the currently active operational mode changes: yellow for build, and green
for control.
If you right click in the Status Bar, you open the Options shortcut menu.
The Status Bar does not show unless the Status Bar option in the View menu is selected,
indicated by a check mark to the left of the title.
See Setting the Operational Mode on page 37 for more information.
Plug-ins Use the Plug-in Options dialog box to view the plug-in options that are installed on your
PC. Some plug-ins have configuration options that are accessible from the Plug-in dialog
box.
To see the plug-ins that are installed, complete these steps:
1 Click Plug-ins on the Options menu. The Plug-ins dialog box appears.
Figure 4-14 Plug-ins Dialog Box

2 Review the Configure Plug-ins list.
3 Click OK to close the Plug-ins dialog box.
Advanced Router Control

Using the Advanced router control plug-in, you can monitor and control a wide range of
Imagine Communications routers. Magellan CCS Navigator may be used as the only
controlling device, or it may be used in conjunction with traditional hardware control
panels. Note that you can access multiple routing views on the same workstation
simultaneously.
50 Chapter 4
Interface Overview
To build pages, you must have a NAVIGATOR-SRV license or NAVIGATOR-RTR license.
You can create a basic router control panel using tools that are available in the Advanced
Router Control plug-in, or using the wizard if you have a NAVIGATOR-SRV or
NAVIGATOR-RTR license. You can use the Wizard to create nine different types of router
control panels. All panels contain tools to detect and indicate signal presence via the router
engine for devices that support these features. Panels also trigger alarms for power
supplies, fans, I/O boards and logic cards and monitor connection status of all devices.
For more information, see Volume 6: Routing Configuration.
AminoSTB Control
With the Amino STB plugin, you can remotely monitor an AmiNET120 or AmiNET500
set-top box.
For more information, see Setting the Amino STB Tab on page 111.
Interface control
The Interface Control plug-in allows you to to control and monitor processing devices. This
plug-in is available with NAVIGATOR-DEV, NAVIGATOR-SRV, and NAIVAGATOR-CLI licenses.
See Volume 5.
Master Control
This plug-in is available on PCs that have an ICONM-SCP or ICONM-SCP-LITE license. A
panel created with this license can fully control IconMaster switchers, and allows faster
access to many of the switcher’s operational feature submenus and audio meters. This
license is designed to work optimally with a 19" touchscreen monitor (1280 × 1024
recommended).
For more information on configuring IconMaster Software Control Panel, see CCS
Navigator: Enhanced Functionality .
SNMP Control
If you have a NAVIGATOR-SNMP license, you will be able to build Magellan CCS Navigator
pages to communicate with SNMP enabled devices (SNMP is a communication protocol like
TCP/IP, FTP and HTTP), and configure Magellan CCS Navigator to forward received traps and
information to other SNMP devices. When combined with an NAVIGATOR-INT license, you
can create parameters and alarms from SNMP traps, and add individual controls to
Graphical Navigation pages and panels.
For more information on using SNMP with Magellan CCS Navigator, see SNMP Plug-in on
page 113 of CCS RouterNAV: Router Specific Plug-in, and Setting SNMP Options on
page 62.
User Manual
SuiteView Control
In order to work with the SuiteView multisource display processor, within Magellan CCS
Navigator, you will build a Graphical Navigation page. On that page, you can set rules for
conditional events and actions for communicating with SuiteView.
For more information on controlling SuiteView, see SuiteView Plug-in on page 119 of CCS
RouterNAV: Router Specific Plug-in.
Standalone Standalone tools are applications that normally run outside of the CCS Magellan CCS
Tools Navigator software, such as Imagine Communications Layout Designer, ZUpgrade, and
ZConfigurator (for PredatorII devices). You can configure CCS Magellan CCS Navigator
to start these independent applications from the Tools menu. See the following topics for
more information:
 Adding a Standalone Program to the Tools Menu on page 51

 Starting a Standalone Program on page 52
 Removing a Standalone Program on page 52
Adding a Standalone Program to the Tools Menu

To add a standalone program to the Tools menu, complete these steps:
1 Click the Tools menu, point to Standalone, and then click Customize....
2 On the Customize box, click Add.
This shows the words [new tool] in both the Menu Contents box and the Menu Text
box.
Browse button
Figure 4-15 Customize Dialog Box

3 Select [new tool] in the Menu Text box, and then type in the name of the standalone
program you want to add.
For instance, if you want to start Microsoft® Excel from within Magellan CCS
Navigator, type:
Microsoft Excel
4 Click Browse to the right of the Command box.
5 Browse in the Select Program box for the path to the command line for the standalone
program.
52 Chapter 4
Interface Overview
6 Click the name of the program, and then click Open.

This closes the Select Program box, returns you to the Customize box, and shows the
path to the standalone program in the Command box.
7 Click OK to close the Customize box and save the choices.
The name of the application that you entered in the Menu Text box shows as an
option on the Tools > Standalone submenu.
Starting a Standalone Program

Before you can start a standalone program from the Tools menu, you must first configure
the path and name of the standalone application. See Adding a Standalone Program to
the Tools Menu on page 51.
To start a standalone program from the Tools menu, click the Tools menu, point to
Standalone, and then click the name of the standalone program.
Removing a Standalone Program

You can remove previously configured options that start standalone (non-Magellan CCS
Navigator) applications from within Magellan CCS Navigator. To remove a standalone
program from the Tools menu, complete these steps:
1 Point to Tools > Standalone on the menu bar and click Customize....
When the Customize box shows, the names of all standalone programs configured to
start from within Magellan CCS Navigator show in the Menu Contents box.
2 Select the name of the program you want to delete in the Menu Contents box, and then
click Remove.
Now the name of the program no longer appears as an option on the Tools >
Standalone > Customize... submenu.
Repeat step 2 for the names of any other programs you want to delete from the Menu
Contents box.
3 Click OK.
This closes the Customize box and saves the changes.
Using Interface Dialog Boxes

In Magellan CCS Navigator, you are able to have multiple dialog boxes open simultaneously.
To maximize a dialog box, double-click the dialog box title or click the square Maximize
button in the top-right corner of the dialog box.
In the maximized state, a dialog box has a Restore button in the top-right corner. Click
Restore to return the dialog box to its previous size.
If a dialog box is not maximized, you can drag any border (top, bottom, left, and right). To
resize the dialog box, click and hold down the left mouse button while dragging the handle
that appears on the corner of the dialog box.
User Manual
To move a dialog box, click within the dialog box title and keep the button depressed while
dragging the dialog box. To complete the move, release the mouse button.
To close a dialog box, click the Close button.
Docking or Floating a Tool Dialog Box

You can dock each of these tool dialog boxes to a border of the main or float the tool
dialog box to another location within the main screen. A floating tool dialog box has a black
title bar that bears the name of the dialog box in reverse (white) type.
Figure 4-16. Docked Discovery Pane (Left) and Floating Discovery Pane (Right)
Showing and Closing a Tool Dialog Box

To show a tool dialog box, click the tool name on the Tools menu.
If the tool is open and active, the tool icon on the Tools menu is selected, and the dialog
box is open.
Figure 4-17 Selected Navigation Icon

If the tool is closed and inactive, the tool icon is not selected, and the dialog box is closed.
Figure 4-18 Unselected Navigation Icon

To close a tool dialog box, click the Close box in the upper right corner of the dialog box,
or point to Tools and click the tool name to deselect the name.
In managing the CCS network, you will be monitoring many devices at once, each with its
own multipage sets of control parameters. You have several ways of keeping up with all of
the open Control, Configuration and Signal Monitor dialog boxes:
 Stack all the open dialog boxes on top of each other, with only the top dialog box in
view. Then, to move between dialog boxes in the stack, press CTRL + TAB.
 Cascade the dialog boxes diagonally across the application dialog box, using the
Window menu’s Cascade option. Then, to activate a specific dialog box and move it to
the top of the cascading pile, click the dialog box’s title bar.
54 Chapter 4
Interface Overview
Figure 4-19 Cascading Dialog Boxes

 Tile the dialog boxes horizontally or vertically, using one of the Tile options in the
Window menu. Then, to activate a dialog box, click its title bar.
Figure 4-20 Tiled Control Dialog Boxes

 Show all of the open Control, Signal Monitor, Navigator, Configuration, and
Software Upgrade dialog boxes as tabbed pages in a workbook, using workbook
mode. Workbook mode shows each dialog box as an individual multipage tab in a
workbook of open device dialog boxes. Workbook tabs, which appear at the bottom
of the workbook dialog box, show a tool icon to the left of the name of the device the
dialog box represents.
The workbook below shows the top dialog box in a workbook containing two open
configuration dialog boxes, each with a tab at the bottom of the workbook dialog box.
Each configuration dialog box is divided into multiple topic tabs (pages). Topic tabs
appear at the top of the workbook dialog box.
User Manual
These tabs
represent different
pages of one
Configuration
dialog box.
Workbook tabs
each display a tool
icon and the name
of the device they
represent.
Figure 4-21 Two Configuration Dialog Boxes in Workbook Mode

To enable Workbook mode, point to View in the menu bar and click Workbook
Mode. A check mark appears to the left of Workbook Mode when the mode is
active.
To stack, cascade, or tile multiple dialog boxes, you must disable workbook mode and
then select the dialog box style you want from the Window menu. To disable
workbook mode, point to View on he menu bar and click Workbook mode to clear the
check mark to the left of Workbook Mode.
Using the Window Menu

To show the Window menu, click Window on the menu bar.
Use the Window menu to change the way that multiple dialog boxes cascade, stack, or tile
inside the main screen of the application.
The Window menu contains the following options:
Table 4-5 Window Menu

Command Function
Always On Top Ensures that Magellan CCS Navigator is the topmost
program for controlling and monitoring on your PC
monitor
Cascade Stacks open Control, Configuration, Graphical
Navigation, and Signal Monitor dialog boxes with
each higher dialog box in the stack offset slightly to
the bottom right
Tile Horizontally Horizontally tiles open Control, Configuration,
Graphical Navigation, and Signal Monitor dialog
boxes
56 Chapter 4
Interface Overview
Table 4-5 Window Menu

Command Function
Tile Vertically Vertically tiles open Control, Configuration,
boxes
Layout... Opens a dialog box where you can save and retrieve
different screen configurations
See Using Interface Dialog Boxes on page 52.
Close Closes the selected Control, Configuration,
boxes
Close All Closes all open Control, Configuration, Graphical
Navigation, and Signal Monitor dialog boxes
Resource Name Titles of open Control, Configuration, Graphical
Navigation, and Signal Monitor dialog boxes list
in the menu as options. If no such dialog boxes are
open, no titles list.
Working with Layouts

Only an Administrator with a NAVIGATOR-SRV or NAVIGATOR-SNMP license can create and
modify layouts. General users with NAVIGATOR-CLI licenses can load layouts.
Within Magellan CCS Navigator, there are many dialog boxes that can be moved and
repositioned. A layout is a snapshot of the current screen configuration, including the
operational mode and the position of all dialog boxes, toolbars, menus, docking panels,
Navigator pages, and Control and Configuration dialog boxes.
You can use a layout over and over on different events throughout Magellan CCS
Navigator. You can create a rule to recall a layout. See Setting Properties for a ‘Load
Layout’ Action on page 75 for more information.
Access the tools for working with layouts by choosing Window > Layouts... from the
main menu.
The Layout dialog box appears, listing the existing layouts.
Figure 4-22 Layout Dialog Box

Layouts can only be created in control mode. You can either rearrange all your dialog boxes
before opening the Layout dialog box or with the Layout dialog box open.
User Manual
To create a layout, click the Add Layout button. The Add Layout dialog box appears.
Type a name for the layout and click OK. Magellan CCS Navigator records the current
screen configuration.
General users on NAVIGATOR-CLI-licensed PCs can load layouts, but not create or modify
them.
You can load any layout at any time by selecting it in the Layouts list, and then clicking
Load Layout. The Magellan CCS Navigator screen is rearranged according to the current
layout.
To change a layout, select it in the Layouts menu at the left of the screen and then click
Modify Layout.
 If you do not change the name of the layout, the changes you make will replace the
current layout. If you change the name, a new layout will be created.
 If you select Update layout entries, Magellan CCS Navigator replaces the modified
layout with the current positioning of all dialog boxes.
To delete a layout from the menu, select the layout from the list and click Remove Layout.
A layout can only be deleted if any rules that use it are deleted.
Property A property sheet is a dialog box that shows the properties of an object in the interface. The
Sheets Navigation Properties box, the Diagnostics Properties box, and the Object Properties
box are all property sheets.
ProcedureChanging Pages in a Multipage Property Sheet

If the property sheet has multiple pages, each page will have a tab with text for the title of
the tab.
Figure 4-23 Property Sheet Tabs

Tabs represent different pages in a multipage property sheet.
To change to another page in the property sheet, select the tab for that page with a click of
the mouse.
Procedure‘Pinning’ a Property Sheet Open and Closed

To keep a property sheet open while you complete other tasks, click the Push-Pin icon in
the top left corner of the property sheet.
Figure 4-24 Unselected Push-Pin Icon

To close a property sheet that you have “pinned” open, first click the selected Push-Pin
icon and then click the Close button.
Figure 4-25 Selected Push-Pin Icon

58 Chapter 4
Interface Overview
Using The menus you have available will depend on the licensing options purchased. See
Menus
The menu bar may contain up to eight menu titles. Each menu contains a list of commands.
Table 4-6 Menus on the Menu Bar

Title Function
File Manages the operational mode, saving, logging off, and
exiting
Edit Manages editing tools: Undo, Redo, Cut, Copy, Paste,
Delete..., Clear, Replace IP, and Find
View Manages how and what the toolbars, status bar, and dialog
boxes show
Tools Manages the operation of built-in tools and standalone
(non-Magellan CCS Navigator) tools that you add to the
Tools menu
Options Manages the setting of Magellan CCS Navigator software
options
Window Manages how dialog boxes appear in the main Magellan
CCS Navigator window
Help Manages information on Magellan CCS Navigator use,
accessing our website, copyrights, and software version
information
Shortcut A context or shortcut menu appears when you right-click an object. These menus contain a
Menus list of options relevant to the selected object, the current dialog box, and the current
operational mode.
Some options may be unavailable in the context imposed by the active operational mode, or
the selected item. For example, you cannot conduct a discovery in Control mode, so that
option is unavailable on the main shortcut menu for Control mode.
Likewise, you cannot perform diagnostics in Build mode, so that option is unavailable on
the shortcut menu for Build mode in the main Magellan CCS Navigator interface.
There are shortcut menus for each dialog box, and for some tables, bars, and cells. See the
following topics on shortcut menus:
 Using the Discovery Shortcut Menu on page 92

 Using Navigation Shortcut Menus on page 117
 Using the Configuration Shortcut Menu on page 156
 Using the Diagnostics Shortcut Menus on page 242
 Using the Signal Monitor Shortcut Menu on page 289
 Using the Control Shortcut Menu on page 266
 Using the Graphical Navigation Context Menus on page 58 of CCS RouterNAV: Router
Specific Plug-in
59
5 Communication Options and

SNMP Configuration
Communication Options Overview

Depending on how your network is configured, you may need to set SNMP options or Serial
options.
See the following topics for more information.
 Setting Communication Options on page 59

 Setting Serial Connection Preferences on page 60
 Setting SNMP Options on page 62
To set Communication options, your Magellan CCS Navigator PC must have one of the
following licenses:
 NAVIGATOR-DEV
 NAVIGATOR-SRV
 NAVIGATOR-RTR
To set SNMP and SNMP Trap options, your Magellan CCS Navigator PC must have a
NAVIGATOR-SNMP license key.
NAVIGATOR-CLI-licensed systems and non-administrator users can view, but not set,
Communication options.
Setting Communication Options

With a NAVIGATOR-SRV or NAVIGATOR-DEV license key, you can set the periodicity of the
PC communicating with devices on the network. This affects the speed at which
the software recognizes a device power failure or a loss of network connectivity.
To set the communication options, complete these steps:
1 Click Communication on the Options menu.

2 On the Keep Alive tab, select the Use keep alive check box to enable the automatic
testing of all device connections. Clear the check box to disable this feature.
60 Chapter 5
Communication Options and SNMP Configuration
Figure 5-1 Communication Options Dialog Box’s Keep Alive Tab

3 Type in an appropriate time value and unit of measurement for Connection Idle Time for
keep alives.
The default time value is 10000, and the default unit of measurement is milliseconds.
The System Settings Change box appears, advising you to restart the computer to
implement the changes.
4 Click Yes to restart the PC.
The PC will shut down and then restart with the new settings.
See Setting Serial Connection Preferences on page 60.
Setting Serial Connection Preferences

To configure serial communication port settings and connection preferences, you will use
the Serial Settings tab of the Communications Options dialog box.
User Manual
Figure 5-2 Communications Options Dialog Box’s Serial Settings Tab
Creating a New Device in the Serial Settings Tab

To create a new device, follow these steps:
1 Open the Communication Options box from the Options menu, and then click the
Serial Settings tab.
2 Click Add, type a device name in the Name field, and then click OK to create a new device
name.
3 Change the following connection information as required:
 Port (default: COM 1)
 Bits per second (default: 57 600)
 Data bits (default: 8)
 Parity (default: None)
 Stop bits (default: 1)
 Flow control (default: None)
4 Click OK.
Editing a Previously Created Device in the Serial Settings Tab

To edit a device’s settings, follow these steps:
1 Open the Communication Options box from the Options menu, and then click the
Serial Settings tab.
2 Select an existing device by select a name from the Device Name field.
3 Change the following connection information as required:
 Port (default: COM 1)
 Bits per second (default: 57 600)
 Data bits (default: 8)
 Parity (default: None)
62 Chapter 5
 Stop bits (default: 1)

 Flow control (default: None)
4 Click OK.
Setting SNMP Options

Magellan CCS Navigator with a NAVIGATOR-SNMP license can configure and control SNMP
devices. These functions are described in SNMP Monitoring and Control Using
Magellan CCS Navigator on page 62.
Magellan CCS Navigator can also act as an element manager for control and monitoring,
forwarding events such as CCS alarms and SNMP traps, as SNMP traps, to a centralized
network operations center (NOC). See SNMP Agent Configuration Using Magellan CCS
Navigator on page 70.
SNMP Monitoring and Control Using Magellan CCS Navigator

You must have a NAVIGATOR-SNMP license to configure SNMP devices to work with
Magellan CCS Navigator, NUCLEUS, etc. For information on getting a license, see
Managing Magellan CCS Navigator Licenses on page 19.
To view the list of loaded SNMP files, click Options > SNMP on the main menu.
A dialog box appears:
Loads selected MIB files in

Microsoft Windows Notepad
Figure 5-3 SNMP Options Dialog Box

By default, the MIB Files to Load box on the SNMP Options box contains a list of MIB files
used by compatible equipment. Using this dialog box, you can perform the following
functions:
 Adding a MIB file for an SNMP Device on page 63

 Removing MIB files on page 63
 Restoring the Default MIB Files Setting on page 64
 Limiting the Number of Listed SNMP Traps on page 64
User Manual
 Setting the SNMP Trap Color on page 63
Adding a MIB file for an SNMP Device

To add an MIB file for a SNMP device, follow these steps:
1 Copy the corresponding MIB files to the MIB subdirectory:

C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application
Data\Harris\CCS\Files\mib
2 Click SNMP on the Options menu to open the SNMP Options dialog box.
3 Click Add and then select the MIB files you want to open.
The new MIB files will show under the MIB Files to Load list with a check mark. To
temporarily disable the loading of a MIB file, clear the check mark beside its name.
4 If an error occurs when the MIB files are loaded, an alert box will show. Click OK to
acknowledge the box, then click View Log to read the description of the load errors. Either
remove the MIB files that caused the error or add any missing MIB files. See SNMP MIB
Load Errors Appear on page 314 for more information.
5 Click OK to accept the changes and close the SNMP Options box.
If there are a lot of files in the list, or if some files are very large, it can take several minutes
for the SNMP Options dialog box to close.
Removing MIB files

To remove MIB files from the SNMP Options dialog box, follow these steps:
1 Select one or more MIB files under the MIB Files to Load list, and then click Remove; or to
remove all MIB files, click Remove All.
2 When a query box asks you to confirm the removal, click Yes.
Setting the SNMP Trap Color

When you change the color that traps appear, the trap color is changed for all traps in the
following places:
 The Alarm column of the Navigation pane

 The symbols border color and trap control color on Graphical Navigation pages
 Trap color in the Diagnostic window
To change the trap color, make the following setting:
1 On the SNMP Options dialog box, click Trap Color.

You can choose one of the 20 default colors,or click Other to select from a much
wider palette.
This change applies to all traps.
64 Chapter 5
Restoring the Default MIB Files Setting

To restore the default MIB files setting in the SNMP Options dialog box, follow these
steps:
1 Click Set Default.

2 When a query box asks you to confirm the action, click Yes.
Limiting the Number of Listed SNMP Traps

SNMP traps are shown on the Diagnostics dialog box. Since SNMP does not generically
support the concept of a cleared alarm, you should limit the number of SNMP traps to show
on the Monitor tab of the Diagnostics dialog box.
To limit the number of SNMP traps that list on the Monitor tab of the Diagnostics dialog
box, complete these steps:
1 Click SNMP on the Options menu.

2 In the SNMP Options box, set the Maximum number of SNMP traps shown...for each
Device to some value.
The default value is 1000. Once this number is reached, previous alarms for SNMP traps
are overwritten in the Monitor tab.
When this occurs, double-click the ID column of the Monitor tab to see new SNMP
traps reordered by their ID number.
If an error occurs when the MIB files are loaded, an alert box will show. Click OK to
acknowledge the box, then click View Log to read the description of the load errors.
Either remove the MIB files that caused the error or add any missing MIB files.
See Setting Communication Options on page 59.
SNMP Trap Configuration

SNMP traps are notification events issued by a managed device to the network
management station (i.e. Navigator) when a significant event (not necessarily an outage, a
fault, or a security violation) occurs. A SNMP trap contains information about the event,
which might be complex in nature, combining many different bits of data into a single
message.
A NAVIGATOR-SNMP license provides tools to interpret SNMP traps, so they can be treated,
for example, like alarm triggers and alarm clears. Within Navigator, you can group traps into
a single trap group. Multiple trap groups can be used to represent a single device, or you
can have one group per device.
1 From the main menu, choose Tools > SNMP > Traps.
The SNMP Trap Configuration dialog box appears.
User Manual
New Delete
Figure 5-4 SNMP Trap Configuration Dialog Box

2 Click the New button to add a row to the Groups table.
New rows are added at the bottom of the list.
To delete a row, click the Delete button. The selected row will be deleted, and all
associated data in the Trap Definitions field will be removed as well.
3 Under Group Name, enter a descriptive name for the specific device for which you are
defining traps.
The Group Type is automatically filled in as “Enterprise.”
4 Under Trap Definitions, click Add.
The Trap Definition dialog box opens.
Click here to find parameters that are

variables or part of a trap.
Figure 5-5 Trap Definition Dialog Box

66 Chapter 5
5 Beside Trap Name, do either of the following:

 Type a name for the customized trap.
 Click MIB.
In the SNMP MIB Browser dialog box, browse to a trap. Click OK and the
name of this trap (alarm) will fill in the Trap Name field. (If you choose an invalid
object, an error message will appear.)
One or more rows will appear in the Trap Object IDs table.
6 If another trap should be associated with this trap, click Associate with existing trap
and then choose that trap from the drop-down menu.
This option could be used, for example, to associate athe trap that creates an alarm and
the trap that clears the alarm. In the Parameters pane, one trap with two states
would appear.
If you click Ignore Trap it will be ignored completely, except if there are rules that use
that trap.
7 Click Add to add new rows to the Trap Object IDs table, or Delete to remove rows.
With a row selected, click MIB to open an SNMP MIB Browser, and then browse to
a condition that generates a trap. Click OK, and then click the variable or parameter,
and its Object ID (OID) will fill the selected row.
8 To define rules to go with your traps, see Creating New Trap Rules on page 66. If rules
already exist in the table, you can modify them using the following tools:
 Copy a rule by selecting it and then clicking Copy. An exact duplicate of the rule
appears in the List of Trap Rules table.
 If a rule already exists, modify it by selecting it and then clicking Modify. The
dialog box that opens is described in Creating New Trap Rules on page 66.
 Delete a rule by selecting it and then clicking Delete.
9 Click OK to close the Trap Definition dialog box, and then OK to close the SNMP
Trap Configuration dialog box.
Creating New Trap Rules

1 Under Trap Rules on the Trap Definition dialog box, click Add.
The Trap Rule Configuration dialog box opens.
User Manual
New
Delete
New
Delete
Figure 5-6 Trap Rule Configuration

2 Enter a name for the rule. This name identifies the rule in subsequent dialog boxes.
3 If another rule should be associated with this rule, click Associate with existing rule
and then choose that rule from the drop-down box.
This option could be used, for example, to associate an alarm and the alarm that clears
it. It would mean that in the Parameters pane, only one instance of the trap would
appear, and it would have two states.
4 Under Rule Conditions, click New to add a new row.
To delete a row from this table, click Delete.
5 In the Variable field, select an object ID.

The drop-down box lists all the object IDs that are part of the trap definition.
6 (Optional) Enter a value in the Instance ID field.
7 To complete the Value field, do either of the following:
 Enter a value.
 Click Value Expression, and then complete the Bitrate Expression
Builder screen that appears. See Creating a Value Expression on page 68.
 Click MIB, and then choose a value from the MIB Browser that appears.
8 Under Rule Actions, click New, and then select an Action Name from the drop-down
box that appears in the new row.
9 To complete the Description field, do either of the following:
 Enter substrings and/or SNMP variable values.
68 Chapter 5
 Click Description Expression, and then complete the Alarm Description

Builder dialog box that appears. See Building an Alarm Description on
page 68.
If the description is entered in Japanese or Chinese, Navigator Agent will not be able to
forward this alarm properly, because these character sets are not supported by the agent.
10 On the Trap Rule Configuration dialog box, enter a Trigger time (measured in
milliseconds).
This delay is used mostly for clearing traps.
11 Click OK to close the Trap Rule Configuration dialog box.
ProcedureCreating a Value Expression

Value expressions help specify a specific condition, where your SNMP device may combine
many bits of data into a single trap.
Figure 5-7 Bitwise Expression Builder Dialog Box

1 From the Bit box, choose a Bit that pertains to the rule you are defining.
2 Beside Value, enter the value that must be met, and then click Add.
The Expression field (read-only) updates.
3 Repeat as many times as required to define the value specific to the alarm or parameter
from the string.
You can remove the selected row by clicking Remove.
4 Click OK.
ProcedureBuilding an Alarm Description

An alarm description provides information to help operators correct the alarm condition.
Before using the Alarm Description Builder, you need to know what data that the alarm
sends to Navigator when it is triggered. You can retrieve this data by triggering the alarm.
User Manual
Figure 5-8 Action Description Builder Dialog Box

The trap normally consists of a description, including a header and variables. The expression
builder operates in a linear fashion, starting at the beginning of the description and making
changes in sequence as it progresses towards the end of the description. So, the order in
which you present your expression is very important.
If, for example, you use a rule to remove the third word of the description, you cannot
subsequently remove the first word. If there is a later instance of the same word, you will
remove that instead. Otherwise, your instruction will be ignored.
1 Choose an option from the Conversion Rule field.

Options include:
Table 5-1 Conversion Rules for SNMP Alarm Expressions

Conversion Rule Function
Keep text up to a Keeps the text, starting from the previous action, up to
specific string and including the specified attribute
Add specific string Adds text at the spot where the previous action took place
Add remaining text Keeps all text until the next specified rule, or until the end
of the alarm expression if no other rule follows this rule
Remove text up to a Deletes the text between the previous action and the
specific string specified attribute (but not including the specified
attribute)
Remove specific string Searches forward and removes the next instance of the
specified attribute
2 Enter text or a variable in the Attributes field.

If no variable value or string token is specified, the entire string is displayed.
3 Under Description Entries, click Add.
The addition to your alarm description appears in the Expression String field.
4 Repeat steps 1–3 to add to your expression, keeping in mind that the change will always
take place at a point later in the description than the change you just made.
5 Click OK.
70 Chapter 5
SNMP Agent Configuration Using Magellan CCS Navigator

The settings on this screen configure Navigator as an SNMP agent. An SNMP license is not
required to forward CCS-P device alarms as traps to another device. These settings apply to
Navigator only. To configure other SNMP devices, see Setting SNMP Options on
page 150.
Navigator Trap Agent does not support Japanese or Chinese.
Navigator can translate alarms into SNMPv2c notifications, whether they be alarms from
CCS-enabled devices, or generic SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c traps, and then forward them to
other devices.
Due to a limitation in NET SNMP, the Agent Address (Agent IP) field in a SNMPv1 trap is
always filled with the IP of the system on the default or primary network adapter, instead of
the adapter the trap was broadcast on.You can get around this by changing the primary
network card, or by listening to the other IP address.
Recipient devices can include other Navigator clients and servers. Navigator must be
configured to send data to all clients, etc. that want to receive traps. You cannot just
configure a Navigator client on its own to listen to the agent server.
Windows SNMP agent and the Navigator SNMP agent cannot be running at the same time.
SNMP trap forwarding along a chain of SNMP agents is permitted as long as the forwarding
does not create a loop in the chain. An Agent can forward traps to another agent, as long
as the traps are not forwarded to an Agent already existing in the chain. This includes
configuring the trap destination of an agent to be the IP address of the agent itself. Doing
so will cause unpredictable results.
Devices that intend to monitor a Navigator agent need the Navigator.mib file loaded in their
MIB directory. When a device receives an alarm from a Navigator agent, that alarm will
include Navigator’s IP address, and the IP address of the triggered device.
1 From the main menu, select Tools > SNMP > Agent.
2 Select the SNMP tab.
Figure 5-9 SNMP Tab of the SNMP Agent Configuration Dialog Box
3 In the SNMP Agent section of the screen, make the following selections:
User Manual
Table 5-2 SNMP Agent Configuration

Field Function
Port Number (Can be from 0 to 65535) The network port used by the
SNMP agent
Read SNMP read community string (in SNMP terms, a “Get”
Community operation has to match this setting in the MIB browser in
order to read information from device)
Write SNMP write community string (in SNMP terminology, a
Community “Set” operation has to match this setting in a MIB browser
in order to write information to that device)
Enable When checked, authentication traps are sent if the read or
Authentication write community doesn’t match between the SNMP agent
Traps and MIB browser, for example when an unauthorized
system tries to read the device.
Enable SNMP When checked, SNMP support is available; if not checked,
Agent SNMP support is disabled
Enable Trap When checked, this option adds sequence ID data to every
Sequence ID trap that the agent forwards. If the trap is forwarded to
another Navigator system, that data will appear in the
description column of the Diagnostic window. This helps
track the order in which traps are received.
In the System section of the screen, make the following selections:
Table 5-3 System Fields of SNMP Tab - MIB-2 System Information

Field Explanation
Description The default is “Harris SNMP Agent”
Location The physical location of the device
Contact The contact person for this device
Name Name of the device
4 Click on the Destination tab, and then, for each place you would like Navigator to
forward alarms, enter the following information:
Table 5-4 Destination Configuration For SNMP Agents

Field Function
IP Address The specific place where data will be forwarded to
Description For informational purposes?
Port Number The port that destination communicates on. The default is
162.
Version Click in this field to choose V1 or V2c. These are the only
SNMP versions Navigator supports.
5 Click on the Trap Selection tab, and then choose one of the following :
72 Chapter 5
Table 5-5 Trap Selection For SNMP Agents

Option Function
None No alarms, traps, or notifications will be forwarded.
All Alarms, Notifications, All alarms, notifications, and traps for the
and Traps monitored devices will be forwarded.
Select By Type Select the specific types to be forwarded.
 Critical alarms
 Warning alarms
 Information Alarms
 Clear alarms
 Acknowledged
 SNMP device traps
Individual Device Alarms Click the browse button to select those devices you
want to provide alarms.
You can edit the Alias for any alarm that is
checked. An alarm carries the same alias in the
Forward Alarms, Favorites, and SNMP Trap
Selection dialog boxes.
You can also edit the Comments field (at the far
right of the alarms table) to provide more
information when the alarm is triggered.
For more information, see Selecting Device
Alarms for Transmission on page 72.
6 Click OK to close the SNMP Agent Configuration screen and save all changes.
Selecting Device Alarms for Transmission

By default, when configured as an SNMP agent, Navigator will transmit alarms for all
devices. To choose specific devices to transmit alarms, ignoring all others, follow these
steps:
1 From the main menu, select Tools > SNMP > Agent, and then click on the Trap
Selection tab.
2 Select By Type, click Individual Device Alarms, and then click on the browse button.
The Individual Device Alarms window opens.
User Manual
Figure 5-10 Individual Device Alarms Dialog Box

3 To select specific alarms or traps for a device, click the device in the Device Selection field.
The Trap Selection field updates to display all alarms or traps for that device.
4 Place checks beside alarms or traps to receive/transmit, and remove checks from beside
traps or alarms to ignore.
By default, all alarms are selected.
5 Click OK.
Configuring Navigator to Forward Traps and Notifications

1 Right-click a device in the Navigation pane and select Forward Alarms.
The following window opens:
Figure 5-11 Alarm Forwarding Dialog Box

74 Chapter 5
2 Place checks beside alarms or traps to receive/transmit, and remove checks from beside
traps or alarms to ignore.
You can edit the Alias for any alarm that is checked. An alarm carries the same alias in
the Forward Alarms, Favorites, and SNMP Trap Selection dialog boxes.
You can also edit the Comments field (at the far right of the alarms table) to provide
more information when the alarm is triggered.
3 Click OK.
There are also two right-click options:
 Copy Forward Alarms - Copies the list of selected traps and alarms for the selected
device.
 Paste Forward Alarms - Pastes the list of copied traps and alarms to a selected
device. It the Device type does not match, a warning asks if you want to continue,
before allowing the paste.
Alarms for devices in the Temporary folder are not forwarded.
75
6 CCS Device Discovery
Discovery Discovery is the process by which Magellan CCS Navigator finds and connects to the IP
addresses of CCS devices so that you can access the devices remotely from the PC. You will
Overview initially use the Discovery tool to find the CCS devices on your network. Later, you may
want to run a full or partial discovery when you make changes to your CCS network.
Magellan CCS Navigator will only discover X75 units with firmware version 1.4 or higher.
Magellan CCS Navigator will only discover 6800+ modules through an ICE6800+ module
upgraded to firmware version 2.0-16 or 2.0-8, or through a 6800+ETH resource module.
By default, the Discovery tool will try to discover all CCS-compatible devices on the same
subnet as the PC. However, you can narrow the scope of a discovery by setting discovery
options. See Setting Discovery Options on page 77.
You can discover devices using two methods:
 Searching by IP address.
This method involves entering IP addresses, or ranges of IP addresses. It is not the
optimal method when multiple devices have the same IP address, as when many similar
devices are first connected to a network.
 Searching by MAC address.
Graphical tools allow you to discover all the devices and frames on the physical
Ethernet/IP network. This includes brand new equipment, right out of the box still with
factory default settings; devices that are pre-configured at the factory; and devices that
have already been modified in the field. You can perform IP address configuration as
part of a MAC address discovery. See IP Settings and Device ID Configuration on
page 88.
When an Administrator user runs a discovery from a Magellan CCS Navigator Server, results
appear on the System tab of the Navigation pane. Discovery is a Build mode tool.
General users on NAVIGATOR-CLI-licensed PC cannot run discoveries.
After a discovery runs, the Discovery folder will contain a collection of icons that represent
the devices discovered on a CCS network. For example, you will see a server icon for each IP
address and a default hierarchy or “tree” of the devices located at each IP address.
You can use the Rediscover feature to run a discovery for an already-discovered device. See
Rediscovery on page 91.
Some devices cannot be added to the Navigation pane using the Discovery process. See the
following topics for information on adding items using other methods:
76 Chapter 6
CCS Device Discovery
 Using the Create Tool to Add a Resource Icon on page 99

 Copying and Pasting a Resource Icon on page 100
Summary of Discovery Tasks

If the Discovery pane is closed, open it by selecting Tools > Discovery from the main
menu. When docked, the Discovery pane defaults to the bottom left of the Magellan
CCS Navigator screen.
CCS Magellan CCS Navigator cannot discover DPS-575 modules on a CCS network
without the assistance of the CCS DPS-Gateway, which discovers the synchronizers and
reports to CCS Magellan CCS Navigator their presence on the subnet of the gateway. To
add additional DPS-575 synchronizers to the subnet, rediscover the CCS DPS-Gateway. See
Modifying a Previously Used Discovery on page 82.
Below is a summary of the discovery procedure.
1 Optional—Open the Discovery column of the Navigation pane, which shows information
in the Navigation pane about the status of device discovery. See Using the Discovery
Column in the Tree View on page 92 and Setting Navigation Options on page 120.
2 In Build mode, point to Tools on the menu bar, and then click Discovery to open the
Discovery tool. See Setting the Operational Mode on page 37.
3 Set the Discovery Options. See Setting Discovery Options on page 77.
4 Start a discovery and save the results. See Running a Full Discovery on page 85 and
Running a Partial Discovery on page 86.
5 Copy the discovery results from your Discovery folder to the Network or Temporary
folder. See Copying Discovery Results on page 91.
6 Customize your hierarchical view of the CCS network. See Network View
Construction on page 93.
Only an administrator user of a Magellan CCS Navigator Server can run a discovery.
Entering Network Address Information

Each device that you intend to control or monitor must have a valid IP address, gateway,
and subnet mask. Addresses are divided into numeric chunks, with each chunk separated
by a dot (period).
To be controlled or monitored, a device’s IP address and gateway must meet the following
criteria:
 The first number can range from 1 to 224.

 The second number can range from 0 to 255.
 The third number can range from 0 to 255.
 The fourth number can range from 1 to 254.
The highest possible IP address for a device controlled by Magellan CCS Navigator would be
224.255.255.254.
The subnet mask must meet the following criteria:
 The first number can range from 1 to 255.

User Manual
 The second number can range from 0 to 255.

 The third number can range from 0 to 255.
 The fourth number can range from 0 to 254.
Network configuration provided by a network administrator will normally follow these
rules.
Setting Discovery Options

If you do not add any host IP addresses, the Discovery tool will attempt to discover all
CCS-compliant devices on the same subnet as the PC.
To set the discovery options, complete these steps:
1 Click Discovery on the Options menu, or click Options... in the Discovery pane.
2 Select and complete the Hosts tab. See Setting Host IP Addresses for a Discovery on
page 77.
3 Select and complete the Save tab. See Modifying a Previously Used Discovery on
page 82.
4 Click OK to save the discovery options.
Setting Host IP Addresses for a Discovery

For additional information about discovering Routers, see Volume 6: Routing Configuration.
To set host IP addresses for a discovery, complete these steps:
The Discovery Options box appears, with the Hosts tab on top.
78 Chapter 6
Figure 6-1 Discovery Options Box, Hosts Tab

2 Select your Start options.
These options determine what Magellan CCS Navigator will do when you click Start on the
Discovery pane.
 Enable Scanning of MAC Addresses—when selected, when you click Start,

Magellan CCS Navigator performs a low-level device discovery to discover new devices
with IP addresses that are not on the IP address list for discovery on the subnet, with
their current IP settings.
Due to security features, when scanning MAC Addresses on a PC running Windows Vista or
Windows 7, you should temporariliy disable all network interfaces except the one you
intend to scan.
Only when Enable Scanning of MAC Addresses is selected, you can also select
Configure IP settings and/or Device IDs. If you select this option, upon
completion of a discovery, a window will open where you can assign IP addresses for
devices. See Using the Discovery Shortcut Menu on page 92.
These options are often used for initial configuration of devices with a (possibly
identical) default IP address.
 Enable scanning of IP addresses—When selected, the Discovery tool will scan the
network for CCS-compliant devices and then discover the device IDs of all devices
that respond to the scan. This will speed the discovery process.
3 To add the default IP addresses, click Add Default and ensure that the check box to the left
of IP address 192.168.100.250 and/or 192.168.100.251 is enabled.
The PC and the CCS devices you are discovering must be on the same subnet. To set the PC
to the same subnet as a CCS device, see Setting the IP Address of a PC on the Subnet
of a CCS Device on page 130.
You will typically use the default device IP addresses—192.168.100.251 for control panels
and 192.168.100.250 for all other devices—to configure a newly purchased device
connected to the PC on the same Ethernet hub or through an Ethernet crossover cable.
User Manual
The Add Host process can be repeated more than once, so you can add multiple ranges of
IP addresses.
4 To add other IP addresses, click Add.

The Add Host box appears.
5 In the Add Host box, you have these options:

 Add a host IP
 Add a range of host IPs
If no hosts are added, the Discovery tool will attempt to discover all compatible devices
on the network.
CCS Navigator cannot discover 6800+ modules on a CCS network without the assistance of
an ICE6800+ or 6800+ETH module in a host frame. The ICE6800+ or 6800+ETH reports
the presence of all networked FR6800+ frames and module configurations via the Ethernet
connection. To update the frame/module configuration, rediscover the host ICE6800+ or
6800+ETH.
6 Select the protocols (device types) you want to discover in the Select Products for
Discovery section of the Add Host box. The following check boxes are available (By
default, all are selected except HTTP and SNMP):
Table 6-1 Device Type Options for Discovery

Product Options
X50, X75, X85, HView SX Pro, NEO, Communication Type
6800+, MULTIVIEWER, NUCLEUS,  Broadcast (default) communicates with devices that are on
Platinum, EDGE-DPS575, Legalizer, the same subnet as the CCS application
RCP-CCS-1U
 Point-to-Point communicates with devices that are on a
Note Magellan CCS Navigator will only discover
different subnet and cannot be discovered using the Broadcast
X75 units with firmware version 1.4 or higher.
option
Authentication (not currently implemented)
Selenio, IP3, LCP-CCS-1U (NEO Local Communication Type
Control Panel)
 Point-to-Point (default) communicates with devices over
UDP
 TCP Point-to-Point When the device is switched to Control
mode, it will use TCP communication, which is more reliable,
but can be slower
Authentication (not currently implemented)
Routing Devices (Panacea, Hardware Router Discovery Type
Control Panel, Leitch router)  Full Discovery—Attempts to discover all Imagine
Communications and Leitch routing products
 Express (ignores legacy) —Only attempts to discover
Imagine Communications devices, and ignores older panels that
a full discovery might see
80 Chapter 6
Table 6-1 Device Type Options for Discovery (Continued)

Product Options
SNMP (products with SNMP server  Read Community—Enter the name here if it differs from
enabled) the default of Public
 Port—Magellan CCS Navigator discovers devices that use the
default 161 port only (you can change this after discovery in the
Properties pane of the Navigation window)
 Timeout (sec.)—The period when the discovery will give up
on finding the SNMP device can range from 1 to 1000 seconds
 Retries—The number of retries if the discovery fails can range
from 1 to 1000
HTTP (products with embedded HTTP web HTTP Port(s)—Enter the Port number(s)
server)
7 Click OK to close the Add Host dialog box, and then click OK to close the Discovery
Options dialog box. You are now ready to run a discovery.
 Adding the Default IP Address for a Discovery on page 80

 Adding Host IP Addresses for a Discovery on page 80
 Modifying Host IP Addresses on page 82
 Removing Host IP Addresses from the Discovery Options on page 82
 Temporarily Removing Host IP Addresses on page 83
Adding the Default IP Address for a Discovery

The default device IP address is 192.168.100.251 for control panels and 192.168.100.250
for all other devices.
The PC and the CCS devices you are discovering must be on the same subnet. To set the PC
to the same subnet as a CCS device, see Setting the IP Address of a PC on the Subnet
of a CCS Device on page 130.
To add the default IP address for a discovery, complete these steps:
1 On the Hosts tab of the Discovery Options box, click Add Default.
This adds the two default IP addresses to the list in the Hosts box.
2 Select the check boxes to the left of these two default IP addresses, if they are cleared.
3 Click OK to close the Discovery Options box.
4 Click start on the Discovery pane to start the discovery.
Adding Host IP Addresses for a Discovery

To add one host IP address for a discovery, complete these steps:
1 Point to Options on the menu bar and click Discovery, or click Options on the Discovery
pane’s button bar. The Discovery Options dialog box appears.
2 Click Add....
User Manual
The Add Hosts dialog box appears.
3 Select Add a host IP to add a single host IP or Add a range of host IPs to add more
than one.
Figure 6-2 Add Host Box

4 Highlight the first group of numbers in the default address, and then type new values in
place of the default numbers.
The cursor will automatically move to the second group of numbers in the address after you
type in three digits. When you enter less than three digits, press SPACE BAR to move to the
next field.
Fill in all four fields for the IP address in this manner. If you type 0 (zero) in the space for the
fourth group of numbers in the address, the Discovery tool will add all hosts
with the range from 1 to 254.
5 If you are adding a range of host IPs (see step 1 above), press TAB to move to the To box.
Type in only the fourth group of numbers from the highest IP address in the range of host IP
addresses.
6 Do either of the following:
 Click OK to close the Add Host box and return to the Host tab of the Discovery
Options box.
 Click Apply if you want to add more host IPs.
The new IP hosts now appear in the Hosts box on the left side of the Hosts page.
7 Place a check beside each IP address you would like to discover.

8 Click OK to use the existing Discovery Save Options; or set the Discovery Save
Options.
9 Click OK to close the Discovery Options box.
See the following topics for more details:

 Setting Discovery Save Options on page 83
82 Chapter 6
Modifying a Previously Used Discovery

Sometimes it will be more efficient to use a previously configured Discovery setup than to
create a new one from scratch. See the following topics:

 Removing Host IP Addresses from the Discovery Options on page 82
 Temporarily Removing Host IP Addresses on page 83
Modifying Host IP Addresses

To modify IP hosts for Discovery Options, complete these steps:
1 Point to Options on the menu bar and click Discovery, or click Options on the Discovery
pane’s button bar.
This shows the Hosts tab of the Discovery Options box. Any previously added IP hosts
appear in the Hosts box on the left side of the Hosts tab.
2 Select an IP address that you want to modify.

This activates the Modify and Remove buttons.
3 Click Modify, or double-click on the IP address.

This shows the Modify Host box. (See Figure 6-2.)
4 Highlight the section or sections of the number you want to change, and type in the new
number.
 Click OK to save the changes. This action closes the Modify Host box.
 Click Cancel if you decide not to modify the address. This action closes the Modify
Host box.
 Click Apply and then repeat the steps 2-5 above to change other Host IP addresses.
6 Click OK to close the Discovery Options box, or click the Save Options for a Discovery
tab to set the discovery save options and close the box.
Removing Host IP Addresses from the Discovery Options

When removing Host IP Addresses from the Discovery Options, you can remove either
one or more Host IP addresses or all Host IP addresses.
To remove one or more Host IP addresses from Discovery Options, complete these steps:
The IP addresses for a new discovery list in the Hosts box on the left of the Hosts tab.
2 Select an IP address you want to remove, and then click Remove.

Repeat to remove other Host IP addresses.
You can also select multiple list entries by pressing and holding the SHIFT or CTRL key when
selecting entries, or select a single entry and drag the mouse to include more entries in the
selection.
User Manual
Or you can remove all entries on the list by clicking Remove All, whether or not an entry
is selected. This action is followed by a box asking if you are sure. Click Yes to remove all
items on the list.
3 When you finish removing IP addresses, click OK to close the Discovery Options box;
or select the Save Options for a Discovery tab to set the Discovery Save Options.
Temporarily Removing Host IP Addresses

To temporarily remove IP hosts for Discovery Options, complete these steps:
Any previously added IP hosts appear in the Hosts box on the left side of the Hosts tab.
2 To temporarily remove an IP address, clear the check box beside the IP address.
This IP address will not be used in the next discovery operation.
3 Repeat the step above to temporarily remove other Host IP addresses.

4 Click OK again to close the Discovery Options box, or select the Save Options for a
Discovery tab to set the save options and close the box.
Setting Discovery Save Options

To set the discovery save options, complete these steps:
1 Open the Discovery Options box by clicking Discovery on the Options menu, or clicking
Options... in the Discovery pane.
2 Select the Save tab.
Figure 6-3 Discovery Options Dialog Box Save Tab

3 In the Confirmation section of the Save tab, select the Show confirmation window
before saving discovery results check box.
To disable the feature, clear the check box.
4 In the Saving mode section of the Save tab, select one of these two options:
84 Chapter 6
Table 6-2 Saving Mode Options

Option Function
Replace the contents of the User View’s Discovery Substitutes new discovery results
folder with the results of the discovery for previous results
Refresh the full User View with the results of the Adds newly discovered devices
discovery to previous contents
5 In the Save discovered device names as section of the same tab, select one of the four
options. Each option corresponds to a name template for newly discovered CCS devices
saved to the Discovery folder of the Navigation pane.
Here are examples of the four name options as applied to a DEC-6002:
Table 6-3 Device Naming Options

Name Template Sample Device Name
Slot <n>-<Device Name> Slot 10-DEC-6002 (Digital Comb Filter Decoder)
(<Description>)
Slot <n>-<Description> (<Device Slot 10-Digital Comb Filter Decoder (DEC-6002)
Name>)
<Device Name> (<Description>) DEC-6002 (Digital Comb Filter Decoder)
<Description> (<Device Name>) Digital Comb Filter Decoder (DEC-6002)
6 Click OK to close the Discovery Options box and save the results.
Pinging the IP Address of a CCS Device

To check a network connection to one of the CCS devices, you can “ping” the resource’s IP
address.
To ping an IP address, complete these steps:
1 Open a command prompt dialog box and type:

ping X
Where “X” is IP address of the device you are checking.
2 Press ENTER.
A ping command has two possible responses:
 A Reply... message verifies that the device is connected to the CCS network.
 A Request timed out message signals that the ping command failed. The device is
either not connected or not reachable on the CCS network.
User Manual
Running a Discovery
Under Windows Vista or Windows 7, the following settings are required to enable scanning
of IP addresses during a discovery:
• Add a firewall rule allowing ICMP type 0 packets.
• User Account Control (UAC) must be disabled.
For more information, contact your network administrator.
Once you have set your discovery options, you can begin the actual discovery process. You
have two choices of the type of discovery you would like to run.
A full discovery scans the entire network for controllable devices. See Running a Full
Discovery on page 85.
If you would rather scan specific sections of your network for specific types of devices, you
should run a partial discovery. See Running a Partial Discovery on page 86.
Running a Full Discovery

Full discovery is not supported for HTTP protocol. When you specify an HTTP server IP
address, the operation is automatically changed to a partial discovery. See Running a
Partial Discovery on page 86.
A full discovery is more simple to set up than a partial discovery, because it does not limit
the places on the network that are scanned. However, it may take longer than a partial
discovery.
CCS Navigator screen. The Discovery pane does not appear when Magellan CCS
Navigator is in Control mode.
To run a full discovery, complete these steps:
1 In Build mode, click Options... on the Discovery pane button bar to open the Discovery
Options dialog box.
2 Select the Hosts tab of the Discovery Options box and ensure that there is a check beside
Enable scanning of IP addresses and Enable scanning of MAC addresses.
Figure 6-4 Start Options Section of Hosts Tab, Discovery Options Box
The Hosts list can be empty in order to run a full discovery. If there are items in the Hosts
list, they should not have a check mark in the left-most column.
86 Chapter 6
3 Select the Save tab of the Discovery Options box, and then select one of the discovered
device names formats.
For more information on Discovery Save options, see Setting Discovery Save Options on
page 83.
4 Click OK to apply the changes and close the Discovery Options box.
5 Click Start on the Discovery pane button bar.
The Discovery tool pings all IP addresses on the network, and then logs the IP addresses
and device IDs for all responding CCS-compliant devices in the Discovery pane’s Status
dialog box.
Figure 6-5 Discovery Pane Status Messages

If you do not click Stop, the discovery stops automatically when it finishes searching the
CCS Network.
6 When the discovery is complete, click Save on the Discovery pane button bar to transfer
the discovery results to the Discovery folder in the Navigation pane.
The Status box of the Discovery pane logs these actions.
Running a Partial Discovery

To save time, you may want to discover only a subset of the IP addresses on your network
instead of scanning the entire network. To run a partial discovery, complete these steps:
1 Point to Tools on the menu bar, and then click Discovery to open the Discovery pane.
User Manual
Figure 6-6 Discovery Pane

2 Click Options... on the Discovery pane button bar to open the Discovery Options box.
3 On the Hosts tab, select the Enable scanning of IP addresses check box, if it is not
already selected.
Figure 6-7 Start Options Section of Hosts Tab

4 Add IP addresses for the devices you want to discover. See Setting Host IP Addresses for
a Discovery on page 77 for more information.
5 Set your Discovery Save options. See Setting Discovery Save Options on page 83 for
more information.
and device IDs for all responding devices in the Discovery pane’s Status box.

8 The button bar in the Discovery pane includes a Stop button. To halt the discovery, click
Stop.
88 Chapter 6
If you do not click Stop, the discovery will stop automatically when it finishes searching the
CCS Network.
The Status box of the Discovery pane logs these actions.
IP Settings and Device ID Configuration

When equipment is first connected to a CCS network or is returned to its factory default
settings, many devices may have a common default IP address. You can perform IP address
configuration as part of a MAC address discovery.
If you have run a discovery using the Enable Scanning of MAC Addresses Start
option, and you have also selected Configure IP Settings and/or Device IDs, upon
completion of the discovery process, before being offered to save the results of your
discovery, the following window will open:
Figure 6-9. IP Settings and Device ID Configuration
Table 6-4 IP Settings and Device ID Configuration Options

Item Function
Query Device Connection When checked, the dialog box contains an additional column (at the far right of
Status the dialog box) for Connection Status.
Per Discovered Device
Configure (check) Magellan CCS Navigator will attempt to assign new IP address settings
and/or IDs to devices that are checked.
MAC Address Displays the device’s unique ENET identifier.
(Read-only)
Device Type Displays the family the device belongs to.
(Read-only)
User Manual
Table 6-4 IP Settings and Device ID Configuration Options (Continued)

Item Function
Device Name The custom name of the device that is returned by the low-level discovery. This
name appears in the Navigation pane, and is not sent to the device.
This column is not available for some devices.

Current Settings ID The New Settings options can be updated only if
(read-only) Configure is checked at the start of the row.
IP Address
New Settings Subnet Mask
(editable)
Gateway
Server Displays the current server IP address. This field is editable so that you can
configure it for router devices.
Status Indicates the state of a re-assignment operation:
[x] indicates failure
[check] indicates success
If the field is empty, no change has been applied.
Connection Status This column only appears when the Query Device Connection Status option in
the top left corner of the dialog box is checked.
This column updates every 30 seconds. Disconnected devices display red.
When you have completed the IP Settings and Device ID Configuration screen, click Apply.
A progress bar indicates which device is currently being updated.
When the update for a device is complete, the Status column indicates whether the update
was successful.
If you cancel out of this window without applying changes or clicking OK (to accept the
window the way it is), your discovery is considered to be cancelled. You will not be offered
the opportunity to save the results of the discovery, and the Navigation pane will not be
updated with the results of the discovery.
Finding a If you discover more than one of the same device using MAC addresses, you may need to
Device find out which specific hardware device is which. Follow these steps:
1 Right click one of the identical devices in the IP Settings and Device ID
Configuration dialog box.
2 Select Identify Device from the menu that appears.
The device responds by blinking a light on its control panel.
Not all devices are capable of responding to an Identify request. Se the documentation for
your product for more information.
3 To cancel the response, right click the row again and choose Cancel Identify Device.
Configuring Multiple Devices

Follow these steps to assign a range of IP address/Device IDs to a group of selected devices.
90 Chapter 6
1 On the IP Settings and Device ID Configuration dialog box, select a range of

devices by clicking the start of the range, holding down the Shift key, and clicking the end
of the range.
2 Click Setting Options.
A window similar to the following appears:
Figure 6-10 IP Settings and Device ID Options Dialog Box

3 Place a check beside each setting you want to apply to the devices, and then complete the
row for that item.
Table 6-5 describes the various options and their functionality.
Table 6-5 IP Settings and Device ID Options for Low-Level Discovery

Item Function
Select All Selects all checkboxes on the dialog box.
Clear All Unselects all selected checkboxes on the dialog box.
IP Address Range Enter the first IP address in the IP Address Range field, and the
last three digits of the last IP address in the To field. The IP
addresses are assigned sequentially to the selected devices.
Subnet Mask Define the number range that can connect to the frame over
Ethernet.
Default Gateway Define the server the connection happens over.
Server IP Address This sets all the selected devices to share the same server.
Device ID Range Device IDs apply to Platinum frames and some other routers.
Any item that is left unchecked uses the default setting
4 Click OK.
5 In the IP Settings and Device ID Configuration dialog box, click Apply.
A progress bar indicates which device is currently being updated.
When the update for a device is complete, the Status column indicates whether the update
was successful.
User Manual
6 Click OK to close the IP Settings and Device ID Configuration dialog box and
discover the devices at their new IP locations.
Rediscovery
When a device appears in the Navigation pane, you can rediscover it. This is especially
useful with routers, and with frames that may have their contents change. To rediscover a
device:
1 In Build mode, right-click on a device in the Network, Discovery, or Temporary folder,

and then select Rediscover.
A discovery starts, looking only for the device at that IP address. When the discovery is
complete, the device information is updated in the Navigation pane.
Copying Discovery Results

After a discovery runs, the set of resource icons contained in your Discovery folder is an
outline of your CCS network.
You can copy the resource icons in the Discovery folder into either the Network folder or
the Temporary folder. There you can customize the graphical representation of the
network in the application to make it more understandable and reflective of the actual
organization of your network.
1 Select a top-level device in the Discovery folder, point to File on the menu bar, and then
click Copy.
 Select the resource icon of the target folder, either the Network folder or the
Temporary folder, then point to File on the menu bar, and then click Paste.
 Select a top-level device icon and drag-and-drop it on top of the Network or
Temporary folder icon, and then click Yes to confirm.
Either action transfers the top-level device and its children into the Network or Temporary
folder.
3 Repeat this copy-and-paste or drag-and-drop action for each of the top-level devices in the
Discovery folder, until all have been copied into the Network or Temporary folder.
4 Click the Save icon on the toolbar to save the new layout.
92 Chapter 6
Using the Discovery Shortcut Menu

Right-click inside the Discovery pane to open a shortcut menu.
Table 6-6 Discovery Shortcut Menu

Command Function
Allow Toggles the docking feature on and off. If docking is off, the pane floats.
Docking To float the pane, drag and drop its title bar. To dock it again, drag and
drop it to the border where you want to dock it.
Move Enables you to move an undocked Discovery pane around.
Hide Hides the Discovery pane. Reopen it by opening the Discovery tool
from the Tools menu.
You can dock the Discovery pane to the left or right border of the main panel or “float” it
anywhere on the computer screen.
Using the Discovery Column in the Tree View

The Navigation pane contains an optional Discovery column, which can provide valuable
information about devices found during a discovery.
The Discovery column shows only in Build mode. The Navigation pane shows other
columns when you change to Control mode. Here is a list of the possible comments in the
Discovery column and what they mean:
Table 6-7 Discovery Column Comments

Comment Means
New The Discovery tool found a previously undiscovered network
resource. This information will be updated in the Discovery folder.
Not Found The Discovery tool did not find a previously discovered network
resource in the Navigation pane on the real network. The resource
could be off-line or disconnected from the network.
Found The Discovery tool has discovered this network resource during a
previous discovery.
Not Searched The Discovery tool did not find a previously discovered network
resource in the Navigation pane on the real network. This happens
when you have changed the Discovery options and removed that
resource from the list of IP hosts for a discovery.
ProcedureEnabling the Discovery Column

To show a Discovery column in the Navigation pane, you must enable this feature in the
Navigation Options box. The Discovery column appears only in Build mode.
See Setting Navigation Options on page 120.

93
7 Network View Construction
Network View Overview

The Navigation pane contains a hierarchical representation of the content and organization
of the CCS devices in your network. The hierarchy is made up of resource icons can be
nested into groups for different users in different ways, and modified with customized text
and optional columns.
The Navigation pane can only be altered by an administrator in Build mode on a Magellan
CCS Navigator Server install.
Figure 7-1 Hierarchy in the Navigation Pane

For Administrator users, the Navigation pane has a System tab and a User tab for each
defined user. The System view is a view of all the devices discovered or created on the
network, and each User view is a customized subset of the network.
Figure 7-2 Administrator’s View of Various Tabs

For each Operator user, the Navigation pane has one tab, showing just the devices that the
user has access to for monitoring, configuration, or control. This access is determined when
creating or modifying user accounts. For information on creating, deleting, and modifying
user accounts, see Managing User Accounts on page 32.
94 Chapter 7
Network View Construction
Updating the Navigation Pane on a Client PC

Only an Administrator user on a Magellan CCS Navigator Server can alter the Navigation
pane. When resources on the Navigation pane are changed on a
NAVIGATOR-SRV-licensed PC, on all connected NAVIGATOR-CLI-licensed PCs the Reload
button will be enabled to indicate that a network resource has been updated. Click
Reload from the toolbar, or right click in the Navigation pane and click Reload, or select
View > Reload from the main menu to update the Navigation pane.
Resource The Navigation pane contains folders that represent the physical hierarchy and
Folders organization of the CCS devices.
Figure 7-3 Navigation Pane with all Folders Closed

The table below describes the folders in the resource tree.
Table 7-1 Folders in the Resource Tree

Folder Description
Network Contains the currently operational network organization and CCS
devices
Routers Contains routing system configurations
Discovery Contains resource icons representing the CCS devices found during
a discovery
Temporary Stores currently unused network information; alarms for devices in
the Temporary folder are not forwarded like other alarm when alarm
forwarding is configured
Configuration Contains configuration information for various CCS control panels
and NEO frames
This folder appears in the Navigation pane for administrators on a

Magellan CCS Navigator Server only; Client users will not see this
folder.
User Manual
Table 7-1 Folders in the Resource Tree (Continued)

Folder Description
Catalog Contains lists of all CCS equipment that CCS Magellan CCS
Navigator supports, organized into subfolders for each compatible
product line
Preset Contains preset files storing values for common control settings for
CCS devices
Virtual Device Contains all virtual devices defined in the system; see Creating
Virtual Devices and Assigning Favorites to Virtual Devices on
page 166 for more information
This folder appears in the Navigation pane for administrators on a

Magellan CCS Navigator Server only; Client users will not see this
folder.
Sorting Items in the Resource Tree

If a folder contains a number of sub-folders, for ease of finding things within that folder,
you can put the items therein in alphanumeric order.
1 Right click on an item in the resource tree.

2 Select Sort Subnodes by Name.
If this option is not available, then the selected item does not have any sub-folders.
Resource Administrator users on a Magellan CCS Navigator Server can use resource icons to create
Icons custom views of the devices on the CCS network, rename the icons and use them
to represent other objects. Magellan CCS Navigator Server must be in Build mode to effect
changes in the Navigation Pane.
The table below shows the resource icons that might appear in a tree view.
Table 7-2 Resource Icons

Icon Node What the Icon Represents
Configuration Configuration information for a NEO frame or CCS control
panel and their assigned devices or modules
Control Panel A hardware device that provides control to parameters of one

or more devices
Folder A container for groups of devices
Frame A chassis containing one or more CCS products or functional

blocks
Functional A CCS module controlled as a single unit

Block
Signal Monitor An input signal for monitoring

96 Chapter 7
Table 7-2 Resource Icons (Continued)

Gateway A CCS device that translates between two languages, enables
devices to access and control CCS devices. Supported
gateways include the following:
 CCS Protocol
 CCS DPS-Gateway
Routing System A system to represent control and configuration of linked
routing devices
Tie-line Configures tie lines and starts the Dynamic Routing Framework
Manager (DRFM)
Control View Configures logical routing information
Multiviewer Appears in your Navigation pane when you discover an

System Imagine Communications Multiviewer; this icon is a parent
icon that will contain Layout Designer, PIP, and output module
icons.
Layout Appears in your Navigation pane when you discover an
Designer Imagine Communications Multiviewer; double click to start
Layout Designer, a configuration tool for the multiviewer’s
output module. This instance of Layout Designer will contain IP
address information for the multiviewer it started under.
PIP A Picture-in-Picture associated with a multiviewer
Timer Control An up or down counter that is normally associated with a

PredatorII multiviewer
HTTP Server An HTTP Web server
Product One or more CCS functional blocks controlled as one unit
Rack An equipment rack containing one or more frames
Salvo Preconfigured group of routing actions that can be executed

simultaneously
Server A group of CCS products and functional blocks discovered

under the same IP address
Signal Path The pathway of signals within a broadcast facility
Studio A building, area, or room containing one or more racks of CCS

devices
Amino STB Amino device copied from the Catalog folder, which can be
configured to monitor an AmiNET120 or AmiNET500 set-top
box
User Manual
Table 7-2 Resource Icons (Continued)

NEXIO System Appears in your Navigation pane when you create a NEXIO
system using the NEXIO wizard; this icon is a parent icon that
will contain group, servers, data storage, and drivers icons.
After configuring an EDGE-DPS575 gateway, do not change the names of its associated
DPS-475/575 synchronizers. Do not remove the IP address that is part of a DPS-475/575
synchronizer’s name.
To rename a resource icon, perform one of these actions while in build mode:
 Right-click the resource icon you want to rename, select Rename from the resulting
shortcut menu, and then type the new name in place of the selected icon name.
 Right-click the resource icon you want to rename, select Properties from the resulting
shortcut menu, and then change its Name, Short Name, or Alternate on the
General tab of the resulting Navigation Properties box. See Setting Navigation
Properties on page 103 for more information.
 Single-click the name of the resource icon twice in succession, with a slight pause
between clicks. Then type the new name in the place of the selected icon name.
 Select the resource icon, press F2, and then type the new name in the place of the
selected icon name.
Navigating the Resource Tree

The resource icons in the Navigation pane can potentially contain or hold one or more
other CCS devices in much the same way that a file folder could contain one or more items.
The Discovery folder

contains items that
are being displayed.
The Temporary folder
contains items that
are not being
displayed.
The Configuration
folder does not
contain other items.
Figure 7-4 Resource Tree

The presence of a plus symbol (+) to the left of a folder or resource icon indicates that the
folder or resource icon contains other objects, but the resource tree is currently hiding its
contents.
To show the contents of a closed folder or container resource, click the plus (+) symbol to
the left of that folder or resource icon.
The presence of a minus (-) symbol to the left of a folder or resource icon indicates that the
folder or resource icon is showing its contents.
To hide the contents of a container resource, click the minus symbol

(-) to the left of the folder or resource icon.
98 Chapter 7
The absence of either a plus (+) or minus (-) symbol to the left of a folder or resource icon
indicates that the folder or CCS device has no contents.
Finding Items in the Navigation Pane

Use the Find tool to search the Navigation pane for text that meets your search criteria --
for example, searching for a resource by product name or type. Complete these steps:
1 Click Find... on the Edit menu.
Figure 7-5 Find Box

2 In the Find what box on the Find box, type the text you seek, or click the down arrow and
select an object from the list.
3 Check the Match whole word only box if you want to only search for whole words
containing the search text, or clear the Match whole word only box if you want to search
for mentions of the text that are part of other text.
4 Check the Match case box if you want to search only for text with matching case, or clear
the box if you want to search for the text in any case.
5 Select Up or Down for the direction of the search.
6 Click Find Next to start the search.
The application highlights the first instance of matching text in the Navigation pane.
7 Click Find Next repeatedly to find additional instances of the search text.
8 When you finish searching, click Cancel or Close.
Starting Software From the Navigation Pane

You can start various non-Magellan CCS Navigator software tools from within Magellan
CCS Navigator, including:
 Layout Designer—Double-click a Layout Designer icon under a Multiviewer

system in the Discovery, Catalog, or Network folder.
 DRFM—Double-click a Tie Line node in the Navigation pane’s Routers folder.
 Amino STB—Double-click an Amino STB device in the Catalog > Third Party,
Discovery, or Network folder.
If the software does not start, and you receive an error message saying that the application
directory was not found, ensure that the software is installed correctly. To redirect Magellan
CCS Navigator to find the software at the correct location, see Setting the Command
Tab on page 107.
User Manual
Adding Resources to the Navigation Pane

Only an Administrator user on a Magellan CCS Navigator Server can customize the contents
of the Navigation pane. Magellan CCS Navigator must be in build mode.
All modifications are done on the System tab, which shows all the devices discovered or
created on the network. Each User tab is a customized subset of the network that is based
on the devices that user has access to. For information on defining access privileges for
users, see Managing User Accounts on page 32.
If there are no devices populating the Navigation pane, you will start by adding devices.
You should update the System view of the CCS network whenever new CCS devices are
added to the network. You can either manually add resource icons representing the new
devices and then configure their IP addresses, or you can have the Discovery tool add the
relevant icons by running a full or partial discovery.
The following topics describe the methods of adding items to the Navigation pane:
 CCS Device Discovery on page 75

 Using the Create Tool to Add a Resource Icon on page 99
 Copying and Pasting a Resource Icon on page 100
You can use some of the resource icons—such as folders, signals, racks, and studios—to
group your devices into physical or logical hierarchies or divisions. You can also add, delete,
move, or rename resource icons.
Server icons, with the exception of HTTP and SNMP server icons, do not represent actual
devices but serve as place holders for the IP address for a child device or set of devices. The
plus sign (+) to the left of a server icon indicates that this server icon has undisclosed child
resources.
The usual hierarchy for resources in the Navigation pane is as follows:
 Network icons contain studio, signal path, and folder icons.

 Studio and folder icons contain rack icons.
 Rack icons contain server icons.
 Server icons contain frame, control panel, and gateway icons.
 Frame icons contain product icons and/or functional block icons.
 Signal path icons contain product icons and/or functional block icons.
Two examples of how resources can be organized are provided in the following examples:
 Sample Resource Tree for an Engineer User on page 114

 Sample Resource Tree for an Operator User on page 114
Using the Create Tool to Add a Resource Icon

You might create items such as server devices using the Create tool. To create a new
resource icon, complete these steps:
1 Right-click the resource icon that you want to parent or contain the new resource icon.
2 Select Create from the resulting shortcut menu.
3 Select the type of resource icon you would like to create from the Create submenu.
4 Rename this new icon.
100 Chapter 7
5 Set its IP address and navigation properties.

See the following topics:
 Setting Navigation Properties on page 103

 Setting the IP Address of a CCS Device on page 129
 Setting the IP Address of a New CCS Device on page 130
Copying and Pasting a Resource Icon

You might copy and paste a resource icon that cannot be discovered, but which exists in the
Catalog, such as an Amino STB device.
To create a new resource icon by the copy-and-paste method, complete these steps:
1 Right-click the resource icon you want to copy, and select Copy from the resulting shortcut
menu.
The source icon can be in any folder on your network, including the Catalog folder.
2 Right-click the proposed container icon, then select Paste from the resulting shortcut
menu.
3 Rename the resource to distinguish it from the source icon.
You can use a copied device to configure control panels, create rules, etc., while a device is
unavailable, and when the device is available, paste that device’s data before completing
configuration of the device.
4 Configure the IP address of the new resource location by setting the Navigation properties.
You can add Device ID information manually, or you can copy and paste it from a like
device.

 Setting the Device Tab on page 105
 Editing an IP Address on page 100
Editing an IP Address
If you know the current IP address setting of a device in the Navigation pane, and would like
to change it (for example, if you have created an off-line device and have configured
favorites for it, and would now like to update with the actual IP address), follow these steps:
1 From the main menu, choose Edit > IP Address.

The Replace IP dialog box opens:
User Manual
Figure 7-6 Replace IP Dialog Box

2 In the Find IP Address field, enter the IP address the device is currently known at in the
Navigation pane.
For best results, when creating a device, you should change the IP address from the default
of 255.255.255.255. Editing an IP address replaces the address information for all devices
that have the same IP address.
3 In the Replace With field, enter the actual IP address of the device.
4 Click Replace.
Magellan CCS Navigator searches the Device tab of all devices in the Network and Discovery
folders of the Navigation pane. All devices with the IP address it searches for will be
replaced with the new IP address.
Deleting a Resource Icon

Choose either of these methods to delete a resource icon:
 Right-click the resource icon you want to delete, and then select Delete from the
resulting shortcut menu.
 Select the resource icon you want to delete, and then press the Delete key on your
keyboard.
This function is only available to Magellan CCS Navigator resource icons, linked graphical
objects, and Navigator pages that have been created in Navigator 1.7 or later.
Magellan CCS Navigator tracks the links of nodes that are dragged from the resource tree
and the resulting graphical objects in Magellan CCS Navigator pages (see Graphical
Navigation Page Creation on page 7 of CCS RouterNAV: Router Specific Plug-in).
When you delete a node from the resource tree, if it is linked to any graphical objects, a
Confirm Delete box appears. This box lists all of the linked pages and their paths, and
gives you the option to either continue with the deletion or to cancel your request. If you
delete the node, any linked graphical objects will lose the double-click actions of their
parent, but will still retain any rules that you have defined for them.
102 Chapter 7
Figure 7-7 Confirm Node Deletion Box
Dragging and Dropping a Resource Icon

Drag-and-drop results depend on whether the resource icons involved in the operation (one
or more dragged icons and the target icon onto which the dragged icons are dropped) have
the same parent icon or different ones. If the icons have the same parent, they will remain
siblings after the move, but the dragged icons will be inserted after the target icon. If the
icons have different parents, they will become children of the target icon after the move.
To move a resource icon from one parent icon to another parent or to reorder a group of
sibling icons, complete these steps:
1 Select the resource icon you want to move.

2 Hold down the mouse button and drag the icon on top of the new parent or sibling icon.
3 Release the mouse button to drop the icon.
4 If a query box asks you to confirm the drag-and-drop action, click OK.
Cutting and Pasting a Resource Icon

To move a resource icon by the cut-and-paste method, complete these steps:
1 Right-click the resource icon you want to move.

2 Select Cut from the resulting shortcut menu.
3 Right-click the proposed parent icon.
4 Select Paste from the resulting shortcut menu.
Copying an Identical Resource Icon

To add resource icons to a network view by copying icons from another location in the
resource tree (such as the Catalog folder), complete these steps:
1 Copy the icon of an identical resource from an existing location in the resource tree.
The Catalog folder, located at the bottom of the tree in the Navigation pane, is the easiest
place to find an identical resource icon, since it contains an up-to-date list of all supported
CCS devices. However, you can instead copy a resource icon from elsewhere in your
resource tree if you have already installed an identical device elsewhere in the network.
User Manual
2 Select the target container resource for the copied resource icons and paste the copied
icons into the new container or parent resource.
3 To set the new resource's properties, including its IP address, so that the software
application can communicate with the new resource, right-click the resource icon and select
Properties from the resulting shortcut menu.
See Setting Navigation Properties on page 103 for information on all the Navigation
Properties options.
4 Click Close.
Setting the Color of Text on a Resource Icon

You can only change the color of resource icons in the Navigation pane one at a time.
To set the text color in the Navigation pane, complete these steps:
1 Change to Build mode, if you are in another mode (see Setting the Operational Mode on
page 37).
2 In the Navigation pane, right-click the resource icon whose text color you want to change,
and then click Text Color from the resulting shortcut menu.
3 In the Text Color box, clear the Use Default Text Color check box.
4 Select a color from the New Text Color box.
In the new Text Color box, select Other to select another color or specify a custom color.
5 In the Text Color box, click OK to accept the color selection.

See Setting Navigation Properties on page 103 for more information.
Setting Navigation Properties

You must be in Build mode to modify the Navigation Properties sheet.
Administrator users at a Magellan CCS Navigator Server can alter the navigation properties
for a device. General users of Magellan CCS Navigator Clients can view but not modify
device properties.
To show the Properties sheet of a CCS device, In the Navigation pane, right-click the icon
of the network resource whose properties you want to check, and then click Properties
104 Chapter 7
The Navigation Properties dialog box for the selected network resource appears. it
contains one or more of the following tabs, depending on the resource:
Table 7-3 Navigation Property Sheet Tabs

Tab Contains Reference
General Resource names, type, and description Setting General Navigation Properties
for a Device on page 104
Command Information about control and configuration Setting the Command Tab on page 107
commands to start standalone applications for
items in the Network, Discovery, or
Temporary folder
HTTP The URL of the Web page of a device with a Web Setting HTTP Properties on page 108
server
Monitor Point Information about the router source connected to Setting the Monitor Point
a device for signal monitoring Properties on page 108
Device Information about the Device Class, Device ID, Setting the Device Tab on page 105
Alarm Filtering, and Control Access Rights
of a network resource icon
Preset Information about the Device ID of a Preset icon Viewing the Preset Tab on page 109
Shortcut For informational purposes only -- data cannot be Using Navigation Shortcuts on
entered in the fields on this screen page 124
The target folder type (Network, Discovery,
Configuration, Temporary, Catalog, Virtual
Device or Preset) and target (path to the
resource through the Resource tree)
of a shortcut icon
SNMP Properties that allow SNMP communication with Setting SNMP Navigation
otherwise incompatible devices Properties on page 110
Communication When present, indicates whether you are Viewing the Communication Settings
Settings connected to a device using point-to-point or Tab on page 109
broadcast communication
Amino STB When present, provides configuration options for Setting the Amino STB Tab on
an AmiNET120 or AmiNET500 set-top box. page 111
Setting General Navigation Properties for a Device

On the General tab, you can set the device’s Short Name, Name, Alternate name, and
the resource’s Description.
User Manual
Figure 7-8 General Tab
To choose which name to view in the Navigation pane, see Setting Navigation
Options on page 120.
To change a name or description, select the current text and then type in new text. The
information in this dialog box is used as follows:
Table 7-4 Navigation General Properties

Option Function
Short Name An abbreviated form of the name, restricted to 20 characters for use
on control panels; also used when the device is in a Configuration
folder
Name The current product name, or one which you assign to the device
Alternate This product’s former name (if a former name doesn’t exist, this may
match the product’s Name)
Description The product’s full title, as displayed in its product literature
Type Description based on where within the Navigation pane the device is
found
Subnodes Count Indicates the number of items in the next level below this node in the
Navigation pane; does not provide a count of all the items in all the
levels below
Setting the Device Tab

In some nodes, you cannot change the Device ID. In such a case, this field will be read-only.
On the Device tab of the Navigation Properties box, you can set the Device class (type
of resource), Device ID, and alarm filtering.
To set the Device tab for a resource in the Navigation pane, right-click the resource icon,
select Properties from the resulting shortcut menu, and select the Device tab.
106 Chapter 7
Figure 7-9 Device Tab of Navigation Properties Box
Table 7-5 Navigation Properties Device Tab Options

Option Function
Device Class Defines the graphic that represents the resource in the Navigation
pane (The icons are shown and described in Table 7-2 on page 95)
Device ID Defines the device so that Magellan CCS Navigator can communicate
with it, divided into four fields:
 EP/IP - Communication protocol the device uses
 IP address - Address where the item is found on your network
 Device Hierarchy - System node, frame node, slot location (if
applicable), and sub-device number (if applicable) of the device
 Family ID / Product ID - Product group and device catalog ID
When the IP address, Device Hierarchy, and Family or Product ID are
identical to other devices, the changes made on this window will be
updated to those other devices when this window closes or switches to
another device.
Set Default Sets the IP address field to the factory default. Other fields remain
unchanged
Copy Copies the Device ID information
Paste Pastes previously copied Device ID information
Alarm Filtering Indicates whether the software application is filtering the alarms for
this resource (Enabled when checked)
When alarms are filtered, they are stored in the alarms log database.
They will not show on any other tabs of the diagnostic database.
Control Window Determines whether a custom or default Control dialog box will open
when the device is clicked on in Control mode; if there is not a custom
Control dialog box, and you have a Graphical Navigation license, click
the Browse button to select a Graphical Navigation page to launch.
Control Access Indicates whether access to the resource is enabled. This box is read
Rights only (See Assigning Access Rights on page 28 for information on
how Administrators can change control access rights)
User Manual
Setting the Command Tab

By default, when you click a resource icon in the Navigation pane in Build mode, a
Configuration dialog box opens. When you click the same resource icon in Control
mode, a Control dialog box opens. You can reconfigure a resource icon to launch a
non-Magellan CCS Navigator application instead.
Some resource icons are pre-configured to launch a specific application. For example, the
Imagine Communications Layout Designer icon in a Multiviewer folder
launches the Layout Designer software.
When you click this icon in the

Navigation pane, Layout
Designer launches outside
Magellan CCS Navigator.
Figure 7-10 Layout Designer Icon in the Navigation Pane

When various actions have been configured for a resource icon, the one that is highest
priority always launches.
 In Build mode, the highest priority is a HTTP page, if one is configured, followed by any
item configured on the Command tab, with the lowest priority being the default
Configuration window.
 In Control mode, the highest priority is the Custom page for a resource icon, if one is
configured. In the absence of a custom page, if there is a HTTP page, that will launch. If
there is no HTTP page, any item that is configured in the Command tab launches, and if
there is not one of those, then the default Control window launches when you
double-click the icon.
Starting Non-Magellan CCS Navigator Applications from the

Navigation Pane
You can also use application nodes, such as SuiteView, to start non-Magellan CCS Navigator
applications and to monitor SNMP traps.
To configure a resource icon, to start a non-Magellan CCS Navigator software application

from the Navigation pane, complete these steps:
1 Right-click the resource icon in the Navigation pane, and then select Properties
The Navigation Properties dialog box appears.
108 Chapter 7
Browse
buttons
Figure 7-11 Control Operation Settings for the Command Tab

2 Select the Command tab.
3 Beside Operation select one of the following:
 Configuration—to determine the resource icon’s behavior in Build mode.
 Control—to determine the resource icon’s behavior in Control mode.
4 Beside Command, click the Browse button and then browse to the location of the
executable you want to launch.
5 Select the executable and click OK.
6 (Optional) Type the path to the default dialog box of the application in the Arguments box.
7 (Optional) Beside Initial Directory, clickhe Browse button and then browse to the
location of the initial data directory.
8 Select the folder and click OK, and then click Close to close the Properties dialog box.
You can create different commandsfor Build and Control modes for the same resource icon,
or you can create the same command for both modes.
You can also start non-Magellan CCS Navigator applications from objects in the Graphical
Navigation pane by creating Launch Application actions. See Setting Properties for a
‘Launch Application’ Action on page 75 of CCS RouterNAV: Router Specific Plug-in for more
information.
Setting the Monitor Point Properties

The Monitor Point Properties tab appears when an item can be monitored. You must
set the router source before you can use the Signal Monitor tool to view the signal.
To set the Monitor Point properties, follow this procedure.
1 In the Navigation pane, right click on a routing view. The Navigation Properties
dialog box appears.
2 Click on the Monitor Point tab.
3 From the Router Source menu, choose a router source input.
4 Click the X in the top right corner of the dialog box to save your changes and close.
Setting HTTP If the selected resource has a Web server, you can set the URL of the Web page by following
Properties this procedure:
1 In the Navigation pane, right click on a device.

The Navigation Properties dialog box appears.
User Manual
2 Select the HTTP tab.

3 Type in the URL of the Web page.
Viewing the Items in the Navigation pane’s Preset folder have a Preset tab. The Preset tab has one
Preset Tab read-only field.
To view the Preset tab, right click on an item in the Navigation pane and select
Properties from the menu that appears. The Navigation Properties dialog box appears.
Click on the Preset tab.
Presets are only available for the full version of Magellan CCS Navigator.
See Using Presets on page 270 for information on using presets.
Viewing the Shortcut Tab

A resource has a Shortcut tab if you have created a shortcut to the resource icon, or if the
resource has a pre-configured shortcut. For example, a virtual device in the
Configuration folder will have a shortcut to the Virtual Devices folder.
The Shortcut tab contains information about target folder type (Network, Discovery
Configuration, Temporary, Catalog, or Preset) and target (path to the resource through
the Resource tree) for the Shortcut icon.
To view the Shortcut tab for a device, right click on its icon in the Navigation pane, select
Properties, and then click on the Shortcut tab.
For information about shortcuts, see Using Navigation Shortcuts on page 124.
Viewing the Communication Settings Tab

Some devices have an extra tab in the Navigation Properties dialog box to show the
communication type. This tab is read-only and for informational purposes only. To view the
communication settings of such a device, right-click on its icon in the Navigation pane,
and select Properties, and then click on the Communication Settings tab.
Non-router devices have the following information:
Table 7-6 Communication Types

Communication Type Meaning
Broadcast (Default) Used when the client PC and the device are on
the same network subnet
Point-to-point Used when the controlling PC and the device are on
different subnets
This setting is fixed per device and is determined when the device is discovered and saved.
For Routing Systems, the Communication tab is configurable for Connection type (Serial or
TCP/IP) COM Port and Baud rate. For more information, see Volume 6: Routing
Configuration.
110 Chapter 7
Setting SNMP Navigation Properties

To set the SNMP properties for server and application class nodes, follow these steps:
1 In the Navigation pane, right click on the server or application class node. The
Navigation Properties dialog box appears.
All server and application class nodes that you have given a device ID have an SNMP tab in
the Navigation Properties dialog box.
2 If there is not an SNMP tab, choose the Device tab, and in the field labeled Device
class, choose either Server or Application. Now, enter a Device ID. The SNMP tab
appears. Click on it.
Figure 7-12 SNMP Tab

3 Place a check beside SNMP enabled. This confirms that the server is in fact an SNMP
device, and can be status monitored.
4 Select the SNMP version, either SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c.
5 If you want to monitor the status of the device, check Status Polling.
Even when Status Polling is disabled, the device is still queried for status when starting
Magellan CCS Navigator, when switching to Control mode, and with every Refresh or
RefreshAll command.
6 Enter the name of the Read Community, if different from the default of public.
7 Enter the name of the Write Community, if different from the default of private.
8 Enter the SNMP Port for the device.
The default port is 161. The port can number can range from 0 to 65535.
9 Enter the Timeout period, in seconds.

The allowable timeout period can range from 1 to 1000 seconds.
10 Enter the Number of Retries to be allowed.

The default number of retries is 1. The number of retries can range from 1 to 1000.
11 Enter the Polling Interval, in seconds.

The default polling interval is 30 seconds. The interval can range from 1 to 65535 seconds.
Magellan CCS Navigator will periodically poll all OIDs of the specified SNMP device.
User Manual
Setting Navigation Properties for an SNMP Server

Because SNMP does not support the concept of alarm clearing, follow the steps at Limiting
the Number of Listed SNMP Traps on page 64 to avoid excessive numbers of alarms
being triggered.
You can monitor SNMP servers on your network for SNMP traps. Magellan CCS Navigator
shows the content of the SNMP traps as alarm records in the Diagnostics dialog box.
To configure a device to send SNMP traps to a PC’s IP address, look for instructions in that
device’s user manual.
To set the navigation properties for an SNMP server that you want to monitor, complete
these steps:
1 In the Navigation pane, right click in the Network or Discovery folder and select
Create > Server from the shortcut menu, or select an existing server icon.
2 Right-click the server icon and select Properties from the resulting shortcut menu.
This will show the Navigation Properties box.
3 Select the Device tab, and in the first field to the right of Device ID, select IP from the list
box.
In the second field to the right of Device ID, type in the device IP address.
4 Click Close.
If the device has been configured to send SNMP traps to the PC that houses Magellan CCS
Navigator, when Magellan CCS Navigator is in Control mode, it will receive those traps as
alarms.
Setting the Amino STB Tab

The Amino STB tab of the Navigation Properties dialog box only appears for Amino
STB devices created in the Navigation pane.
When an Amino device is created and configured for Status monitoring and Magellan CCS
Navigator is in Control mode, if the Amino is not functioning correctly, it will have an alarm
indicator (red) in the Alarms column of the Navigation pane. The Status column will
indicate if the device is inactive. Malfunctioning Amino devices on Graphical
Navigation panels will display a red flashing border. An alarm and description will appear
in the Diagnostics pane.
To create an Amino STB module in the Navigation pane, follow these steps:
1 With Magellan CCS Navigator in Build mode, copy Amino STB from the Catalog >
Third Party Devices folder of the Navigation pane.
112 Chapter 7
Copy Amino STB from Third Party

Devices folder
Figure 7-13 Third Party Devices Folder in Navigation Pane

2 Right click on the Network folder and click Paste.
An Amino STB icon appears in the Network folder of the Navigation pane.
3 Right click on the Amino STB icon in the Network folder, and then select Properties
from the menu that appears.
4 Click on the Device tab.
5 Enter the IP address of the Amino STB device.
6 If you change the location of the STB Utility program from its default, click the Control tab
and enter the path in the Command field.
7 Click on the Amino STB tab.
Figure 7-14 Amino STB Tab of the Navigation Properties Dialog Box
By default, Status Polling is checked. In this state, Magellan CCS Navigator will monitor
the Amino device’s status while in Control mode.
8 Click the Browse button beside Amino Keyfile Name, browse to the location of the
STBrc-KEY.private file, and then click Open.
The keyfile is provided by Amino.
9 Enter the Keyfile Access Key for the Amino device.

The access key is provided by Amino.
User Manual
Other options that are available on this tab include the following:
Table 7-7 Amino STB Navigation Properties options

Option Function
Time to Live (TTL) Determines how many network switches can exist between your
device (in this case the Amino STB) and the Magellan CCS
Navigator PC. Normally you should leave this setting at its default.
Polling Interval (s) The number of seconds between polls of the Amino device
Timeout Interval (s) The minimum duration an error condition must be present in
order to trigger the error
10 Close the Navigation Properties dialog box.

You can now monitor the Amino STB device in Control mode, add it to Graphical
Navigation pages, etc.
Magellan CCS Navigator has no controls or alarm configuration tools for Amino devices. To
configure an Amino device, use the Amino STB Remote Configure Client.
When the Amino STB tab is correctly configured, you can double click on the Amino icon
in the Navigation pane or Graphical Navigation page, in Build or Control mode, and
open the Amino STB Remote Configure Client, if the Amino application has been installed.
Amino devices can generate four alarms, as described in the following table:
Table 7-8 Amino Alarms

Alarm Name Description
STBConfigLib Keyfile not The data in the Amino Keyfile Name field of the Amino
found STB tab is not correct. Correct the location to clear the
alarm. If this does not clear the alarm, please contact Amino
customer support.
STBConfigLib key not The Keyfile Access Key information on the Amino
decoded STB tab is not correct. Re-enter the key to clear the alarm.
If this is unsuccessful, please contact Amino customer
support.
Loss of connection or This alarm will clear when power resumes or connection to
power failure the module is revived. After the Amino device is reconnected
or reactivated, it may take 30 seconds for the alarm to clear.
Device is not responding This alarm occurs when the device loses connection and
properly. Please reboot the requires a reboot in order to restore status monitoring.
device and refresh device Reboot the Amino device, and within 30 seconds, Magellan
node to continue device CCS Navigator will status monitor the amino device.
monitoring
 Adding a Symbol from the Resource Tree on page 38

 Network Event Diagnostics on page 237
114 Chapter 7
Sample Resource Tree Views

General users will each use a custom tree view in the Navigation pane, illustrating the
devices they have permissions to access on the CCS network. These resource trees are
created by an administrator on a Magellan CCS Navigator Server. Here are two examples:
 Sample Resource Tree for an Engineer User on page 114

 Sample Resource Tree for an Operator User on page 114
Sample Resource Tree for an Engineer User

The sample resource tree for an Engineer user identifies the modules occupying each slot in
the frames by slot number. In addition, a studio icon has been renamed “Leitch Signal
Processing and Acquisition Wall” and a rack icon has been renamed “Central Rack.”
Figure 7-15 Sample Resource Tree for an Engineer User
Sample Resource Tree for an Operator User

In the sample resource tree for an Operator user, the operator wants to monitor which
signal lines flow to which equipment. The administrator has renamed several studio icons
to represent the “Signal Processing and Acquisition” process and three signal lines that
stream through the CCS devices he or she monitors.
The operator has no need to know which modules inhabit specific slots in a frame, but does
need to know how the signal flows from one device to the next.
User Manual
Figure 7-16 Sample Resource Tree for an Operator User
Example: FR6802+ Frames

Within the Navigation view, frames will contain modules.
When you connect a FR6802+ frame to your CCS network, that frame must contain an
ICE6800+ or 6800+ETH module, or it must be connected to a frame that contains an
ICE6800+ or 6800+ETH module. Up to eight secondary frames can be connected to the
FR6802+ frame that contains an ICE6800+ and up to three secondary frames can be
connected to a FR6802+QXF frame that contains a 6800+ETH module.
Figure 7-17 FR6802+ and ICE6800+ Possible Configuration

A QSEE6800+ module can have up to eight inputs. The inputs to the module would appear
as “contained” items beneath the QSEE6800+ module.
116 Chapter 7
Figure 7-18 QSEE6800+ Module With Inputs
Example: Multiviewer System

You must discover an Imagine Communications Multiviewer through the IP address of the
Ethernet connector on the output module in order to control the multiviewer, create
NUCLEUS configurations, etc.
In order to configure a CENTRIO panel for use with a NUCLEUS control panel, you must also
discover the Platinum frame in which the modules reside. See Volume 6: Routing
Configuration for more information.
Double-click to start Layout Designer software
The number of modules discovered under the Multiviewer system

corresponds to the physical output modules used to construct that
system. (Module-specific alarms will appear associated with the specific
module; while system-specific alarms are associated with the system
node.)
PIPs display their default System names.

In Build mode, all PIPs are listed. In Control mode, the PIPs used in the
current layout are listed.
The number of PIPs will depend on your system configuration, with 32
per display.
Figure 7-19. Multiviewer Components in Navigation Pane
Each Multiviewer system contains a Layout Designer node. Double click this node to
start Layout Designer. You must use Layout Designer to upload firmware to your Imagine
Communications Multiviewer modules, create and edit layouts, configure SNMP, etc. For
more information, see Starting Software From the Navigation Pane on page 98, and
your Layout Designer manual or online help.
User Manual
In Control mode, you can change the active layout for the Multiviewer system. When you
do this, the list of PIPs displayed in the Navigation pane will update to display only the PIPs
included in that layout. All PIPs are always listed in Build mode.
ProcedureOutput Module
Each Multiviewer system can be made up of several modules inside a Platinum frame. They
are listed in the Modules folder. Each module will display module-specific alarms, and has
Control and Configuration dialog boxes.
ProcedureMultiviewer PIPs
When you discover a multiviewer, PIPs will display their default System names. Each PIP is
treated as a device, and you can open Configuration and Control dialog boxes for individual
PIPs.
All PIPs are always listed in Build mode. In Control mode, only the PIPs included in the active
layout are listed in the Navigation pane. By default, each PIP displays its Live name (which
will update when the name designated on the hardware updates) and system name, but
you can change this using the Navigation Options settings.
See Setting Navigation Options on page 120. Table 7-13 on page 121 lists all the
naming options.
Using Navigation Shortcut Menus

When you right-click an object in the Navigation pane, a shortcut menu will appear. It
contains a list of commands related to navigation for the selected object.
The following table describes the available options found on navigation shortcut menus.
Some options are unavailable in some operational modes
Table 7-9 Navigation Shortcut Menu Commands

Command Client/Server Function Help Reference
Control Both Shows the Control dialog box for a selected Status Bar on page 49
resource
Control Both Shows the Control dialog boxes of the Status Bar on page 49
Contents container resource and all of its children
Configuration Both Shows the Configuration dialog box for a Opening and Closing a
selected resource (editable by Administrators of Configuration Dialog
Servers in Build mode only) Box on page 128
Refresh All Both Updates the status of all devices (usually unnessary under normal operating
circumstances)
Refresh Both Updates the status of the selected Amino or SNMP device
Reload Both Updates the contents of the Navigation pane from the Magellan CCS
Navigator Server
Cut Server only Cuts to the Windows Clipboard
Copy Server only Copies the selected object to the Windows Clipboard
118 Chapter 7
Table 7-9 Navigation Shortcut Menu Commands (Continued)

Command Client/Server Function Help Reference
Paste Server only Pastes the object currently residing on the Windows Clipboard
Delete Server only Deletes the selected object
Create > Server only Opens a dialog box for creating resource icons Using the Create Tool
to represent devices and shortcuts; and routers, to Add a Resource
edge, HW/SW panel, salvo, and tie-lines Icon on page 99 and
Creating a Shortcut on
page 125
Rename Server only Lets you rename the selected object
Text Color... Server only Opens a dialog box where you can choose a Setting the Color of
new text color Text on a Resource
Icon on page 103
Preset > Both Opens a dialog box for loading, saving or Using Presets on
deleting of a preset for a device or devices page 270
Alarm Filtering Both Turns on/off alarm monitoring on a CCS control Using Alarm
panel (individual alarm filtering) Filtering on page 236
Alarm Filtering Both Contains two options, which set the system to Using Alarm Filtering
Contents ignore or view alarms for all child resources on a Contents on page 236
CCS control panel
Standalone Both Provides options for adding or removing Navigation Pane on
Tools > standalone tools page 44
Options... Both Opens the Navigation Options box Setting Navigation
Options on page 120
Favorites... Server only Opens a dialog box where you can create a Configuring Favorites
limited set of parameters for a CCS control for a Device on
panel, or for configuring favorites in the page 229
Parameters pane (with the NAVIGATOR-INT
license only)
Copy Favorites Server only Copies the favorites from the selected devices
Paste Favorites Server only Pastes copied favorites to a like CCS device
Product Info Both Opens a product brochure for the selected
device in Adobe Acrobat Reader, if both
Acrobat Reader and the Magellan CCS
Navigator documentation are installed on the
PC
Help Both Shows the Online Help
Properties Both Shows the properties of a resource Setting Navigation
Properties on page 103
Poll Server only See Volume 6: Routing Configuration
Download Server only
Rediscover Server only Rediscovers an already-discovered device Rediscovery on page 91
Backup Server only See Volume 6: Routing Configuration
Restore Server only
Execute Both
User Manual
Checking the Control Access Rights for a Device

To check the control access rights for a network resource, complete these steps:
1 In the Navigation pane, right-click the resource icon whose access properties you want to
check, and then select Properties from the resulting shortcut menu.
This shows the General tab of the Navigation Properties box.
2 Click the Device tab.

Depending on the settings in the Control Access Rights box, the following situations may
occur:
Table 7-10 Possible Settings in the Control Access Rights Box

Setting Outcome
Enabled The application enables access to the resource.
Disabled The Application prevents access to the resource.
Limited The application prevents access to some parameters of the resource.
Administrators control access to a resource in setting up the access rights of the different
user groups. You acquire access to a resource through your membership in a specific user
group.
3 Click Close.
Showing Product Information for a CCS Device

To show a product brochure for a CCS resource, complete these steps:
1 Right-click the resource icon in the Navigation pane, and then select Product Info from
This starts Adobe Acrobat Reader and opens the CCS product brochure for the selected
resource.
Figure 7-20 A CCS Product Brochure in Adobe Acrobat Reader

2 Browse through this information, and print it if required.
120 Chapter 7
3 Click Close when you have finished using the brochure.
Setting Navigation Options

The Navigation Options box has the following tabs: General, Name Properties, and
Tree View. Controls on the General tab govern the behavior of objects in the Navigation
pane, controls on the Name Properties tab determine how device names are displayed
in the Navigation pane, and controls on the Tree View tab govern what appears in the
Navigation pane.
To open the Navigation Options box, do one of the following:
 Click Navigation on the Options menu.

OR
 Right-click in the Navigation pane and click Options....
OR
 Right-click the status bar and select Navigation.
Select the check boxes of options you want to enable, and clear those of options you want
to disable. The General tab has the following options:
Table 7-11 General Tab of Navigation Options

Check Box Option Function
Allow drag-and-drop Enables you to move or copy items by dragging them
operations in Build mode from one place to another with the mouse, including in
and out of Graphical Navigation dialog boxes if you
have a NAVIGATOR-SRV license
Show confirmation window Shows a Confirmation dialog box after each
for drag-and-drop operations drag-and-drop operation
Perform full validation Validates drop targets in the Configuration folder
for drag-and-drop operations during the dragging process and will not drop a
in the Configuration folder resource icon on an invalid target
during dragging process
Allow renaming of items Enables you to rename a resource with a mouse click.
using mouse click To rename a resource, right-click the resource icon, and
then select Rename from the resulting shortcut menu
Allow undo/redo of Load Preset By default, the Navigation tool’s ability to undo and
in Control mode redo the loading of presets is disabled, so the
Navigation tool can load presets more quickly.
However, the Control tool’s ability to undo and redo
the loading of presets is always enabled
from the Control dialog box
Show progress dialog when When checked, a progress bar displays during loading
loading presets of presets. This is especially helpful during loading of
large presets.
User Manual
The Tree View tab has the following options:
Table 7-12 Tree View Navigation Pane Options

Show alarm level Shows a column of color-coded alarm boxes to the right of the
resource icon's name in the Network and Discovery folders.
Show device status Shows the status of the resource on the network in a column
that shows in both the Network and the Discovery folders.
Show monitor points Shows a column of monitor icons to the right of the resource
icon names, for CCS devices that have a monitor point defined.
Show alarm filtering Shows a check box in a column for each resource that has alarm
filtering.
Show discovery result Shows the result of a discovery operation to the right of the
resource icon’s name in a column that shows in both the
Network and the Discovery folders in Build mode.
Default background Opens a palette from which you can choose a different color for
color the Navigation pane
Default text color Opens a palette from which you can choose a different color for
the text in the Navigation pane (to change the color of the text
on individual resource icons, see Setting the Color of Text on
a Resource Icon on page 103)
The Name Properties tab has the following options:
Table 7-13 Name Properties Navigation Pane Options

Option Function
Choose the type of There are three options:
name to display  Name - The current product name or one you assign
to the device
 Alternate Name - The former product name, if one exists
 Short Name - An abbreviated form of the name that reflects
what shows on a control panel’s local display
To define these names for a resource icon, see Setting General
Navigation Properties for a Device on page 104.
Display live name When this option is checked, when a device has an assigned live
when feature is name, the live name will be used in Control mode. In order to
available prevent confusion should two or more devices share a Live name,
the device’s system (discovered) name appears in brackets after the
live name.
Type of live name If you choose Display live name when feature is available,
to display: in Control mode you can have one of these four options appear:
 Static: This name can be configured in Layout Designer and can
change after the device is discovered
 Source Name: Designated by the router database
 Dynamic: Configured using the UMD
 Display Name: Indicates the display on which a PIP is currently
displayed
122 Chapter 7
Using the Optional Columns in the Navigation Pane

Optional columns will not appear for Administrator users on a Magellan CCS Navigator
Server when they view User tabs.
Depending on which operational mode CCS Magellan CCS Navigator is in and what
Navigation Options are on, the Navigation pane also may show one or more of the
optional columns.
To show these optional columns, you must activate or open these columns in the Navigation
Options box. See Setting Navigation Options on page 120.
The optional columns are described in the following topics:
 Using the Alarm Column on page 122

 Using the Status Column on page 122
 Using the Monitor Column on page 124
 Using the Filter Column on page 124
 Using the Discovery Column on page 124
Using the Alarm Column

The Alarm column is available in Control mode only. It contains an Alarm-level box beside
each resource icon in the Navigation pane. The colors of the Alarm-level boxes indicate
the following:
 Red— critical
 Yellow—warning
 Green—information
 Orange—acknowledged
 If there is no colored alarm box in the Alarm column for a resource, this indicates that
there is no alarm for that particular resource.
When you close a container resource, the Alarm-level box shows the color of the highest
alarm for that container and its children. When you open a container resource, the
Alarm-level box disappears if that container has no alarms.
Using the Status Column

The Status column is available in Control mode only. It contains comments that indicate the
operational status of each CCS device. The comments and their meanings are as follows:
Table 7-14 Navigation Status Column Comments for CCS Devices

Comment Meaning
Network The CCS device is operational. The PC and software can communicate
Active with the device and remotely control it.
Error The software has a problem communicating with a device. A module may
have been removed from a frame or replaced with a different type of
module.
Not Ready The PC is querying the device. When the query ends, one of the other
comments will appear.
User Manual
Table 7-14 Navigation Status Column Comments for CCS Devices (Continued)
Comment Meaning
Local Active The CCS device is operational, but it can only be controlled from its
module edge.
Inactive The CCS device has been removed from its frame, or the software has lost
its TCP/IP connection to the CCS device. The device may be disconnected
from the network, powered off, or restarting. The PC may also be
disconnected from the network.
Disabled Indicates that the device is not currently controllable
Invalid The PC is trying to access module of a given product type, which has been
swapped in the frame with a card of a different type.
For SNMP devices, if Status Polling is activated, the Navigation Status column will indicate
whether the device is active or inactive. this status is updated when starting Magellan CCS
Navigator, when switching to Control mode, and after a Refresh or RefreshAll action is
performed.
Platinum routers display the status comments of CCS devices.
If there are routers involved in your system, the status column may contain router
communication port status messages:
Table 7-15 Router Communication Port Status

Comment Meaning
Inactive Communications port is not connected
Initializing Initializing communications port
Connecting Connecting to device(s)
Active Communications port is connected and active
Reconnecting Communication was interrupted, trying to reconnect to device(s)
Not Ready Failed to connect to device(s)
Disconnecting Terminating connection
Status indicators can also refer to a router device itself. Router status is listed in the
following table:
Table 7-16 Router Device Status

Comment Meaning
Inactive The device is not active
Initializing The device is initializing
Downloading The device is downloading
Active The device is active and ready for commands
Busy The device is busy processing commands
Terminating The device is shutting down
124 Chapter 7
Table 7-16 Router Device Status

Comment Meaning
Not Ready The device is not ready or inaccessible
Needs Download The device requires a configuration update to function properly
New The device is newly discovered
Using the Monitor Column

The Monitor column shows the monitor icon for CCS devices that have their Monitor
Point properties set. It is available in both Build and Control modes. When you select a
resource in the Navigation pane that has a monitor point defined, the monitored video
signal of that resource will show in the Signal Monitor dialog box.
See Video Output Monitoring on page 287.
Using the Filter Column

The Filter column in the Navigation pane shows a check box for each CCS device that
has filtered alarms, in both Build and Control modes. Set the filtering of alarms for a CCS
device on the Diagnostics Filter tab or through the navigation shortcut menu.
When alarms are filtered, they are stored in the alarms log database. They will not show on
any other tabs of the diagnostic database. (See Setting Options for Offline Viewing of
Alarm Logs on page 253 to view the database.)
See Setting Alarm Filtering Options on page 249 for information on defining and using
alarm filtering options.
Using the Discovery Column

After you run a discovery and save its results in Build mode, the Discovery column shows a
short comment for each resource inside the Network, Discovery, and Temporary folders.
See the following related topics:
 Using the Discovery Shortcut Menu on page 92

 Using the Discovery Column in the Tree View on page 92
Using Navigation Shortcuts

A shortcut provides one-click access to a resource icon in the resource tree.
A Shortcut icon has a small boxed arrow in its bottom left corner. The name of the
shortcut, which shows to the right of the icon, is “Shortcut to {name of the resource}.”
Resources that have shortcuts will have a Shortcut tab in their Properties dialog box.
For more information see Viewing the Shortcut Tab on page 109.
User Manual
ProcedureFinding and Selecting an Object

To find and select an object in the Navigation pane from its shortcut icon, double-click
the shortcut icon.
The Navigation tool finds and highlights the icon of the target object in the resource tree.
If the object is in a closed folder, the folder will open to show the target object.
ProcedureCreating a Shortcut
To create a shortcut to an object in the Navigation pane, right-click the resource icon for
the object to which you want to create a shortcut, click Create and select Shortcut. The
Navigation tool creates an icon for the object and places it at the bottom of the resource
tree.
ProcedureDeleting a Shortcut
Shortcuts can only be created or deleted by Administrator users of Magellan CCS Navigator
Servers in Build mode.
To delete a shortcut to a network resource, right-click the shortcut icon, and then select
Delete from the resulting context menu.
This removes the shortcut icon from your Navigation pane.

126 Chapter 7
127
8 CCS Device Configuration
CCS Device Configuration Overview

Refer to Volume 6: Routing Configuration for Router-related configuration information.
If you have configuration access to a network of CCS-enabled devices, you can use the
Configuration tool to remotely configure those devices. You can also use it to access
component version information about CCS hardware and software modules, if your
CCS-enabled devices store such information. (Some older products do not store version
information.)
Each device has a Configuration dialog box with a series of tabs, on which you can
accomplish the following tasks:
 Set the IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway for a CCS device.
 List the contents of the file directory of a CCS device.
 Delete or retrieve a file on the file system of a CCS device.
 Transfer updated software to the remote CCS device.
 Remotely restart the CCS device.
 View product, hardware, and software version information.
 Log all configuration activities and save them to a file.
Each CCS device has only one Configuration dialog box, but you can have multiple dialog
boxes open at the same time.
CCS Devices Requiring Special Configuration

Some CCS devices require special configuration. See these topics for specialized
configuration information:
 NUCLEUS Configuration on page 161

 NEO Frame Configuration on page 221
 LCP and RCP Configuration on page 227
 Introduction to Routing Components on page 1
128 Chapter 8
CCS Device Configuration
Opening and Closing a Configuration Dialog Box

General users on Magellan CCS Navigator Clients must be assigned Configuration access to
a device to change its configuration settings. Only an Administrator on a Magellan CCS
Navigator Server can assign Configuration access. See Managing User Accounts on
page 32 for more information.
To open or show the Configuration dialog box for a CCS device, choose one of these
three methods:
 Right-click the resource icon for the device in the Navigation pane, and then select
Configuration from the resulting context menu.
 Select the resource icon for the device in the Navigation pane, and then click
Configuration on the Tools menu.
 In Build mode, double-click the resource icon for the device in the Navigation pane.
 In a Graphical Navigation page, set an action (the effect component of a rule) to
open a Configuration dialog box. See Setting Properties for a ‘Configuration’ Action
on page 73 of CCS RouterNAV: Router Specific Plug-in for more information. You will
need a NAVIGATOR-SRV license to create this action.
To close a CCS device Configuration dialog box, choose one of these three methods:
 Click Close in the upper right corner of the dialog box

 Select the Configuration dialog box and then click Close on the Window menu
 Right click in the Configuration dialog box and select Close from the menu that
appears
See Navigation Pane on page 44 for more information.
Using the Configuration Status Bar

The Status Bar stretches across the lower edge of the Configuration dialog box.
Table 8-1 Configuration Status Bar Columns

Column Function
Status Reports the status of configuration operations
Device ID Matches device information to the specific device on the network
Access status Indicates whether the user group has access to configure the CCS
device
 Access Enabled means that the user group does have
configuration access to the device.
 Access Disabled means that the user group lacks configuration
access.
Only an Administrator user can change the configuration access
to a device for a user group.
User Manual
Configuring Network Settings for a CCS Device

Once you have discovered a device, you can adjust its network settings. This can be useful
when you are uploading software to that device, or so the network can recognize the
device.
Setting the IP Address of a CCS Device

When you change the IP address of a Platinum resource card, Magellan CCS Navigator will
immediately lose control of the Platinum frame. When Magellan CCS Navigator reconnects
to the new resource card’s IP address (which may require rediscovery of the frame), it will
again be able to control the Platinum frame. Rebooting the resource module is
recommended, but not required.
To communicate with a CCS device, the Navigation tool must know the IP address of the
device.
If a CCS device is already on the network and has a valid network IP address, then Magellan
CCS Navigator can dynamically discover the device. Then you can change the IP address on
the Network tab of the device’s Configuration dialog box.
However, if a CCS device is new and still has its factory-default network settings, you must
use the Magellan CCS Navigator PC to reset the network settings.
 Summary of Discovery Tasks on page 76

 Changing the Network Settings of a Device on page 129
Changing the Network Settings of a Device

Only an Administrator user on a Magellan CCS Navigator Server can run a discovery.
To change the network settings of a CCS device, complete these steps:
1 Use the Discovery tool to discover the CCS device at its default IP address—
192.168.100.250 for most CCS devices or 192.168.100.251 for a NEO control panel.
2 Open the Configuration dialog box for the discovered CCS device.
3 Select the Network tab, and then type in the new IP address, subnet mask, and default
gateway for the device.
4 Click Write to transfer the new network settings to the device.
5 Restart the device to have the device implement the new settings.
Now you can connect the CCS device to the network and control it from any PC on the
same network.
See these topics:
 Running a Full Discovery on page 85

 Running a Partial Discovery on page 86
 Setting Host IP Addresses for a Discovery on page 77
130 Chapter 8
 Pinging the IP Address of a CCS Device on page 84

Setting the IP Address of a New CCS Device

If a CCS device still has its factory-default network settings, you must connect it to a PC to
change the default settings to valid network settings.
Table 8-2 Factory-Default Settings for CCS Devices

Default
Device IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway
NEO control panels 192.168.100.251 255.255.255.0 192.168.100.251
All other CCS devices 192.168.100.250 255.255.255.0 192.168.100.250
There are two methods for changing the factory default network settings of a device to
valid network settings. These topics describe those two methods:
 Setting the IP Address of a PC on the Subnet of a CCS Device on page 130

 Adding a Route to the PC Routing Table on page 132
Setting the IP Address of a PC on the Subnet of a CCS Device

For a PC to communicate with a CCS device, you can temporarily set the IP address of the
PC to reside on the same subnet as the CCS device and have the same subnet mask.
To change the IP address of a PC, complete these steps:
1 Attach the new CCS device to the PC, using either an Ethernet hub or an Ethernet
crossover cable.
2 Write down the current IP address of the PC.
3 Change the IP address of the PC so that it is on the same subnet as the new CCS device.
Since the new CCS device has a default IP address of 192.168.100.250 (for most CCS
devices) or 192.168.100.251 (for NEO control panels), set the PC to reside on the same
subnet—for example, 192.168.100.2.
4 Set the subnet mask of the PC to 255.255.255.0, the same subnet mask
as the CCS device.
5 In Build mode, discover the new CCS device.
6 Open the device’s Configuration dialog box, and then click Read on the Network tab
to show the address.
7 To change the network settings for the device, select the text you want to change on the
Network tab and type in new text.
8 Click Write to transfer the new network address to the device.
9 Change the IP address of the PC back to its original value.
 Summary of Discovery Tasks on page 76

User Manual
 Obtaining the IP Address of a PC on page 131

 Setting the IP Address of a PC on page 131
Obtaining the IP Address of a PC

To determine the current IP address of a PC, complete these steps:
1 Click Start, point to Programs (or All Programs), and click MS-DOS Command Prompt
to open an MS-DOS Command Prompt dialog box on the PC.
2 Type the following command at the MS-DOS Command Prompt, and then press ENTER:
ipconfig
The PC shows its IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway.
3 Click Close to close the MS-DOS Command Prompt dialog box.

See these topics:

Setting the IP Address of a PC

To set the IP address of a PC, complete these steps:
1 Click Start, point to Settings, and click Network Connections.

2 Double-click the Network icon in the Network Connections dialog box.
3 Click Properties to open the LAN Properties dialog box.
Figure 8-1 LAN Properties Dialog Box
After changing the PC’s IP address, you must restart Magellan CCS Navigator.
4 Double-click Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) in the This connection uses the following
items: list.
132 Chapter 8
The Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties dialog appears.
Figure 8-2 Portion of IP Address Tab

5 Select Use the following IP Address, and type new information in the IP Address,
Subnet Mask, and Default Gateway boxes.
6 Click OK to close the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties box, and then click OK to
each of the dialog boxes that were opened during the process.
Adding a Route to the PC Routing Table

On a TCP/IP network, each computer has a routing table, composed of entries called routes.
Each route tells the computer where to forward TCP/IP packets on the network. You may
need to create a temporary route for the CCS device on the PC.
To add or delete a route to the PC routing table, you must have Administrator privileges.
To add a temporary route for the new CCS device to the PC routing table, complete these
steps:
1 Click Start, point to Programs (or All Programs), and click MS-DOS Command Prompt
to open an MS-DOS Command Prompt dialog box on the PC.
2 Type the following command at the prompt and then press ENTER:
route add 192.168.100.0 mask 255.255.255.0 172.24.6.50
The generic command for adding a route is as follows:
route add {temporary route address} mask {device subnet

mask} {PC IP address}
The number after the word add is the new CCS device network address. The number after
the word mask is the default subnet mask of the device. The new CCS device network
address always ends in a 0 (zero).
The last IP address, 172.24.6.50 in this example, is the IP address of the PC.
This command adds a route to the routing table of the PC. The PC can now access the CCS
device, even though it is on a different subnet.
3 To verify that the new route has been added to the routing table, ping the CCS device from
the PC.
Referring to the table below, type the appropriate command at a MS-DOS command
prompt, and then press ENTER. A reply means the CCS device is now accessible from the
PC.
Table 8-3 Ping Commands for CCS Devices and NEO Control Panels
Device Type Ping Command
For NEO control panels ping 192.168.100.251
For all other CCS Devices ping 192.168.100.250
User Manual
4 Change the network settings of the CCS device to valid network settings.
You should now be able to discover the new CCS device.
5 Now you must remove the temporary route for the CCS device from the PC routing table.
Open an MS-DOS Command Prompt dialog box.
6 At the prompt, type the following command, and then press ENTER:
route delete 192.168.100.0
In generic form, this command is:
route delete {temporary route address}

7 Click Close to close the MS-DOS Command Prompt dialog box.
See Changing the Network Settings of a Device on page 129.
Changing the PC Network Settings

The network settings of the PC may need be changed so that they match those of a device
to correct a failed upgrade procedure. If you need to change the settings for such a
procedure, you will need to change it back again later.
You will probably require administrator privileges on your PC to change the IP address.
To change the IP address of the PC:
1 Click Start > Settings and then click Control Panel.

The Control Panel dialog box appears.
2 Double-click Network Connections, and then double-click Local Area Connection to

show the Local Area Connection dialog box.
3 Select the General tab, and then select Properties.
The Local Area Connection dialog box appears.
4 On the General tab, select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP), and then click Properties...,
ensuring you are working on the correct Ethernet adapter for the CCS network.
The IP Address of the Internet Protocol TCP/IP Properties box appears.
The figure below shows the portion of the Internet Protocol TCP/IP Properties box where
you enter the IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Default Gateway of the resource module.
Figure 8-3 Portion of IP Address Box

5 If you are returning the Network settings to their original condition, and Obtain an IP
address automatically was selected, reselect it. Otherwise, select Use the following
134 Chapter 8
IP address, and in the IP address box, type the original IP address, subnet mask and
gateway address.
OR
If you are changing the network settings to match a device on which the upgrade failed,
complete the following steps.
a Note whether Obtain an IP address automatically is selected.

You may need to re-select this option later when you revert back to the original PC IP
address.
b Select Use the following IP address, and in the IP address box, type a new
computer IP address to match the first three octets of the IP address of the resource
module, and then add a different fourth octet.
(For example, if the device’s IP address is 192.168.100.70, you could type
192.168.100.181).
c In the Subnet Mask field, type: 255.255.255.0
d Enter the same default gateway as the one on the device, or leave it blank.
6 Click OK to close the TCP/IP Properties box, and then close the two Local Area
Connection boxes.
7 On older versions of Windows, you may need to restart the computer.
Reading the Network Configuration from a Device

To read the network configuration of a CCS device when you have set the IP address
manually or determined the address from a discovery, complete these steps:
1 Right-click the resource icon for the device, and then select Configuration from the
The Network tab shows by default.
2 Click Read.
The Configuration tool will retrieve the network information from the device.
If you have not previously configured the Configuration tool to remember Telnet login
information, a Telnet Login box will ask for the Telnet user name and password for the
CCS device.
3 The Telnet login box has a Remember Telnet login check box. Select the check box to
enable the remember feature, or clear the box to disable it.
The Configuration tool responds by filling in any additional address information that it
reads from the CCS device.
Only one person at a time can connect to a CCS device through Telnet. The default Telnet
user name is leitch and the password is LeitchAdmin. The password is case-sensitive, so type
carefully.
4 The Configuration tool reports its “read” activity to the Log tab. You can save the log to a
*.txt file.
5 When you are finished with the Configuration dialog box, click Close.
See Logging Configuration Activity on page 154.
User Manual
Writing Network Information to a CCS Device

To write the network configuration of a CCS device, when you have set its IP address
manually or determined the address through a discovery, complete these steps:
1 Right-click the resource icon for the CCS device, and then select Configuration from the
The Network tab shows by default.
2 Click Read to show the current network settings.

3 If you want to change these settings, select the text in the IP Address, Subnet Mask, and
Default Gateway boxes and type in new numbers.
4 The Ethernet (MAC) Address of the server is a read-only field. Skip this box.
5 Select the Reboot device and update the Navigation tree after writing Network
settings check box.
For best results, restart a CCS device after changing its network settings.
6 Click Write.
If you have not previously configured the Configuration tool to remember Telnet login
information, a Telnet Login box will ask you to type in the Telnet user name and password
for the CCS device.
Only one person can connect to a CCS device through Telnet at a time.
The default Telnet user name is leitch and the default password is LeitchAdmin. The
password is case-sensitive, so type carefully.
7 Type in the user name and password for the device, select the check box to enable the
Configuration tool to “remember” the Telnet login information of the device for future
logins, and then select OK.
8 When a Network Configuration query box asks you to confirm that you want to write the
new network settings to the CCS device, click Yes.
9 If the Configuration tool succeeds in writing the new settings to the CCS device, a
Network Configuration Information box will appear, confirming the transfer.
Click OK to close the Network Configuration Information box.
10 The write operation will require from 10 to 20 seconds. The Configuration tool will then
show a box confirming the write activity and then report this activity to the Log tab.
You can save the information on the Log tab to a *.txt file.
11 When you are finished with the Configuration dialog box, click Close.
See Saving a Configuration Log to a File on page 155.
Upgrading The Software Upgrade tool allows you to select one or more devices of the same type (X75,
X75-RCP, NEO, NEO LCP/RCP, NUCLEUS, 6800+, etc.) to be upgraded in parallel using the
Software transferred software package. It automates the backup and upgrade process to run in the
background, and includes event and error logging.
Devices you cannot upgrade using this procedure include the following:
136 Chapter 8
 Older CCS devices, such as DPS-575,must be upgraded using the File Transfer tab. See
Using the Configuration Dialog Box’s File Transfer Tab on page 143.
 Imagine Communications Multiviewer systems must be upgraded using Layout
Designer. See Starting Non-Magellan CCS Navigator Applications from the
Navigation Pane on page 107.
You can upgrade one device or multiple devices of the same type receiving the same
upgrade package (ZIP file).
1 From the Tools menu, select Software Upgrade.

The Software Upgrade dialog box appears, or if it is already open, it is brought to the
foreground.
Select a row and

click here to delete
that row.
Figure 8-4. Software Upgrade Dialog Box
2 On the New Transfer tab, click Add.

The Device Selection dialog appears.
3 Click on a device to upgrade, and then click Apply.

You can select other devices of the same type to receive the same upgrade package,
clicking Apply after each device.
The system will not prevent you from adding items that are not of the same device type in
this phase of the upgrade procedure. However, when you submit the file transfer task (in
step 12), if the upgrade package does not apply to all selected items, an error message will
be displayed and the transfer will not continue.
4 Click OK to close the Add Device dialog box.

The selected devices appear in the table on the New Transfer tab of the Software
Upgrade dialog box. A single row appears for each IP address to receive the upgrade.
If you have multiple 6800+ modules that are at the same IP address (in the same 6800+
frame), all modules at that IP address will appear on the same line.
User Manual
Normally, 6800+ modules can only upgrade one device per IP address during a single
transfer task (i.e., one module per frame). Some packages may state they can upgrade
multiple devices per IP address during a single transfer task. This feature is known as
“parallel upgrade”. To fully support parallel upgrade, your 6800+ETH module must be
version 4.5 or higher. ICE6800+ modules do not support parallel upgrade.
For each device in this table, you can highlight its position in the Tree View by clicking Find
Device. If multiple devices are selected for a single IP address, then this finds the
first-selected device.
You can check the software revision numbers, etc., by clicking Version Info.
5 For each device you intend to upgrade, click Device Options.
Figure 8-5 Device Options

If they are not already entered, add Telnet user name and password and FTP user name and
password.
6 Place a check beside Automatic Backup.

This creates a backup of the current software installed on the CCS device. The backup is
saved to the file name and location stated unless you click Browse to change.
Automatic Backup is not available for 6800+ devices other than the ICE6800+.
7 Click OK to close the Software Upgrade Device Options dialog box.

8 Click Options.
Figure 8-6 Software Upgrade Options

138 Chapter 8
The software options apply to all transfers, not just the specific device type currently being
upgraded. these options are described in Table 8-4.
Table 8-4 Software Upgrade Options

Option Description
Warn if the upgrade package Many firmware upgrades will fail if there is no XML
does not have an XML script file in the ZIP package. Unselect this option to disable
warnings.
Transfer files even if file version is When this option is not checked, you can’t
same or older than the version on downgrade your module.
the server
Number of devices to Choose a number between 1 and 10 (the default is
simultaneously upgrade 5). This determines the number of IP addresses that
are upgraded per batch. If the network load is too
high, choose a lower number.
9 On the New Transfer tab, click Browse.

A standard Windows File Selection dialog appears.
10 Choose the upgrade ZIP file on a local or network drive.

The selected file’s path name is displayed in the edit box to the left of the Browse button.
11 Click Package Info. This opens a dialog box containing version information and a list of
the components contained within the ZIP file.
The extraction process on the ZIP file is handled as part of the upgrade process. You do not
need to extract the files yourself.
12 Click Submit Transfer...

A dialog box appears, requesting confirmation that you want to proceed with the request. If
you have multiple devices selected, multiple transfer tasks are submitted—one per device.
The transfer now progresses. You may close the Software Upgrade dialog box, or
continue with other tasks.
Closing the Software Upgrade dialog box does not effect any of the transfer processes
that may be running in the background.
Or you can switch to the Progress tab to view the status of the transfers. See Using the
Software Upgrade Progress Tab on page 140 for more information.
If you try to log off or exit Magellan CCS Navigator while a transfer is underway, a
notification dialog box will alert you that processes are still active and will ask if you want to
terminate these processes.
13 Click on the Log tab and look at the Progress column to ensure that all files have correctly
updated. See Using the Log Tab on page 141 for more information.
The CCS device is automatically rebooted following an upgrade procedure.
In rare circumstances, the upgrade may be unsuccessful. For information about correcting
an unsuccessful upgrade procedure, see Correcting a Failed Upgrade Procedure on
page 142.
User Manual
Stopping a Transfer Task

The Resume button is not available in this release. Its functionality will be implemented in
a future release.
To stop a transfer task, select the task from the grid, and then click Stop. If the selected
task is currently executing, it is placed into a an Aborted state. If the task has not yet
started, it is placed into a “Waiting to Resume” state. A confirmation dialog box appears to
confirm that you want to stop as aborting the task will put the module into an inconsistent
state the next time it is rebooted.
Upgrading a NEO SuiteView Using the Wizard

If you are upgrading your firmware from version 1.x to version 2.x or later, during the
upgrade you will need to set your NSV-OUT module to fail-safe loader mode. Instructions
about how and when to do this are provided in your NEO SuiteView documentation.
Using the Software Upgrade tool, you can upgrade the entire NEO SuiteView frame
including all modules. Because of the extensive nature of this upgrade, it can take
considerably longer than other upgrades—minutes rather than seconds. Ensure that you
have sufficient time to complete the upgrade.
You will need to be able to physically access your NEO SuiteView frame to complete the
upgrade process.
Preparing your NEO SuiteView System for a Firmware Upgrade

To upgrade a NEO SuiteView, follow this procedure:
1 Backup all your layouts stored on the NSV-OUT.

If you do not backup customized layouts they will be lost forever, because the upgrade
utility performs a factory recall on the system. See your NEO SuiteView Installation and
Operation Manual for more information.
2 If you have an audio module installed in the slot directly below the NSV Output Module on
the NEO SuiteView frame that you are presently attempting to upgrade, remove the audio
module from the frame before proceeding.
Failure to remove this audio module will cause the upgrade to fail.
3 In CCS Magellan CCS Navigator, choose Tools > Software Upgrade from the main menu.
The Software Upgrade tool appears.
4 Click Add and select the NSV-OUT module.

5 Click Browse... and select the software upgrade package (ZIP file).
If the upgrade package shows that you are upgrading from firmware version 1.x to version
2.x or later, you will need to set your NSV-OUT module to fail-safe loader mode. For more
information, see Setting the NSV-OUT Module to Fail-Safe Loader Mode on page 140.
If the upgrade package shows that you are upgrading from a firmware version later than
2.x, proceed to Running the NEO SuiteView Upgrade Wizard on page 140.
140 Chapter 8
Setting the NSV-OUT Module to Fail-Safe Loader Mode

If you are upgrading from firmware version 1.x to version 2.x or later, you will need to set
your NSV-OUT module to fail-safe loader mode.
To set your NSV-OUT module to fail-safe loader mode, follow these steps:
1 Remove the NSV-OUT module from the NEO frame.

2 Press the NAV switch down while simultaneously pressing both the Escape and Enter
buttons.
3 While still pressing the buttons and the Nav switch, reinsert the module into the frame and
hold for approximately three seconds until the display on the module reads Offline-H (or
Offline-L) Upload Required.
4 Now, proceed follow the instructions contained in Running the NEO SuiteView Upgrade
Wizard on page 140.
Running the NEO SuiteView Upgrade Wizard

After you have either set your NSV-OUT module to fail-safe mode, or determined that you
do not need to (because your current firmware version is 2.x or later) you can run the
Upgrade Wizard.
To run the Upgrade Wizard, click Submit Transfer.
The NEO SuiteView Upgrade wizard appears.
The wizard will take you through the steps of upgrading your NEO SuiteView and all the
modules in it. Follow the instructions that appear on the screen.
Modules will only be updated as required, and in the following order:
 NSV-OUT module
 NSV-IN module
 NSV-AUD module(s)
To check the state of your upgrade during the process, you can switch between the wizard
and the Progress tab of the Software Upgrade tool to view your progress.
In the event that an upgrade does not complete correctly (perhaps because of a power
failure), modules can be upgraded individually. See your NEO SuiteView Installation and
Operation Manual for information on correcting a failed software upgrade.
Individual audio modules can have their firmware upgraded using the Software Upgrade
tool. See Upgrading Software on page 135 for more information.
If you backed up your layouts to a computer, you can now use Layout Manager to transfer
them back onto the NSV-OUT module. See your NEO SuiteView Installation and Operation
Manual for more information.
Using the Software Upgrade Progress Tab

The Resume button is always unavailable in this release. Its functionality will be
implemented in a future release.
User Manual
Use the Progress tab to monitor the status of all the transfer requests in the queue. The
grid displays the status of each transfer task, with each row in the grid representing a single
device-package combination (transfer task).
Figure 8-7 Progress Tab of the Software Upgrade Dialog Box

The table below describes the buttons on the Progress tab.
Table 8-5 Progress Tab Buttons

Button Description
Stop Aborts a selected transfer task
Clear Removes a selected transfer task from the grid; the task must be
in a Waiting to Resume, Aborted, Failed, or Completed state in
order for this button to be enabled
Stop All Aborts all tasks in the queue; you will be asked to confirm
Clear All Removes all stopped tasks from the queue; these tasks must be
either Waiting to Resume, Aborted, Failed, or Completed
Resume Restarts a task that is in the “Waiting to Resume” state
Using the Log Tab

The Log tab displays a running log of all the transfer operations completed since
application startup. It contains information such as the package filename, versions being
transferred, start times, errors during transfer, and so on. The log text is selectable, allowing
you to copy and paste log information to another application.
Software Upgrade Options

Right click in the Software Upgrade dialog box to open an Options dialog box.
142 Chapter 8
Figure 8-8 Software Upgrade Options Dialog Box
Table 8-6 Software Upgrade Options

Option Result
Warn if upgrade package File transfer is not supported without an XML
does not have an XML script script, so this will warn you before aborting.
Transfer files even if file When this is checked, you can potentially upgrade
version is same or older than the software to an older revision. However, this
the version on the server may be useful for returning to your backed up
version.
Number of devices to Limits the number of files that can be added to the
simultaneously upgrade table on the New Transfer tab to the number in the
dialog box, which you can change.
Correcting a Failed Upgrade Procedure

Only an Administrator user of a Magellan CCS Navigator Server install can perform this
procedure.
A firmware upgrade may fail in the event of a network interruption or power failure. If one
of these events occurs, you will be able to ping the device, but Magellan CCS Navigator will
not be able to discover it.
See the documentation for the specific CCS device whose upgrade has failed for
information on fail-safe mode, and if there are instructions for putting the device into
fail-safe mode, follow them.
After a failed upgrade, some CCS devices will automatically go into a fail-safe mode where
new software can be loaded but other functions are not enabled. If an upgrade fails,
remove and then reapply power to the CCS device. You can then try the upgrade procedure
again.
When you are performing the fail-safe upgrading procedure, check the readme file to
confirm which files are needed. Use care to ensure that you transfer the correct files to the
intended device.
1 Ensure that the CCS device is in fail-safe mode.

2 Change the network addresses on your Magellan CCS Navigator PC to match the default
network addresses.
3 In Magellan CCS Navigator’s Build mode, drag or copy and paste the device’s icon from the
Catalog folder to the Network or Discovery folder.
4 Right click on the device icon and then select Properties.
Do not make changes in the third field (located above and to the right of the Set Default
button).
User Manual
5 On the Device tab of the Navigation Properties box, click Set Default, and then click
Yes.
6 Follow the software upgrade procedure for the device as laid out in Upgrading
Software on page 135.
7 Return the upgraded device to its normal operating mode, including returning the fail-safe
and Default IP switches to their up position. For information on doing this, please refer to
the device’s installation and operation manual.
8 Return the PC network settings to their original states. See Changing the PC Network
Settings on page 133.
Using the Configuration Dialog Box’s File Transfer Tab

Some older devices, such as DPS-575, may not be able to use the Software Upgrade tool.
To upgrade the software on these devices, use the File Transfer tab of the Configuration
dialog box.
When using the File Transfer tab, take care to ensure that files are properly downloaded.
The File Transfer tab also appears on 6800+, NEO, NEO LCP-3901-1U, RCP-CCS-1U, X75,
and X75-RCP devices. On these devices, you should do routine file updates using the
Software Upgrade tool. See Upgrading Software on page 135.
Before youtransfer files using the File Transfer tab of a device’s Configuration dialog box,
you should download and unzip the most recent appropriate files from our website. Save
the unzipped files in the computer that has Magellan CCS Navigator installed.
For a successful file transfer to take place, the Subnet Mask and Default Gateway on the
CCS device and PC should match. See the following topics for information on setting these
numbers:

You should always back up the files to be replaced. This is included in the updating
procedure.
Always restart a CCS device after transferring files.
Backing Up Files From a CCS Device

Backing up files can not be done on 6800+ devices except for the ICE6800+.
Before replacing a file on a CCS device, copy the old file back to the PC—if possible—before deleting
the old file from the CCS device. Transfer the new file to the device, and then refresh the device.
Always restart a CCS device after replacing files on it.
1 Right-click the CCS device icon, and then select Configuration from the resulting shortcut
menu.
2 Select the File Transfer tab.
144 Chapter 8
3 Click the arrow in the Select the device directory to transfer to box, and select the
directory of the file you want to replace. The list of directories differs from device to device.
If a CCS device has no subdirectories, this box is blank, indicating that this is the root
directory of the remote device.
4 Click List Files.

The Configuration tool lists the files residing in the remote directory in the List of files in
this directory box.
After replacing files, you may need to re-discover some CCS devices so that they appear in
your Discovery folder.
To see if this applies to your CCS device, please refer to the device's user manual, or the
instructions in the ZIP package for transfer. Only an Administrator user on a Magellan CCS
Navigator Server can run a discovery.
An FTP Login box may ask you to enter the FTP user name and password
for the CCS device.
5 Select a file to update from the List of files in this directory box, and then click Get File.
This feature retrieves the file from the remote directory and saves it to the PC. You can
select and retrieve only one file at a time.
Some products do not support the “Get File” feature.
6 On the PC, rename the transferred file, so that the device name and out-of-date status are
clear.
To get another file, repeat steps 4-6. You can get only one file at a time.
Transferring Files With the File Transfer Tab

6800+, NEO, NEO LCP-3901-1U, RCP-CCS-1U, X75, and X75-RCP devices should be
upgraded using the Software Upgrade tool. See Upgrading Software on page 135.
Using the File Transfer tab of the Configuration dialog box, you can transfer individual
files to a CCS device.
Before you transfer firmware or software on a CCS device, you should back up the old files.
See Backing Up Files From a CCS Device on page 143.
1 If you are in the Configuration dialog box of either a master NEO 3901RES-E Resource
Module installed in a 3RU frame or a FR-3903 3RU frame itself, you can choose to update
both master and slave redundant resource modules simultaneously.
 Select the “Transfer” or “Reboot” applies to master and slave check box at the
bottom of the File Transfer tab if you want changes made to the master resource
module to be transferred automatically to the redundant slave module.
 If you later reboot the master resource module, the slave module will also reboot
automatically.
User Manual
 Clear the check box if you want to transfer information to the slave resource module at
a different time, or if you do not want to transfer files or reboot the slave at the same
time as the master module.
This check box is only available for master 3901RES-E resource modules installed in a
NEO FR-3903 or FR3923 3RU frame. For more information about NEO 3901RES-E
resource module redundancy, see “Appendix E” in your NEO FR-3901 and FR-3903
Mounting Frames Installation and Operation Manual.
2 Click Add....
3 In the Add files for transfer to device box, click Browse... or type in the path to the file
to file for transfer.
4 Select the file, and then click OK.
5 Select the Reboot device after transferring files check box to enable the software to
restart the CCS device so that the device loads the new file(s).
6 Click the arrow in the Select the device directory to transfer to box, and then select a
directory from the list options.
Components of this list are device-specific, so refer to the instructions for the CCS device to
determine which directory to choose for this transfer.
7 Click Perform Transfer.

Once the file transfer begins, the Configuration status bar shows the index and name of
the transferring file, and a progress bar indicates the percentage completion of the file
transfer.
If the Configuration tool cannot connect to the CCS device, an error box appears, the
transfer task aborts and the Configuration tool reports errors to the Log tab. You can save
the contents of the Log tab to a *.txt file.
8 After the file transfer finishes, wait 30 seconds for the CCS device to reboot.
9 Click Close on the Configuration dialog box.
The transfer process is complete.
 Saving a Configuration Log to a File on page 155

 ‘Remembering’ FTP Information on page 157
Correcting a Failed Upgrading Procedure

Only an Administrator user of a Magellan CCS Navigator Server install can perform this
procedure.
Firmware upgrades may fail in the event of network interruptions, power failures, or if too
much data is uploaded to the CCS device. Often, uploads of too much data can occur for
one of the following reasons:
 Too many files were sent to the resource module.

 The wrong files were sent to the resource module.
 The upgrade .zip file was mistakenly sent to the module.
If one of these events occurs, you will be able to ping the device, but Magellan CCS
Navigator will not be able to discover it.
146 Chapter 8
If your device has a fail-safe mode (for example, if it is a NEO frame), you can rectify the
problem by re-installing the firmware while in this mode. You will need an Ethernet
crossover cable (not an Ethernet straight-through cable) for the fail-safe procedure. This
crossover cable must be connected directly to the affected resource module you are
working on.
When you are performing the fail-safe upgrading procedure, check the readme file to
confirm which files are needed. Use care to ensure that you transfer the correct files to the
intended device.
1 Refer to your CCS device’s documentation for instructions on how to place the device in fail
safe mode. Follow those instructions.
2 Change the network addresses on your Magellan CCS Navigator PC to match the default
network addresses.
See Changing the PC Network Settings on page 133.
3 rag or copy and paste the device’s icon from the Catalog folder to the Network or
Discovery folder.
4 Right click on the device icon and then select Properties.
Do not make changes in the third field (located above and to the right of the Set Default
button).
5 On the Device tab of the Navigation Properties box, click Set Default, and then
click Yes.
6 If the Device ID field starts with IP, in the last field, enter the slot number of the module
and then close the dialog box. If the Device ID field starts with EP, set the last number of
the third field to the slot number of the module and then close the dialog box.
7 Double click the device icon that you want to upgrade.
The Configuration... dialog box appears. On the Select the device directory to transfer
to: field of the File Transfer tab, select the directory of the file you want to update. The list
of directories differs from device to device.
 For NEO modules, the /Resource/boot directory appears.

 For 6800+ modules, you will see a /frameX/slotY directory, where X refers to the
number of the frame with respect to the frame containing an ICE6800+ or
6800+ETH module, and Y refers to the slot number in that frame.
8 Click Add, and in the Add files for transfer to device box, browse and select the boot
folder from the location where you saved the unzipped file.
9 Select the file and then click OK.
10 Select Reboot devices after transferring files.
11 Click Perform Transfer and then click Yes.
This may take several minutes.
12 Wait for the message Reboot command was issued in the status bar.
13 Wait 30 seconds, and then close the Configuration... box.
The CCS device has now been upgraded.
14 Return the device to its normal operating mode. For information on doing this, please refer
to the CCS device’s installation and operation manual.
15 Return the PC network settings to their original states. See Changing the PC Network
Settings on page 133.
User Manual
Listing the Files Installed on a CCS Device

To list the files installed on a CCS device on your Magellan CCS Navigator screen, complete
these steps:
1 Right-click resource icon for the CCS device, and then select Configuration from the
3 Click the arrow in the Select the device directory to transfer to box, and then select one
of the directory options. The list of directory names differs from device to device.
If a CCS device has no subdirectories, this box may be blank. Leaving a box blank means
that this is the root directory of the remote device.
4 Click List Files.

The Configuration tool shows the list of files currently in the specified remote directory in
the List of files in this directory box.
If you have not previously instructed the Configuration tool to “remember” FTP login
information, an FTP Login box may ask you to enter the FTP user name and password for
the CCS device.
5 If you want to look at the list of files in another directory, click Clear List to clear the current
list of files and then repeat Step 3, choosing another directory.
6 Click Close.
See ‘Remembering’ FTP Information on page 157.
Copying a File from a CCS Device

This feature is not available for 6800+ devices.
To copy files from a CCS device to Magellan CCS Navigator, complete these steps:
1 Right-click the resource icon of the CCS device, and then select Configuration from the
resulting context menu.
To safely update a file on a CCS device, first create a backup of the old file by copying it
back to Magellan CCS Navigator —if possible—before deleting the out-dated file from the
CCS device. (Some NEO resource modules and processing modules do not support this “Get
File” feature.) Then transfer the replacement file to the device and refresh the device.
3 Click the arrow in the Select the device directory to transfer to box, and then select one
of the directory options in the list box.
If a CCS device has no subdirectories, this box may be blank, indicating that it is the root
directory of the remote device.
4 Click List Files.

The Configuration tool lists files currently in the specified remote directory in the List of
files in this directory box.
An FTP Login box may show, asking you to enter the FTP user name and password
for the CCS device.
148 Chapter 8
5 Select one file in the List of files in this directory box, and then click Get File to retrieve
the file from the remote directory and save it to the local directory.
You can select and retrieve only one file at a time.
6 Repeat Steps 3 - 5 to back up files from other directories.

7 When you are finished, click Close.
See ‘Remembering’ FTP Information on page 157.
Deleting a File from a CCS Device

This feature is not available for 6800+ devices.
To delete a file from a CCS device, complete these steps:
1 Right-click the resource icon for the CCS device, and then select Configuration from the
resulting context menu.
To safely update a file on a CCS device, first create a backup of the old file by copying it
back to Magellan CCS Navigator —if possible—before deleting the out-dated file from the
CCS device. (Some NEO resource modules and processing modules do not support the “Get
File” feature.) Then transfer the replacement file to the device and refresh the device. See
Copying a File from a CCS Device on page 147.
3 In the Select the device directory to transfer to box, click the down arrow to select one
of the directory options in the list box.
If a CCS device has no subdirectories, this box is blank. This is the root directory of the
remote device.
4 Click List Files.

The Configuration tool lists the files in the remote directory in the List of files in this
directory box.
An FTP Login box may advise you to enter the FTP user name and password for the
CCS device. (See ‘Remembering’ FTP Information on page 157.)
5 Select a file in the List of files in this directory box, and then click Delete File.
You can only delete one file at a time.
6 Repeat Steps 3 - 5 to delete additional files.

7 When you are finished deleting files, click Close.
Restarting a CCS Device from the PC

To restart a CCS device from the PC, complete these steps:
1 Open the CCS device’s Configuration dialog box.

The Network tab of the Configuration dialog box shows by default. (See Changing the
Network Settings of a Device on page 129.)
User Manual
2 Click Reboot Device.

3 If the Telnet Login box shows, type in the Telnet user name and password, select the
Remember Telnet check box, and then click OK. (See ‘Remembering’ Telnet
Information on page 157.)
Selecting the Remember Telnet check box enables the “remember” feature for future logins
to this device.
4 The device will take from 10 to 20 seconds to restart. Then the Configuration tool will
show a box confirming the restart.
The Configuration tool reports the restart on the Log tab.
You can save the information on the Log tab to a text file. See Saving a Configuration
Log to a File on page 155.)
5 Click Close.
Setting Device Options

Some devices may have a Device tab in their Configuration dialog box. The options in
the Device tab are outlined in the table below.
Table 8-7 Configuration Dialog Box’s Device Tab Options

Option Function
Mute Keep Alive When unselected (the default setting), configures the device
to send Keep Alive messages; these messages are used to
detect if a device gets disconnected from the network
Custom Name If you enter a name here, when an Administrator on a
Magellan CCS Navigator Server subsequently runs the
discovery tool, the device will be discovered with this name
Mute Device When set to No (the default setting), configures the device to
send notification of parameter value changes and alarms
Report Alarms with Priority Determines alarm filtering (whether alarms are displayed
Greater Than or Equal To when triggered) for the device, so as to not report alarms
unless their priority meets or exceeds a pre-defined level
License Key Stores a license key on the device, which enables optional
device features
 Click Read to read any license key stored on the device
 Click Validate to ensure that a license key is entered
correctly before writing it to the device
 Click Write and Reboot to send a new license key on
the device and reboot it; the writing process includes a
validation step to prevent you from writing an invalid
license key
Please contact sales to purchase optional licensed features on a product. License keys are
generated by Imagine Communications at the time an order is placed.
Please contact customer service to resolve any problems with license keys.
150 Chapter 8
Setting SNMP Options

Devices that support SNMP will have an SNMP tab in the Configuration dialog box.
To configure Magellan CCS Navigator as an SNMP agent, see SNMP Agent Configuration
Using Magellan CCS Navigator on page 70.
To configure a device that supports SNMP, follow these instructions.
1 In the Configuration dialog box, click the SNMP tab.

2 Click the Read button.
The CCS network polls the SNMP device and retrieves its current settings. It fills in all the
fields on the SNMP tab of the Configuration dialog box with the settings that are on
the device.
Figure 8-9 SNMP Tab on device Configuration Dialog Box

In the top left portion of the dialog box are SNMP Agent settings.
Table 8-8 SNMP Agent Fields of SNMP Tab

Field Function
Port Number (Can be from 0 to 65535) The network port used by the SNMP
agent
Read Community SNMP read community string (in SNMP terms, a “Get” operation
has to match this setting in the MIB browser in order to read
information from device)
Write Community SNMP write community string (in SNMP terminology, a “Set”
operation has to match this setting in a MIB browser in order to
write information to that device)
Enable Authentication When checked, authentication traps are sent if the read or write
Traps community doesn’t match between the SNMP agent and MIB
browser
Enable SNMP Agent When checked, SNMP support is available; if not checked, SNMP
support is disabled
User Manual
Below the SNMP Agent settings are System settings. The information in these fields
describes the device that is currently selected in the Navigation pane. This is user-defined
information that, once provided by an administrator, is available on the device when it is
retrieved by a MIB browser.
Table 8-9 System Fields of SNMP Tab - MIB-2 System Information

Field Explanation
Description The default is “Harris SNMP Agent”
Location The physical location of the device
Contact The contact person for this device
Name Name of the device
The Trap Destination IP Addresses field contains a list of IP addresses that will
receive SNMP traps. It is in the format IP Address:Port Address:SNMP version.
3 To add new Trap Destination IP Addresses, see Adding New Addresses for SNMP
Traps on page 151. To modify them, see Modifying an SNMP Trap Destination on
page 152.
The device must be rebooted before changes will take effect.
4 (Optional) If you want the device to reboot automatically when you send the new
configuration to it, place a check beside Reboot device after performing transfer.
5 Click Write to send the new configuration to the device.
6 If you did not place a check beside Reboot device after performing transfer in step
6, click Reboot now and your changes to the configuration will take effect.
Adding New Addresses for SNMP Traps

To add a new SNMP trap destination, follow this procedure:
1 Click Add beneath the Trap Destination IP Addresses field. The Add Trap
Destination dialog box appears.
Figure 8-10 Add Trap Destination Dialog Box

2 Choose the SNMP version that you would like to use for traps.
3 Choose the IP address of that trap destination.
4 Choose the port number. The default is 162, but an administrator can set this to any
number between 0 and 65535.
5 Click Apply. A new line is added in the Trap Destination IP Addresses field.
6 Repeat steps 2 through 5 to add more rows to the dialog box.
152 Chapter 8
7 Click OK to return to the SNMP tab of the Configuration dialog box.
Modifying an SNMP Trap Destination

To modify a trap destination, follow this procedure:
1 In the Trap Destinations IP Addresses list, click on the item you would like to
modify.
2 Click the Modify button. The Modify Trap Destination dialog box appears.
Figure 8-11 Modify Trap Destination Dialog Box

3 Choose the SNMP version of the traps using the radio buttons at the top of the dialog box.
4 Enter the IP address of that trap destination in the IP Address field.
5 Enter the port number in the Port Number field.
The default value is 162.
6 Click Apply. The selected entry in the Trap Destination IP Addresses field is
updated.
7 Repeat steps 2 through 6 to further update the row.
8 Click OK to close the Modify Trap Destination dialog box.
Getting Version Information

You can retrieve version information from CCS devices that maintain version information
(Some older devices do not) and have valid IP addresses. This information, which displays on
the Version tab of the device’s Configuration dialog box, can help you determine
whether a device needs a hardware or software upgrade.
On some devices you can use a Refresh button to manually force a device to resend its
version information, if for example the device was powered off when the dialog box was
opened. This feature is not needed on most devices.
The Version tab contains a tree control with two columns—Item Name and Value. This
tree is very similar to the tree and folder structure of the Navigation pane. The Item Name
column contains three top-level folders—Product, Hardware, and Software—
representing the three components of the CCS device.
User Manual
Figure 8-12 Version Tab of Configuration Dialog Box

The top-level Product folder typically contains the following subfolders: Name,
Description, Product Family, and Interface Version.
Figure 8-13 Product Information Retrieved from a NEO Resource Module

The top-level Hardware folder contains sub-folders for hardware information on a specific
product. For example, a frame controller module may show sub-folders for Hardware
Version, Serial Number, and Mac Address.
Figure 8-14 NEO Resource Module Hardware Information

The top-level Software folder contains subfolders for information on software
components of a product. For example, a frame controller module may show sub-folders
for the vxWorks.lzs file version number, Version string, and Build Date.
154 Chapter 8
Figure 8-15 Software Version Information from a NEO Resource Module

The Value column contains a short description for each final or leaf icon in the first column.
Logging Configuration Activity

The Configuration tool logs all configuration activity for a CCS device on Log tab of the
device’s Configuration dialog box.
Figure 8-16 Excerpt from a Configuration Log
Viewing a Configuration Log

To view the configuration log for a device, complete these steps:
1 Open the CCS device’s Configuration dialog box by right clicking on the device in the
tree view and selecting Configuration.
2 Select the Log tab.
User Manual
Saving a Configuration Log to a File

To save a configuration log to a text file, complete these steps:
1 Right-click inside the Log tab of the Configuration dialog box, and then select Save Log
As... from the resulting context menu.
2 In the Save As box that appears, accept the default directory or select another directory
for the log file.
3 Type a name into the File Name box or accept the default name.
4 Click Save.
Clearing a Configuration Log

To clear a CCS device configuration log, right-click inside the Log tab of the its
Configuration dialog box and select Clear Log from the resulting shortcut menu.
Setting Configuration Options

To set Configuration options, complete these steps:
1 Click Configuration on the Options menu, or right-click in a Configuration dialog box

and then click Options....
Figure 8-17 Configuration Options Dialog Box

2 In the Configuration Options box, set the Timeouts settings for the Telnet and FTP
sections to no fewer than 5,000 milliseconds; however, you can increase this time setting.
Timeouts are time limits for the software’s attempts to connect to a CCS device via Telnet or
FTP. If the Configuration tool cannot connect within the time limit, it will report that
information.
Click OK to close the Configuration Options box.

156 Chapter 8
Using the Configuration Shortcut Menu

The configuration shortcut menu enables you to manage a number of configuration tasks.
Table 8-10 Configuration Shortcut Menu Commands

Command Function Reference
Find Device Finds the resource icon associated with a Finding the Resource
CCS device’s Configuration dialog box in Icon for a CCS Device on
the Navigation pane and highlights it page 156
Default Size Returns the Configuration dialog box to its Returning a
default size Configuration Dialog
Box to its Default Size on
page 156
Remember Toggle control that instructs the ‘Remembering’ Telnet
Telnet Configuration tool to remember the Telnet Information on page 157
login information for a device
Remember Toggle control that instructs the ‘Remembering’ FTP
FTP Configuration tool to remember the FTP Information on page 157
login information for a device
Save Log As... Saves the text on the Log tab as a *.txt file Saving a Configuration
Log to a File on page 155
Clear Log Clears the text on the Log tab Clearing a Configuration
Log on page 155
Options... Opens the Configuration Options box Setting Configuration
Options on page 155
Help Shows the Online Help contents page Getting Help With
Magellan CCS
Navigator on page 320
User Manual Shows the user manual for the selected CCS Showing the User
device Manual for a CCS
Device on page 157
Close Closes the Configuration dialog box Opening and Closing a
Configuration Dialog
Box on page 128
Finding the Resource Icon for a CCS Device

To find the resource icon of a CCS device in the resource tree, right-click inside the CCS
device’s Configuration dialog box, and then select Find Device from the resulting
shortcut menu. The Navigation tool will highlight the icon in the resource tree.
Returning a Configuration Dialog Box to its Default Size

To return a CCS device’s Configuration dialog box to its default size, right-click inside the
Configuration dialog box, and then select Default Size from the resulting shortcut menu.
User Manual
‘Remembering’ Telnet Information

Only one person can be connected to a CCS device through Telnet at once.
To set the Configuration tool to remember the Telnet information (user name and
password) for a device, right-click inside the Configuration dialog box, and then select
Remember Telnet from the resulting shortcut menu. The Configuration tool remembers
the user name and password for the specified CCS device, not for all CCS devices.
The default Telnet user name is leitch, and the default password is LeitchAdmin. The
password is case-sensitive.
‘Remembering’ FTP Information

Only four people can use FTP simultaneously to connect to the same CCS device.
To set the Configuration tool so that it remembers the FTP information (user name and
password) for a device, right-click inside the Configuration dialog box, and then select
Remember FTP from the resulting shortcut menu. The Configuration tool remembers the
user name and password for the specified CCS device, but not for all CCS devices.
The default FTP user name is leitch, and the default password is LeitchAdmin. The password
is case-sensitive.
Showing the User Manual for a CCS Device

To show the user manual for a supported CCS device, right-click inside the CCS device’s
Configuration dialog box, and then select User Manual from the resulting shortcut
menu.
Adobe Acrobat Reader opens and shows the user manual for a device in Acrobat Reader.
You can search the manual for relevant information and print it out.
Using the Configuration Folder

For proper configuration of NEO frames and CCS control panels, you must create a
configuration file in the Configuration folder and then transfer the file to the device—in
addition to setting values in the device’s Configuration dialog box.
Resource icons that belong to a control panel configuration show their short name in the
Configuration folder. The short name matches what a control panel can show on its
display, to a maximum of 20 characters per device name.
If a default short name does not adequately identify a resource, you can change the name
in the Navigation Properties box—taking out spaces, abbreviating words, or including
the last four digits of an IP address.
All three names appear in the Navigation Properties box.
See also these topics:

158 Chapter 8

 Creating Configuration Hierarchies on page 158
 Ordering Devices in a Configuration Hierarchy on page 159
 Renaming Configurations on page 159
Getting Help with Configuration Hierarchies

To help you create valid device hierarchies in the Configuration folder, select the third Build
mode option on the General tab of the Navigation Options box. Enabling this option will
ensure that the application fully tests the validity of all drag-and-drop operations in the
Configuration folder.
Figure 8-18 Build Mode Option on General Tab of Navigation Options Box
See Setting Navigation Options on page 120.
Creating Configuration Hierarchies

The configuration of a NEO frame or CCS control panel requires the creation
of a configuration file in the Configuration folder and the transfer of that file to the
remote device— in addition to setting values in the device’s Configuration dialog box.
If you right-click an object in the Configuration folder, a context menu appears, with
Create as one of its menu options. The enabled Create submenu options are valid for both
the device and the folder it resides in.
For example, if you right-click a NEO frame in the Configuration folder, you can use the
resulting shortcut menu to create a Configuration for the NEO frame; but if you right-click
a non-NEO frame in the Configuration folder, the resulting shortcut menu does not have
options to create a configuration for that frame, since that frame does not support
configuration.
User Manual
Ordering Devices in a Configuration Hierarchy

The resource icons representing CCS devices and configurations follow this hierarchy in the
Configuration folder:
Table 8-11 Icon Hierarchy in the Configuration Folder

Level Icon Purpose Represents
Top Level—Parent Configuration Control panel icon
CCS devices Parents
Gateway Icon
NEO Frame Icon
Middle Level Configuration Node Configuration Node Icon
Bottom Level Configuration CCS devices contained or

Children controlled by the parent
CCS device
Renaming Configurations
If you try to edit the label of a CCS device or configuration in the Configuration folder, the
Navigation tool first will determine whether the proposed name already exists under the
same parent CCS device. If the proposed name exists, an error message appears,
the renaming operation aborts, and the name remains unchanged.
The Navigation tool automatically renames a CCS device icon when the same name exists
at the same level of the resource tree. The name assigned by the Navigation tool is either
“Copy of [Device Short Name]” or “Copy (x) of [Device Short Name].” You can rename
the configuration, provided the proposed new name also does not exist.
display, a maximum of 20 characters per device name.
If a default short name does not adequately identify a resource, change the short name
in the Navigation Properties box—take out spaces, abbreviate words, or include the last
four digits of an IP address. All three names appear in the Navigation Properties box.
 Deleting a Resource Icon on page 101

160 Chapter 8
161
9 NUCLEUS Configuration
NUCLEUS Configuration Overview

A NUCLEUS configuration defines:
 The devices the NUCLEUS control panel monitors and controls

 The functions of the 16 LCD buttons, four adjustment knobs, and four adjustment
buttons on the NUCLEUS control panel when it is controlling those devices, including
the positions of the navigation layers and the layout of devices and/or parameters on
the display
 The destinations and sources accessible when controlling a routing system
 The PIPs and sources when controlling a CENTRIO system
 The organization of layers of menus when navigating buttons
All NUCLEUS control panels are sold with one or more options enabled. Some devices are
configured using Magellan CCS Navigator, and other devices are configured on the control
panel itself.
Devices Configured using Magellan CCS Navigator

following devices need to be configured using Magellan CCS Navigator:
Table 9-1 NUCLEUS Configurations Defined in Magellan CCS Navigator

Applicable
Controlled Devices Configuration Details
License
Parameters and alarms on CCS devices, NUCLEUS-PROC Adding Processing or SNMP Devices
including 6800+ modules in Ethernet- to a NUCLEUS Configuration on
connected frames, CENTRIO modules and page 165.
PiPs, NEO modules, X50, X75, and X85
Sources, Destinations, and crosspoints on a NUCLEUS-RTR Creating Routing Panels for a
routing system based on a Routing panel NUCLEUS Configuration on page 171.
Parameters and alarms on SNMP devices NUCLEUS-SNMP Creating Routing Panels for a
NUCLEUS Configuration on page 171.
Makes the NUCLEUS-PROC and NUCLEUS-TRAX Configuring Router TRAX for
NUCLEUS-RTR licenses work together to NUCLEUS on page 202.
switch the controlled processing device when
a router switch happens.
PIPs and Layouts on a CENTRIO multiviewer NUCLEUS-MV Adding CENTRIO Systems to a
(similar to router control) NUCLEUS Configuration on page 164.
162 Chapter 9
NUCLEUS Configuration
After creating a configuration for NUCLEUS using Magellan CCS Navigator, you can
transfer the configuration to the control panel and then control the connected devices. The
NUCLEUS control panel communicates in real time with compatible devices to set
parameters and crosspoints.
Devices Configured Using the Control Panel Interface

The following devices do not require configuration using Magellan CCS Navigator before
they can be controlled using NUCLEUS control panel:
 IconLogo (NUCLEUS-LOGO license)

 IconStation (NUCLEUS-IS license)
 PredatorII and QVM6800+ (NUCLEUS-MV license)
These system-generated configurations are created automatically when the license is
enabled on the NUCLEUS control panel itself. See the Configuration and Operation Manual
for the license for information on setting NUCLEUS up to connect to and control these
devices.
When you use Magellan CCS Navigator to view the list of configurations on a NUCLEUS
control panel, these configurations will not appear on the list.
Activating NUCLEUS License Keys

A NUCLEUS license key allows you to access different types of device control. Before you
can activate your NUCLEUS license key, you must discover NUCLEUS and save the results of
your discovery in the Navigation pane.
To activate your NUCLEUS license key, follow this procedure:
1 Right-click the resource icon for the device in the Navigation dialog box, and then select
Configuration from the resulting context menu.
2 Select the Device tab.
3 In the License Key field, type your number string. A NUCLEUS license key contains 16
characters.
4 Click Write and Reboot to send a new license key on the device and reboot it.
The writing process includes a validation step to prevent you from writing an invalid license
key to the NUCLEUS control panel.
See Setting Device Options on page 149 for more information.
To activate the license key at the NUCLEUS panel itself, see your NUCLEUS Network Control
Panel Installation and Operation Manual.
User Manual
Configuring a NUCLEUS Control Panel Using Magellan CCS Navigator

The general steps for configuring a NUCLEUS Control Panel using Magellan CCS Navigator
include the following:
1 Discover the NUCLEUS control panel.

See CCS Device Discovery on page 75.
2 Add the NUCLEUS control panel to the Configuration folder.

See Creating a NUCLEUS Configuration Folder on page 163.
3 Add items for control to the Configuration folder.

The folder you will add devices to will depend on the device to be controlled. See the
following topics:
 Adding CENTRIO Systems to a NUCLEUS Configuration on page 164

 Adding a Routing View to a NUCLEUS Configuration on page 164
 Creating Routing Panels for a NUCLEUS Configuration on page 171
4 Create panels for devices that need them.
Devices that need panels include the following:
 Routing panels
See Starting the Routing Panel Configuration Wizard on page 171.
 CENTRIO panels
See Using the CENTRIO Panel Configuration Wizard on page 180.
5 Run the Configuration Wizard, and assign devices, menus, and parameters to the control
panel’s buttons and knobs.
6 Transfer the configuration to the panel or save it to a USB device or network location for
backup.
See Transferring NUCLEUS Configuration files on page 205 and Exporting a
NUCLEUS Configuration file to XML on page 208.
Creating a NUCLEUS Configuration Folder

NUCLEUS control panels can only be configured by an Administrator user of a Magellan
CCS Navigator Server.
To create a NUCLEUS configuration folder, follow these steps:
1 Discover the NUCLEUS control panel and save the results of the discovery. See CCS Device
2 In the Discovery folder of Magellan CCS Navigator’s Navigation view, select the NUCLEUS
control panel you want to configure and drag it to the Configuration folder.
3 Click on the + to open the child resources of the control panel.
Below the NUCLEUS control panel are three folders:
Router/Centrio Views, Devices, and Configurations. When your configuration is
complete, there will be one or more devices in the Devices folder, and at least one
configuration in the Configuration folder. There may also be routing panel configurations
in the Router/Centrio Views folder, if you have the NUCLEUS-TRAX and/or routers option.
164 Chapter 9
You are now ready to add devices to your configuration.
Adding CENTRIO Systems to a NUCLEUS Configuration

With a NUCLEUS-MV license, you can add a CENTRIO System for control following the steps
here. Otherwise, with a NUCLEUS-PROC license you can add CENTRIO PIPs and modules for
processing control. See Adding Processing or SNMP Devices to a NUCLEUS
To add a CENTRIO system to a NUCLEUS Configuration folder, follow these steps:
1 Add the Routing view that is associated with your CENTRIO system to the Configuration >
NUCLEUS > Router/Centrio Views folder.
You can get the routing view associated with your CENTRIO system by discovering the
Platinum router (use the IP address of the PT-RES module) that the CENTRIO system is
housed in.
2 Copy a CENTRIO system node from the Discovery or Network folder to the
Configuration > NUCLEUS > Router/Centrio Views folder.
If you have not discovered a CENTRIO system, see Running a Discovery on page 85 for
details.
There is no limitation on the number of CENTRIO systems you can add, as long as they all
share the same router database.
3 Select, and then right-click the CENTRIO system icon, and select Create > CENTRIO Panel.
Routing view
CENTRIO system
CENTRIO panel
Figure 9-1 Selecting a CENTRIO System

The CENTRIO Panel Configuration wizard opens.
For information on using this wizard, see Creating a CENTRIO Panel for a NUCLEUS
Adding a Routing View to a NUCLEUS Configuration

You can only have one routing view in the NUCLEUS Router/Centrio Views folder of the
Navigation pane. To switch to another routing view, first delete or copy and paste a
pre-existing routing view to a different location.
Do not make changes to the Routing View associated with a NUCLEUS panel while the
Configuration dialog box is open. This could make routing panels become invalid.
User Manual
To associate a Routing Control View with a NUCLEUS control panel, do one of the
following:
 Drag and drop the Routing View onto a NUCLEUS control panel under the
Configuration > NUCLEUS folder. The Routing View icon appears under the Router/
Centrio Views sub-folder.
 Copy the Routing View, right click on the NUCLEUS control panel in the Configuration
folder and select Paste from the shortcut menu.
Routing view
Routing panel (which can be
added to a Configuration)
Figure 9-2 Routers in NUCLEUS Folder of Navigation Pane

When your configuration is complete, there will be one or more Routing panels in the
Router/Centrio Views folder, and at least one configuration in the Configuration folder.
There may also be devices in the Devices folder, if you have the NUCLEUS-TRAX option.
For NUCLEUS configuration and control, router systems are divided into router sub-views
called routing panels. Each routing panel can be custom configured and then added to the
NUCLEUS configuration. Routing panels are similar to devices and virtual devices, with the
exception that they have no parameters to assign to panel controls.
Routing panels are created using the Routing Panel Configuration wizard. See Starting
the Routing Panel Configuration Wizard on page 171.
Adding Processing or SNMP Devices to a NUCLEUS Configuration

To add devices to your NUCLEUS configuration for processing control (for use with a
NUCLEUS-PROC or NUCLEUS-SNMP license), drag and drop devices into the Devices folder
of the NUCLEUS icon in the Configuration dialog box.
When you drag and drop a CENTRIO system into the Devices folder, the PIP sub-devices
are not dragged with it. To add PIPs, you must drag them specifically to the Devices folder.
A NUCLEUS control panel can control Virtual devices (see Creating Virtual Devices and
Assigning Favorites to Virtual Devices on page 166), 6800+, NEO, CENTRIO, and X75
devices from Magellan CCS Navigator’s Network folder.
Any NUCLEUS configurations that include DPS-475/575 synchronizers must be updated

every time you re-configure their associated EDGE-DPS575.
166 Chapter 9
You can also add offline devices to a NUCLEUS Configuration for Processing Control. See
You must have the NUCLEUS-SNMP license key to assign SNMP traps to NUCLEUS
LCD buttons and control knobs. on page 166.
You must have the NUCLEUS-SNMP license key to assign SNMP traps to NUCLEUS LCD
buttons and control knobs.
Adding Off-Line Devices

You can add devices to the Virtual Device or Configuration folder while they are off-line
by copying and pasting them from the Catalog folder. This can be useful when devices are
unavailable due to being retasked for other purposes, if they are in a different network
(such as a mobile truck) at the time, etc.
If you add devices that are off-line, the specific devices must be defined before you can
control them using a NUCLEUS control panel. To add the Device ID information to a device
in a configuration that was off-line during creation of the configuration, follow these steps:
1 Discover the device that you actually wish to monitor/control (if it has not been discovered
already), and save the results of your discovery.
2 Right click on the device and choose Properties from the shortcut menu.
3 On the Device tab of the Properties dialog box, click Copy.
4 Right click on the identical device that has been copied from the Catalog folder, and
choose Properties from the shortcut menu.
5 On the Device tab, click Paste.
Parameters on an off-line device may not perfectly match those on the actual device. The
device catalog information stored in Magellan CCS Navigator may be older or newer than
that stored on the actual device. If the parameter lists do not match, some assigned
parameters may not be available in the configuration.
For best results, you should check your configuration with the actual device before
uploading it to your NUCLEUS control panel.
Creating Virtual Devices and Assigning Favorites to Virtual

Devices
The NUCLEUS control panel uses virtual devices to group parameters from up to ten X75,
NEO and 6800+ devices into a single addressable entity. You can then access the controls
for those devices by clicking a single button on the control panel. Devices do not have to be
from the same product line, nor do they need to share the same IP address. You can use the
same virtual device on multiple NUCLEUS control panels.
Only an Administrator user on a Magellan CCS Navigator Server can create and modify
virtual devices.
To create a virtual device, ensure that Magellan CCS Navigator is in Build mode, and then
follow these steps:

 Right-click on the Virtual Devices folder in the Navigation pane and select
Create > Virtual Device from the shortcut menu.
User Manual
 Drag the first stand-alone device you would like to include in your virtual device
from the Network, Discovery, or Catalog folder to the Virtual Device folder. A
new virtual device containing that stand-alone device appears in the Virtual
Device folder.
2 Right-click on the new virtual device and choose Rename from the shortcut menu, and
then type a name for the virtual device.
Figure 9-3 Navigation Pane With Virtual Devices

3 Drag up to ten NEO, 6800+ and X75 devices from the Network, Discovery, or Catalog
folder and drop them onto the newly created virtual device.
4 Right-click on a device in the virtual device and select Favorites….
The Favorites dialog box opens. The parameters that you select here are the parameters
that will be available to the control panel configuration.
This dialog box displays the parameters of the selected device.

168 Chapter 9
Configure appears for SNMP

devices only
Figure 9-4 Favorites Dialog for a Typical Device
If you have a NAVIGATOR-INT license, you can also configure favorites in the Parameter
pane. Changes made to device favorites in either place will be updated in both places. See
Volume 5 for more information.
5 Place a check mark beside each parameter you would like to appear in the virtual device’s
parameters list. By default, no parameters are selected.
The Alias field only accepts data in English. If you are using an alternate operational
language, your keyboard will be automatically switched to English for data entry in this
field. If you switch the keyboard back to data entry in an alternate language, data
corruption could occur.
You can change the name by which a selected parameter appears by clicking in its field in
the Alias column. Use the Delete key to remove the default or old alias and type your new
parameter name.
By default, the control panel will display the alias. However, if you switch to “Leitch Name
Mode” in the NUCLEUS control panel’s parameter settings, the control panel will display the
default names of favorite parameters.
6 Repeat steps 4 -6 for other standalone devices included in the virtual device.
User Manual
Configuring Favorites for an SNMP Device

For SNMP devices only, the Favorites dialog box has a Configure button. This button
allows you to add multiple Object ID (OID) root nodes to the favorites for this device. The
Parameters pane will display all Object IDs (OIDs) listed under these root SNMP nodes (in
case the SNMP-managed device provides access to other OIDs implemented in different
branches of the SNMP MIB).
1 In the Favorites dialog box, click Configure.
Figure 9-5 SNMP Device Configuration Dialog Box

2 Click MIB.
If the Object ID you want to include is not listed in the MIB tree, you need to add the MIB
that contains this definition before proceeding. Click the Load MIB button, as shown in
step 3.
3 In the SNMP MIB Browser dialog box, browse to the specific Object (parameter) or Trap
(alarm).
SNMP devices from third-party manufacturers appear according to their own hierarchy. See
the documentation for that SNMP-enabled device for more information.
170 Chapter 9
Figure 9-6 SNMP MIB Browser in Magellan CCS Navigator

4 Click OK.
The ID is added to the table in the SNMP Device Configuration dialog box.
5 Repeat steps 8 and 9 until the SNMP Device Configuration dialog box contains all the
OIDs that you would select as favorites for that SNMP device.
6 Click OK to close the SNMP Device Configuration dialog box, and then OK to close the
Favorites dialog box.
New variables appear in the Parameters tab of the Parameters pane, and new traps
appear in the Alarms tab of the Parameters pane.
Copying Favorites Between Virtual Devices

Only an Administrator user of a Magellan CCS Navigator Server can create or edit Favorites
for a device.
You can copy all the favorites for all the devices in a virtual device when both virtual devices
contain the same modules (device types), and these modules are arranged in the same
order.
You can also copy the favorites list from one member of a virtual device to another identical
unit (for example, from one X75 to another).
To copy and paste control panel display favorites for a device or virtual device, follow these
steps:
1 In Build mode, right click a device or virtual device in the Virtual Device folder and select
Copy Favorites.
2 Right click on the second identical device or virtual device in the Virtual Device folder and
select Paste Favorites.
The parameter/alarm selection created previously will be replicated in the second
standalone or virtual device.
User Manual
If the device you have chosen to paste favorites to is unsuitable -- for example, it is a virtual
device in which the various component devices are not identical -- the Paste Favorites
option will not be available. However, you can copy and paste favorites between individual
component devices of different virtual devices.
Creating Routing Panels for a NUCLEUS Configuration

To control a router with NUCLEUS, you need the NUCLEUS-RTR option. This option allows
NUCLEUS to control routers, including Platinum, Panacea and Integrator series routers. For
more information about purchasing routing features, contact your sales representative. If
your license key has not yet been added to the control panel, see Activating NUCLEUS
License Keys on page 162.
Magellan CCS Navigator uses Router Control Views to describe entire routing systems.
These files are created when routing systems are configured. (See Volume 6: Routing
Configuration for more information.) Router Control Views provide essential information
about available sources and destinations that are associated with the router system.
Only an Administrator user on a Magellan CCS Navigator Server can create a NUCLEUS
Router panel or NUCLEUS configuration.
After you have created your Router Control View, you must import it into Magellan CCS
Navigator. See Volume 6: Routing Configuration for more information.
When a router system is added to NUCLEUS, the source and destination names, categories
and indexes become available on the control panel. If salvos have been created for the
router system, they are also available on NUCLEUS. Only one Router System View can be
assigned to a NUCLEUS control panel at a time; however, many routing panels that are
derived simultaneously from this router system can be added to NUCLEUS.
Starting the Routing Panel Configuration Wizard

The routing portion of a NUCLEUS configuration is created from a routing view using the
Routing Panel Configuration wizard. To start the wizard, follow these steps:
1 Right click on an existing Router View node under the Router/ Centrio Views folder of
the NUCLEUS device.
2 Select Create > Routing Panel from the menu that appears.
The Routing Panel Configuration wizard opens.
172 Chapter 9
Figure 9-7 Page 1 of the Routing Panel Configuration Wizard

3 Enter a descriptive name for your Routing panel. The name can be up to 10 characters long.
4 Choose the type of Routing panel you want to make.
Table 9-2 Routing Panel Types

Device Type Description
Single Bus Device Assign a source to a single pre-determined destination
X/Y Device Select a single destination and then assign a source
Multi Bus Device Select any number of destinations and then assign a
source; this panel type includes destination statuses
See your NUCLEUS Router Control Option Configuration and Operation Manual for
information on operating in these modes.
5 Choose a destination and source selection type from the following options.
Table 9-3 Destination/Source Selection Types

Option Description
Discrete Port Select this option if you want to identify the routing
Selection panel destinations and sources by their logical names
Category/Index With category indexing, both a category (i.e., VTR, CAM,
Selection) MIC, etc.) and an index (i.e., 21, 2, 36, etc.) are required
to identify a device. The first click of a button selects the
category; subsequent clicks select the index.
This selection method allows many destinations and
sources to be accessed using few buttons.
There are four extra screens in the Routing Panel
Configuration wizard when you choose this option.
User Manual
6 Click Next to proceed to the Source screen.

See Selecting Sources for your NUCLEUS Routing Panel on page 173.
Selecting Sources for your NUCLEUS Routing Panel

The Sources page appears after you have selected the type of Routing panel you will be
making in the Routing Panel Configuration Wizard. (See Starting the Routing Panel
Configuration Wizard on page 171.)
The choices you make on the Sources page determine the number and order of router
sources when using this Routing Panel Configuration on your NUCLEUS control panel. If
you place the most frequently used sources early in the list, they will be most easily
accessible.
The wizard can have

as few as three steps
or as many as seven,
depending on the
type of panel you
want to create.
Type partial text in

the Filter field to
limit the contents of
the Available column
to only the items that
start with the
characters you have
entered.
Figure 9-8 Selecting Sources in the Routing Panel Configuration Wizard

Items can either appear in the Available field or in the Selected field, but not in both. The
order of items in the Selected list is the order they will appear on the NUCLEUS control
panel. By default, all items appear in the Selected column in logical database order.
To move an item between the Selected and Available fields, first click on it to highlight it.
If you click a single item, and then click another item, the first item you clicked on is
un-highlighted. To highlight multiple items at the same time, hold down the SHIFT or CTRL
key on your keyboard.
With items highlighted, you can perform the following functions:
 Click > to add highlighted items from the Available field to the Selected field. New
sources always appear at the bottom of the Selected list.
 Click >> to move all visible sources from the Available field to the Selected field. If
you have applied filtering to the Available field, only those items that are visible will be
moved.
 Click < to remove highlighted items from the Selected field.
174 Chapter 9
 Click << to remove all items from the Selected field.

 Click Up to move highlighted items up one position in the Selected field.
 Click Down to move highlighted items down one position in the Selected field.
 Click the A-Z button to place all items in alphanumeric order.
 Click the Z-A button to place all items in reverse alphanumeric order.
 Click Top to place highlighted items at the top of the list.
 Click Bottom to place highlighted items at the bottom of the list.
To leave this screen, you have four options:
 Click Next >> to move on to the next step of the new panel wizard. At least one item
must appear in the Selected field for this option to be available.
 Click << Back to return to the previous page in the wizard.
 Click Close to exit the wizard without creating a panel.
 Click Finish to select the defaults on all the following pages, close the wizard and
create a panel. At least one item must appear in the Selected field for this option to be
available.
When you have completed this page, click Next>> to proceed to Selecting Destinations
for your NUCLEUS Routing Panel on page 174.
Selecting Destinations for your NUCLEUS Routing Panel

The Destinations page appears after you have defined the sources in the Routing Panel
Configuration wizard. (See Selecting Sources for your NUCLEUS Routing Panel on
page 173.)
The choices you make on the Destinations screen determine the number and order of
router destinations when using this Routing panel on your NUCLEUS control panel. If you
place the most frequently used destinations early in the list, they will be most easily
accessible.
The tools for filling out the Destinations screen are the same as those on the Sources
screen. See Selecting Sources for your NUCLEUS Routing Panel on page 173 for more
information.
If you are creating a Single Bus Routing panel, you will have a modified version of the
Destinations screen. Because in a Single Bus Routing panel you only have one pre-defined
destination, you can only select one destination on this screen. When you click the > button
to add a highlighted item from the Available field to the Selected field, the new
destination will replace any destination already in the Selected list.
When you have completed this page, click Next>> to proceed to the next screen. You must
have at least one destination in the Selected Destinations field in order to proceed.
Depending on the type of Routing panel you are making, this may be the last screen of your
Configuration wizard. Or, you may proceed to one of the following:
 Selecting Destination Statuses for your NUCLEUS Routing Panel (Multi-Bus

Only) on page 175
 Selecting Destination Categories (Cat/Index mode only) on page 175
 Selecting Levels for your NUCLEUS Routing Panel on page 178
User Manual
Selecting Destination Statuses for your NUCLEUS Routing Panel (Multi-Bus

Only)
The Destination Statuses page does not appear when you are creating an X/Y or Single
Bus routing panel.
The available destination statuses are the same as the destinations selected in the previous
screen. (See Selecting Destinations for your NUCLEUS Routing Panel on page 174.)
When you select a destination for statusing, this means that the source(s) connected to that
destination will be listed on the NUCLEUS screen and LCD buttons.
The controls for this page are described in Selecting Sources for your NUCLEUS Routing
Panel on page 173.
When you have completed this page, click Next>> to proceed to the next screen. See
Selecting Destination Categories (Cat/Index mode only) on page 175 or Selecting
Levels for your NUCLEUS Routing Panel on page 178.
Selecting Levels for your NUCLEUS Routing Panel

The Levels page appears after you have defined the Destinations (or Destination Statuses)
in the Routing Panel Configuration wizard. (See Selecting Destinations for your
NUCLEUS Routing Panel on page 174.) The choices you make on the Levels screen
determine the number and order of router levels when using this Routing panel on your
NUCLEUS control panel.
Defining less than the total number of levels for your panel can be a good way to avoid
doing the same breakaway take over and over, or to limit access for certain users of the
panel. Because NUCLEUS can hold up to 16 configurations containing any number of
Routing panels, you could, for example, create another panel that includes only the
excluded levels from this panel, or that includes all levels.
The tools for filling out the Levels screen are the same as those on the Sources screen. See
Selecting Sources for your NUCLEUS Routing Panel on page 173 for more information.
When you have completed this page, click Next>> to proceed to the next screen. You must
have at least one destination in the Selected Destinations field in order to proceed.
Depending on the type of Routing panel you are making, this may be the last screen of the
wizard. Before you can use the Routing panel on your NUCLEUS control panel, you must
add it to a configuration using the Configuration tool, and then transfer that configuration
to the control panel. See Creating a NUCLEUS Configuration on page 186.
If you are creating a Catalog/Index style of panel, the next screen will beSelecting
Destination Categories (Cat/Index mode only) on page 175.
Selecting Destination Categories (Cat/Index mode only)

If you chose a Cat/Index mode for your Routing Panel Configuration file, the Destination
Categories page will follow one of these sections:
 Selecting Destinations for your NUCLEUS Routing Panel on page 174

 Selecting Destination Statuses for your NUCLEUS Routing Panel (Multi-Bus
Only) on page 175
176 Chapter 9
Categories are a navigational tool that help you find specific ports on a large router. When
using categories, devices are normally divided by type. You select the type of port you want
to use, and then you select the alphanumeric identifier, or index, for a specific port from
that subset.
The available categories and indexes are provided by the Router Control View. The default
router contains one destination category. You can relabel destinations and create multiple
categories. See Volume 6: Routing Configuration for more information.
Panel on page 173.
At least one category must appear in the Selected field of this screen (it will not affect the
output if you are creating a Single Bus Routing panel) before you can proceed. When you
have completed this page, click Next>> to proceed to Selecting Destination Indexes
(Cat/Index mode only) on page 176.
Selecting Destination Indexes (Cat/Index mode only)

If you chose a Cat/Index mode for your Routing panel, the Destination Indexes page
follows the Destination Categories page. See Selecting Destination Categories (Cat/
Index mode only) on page 175 for more information.
Indexes are the characters assigned to a category. For example, you may have a category
called CAM, and within that you have four cameras with index labels 1, 2, 3, and 4. You
can have multiple levels of indexes, where your four cameras could be labeled 1A, 1B, 2A,
and 2B. In that case, in order to select the destination or source on the NUCLEUS panel, you
would click first CAM, and the NUCLEUS LCDs would refresh to offer you 1 and 2. You
would make your selection, and be presented with A and B, from which you would choose
the device you want.
For information on assigning indexes to destination devices, see Volume 6: Routing

Configuration.
User Manual
The wizard can have

as few as three steps
or as many as seven,
depending on the
type of panel you
want to create.
Figure 9-9 Selecting Indexes for a NUCLEUS Routing Panel Configuration

By default, there are 16 indexes, numbered hexidecimally 0 - F.
To add an index, enter the index label in the Add New Index field and click Add. The index
appears at the bottom of the List of Added Indexes field.
Click Delete to remove the selected index from the List of Added Indexes.
The order of indexes in the List of Added Indexes field is the order that the indexes will
appear on the buttons on your NUCLEUS control panel. To rearrange their order, use the
following buttons:

To leave this screen, you have four options:
 Click Next>> to move on to the next step of the new panel wizard. At least one item
 Click Back to return to the previous page in the wizard.
 Click Close to exit the wizard without creating a panel.
available.
If you are creating a Single-Bus Routing panel, something must be in the Selected field of
this screen. However, it will not affect the final panel.
When you have completed this page, click Next>> to proceed to Selecting Source
Categories (Cat/Index mode only) on page 178.
178 Chapter 9
Selecting Source Categories (Cat/Index mode only)

If you chose a Cat/Index mode for your Routing panel, this screen will follow Selecting
Destination Indexes (Cat/Index mode only) on page 176.
Categories are a navigational tool that help you group sources on a large router. When
using categories, sources are normally divided by type. You select the type of source you
want to use, and then you select the alphanumeric identifier, or index, for a specific source
from that subset.
The default router contains one source category. You can relabel source and create multiple
categories. See Volume 6: Routing Configuration for more information.
Panel on page 173.
When you have completed this page, click Next>> to proceed to Selecting Source
Indexes (Cat/Index mode only) on page 178.
Selecting Source Indexes (Cat/Index mode only)

If you have chosen categories and indexes as your organizational model, during NUCLEUS
operation you will choose a source type from a series of buttons, one for each category.
Once you choose a category, you will select from the members of that category. The
members are called Indexes.
Source indexes are set using exactly the same methods as destination indexes. For
information on completing the Source Indexes page, see Selecting Source Indexes (Cat/
Index mode only) on page 178.
When you have completed this page, click Next>> to proceed to Selecting Levels for
your NUCLEUS Routing Panel on page 178.
Selecting Levels for your NUCLEUS Routing Panel

The Levels page is the second-last page in the Routing Panel Configuration wizard. (See
Selecting Source Indexes (Cat/Index mode only) on page 178.)
Use this screen to determine the router levels that will be available on this particular routing
panel configuration. Levels are the different components that make up the complete signal
to be routed -- for example, video and audio.
For instructions on filling out the Levels screen, see Selecting Sources for your NUCLEUS
Routing Panel on page 173.
Selecting Salvos for your NUCLEUS Routing Panel

The Salvos page is the last page in the Routing Panel Configuration wizard. (See
Selecting Source Indexes (Cat/Index mode only) on page 178.)
Use this screen to determine the router Salvos that will be available on this particular
routing panel configuration. Only salvos for which access rights have been provided are
included in the Available Salvos list. By default, no salvos are selected.
User Manual
For instructions on filling out the Salvos screen, see Selecting Sources for your
NUCLEUS Routing Panel on page 173.
When you have completed this page, click Finish. Your Routing panel will appear in the
Configuration > NUCLEUS > Router/Centrio Views folder in the Navigation pane.
Before you can use the Routing panel on your NUCLEUS control panel, you must add it to a
configuration using the Configuration tool, and then transfer that configuration to the
control panel. See Creating a NUCLEUS Configuration on page 186 for more
information.
Editing a Routing Panel

To edit a Routing panel, open it in the Routing Panel Configuration wizard (Right click on
it in the Navigation pane and select Configuration).
The Routing Panel Configuration wizard opens with all the settings of the Routing panel
you created. You can change the settings on any page and click Finish to save. The changes
will overwrite the Routing panel, unless you change its name on the first page.
A red circle with a slash through it on a routing panel indicates that the Routing System
Control View the panel is associated with has been changed since the panel was created.
Routing System Control View

Routing View that needs to be
updated using the Routing
Configuration Wizard
Figure 9-10 Routing Views in NUCLEUS

If you attempt to open a configuration that includes this routing panel, or transfer that
configuration to or from a NUCLEUS panel, you will be prompted to run the Routing
Configuration wizard to update the panel.
Auto Routing and CENTRIO panels can become invalid in the following circumstances:
Validation  When a Routing View node is modified (i.e. the name of a source or destination has
changed).
 When a new Routing View node is associated with a deleted Routing View system.
Once a Routing View node is modified, any routing or CENTRIO panels corresponding to
that Routing View node are automatically validated with the "Automatically Validating
Panels" progress bar. The wizard is automatically launched in the background to re-validate
the panel.
There may be discrepancies between the Routing Views. An algorithm is applied to validate
as much of the Routing View as possible, so your NUCLEUS control panel will continue to
operate correctly. Some connections may be lost.
180 Chapter 9
Creating a CENTRIO Panel for a NUCLEUS Configuration

This section requires a NUCLEUS-MV license. To acquire NUCLEUS licenses, contact your
Sales representative.
Use the CENTRIO Panel Configuration wizard to create CENTRIO panels for NUCLEUS. You
can select the available sources and PIPs of a CENTRIO system (as defined by its Logical
Database file) to create customized sub-views (individual CENTRIO panels). Each CENTRIO
panel can be assigned a unique name and can be configured to function as a X/Y device or
multi bus device.
When you add a CENTRIO panel to a NUCLEUS configuration, it is automatically assigned

an LCD button. After the CENTRIO panel is activated on NUCLEUS, the CENTRIO sources
and PIPs are assigned LCD buttons for quick activation/selection.
The steps involved in creating a CENTRIO panel are described in the following sections:
 Adding CENTRIO Systems to a NUCLEUS Configuration on page 164

 Using the CENTRIO Panel Configuration Wizard on page 180
 Creating a NUCLEUS Configuration on page 186
You can also add CENTRIO PIPs and devices if you have a NUCLEUS-PROC license. See
Adding Processing or SNMP Devices to a NUCLEUS Configuration on page 165 for
more information.
Using the CENTRIO Panel Configuration Wizard

Before you can create a CENTRIO panel for use in a NUCLEUS configuration, you must add
a CENTRIO System and Routing View to your NUCLEUS Configuration folder. See Adding
CENTRIO Systems to a NUCLEUS Configuration on page 164 for more information.
To open the CENTRIO Panel Configuration wizard, right-click the CENTRIO system icon
under Configurations > NUCLEUS > Router/Centrio Views, and select Create >
CENTRIO Panel.
A dialog box similar to the following appears.

User Manual
Figure 9-11 CENTRIO Control Panel Configuration Dialog Box

To complete this page, follow these steps:
1 Enter a name for the CENTRIO panel.

2 Select a CENTRIO panel type.
There are two options:
 X/Y Device—Assigns a source to one CENTRIO PIP at a time. You can select this PIP
from a configured list of available PIPs.
 Multi Bus—Assigns a source to multiple PIPs simultaneously. You can select these PIPs
from a configured list of available PIPs.
3 Select the source and PIP selection type that you want to use for your CENTRIO panel.
 Discrete port selection—Identifies the CENTRIO panel sources and PIPs by their
logical names.
 Category/Index selection—Identifies the CENTRIO panel sources by category and
indexes.
In the case of CENTRIO, the term “category” refers to a Display, and the term “index”
refers to a specific PiP on a Display. With this type of CENTRIO Panel, you can select a
Display to narrow down the list of available PIPS to choose from, because PIPs can be
moved from one display to another.
4 Click Next to proceed to the PIP Attributes screen, and Selecting PIP Attributes on
page 181.
Selecting PIP In this step of the wizard, you can select the attributes that the PIPs will display. All of the
Attributes attributes are listed. From this list, select an option, and then click the > button.
182 Chapter 9
Figure 9-12 Selecting PIP Attributes

The selection you make determines how PIPs will be selected on the panel.
Table 9-4 Selecting PIP Attributes

PIP Selection Attribute Description
PIP Name System level name that a PIP has when it
is discovered by Magellan CCS
Navigator
PIP Static name Name that is designated in Layout
Designer
PIP Source Name Name that is designated in the router
database
PIP Dynamic name UMD text from the TSL external protocol
When you have chosen an option, click Next to proceed to the next page of the wizard.
Selecting the Sources and PIPs for Your CENTRIO Panel

In the next two steps of the wizard, you can select the sources and PIPs that you want the
CENTRIO panel to control.
All of the sources that are established by the Router System Control View are listed under
Available sources. From this list, select the sources you want to add to the CENTRIO panel,
and then click the > button. You can filter the Available sources list by entering a keyword
in the Filter box.
User Manual
Figure 9-13 Selecting Routing Panel Sources

Selected sources now lists the sources that you can control with the CENTRIO panel.
You can determine the order in which the sources appear on NUCLEUS by using the
following buttons:
 Up—Moves the selected items up one position in the list

 Down—Moves the selected items down one position in the list
 Top—Moves the selected items to the top of the list
 Bottom—Moves the selected items to the bottom of the list
 A–Z—Organizes all items in the list by alphanumeric order
 Z–A—Organizes all items in the list by reverse alphanumeric order
When have completed organizing your Selected sources list, click Next to go to the
Selected PIPs screen.
All of the discovered PIPs are listed under Available PIPs. From this list, select the PIPs you
want to add to the CENTRIO panel, and then click the > button. You can filter the
Available PIPs list by entering a keyword in the Filter box.
Selected PIPs now lists the PIPs that you can control with the CENTRIO panel.
To determine the order in which the PIPs appear on NUCLEUS, use the same buttons as
described for Selected Sources.
When have completed organizing your Selected PIPs list, depending on the CENTRIO panel
type you are configuring, either click Next or Finish.
Selecting Displays for Your CENTRIO Panel

If the Router System Control View you are using to create the CENTRIO panel has categories
and indexes to identify sources and PIPs, you can select the displays that you want the
CENTRIO panel to control.
184 Chapter 9
If no display names are entered, all displays are included. You will have to know the names
of the displays available in order to add them to the list.
Figure 9-14 Adding and Deleting Indexes

To add a display to the list, enter text or a display name in the Enter New Display Name
box and click Add. To delete an display, select it from the list, and then click Delete.
When have completed organizing your Added Displays list, depending on the CENTRIO
panel type you are configuring, click Next or Finish.
Selecting Source Categories for Your CENTRIO Panel

and indexes to identify sources, you can select the categories that you want the CENTRIO
panel to control.
Source categories are selected in the same way as sources. All of the source categories that
are established by the Router System Control View are listed under Available Source
Categories.
User Manual
Figure 9-15 Adding Source Categories

When have completed organizing your Selected Source Categories list, depending on the
CENTRIO panel type you are configuring, click Next (if you are creating a Source Category
panel; see Selecting Source Indexes for Your CENTRIO Panel on page 185) or Finish.
Selecting Source Indexes for Your CENTRIO Panel

and indexes to identify sources, you can select the indexes that you want the CENTRIO
panel to control.
Source Indexes are based on a predefined list, and have no correlation with real router
indexes. Similarly to the Display name entry for PIP category is a free list for you to enter any
text that is part of your indexing scheme.
You can choose to add or delete indexes from the list. All of the indexes that are established
by the Router System Control View are listed under List of Added Indexes.
186 Chapter 9
Figure 9-16 Adding and Deleting Indexes

To add indexes to the index list, enter text or a display name in the Enter New Index box
and click Add. To delete an index, select it from the list, and then click Delete.
After you complete your new CENTRIO panel, you can add it to a NUCLEUS configuration.
For more information, see Creating a NUCLEUS Configuration.
Creating a NUCLEUS Configuration

Only an Administrator user on a Magellan CCS Navigator Server can create and edit
NUCLEUS configurations.
1 In the Configuration folder in the Navigation pane, right click on the icon that represents
the NUCLEUS control panel you want to configure and select Configuration.
For information on the other tabs of the NUCLEUS Configuration dialog box, see CCS
Device Configuration on page 127.
User Manual
2 Click on the Control Panel tab.
List of stand-alone and virtual A Routing Configuration has no

devices available to the NUCLEUS parameters or other items to assign.
control panel. Click the + to the left
of each device to view the list of
favorites (parameters) for that
device.
Tree view of the

selected configuration
Button assignment in
the selected page of
this configuration
Assignments for the

selected page of this
configuration. Click on
the Device and LCD
tabs to switch
between portions of
the control panel.
Figure 9-17. NUCLEUS Configuration Dialog Box’s Control Panel Tab
Do not make changes to the Routing View associated with a NUCLEUS panel while the
Configuration dialog box is open. This could make routing panels become invalid.
3 Select (new configuration) from the Configuration menu in the top right corner of the
dialog.
The New Configuration dialog box opens.
188 Chapter 9
A password is
not required.
Passwords must
be numeric.
Figure 9-18 New Configuration Dialog Box

4 Enter a name for your configuration.
5 Select a configuration type.
The four options here affect how your devices and parameters will appear in your NUCLEUS
configuration (If you have a NUCLEUS-PROC and/or NUCLEUS-SNMP license). If you are
creating a configuration that will control router or CENTRIO panels, you must choose LCD
Assignment, Split navigation, or Device category.
 LCD assignment - Uses a wizard to organize device navigation by device names,

with each device accessible through the first level of the control panel’s LCD button
assignment.
On NUCLEUS, the first level of an LCD Assignment configuration contains virtual
and stand-alone devices assigned to the LCD buttons. You can navigate down
through the control panel’s assignment level hierarchy using indexes and LCD
buttons, and back up using the control panel’s Exit button.
 Split navigation - Uses a wizard to place devices on the first row of LCD buttons,
with menus for a selected device on the second row of LCD buttons.
 Device category - Uses a wizard to organize devices and virtual devices, including
Routing panels and CENTRIO panels, into categories, which are accessible through
the first level of the control panel’s LCD button assignment hierarchy.
The first screen of a configuration created with this wizard has categories assigned
to the control panel’s LCD buttons. Each category is also assigned an index value
that can be entered into the control panel to access the category.
The second assignment level contains virtual devices, devices, CENTRIO panels and
Routing panels that are part of a category. LCD buttons at each assignment level
navigate forward through the control panel’s assignment level hierarchy, where you
can access device parameters. Use the control panel’s exit button to navigate back
through the hierarchy.
To add routing and CENTRIO panels to your configuration, you must use the wizard.
 Blank configuration - Does not use a wizard, and creates a blank configuration.
This can only be used with a NUCLEUS-PROC and/or NUCLEUS-SNMP license, and
cannot be used to add CENTRIO or Router panels to a configuration.
User Manual
6 In the Address field, give the configuration an unique address between 0 and 127. This
address is used to control access to locked, protected, or restricted crosspoints. Each panel’s
address should be unique, so as not to interfere with another’s operations.
7 Click OK.
If you chose a wizard to help create a configuration, the appropriate wizard will start.
Otherwise, a blank configuration loads. See Creating a Configuration Without Using a
Wizard on page 193 for more information.
If you are creating a Split Mode or LCD Assignment wizard, proceed to Step 12.
If you are creating a Device Category configuration, you must now create categories.
Categories in a configuration file are menus that are used to group device assignments.
To change a
category’s
name, right
click on it and
choose
Rename, then
type the new
name.
Figure 9-19 Device Category Wizard’s Step 1 of 4 Screen

8 Use the Add button to create categories.
The Category field only accepts data in English. If you are using an alternate operational
field. If you are using Windows Vista or Windows 7, you will have to switch our keyboard to
English manually from the Language taskbar. If you switch the keyboard back to data entry
in an alternate language, data corruption could occur.
To change a category’s name, select the entire name and press the DELETE key on your
keyboard, and then type a new name.
The order of categories determines the order they will be placed on the LCD buttons in your
final configuration. Use the Up and Down buttons to move the selected category with
respect to the other categories. See Defining the LCD Auto-Assignment Order on
9 Click Next> to advance to Page 2 of 4.

190 Chapter 9
On the second screen of the Device Category wizard, you must add at least one virtual or
stand-alone device, CENTRIO panel, or Routing panel to each category.
Only devices that are currently

assigned to the control panel
appear in the Adding Devices
dialog box. To add other devices,
see Adding Processing or SNMP
Devices to a NUCLEUS
The order of devices in this list

determines how they will be laid
out on the LCD screen. Use the
Up/Down buttons to adjust their
order.
A device with a category listed in

parentheses indicates that the
device is already assigned to that
category.
Figure 9-20. Device Category Wizard’s Step 2 of 4 Screen
10 To add devices to the categories, first select a Category from the field on the left, then select
a device from the Available Devices field, and finally click the > button.
< removes the selected device from the Devices in this Category list.
<< removes all devices.
>> adds all devices from the Available Devices list to the Devices in the Category list.
The device is added to the Devices added in the category list.
The order of categories determines the order they will be placed on the LCD buttons in your
final configuration. Use the Up and Down buttons to move the selected category with
respect to the other categories. See Defining the LCD Auto-Assignment Order on
The Next button will not be available until each category contains at least one device in the
Devices in the Category field.
11 Click Next.
The left side of the next screen lists all the devices that are available to the configuration.
12 Delete any devices you do not want to appear in this configuration, and then if your
configuration contains Routing and CENTRIO panels, but no processing devices, click Next
on this screen.
If your configuration contains processing devices, see Assigning Parameters With
NUCLEUS Configuration Wizard on page 191.
The last page of the Configuration wizard contains options you can add to any
Configuration file.
If you want to change the default settings, see the following topics for more information:
User Manual
 Adding Home and Unity Buttons on page 198

 Defining Access Options on page 199
 Defining the LCD Auto-Assignment Order on page 201
13 Click Finish to close the Configuration wizard.
The Panel Configuration pane of the Configure Control Panel tab displays the menu
structure for the control panel. The Properties pane displays the button assignments for
the currently selected level in the configuration. The Panel Layout pane shows the button
and knob assignments as they will appear on your control panel when the configuration file
is loaded.
Your configuration is now ready to transfer to the NUCLEUS control panel. See
Transferring NUCLEUS Configuration files on page 205.
Assigning Parameters With NUCLEUS Configuration Wizard

You need the NUCLEUS-PROC or NUCLEUS-SNMP option to add favorite parameters and
menus (“processing”) from individual or virtual devices. To add devices to a configuration,
see Adding Processing or SNMP Devices to a NUCLEUS Configuration on page 165.
To start the NUCLEUS Configuration wizard, see Creating a NUCLEUS Configuration on
page 186.
All devices, including Routing and CENTRIO panels, that are present in the Configuration >
NUCLEUS folders, will appear in the left panel of this dialog box. Delete any devices you
do not want to include in the configuration.
The NUCLEUS Configuration wizard contains a What do you want to do now? page. If
the navigation pane in the left side of this screen contains solely Router and CENTRIO
panels, click Next to proceed to the final page of the wizard. Router and CENTRIO controls
and menus are added to the configuration in the CENTRIO and Routing Panel Configuration
wizards. See Creating a CENTRIO Panel for a NUCLEUS Configuration on page 180
and Creating Routing Panels for a NUCLEUS Configuration on page 171 for more
information.
To complete this page of the wizard, select a device or menu from the left side of the
screen.
192 Chapter 9
The Assign Parameters to Panel Controls and Create Device Menu(s) buttons become
active.
Drag parameters from the

left frame and drop them on
the controls on the Display
tab (drop controls onto the
programmable knobs, toggle
buttons, and LCD buttons).
Toggle Programmable
buttons knobs
Click Add to
(1 0f 2) in LCD Wizard create a menu
(3 of 4) in Device
Category Wizard
Figure 9-21. Adding Parameters and Device Menus
See the following topics to complete the screens.
 Adding Menus on page 192

 Adding Parameters on page 193
Adding Menus
To add menus below a device or menu on your configuration, do one of the following:
 Click on the device or menu, click Create Device Menu(s)..., and then click Add.
or
 Right click on the device or menu and then select Create Device Menu.
When adding menus, the order they appear in the list determines the order they will be
assigned to LCD buttons. Move them on the New Device Menu(s) screen with the Up and
Down buttons, or on the Navigation pane by right clicking and selecting Move up or
Move down.
You can add a total of 5500 device menus to a configuration. This total includes the
number of categories and sub-menus added to the configuration.
If you are creating a Split Navigation type of configuration, you can add a maximum of
eight device menus/sub-menus to each device in your configuration (less if you add Unity
and Home buttons to your configuration).
Menu names can only be in English. If you are using an alternate operational language,
your keyboard will be automatically switched to English for data entry for menu names. If
you switch the keyboard back for data entry in an alternate language, data corruption
could occur.
User Manual
Adding Parameters
To assign parameters within the device or menu, click Assign Parameters to Panel
Controls....
The Parameter Assignment dialog box opens.
Drag parameters from the menu on the left to the following areas on the Panel Layout:
 The four programmable knobs

 The four toggle buttons
 16 LCD buttons
To delete an assignment, right click on the assignable button or know and select Delete
from the shortcut menu.
When assigning an SNMP value parameter to a control, the following dialog box will
appear:
Figure 9-22 SNMP Parameter Instance ID Dialog Box

Enter the instance ID of the device that you intend to control with this parameter.
SNMP table parameters do not require you to enter the instance ID to identify the device to
be controlled. Table parameters instead provide an LCD for each possible device for that
parameter. When you select a device, the display shows the individual control(s).
If you leave a category or menu with nothing assigned to it, an error message will appear
when you leave this screen. You can continue, but your configuration will have a Menu
button that leads to an empty destination screen.
When you are done adding menus and parameters, click Next> to continue on to the next
page of the wizard, described in Step 12 of Creating a NUCLEUS Configuration
Folder on page 163.
Creating a Configuration Without Using a Wizard

If you would prefer not to use a wizard, you can create a blank configuration, and then
customize it on the Configuration dialog box’s Control Panel tab. To create a new blank
configuration, see Creating a NUCLEUS Configuration on page 186.
When you click OK to close the New Configuration dialog box, the selected configuration
(in the Configuration menu) is the one that you just created. Nothing is assigned to any
button, there are no menus or categories, and no devices are assigned.
To fill in your configuration, see the following topics:

194 Chapter 9
 Adding Menus above Devices on the Control Panel Tab on page 194
 Adding Devices to a Configuration on the Control Panel Tab on page 194
 Adding Menus Below Devices on the Control Panel Tab on page 196
 Adding Parameters on the Control Panel Tab on page 196
 Assigning Configuration Options on the Control Panel Tab on page 198
You cannot add Routing panels or CENTRIO panels to a NUCLEUS configuration via a blank
configuration. To add these panels to a configuration, add them to a LCD assignment, Split
Navigation, or Device category panel via a wizard. See Creating a NUCLEUS
Configuration on page 186 for more information.
Adding Menus above Devices on the Control Panel Tab

Category menus in a configuration file are used to group devices. To create a category
menu, right click on the root node or a category menu in the Panel Configuration pane
and choose Create Category Menu. The new category menu appears as a child of the
selected resource in the pane.
number of categories and sub-menus added to the configuration. You can create categories
five levels deep from the root of the configuration file.
you switch the keyboard back to data entry in an alternate language, data corruption could
occur.
To rename your category menu, right click on it and choose Rename. Type a new name for
your category menu. This is the name that will appear on an LCD in your completed
configuration.
To change the selected item’s position in the hierarchy with respect to the other items on its
level and in its directory, click Move Up or Move Down. The order of items in this menu
determines their position on the LCD buttons (in co-operation with the auto-assignment
selection. See Defining the LCD Auto-Assignment Order on page 201).
Adding Devices to a Configuration on the Control Panel Tab

Parameters in a NUCLEUS configuration are always added below devices. Devices can be
placed either below the category menus, if you have created those, or below the root of the
configuration. You cannot add a device below another device. You can add a Routing or
CENTRIO panel below the root of the configuration, or below a category menu. You cannot
add a device or device menu below a Routing or CENTRIO panel.
User Manual
Router in a Category Menu
Device in a Category menu
Virtual device
in a Category menu
Device in the Configuration’s Root
To add a device to the configuration:
 Drag a device from the Devices/Parameters pane and drop it on top of the root node
or a category node in the Panel Configuration pane.
OR
 Drop a device on an LCD in the Panel Layout while the correct Category menu is
selected in the Panel Configuration pane.
Switch between the Click the Pg Up and Pg Sixteen programmable

Display and LCD Dn buttons to view LCDs.
portions of the Panel more than 16
Layout by clicking on the assignments in this level.
tabs at the top left of
the Panel Layout.
Figure 9-23 Programmable LCDs

If you have more than 16 items to assign to a page, right click on the page and choose
Create Page. The LED assignments page clears, and the Page Up button lights to indicate
that there are multiple pages in this assignment. If you click the Page Up button, you will
see the previous assignments. From the previous page, if you click Page Dn, you can return
to the new page.
To delete a page, right click on it and choose Delete Page. If you have assignments on a
page, Delete Page will be greyed out. If you remove all assignments from that page, the
option will become available.
number of categories and sub-menus added to the configuration.
196 Chapter 9
Adding Menus Below Devices on the Control Panel Tab

You cannot add a menu below a routing device on a NUCLEUS panel.
Menus represent the lowest level in the NUCLEUS configuration assignment hierarchy. You
can add a total of 5500 menus to a configuration. This total includes the number of
categories and sub-menus added to the configuration. However, to ensure that important
parameters can be accessed quickly, try to keep device menus to one level deep.
Maximum of
five nested
device menu
levels
The total number of device
menus and sub-menus
cannot exceed 5500
Figure 9-24 Nested Categories, Devices, and Menus in a Configuration

 To add a menu, in the Panel Configuration pane, right click on the device (or menu
below a device) where you would like to add a menu, and then select Create Device
Menu.
The new menu is added below the selected device or menu.
 To remove a menu, click Remove.
occur.
 To change the name of a menu, double click on it, delete the current name and type a
new one. Menu names are limited to ten characters.
 To change the position of a menu in the list of objects at a level, right click on it and
select Move Up or Move Down from the shortcut menu. Menus are automatically
assigned to LCDs in the final configuration based on their order on this screen and your
chosen auto-assignment setting. See Defining the LCD Auto-Assignment Order on
page 201.
Adding Parameters on the Control Panel Tab

To add parameters to a configuration, first select the device or menu level at which you
want to add parameters on the Panel Configuration pane. You can only add parameters
to a device or a device menu.
When you’re operating a NUCLEUS control panel, you will first select a device, and then
either select menus below that device or directly adjust parameters for that device.
Therefore, you can only assign parameters below menus that have a device assigned to
them already.
If you want to add parameters for multiple devices in one menu, you should first group
those devices into a virtual device. See Creating Virtual Devices and Assigning
Favorites to Virtual Devices on page 166.
User Manual
There are two ways to add parameters to a configuration:
 Drag parameters from the list under the correct device in the Devices/Parameters
pane and drop them onto the empty programmable knobs, LCD buttons, and toggle
buttons on the Display tab.
OR
 Drag parameters from the selected device’s list of parameters in the Devices/
Parameters pane and drop them onto the desired control on the Properties pane.
Whichever method you choose, both the Panel Layout and Properties pane update as
you make changes.
When assigning an SNMP value parameter to a control, the following dialog box will
appear:
Figure 9-25 SNMP Parameter Instance ID Dialog Box

Enter the instance ID of the device that you intend to control with this parameter.
SNMP table parameters do not require you to enter the instance ID to identify the device to
be controlled. Table parameters instead provide an LCD for each possible device for that
parameter. When you select a device, the display shows the individual control(s).
Whichever method you choose, both the Panel Layout and Properties pane update as
you make changes.
If you drag and drop a parameter that is from the wrong device, the action will not be
allowed.
To delete a mis-assigned parameter from a button or knob, right click on that control and
choose Delete.
You cannot add parameters below a routing device on a NUCLEUS panel.
Modifying an Index Item in a Properties Pane

Items placed at the Devices level have an Index row in the Properties tab. When you are
operating the panel, you can press the number associated with a device to go to its page,
bypassing the normal navigation aids.
Numbers are automatically assigned sequentially starting from 1 within a configuration. To

change the number, click in the Properties pane Index row and type a new number on
your keyboard.
198 Chapter 9
Assigning Configuration Options on the Control Panel Tab

The same configuration options that are available to a configuration created by a wizard are
also available when you create a configuration without the wizard.
To access the Auto-assignment, Access and Auto Boot options, right click in the Panel
Layout pane of the Control Panel Configuration dialog box.
 For information on the Access options, see Defining Access Options on page 199.
 For information on the Auto Assignment options, see Defining the LCD
Auto-Assignment Order on page 201.
 For information on defining Other configuration options, see Defining Other
Configuration Options on page 200.
In the Properties dialog box, you can click in the row for any LCD button, and then on the
browse button that appears in the assignment field to access Home and Unity button
options for that LCD. See Adding Home and Unity Buttons on page 198.
Adding Home and Unity Buttons

If you add Home and Unity buttons to your Processing configuration, they appear on every
page of the configuration.
Device Unity and Menu Unity buttons will not appear on pages associated with a Routing
or CENTRIO panel.
On the last page of the NUCLEUS Configuration wizard, you can add Home, Menu Unity
and Device Unity buttons to your configuration.
To add these buttons to a configuration from the Control Panel tab, click an LCD row in
the Properties pane, and then click on the browse button that appears in the assignment
field.
This dialog box opens:
Figure 9-26 Properties Pane’s LCD Assignment Dialog Box

The options are as follows:
 If you set Home Location, pressing this button on the control panel will take the
panel’s buttons to a pre-selected home page. This location can only be determined
from the panel itself. See your NUCLEUS installation and Operation Manual for more
information.
 If you assign Menu Unity, pressing this button on the control panel will reset the
selected device menu’s parameters to unity values.
 If you assign Device Unity, pressing this button will reset the selected device or virtual
device’s parameters to unity values.
User Manual
From the drop-down menu beside each item, choose the LCD button to assign it to. Unity
and Home buttons will appear in these locations on every layout of the configuration,
including pages accessible with the Pg Up and Pg Dn buttons.
From this dialog box, adding a Home or Unity button removes any parameters assigned to
the chosen button on any other pages in the configuration file. If a page has an
auto-assigned item (a device menu below the current level, or a real or virtual device), the
auto-assigned item is bumped to the next available LCD position.
If all LCD positions are already filled, the auto-assigned item may be placed on a new page
within the device menu.
If the configuration is a Split Navigation configuration, then you can only assign Home and
Unity buttons to LCD 9 - LCD 16 (the bottom row).
Defining Access Options

There are two ways to access the Access Options dialog box:
 Click the Access Options button which appears on the last page of all NUCLEUS
control panel configuration wizards.
 Right click in the Panel Layout dialog box and select Options from the shortcut menu.
The Options dialog box opens.
Click Access Options.
This dialog box opens:
If you assign a password to a configuration,

you will be required to enter this password
before the configuration can be accessed on
the control panel.
This number initially matches the address on

the New Configuration screen. It is a number
used to control access to locked, protected, or
restricted crosspoints. Each panel’s address
should be unique, so as not to interfere with
another’s operations.
Figure 9-27 Access Options Dialog Box

200 Chapter 9
The permissions options are outlined below:
Table 9-5 Permissions Options

Permission Effect When Selected
Copy data to/ You can copy the current configuration between the
from from NUCLEUS control panel and a USB storage device. See
panels the File Manager feature description in your NUCLEUS
Network Control Panel Installation and Operation
Manual for more information.
Enable You can lock a routing destination (allowing no one to
destination lock/ change the destination’s source) or protect a routing
protect destination (allowing only this NUCLEUS configuration to
change the destination’s source).
Overwrite/delete You can access the NUCLEUS USB File Manager to delete or
existing data overwrite configurations on the panel. For more
information about deleting configuration files from
NUCLEUS, see your NUCLEUS Network Control Panel
Installation and Operation Manual.
Defining Other Configuration Options

When you click Other Options, either on the last page of the NUCLEUS Configuration
Wizard, or on the Options dialog box, the following dialog box appears:
Figure 9-28 NUCLEUS Other Configuration Options Dialog Box

The General options are:
 Nucleus panel will automatically boot to this configuration during startup—

When checked, this this configuration will start automatically when the NUCLEUS
control panel is turned on.
When a configuration with this setting is transferred to the NUCLEUS Control Panel,
this option will override any previous Auto Boot to Configuration settings previously
applied to the control panel either from a configuration file or at the control panel.
 Number of pages to jump—Indicates the number of LCD pages to jump over when
pressing Shift Pg Up (previous pages) or Shift Pg Dn (next pages). The default is 5 pages.
The Router options only have an effect when a router configuration is in use on the
NUCLEUS Control Panel.
User Manual
 Do not reset last selected destination when switching between source and
destination selection views—When this option is selected, the NUCLEUS control
panel will store the last selected destination when it returns to a router page (rather
than resetting to destination 1).
 TAKE button not required when performing a crosspoint (Discrete Port
Selection)—When this option is selected and you make a source selection and a
destination selection, the switch happens automatically (you do not need to push the
TAKE button). This does not work for Category/Index panels.
The Router Protocol option determines the default communication protocol to use.
 If the selected router protocol fails, please try with the other protocol—The
options are XY and LRC.
Defining the LCD Auto-Assignment Order

Categories, devices, and menus are automatically positioned on the LCD buttons in a
configuration. All pages within a configuration use the same method.
Assignment options are not supported with Split Navigation configurations.
There are two ways to access the LCD Auto-Assignment dialog box:
 Click the Assignment Options button on the last page of a NUCLEUS control panel
configuration wizard.
OR
 Right click in the Panel Layout dialog box and select Options > Assignment
Options.
The Auto-assignment selection options appear on this dialog box:
This option only

appears if you access
the dialog box from
the Panel Layout
dialog box.
Figure 9-29 LCD Auto-Assignment Order Dialog Box

Menus and devices are assigned on the LCDs using the options described below:
Table 9-6 Auto-assignment Options

Option Effect
Over, then down From left to right across the entire top row, and
then the second row
Down, then over From left to right across half the top row and then
half the bottom row, then the second half of the
top row and the second half of the bottom row
202 Chapter 9
Table 9-6 Auto-assignment Options

Option Effect
Down, over, From left to right, places one item on the top row
down, then over and the next item directly beneath it, then the next
item beside the first on the top row, etc.
Custom Leaves buttons where they are; you can drag and
drop items and move them using tools such as Cut
and Paste, Page up and Page down
When items are auto-assigned, the assignment keeps its pattern while skipping over
positions where items have already been assigned. If there are more items for a device
menu than will fit on a single page, then a new page is created and items are automatically
assigned in the same pattern as the first page.
Editing a Panel Configuration

You can update your configuration either manually on the Control Panel tab, or by using a
wizard.
 If the configuration is stored in Magellan CCS Navigator, reopen it using one of the
following methods:
 In the NUCLEUS Configuration dialog box’s Control Panel tab, select the
configuration you want to modify from the Configuration menu.
OR
 In the Navigation pane, navigate to the Configuration folder, select the
NUCLEUS the configuration is saved under, open the Configurations folder, and
double-click on the configuration you want to modify.
The Configuration dialog box opens with the configuration you have selected.
 If the configuration is on your NUCLEUS control panel, you can retrieve it for
modification. See Getting a Configuration File From a NUCLEUS on page 208.
 If the configuration is archived as an XML file, you can reopen it in Magellan CCS
Navigator. See Importing a NUCLEUS Configuration file from XML on page 208.
Once you have opened your configuration, you can modify it using the wizard, if you
created it using the wizard. Click the Wizard button to open the wizard, and then make
the alterations on the pages as you desire. When you are finished modifying the
configuration, click Finish on any page. Your changes are saved.
You can also modify it directly on the NUCLEUS Configuration dialog box’s Control
Panel tab. See Creating a Configuration Without Using a Wizard on page 193 for a
description of the tools you will use.
Configuring Router TRAX for NUCLEUS

NUCLEUS-TRAX, sometimes referred to as Router Follow, is an add-on option for your
NUCLEUS control panel. To use NUCLEUS-TRAX, you must also have both Router
(NUCLEUS-RTR) and Processing (NUCLEUS-PROC) or SNMP (NUCLEUS-SNMP) options. For
more information about purchasing TRAX features, contact your Imagine Communications
sales representative. See Activating NUCLEUS License Keys on page 162 for information
on activating license keys.
User Manual
When TRAX is enabled on a NUCLEUS panel, and you connect a source to a destination, if
devices have been assigned, controls for those devices appear on your NUCLEUS control
panel. TRAX settings are assigned for an entire configuration.
TRAX works in two different modes:
 Single Destination mode is designed to have the selected destination as a QC station.

Devices connected to the sources are displayed in NUCLEUS.
 Multiple Destination mode shows the input (upstream) and output (downstream)
devices in a ‘vertical split mode’ scenario. This allows easier adjustment of parameters
on either side of the router which will allow operators to quickly adjust video without
having to specifically key in a given device.
See the manual accompanying your control panel for information about enabling and
turning on NUCLEUS-TRAX.
Only an Administrator user of a Magellan CCS Navigator Server can create configurations
for NUCLEUS.
To configure NUCLEUS-TRAX, follow these steps:
1 In the NUCLEUS Configuration dialog box’s Control Panel tab, under Panel
Configuration, select a configuration from the list.
2 click the Trax button.
The Trax Configuration dialog box opens.
Displays the routing view the configuration is based on.
Figure 9-30 Contents of the Trax Tab of the NUCLEUS Configuration

3 Select a Destination Follow mode.
204 Chapter 9
Table 9-7 Destination Follow Mode Options

Option Function
Single Destination The Logical to Device Mapping table contains one tab: Sources.
mode  Click Select to choose the destination.
 Click Options to determine how crosspoint following on that
destination will be managed. See Setting Destination Mode
Options on page 205 for more information.
Multiple Destination The Logical to Device Mapping table contains two tabs: Sources
mode and Destinations.
4 Select a row in the Map Logical Source to Device table.
To remove a link to a device, click a row in the Logical Source to Device table on the
TRAX tab, and then click Clear. This deletes the link from the Menu Entry column of the
selected row. You can make multiple selections to remove several assignments at one time.
5 Click Modify…
The Device Selection dialog box opens. The contents of this box are the same as the Panel
Configuration pane, and show the menu structure of the current NUCLEUS configuration.
Figure 9-31 Device Selection Dialog

6 Select the device that you would like to open when the source is connected to the
destination, and then click OK.
You can only select a non-routing device or virtual device.
The menu’s name appears in the Menu Entry field of the Map Logical Source to Device
table.
7 Repeat steps 2 - 4 for each row in the configuration.

In Multiple Destination mode, complete both the Source and Destination tabs.
When you load this configuration file to your NUCLEUS control panel and switch an input
to a destination, the control panel will load the assigned menu or menus.
User Manual
Setting Destination Mode Options

Destination Mode options allow you to set the conditions that determine whether or not a
TRAX jump occurs based on the available levels. These settings apply to both single and
multiple destination modes.
To open the NUCLEUS TRAX Options dialog box, from the Trax Configuration dialog
box, click Trax Options....
Figure 9-32 TRAX Options Dialog Box for NUCLEUS

The selection you make on this screen determines which level or levels must be switched to
the target destination in order to trigger TRAX to update the menu that appears on your
Table 9-8 TRAX Options

Option Result
Source Change must match TRAX is triggered when all of a router
all Destination levels destination's levels are included in a crosspoint
configured take. If any destination level is in a breakaway
state, the TRAX jump does not execute.
Source Change must match TRAX is triggered only when the specified level(s)
on the levels specified (e.g., is included in the crosspoint take. When you enter
0,1,2) a level in the Level box, the TRAX jump executes
on this level.
Source Change must match TRAX is triggered only when the lowest level is
on the lowest Destination included in the crosspoint take.
level configured
Source Change must match TRAX is triggered only when the highest level is
on the highest Destination included in the crosspoint take.
level configured
Transferring NUCLEUS Configuration files

Only an Administrator user on a Magellan CCS Navigator Server can transfer configurations
to and from a NUCLEUS control panel. Before you can use a NUCLEUS configuration, you
must transfer it to the control panel. You can transfer a total of 16 configurations to the
NUCLEUS control panel (depending on their size).
206 Chapter 9
Depending on the size of the flash memory in your NUCLEUS control panel, it may not be
able to hold 16 configurations. If the flash memory holds too many configurations, then
firmware upgrades to the NUCLEUS control panel may fail.
You can store un-needed configurations for later transfer on your Magellan CCS Navigator
system, or archive them as XML files (see Exporting a NUCLEUS Configuration file to
XML on page 208).
If a panel configuration file contains presets, those presets will be written to all control
panels during the transfer process. If a panel already has a preset with the same name as
the added preset, that preset will be overwritten.
To transfer a configuration to the NUCLEUS control panel, follow these steps:
1 In the Control Panel tab of the NUCLEUS Configuration dialog box, click Perform
Transfer.
The Perform Transfer dialog box opens.
All the available All the configurations

configurations stored in currently stored on the
Magellan CCS Navigator control panel
Transfers configurations to
multiple panels (see page 207)
Figure 9-33 Perform Transfer Dialog Box

 From the Local Configurations list, select the configuration(s) you would like to
transfer, and then click Send to Panel to send the currently selected configuration
to the Panel, or Send All to Panel to send all configurations in the Local
Configurations list.
Hold down the shift key to select a range of configurations, or the control key to
select multiple individual configurations.
User Manual
 Drag a configuration from the Local Configuration list and drop it onto the
Control Panel Configurations list.
3 Click OK to send the file to NUCLEUS.
4 Reboot the NUCLEUS panel.
If you are transferring a configuration that contains a Routing panel, the Gateway Settings
file is transferred with the NUCLEUS configuration.
If your configuration contains the setting NUCLEUS panel will auto-boot into this
configuration during startup, the newly transferred configuration will load.
If your configuration file includes devices intended to be controlled using SNMP, you also
need to transfer MIBs for those devices. See Transferring MIBs to NUCLEUS on page 209.
Magellan CCS Navigator’s List Configurations option does not show system-generated
configurations, such as those for Multiviewers (QVM6800+ and PredatorII) and IconLogo
devices.
Transferring Configurations to Multiple Control Panels

You can transfer the same configuration file to multiple NUCLEUS control panels. Follow
these steps:
Transfer.
2 From the Local Configurations list, select the configuration(s) you would like to transfer.
Hold down the shift key to select a range of configurations, or the control key to select
multiple individual configurations.
3 Click Send to Other Panels.
Figure 9-34 Transferring Configuration to Multiple Panels

4 For each panel you want to send the configuration to, click New and then enter the IP
address of the panel.
The Multiple Transfer utility does not check that the control panels have less than 16
configurations already installed. When preparing to transfer a configuration to multiple
panels, ensure that each panel has adequate storage space for the additional configuration.
208 Chapter 9
The Send to Other Panels list cannot include the local panel IP (the panel for which the
configuration window is open). Use Send to Panel to transfer a configuration to the local
5 Click Start Transfer.

If a selected panel is unavailable or offline, a message will appear indicating that Magellan
CCS Navigator failed to ping the specified device. When you click OK, Magellan CCS
Navigator attempts to transfer the configuration to the next device on the list.
If a panel configuration file contains presets, those presets will be written to all control
panels during the transfer process. If a panel already has a preset with the same name as
the added preset, that preset will be overwritten.
Exporting a NUCLEUS Configuration file to XML

You may want to save a NUCLEUS configuration in order to modify it or for archival
purposes. To store a configuration file, follow these steps:
Transfer.
2 Select the configuration you want to export from the Local Configuration list, and click
Export To.
3 Browse to the designated local or network drive and click Save.
You can use Export To to export configurations to a USB key for transfer to a NUCLEUS
control panel. See your NUCLEUS Network Control Panel Installation and Operation Manual
for information on formatting a USB key.
Importing a NUCLEUS Configuration file from XML

To retrieve a NUCLEUS configuration from an XML archive, follow these steps:
1 In the Control Panel tab of the NUCLEUS Configuration dialog box, click Import from....
The Load From dialog box opens.
2 Use the standard Windows browsing tools to find and select the configuration you want to
import, and then click Open.
Getting a Configuration File From a NUCLEUS

To get a configuration from a NUCLEUS control panel in order to modify it or for archival
purposes, follow these steps:
Transfer.

User Manual
 Select the configuration you want to export from the Control Panel
Configurations list, and click Get from Panel to get the currently selected
configuration, of Get all from Panel to get all the configurations that are on the
panel.
 Drag a configuration from the Control Panel Configuration list and drop it onto
the Local Configuration list.
3 Browse to the designated local or network drive and click Save.
When you get a configuration file from a NUCLEUS control panel, if that configuration
contains presets, those presets will be copied to the Magellan CCS Navigator PC. If you then
transfer that configuration file to another NUCLEUS control panel, those presets will be sent
to the control panel. If a panel already has a preset with the same name as the added
preset, that preset will be overwritten.
Transferring MIBs to NUCLEUS

The NUCLEUS control panel must have all the MIBs for all the devices it is being used to
control. See the documentation for individual devices to find out the MIBs required for each
device. MIBs are normally provided by a device’s manufacturer.
Transfer MIBs to the NUCLEUS control panel using the File Transfer tab of the NUCLEUS
\
Figure 9-35 File Transfer Tab of NUCLEUS Configuration Dialog Box
To transfer MIBs to NUCLEUS, follow these steps:
1 In the File Transfer tab of the NUCLEUS Configuration dialog box, under Select the
device directory to tranfer to, choose snmp/mibs.
2 Remove pre-existing files that are in the Add upgrade files to transfer to device list, if
there are any, by selecting each file and then clicking Remove.
3 Click Add.
A Browse dialog box opens, automatically with the CCS/files/MIBs folder selected.
4 Choose the MIBs you need to transfer.

210 Chapter 9
Hold down the SHIFT key to select a range of files, or the CTRL key to select multiple
individual files.
5 Click OK.
The files appear in the Add upgrade files to transfer to device list.
6 Click Perform Transfer.
Deleting a Configuration File from a NUCLEUS

To delete a configuration from a NUCLEUS control panel, follow these steps:
Transfer.
2 Select the configuration you want to delete from the Control Panel Configurations list,
and click Delete.
Listing the Configuration Files on a NUCLEUS

To list the configuration on a NUCLEUS control panel, follow these steps:
Transfer.
2 Click List.
The configurations currently stored on the NUCLEUS control panel appear in the Control
Panel Configurations list.
Configurations that are generated on the NUCLEUS control panel itself do not appear in the
Control Panel Configurations list. See Devices Configured Using the Control Panel
Interface on page 162 for a list of panel-generated configurations.
211
10 EDGE-DPS575 Gateway
Configuration and Control
EDGE-DPS575 Overview
The EDGE-DPS575 acts as a protocol translator between CCS and up to 20 DPS-475/575
digital processing synchronizers on the gateway’s subnet. The EDGE-DPS575 gateway has no
parameters of its own, but provides access to DPS-475/575 synchronizers for CCS software
and control panels. This provides operational safeguards over local control, including locking
out inappropriate combinations of control settings.
Before you can control DPS-475/575 synchronizers via the EDGE-DPS575, you must discover
the EDGE-DPS575 and create a configuration file, which defines the synchronizers the
gateway controls. Once you transfer the configuration to the gateway and rediscover the
gateway, you are ready to control and monitor the DPS-475/575 synchronizers. See
Creating an EDGE-DPS575 Configuration File on page 211.
You can use the DPS HTML Interface dialog box to access DPS-575 control parameters that
the CCS control interface does not directly support. See Configuring a DPS-575 for HTTP
Control and Monitoring on page 216.
See your DPS-575 Digital Processing Synchronizer Installation and Operation Manual for a
complete list of parameters. (The DPS-575 manual can also be used with DPS-475
synchronizers.)
Creating an EDGE-DPS575 Configuration File

An EDGE-DPS575 configuration file contains the IP addresses of up to 20 DPS-475/575 units
that the gateway will control and monitor.
Using the DPS-575 control dialog box’s HTML Interface, you can access and change control
parameters that the CCS software itself does not support. The link to the synchronizer’s Web
controls is discovered separately. See Configuring a DPS-575 for HTTP Control and
Monitoring on page 216.
Only an Administrator on a Magellan CCS Navigator Server can configure an EDGE-DPS575

gateway. To create an EDGE-DPS575 configuration file, complete these steps:
1 In Build mode, discover your EDGE-DPS575 gateway, and then save the results of the
discovery. See Running a Discovery on page 85 for more information.
212 Chapter 10
EDGE-DPS575 Gateway Configuration and Control
A virtual Gateway server icon appears in the Discovery folder as a placeholder

for the EDGE-DPS575’s IP address. An EDGE-DPS575 icon appears as the child of this virtual
Gateway server icon. Icons of any DPS-575 synchronizers on the gateway’s subnet appear
as the gateway’s children. If the EDGE-DPS575 gateway has no configuration file, it will find
every DPS-475/575 synchronizer on the network, up to 255 synchronizers.
Whether the synchronizer is a DPS-475 or a DPS-575, it will appear as a DPS-575 in the

Navigation pane.
2 Drag-and-drop the EDGE-DPS575 Gateway icon from the Discovery folder

into the Configuration folder.
Drag this item to the

Configuration folder.
A New Configuration
folder
Figure 10-1 EDGE-DPS575 Gateway in Configuration Folder

A New Configuration icon appears in the Configuration folder as the child of the
EDGE-DPS575 icon. DPS-575 icons appear as children of the New Configuration icon.
To change the name of the New Configuration icon (which will change how the
configuration is named in subsequent steps), see Resource Icons on page 95.
3 This folder can contain a maximum of 20 synchronizers. Customize which DPS-475/575

synchronizer you want to control through the EDGE-DPS575 gateway. This can be done by
deleting unwanted DPS-575 synchronizer icons from the New Configuration folder. To
delete a synchronizer icon, right click on it and select Delete from the shortcut menu.
Each DPS-475/575 synchronizer can only be controlled by one EDGE-DPS575 gateway.
4 Double-click the resource icon for the EDGE-DPS575 from the Discovery folder of the
Navigation pane.
This opens the EDGE-DPS575 Configuration dialog box.
5 Select the Gateway tab.

All the available configurations for this EDGE-DPS575, including the one you have just
created, appear in the Choose the device configuration to transfer box of the
Gateway tab.
User Manual
When selected, after transferring An EDGE-DPS575 can contain one

a configuration, the gateway will configuration at a time. The
automatically read the configuration stored on the
configuration information. If this gateway is always called
is not selected, you will have to dpsconfig.xml.
restart or refresh the gateway
Click to abort a Click to list the

transfer in configurations on the
progress. selected EDGE-DPS575.
Figure 10-2 Gateway Tab of EDGE-DPS575 Configuration Dialog Box

6 Click Perform Transfer on the Gateway tab, and then click Yes to confirm the transfer.
7 If you did not select Refresh device after transferring the configuration, click Refresh
Device, and then click Yes to confirm.
The gateway configuration has the name dpsconfig.xml and appears in the List of all
configurations on the device box on the Gateway tab.
The Configuration tool’s Status bar and Log provide feedback information during
configuration uploading. For more information, see Logging Configuration Activity on
page 154.
8 Rediscover the EDGE-DPS575 and save the results of the discovery. Now, in the Discovery
folder, the EDGE-DPS575 lists only the synchronizers that it controls.
The EDGE-DPS575 will read the configuration information and report the status of the
identified DPS-575 modules on its subnet. See Editing an EDGE-DPS575
Editing an EDGE-DPS575 Configuration

You may wish to edit a configuration file, for example to remove devices from one
configuration and add them to another, optimizing your system resources. To edit a
configuration file, follow these steps:
1 Open the configuration file, using one of the following methods:

214 Chapter 10
 In the EDGE-DPS575 Configuration dialog box’s Gateway tab, select

dpsconfig.xml in the List of all configurations on the device box, and then click
Get Configuration.
This copies the configuration from the EDGE-DPS575 gateway so it can be
modified. The configuration also remains on the EDGE-DPS575 gateway.
 Copy a configured EDGE-DPS575 gateway from the Network or Discovery folder
to the Configuration folder of the Navigation pane.
2 Edit the configuration file, using the following tools:
Each DPS475/575 can only be controlled by one EDGE-DPS575.
 Drag DPS-475/575 synchronizers from other configuration files, or from the

Discovery folder, and drop them onto the Configuration folder you are editing.
 Right click on any DPS-475/575 synchronizers you want to remove from the
Configuration folder, and choose Delete from the menu that appears.
3 Transfer it to the EDGE-DPS575 gateway, following steps 4 - 8 in Creating an
EDGE-DPS575 Configuration File on page 211, or reserve it for future use. Your
configuration file is automatically when you close Magellan CCS Navigator or switch
between modes, if you click Yes on the System view was modified. Save Changes?
dialog box.
Deleting a Configuration from an EDGE-DPS575

When an EDGE-DPS575 has no configurations on it, you can discover it to find all DPS-475/
575 synchronizers (up to 255 in total) on your network. To delete configuration information
on an EDGE-DPS575, complete these steps:
1 Open the EDGE-DPS575 Configuration dialog box, and then select the Gateway tab.
2 Click List Configurations to view the configuration information stored on the
DPS-Gateway.
The EDGE-DPS575 configuration information is named dpsconfig.xml when stored on the
gateway.
3 Select the configuration in the List of all configurations on the device box, and then
click Delete Configuration.
4 When a query box asks you to confirm the deletion of the file dpsconfig.xml, click Yes.
The List of all configurations on the device box immediately shows that no
dpsconfig.xml file remains on the gateway.
5 Click Refresh Device on the Gateway tab.
Adding DPS-575 Parameters to NUCLEUS Configurations

Only an Administrator user of a Magellan CCS Navigator Server can create and edit
NUCLEUS configurations.
When creating a NUCLEUS configuration, you can add a DPS-475/575 or an EDGE-DPS575.

If you add the EDGE-DPS575 device, you will be able to add any parameter for all devices
that the gateway controls.
Any parameter that can be accessed on the DPS-475/575 via CCS Pilot or Magellan CCS
Navigator can also be added to a NUCLEUS configuration file.
User Manual
Any NUCLEUS configurations that include DPS-475/575 synchronizers must be updated

every time you re-configure their associated EDGE-DPS575.
See Adding Processing or SNMP Devices to a NUCLEUS Configuration on page 165

Controlling an EDGE-DPS575 Gateway

The EDGE-DPS575 has no controllable parameters.
It has one alarm, Gateway not configured properly. This alarm triggers to indicate that
the EDGE-DPS575 is not configured, or is configured with more than 20 DPS/475/575
synchronizers.
SeeNetwork Event Diagnostics on page 237 for information on retrieving and

diagnosing alarms.
Using the DPS-575 Control Interface

information.
You can open a Control dialog box for each DPS-575 that is part of a configuration file on
an EDGE-DPS575.
Each DPS-575 Control dialog box shows a condensed version of more than 200 local
controls organized by function.
To open a Control dialog box for a DPS-475 or DPS-575, with Magellan CCS Navigator in
Control mode, double click on the synchronizer in a Network or Discovery folder in the
Navigation pane.
The Control dialog box has a Parameters tab and an Alarms tab.
216 Chapter 10
Figure 10-3 DPS-575 Control Dialog Box

For information on parameters that can be adjusted in the Control dialog box, see your
DPS-475 or DPS-575 Installation and Operation Manual.
Three DPS-575 alarms are supported:
Table 10-1 DPS-575 Alarms That Appear in Magellan CCS Navigator

Fully Supported by
DPS-575 Parameter or Supported in Magellan
Magellan CCS
LED Name CCS Navigator via HTTP
Navigator
Loss of Video Yes No (LED)
(Alarm Critical)
Loss of Genlock Yes No (LED)
(Alarm Critical)
Video Freeze Yes No (LED)
(Alarm Warning)
Configuring a DPS-575 for HTTP Control and Monitoring

Using the DPS-575 control dialog box’s HTML Interface, you can access and change control
parameters that the CCS software itself does not support. The link to the synchronizer’s
Web controls is discovered separately.
Only an Administrator user on a Magellan CCS Navigator Server can complete this
procedure.
Some DPS-575 controls cannot be accessed through the CCS interface. To access those
controls remotely, you must use the HTML interface. The HTML interface can be accessed
through CCS software in Control mode.
To create an Index item for accessing these controls, follow these steps:
1 With Magellan CCS Navigator in Build mode, click Options in the Discovery pane.
User Manual
The Discovery Options dialog box opens.
2 Click Add.
The Add Host dialog box opens.
3 Under Add a Host IP, enter the IP address of the DPS-575 device you want to control.
4 Under Select Products for Discovery, place a check beside HTTP, and then click Apply.
5 Click OK to close the Add Host dialog box.
6 Under Start Options, ensure that Enable Scanning of IP addresses is selected, and then
click OK to close the Discovery Options dialog box.
7 In the Discovery pane, click Start to commence a discovery.
8 When the discovery has run successfully and has found your HTTP host, click Save.
In your Navigation pane, an Index is added to the Discovery folder.
Double click this item

to open the DPS-575
Welcome page
Figure 10-4 HTML Web Server in the Navigation Pane

9 Switch Magellan CCS Navigator to Control mode.
If the DPS HTML Interface dialog box shows an error message when you switch screens,
the network has lost its connection to the synchronizer.
10 Double click the new Index item in the Discovery folder to open the HTML web server
controls for the DPS-575.
Figure 10-5 Welcome Page to the DPS-575 Over HTTP

See your DPS-475 or DPS-575 manual for information on using this interface.
218 Chapter 10
Using the DPS-575 Updater

The EDGE-DPS575 cannot send software updates or images to DPS-575 digital processing
synchronizers. To do these tasks, you must use the DPS Uploader Utility.
If you have installed the DPS-575 Uploader Utility on the same PC as your CCS software,
you can start it from within Magellan CCS Navigator. Magellan CCS Navigator must be in
Build mode to open the Uploader utility.
Only an Administrator user of a Magellan CCS Navigator Server can start the Uploader
Utility from inside Magellan CCS Navigator.
To open the DPS-575 Uploader Utility program, follow these steps:
1 Right click a DPS-575 resource icon and select Configuration.

2 Click on the File Transfer tab.
Figure 10-6 File Transfer Tab for DPS-575

3 Click Launch “Uploader.exe” to configure DPS.
If the DPS-575 Uploader Utility has been run on this PC before, it will start.
If the DPS-575 Uploader Utility has not been run on this PC before, or if it has been moved
since the last time it was started, a Browse dialog box will open.
Browse to the location of the DPS-575 Uploader Utility, select it and click OK, and a dialog
box similar to this will appear:
User Manual
Figure 10-7 DPS-575 Uploader Utility Application

You are now ready to upload files to the selected DPS-575 device.
Connecting the DPS Uploader Utility to a Specific DPS-575

When the DPS-575 Uploader Utility opens, it is configured to upload files to the DPS-575
unit that you clicked on. You do not need to restart it to connect to a different DPS-575
device.
To connect the DPS-575 Uploader Utility to a specific DPS-575 synchronizer, complete the
following steps:
1 Select Ethernet in the Connection Type section of the Upload File tab.
2 Type the synchronizer’s IP address in the field to the right of the Ethernet button.
3 Type in the Web Password for the DPS-575 synchronizer.
4 Click Save Settings.
220 Chapter 10
221
11 NEO Frame Configuration
Frame Configuration Overview

See your NEO FR-3901, FR-3903 and FR-3923 Mounting Frames Installation and Operation
Manual for specific information relating to NEO devices, including NEO 3901RES-E resource
modules.
Only an Administrator user of a Magellan CCS Navigator Server can create a NEO Frame
configuration.
A NEO frame configuration describes which type of module, if any, should appear in each
frame slot. NEO frames can report alarms for the following events:
 When someone removes a module from a slot that is configured to contain a certain
module
 When someone inserts a module in a slot that formerly contained a module of a
different type
If you insert a module into a NEO frame slot that a frame configuration describes as
“empty,” the frame will not generate any alarms if the module is removed or a module of
another type replaces it. However, if someone inserts a different type of module in a slot
than the type that a frame configuration describes, Navigator will issue an “invalid”
message for the slot. And if a module is removed from a slot for which a frame
configuration describes a module’s presence, Navigator will issue a “missing” message for
the slot. These statuses will not appear in Navigator device tree, only in the Frame Specific
Control dialog box. To see the current status, open the NEO Frame’s Specific Control dialog
box. See Using Generic and Specific Control Dialog Boxes on page 257 for more
information.
By default, Navigator does not report these types of module changes for frames, and if
monitoring these events is not important for your installation, then you do not need
to configure your NEO frames. However, if you would like Navigator to notify you of these
types of module changes, then you must use Navigator to configure the frame.
The steps in creating a configuration file and saving it to a NEO frame are described in the
following topics:
 Creating a Configuration File for a NEO Frame on page 222

 Transferring a Configuration File to a NEO Frame on page 223
222 Chapter 11
NEO Frame Configuration
Creating a Configuration File for a NEO Frame

While a NEO frame only stores one frame configuration at once, you can save as many
frame configurations as you want in the Configuration folder. And then you can
download alternate frame configurations to the NEO frame as needed.
In build mode, configure those devices for which the user group has configuration rights. To
configure a NEO frame or CCS control panel for remote software control, you must create a
configuration file in the Navigation pane’s Configuration folder and transfer it to the
remote device—in addition to settings values in the device configuration dialog box.
To configure a NEO frame’s module assignments, complete these steps:
1 Discover the NEO frame and save the discovery results. (For information on running a
discovery, see Running a Partial Discovery on page 86)
The saved discovery results appear in the Discovery folder. The Discovery tool creates a
virtual NEO server icon as a place holder for the frame’s IP address. This NEO server icon
does not represent any actual physical device—just the IP address information
The NEO frame appears as the child of the virtual server icon. Any modules the NEO frame
contains appear as children of the frame icon.
The NEO server icon is a place holder for the

frame’s IP address and not a physical device.
Figure 11-1 Discovered NEO Frame

2 Drag-and-drop the NEO frame icon—not the NEO server icon—from the Discovery
folder into the Configuration folder.
A New Configuration icon appears in the Configuration folder as the child of the new
NEO frame and the virtual parent of any modules found during the discovery.
3 Ensure that all the modules you want to configure in the NEO frame now appear under the
New Configuration folder.
New Configuration Icon
Figure 11-2 NEO Frame Configuration after Drag-and-Drop Operation

4 Open the Configuration dialog box for the NEO frame, and then select the Frame tab.
The default “New Configuration” appears in the Choose the device configuration to
transfer box of the Frame tab.
5 In the Configuration folder of the Navigation pane, rename the New Configuration
icon.
User Manual
This name could include the creation date and intended use of the configuration or an
abbreviated form of its IP address.
The NEO frame’s Configuration dialog box immediately shows the new name in the
Frame tab’s Choose the device configuration to transfer box.
The configuration now exists in the Navigation pane. The next step is to transfer the
configuration to the NEO frame for the frame to use in managing its modules and slots.
Transferring a Configuration File to a NEO Frame

If you select Both NEO Resource Modules from the Configuration For: box, then you
are able to transfer configurations to both master and slave resource modules, but you are
not able to list configurations for them.
If you are in a Configuration dialog box for a NEO FR-3903 3RU frame with redundant
master and slave 3901RES-E resource modules installed in it, then this box is enabled. If
your NEO FR-3903 3RU frame only contains one 3901RES-E resource module, or if you are
in a Configuration dialog box for a NEO FR-3901 1RU frame, then this box is disabled.
To transfer a frame configuration to a NEO frame, complete these steps:
1 Open the NEO frame’s Configuration dialog box and then select the Frame tab.
2 On the Frame tab, locate the Configuration For: box in the top right corner, and then
click the arrow to choose a NEO 3901RES-E redundant resource module to transfer
configurations to or list configurations for (choose between master, slave, or both).
3 On the Frame tab, select the configuration you want to transfer in the Choose the device
configuration to transfer list.
4 Click Perform Transfer on the Frame tab.
5 When a query box asks you to confirm the configuration transfer, click Yes.
6 After the transfer finishes, click Refresh Device on the Frame tab.
7 When a query box asks you to confirm the refresh, click Yes.
The configuration file has the name neo_device_policy.cfg and appears in the List of all
configurations on the device box on the Frame tab.
When the frame restarts or refreshes, the frame software reads the new configuration file
and, based on its content, reports the status of the frame and its modules to Navigator.
 Cancelling the Transfer of a NEO Frame Configuration File on page 223

 Using the Configuration Status Bar and Log on page 224
 Refreshing the NEO Frame Configuration on page 224
Cancelling the Transfer of a NEO Frame Configuration File

To cancel the transfer of a frame configuration file to a NEO frame, click Cancel on the
Frame tab of the NEO frame’s Configuration dialog box.
224 Chapter 11
If the file has already finished transferring to the frame, the Cancel option will no longer be
available. However, you can use commands in the NEO frame’s Configuration dialog box
to delete the configuration file from the NEO frame.
Using the Configuration Status Bar and Log

The Configuration tool reports the progress of frame configuration activity to the status
bar and logs the activity to the Log tab of the NEO frame’s Configuration dialog box.
To view the configuration log, select the Log tab.
To save or clear the configuration log, right-click inside the Log tab and use the resulting
shortcut menu.
Refreshing the NEO Frame Configuration

To instruct the NEO frame to load a newly transferred frame configuration file, complete
these steps:
1 Open the NEO frame’s Configuration dialog box, and then select the Frame tab.
2 Click Refresh Device.
The configuration file has the name neo_device_policy.cfg and appears in the List of all
configurations on the device box on the Frame tab.
Working With Configurations on a NEO Frame

Once you have transferred a configuration file to a NEO frame, you can perform the
following actions on it:
 Listing the Configuration File Stored on a NEO Frame on page 224

 Getting a Configuration File from a NEO Frame on page 225
 Deleting a Configuration File from a NEO Frame on page 225
Listing the Configuration File Stored on a NEO Frame

The configuration file stored on a NEO frame has the name neo_device_policy.cfg.
The Configuration tool can retrieve and show the file name in the List of all
configurations on the device box of the Frame tab of the NEO frame’s Configuration
dialog box.
To list the configuration file stored on a NEO frame in the NEO frame’s Configuration
dialog box, complete these steps:
2 Click List Configurations to list the one configuration file stored on the frame.
User Manual
The NEO frame stores only one configuration at once, but you can store multiple NEO
configurations in the Configuration folder and then download them to the frame as
needed.
If no file lists, then the frame has no stored configuration information.
Getting a Configuration File from a NEO Frame

To get a configuration file from a NEO frame for use in the Navigation pane, complete
these steps:
2 Click List Configurations to view the list of configurations stored on the frame.
3 Select the configuration file, neo_device_policy.cfg, and then click Get Configuration.
A Save As box appears with the list of any NEO frame configurations in the List of
configurations box.
4 Select an existing configuration in the Save As box’s List of Configurations box; or type a
new name in the Name box, and then click OK.
The retrieved file will now list both in the Choose the device configuration to transfer
box of the Frame tab and in the Configuration folder.
Deleting a Configuration File from a NEO Frame

To use the Configuration tool to delete a configuration file stored on a NEO frame,
complete these steps:
2 Click List Configurations to view the configuration file stored on the frame.
NEO frame configurations are named neo_device_policy.cfg when stored on the frame.
3 Select the configuration file in the List of all configurations on the device box, and then
click Delete Configuration.
4 When a query box asks you to confirm the deletion of the file neo_device_policy.cfg, click
Yes.
The List of all configurations on the device box immediately shows that no files remain
on the frame.
5 Click Refresh Device on the Frame tab.

Once refreshed, the frame will now behave as an unconfigured frame. That is, it will not
report alarms if a module is removed or a replaced with a module of a different type.
Clearing the Configurations List from the Frame Tab

To clear the frame configuration list on the Frame tab of a NEO frame’s Configuration
dialog box, click Clear. This deletes the text in the tab’s List of all configurations on the
device list.
226 Chapter 11
227
12 LCP and RCP Configuration
LCP and RCP Configuration Overview

Only an Administrator user of a Magellan CCS Navigator Server can create an LCP or RCP
Control Panel configuration.
The Imagine Communications RCP-CCS-1U remote control panel and the LCP-3901-1U local
control panel provide control, monitoring, and secure access to a number of CCS devices on
a network.
A configuration defines the devices a control panel can control, and the menus on that
control panel when it is controlling those devices. You can create multiple control panel
configurations. As the needs of the network change, you can transfer a new configuration
to the panel, restart or refresh it, and view the status of its assigned devices based on the
content of the configuration.
An LCP or RCP configuration can contain two additional features: Favorites and CCS Trax.
When you configure Favorites for a device, you create a limited selection of parameters to
display on the control panel. When you configure CCS Trax, you set the panel to display a
specific device when a router switches to a specific destination.
 Creating a Configuration file for a CCS LCP or RCP on page 227

 Transferring a Configuration File to a CCS LCP or RCP on page 231
 Filtering Alarms for a CCS LCP or RCP on page 235
 Removing Forgotten Passwords from LCPs and RCPs on page 236
Creating a Configuration file for a CCS LCP or RCP

Only an Administrator user of a Magellan CCS Navigator Server can create an LCP or RCP
Control Panel configuration.
ou can configure those devices for which your user group has configuration rights. For
NEO frames and CCS control panels, you must create configurations in the Navigation
pane’s Configuration folder, in addition to settings values in the device’s Configuration
dialog box.
228 Chapter 12
LCP and RCP Configuration
Configuration for a NUCLEUS control panel is described in NUCLEUS Configuration on

page 161.
To configure a CCS LCP or RCP control panel, complete these steps:
1 Discover the CCS LCP or RCP control panel and save the discovery results. For information
on running a discovery, see Running a Discovery on page 85.
The saved discovery results appear in the Discovery folder. The Discovery tool creates a
virtual NEO server icon as a placeholder for the control panel’s IP address. The CCS control
panel appears as the child of this virtual server icon.
Figure 12-1 Discovery Result For CCS Remote Control Panel

2 Drag-and-drop the CCS control panel icon—not the NEO server icon—from the
Discovery folder into the Configuration folder.
A New Configuration icon appears in the Configuration folder as the child of the
new CCS control panel icon.
New Configuration icon
Figure 12-2 New CCS Control Panel Configuration

3 Open the Configuration dialog box for the CCS control panel, and then select the
Control Panel tab.
The default “New Configuration” appears in the Choose the device configuration
to transfer box of the Control Panel tab.
Figure 12-3 Unnamed New Configuration

4 In the Configuration folder of the Navigation pane, rename the New
Configuration icon.
Figure 12-4 Configuration Renamed “Studio A June 22”

The CCS control panel’s Configuration dialog box immediately shows the new name in
the Control Panel tab’s Choose the device configuration to transfer box.
5 Drag-and-drop the set of devices that you want the control panel to manage from the
Network folder to the control panel’s Configuration icon in the Configuration folder.
User Manual
Configuration for CCS

Remote Control Panel
Configurations for NEO

frames
Figure 12-5 CCS RCP Configuration in the Configuration Folder

display, a maximum of 20 characters per device name. If a default short name does not
adequately identify a resource, you can change it in the resource’s Navigation
Properties box—taking out spaces, abbreviating words, or including the last four digits of
an IP address.
6 Configure the alarm monitoring for CCS control panels by right-clicking a resource icon,
and then selecting Alarm Filtering or Alarm Filtering Contents from the resulting
shortcut menu.
7 If you want, you can now configure Favorites for your device.
8 The next step is to transfer the configuration to the CCS control panel for the control
panel’s use in managing its devices.
See these related topics:
 Configuring Favorites for a Device on page 229

 Transferring a Configuration File to a CCS LCP or RCP on page 231
Configuring Favorites for a Device

Your CCS software can only configure parameter information for devices that are available
in the CCS database. The devices must be on line and discovered.
Favorites are your most commonly used parameters for a device. When you configure
favorites for a device you can send the configuration to a local or remote control panel.
Then when you select that device on the control panel, you can look at just those
parameters on the control panel, rather than having to scroll through the entire operator’s
list.
Note: the Favorites feature is not supported by older LCP and RCP panels. Only an
Administrator user of a Magellan CCS Navigator Server can configure favorites.
Configuring Favorites for a NUCLEUS control panel is described in NUCLEUS

230 Chapter 12
Setting Parameter Favorites

The Favorites menu option is disabled if the selected item is not a CCS device, for example
a folder.
Only an Administrator user of a Magellan CCS Navigator Server can set Parameter Favorites.
To set parameter favorites for a device, follow these steps:
1 While in Build mode, right-click the device in the Configuration folder in the
Navigation pane.
The shortcut menu appears, with Favorites as one of its menu options.
2 Click on Favorites to open the Favorites dialog box, which displays the parameters of
the selected device in the form of a table.
Figure 12-6 Favorites Dialog Box

3 Place a check mark beside each parameter you would like to appear in the device’s favorite
parameters list. You can also select multiple rows simultaneously in order to toggle the
Favorite checkbox on or off. Toggle the checkbox on or off using the spacebar.
If you check the Use Default Favorites checkbox, the device will use the entire operator
parameter list. Checking Use Default Favorites overrides any selections you may make
in the parameter list.
Click in the Alias column of a selected Favorite to change the name by which that
parameter appears on the control panel.
Before you see the change on the control panel device, you must transfer the configuration
to that control panel.
User Manual
For more information, see Transferring a Configuration File to a CCS LCP or RCP on
page 231.
Copying Parameter Favorites

The device you copy favorites to must be an identical device to the one you copied favorites
from.
Only an Administrator user of a Magellan CCS Navigator Server can copy Parameter
Favorites.
You can also copy parameter favorites from one device to another. There are three methods
of copying and pasting control panel display favorites for a device:
 In Build mode, right click a source device in the control panel configuration to access
the shortcut menu. Select the Copy Favorites menu item to copy the favorites of
the selected device. Then select a target device in a control panel configuration that you
want to copy the favorites to. Right-click to access the shortcut menu again and then
select the Paste Favorites menu item in order to paste favorites from the source
device to the target device.
 In Build mode, use the Copy/Paste functionality of the Navigation pane to copy and
paste device icons within the Configuration folder. The favorites of a selected device
are included as part of the Copy/Paste operation.
 Drag-and-drop a device icon. The favorites of a selected device are included as part of
the drag-and-drop operation.
When copying parameter favorites to a device, they must still be loaded to a control panel
before the change can take effect.
Transferring a Configuration File to a CCS LCP or RCP

The procedure for transferring a configuration file to a NUCLEUS control panel is described
in NUCLEUS Configuration on page 161.
To transfer a control panel configuration to a CCS LCP or RCP control panel, complete these
steps:
1 Open the CCS control panel’s Configuration dialog box and select the Control Panel
tab.
2 On the Control Panel tab, select the configuration you want to transfer in the Choose
the device configuration to transfer list.
232 Chapter 12
Figure 12-7 Left Half of the Control Panel Tab
If you do not click Refresh device after transferring the configuration, you will need to
manually refresh the control panel by clicking Refresh Device after the transfer, or the
new settings will not take effect.
3 (Optional) Click Refresh device after transferring the configuration. This will
cause the panel to automatically refresh after the transfer.
4 Click Perform Transfer on the Control Panel tab.
5 When a query box asks you to confirm the configuration transfer, click Yes.
6 After the transfer finishes, if you did not select the Refresh device after transferring
the configuration check box, you must refresh the control panel, so that the control
panel loads the new configuration.
Click Refresh Device on the Control Panel tab.
The configuration file has the name control_panel.xml and appears in the List of all
configurations on the device box on the Control Panel tab.
Figure 12-8 Upper Right Portion of Control Panel Tab
Canceling the Transfer of an LCP or RCP Control Panel

Configuration File
To cancel the transfer of a control panel configuration to a CCS control panel, click Cancel
on the Control Panel tab of the CCS control panel’s Configuration dialog box.
If the file has already finished transferring to the control panel, the Cancel option will no
longer be available. However, you can use commands in the CCS control panel’s
Configuration dialog box to delete the configuration file from the CCS control panel.
User Manual
Using the Configuration Status Bar and Log

The Configuration tool reports the progress of LCP or RCP control panel configuration
activity to the status bar and logs the activity to the Log tab of the CCS control panel’s
Status bar
Figure 12-9 Log Tab of Configuration Dialog Box
To view the control panel configuration log, select the Log tab of the control panel’s
To save the control panel configuration log, right-click inside the text box, and then select
Save Log As... on the resulting shortcut menu.
To clear the control panel configuration log, right-click inside the text box, and then select
Clear Log on the resulting shortcut menu.
Refreshing a CCS Control Panel Configuration

To instruct the CCS LCP or RCP control panel to load a newly transferred control panel
configuration, complete these steps:
1 Open the CCS control panel’s Configuration dialog box, and then select the Control
Panel tab.
2 Click Refresh Device.
The configuration file has the name control_panel.xml and appears in the List of all
configurations on the device box on the Control Panel tab.
Using the Configuration List on a CCS Control Panel

The configuration list on a CCS LCP or RCP control panel can help you perform various
functions. See the following topics:
 Listing the Configurations Stored on a CCS Control Panel on page 234

234 Chapter 12
 Clearing the Configurations List from the Control Panel Tab on page 234
 Retrieving a Configuration File from a CCS Control Panel on page 234
 Deleting a Configuration File from a Control Panel on page 235
Listing the Configurations Stored on a CCS Control Panel

The configuration file stored on a CCS LCP or RCP control panel has the name
control_panel.xml. You can retrieve and list the filename in the List of all
configurations on the device box of the Control Panel tab of the CCS control
panel’s Configuration dialog box.
Figure 12-10 Right Half of Control Panel Tab

To list configuration file information stored on a CCS control panel in the CCS control
panel’s Configuration dialog box, complete these steps:
Panel tab.
2 Click List Configurations to view the list of configurations stored on the control panel.
If no file appears, then the control panel has no stored configuration information.
Clearing the Configurations List from the Control Panel Tab

To clear the list of configurations on the Control Panel tab of a CCS LCP or RCP control
panel’s Configuration dialog box, click Clear List.
This deletes the text in the List of all configurations on the device on the Control
Panel tab.
Retrieving a Configuration File from a CCS Control Panel

CCS Trax configuration data is part of a control panel configuration. When you import a
control panel configuration, Both CCS Trax and router configuration data will be
automatically imported as well, if it exists.
User Manual
To retrieve a configuration file from a CCS LCP or RCP control panel, complete these steps:
Panel tab.
2 Click List Configurations to view the list of configurations stored on the control panel.
3 Select the configuration file, control_panel.xml, and then click Get Configuration.
A Save As box appears, listing any CCS control panel configurations in the List of
configurations box.
4 Select an existing configuration in the Save As box’s List of Configurations; or type a

new name in the Name box, and then click OK.
The retrieved file will now appear in the configuration list both in the Choose the
device configuration to transfer box of the Control Panel tab and
in the Configuration folder.
Deleting a Configuration File from a Control Panel

To delete a configuration file on a CCS LCP or RCP control panel, complete these steps:
Panel tab.
2 Click List Configurations to view the configuration file stored on the control panel.
The CCS control panel configuration is named control_panel.xml.
3 Select control_panel.xml in the List of all configurations on the device box, and
then click Delete Configuration.
4 When a query box asks you to confirm the deletion of the file control_panel.xml, click Yes.
5 Click Refresh Device on the Control Panel tab.
Once refreshed, the control panel will behave as an unconfigured control panel.
Filtering Alarms for a CCS LCP or RCP

Alarm filtering enables you to turn off the listing of alarms for CCS devices. Set the filtering
of alarms for a CCS device on the Diagnostics Filter tab or through the navigation
shortcut menu. The Filter column in the Navigation pane shows a check box for each
CCS device that has filtered alarms.
You can use the alarm filtering function to configure a control panel so that it can filter
(ignore) alarms from certain devices, but still control or navigate to all devices in your
system. Normally, a control panel has a limited number of frames and associated traffic that
it can manage; if you exceed this limit, you may receive an error message when you attempt
to perform a transfer. To get around the limit, you can filter frame and device alarms to
reduce the alarm traffic to the control panel.
You can either filter alarms from a single device (Alarm Filtering option) or filter alarms
from a parent resource and all of its contents (Alarm Filtering Contents option).
See these topics:
 Using Alarm Filtering on page 236

236 Chapter 12
 Using Alarm Filtering Contents on page 236
Using Alarm To filter a resource’s alarms, right-click the resource icon, and then select Alarm Filtering
Filtering from the resulting shortcut menu—if the option is not already selected.
Figure 12-11 A ‘Selected’ Alarm Filtering Option

If a check mark appears to the left of Alarm Filtering in the context menu, then the
feature is enabled. This means that alarms from this selected device will be ignored. When
alarms are filtered, they will only appear in the alarms log database. They will not show on
any other tabs of the diagnostic database.
If no check mark appears, then Alarm Filtering is disabled. This means that alarms from
this selected device can be received.
Using Alarm Filtering Contents

To set up the alarm filtering for a resource and all of its contents, right-click a parent
resource icon, and then select Alarm Filtering Contents from the resulting shortcut
menu.
A submenu appears with these two selections: Ignore Alarms and Enable Alarms.
Figure 12-12 Alarm Filtering Contents submenu

 Choose Ignore Alarms to turn on alarm filtering for the parent device and all the
child resource icons below it.
 Choose Enable Alarms to turn off alarm filtering (receive alarm messages) for the
parent device and all the child resource icons below it.
Removing Forgotten Passwords from LCPs and RCPs

For information on using the password protection feature, see the manual that
accompanied your control panel.
If you forget your password for accessing the Setup menu on your control panel, you can
delete it using Magellan CCS Navigator. Follow these steps:
1 Using your CCS Magellan CCS Navigator software, manually delete the pw.txt file from the
Software Upgrade /f10 folder.
2 Reboot the panel.
The Setup menu can now be accessed without a password. Follow the password setup
procedure set out in your LCP or RCP Installation and Operation manual to configure a new
Setup menu password.
237
13 Network Event Diagnostics
Diagnostics Overview
The types of devices you can control depend on the Magellan CCS Navigator licenses on
information.
In Control mode, the Diagnostics tool monitors the CCS network for unusual events and
operating conditions. Alarms appear in the Diagnostics dialog box when the following
events and conditions occur:
 Input conditions, such as video status

 Frame conditions, such as power supply
 Device instance conditions, such as the insertion, removal, or failure of modules
 CCS host communications
 CCS device settings
 SNMP traps and SNMP status monitoring
By default, all alarms for devices you have monitoring access to appear in the Diagnostics
dialog box. However, you can filter or disable specific alarms. And you can configure an
e-mail service to notify you or others of alarms, if the network has an enabled e-mail service.
The Diagnostics tool supports time- and size-based alarm log management and enables the
automatic deletion of old logs. You can filter alarms by time period and configure the alarm
notifications to interrupt the PC’s screen saver. See the following topics for more
information:
 Setting the Behavior of the Diagnostics Dialog Box on page 248

 Limiting the Number of Listed SNMP Traps on page 64
Alarm queries are optimized to conserve network resources, so only outstanding alarms
report at start-up.
Showing the Diagnostics Dialog Box

To open the Diagnostics dialog box, click Diagnostics on the Tools menu.
238 Chapter 13
Network Event Diagnostics
The default location for the Diagnostics dialog box is across the bottom of the main
application dialog box. However, you can drag this dialog box to other locations and dock it
to the top or bottom border of the interface.
The Diagnostics dialog box is the interface to the Diagnostics tool. It has multiple pages
that show as tabs inside the Diagnostics dialog box. The four tabs, or pages, in the
Diagnostics dialog box are Monitor, Selected, Logged, and Offline.
As the CCS devices generate alarms, these alarms list in the appropriate place on these
pages. You receive notice of an alarm in these ways:
 In Control mode, as a color-coded icon in the Alarm column of the Navigation pane
 As a record or row in the Diagnostics dialog box’s alarm lists
The Diagnostics dialog box has four tabs. See the following sections for descriptions of
each tab:
Table 13-1 Tabs in the Diagnostic Dialog Box

Tab Function
Monitor Displays a list of all outstanding (uncleared) alarms from all
monitored CCS devices
Selected Displays a list of all outstanding alarms for a device whose resource
icon you have selected in the Navigation pane. If you change the
selection of resource icons in the Navigation pane, the content of
this tab updates to reflect the alarms for the newly selected device
Logged Displays a list of all alarms received since you started this session of
Magellan CCS Navigator on this PC
Offline After you load an alarm file, displays the contents of that file;
otherwise, empty
For more information on using the tabs in the Diagnostic dialog box, see Using Alarm
Tables on page 238.
Using Alarm Tables

Alarms in an alarm table are organized into rows and columns.
You can reorder, resize and sort columns in the alarm list. Once you are happy with your
changes, you can save them so whenever you return to the list it appears as you set it.
Selecting a Row in an Alarm Table

To select a row in an alarm table, hover the cursor over the cell containing the Alarm icon
(a bell) until the cursor turns into a right arrow. Click the mouse button to select the row.
The selected row will have white text with a black background.
Figure 13-1 Selecting a Row in a Table

User Manual
The cursor changes to a right arrow when the mouse hovers over the Alarm icon. Click the
mouse to select the row.
Figure 13-2 Selected Row
Opening a Device Control Dialog Box from an Alarm Record

To open a resource’s Control dialog box from an alarm record in the Diagnostics dialog
box, double-click a cell in the alarm record. (A record is one row in an alarm list.) This will
open the Control dialog box of the CCS device that generated the alarm.
Reordering Columns in the Alarm List

To reorder the columns in an alarm list, complete these steps:
1 Click a column header to select the column.
Figure 13-3 Column Selected for Move

2 Drag the selected column left or right to the new location and release the mouse button to
drop the column into place.
Figure 13-4 Moved Column in New Location
Saving Column Order Changes

To save the changes you make to the order of the columns in an alarm list, complete these
steps:
1 Click Diagnostics on the Options menu.

This shows the Diagnostics Options box. The General tab tops the page order by default.
2 Select the Save column ordering check box (place a check in it).
3 Click OK to close the Diagnostics Options box.
240 Chapter 13
Resizing To change the width of a column in the alarm tables in the Diagnostics dialog box,
Columns complete these steps:
1 Position the cursor over the right column divider so that the cursor turns into a bar with a
double-headed arrow bisecting it.
In the below example, to resize the ID column, the mouse hovers over the right column
divider.
Double-headed arrow
Figure 13-5 Resizing a Column
2 Click and drag the double-headed arrow to the right or left until the column is the width
you want.
If a column is too narrow, enlarge it by the same method described above or double-click
the right column divider.
Sorting By default, the alarms in the Diagnostics dialog box list by order of occurrence. However,
Columns you can sort the list by any field in the list and in either ascending or descending
alphanumeric order.
Table 13-2 Sorting Columns

Ascending Descending
To sort an alarm list by a column heading in the alarm list, complete these steps:
1 Move the cursor inside the column heading cell.

The cursor will turn into a down-pointing arrow.
2 Double-click inside the column header cell.

The list automatically regenerates, sorted by that field.
3 To reverse the order of the sort, double-click a second time inside the column header cell.
The list automatically regenerates in the reverse sort order.
User Manual
Interpreting Fields in the Alarm Lists

The Diagnostics dialog box shows alarm lists on each of its tabs. Each resource on the
network can generate one or more alarm records. Each row in an alarm list consists of a
separate alarm record. Each column in an alarm list consists of a different category or
“field” of information about the alarm.
The different alarm lists in the Diagnostics dialog box can have different fields (columns) of
information and you can configure each of them to display in different ways.
Table 13-3 Fields in the Alarm Lists

Information Meaning
ID Number that indicates the alarm’s order of occurrence
Time Issued The time the PC received the alarm
Description Details of the alarm
Error ID Number that uniquely identifies an alarm condition
when different alarm conditions can occur for the same device
parameter
Error Level Alarm level (critical, warning, information, or cleared)
Device ID Identifying code of the CCS device that generated the alarm,
including the IP address of the device reporting the error
Device Name The name of the device for which the alarm occurred
Parameter Name The parameter name that triggered the alarm
Parameter Value The parameter value that triggered the alarm
E-mail Sent “Yes” indicates that an e-mail was sent; “No” indicates that
no e-mail was sent. See Setting Diagnostics Options on
page 247
User Info Additional alarm information
Error Alias This is an alternate name for the alarm that can be searched
when you export to a database. Aliases are configured in the
Favorites dialog. See Volume 5 for more information.
Ignored “Yes” indicates that a user has signalled notice of the alarm;
“No” indicates the user has not signalled notice of the alarm.
Ignored alarms disappear from the Monitor and Selected
tabs, but remain on the Logged tab. See Ignoring Alarms on
page 244.
Comments Displays comments that were configured in the Forward
Alarms and Individual Device Alarms dialog boxes (found
through the SNMP Agent Configuration dialog’s Trap
Selection tab)
Interpreting Alarm Colors

Color codes indicate the severity of alarms that are logged while monitoring the network.
Most alarms are messages about potential problems that may require user intervention.
242 Chapter 13
The color coding occurs in three locations within the Magellan CCS Navigator interface:
 The Diagnostics dialog box lists the alarms against color-coded backgrounds.
Figure 13-6 Color-Coded Alarm List in the Diagnostics Dialog Box

 The Navigation pane shows colored boxes representing alarm levels, if you activate
this column in the Navigation Options box.
Figure 13-7 Color-Coded Alarm Column in the Navigation Pane

 The Slot Status section of frame Control dialog boxes show color-coded
representations of alarm status for each occupied slot. See Setting Navigation
Options on page 120 and Setting Diagnostics Options on page 247.
Figure 13-8 Color-Coded Slots in a Frame Control Dialog Box
Table 13-4 Color Indicators in Control Dialog Boxes

Color Means
White Cleared or resolved
Red Critical
Yellow Warning
Green Information
Orange Acknowledged
Using the Diagnostics Shortcut Menus

A shortcut menu, which shows when you right-click an object, contains commands or
options that relate specifically to the right-clicked object as well as to the active operational
mode and dialog box.
User Manual
In the table below are the shortcut menu options available on tabs in the Diagnostics
dialog box. Not all options are available for each tab.
Table 13-5 Diagnostics Shortcut Menus

Option Function Help Reference
Find Device Finds and highlights the resource icon for Finding a CCS Device
a CCS device in the Navigation pane from an Alarm
Record on page 243
Local This option is only available for SNMP Locally
Acknowledge devices and it locally acknowledges the acknowledging
selected trap, changing the color of the SNMP traps on
alarm to orange page 244
Ignore (F4) Clears selected alarms from the Monitor Ignoring Alarms on
and Selected tabs page 244
Ignore All Clears all alarms from the Monitor and Ignoring All
Selected tabs Alarms on page 244
Refresh Regenerate the lists of alarms shown on Refreshing the
each page of the Diagnostics dialog box Alarm Lists on
page 245
Clear Clears selected alarms from the Logged Clearing Alarms on
and Offline tabs page 245
Clear All Clears all alarms from the Logged and Clearing Alarms on
Offline tabs page 245
Save Alarms Saves alarms to a specific offline alarm Saving Alarms to a
to... log file File on page 245
Save Alarms Saves alarms to the default alarm log Saving Alarms to the
Default Alarm
Log on page 246
Load Alarms Loads alarms in an offline alarm file into Loading an Archived
the Offline tab Alarm Log into the
Offline Tab on
page 246
Properties... Enables the editing of properties Setting Diagnostics
associated with an alarm Properties for an
Alarm Message on
page 246
Options... Opens the Diagnostics Options box Setting Diagnostics
Options on page 247
Finding a CCS Device from an Alarm Record

To find the resource icon for a CCS device from one of its alarm records, complete these
steps:
1 In the Diagnostics dialog box, right-click a cell in the alarm record. (A record is one row
in an alarm list.)
2 Select Find Device from the resulting shortcut menu.
The Navigation tool highlights the resource icon in the Navigation pane, opening any
closed folders required to show the resource icon.
244 Chapter 13
Locally acknowledging SNMP traps

To locally acknowledge a trap for a SNMP device, complete these steps:
1 In the Diagnostics dialog box, right-click a cell in the trap record (a record is one row in an
alarm list).
2 Select 'Local Acknowledge' from the resulting shortcut menu.
In the case of acknowledgement, an email is sent to report that the alarm has been
acknowledged (if the system is configured to send emails). The Diagnostic dialog box (log
entry) and Navigator page with the device on it are highlighted in orange (this is the color
that indicates "acknowledged"). If there is another critical notification for the device, the
color remains red (highest alarm level).
Opening a Device Control Dialog Box from an Alarm Record

To open a resource’s Control dialog box from an alarm record in the Diagnostics dialog
box, double-click a cell in the alarm record. (A record is one row in an alarm list.) This will
open the Control dialog box of the CCS device that generated the alarm.
Ignoring You can ignore alarms individually, or you can ignore all alarms. See the following for more
Alarms information:
 Ignoring an Alarm on page 244

 Ignoring All Alarms on page 244
Ignoring an Alarm
All alarms are listed on the Diagnostics dialog box's Logged tab. However, when you
ignore an alarm, the alarm disappears from lists on the Monitor and Selected tabs and
from the Navigation pane’s Alarm column, if you have activated the column in the
Navigation Options box. However, the alarm still appears on the Logged tab and the
Ignored field for that alarm changes from No to Yes.
To ignore an alarm on one of the Diagnostics dialog box’s tabs, select an alarm record (a
row in the alarm list), and then either press F4 or right-click and then select Ignore from the
You could instead right-click in a cell of an alarm record, and then select Ignore
To select an alarm to be ignored, see Using Alarm Tables on page 238.
Ignoring All Alarms

To ignore all outstanding alarms, right-click anywhere in the Diagnostics dialog box, and
then click Ignore All from the resulting shortcut menu.
This clears all alarms from the Diagnostics dialog box’s Monitor or Selected tab, as well
as from the Navigation pane’s alarm column if the column has been activated in the
Navigation Options box.
User Manual
Additionally, the Ignore field for all outstanding alarms in the Logged tab changes from
“No” to “Yes.”
Refreshing the Alarm Lists

Use this procedure only if you have ignored alarms and want to review the outstanding
alarms for all devices on the CCS network. If the network has many CCS devices, the list of
all outstanding alarms may take several minutes to regenerate.
To refresh or regenerate the lists of alarms shown on each page of the Diagnostics dialog
box, right-click anywhere inside the Diagnostics dialog box, and then click Refresh
Clearing Alarms
Because SNMP traps do not generically support “alarm clearing”, you can limit the number
of traps sent. See Limiting the Number of Listed SNMP Traps on page 64 for more
information.
You can clear selected alarms on the Logged and Offline tabs and remove them from the
tabs. To clear a record, right-click inside an alarm record, and then select Clear from the
You can clear all alarms on the Logged and Offline tabs and remove them from these tabs.
To clear all records, right-click inside an alarm record, and then select Clear All from the
Saving Alarms to a File

You can save the current alarm list to either a specified offline alarm log or the default alarm
log.
Saving Alarms to a Specified Offline Alarm Log

You can save a snapshot of the current alarm lists in the Diagnostics dialog box to a
Microsoft Access database file for archival purposes.
To save an alarm list to a specific offline alarm database file, instead of the default file for
the tab, complete these steps:
1 Right-click in an alarm list in the Diagnostics dialog box.

2 Click Save Alarms to from the resulting shortcut menu.
3 When a Save As box appears, either accept the default filename or select another. Then
click Save.
If a file with that name already exists, an alert box appears, asking you to confirm that you
want to replace the contents of the database.
4 Click OK to replace the current content.

246 Chapter 13
Saving Alarms to the Default Alarm Log

To save a snapshot of the current alarm list to the default alarm log file, complete these
steps:
1 Right-click an alarm item in an alarm list in the Diagnostics dialog box.

2 Click Save Alarms from the resulting shortcut menu.
If you have not yet established the name of the default alarm log file, a Save As box
appears.
3 Either accept the default file name or select another. Then click Save.
If there is another file by that name, an alert box appears, asking you to confirm that you
want to replace the current content of the database.
4 Click OK to replace the content.
Loading an Archived Alarm Log into the Offline Tab

You can view current or previous alarm files by loading them into the Diagnostic dialog
box’s Offline tab. By default, these files reside in the subfolders at this location:
c:\Program Files\Leitch\Magellan CCS Navigator\Users
To load a previously saved alarm log file into the Offline tab, complete these steps:
1 Right-click anywhere inside the Diagnostics dialog box’s Offline tab.

This shows the shortcut menu for the Offline tab.
2 Point to Load Alarms on the shortcut menu and click Load....

This shows the Open box, showing the list of alarm logs that you have saved to files. These
files are all in Microsoft Access database (*.mdb) file format.
3 Select the file name of the alarm log you want to open and click Open.
The file shows on the Offline tab.
If you have set the Offline tab of the Diagnostics Options box to show only a partial
alarm list, you can move forward and backward in the list by using the Previous and Next
commands in the diagnostics shortcut menu.
To show the next set of alarms in the entire list on the Offline tab, right-click inside the
page to show the shortcut menu for the Offline tab. Point to Load Alarms on the shortcut
menu, and then click Next.
To show the previous set of alarms in the entire list on the Offline tab, right-click inside the
page to show the shortcut menu. Point to Load Alarms on the menu, and click Previous.
Setting Diagnostics Properties for an Alarm Message

You can view and edit the properties associated with an alarm in the Diagnostics
Properties box. For example, you can add additional user information for an alarm stored
in the alarm log.
To set or review diagnostic properties of an alarm message, complete these steps:

User Manual
1 Right-click the alarm in an alarm list in the Diagnostics dialog box.

This shows the diagnostics shortcut menu.
2 Click Properties.
This shows the Diagnostics Properties box. You can only modify the User Info and
Ignored fields.
Figure 13-9 Diagnostics Properties Box

3 To change the User Info box, select the box and then type in the new information.
4 Select the Ignored check box to ignore an alarm.
5 Click Close.
Setting Diagnostics Options

See Limiting the Number of Listed SNMP Traps on page 64 to determine how many
SNMP alarms can appear in the Diagnostics dialog box.
You can set alarm acknowledgement, logging, filtering, and reporting options in the
Diagnostics Options box.
To set diagnostics options, complete these steps:
1 Click Diagnostics on the Options menu, or right-click in the Diagnostics dialog box and
then click Options....
The Diagnostics Options box has six tabs—General, Filter, E-Mail Forwarding Service,
Log, and Offline—show at the top of the box.
See the following topics to complete these six tabs:
 Setting the Behavior of the Diagnostics Dialog Box on page 248

 Setting Alarm Filtering Options on page 249
 Setting E-Mail Notification of Alarms on page 251
 Setting Alarm Log Options on page 252
 Setting Options for Offline Viewing of Alarm Logs on page 253
2 After completing these six tabs, click OK to close the Diagnostics Options box.
248 Chapter 13
Setting the Behavior of the Diagnostics Dialog Box

To set options on the General tab of the Diagnostics Options box, complete these steps:
1 If the Diagnostics Options box is closed, then click Diagnostics on the Options menu, or
right-click in the Diagnostics dialog box and then click Options....
2 Select the General tab if other tabs are hiding the options on the General page.
Figure 13-10 Diagnostics Options General Tab

The General tab of the Diagnostics dialog box contains four options, each with a check
box. The options and their functions are as follows:
Table 13-6 General Tab Options and Their Functions

Option Function
Show Diagnostics Makes the Diagnostics dialog box visible when
dialog box on top an alarm occurs
when an alarm occurs
User Manual
Table 13-6 General Tab Options and Their Functions(Continued)

Option Function
Play sound when an Generates an audible signal when an alarm occurs.
alarm is received There are two options:
 Use Default sound—The default sound has no
loop and plays for warning, critical, and
informational alarms.
 Use Custom sound—Click Browse to choose a
WAV or MP3 audio file. You can select Loop, and
you can assign the type of alarms that trigger the
sound.
The alarm sound can be shut off by disabling,
ignoring, or filtering the alarm. It shuts off by itself if
the alarm condition is resolved.
Save column ordering Saves the changes to the order of columns in
Diagnostics dialog box beyond one software session
Turn off screen saver Enables the software to turn off a screen saver when
when an alarm is an alarm occurs, so that an alarm notification
received message shows on the screen
3 Select the check box of each option you want to enable, and clear the check box of each
option you want to disable.
4 Select another tab to continue setting Diagnostics Options, or click OK to close the
Setting Alarm Filtering Options

To set the options on the Filter tab of the Diagnostics Options box, complete these steps:
2 Select the Filter tab.
250 Chapter 13
Figure 13-11 Diagnostics Options Filter Tab

The alarm filtering capabilities enable you to turn off the listing of alarms in the
Diagnostics dialog box for less-critical devices. Filtered alarms do not show on any tabs
in the Diagnostics dialog box, but are stored in the Alarms log database. (See Setting
Options for Offline Viewing of Alarm Logs on page 253 to view the database.)
3 The Show alarms for section lists four error types—Critical, Warning, Information, and
Acknowledged—for which you can either enable or disable alarm filtering.
Select the check box of each error type for which you want to enable alarm filtering, and
clear the check box of each type of error for which you want to disable filtering.
4 In the Ignore alarms during the following time periods section, you can create ranges
of time in which alarms are ignored.
a To add a new time period for CCS Magellan CCS Navigator to ignore alarms, click Add
and then type a Filtering start time and Filtering end time into the resulting Add
Alarm Filtering Time Period box.
b To modify a time period, select the time period in the Ignore alarms during the
following time periods box and then click Modify. Then type new times into the
Alarm Filtering Time Period box.
c To delete a time period from the list, select the time period and then click Delete.
d To delete all time periods from the list, click Delete All.
5 In the Ignore Alarms from Selected Devices section, select the check box of each
network resource for which you want to enable alarm filtering, and then clear the check
box of each resource for which you want to disable filtering.
User Manual
Setting E-Mail Notification of Alarms

The network must have an enabled e-mail messaging service for the E-mail Forwarding
Service to work. If the network does not have e-mail support, then no e-mails will reach
their destinations.
To set the options on the E-mail Forwarding Service tab of the Diagnostics Options
2 Select the E-mail Forwarding Service tab.
Figure 13-12 Diagnostic Options E-mail Forwarding Service Tab

You can enable or disable the e-mail notification, add or remove e-mail recipients, and set
the severity levels for the generation of alarms on the E-mail Forwarding Service tab.
3 Select the E-mail Forwarding Service check box to enable the CCS application to send
e-mail notifications of resource errors.
4 In the Send an E-mail for section, select the check box beside each error type for which
you want to receive e-mail notification. Clear the check box beside each error type for
which you do not want e-mail notification.
The five error types are Critical, Warning, Information, Acknowledged, and Error Level
Change.
5 In the E-mail Send Options section, click the arrow and select the method in which you
want to send the e-mail.
Choose from MAPI (your Outlook mail profile settings) or SMTP (configured server).
6 Click Properties.
Depending on the e-mail sending method chosen in step 5, either the MAPI Mail
Properties or SMTP Properties dialog box opens.
7 To configure the settings in the MAPI Mail Properties dialog box, follow these steps:
a Click the arrow from the Profile Name box, and then select a profile name from the
list.
b If the required name is not in the list, click Add to add a new profile name to the list.
The Add Profile Name box opens.
c Type a sender profile name in the Add Profile Name box, and then click OK.
252 Chapter 13
8 To configure the settings in the SMTP Properties dialog box, follow these steps:
a Specify the SMTP server name, port number, and reply e-mail addresses in the
corresponding fields.
b If your SMTP server requires authentication in order to send external e-mail, complete
the Authentication section of this dialog box.
9 In the E-mail Addresses of Recipients section, click Add... to show the Add Recipient
box.
10 Type the e-mail address of a proposed error notification recipient in the box, and then click
OK.
This closes the Add Recipient box and lists the new e-mail recipient in the E-mail
Addresses of Recipients box.
11 Repeat steps 6 and 7 to enter the e-mail addresses of other proposed recipients of
notification e-mails.
Setting Alarm Log Options

Alarms log to a Microsoft Access database file, created according to setting on the Log tab
of the Diagnostic Options box.
2 Select the Log tab.
Figure 13-13 Diagnostic Options Log Tab

On the Log tab, you can set options for saving alarms to an alarm log, set limits for the
alarm log’s size and longevity, and create a policy for deleting old alarm logs.
User Manual
3 Select the Save alarms to database check box to enable the alarm log. Clear the check
box to disable the log.
4 To determine how often a new alarm database is created, complete the Create a new
alarm log when database section:
a In the Is Larger Than box, leave the default value, or select the default number and
type in another number, or click the arrows to increase or decrease the number.
The default maximum size of the alarm log file is 1 megabyte.
b In the Or Is Older Than box, leave the default value or select the number and type in a
different value.
c In the units of time box, leave the default selection or click the arrow and select from
the list: days, hours, weeks, months, or years.
Magellan CCS Navigator creates a new alarm database at the specified interval, and
renames previous copies for archival purposes.
5 If you want to delete logs that are older than a particular age, in the Log Policy section,
a Select the check box to implement a log deletion policy.
b Type an integer value into the next box.
c Click the arrow in the third box and select a unit of time: days, hours, weeks,
months, or years.
If you do not check in this section, logs will be kept indefinitely, or until they are manually
deleted.
6 In the Logged Tab Options section, complete one of these actions:

 To list all alarms on the Logged tab, select the Display all alarms on Logged tab
check box.
 To set a maximum number of alarms to list on the Logged tab, clear the Display all
alarms on Logged tab check box. Then either accept the default maximum number
of alarms to list, or select the default and then type in another maximum number. This
determines the number of alarms that will show at once on the Logged tab,
up to a maximum of 1,000 alarms. When the limit you set is reached, the content of
the Log tab clears.
Setting Options for Offline Viewing of Alarm Logs

To set the options on the Offline tab of the Diagnostics Options box, complete these
steps:
2 Select the Offline tab to determine how an alarm log loads into the Diagnostics dialog
box’s Offline tab for viewing offline.
254 Chapter 13
Figure 13-14 Diagnostics Options Offline Tab

You can either view all alarms or set a maximum number of alarms to view. If you have set a
Maximum number of alarms to load, you must use the Load > Previous and Load >
Next commands in the dialog box’s shortcut menu to move forward and backward in the
alarms list.
3 Complete one of these actions:

 To load all alarms at once, select the All alarms in database check box.
OR
 To set a maximum number of alarms to load at once, clear the All alarms in
database check box, and then type a number in the Maximum number of
alarms to load box.
The default maximum number of alarms to load is 100, but you can select the number and
type in a different one.
255
14 CCS Device Control
Control When Magellan CCS Navigator is in Control mode (the indicator in the bottom right of the
screen is green and says Control) and you double-click an item in the Navigation pane, a
Overview Control dialog box opens for that device.
information.
Only an Administrator user can set control and configuration access rights to specific CCS
devices. Group membership determines an individual user’s control access to individual
devices.
The Control dialog box contains either generic or product-specific graphical representations
of each device parameter.
In Control mode, you can control the parameters of devices whose resource icons appear in
the Network and Discovery folders. These are the devices to which you have Control
access. For information on assigning access permissions to devices, see Managing User
Accounts on page 32.
The Control tool also offers simple HTTP control for devices that have a Web server, such as
the DPS-575 Multifunction Analog/Digital AV Synchronizer. You can view the device’s Web
page in a Web browser dialog box on the application desktop. See Device Control
through HTTP on page 293.
Opening and Closing Control Dialog Boxes

There are no controls for an X75-RCP in this release of Magellan CCS Navigator.
To show a Control dialog box for a specific CCS device, choose one of these three options:
 Double-click the CCS device’s resource icon in the Navigation or Graphical

Navigation pane; or if the device is a module, double-click the slot of the frame in
which the module resides.
 Right-click the CCS device’s resource icon in the Navigation or Graphical Navigation
pane and then select Control from the resulting navigation shortcut menu.
256 Chapter 14
CCS Device Control
 Click the CCS device’s resource icon in the Navigation or Graphical Navigation pane
and then point to Tools on the menu bar, and then click Control..
 In a Graphical Navigation page, set an action (the effect component of a rule) to
open a Control dialog box. See Setting Properties for a ‘Control’ Action on
Control dialog boxes are available depending on the licenses available in the system. For
example, if you have ISCP, you will not have the Control dialog box that controls a NEO
frame.
All parameter fields on a Control dialog box are unavailable—even LED colors—until the
Control tool has fully established a connection with the device. If the PC loses the
connection with the CCS device, the parameters are unavailable and appear dimmed in the
Control dialog box.
When the status bar reads “Access Disabled” or “Ready” (no remote control), all
parameters on the Control dialog box show their current value but you cannot modify
them.
Specific parameters in a Control dialog box may also become read-only when the status
bar reads “Limited Access,” or when the setting of one parameter causes the disabling of
another.
When you click on a Selenio module or frame to in either Build or Control mode, this
launches the HTTP application for the Selenio frame. See your Selenio documentation for
more information on the control panel.
Showing a Hidden Control Dialog Box

The name of each open Control, Configuration and Signal Monitor dialog box appear
on a list at the bottom of the Window menu.
To show a hidden, but open, Control dialog box, click on the Window menu on the menu
bar, and then click the name of the hidden dialog box. The Window menu lists the CCS
device’s name and a Control icon appears to the left of the name. If you are using
Workbook mode, select the tab that includes both the CCS device’s name and a Control
icon. (The same device may have open Configuration or Signal Monitor dialog boxes
listed on the Window menu.)
Closing a Control Dialog Box

To close a CCS device’s Control dialog box, choose one of these three methods:
 Click Close in the upper right corner of the dialog box

 Select the Control dialog box and then click Close on the Window menu
 Right click in the Control dialog box and select Close from the menu that appears
Configuring Custom Control Views

When you double-click on a device in the Navigation pane in Control mode, by default
Magellan CCS Navigator opens a Control dialog box. To configure Magellan CCS Navigator
to open a Navigator page instead, follow these steps:
User Manual
1 Right-click on a device, and then select Properties from the context menu that appears.
Figure 14-1 Device Properties Dialog Box

3 From the Control dialog box drop-down box, choose Custom.
4 Click Browse.
Figure 14-2 Choosing a Page to Open

5 Click a row in the Select Page table, and then click Open.
The Navigation Properties dialog box updates to indicate the name of the page that
opens when you click on this device in Control mode, in the Navigation pane and on icons
associated with this device in Graphical Navigation pages.
Using Generic and Specific Control Dialog Boxes

Depending on your system configuration, you may not have access to all devices.
The Control tool provides both specific and generic control dialog boxes. The design of a
specific Control dialog box reflects the control parameters found on the individual CCS
device it controls; however, a generic Control dialog box can control any type of CCS
device.
The Control tool offers both a specific and a generic Control dialog box for most
CCS devices, but some devices have only generic Control dialog boxes. The generic
interface obtains information from the CCS device on the fly, and then organizes and
presents the device’s control parameters into a number of groups. See the following topics
for more information:
258 Chapter 14
CCS Device Control
 Navigating the Generic Control Tab on page 258

 Using Older Generic Control Dialog Boxes on page 263
A specific Control dialog box shows automatically if it exists. If it doesn’t, the generic
Control dialog box appears.
If a device has both types of Control dialog boxes, you may want to switch back and forth
between them, since they can offer different ways of organizing and viewing a device’s
control parameters.
Checking the Active Window Type

To find out what types of Control dialog boxes a device has and which type is active,
right-click inside the device’s Control dialog box to show a control shortcut menu.
Two options near the top of the menu are Specific Control and Generic Control. A check
mark appears to the left of the active window type.
If Specific Control is unavailable on the control shortcut menu, then the device does not
have a specific Control dialog box. You must control the device with a generic Control
dialog box.
To activate a CCS device’s specific Control dialog box, right-click inside the device’s generic
Control dialog box and then select Specific Control from the resulting control shortcut
menu.
To activate a CCS device’s generic Control dialog box, right-click inside the device’s specific
Control dialog box and then select Generic Control from the resulting control shortcut
menu.
Showing a Container Device’s Control Dialog Boxes

To open the Control dialog boxes for a container resource and of all its children, right-click
the resource icon, and then select Control Contents from the resulting shortcut menu.
Control dialog boxes have Control and Alarm tabs or pages.
The Control tabs allows you to browse and set parameters for the CCS device. In the top
right corner of some devices you can view a streaming thumbnail which displays the current
output for the CCS device. See Navigating Parameters Using the Generic Control
Dialog Box on page 259 for more information.
The Alarms tabs allow you to set alarm preferences for the alarms on the CCS device. For
more information, see Setting Alarms on page 261.
The X75 Control dialog box also includes a third tab. The Video Streaming tab contains a
streaming thumbnail and the URL for the streaming output. For more information, see
Streaming in a Control Dialog Box on page 278.
Navigating the Generic Control Tab

When you select the Control tab, it will always open to the top level of the parameter list.
As you browse the parameter pages, information at the top of the screen updates to allow
you to see the path you have travelled and the current page of parameters.
User Manual
Current page Path to current parameter page
Figure 14-3 X75 Control tools
To view a list of parameters you have recently navigated to, right click in Control mode and
choose Parameter Info from the shortcut menu. To sort the list, click on any of the column
headers.
See your CCS device’s installation and operation manual for a complete explanation of its
parameters. A parameter list is available from our website, or on your installation DVD.
The generic Control tab contains two methods to search for any parameter that is available
on the unit.
 Navigating Parameters Using the Generic Control Dialog Box on page 259
 Navigating Parameters Using the Tree View on page 260
Navigating Parameters Using the Generic Control Dialog Box

By default, the Controls tab organizes parameters into folders.
Current level
Folders in the current
level
Click here for the rest of

the folders at this level
Figure 14-4 X75 Control Tab

If a particular folder level contains more items than can be viewed in the width of the
Control panel, a down arrow appears at the right edge of the screen. To see the rest of the
menu items, you have two options: Make the panel wider, or click the down arrow to open
a menu that shows the hidden items.
260 Chapter 14
CCS Device Control
When you click on a folder, the row of folders refreshes to display the sub-folders in that
folder, at the same time that the path to the current parameter page updates, and the
parameters at that level in the folder structure appear. If there are more parameters than
can fit in the page, a scroll bar will appear at the right edge of the panel. Use that to view
the other parameters.
Ascending Levels in the Controls Tab

The buttons in the top left corner of the Controls tab allow you to navigate through the
parameter list.
Up one
level Home
Figure 14-5 Control Tab Levels
You can also use the Home and Up one level buttons to navigate upward in the Controls
tab’s tree view.
Click Home to go back to the top level, or right click in the toolbar and select Navigate
Home.
Click Up one level to go one step higher in the parameter hierarchy, or right click in the
toolbar and select Navigate Up.
Click in the path to go to that level in the parameter list.
Navigating Parameters Using the Tree View

The tree view offers another way to navigate through the devices’s parameters in the
Control tab.
To open a tree view on the Control tab, right click in the navigation area near the top and
select Tree View from the shortcut menu.
A nested list of all the controls appears on the left side of the screen. The parameters
available at the currently selected level of the list appear to the right of this list, and across
the top the currently selected level, and the path to that level, continue to be displayed.
User Manual
Tree view
Selected level
Parameters
available at
that level
Figure 14-6 Control Dialog Box with Tree View Open

A plus symbol (+) to the left of an item in this list indicates that there is another layer of
parameters below this one, but the contents are currently hidden. To show the contents of
a closed level, click the plus (+) symbol to the left of that level.
A minus (-) symbol to the left of an item in this list indicates that the level has contents, or
children, and is showing its contents. To hide the contents of that level, click the minus
symbol (-) to the left of it.
The absence of either a plus (+) or minus (-) symbol to the left of a level indicates that the
level has no contents. If you click on a level with no plus or minus symbol in the tree view,
you should always see parameters or controls in the right section of the Control dialog box.
When an upper level of the Tree View is expanded, there may be more open contents in the
Tree View than can be displayed in the dialog box. In this case, the tree view also has scroll
bars at the right bottom of the dialog box that allow you to navigate up and down the list
of parameters.
Setting Alarms
The alarm feature operates only in Control mode, when the Control tool is communicating
with the CCS device.
To adjust the settings of the available alarms for a CCS device, complete these steps:
1 Double-click the resource icon for the CCS device in the Navigation pane to open the
device’s Control dialog box.
2 Select the Alarm tab to show the list of alarms.
262 Chapter 14
CCS Device Control
Navigate through
alarm pages with
these buttons
Figure 14-7 Alarms Tab of X75

Each alarm represents a different alarm condition.
To display a list of alarms you have recently navigated to, when in Control mode, right click
and choose Alarm Info from the shortcut menu. To sort the list, you can click on any of the
column headers.
3 If you know the page of the alarm you are looking for, click the page number below the
Alarm tab’s banner at the top of the dialog box to go to that page. Or, use the four buttons
to the left of these numbers to navigate to the first page, the previous page, the next page
or the last page.
To the right of each alarm name is a Status column. The colors in this column indicate the
alarm’s current status:
Table 14-1 Alarm Status Colors

Alarm Color Meaning
Red Major alarm
Yellow Minor alarm
Black Not active
The alarm status is read-only.
Not all Alarm Options are available on all devices.
4 To adjust the settings for an alarm, click the field you want to adjust.
User Manual
Table 14-2 Alarm Settings

Alarm Option Effect
Enable/Disable Determines whether the alarm will trigger or not; if the
label shows the word “Enabled,” an alarm condition
will generate an alarm; but if the label shows
“Disabled,” an alarm condition will not generate
an alarm
Alarm priority Determines the alarm priority that will be reported when
this alarm condition is triggered
Trigger (s) Determines how quickly the alarm will trigger (in
seconds); if the alarm level is reached for less time than
the Trigger duration, then the alarm will not trigger
Clear (s) Determines how long the alarm condition has to be off
(in seconds) in order for the alarm to clear
Ack When checked, allows other users on the network to
see that you have acknowledged the alarm
You will use the Navigation and Diagnostics tools in using alarms. For information on
using alarm tools, please see Network Event Diagnostics on page 237 and Network
View Construction on page 93.
Using Older Generic Control Dialog Boxes

Older CCS devices use a slightly different Control dialog box. It still has a Control page and
an Alarms page.
The Control tab lists all the controllable parameters for a device. This tab has two parts:
 a parameter-classification pane on the left

 a parameter-control pane on the right
When you select an item in the parameter-classification pane, the second pane shows the
parameters grouped under the selected item.
264 Chapter 14
CCS Device Control
Figure 14-8 Control Tab Showing Video Analog Composite Parameters

The Alarms tab shows all the parameters for which the device supports alarm monitoring.
To confirm that the device can

send an alarm for a parameter,
click the Test button that
corresponds to it.
The alarm appears for
approximately 10 seconds in
the Diagnostics dialog box.
Then it is automatically cleared
and it will disappear from the
alarm lists in the Diagnostics
dialog box.
Figure 14-9. Alarms Tab
Creating Hierarchical Domains

The shortcut menu for the parameter-classification pane enables you to create hierarchical
domains from the existing device domains. Right-click to show the shortcut menu, which
has options to add, modify, and delete user-defined domains.
With this feature, you can create up to four levels of hierarchical domains.
You can modify the user-defined domains and delete them from the
parameter-classification pane as needed.
User Manual
Figure 14-10 Domain Grouping Box
Checking a Device’s Control Status

Magellan CCS Navigator can show individual Control dialog boxes for each device assigned
to you for monitoring. You can determine the control status of each device and its network
connection by reading the message in the Control dialog box's status bar. The status bar,
which appears in the bottom left corner of the Control dialog box, changes color when an
alarm condition occurs.
Table 14-3 Status Messages in the Control Dialog Box Status Bar
Message Meaning
Loading control The Control tool is trying to establish a connection
with the selected CCS device.
Control No control is available for the CCS device.
unavailable
Not ready, The Control tool has connected to a CCS device and
reading is reading its control settings. However, the device is
not yet ready for remote control.
Ready The CCS device is ready to receive control
commands.
Connected A connection to the CCS device has been
established.
Not ready, The connection to the device has been lost.
retrying This occurs when the physical connection
to the network is broken, or when a device loses
power. The Control tool automatically attempts
to reconnect with the CCS device.
Operation failed A control operation of a CCS device has failed.
Ready (No The CCS device is ready, but can only be controlled
remote control) locally from the module edge. However, the Control
tool shows the current parameter values of the CCS
device.
266 Chapter 14
CCS Device Control
Using the Control Shortcut Menu

If you right-click a Control dialog box, a control shortcut menu appears. Some shortcut
menu options are only available in Control mode. Below is a table describing the control
shortcut menu options, with references to related topics:
Not all commands will always be available. Depending on the current selection, some
commands might be disabled. Specifically, the Specific Control, Generic Control, Load
Preset, Copy Preset, Save Preset and Delete Preset commands may not be available.
Table 14-4 Control Shortcut Menu

Find Device Finds a device’s resource icon in Using a Control Dialog Box
the Navigation pane to Find a Resource Icon on
page 267
Specific Activates a specific CCS device Opening and Closing
Control Control dialog box Control Dialog Boxes on
page 255
Generic Activates a generic CCS device Using Older Generic Control
Control Control dialog box Dialog Boxes on page 263
Load Preset... Loads a preset to a CCS device Loading Presets in the
Navigation Pane on page 273
Copy Preset... Copies a preset to a designated Copying Presets in the
preset folder Navigation Pane on page 274
Save Preset... Saves a preset for a CCS device Saving Presets in the
Navigation Pane on page 272
Delete Preset... Deletes a preset from the Deleting Presets in the
Preset folder Navigation Pane on page 274
Undo Undoes the last action
Redo Redoes the last action
Refresh Refreshes the connection status Refreshing the Connection
for a CCS device Status of a CCS Device on
page 267
Default Size Returns a Control dialog box to
its default size
Tree View Available on some devices when
Generic Control is available.
Selecting Tree View will show or
hide the Tree View on the left
side of the Generic Control
dialog box.
Options... Shows the Control Options Setting Control Options on
box page 268
User Manual
Table 14-4 Control Shortcut Menu(Continued)

Help Shows Help for the Control Getting Help with the
tool Control Tool on page 267
User Manual Shows the user manual for a Showing the User Manual
CCS device for a CCS-Enabled Device on
page 268
Close Closes the Control dialog box Closing a Control Dialog
Box on page 256
Using a Control Dialog Box to Find a Resource Icon

If you discover an alarm for a CCS device in one of the Control dialog boxes or in an alarm
list in the Diagnostics dialog box, you must find the physical location of the malfunctioning
CCS device in the Navigation pane so that someone can troubleshoot the problem. The
location of the CCS device icon in the Navigation pane indicates where the CCS device
resides on the network.
To use a device Control dialog box to find the device’s resource icon in the Navigation
pane, complete these steps:
1 Right-click inside the device’s Control dialog box to show the device control shortcut menu.
2 Click Find Device.
The Navigation tool will highlight the resource icon for the device in the Navigation pane.
If necessary, the Navigation pane scrolls up or down to show the location of the device
icon in the Navigation tree.
Refreshing the Connection Status of a CCS Device

To update the connection status of a CCS device, follow this procedure:
1 Right-click inside the CCS device’s Control dialog box.

2 Select Refresh from the resulting shortcut menu.
Under normal conditions, this procedure is unnecessary. However, if you reboot a device
connected to several PCs running Magellan CCS Navigator, the alarm traffic hitting the
network may cause an alarm query request to time out and fail. While the query does not
automatically retry, an “Alarm query failed” message posts to the Diagnostics dialog box.
Clearing an ‘Alarm Query Failed’ Message

To clear an “Alarm query failed” message, right-click inside the Diagnostics dialog box,
and then select Refresh from the resulting shortcut menu.
Getting Help with the Control Tool

To get help for the Control tool, right-click inside a Control dialog box and select Help
from the resulting shortcut menu; or click inside the Control dialog box, and then press F1
on the keyboard.
268 Chapter 14
CCS Device Control
Showing the User Manual for a CCS-Enabled Device

To show an Acrobat PDF file of the user manual for a CCS-enabled device, do one of the
following:
 Right-click inside the CCS device’s Control dialog box, and then select User Manual
from the resulting shortcut menu
OR
 Click inside the CCS device’s Control dialog box, and then press F1 on the PC keyboard
Adobe Acrobat Reader will open and show the user manual for the selected CCS
device on the computer screen. You can search the user manual and print information
from it. To close the PDF file, click the Close button in the upper right corner of the file.
Checking the Access Rights for a CCS Device

Magellan CCS Navigator shows individual Control dialog boxes for each CCS device you
are monitoring. By default, all user groups can control the parameters of a CCS device.
However, the Administrator user may restrict access rights to certain devices or to some
parameters of a device. If you cannot control a parameter, it be unavailable for changes on
the Control dialog box.
You can determine the access rights of each CCS device by reading the access message in
the far right cell of the Control dialog box’s status bar. The status bar shows in the bottom
left corner of the Control dialog box.
Below is a list of access messages that appear in the Control dialog box status bar and
what they mean:
Table 14-5 Control Access Rights

Access Right Meaning
Access Enabled You can control all parameters of the CCS device.
Access Disabled You cannot control any parameter of the CCS
device, but you can still view the value of the
parameter.
Limited Access You can control only some parameters of the CCS
device, but you can still view the current value of
other parameters that have their access disabled.
When showing Access Disabled and Limited Access,
the background color of the far right cell is yellow.
Otherwise, it is grey.
Setting Control Options

Control options apply universally to all devices, not to individual devices.
To access Control dialog box options, point to Options on the menu bar and click Control;
or right-click inside an open Control dialog box, and then click Options... on the resulting
shortcut menu.
User Manual
This shows the Control Options box.
Figure 14-11 Control Options Dialog Box
Table 14-6 Control Dialog Box Options

Section Option Function
Tracking Dialog box contents change When you select a resource icon, if the
Options as you select devices in the device’s Control dialog box is open, it
(choose one) Navigation tool will move to the front of the dialog box
Note: The X75 streaming tab order. Otherwise, the content
dialog box is not displayed of the active Control dialog box shows
when this option is selected. control information for the selected
device.
Dialog box contents do not Selections in the Navigation pane will
change as you select NROs not affect the contents of any device’s
in the Navigation tool Control dialog box.
Slider Options Device parameter changes Provides real-time changes in the control
(choose one) as slider is moved value as you move the slider
Device parameter changes Sets the new control value after you
as slider is released release the slider control
270 Chapter 14
CCS Device Control
Table 14-6 Control Dialog Box Options (Continued)

Section Option Function
Alarm Enable/ Allow enabling or disabling When a device such as a NEO module is
Disable of alarms for devices in Local in local active state, Magellan CCS
Options Active state Navigator cannot remotely control the
module. It can show the module’s
parameter values and receive alarms, but
controls in the control dialog box are
dimmed (and therefore unavailable
for use).
This option enables you to indicate that
you want the controls allowing you to
enable or disable alarms to still be
available.
Preset Allow undo/redo of Load Applies to all Control dialog boxes that
Options Preset operation support presets (including X75).
Window Maximum number of open By default, the maximum number of
Options Control dialog boxes dialog boxes to be open is 21; more may
slow down your system
HTTP Options Auto-refresh enabled When checked, any device Control
dialog boxes that show a Web page will
automatically refresh.
The default auto-refresh rate is every five
seconds, but you can change the rate.
Select the default 5 in the Auto-refresh
rate (seconds): box and type in another
number
Using Presets
Presets are not available for all devices. For example, you cannot create a preset for a
CENTRIO System. Some devices, such as QSEE6800+ modules, cannot be combined with
other devices in a preset.
A preset is a set of predefined control settings. Presets can save common control settings
for the devices under your control, so that you can quickly reactivate these control settings
as needed.
Since presets are a control element, you can only save, copy, load, or delete presets in
Control mode. You can create, load, and save a preset using shortcut menu commands
associated with the Navigation c or a target device’s Control dialog box.
 When you right click in a Control dialog box, you can load, save, or delete a preset for
a single CCS device.
 When you right click in the Navigation pane, you can create, load, save, copy, delete,
or modify the presets for any number of devices.
There are options for making presets load faster in the Navigation and Control Options
dialog boxes. See Setting Navigation Options on page 120 and Setting Control
Options on page 268.
User Manual
Careful naming of presets will help you avoid making errors in identifying the correct preset
for the correct device set. Give the preset a name that provides as much detail as possible to
help you distinguish it from other presets in the preset folder.
Presets are organized into folders. An entire folder (series of presets for individual devices)
can be loaded or saved at the same time.
Preset folder in
Navigation pane
Preset sub-folder
Preset for an
individual device
Figure 14-12 Sample Preset Folder

Presets can be created by any user on a Magellan CCS Navigator Client or Magellan CCS
Navigator Server. Presets are stored on a Magellan CCS Navigator Server only. If a preset is
changed by a user on a Magellan CCS Navigator Server or Client, all other users will receive
notification that a network resource has been updated. When they Reload (by clicking
Reload from the toolbar, or by right clicking in the Navigation pane and clicking Reload, or
by selecting View > Reload from the main menu), the preset is updated.
Working With Presets in a Control Dialog Box

When you right-click in a Control dialog box for a device, there are three preset options, as
described below:
ProcedureSaving a Preset in a Device Control Dialog Box
You cannot alter preset access settings when saving a preset. Access settings are set per
user or user group. See Logging In and Account Administration on page 23 for more
information.
To create a preset, you must save the device’s settings. To use a device’s Control shortcut
menu to save a preset, complete these steps:
1 Set the device’s control parameters in its Control dialog box.

2 Right-click inside the Control dialog box, and then click Save Preset... from the resulting
shortcut menu.
This shows the Save Preset box.
3 Type a name for the preset in the Name box, or select an existing name from the List of
Presets box to modify an existing preset.
4 Click OK.
The preset appears in the Preset sub-folder you selected or created.
272 Chapter 14
CCS Device Control
ProcedureLoading Presets in a Control Dialog Box
You cannot undo or redo the loading of presets in the device Control dialog box unless you
have activated this feature in the Control Options box. By default, this feature is disabled
so you can load presets more quickly. See Setting Control Options on page 268.
To use a device’s control shortcut menu to load a preset, complete these steps:
1 Right-click inside the device’s Control dialog box, and then select Load Preset... from the
shortcut menu that appears
This shows the Load Preset box.
If there are no presets in the Load Preset box, that is because there are no presets for that
specific device.
2 Select the preset from the Load Preset box, and then click OK.
The preset will load to its target device or devices.
ProcedureDeleting Presets in a Control Dialog Box

To use a device’s Control shortcut menu to delete a preset, complete these steps:
1 Right-click inside the device’s Control dialog box and select Delete Preset... from the
shortcut menu that appears.
A Delete Preset box appears, listing the names of any existing presets for that device.
2 Select the preset you want to delete from the list of existing presets, and then click OK.
Working With Presets in the Navigation Pane

In the Navigation pane, you can work with groups of presets, which are stored in
sub-folders. See the following topics:
 Saving Presets in the Navigation Pane on page 272

 Loading Presets in the Navigation Pane on page 273
 Copying Presets in the Navigation Pane on page 274
 Deleting Presets in the Navigation Pane on page 274
Saving Presets in the Navigation Pane

You cannot alter preset access settings when saving a preset. Access settings are set per
user or user group. See Logging In and Account Administration on page 23 for more
information.
When you create a preset in the Navigation pane, you can select multiple devices. Each
individual device will create a separate file in the preset’s parent folder. You can then
simultaneously apply, or load, all the presets in that folder, or you can apply an individual
preset to a single device.
To save a preset using the Navigation shortcut menu, complete these steps:
1 In Control mode, set the control parameters for the device or devices you want to include in
the preset in their Control dialog boxes.
User Manual
2 In the Navigation pane’s Network or Discovery folder, select the resource icons of the
devices you want to include in the preset.
To select more than one device, hold down the SHIFT or CTRL key while selecting other
devices.
3 Right-click inside the Navigation pane and select Presets.

In the resulting shortcut menu, one or both of the following options may be available:
 Save - If the device you have selected has parameters, or if you have selected one
or more devices
This option will save the parameters for the selected device(s) only.
 Save Contents - If the device(s) you have selected contain child devices that have
parameters
This option will save the parameters for the parent device(s), if there any, and the
parameters for each child device.
4 Choose either Save or Save Contents.
The Save Presets dialog box opens.
Figure 14-13 Save Presets Dialog Box

5 Enter the name of a preset in the Preset Name field, or choose a preset from the List of
Presets.
 If you select a preset name from the list of presets, then new items will appear in
that preset’s sub-folder.
If the folder contains a preset for a device already, you will be asked if you want to
save over it. This is how you modify a preset.
 If you type a new name, a new preset sub-folder now appears in the Preset folder.
That folder will contain an item for each selected device.
6 Click OK to save the preset.
Loading Presets in the Navigation Pane

When you load a preset, this applies the control settings contained in that preset to the
device(s).
On most platforms, when you load a preset, this can potentially change the values of all
parameters, including parameters your user group does not have permission to write to.
To use a navigation shortcut menu to load one or more presets, complete these steps:
274 Chapter 14
CCS Device Control
1 Select the presets that you want to load from the Navigation pane’s Preset folder.
To select more than one preset, hold down the SHIFT or CTRL key while selecting presets,
and/or select a sub-folder that contains more than one preset.
2 Right-click inside the Navigation pane, and then select Presets > Load from the resulting
shortcut menu.
The selected presets load to their target devices.
The Navigation tool will not undo or redo the loading of presets unless you have activated
this feature in the Navigation Options box. By default, this feature is disabled so the
Navigation tool can load presets more quickly. See Navigation Tool Won’t ‘Undo’ or
‘Redo’ a Preset Load on page 318.
Copying Presets in the Navigation Pane

Presets can be copied to like devices using the Navigation shortcut menu. To copy a preset,
1 Right-click a preset (this option is not available for preset sub-folders) and select Copy to....
the Copy Preset dialog box opens.
Figure 14-14 Copy Preset Dialog Box

Only devices that are similar to the device for which the preset was made will be listed.
2 In the Copy column, place a check beside the device.

3 Determine the sub-folder the preset will be added to.
 If you leave the Destination Preset Folder name at its default, the copied preset
will be saved in the same sub-folder as the preset it is a copy of.
 If you type the name of another preset sub-folder, the preset will be added to that
sub-folder.
 If you type the name of a new sub-folder, this sub-folder will be created.
4 Click OK.
The new preset will appear in the designated preset sub-folder.
Deleting Presets in the Navigation Pane

From the Navigation pane, you can delete one or more presets or preset sub-folders. To
delete presets or preset sub-folders, complete these steps:
1 Select the presets or preset sub-folders to delete from the Preset folder.
User Manual
To select more than one object, hold down the SHIFT or CTRL key while selecting items.
2 Right-click inside the Navigation pane and select Presets > Delete from the shortcut
menu that appears.
3 Click Yes to confirm the preset deletion.
276 Chapter 14
CCS Device Control
277
15 Streaming in Control Windows
Streaming Magellan CCS Navigator control windows can display two types of video streaming:
thumbnails and MPEG-4.
Overview
Thumbnails are small images that refresh at a low rate (maximum of two frames a second)
and at a low resolution. The following hardware options can provide Magellan CCS
Navigator with streaming video thumbnails:
 A QSEE6800+ module shows a page of thumbnails on its Control dialog box, with one
thumbnail for each input on the module (to a maximum of eight per module). Each
input to the QSEE6800+ module has its own Control dialog box with a thumbnail (for
that input) on it. These thumbnails display alarms (if present), a VU meter, and buttons
to display a waveform or vectorscope. See QSEE6800+ Control Dialog Boxes on
 A FR6802+QXF frame equipped with a 6800+ETH resource module shows a thumbnail
page in its Control dialog box. A thumbnail is displayed for each thumbnail-capable
module installed in that frame. In addition, those modules display a thumbnail on a
Video Streaming tab on their own Control dialog box. See Viewing Thumbnails from
FR6802+QXF Frames on page 282 for more information.
Not all 6800+ modules are capable of displaying thumbnails. Some modules may require a
firmware update in order to display thumbnails.
 An X75 equipped with an X75OPT-STR option shows a thumbnail on its Control dialog
box. For more information, see Viewing an X75 Streaming Source on page 285.
 Modules in a SELENIO frame
MPEG-4 streaming is higher in quality, and uses more system resources. MPEG-4 streaming
is available on an X75 equipped with an X75OPT-STR module, and on QSEE6800+ modules
with the QSEE6800+HS option. Magellan CCS Navigator can display one MPEG-4 stream
per X75 or QSEE6800+HS module, to a maximum of four MPEG-4 streams. An X75 or
QSEE6800+HS module can show MPEG-4 video on its Control dialog box, in a standalone
dialog box on your desktop, or as part of a Graphical Navigation panel (if you have a
NAVIGATOR-SRV license). See Streaming in a Graphical Navigation Page on page 29 for
more information.
Adding a License Key for MPEG-4 Streaming in QSEE6800+

For assistance with a license key, or to purchase a license key, please contact your sales
representative.
278 Chapter 15
Streaming in Control Windows
To enter a license key to activate MPEG-4 streaming, your CCS Software must be in Control
mode. Follow these steps:
1 Select the QSEE6800+ module in the Navigation pane, right click and select Control to
open the module’s Control dialog box.
2 If it is not already selected, click on the Streaming tab.
3 Type your license key in the Key field.
If your license key is valid, then the Options field will display High-End Streaming.
Multicasting QSEE6800+ modules use multicasting to stream thumbnails and/or MPEG4 video
simultaneously to multiple devices. Using multicasting means that a QSEE6800+ module
uses the same amount of bandwidth regardless of the number of clients it transmits data
to, rather than using bandwidth proportionally to a module’s number of clients, as in
point-to-point communication.
If you have multiple QSEE6800+ modules, you must ensure that each module has a unique
Multicast IP address. This is done using the Multicast IP parameter on the module’s
Control dialog box.
Any IP address from 224.0.1.0 to 239.255.255.255 is treated as a valid multicast address

input.
The Multicast TTL (Time-to-live) parameter determines how many network switches can
exist between your device (in this case a QSEE6800+ module) and your client. Normally you
should leave this setting at its default.
Streaming in a Control Dialog Box

You can stream both thumbnails and MPEG-4 video in an X75 (with the X75OPT-STR
option) or QSEE6800+ Control or Input Control dialog box.
For more information, see the following topics:
 QSEE6800+ Control Dialog Boxes on page 278

 Viewing Thumbnails from FR6802+QXF Frames on page 282
 Viewing an X75 Streaming Source on page 285
QSEE6800+ Control Dialog Boxes

If your QSEE6800+ module has firmware 2.0 or higher, you can discover it using
point-to-point streaming (i.e., when it is on a different subnet) and still stream video from
the module. The module can have up to six point-to-point connections.
User Manual
When you discover a QSEE6800+ module, it will appear as a child resource of the frame in
which it is installed. The QSEE6800+ module will also have child resources, one for each
input to the QSEE6800+ module.
Double click the QSEE6800+

module to view thumbnails for
all inputs.
Double click any input to set

alarms and parameters for that
input only.
Figure 15-1. QSEE6800+ Module In Navigation Pane
When you are in Control mode, you can open a Control dialog box for a QSEE6800+
module to view the thumbnails for all inputs to that module and adjust parameters that will
affect the output of the card as a whole. See Using a QSEE6800+ Control Dialog Box on
page 279 for more information
You can also open a Control dialog box for each input to the module (by clicking on the
input in the Navigation pane). This dialog box shows a thumbnail for the input only,
parameters for this input, and a wide array of alarm options for this input. See Using a
QSEE6800+ Input Control Dialog Box on page 282 for more information, and see your
QSEE6800+ Installation and Operation Manual for more information on QSEE6800+ alarms
and inputs.
For general information on Control dialog boxes, see Using Generic and Specific Control
Dialog Boxes on page 257.
Using a QSEE6800+ Control Dialog Box

When you reboot the module, the input stream on this dialog box will always revert to
Input 1.
280 Chapter 15
The QSEE6800+ module has a Specific Control dialog box, which provides access to
parameters via its Network and Stream tabs (where you can also view MPEG-4 video, if
enabled).
MPEG-4 stream is optional;

see your sales
representative for more
information.
Without the streaming

option, a grey box will
appear
Figure 15-2. Control Dialog Box Display Tab for QSEE6800+
The QSEE6800+ specific Control dialog box also contains a Display tab. This tab displays
thumbnails for all the inputs into the module.
MPEG-4 stream is optional—

box will appear empty if it is
not available.
The contents of the MPEG-4
stream are determined by the
MPEG-4 Video Source and
MPEG-4 Audio Source
parameters on the QSEE
module.
By default, the audio for the
stream is off. Click the speaker
icon to activate streaming
audio.
Figure 15-3. QSEE6800+ Streaming Tab
If an input is not connected, the thumbnail or MPEG-4 stream dialog box will indicate this
status.
Each thumbnail has a variety of controls:

User Manual
The outer region of the thumbnail

changes color to indicate an alarm
level
Toggles Vector Display mode
Toggles Waveform Display mode
Audio Meters
Figure 15-4 QSEE6800+ Thumbnail Buttons

If you click Vector Display or Waveform Display, the button turns white to indicate that
it is currently selected. Click the same button again to display the thumbnail again. Vector
and waveform displays are only available on thumbnail images, not on an MPEG-4 image.
Click the W again to

return to thumbnail
display
Figure 15-5 Waveform Display on a Thumbnail

To determine the line that is analyzed by the waveform or vectorscope, set the Line Number
parameter in the subdevice’s Control dialog box.
ProcedureAudio Monitoring
When opening QSEE6800+ Control dialog boxes while listening to audio, the sound may
drop out momentarily.
When monitoring MPEG-4 streaming video, you can turn on the audio monitoring by
clicking the speaker icon to the lower right of the MPEG-4 stream.
When audio is active, you can turn it off by clicking the same button.
282 Chapter 15
Using a QSEE6800+ Input Control Dialog Box

To open a Control dialog box for an input to a QSEE6800+ module, double click on an
input in the Navigation pane.
Thumbnail for the

selected QSEE6800+
input
Figure 15-6. Control Dialog Box for an Input to a QSEE6800+
The controls on this screen affect the individual input only. They do not affect the rest of the
functionality for the module that is providing the input. See the QSEE6800+ Installation and
Operation Manual for a complete description of the parameters and alarms.
Viewing Thumbnails from FR6802+QXF Frames

Not all 6800+ modules are capable of displaying thumbnails. Check our website to
determine if your module can be thumbnails-enabled.
If a FR6802+QXF frame contains a 6800+ETH module, then that frame can stream
thumbnails for every other module in the frame. Thumbnails can appear in the following
places:
 On the 6800+ETH module’s Control dialog box (see 6800+ETH Control Dialog Box
Streaming Tab on page 282)
 On an individual module’s Video Streaming tab (see Using the Video Streaming Tab
on a Control Dialog Box on page 284)
 On a Graphical Navigation panel (see Playing MPEG-4 Video from the Navigation
Pane on page 285)
6800+ETH Control Dialog Box Streaming Tab

If a FR6802+QXF frame contains a 6800+ETH module, then that frame can stream
thumbnails for other modules in the frame. Not all 6800+ modules are capable of
displaying thumbnails. Some modules may require a firmware update in order to display
thumbnails. Check our Website at www.imaginecommunications.com to determine if your
module is thumbnail-enabled.
User Manual
The 6800+ETH’s Control dialog box contains a Video Streaming tab. This tab contains
thumbnails for all slots in the frame, for a maximum of 20 thumbnails.
Figure 15-7 6800+ETH Streaming Tab

If the module in a particular slot does not support streaming, that slot’s thumbnail will
contain a “Not Supported” message.
If the module in a slot provides streaming, an active thumbnail will be displayed.

Thumbnails update at a rate set through the Rate parameter on the 6800+ETH module.
If a module uses two slots, then the thumbnail would appear to belong to the first slot only,
and the second thumbnail will display a box that contains the text Empty Slot.
If a module is present, supports streaming but is not sending a signal, then the thumbnail
for that slot will contain the text No Data Available.
If a module is present but does not support streaming, the space for that module will
contain the text Not supported.
If a slot is empty, the thumbnail for that position in the frame will contain the text Empty
Slot.
If no connection is established between the 6800+ETH module and the application (for
example, if it is temporarily disconnected from the network), then all thumbnails will be
gray.
284 Chapter 15
Using the Video Streaming Tab on a Control Dialog Box

Each 6800+ module that supports streaming, when installed in a FR6802+QXF frame that
contains a 6800+ETH module, will have an additional Video Streaming tab on its Control
dialog box. This tab will not appear when the module is installed in a frame that does not
support streaming. Nor will it appear if the card does not support streaming. Some modules
may require a firmware update in order to display thumbnails. Check our Website at
www.imaginecommunications.com to determine if your module is thumbnail-enabled.
Figure 15-8 Video Streaming Tab of an HDC6800+ Control Dialog Box

The name that appears on the thumbnail is provided by the 6800+ETH card.
User Manual
Viewing an X75 Streaming Source

If your X75 has an optional X75OPT-STR module, its Control dialog box will have an extra
Video Streaming tab. In addition to showing a thumbnail, it displays the source URL for
the web stream, and the frame rate, as shown in the image below.
Streaming thumbnail
High-end streaming
Figure 15-9 X75 Streaming Tab

The HTTP URL field is for information purposes only. You can take the information here and
type it into a web browser to view the streaming data from a remote location.
The Refresh Interval indicates the rate at which all this X75’s thumbnail images are
updated, measured in seconds. Type a number in the field to change the refresh rate.
See Adding a Streaming Icon on page 35 for more information on streaming.
Playing MPEG-4 Video from the Navigation Pane

procedure.
To stream MPEG-4 video out of your QSEE6800+ module, you must have the QSEE6800+HS
option. When monitoring an MPEG-4 stream from QSEE6800+H by starting a QuickTime
player, you can hear monitoring audio in addition to viewing the video stream.
Magellan CCS Navigator is compatible with QuickTime version 7.1.
To add a device icon to start streaming video from the Navigation pane, follow these steps:
1 With Magellan CCS Navigator in Build mode, under the Network, Discovery, or
Temporary folder of the Navigation pane, right-click and select Create > Server.
This will create a Server icon in the Navigation pane.
2 Right-click on the server icon and select Properties... from the menu that appears.
The Navigation Properties dialog box opens.
3 Select the Command tab, and fill it in with the following information:
286 Chapter 15
Operation: Control
Command: c:\program files\quicktime\quicktimeplayer.exe
(Or the complete path to your QuickTime Player installation, if it differs from the above)
Arguments: rtsp://[IP Address]:554/streaming
(Replace [IP Address] by the IP address of the QSEE6800+ module)
You can leave the Initial Directory field blank.
4 Close the Navigation Properties dialog box by clicking the X in the top right corner.
When you enter Control mode, double-click on the server icon. This will open a QuickTime
Player and play MPEG-4 streaming video from the specified source.
287
16 Video Output Monitoring
Signal Monitoring Overview

information.
The Signal Monitor tool can perform confidence monitoring of the video signals from CCS
devices within the broadcast facility. Before using the Signal Monitor tool, you must have
all of the following:
 A video card compatible with Microsoft DirectX 8.1 or later installed in the PC, or an
external monitor
 One or more CCS devices with video (or audio) to monitor connected to input ports
of an Imagine Communications router
 One output port of an Imagine Communications router connected to a Microsoft
DirectX 8.1 (or later) compatible video card or to the external monitor of the PC
Using the Signal Monitor Tool

To use the Signal Monitor tool, complete these steps:
1 Use the Discovery tool to discover a routing system. See Volume 6: Routing Configuration.
Only an Administrator user on a Magellan CCS Navigator Server can complete this step.
2 Set the Signal Monitor Options. See Setting Signal Monitor Options on page 290.
3 Define monitor points for the CCS devices you want to monitor.
Defining monitor points associates the sources of the routing system with the CCS devices
you want to monitor.
After you have defined the monitor points, little monitor icons will show in the Monitor
column of the Navigation pane. See Setting Navigation Properties on page 103 and
Setting Navigation Options on page 120.
4 In Control mode, open the Signal Monitor dialog box. See Showing the Signal Monitor
Dialog Box on page 288.
5 Also in Control mode, start monitoring the video signal of CCS devices. See Monitoring
Video Signals on page 288.
288 Chapter 16
Video Output Monitoring
Showing the Signal Monitor Dialog Box

To show the Signal Monitor dialog box, point to Tools on the menu bar and click Signal
Monitor.
When you open the Signal Monitor dialog box, it will show the monitored video of the
CCS device that is currently selected in the Navigation pane. If that device has no
monitored video and you have previously defined a Color Black Signal in the Signal
Monitor Options box, you will see the Color Black Signal.
If you resize the Signal Monitor dialog box, its content will also resize. Its default aspect
ratio is 4:3.
Monitoring Video Signals

You can only monitor video signal in Control mode.
According to the settings you choose in the Signal Monitor Options box, the Signal
Monitor tool can send the video output from monitored devices to either the Signal
Monitor dialog box in the application dialog box or to an external monitor. See Setting
Signal Monitor Options on page 290 for more information.
To determine the current setting for the video output, point to Options on the menu bar
and click Signal Monitor. Go to the Video Output Selection section, which has three
radio buttons. The buttons and their functions, when selected, are as follows:
Table 16-1 Options for Video Output Selection

Option Function
Signal Monitor Sends the video output to the Signal Monitor
Window dialog box
External Monitor Sends the video output to an external monitor
Disabled Sends no signal
You can set the Signal Monitor’s tracking options so that the signal output to the Signal
Monitor dialog box or external monitor changes as you select different devices in the
Navigation pane. The signal output will be that of the currently selected device. See
Setting Signal Monitor Options on page 290.
To monitor a video signal, select a resource in the Navigation pane that has a monitor icon
showing in the Monitor column. You should see the video signal change in your output
device, whether it is the Signal Monitor dialog box or an external monitor.
If the resource you selected has no monitored video and you have previously defined a
Color Black Signal in the Signal Monitor Options box, you will see the Color Black
Signal on the video output device.
The title of the Signal Monitor dialog box changes as the selected CCS device changes.
Note also that the second cell of the Signal Monitor dialog box’s Status Bar shows the
Device ID of the CCS device selected in the Navigation pane.
User Manual
The first cell of the Status Bar will show a “Ready” message if the video signal successfully
changes as you select resource icons in the Navigation pane. If an error occurs, the Status
Bar instead shows an “Error” message against a red background.
If you are using an external monitor, an Error box appears. Error messages may occur if you
lose a connection with the routing system.
Using the Signal Monitor Shortcut Menu

If you right-click inside the Signal Monitor dialog box, a shortcut menu appears.
The menu options and their functions are as follows:
Table 16-2 Commands on the Signal Monitor Shortcut Menu

Command Function
4×3 Resizes the dialog box to its default 4:3 aspect ratio
16 × 9 Resizes the dialog box to a 16:9 aspect ratio
Full Screen Makes the monitored video signal occupy the full
screen
To return the Signal Monitor dialog box to normal

screen size from full-screen mode, right-click
the mouse.
Configure Configures the video settings for the Signal Monitor
Video...
See Setting Video Properties for the Signal
Monitor on page 289 for more information
Find Device Finds the resource icon for CCS device you are
monitoring (highlights the device’s resource icon in the
Navigation pane)
Options... Opens the Signal Monitor Options box for revision
See Setting Signal Monitor Options on page 290 for

more information
Help Shows help topics for the Signal Monitor tool
Setting Video Properties for the Signal Monitor

To set the Signal Monitor’s video properties, complete these steps:
1 Right-click inside the Signal Monitor dialog box, and then select Configure Video from
290 Chapter 16
Figure 16-1 Configure Video Box

2 In the TV Tuner Card section of the screen, select a TV tuner card for signal monitoring.
3 In the Video Connector section of the Configure Video box, select the type of video
input used.
The usual choice is Composite. If you select Camera, check the S-Video box for “camera
with S-video,” and clear the box for “camera without S-video.”
4 In the Signal Standard section, select the standard of the video signal connected to the
PC.
5 In the Color section, move the slider controls left or right to set the brightness, contrast,
saturation, and hue of the video signal shown in the Signal Monitor dialog box, or click
Default at the bottom of the box to use the default settings.
6 Click OK to confirm the changes and close the box.
Setting Signal Monitor Options

To set the Signal Monitor options:
1 Click Signal Monitor on the Options menu, or right-click in an open Signal Monitor
dialog box and click Options....
User Manual
Figure 16-2 Signal Monitor Options Dialog Box

2 In the Video Output Selection section of the Signal Monitor Options box, select one of
these radio buttons:
Table 16-3 Video Output Options

Option Function
Disabled Disables signal monitoring
External Monitor Enables the signal monitor output to
show on an external monitor.
Signal Monitor Window Enables the signal monitor output to
show in the Signal Monitor dialog box
3 When you are using signal monitoring, you will set the User Router Settings.
To set the User Router Settings, click browse (...), select the router’s device ID from the
resulting Router Selection box, and then click OK.
If an alert box advises you that no routers are currently configured, click OK. Discover and
configure a router in build mode, and then return to this procedure.
4 Select a router output from the Router Destination list that corresponds to the PC or an
external monitor.
5 If you have a Color Black Signal connected to the router, select the corresponding
Defined check box, and then select a router source from the Router Source list.
6 If you have an Audio Mute Signal connected to the router, select the corresponding
Defined check box and select a router source from the Router Source list.
7 Under Tracking Options, select one of these options:
292 Chapter 16
Table 16-4 Tracking Options

Option Function
Signal changes as you The Video Output Selection tracks
select devices in the changes in the selection of resource
Navigation tool icons in the Navigation pane.
Signal does not change The Video Output Selection will not
as you select devices in track changes in the selection of
the Navigation tool resource icons in the Navigation
pane.
293
17 Device Control through HTTP
HTTP Device Control Overview
Figure 17-1 Web-Based Controls for DPS-575
information.
Magellan CCS Navigator can use HTTP to control any device that has a Web server
for control (e.g.,a DPS-575 digital processing synchronizer, Selenio frames, Magellan control
panels, and various video servers). Many of these products automatically open a default
browser when you click on their icon in the Navigation pane. Other, older devices may
require you to open a Web browser from within Magellan CCS Navigator to view
the device’s Web page.
Configuring an HTTP Server Node to Open a Web Browser

Only an Administrator user can complete this procedure. It cannot be done on a PC with a
NAVIGATOR-CLI license.
294 Chapter 17
Device Control through HTTP
To manually configure Magellan CCS Navigator to open a Web browser for an HTTP device
(a device with a Web server for control), follow these steps:
1 In Build mode, create a new HTTP server icon in the Navigation pane.
Figure 17-2 New Server Icon

2 Rename the server icon with the name of the device. See Deleting a Resource Icon on
page 101.
3 Open the Navigation Properties dialog box for that server icon. See Setting Navigation
Properties on page 103.
4 Select the HTTP tab.
5 Type the URL for the device in the URL box.
Figure 17-3 HTTP Tab of the Navigation Properties Box

6 Click Close.
See Controlling an HTTP Device on page 294 for control information.
Alternatively, you can use HTTP discovery to automatically identify all the HTTP servers in the
network and their associated HTTP URL addresses. (See CCS Device Discovery on page 75
for more information.) After discovering an HTTP device, its URL addresses will display in the
HTTP tab of the Navigation Properties box. Change this address at any time.
Controlling an HTTP Device

To open a Web browser Control window for an HTTP device, place Magellan CCS Navigator
in Control mode, and then double-click the HTTP server icon for the device that has a Web
server. Alternatively, you can right-click the icon and select Control from the resulting
shortcut menu.
See Configuring an HTTP Server Node to Open a Web Browser on page 293 for HTTP
server node configuration information.
295
A Troubleshooting
Suggested Troubleshooting Steps

Please follow these steps in troubleshooting problems:
1 Depending on your specific problem, there may be a solution. Check Common

Problems on page 295 and choose the area your problem falls under for options.
2 Search the CCS product manuals for troubleshooting suggestions. See Showing the User
Manual for a CCS Device on page 157.
Contact Imagine Communications Customer Service. See Getting Help from Customer
Service on page 321.
Common Problems are grouped by function. See the referenced heading and page for problems with
Problems these areas of Magellan CCS Navigator:
 Installation Problems on page 295

 Problems at Startup on page 299
 Configuration Problems on page 307
 Control Problems on page 316
 Alarm Problems on page 312
Installation Problems
If you are having problems with installation, please refer to the following topics:
 InstallShield Errors on page 296

 Magellan CCS Navigator Install Fails during Router Database Upgrade on
page 296
 Installation Exits without Finishing on page 296
 Installation Cannot Update Users Database on page 297
 Module Firmware Needs to be Upgraded on page 297
 SQL Server Re-installation Needs Authentication on page 298
 Windows Message Queuing Requests Installation CD on page 298
 Cannot Install Magellan CCS Navigator on Windows XP or Windows 2003 on
page 299
296 Chapter
InstallShield During installation, you may see one of the following messages:
Errors
 Setup has detected that uninstallshield is in use. Please
close uninstallshield and restart setup. Error 432
This error has two possible causes:
 The InstallShield un-installation file (IsUninst.exe) is either in use or corrupted.
 The currently active user account does not have administrative privileges on the PC.
Because InstallShield copies its uninstaller to the Winnt\System32 system directory,
the account used to install the software must have write access to this directory.
If you see this error message, ensure that no other InstallShield applications are
running, and that you have administrative privileges to the system. Then restart your
installation process.
 There is no disk in the drive. Please insert a disk into
drive D:.
This error is caused by InstallShield leaving temporary files on your system drive during a
previous install or uninstall.
If you see this error message, click Continue.
Magellan CCS Navigator Install Fails during Router Database Upgrade

During Magellan CCS Navigator installation, Sometimes the existence of a database lock file
prevents the upgrading of the router database from succeeding. To correct this situation,
follow these steps:
1 Search for RouterSys.ldb using Windows Explorer.

2 Delete any instances of this file that you find.
3 Restart the Magellan CCS Navigator installation.
You will have to restart the Magellan CCS Navigator installation from the beginning.
Installation Exits without Finishing

Consider these questions:
 Are you attempting to install Magellan CCS Navigator in a compressed drive?

Magellan CCS Navigator cannot be installed in a compressed drive. Choose an
uncompressed drive, and then attempt your installation again.
 Have you installed all the required third-party programs?
You must install all the required third-party programs before you can install Magellan
CCS Navigator.
 What error message shows when the installation program aborts?
After you remove the InstallShield Installation Information folder, programs that stored data
in this folder may not work correctly. Therefore, only remove the InstallShield Installation
Information folder if you have no other option to resolve the issue.
If the message says file _INS5576._MP is unavailable, you may need to remove the
InstallShield Installation Information folder. Follow these instructions:
a Click Start > Run.
b In the Run dialog box, type:
c:\program files
User Manual
c Click OK.
d In the Program Files dialog box, right-click InstallShield Installation Information,
and then click Cut.
e Close all dialog boxes, right-click anywhere on your desktop, and then click Paste.
See Required Operating System and Software on page 9 and Installing Other
Required Software on page 10.
Installation Cannot Update Users Database

The installation program will usually upgrade database files in the Users folder during a
software upgrade unless you have compressed the Users folder and its files. To enable the
installation program to upgrade this folder and its files, you must first decompress the
folder and repeat the installation program.
To decompress files in the Users folder, complete these steps:
1 Right-click Start and select Explore from the resulting shortcut menu.
This opens the Windows Explorer.
2 Find the Users folder in the All Folders list. The usual path to this folder is as follows:
c:\Program Files\Leitch\Magellan CCS Navigator\Users
3 Right-click the Users folder icon and select Properties from the resulting shortcut menu.
4 This shows the Users Properties box.
5 Find the Attributes section of the General tab and clear the Compress check box.
6 Click OK to close the Users Properties box and then close Windows Explorer.
Module Firmware Needs to be Upgraded

This version of the Magellan CCS Navigator software requires that you first upgrade your
NEO 3901 RES-E, LCP-3901-1U, RCP-CCS-1U and ICE6800+ products to version 3.0 or later
before installing Magellan CCS Navigator. See the following topics for more information:
 Upgrading NEO 3901RES-E, LCP-3901-1U, and RCP-CCS-1U to Version 3.0 or

Later on page 297
 Upgrading an ICE6800+ to version 3.0 or Later on page 298
Upgrading NEO 3901RES-E, LCP-3901-1U, and RCP-CCS-1U to

Version 3.0 or Later
procedure.
To upgrade NEO 3901RES-E, LCP-3901-1U, or RCP-CCS-1U to firmware version 3.0 or later,

follow these steps:
1 Begin a normal discovery procedure, following steps 1 - 3 of Running a Discovery on

page 85.
2 On the Add screen of the Discovery Options dialog box, instead of selecting X75, NEO,
6800+, CCS Control Panel, select Selenio, LCP-CCS-1U.
3 Complete your discovery and save the results.
298 Chapter
4 For each of the discovered NEO 3901RES-E, LCP-3901-1U, RCP-CCS-1U products, follow
the software upgrade procedure. See Upgrading Software on page 135 for more
information.
Upgrading an ICE6800+ to version 3.0 or Later

To upgrade your ICE6800+ module to firmware version 3.0 or later, follow these steps:
1 Download the latest version greater or equal to 3.0 of the ICE6800+ software from our
website.
2 Unpack the contents of the zip file in your C:\tmp directory.
3 From your Windows Start menu, select Run, and enter cmd to open a Command dialog
box.
4 Type C: (to make sure you are accessing files on your C: drive), and then type "CD \tmp"
followed by the command:
upall
and specify the IP address of your ICE6800+ module.
For example:
C:CD/tmp upall 172.24.128.50

(This will upgrade your ICE6800+ module at IP address 172.24.128.50.)
SQL Server Re-installation Needs Authentication

If installing the Server to a computer with a pre installed SQL Sever 2005 instance already
there, user needs to enable TCP/IP connections and SQL Server Authentication. To enable
TCP/IP remote connections, follow these steps:
1 From the Start menu, select All Programs > Microsoft SQL Server 2005 >
Configuration Tools > SQL Server Configuration Manager.
The SQL Server Configuration Manager opens.
2 In the left pane, expand SQL Server 2005 Network Configuration by clicking on the +
beside it.
3 Click on Protocols for SQLEXPRESS.
4 In the right pane, right click on TCP/IP and select Properties from the shortcut menu.
The TCP/IP Properties dialog box opens.
5 In the Protocol tab, select Yes to the right of Enabled.

6 In the IP Addresses tab, select Yes to the right of each Enabled option (there will be one
for each available IP).
7 Click OK to close the IP Addresses tab, and then close the SQL Server Configuration
Manager.
Windows Message Queuing Requests Installation CD

During installation, if the Windows Message Queuing component is required, it will usually
install automatically. There are few cases where the installation of this component will
require the user to insert the Windows OS CD to install this component.
User Manual
If you do not have a Windows OS CD available, cancel this installation and follow these
steps:
1 From the Start menu, select Settings > Control Panel.

2 Select Add or Remove Programs.
3 Click on Add/Remove Windows Components (this is in the button bar on the left of the
screen).
4 Click on Message Queuing in the list of components, and then click Details.
5 Place a check beside Common in the Message Queuing Subcomponents, and then click OK
to close each open dialog box in the Control Panel.
You can now restart the Magellan CCS Navigator install.
Cannot Install Magellan CCS Navigator on Windows XP or Windows 2003

ProcedureWindows XP

Service Pack 3, contact Customer Service.
ProcedureWindows 2003
If your PC is running the Windows 2003 operating system with Service Pack 2, before you
install Magellan CCS Navigator, you must remove MSXML6 sp2. To remove this file, use the
Add/Remove Programs tool.
To use Add/Remove Programs to prepare your PC for Magellan CCS Navigator installation,
follow these steps:
1 From the Start menu, choose Control Panel > Add or Remove Programs.
2 From the list that appears, choose MSXML6 SP2, and then click Remove.
3 When the process is finished, close the window.
You are now ready to install Magellan CCS Navigator.
Problems at Startup
If you are having problems with starting Magellan CCS Navigator, please refer to the
following topics:
 CCS Magellan CCS Navigator Fails to Start after Setup on page 300
 Frames Fail to Communicate with PC after Power Failure on page 300
 Frames Fail to Communicate with PC after Power Failure on page 300
 PC Running CCS Magellan CCS Navigator Operates Sluggishly on page 300
 Password Has Been Lost or Forgotten on page 302
 Password Does Not Work on page 303
 File Permissions Prevent Use of Magellan CCS Navigator on page 303
 File Share Handling From Magellan CCS Navigator Clients on page 303
 Managing Permissions on page 304
 PC Turned Off While ‘On Air’ on page 304
300 Chapter
 Online Help Hangs After User Selects ‘Properties’ on page 304

 "Windows Security Alert" Dialog Appears on page 304
 PC Work Space Settings Need to be Returned to Default on page 305
 Serial Connection Error at Startup on page 306
 Menus or Tools Not Available on page 306
 Clearing the Internet Explorer Cache Closes Magellan CCS Navigator on
page 307
CCS Magellan CCS Navigator Fails to Start after Setup

If CCS Magellan CCS Navigator fails to start after setup, take these actions:
1 Install all the third-party software that Magellan CCS Navigator requires for installation on
the PC operating platform.
2 Close all open programs and restart the operating system to fully register the software. See
Installing the CCS Magellan CCS Navigator Software on page 12.
Launch application actions are configured differently in the Navigation pane than in the
Graphical Navigation page. See Setting Properties for a ‘Launch Application’ Action on
page 75 of CCS RouterNAV: Router Specific Plug-in.
Magellan CCS Navigator Starts up with Build Mode Only

If your Magellan CCS Navigator install starts up with Build mode only, and you can run
discoveries but not switch to Control mode or open Control dialog boxes, this is because
your license has expired.
After the initial 30-day trial period, your Magellan CCS Navigator install reverts to a Build
mode only state, and you must purchase a Magellan CCS Navigator license in order to
continue to control devices using Magellan CCS Navigator. For more information on various
Magellan CCS Navigator license options, see Navigator Licenses on page 2. To add a
license, see Managing Magellan CCS Navigator Licenses on page 19.
Frames Fail to Communicate with PC after Power Failure

After a power failure, frames require sufficient time to recover and restore communication
with the PC.
To restore communications between the PC and the frames, ensure that the frames have
three or more minutes to recover from the power failure before you exit the application and
log back on.
PC Running CCS Magellan CCS Navigator Operates Sluggishly

Two Windows services can cause sluggish operation of CCS applications: E-mail services
and ODBC tracing services.
E-mail services can create slow memory leaks, leading to unusually large memory usage for
programs using e-mail services. If you notice that Magellan CCS Navigator is operating
sluggishly, use the Task Manager to check memory usage of the Magellan CCS
Navigator.exe process.
User Manual
If you suspect that E-mail services may be creating the sluggish system operation,
see Viewing the Size of the Magellan CCS Navigator.exe Process on page 301.
However, if you suspect that ODBC tracing services are on and causing the sluggish system
operation, see Turning Off ODBC Tracing on page 302.
Viewing the Size of the Magellan CCS Navigator.exe Process

To use the Task Manager to view the size of the Magellan CCS Navigator.exe process,
1 Press CTRL + ALT + DELETE.

This shows the Windows Security dialog box.
2 Click Task Manager....

3 Select the Processes tab.
4 Use the scroll bars to locate the Magellan CCS Navigator.exe image name on the list
of open applications.
5 Look at the value for the Magellan CCS Navigator.exe file in the Mem Usage column to see
how much memory the process is using.
6 Click Close.
Reducing the Size of the CCS Magellan CCS Navigator Process

If the Magellan CCS Navigator.exe process has grown to more than 200 MB, take one
or more of these actions to reduce the size of the process and speed up the software:
1 Restart Magellan CCS Navigator.

2 Turn off CCS e-mail notification of alarms. See Turning Off E-mail Alarm Notification on
page 301.
3 Shorten the e-mail alarm notification list. See Deleting Addresses from the Alarm
Notification List on page 301.
ProcedureTurning Off E-mail Alarm Notification

To turn off e-mail notification of alarms, complete these steps:
1 Point to Options on the menu bar and click Diagnostics....

2 Select the E-mail Forwarding Service tab in the Diagnostics Options box.
Figure A-1 Diagnostics Options Box, E-mail Forwarding Service Tab

3 Clear the E-mail Forwarding Service check box to disable the sending of e-mail
notifications of alarms.
ProcedureDeleting Addresses from the Alarm Notification List

To delete e-mail addresses from the alarm notification list, complete these steps:
302 Chapter
1 Point to Options on the menu bar and click Diagnostics....

2 Select the E-mail Forwarding Service tab in the Diagnostics Options box.
Figure A-2 Diagnostics Options Box, E-mail Forwarding Service Tab

3 In the E-mail Addresses of Recipients section, select the e-mail address of a recipient you
want to delete, and click Remove.
4 Repeat the last step to delete other e-mail recipients.
Turning Off ODBC Tracing

To turn off ODBC tracing, complete these steps:
1 Click Windows Start > Settings > Control Panel.

2 In the Control Panel dialog box, double-click Administrative Tools.
3 In the Administrative Tools dialog box, double-click Data Source (ODBC).
4 In the ODBC Data Source Administrator box, select the Tracing tab.
5 In the When to trace section, if the label on the left button reads “Stop Tracing Now,”
click the label so that it toggles to read “Start Tracing Now.”
You have now stopped ODBC tracing.
6 Click OK to close the ODBC Data Source Administrator box.
Password Has Been Lost or Forgotten

If you lose or forget the password, an Administrator user must reset it, using the following
procedure. Then you can change the password that the Administrator assigns to you. See
Changing a Password on page 34.
To change a lost or forgotten user password, complete these steps:
1 Click Options on the menu bar and select User Accounts.

2 Select the name of the user whose information you want to change.
3 Click Modify User.
This opens the User Account box for the selected user.
4 Type a new password into both the New and Confirm boxes of the Password section of
the User Account box.
Use the same combination of upper- and lower-case characters in both instances of the
password, since passwords are case-sensitive.
5 Click OK to close the User Account box and save the changes.
User Manual
Password Does Not Work

Unlike user names, passwords are case-sensitive. If you have both upper- and lower-case
letters in the password, ensure that you use the appropriate case for each character that
you type into the Password box on the Logon box.
File Permissions Prevent Use of Magellan CCS Navigator

When Magellan CCS Navigator is installed on a PC, the network or PC administrator must
set file permissions so that users have full access to the Magellan CCS Navigator
program files.
To set file permissions on the Magellan CCS Navigator folder:
1 Log on to the PC as the administrator.

2 Use the Windows Explorer to find the Program Files\Harris\Magellan CCS Navigator
folder.
3 Right-click the Magellan CCS Navigator folder, and then select Properties
4 Select the Security tab of the Properties box.
The Security tab has top and bottom panes. The top pane shows the list of available user
groups; and the bottom pane shows the list of Allow and Deny permissions.
5 Select the name of the group you want to change from the top list.
6 Select all check boxes in the Allow column in the bottom pane to enable the selected users
group to have full rights to the files.
7 Click the Advanced button. The Advanced Security Settings dialog box appears. Select
the Inherit from parent the permission entries that apply to child objects box. Click
OK to close the Advanced Security Settings dialog box.
8 Click OK to close the Properties box.
9 Log out of Windows, and then log back in as a user.
10 Start Magellan CCS Navigator.
File Share Handling From Magellan CCS Navigator Clients

Files need to be transferred, or shared, between Magellan CCS Navigator Server and
Magellan CCS Navigator Client. Magellan CCS Navigator Client installs must have access to
the Magellan CCS Navigator Server through File Sharing in order to retrieve Navigator
Pages, resource tree information, etc.
1 To determine if a Magellan CCS Navigator Client PC can contact the server, follow these
steps:
a From the Start menu choose Programs > Accessories > Command Prompt.
b Type
PING <IP address of the Magellan CCS Navigator Server>
If the connection fails, you have a network problem. Contact your systems administrator.
2 To determine if you have file sharing access to a specific Magellan CCS Navigator Server,
from the Start menu, select Run and enter \\<SERVERNAME>\HarrisCCSShare
If you are denied access, you do not have access to the server.
304 Chapter
3 Only an Administrator user on a Magellan CCS Navigator Server can turn on file sharing. To
turn Simple File Sharing on, follow these steps:
a Double-click My Computer on your PC desktop.
b On the main menu, select View > Folder Options.
c Click the View tab, and then select Use Simple File Sharing (Recommended).
4 (Windows Vista and Windows 7 only) From the Control Panel select the Network and
Sharing Center.
The following settings should be selected:
 Discovery ON
 File sharing ON
 Password protected sharing OFF
5 (Windows XP Only) To turn on File Sharing for the Magellan CCS Navigator Server’s
database folder, follow these steps:
a Double click on My Computer on your PC desktop.
b On the system drive where your Magellan CCS Navigator Server software is installed,
c The typical path is: C:\Documents and Settings\All
Users\Application Data\Harris\CCS\Files
d Right-click the Files folder icon and then select Properties from the resulting shortcut
menu.
e Ensure that Share this Folder is selected.
Managing In order to access devices, pages, and presets, each user on a Magellan CCS Navigator
Permissions Client must have been assigned permissions to do so. For information on assigning
permissions, see Assigning Access Rights on page 28. Only an Administrator user on a
Magellan CCS Navigator Server can change access permissions.
PC Turned Off While ‘On Air’

Turning off the PC running Magellan CCS Navigator during a broadcast will cause no
changes to the CCS devices on the network or their settings. When you restart the software
application, it will query the devices and update their status, including outstanding alarms.
Online Help Hangs After User Selects ‘Properties’

On some occasions, Online Help may hang or freeze after a user right-clicks on a Help topic
and selects Properties from the resulting shortcut menu. To unfreeze the Online Help,
right-click the Welcome to Magellan CCS Navigator Help icon on the Windows task
bar at bottom of the screen.
"Windows Security Alert" Dialog Appears

If you are running Windows XP Service Pack 3, you may encounter a dialog similar to the
following when you start Magellan CCS Navigator, or when you switch modes:
User Manual
Figure A-3 Windows Security Alert Dialog
Select the "Unblock" button. Selecting any other button may prevent Magellan CCS
Navigator from working properly.
You may also receive similar messages for the programs "btserver" and "Imagine
Communications Router Engine Service Module". In each case, select the "Unblock"
button.
Unblocking Magellan CCS Navigator

If the Windows Firewall is blocking Magellan CCS Navigator or any of the applications it
depends on (btserver and Router Engine Service), then some features may not work
properly. To unblock these applications:
1 Open the Control Panel (go to Start > Settings > Control Panel).
2 Double-click on Windows Firewall. Another dialog box appears.
3 On the General tab, ensure that the Don't allow exceptions checkbox is clear.
4 On the Exceptions tab, locate the application in the Programs and Services list.
5 Ensure the checkbox beside the application name is checked. If the program does not
appear in the list, click Add Program..., select the program from the list and click OK.
6 Click OK to dismiss all dialogs, then close the Control Panel.
For more information, consult your Windows XP documentation.
PC Work Space Settings Need to be Returned to Default

To return the work space settings for a CCS application to the original desktop settings,
1 Click Start, point to Programs (or All Programs for Windows XP), and click the MS-DOS
Command Prompt icon from the Programs menu.
This shows the MS-DOS Command Prompt dialog box.
306 Chapter
Figure A-4 MS-DOS Command Prompt Dialog Box

2 Change to the directory in which the Magellan CCS Navigator.exe file is installed. Use the
Microsoft Windows Find application to find the file.
Typically, you will type in the following command and then press ENTER:
cd Program Files\Leitch\Magellan CCS Navigator\bin

3 Type in the following command and press ENTER:
Magellan CCS Navigator /w default
The Magellan CCS Navigator login box appears. When you log on, the default work
space settings will be in effect.
Serial Connection Error at Startup

If your default router configuration uses a serial connection, during startup you may see an
error message informing you of this fact.
The error is for informational purposes only. When your default router configuration uses a
serial connection, COM 1 will not be available for other purposes.
Menus or Tools Not Available

There are two reasons why menu items or tools may not be present or available in your
Magellan CCS Navigator install.
 You do not have a license for the desired tool or option. See Managing Magellan CCS
Navigator Licenses on page 19 for information on purchasing and installing licenses.
Magellan CCS Navigator Client does not have a Build mode. Any feature that is described as
working in Build mode only will not work on a Magellan CCS Navigator Client.
 Magellan CCS Navigator is not in the correct state for accessing a specific menu item or
tool. Some tools, such as the Discovery pane, are only available in Build mode. Other
tools, such as the Diagnostics dialog box, are only available in Control mode. For
descriptions of the different modes of operation, see Setting the Operational
Mode on page 37
 The feature you are looking for is a Server option, and you are using Magellan CCS
Navigator Client, or it is a Client option, and you are using Magellan CCS Navigator
Server.
User Manual
Clearing the Internet Explorer Cache Closes Magellan CCS Navigator

When Internet Explorer 10’s cache is cleared and Navigator is open, regardless whether it is
in Build or Control Modes, Navigator closes. The cache needs to be cleared in various
circumstances, including upgrading IP3 Controller and upgrading Platinum SX Pro modules.
The RouterService must be manually stopped and restarted in order to fully restartMagellan
CCS Navigator.
To resolve the Internet Explorer bug that causes this problem, try the following:
1 Install any pending windows updates (Control panel -> Windows Updates).
2 Install a registry cleaner to clean your registry.
3 If that does not work, then re-install Windows entirely.
For best results, use Internet Explorer 9 or earlier, or close Magellan CCS Navigator prior to
clearing the Internet Explorer 10 cache.
Configuration Problems
User manuals for CCS devices include information on device configuration and are available
on the Documentation and Product Resources DVD and as part of the optional installation
components for Magellan CCS Navigator.
See these sections or topics:
 CCS Device Configuration on page 127

 Getting Version Information on page 152
 Showing the User Manual for a CCS Device on page 157
 NEO Frame Configuration on page 221
 LCP and RCP Configuration on page 227
For general troubleshooting tips during device configuration, see the following topics:
 Telnet Fails During Device Configuration on page 308

 Discovery Fails to Find a Device on page 308
 Magellan CCS Navigator Hangs While Discovering 6800+ Devices on page 308
 Magellan CCS Navigator Has Problems Discovering a 6800+ Frame on page 308
 Discovery Takes Too Long on page 309
 FTP Fails During Device Configuration on page 309
 Broadcast Communication Fails on page 310
 Broadcast Communication Fails on page 310
 Device Can’t Be Controlled or Has No Version Information on page 310
 IP Address Disappears from Icon Name on page 310
 Detection of a Lost Network Connection Takes Too Long on page 311
 Difficulty Configuring an NSM card on page 311
 Router Control Fails to Unlock/Unprotect Destinations on page 311
 Router Control Fails to Unlock/Unprotect Destinations on page 311
 Serial Port Conflict on page 311
 Folder Browser Dialogs Do Not Show Network Drives in Windows 8 on
page 312
308 Chapter
Telnet Fails During Device Configuration

Magellan CCS Navigator uses Telnet to send commands to a device during configuration
of the device. Only one user at a time can connect to a device using Telnet. Wait a few
minutes and try again.
Discovery Fails to Find a Device

Only an Administrator user on a Magellan CCS Navigator Server can discover devices.
 Have you correctly configured the IP addresses of the devices on the network?
Check the configurations for the IP addresses.
 Are both the PC and the devices connected to the same network?
Try pinging the IP address of the device to determine if it is connected to the network.
See Pinging the IP Address of a CCS Device on page 84.
 Is the PC on the same subnet as the device that you are attempting to discover?
If not, the network administrator must assign a default gateway to the IP settings for
the CCS devices and the PC running the discovery. Generally, devices should have IP
addresses that are all within a similar range; e.g. 192.168.100.250 and
192.168.100.245.
This is more likely to be a problem when a device is set to its default IP address, for
example when it is first installed. See Setting the IP Address of a PC on the Subnet
of a CCS Device on page 130
 Is the PC directly connected to a CCS device, such as the NEO frame?
If so, you will need an Ethernet crossover cable, hub, or switch between the PC and the
CCS device.
 Is the device an X75 or X75-RCP?
If you can ping the device IP address but can't discover it, try setting the discovery
option of this device to use point-to-point. See Setting Host IP Addresses for a
Magellan CCS Navigator Hangs While Discovering 6800+ Devices

Occasionally when logging in, Magellan CCS Navigator will hang while discovering 6800+
devices. This is caused by the previous instance of btsvr2.exe not being shutdown the last
time Magellan CCS Navigator exited.
To shut down the previous instance of btsvr2.exe, follow this procedure:
1 Start Task Manager by pressing CTRL-ALT-DEL on your keyboard.

2 Click on the Processes tab. If there are two instances of btsvr2.exe running, click on the
instance that displays a 0% CPU time in the CPU column and click End Process. Magellan
CCS Navigator will resume.
Magellan CCS Navigator Has Problems Discovering a 6800+ Frame

Occasionally after saving the results of a discovery of a 6800+ frame, the Navigation pane
will contain a single 6800+ server node with no frames and no modules, or some modules
in the frame will be missing from the discovery.
User Manual
There are two possible causes:
 A back module is defective

 A back module is not well-inserted and attached with screws to the frame
To determine which back module is causing the problem:
1 Check all back modules

 Make sure no pins are damaged.
 Ensure each back module is well inserted and attached with screws.
 Ensure that all modules are properly inserted.
A series of networked FR6802+ and FR6802+QXF frames can contain an ICE6800+

module, or a 6800+ETH module, but not both.
2 If that does not fix the problem, remove all modules and back modules. Only leave the
ICE6800+ module and its back module (or 6800+ETH) in the frame. (The ICE6800+ back
module also needs to be properly attached).
3 Discover the ICE6800+ or 6800+ETH module. In the case of an ICE6800+, ensure that it is
discovered in its proper slot. If it is not, try moving it to another slot (in case the frame slot is
damaged).
4 Reinsert the front and back modules into the frame one by one, doing a discovery after
each module is inserted, to find which front module, slot, or back module may be
damaged.
Discovery Takes Too Long

This problem occurs when the TCP/IP DNS Service Search Order list in the PC’s Network
settings includes invalid IP addresses.
To remove invalid IP addresses from the PC’s DNS Service Search Order list, complete these
steps:
1 Click Start, point to Settings, and then click Control Panel.

2 Click the Network icon in the Control Panel dialog box.
This opens the Network box, containing the network settings.
3 Select the Protocols tab in the Network box.

4 Select TCP/IP Protocol from the Network Protocols list, and then click Properties....
This opens the Microsoft TCP/IP Protocol box.
5 Select the DNS tab of the Microsoft TCP/IP Protocol box.

6 Select invalid IP addresses in the DNS Service Search Order list, and then click Remove.
7 Click OK to close the Microsoft TCP/IP Protocol box.
FTP Fails During Device Configuration

Magellan CCS Navigator software uses FTP to transfer software and device configurations.
Only four users can connect simultaneously to a device using FTP.
In addition, FTP failure could occur if another PC running the application has a Telnet
session open for the same device. In this case, the Log tab reports: “System is engaged.”
310 Chapter
In either case, wait a few minutes and try to start the FTP session again.
NUCLEUS Device Firmware Upgrade Fails

Magellan CCS Navigator 4.6.1 and NUCLEUS 2.1 software and firmware support hardware
with 16 MB or more of flash memory. If you attempt a firmware upgrade to NUCLEUS and
the upgrade fails, this could be due to a lack of flash memory space on NUCLEUS.
To determine the size of the flash memory, on the Options menu on the NUCLEUS control
panel, choose Version info. If the flash size is 8MB then the following can be done to do a
successful firmware upgrade:
 Reduce the number of configurations on Nucleus. (Take a backup to a USB Flash of the
configurations and MIB files and remove the configurations and MIB files from Nucleus
and then try the firmware upgrade).
 Replace your NUCLEUS control panel with a NUCLEUS control panel with a larger Flash
memory (recommended).
Broadcast Communication Fails

If broadcast communication fails, make sure the device and the PC have the same subnet
mask if the devices are on the same subnet.
Device Can’t Be Controlled or Has No Version Information

If you change the IP address on the computer, but do not restart Magellan CCS Navigator,
you may see the following problems:
 In the Version tab of the Configuration dialog box of a discovered device, all folders
are empty
 In Control mode, a discovered device keeps toggling between Network Available and
Inactive status
Solution:
After changing your PC’s IP address, restart Magellan CCS Navigator.
IP Address Disappears from Icon Name

The name or alternate name of a resource icon may include the resource’s IP address or
other information. However, all resource icons belonging to a control panel configuration
show their short name when they are in the Configuration folder. The short name matches
what the control panel can show on its display, a maximum of 20 characters.
However, you can change a resource’s default short name in the resource’s Navigation
Properties box so that the short name better identifies the resource—taking out spaces,
abbreviating words, or including only the last four digits of an IP address. See Deleting a
Resource Icon on page 101 and Setting Navigation Properties on page 103.
User Manual
Detection of a Lost Network Connection Takes Too Long

When a device becomes disconnected from the network, Magellan CCS Navigator may take
up to 45 seconds to detect the disconnection, even though the Connection Idle Time for
Keep Alive is set to 10,000 ms in the Communication Options settings.
The length of the delay reflects the type of network connection. CCS devices are connected
to the network through Ethernet devices, such as hubs, switches and routers.
While Magellan CCS Navigator only needs 15 seconds to detect a CCS device connection or
disconnection through a hub, it needs more time to detect a connection or disconnection
through a switch or router. This is a limitation of a normal LAN configuration.
However, you can configure a switcher or router for Fast Reacquire to improve on this
45-second delay. See also Setting Communication Options on page 59.
Difficulty Configuring an NSM card

Only an Administrator user on a Magellan CCS Navigator Server can configure routing
devices in Magellan CCS Navigator.
To configure an NSM card, you should configure it as another routing device. After
configuring the NSM card, you should import this into Magellan CCS Navigator. See
Volume 6: Routing Configuration for more information:
Router Control Fails to Unlock/Unprotect Destinations

A Router Control dialog box may fail to unlock or unprotect destinations that were locked
or protected by a router control panels (Multi-Bus, Single-Bus, and Matrix Panels).
When performing locking/protecting operations on destinations, Router Control dialog

boxes use the ID of the user currently logged onto the system, whereas the Router Control
Panels use the Panel Address defined when creating these panels. This ID is used to identify
the owner of the operation, which can only be undone by this same owner. By default, the
Panel Wizard uses the ID 127 (the Address field of the Panel Identifier group found in the
first screen of the wizard).
To resolve the issue, select the address of the panel that matches your user ID. Your user ID
is shown in the Login Options box, in the User Accounts tab (Menu Options -> User
Accounts...).
Serial Port The default routing configuration that is shipped within Magellan CCS Navigator is set to
Conflict use the COM1 port.
By running a Discovery on Magellan CCS Navigator, you may have this configuration added
into the Navigation pane. If you do not plan to use this configuration, you have two
options:
 Delete it from the Navigation pane.

OR
 Unselect Discover Routing System in the Discovery pane before running a discovery.
312 Chapter
The port is opened immediately after switching to control (activate) and it is not closed or
released until you remove it from the Navigation pane (deactivate). So, if you have this
configuration in the Navigation pane and when you try to use a SuiteView or Serial port
action in Magellan CCS Navigator, you will get a message stating that the port is busy
(unless you are using COM 2 for these actions).
If you have another routing system that is configured to use the same COM port, you will
get status as well as be able to control this routing configuration. Only one routing
configuration that uses a specific COM port can be activated at a time.
Validating Routing/CENTRIO Panels After Upgrading

If you create a database with invalid routing/CENTRIO panels in an older version of
Magellan CCS Navigator, and then upgrade to a newer version, the panels remain invalid
after the upgrade. To automatically validate the panels after the upgrade, follow these
steps:
1 Double-click on a Routing View node .

2 Close the router configuration window without making any changes.
An “Automatically Validating Panels” progress bar appears. When it is complete, the panels
are automatically validated.
Folder Browser Dialogs Do Not Show Network Drives in Windows 8

In Windows 8, network drives do not display in folder browser dialogs. When restoring
content such as router databases, first copy them to a drive local to the computer running
Alarm Problems
information.
If you are having problems with alarms, please refer to the following topics:
 Alarms Behave Differently on Card Edge than in Magellan CCS Navigator on

page 313
 Disabled Alarm Remains Listed in Diagnostics Dialog Box on page 313
 Alarm Query Fails When a Device Reboots on page 313
 Module Alarm is Difficult to Identify in Control Dialog Box on page 313
 Card Slot View Fails to Report Card Alarms on page 313
 Diagnostics Dialog Box Fails to List Alarms for SNMP Traps on page 314
 SNMP MIB Load Errors Appear on page 314
User Manual
Alarms Behave Differently on Card Edge than in Magellan CCS Navigator

The local alarm enable/disable feature on NEO modules has no relationship to the remote
alarm enable/disable feature in Magellan CCS Navigator. The NEO enable/disable alarms
feature affects only the local reporting of alarms on the NEO card edge, while this enable/
disable alarms feature affects only the remote reporting of alarms to Magellan CCS
Navigator.
Disabled Alarm Remains Listed in Diagnostics Dialog Box

When an alarm is disabled in a Control dialog box, the device will stop sending information
for that particular alarm to all installations of Magellan CCS Navigator on the CCS network.
However, disabling an alarm in a Control dialog box does not remove the alarm from the
alarm lists on the Monitor and Selected tabs of the Diagnostics dialog box. To remove
the alarm from the Monitor and Selected tabs, you must acknowledge the alarm, using
the shortcut menu for the Diagnostics dialog box. See Ignoring Alarms on page 244.
Alarm Query Fails When a Device Reboots

When you reboot a device connected to several PCs running Magellan CCS Navigator,
the alarm traffic hitting the network may cause an alarm query request to time out and fail.
While the query does not automatically retry, it will post an “Alarm query failed” message
to the Diagnostics dialog box.
To clear an “Alarm query failed” message, right-click inside the Diagnostics dialog box and
select Refresh from the resulting context menu.
Module Alarm is Difficult to Identify in Control Dialog Box

To open the Generic Control dialog box and determine the nature of an alarm entry:
1 Double-click the alarm entry in the Diagnostic dialog box.

This action highlights the device alarm in the Navigation pane and opens the Control
dialog box.
2 Right-click in the Control dialog box, and then select Generic Control from the shortcut
menu.
The Generic Control dialog box opens.
3 Return to the alarm entry in the Diagnostic dialog box, scroll through the entry, and locate
the parameter name in the corresponding column.
4 Return to the Generic Control dialog box, and then click All Categories from the
Parameter Classification section of the dialog box.
5 In the parameter-control section on the right side of the dialog box, look for the parameter
name identified previously in the Diagnostic dialog box (step 3).
This is the specific parameter generating an alarm.
Card Slot View Fails to Report Card Alarms

Card alarms for a module slot do not appear in a Frame Control dialog box unless you build
the hierarchy in the Navigation pane with the modules as children of the frame in which
they reside.
314 Chapter
Diagnostics Dialog Box Fails to List Alarms for SNMP Traps

When the Diagnostics dialog box fails to list alarms for SNMP traps, check the following:
1 Ensure that a server icon for the SNMP device appears in either the Network or Discovery
folder.
2 Create a server icon for the SNMP device if there is no server icon, and name it for the
SNMP device. See Using the Create Tool to Add a Resource Icon on page 99 and
Deleting a Resource Icon on page 101.
3 Set or check the navigation properties of the SNMP server icon. See Setting Navigation
Properties for an SNMP Server on page 111.
Figure A-5 Navigation Properties Box for an SNMP Device

4 Select the Device tab and ensure that the first field of the Device ID is set to IP and the
second field is set to the device’s IP Address. Other fields of the Device ID should be blank.
5 Verify that the monitored SNMP device has been properly configured to send SNMP traps to
the IP address of the PC running the application.
6 Verify that the Windows SNMP and SNMP Trap services are not running on your PC, then
run net stop snmptrap and net stop snmp in a Command Prompt dialog box
and restart Magellan CCS Navigator.
SNMP MIB For the procedure for loading SNMP files into Magellan CCS Navigator, see Setting
Load Errors Communication Options on page 59. Errors may occur as MIB files attempt to load. To
view MIB file load errors, click View Log. This will load the last SNMP log file in Notepad,
Appear which will show any errors. Read the log file carefully.
User Manual
When you review your SNMP MIB log file, you may get an error message. The table below
describes potential error messages and the causes.
Table A-1 SNMP Error Messages

Error Message Cause
The mib description doesn’t seem  Some nodes not properly defined in the MIB file
to be consistent.  One or more referenced MIB files are missing
Some nodes couldn’t be linked
 MIB file not saved with line breaks
under the “iso” tree.
Line xx: Unknown label - label: Syntax error in the specified line of the MIB file
videoMode bla
(xx represents the line number
of the MIB file)
Defining Nodes Correctly in an SNMP MIB File

Make sure that the nodes specified in the error message as not being able to be linked
under the iso tree are properly defined in the MIB. Do this by checking that each node, and
its parent, have the following clauses:
 OBJECT-TYPE
 SYNTAX
 ACCESS
 STATUS
 DESCRIPTION
Correct any errors that you find in these descriptions of the MIB, and then try loading the
file again.
Checking for Missing MIB Files

If files are missing, look at the IMPORT section of the MIB files you are trying to load, if there
is one. Make sure that you are also loading the MIB files that are being referred to in that
section.
Adding Line Breaks to MIB Files

If your file was saved without line breaks, follow these steps:
1 Open your ASCII file in Microsoft Word.

2 From the File menu select Save As, and then select the Text Only with Line Breaks
option.
This converts the file into a Windows text file.
3 Copy the .txt file(s) to the directory

C:\Program Files\Leitch\Magellan CCS Navigator\mib.
4 Start Magellan CCS Navigator, and then select SNMP from the Options menu.
5 In the SNMP Options dialog box, click the Add button.
6 Select your .txt filename from the list, and then click Open.
7 In the SNMP Options dialog box, click OK.
The file should now load properly.
316 Chapter
Correcting SNMP MIB File Syntax Errors

To find and correct any syntax errors in the SNMP MIB file that you loaded, follow these
steps:
1 Find the line that was specified as having an error.

2 Look for syntax errors on that line, and correct any errors that you find.
3 Try loading the file again.
Network is Overloaded With Duplicate SNMP Traps

When devices in an network are configured to send and receive traps, and a device receives
the traps it originated, it will send them on. This can create an excess of network traffic.
Do not configure your SNMP agent settings such that the traps for a device wind up being
returned to that device, whether directly or through a chain of forwarding devices.
SNMP Traps Do Not Appear to be Received

Due to a limitation in NET SNMP, the Agent Address (Agent IP) field in a SNMPv1 trap is
always filled with the IP of the system on the default or primary network adapter instead of
the adapter the trap was broadcast on. If the SNMP agent has more than one network IP
adapter, receiving devices may not recognize the traps that are sent.
To resolve this issue, there are two options:
 Change the primary network card on the SNMP agent

 Configure the device listening for SNMP traps to receive them from the primary IP
address of the sending device
Alarms Not Appearing Correctly in Japanese or Chinese Language Interface

When Magellan CCS Navigator is the recipient of forwarded alarms or traps containing
Unicode text description, you need to configure Windows Regional and Languages
Options (in the Control Panel settings) for the alarm listening PC, in order to display
Unicode text properly. Select the corresponding language in the Language for
non-Unicode programs setting.
Control Problems
information.
If you are having problems with controlling an item in your Magellan CCS Navigator system,
please refer to the following topics:
 Magellan CCS Navigator Cannot Control a Module in the Navigation Pane on

page 317
User Manual
 No Alarms, Status, or Changes in Parameter Values Reported for an X75

Device on page 317
 Device Status is Not Reported for X75 or X75-RCP Devices on page 317
 Navigation Tool Won’t ‘Undo’ or ‘Redo’ a Preset Load on page 318
 Problems With Presets in QSEE6800+ Modules on page 318
 Device Status Column Reports No Status or ‘Not Ready’ on page 318
 Frame Control Dialog Box Shows Error or Warning for Slot on page 319
 ‘Unable to Open a New Control Window’ Message Appears on page 319
 No Video Shows in the Signal Monitor Dialog Box on page 319
 Unable to get Streaming Video in Navigator Page or Device Control Dialog
Box on page 320
Magellan CCS Navigator Cannot Control a Module in the Navigation Pane

 Did you physically configure the module for local control?

If so, then you must instead configure the device for remote control.
 Is the module properly seated in the frame?
Check the positioning of the module in its slot in the frame.
 Does the status bar on the resource control window indicate that the device is ready?
The device may be powered off or disconnected from the network.
 Do you have access rights to control the module and its parameters?
Contact the network administrator or an Administrator user to obtain permission to
control the module. See Checking the Access Rights for a CCS Device on page 268.
No Alarms, Status, or Changes in Parameter Values Reported for an X75

Device
The Mute Device option must be set to No for an X75 device to report any alarm, status,
or parameter value changes. To set an X75’s Mute Device option, follow this procedure:
1 Make sure you are in control mode.

2 Right click on the X75 device in the Navigation pane, and then choose Configuration.
The X75 Configuration dialog box appears.
3 On the Device tab, make sure that Mute Device is set to No.
When Mute Device is set to No, the device asynchronously reports any changes in terms of
alarms, status, or parameter value changes.
Device Status is Not Reported for X75 or X75-RCP Devices

The Keep Alive setting must be checked in order for an X75 or X75-RCP device to report
device status. To set the Keep Alive check box, follow this procedure:
1 Make sure you are in Control mode.

2 Right click on the X75 device in the Navigation pane, and then choose Configuration.
The X75 Configuration dialog box appears.
318 Chapter
3 On the Device tab, make sure that Keep Alive is checked.

When Keep Alive is checked, the application will be able to report device status such as
Active or Inactive.
Navigation Tool Won’t ‘Undo’ or ‘Redo’ a Preset Load

By default, the Navigation tool’s ability to undo or redo the loading of presets is disabled.
This allows the Navigation tool to load presets more quickly. However, you can re-activate
this feature in the Navigation Options box.
To enable the Navigation tool to undo or redo the loading of presets, complete these
steps:
1 Point to Options on the menu bar and select Navigation from the menu.
The Navigation Options box appears.
2 In the Preset Options section of the General tab, select the Allow undo/redo of Load
Preset in Control mode check box.
You can only load presets in Control mode.
Problems With Presets in QSEE6800+ Modules

Due to the number of parameters and alarms on QSEE6800+ modules, you can only save or
load one QSEE6800+ preset at a time. You cannot create presets that contain a QSEE6800+
module in combination with any other modules.
The time to complete a “Load Preset” operation for QSEE6800+ modules will vary
according to the number of modules present in the frame. If you have problems loading or
saving a QSEE6800+ preset, set the QSEE6800+ module’s Audio Average Level
Reporting parameter to Disable.
Device Status Column Reports No Status or ‘Not Ready’

If the Device Status column in the Navigation pane fails to report a device’s network
status or reports a “Not Ready” status, ensure the the following conditions are met:
 Magellan CCS Navigator must be in Control mode. If it is not, change to Control mode.
Magellan CCS Navigator can only detect the status of device connections in Control
mode.
 All resource modules must be properly seated in their frames. Check the position and
seating of the resource modules in the frame.
 The frame must be connected to the network. Check the device’s network connection
by “pinging” the assigned IP address. See Pinging the IP Address of a CCS
Device on page 84.
If the Device Status column still reports no status or “Not Ready” for the device, try
restarting Magellan CCS Navigator. See also Setting Navigation Options on page 120.
Checking the Connection Status of a Device

Magellan CCS Navigator reports each device’s connection status in two ways:
 The bottom of a device’s Control dialog box shows operational status messages.
User Manual
 In Control mode, the Navigation pane has an optional column that shows status
messages for each CCS device.
To show the column, set the Navigation options to show device status. See Setting
Navigation Options on page 120.
Frame Control Dialog Box Shows Error or Warning for Slot

The Control dialog box for a frame shows its slots and what resource modules each
contains. Each slot shows the color of its most critical outstanding alarm.
To check an alarm for a slot, select the part of the frame’s Control dialog box that
represents the slot and then select the Selected tab of the Diagnostics dialog box. The
Selected tab lists all outstanding alarms for that slot.
‘Unable to Open a New Control Window’ Message Appears

Close one or more of the open Control dialog boxes and then try reopening the new
Control dialog box. Magellan CCS Navigator’s limit on open Control dialog boxes does not
affect the number of devices that Magellan CCS Navigator can discover or monitor.
No Video Shows in the Signal Monitor Dialog Box

If no video shows in the Signal Monitor dialog box, complete these steps:
1 Ensure that an icon for the routing system shows in either the Network or Discovery
folder.
If it doesn’t, discover the routing system. See Volume 6: Routing Configuration.
2 In Build mode, configure the routing system. See Volume 6: Routing Configuration.
3 Select the routing view you want to monitor by clicking the Browse button. Compare the
Router Device ID setting that appears in the Signal Monitor Options box with the Device
ID of the discovered router view in the device’s Navigation Properties box.
Figure A-6 Matched device Instance IDs

320 Chapter
4 Ensure that you have selected a router destination in the Signal Monitor Options box that
matches the video connection between the router device or router module and the PC.
5 In Control mode, open the Control dialog box for the routing view.
6 In the Control dialog box, perform a take from a valid source to the router destination set
in the Signal Monitor Options box. See Volume 6: Routing Configuration.
If you get no video, check all video cabling from the device to the PC.
7 Right-click inside the device’s Signal Monitor dialog box, and select Configure Video...
Ensure that you have selected the correct composite video connector (usually composite
video). See Setting Video Properties for the Signal Monitor on page 289.
8 If all else fails, reinstall the video card/drivers. See Requirements for Using the Signal
Monitor Tool on page 12.
Unable to get Streaming Video in Navigator Page or Device Control Dialog

Box
If streaming video is missing in either in a Thumbnail dialog box or in an MPEG4 streaming
dialog box, check the following configuration items:
 Streaming device stream server IP setting

While in Control mode, open the streaming device’s Control dialog box. In the control
parameter list, ensure that the Streaming IP, Subnet Mask, and Gateway parameters
are set to the same subnet as the Magellan CCS Navigator PC.
 Streaming dialog box property setting
If a streaming dialog box is configured in a Navigator page, make sure IP Address of
Target Server is set to the streaming device stream server IP.
Getting Help With Magellan CCS Navigator

There are many ways to access the Help files for CCS Magellan CCS Navigator.
 To get help with most tools, dialog boxes, and menus, you can right-click on the object
that is giving you trouble and then select Help from the resulting context menu.
 Click inside the portion of the Magellan CCS Navigator interface that interests you and
then press F1 on the PC keyboard.
 Click on Help in the main menu.
 Some dialog boxes, including the Property dialog box, have a button to access help.
Click the Context-Sensitive Help icon to open the Help file to a relevant topic.
Figure A-7 Context-Sensitive Help Icon

User Manual
The Help menu offers access to information needed to operate the software efficiently and
to learn or review common tasks. The Help menu commands are as follows:
Table A-2 Help Menu Commands

Command Purpose
Contents To show the contents of a book (or chapter) on the Contents tab,
click the plus (+) sign to the left of the Book icon.
This expands the Contents tree and shows the list of topics contained
in the chapter. If there is a minus (-) sign to the left of the Book icon,
the book is open. If there is no sign by the Book icon, the book is
empty.
To show a Help topic in the Help Topic Viewer, found to the right
of the Contents frame, click the Help Topic icon (a page
with a question mark on it) to the left of the topic title.
Index Type a keyword into the Type in keyword to find box at the top
of the frame and click Display, and any topics containing that
keyword will show in a Topics Found box
Search Type a keyword into the Type in keyword to find box at the top
of the frame, and then click List topics; any topics containing that
keyword will show in the Select Topic to display box; to select a
topic to show, click its title and then click Display; the selected topic
shows in the Online Help Topic Viewer frame on the right side
of the Help dialog box
Imagine If the PC has an Internet connection, select this option to move quickly
Communications to our website
on the Web
About Magellan Select this option to view the Magellan CCS Navigator software
CCS Navigator version number and copyright dates
Getting Help from Customer Service

We are committed to providing round-the-clock, 24-hour service to our customers around
the world. Contact our website or the Customer Service team
Table A-3 Customer Service

Phone Toll Free: 1-888-LEITCH6 (534-8246)
Fax: 1-416-445-9020
E-mail: BCDService@imaginecommunications.com
Expediting a Software Solution

If you have a software problem, capture a screen image that illustrates the problem, if
possible, and save that image as a 16-color bitmap. Send that image to Customer Service
with a summary of what you were attempting to do when the problem occurred. This may
help our customer service staff determine the exact nature of the difficulty.
Capturing a Screen Image and Saving It as a Bitmap File

To capture a screen image and save it as a bitmap file, complete these steps:
322 Chapter
1 Press PRINT SCRN on the keyboard when the application is running and the problem is
occurring. This will capture the entire computer screen.
Or click in the interface, and press ALT+PRINT SCRN. This will capture only the active dialog
box.
2 Click Start, point to Programs (or All Programs for Windows XP), select Accessories, and
then click Paint.
This opens the Windows Paint program.
3 Select Paste from the Edit menu in the Paint application. The screen capture opens as a
graphic image.
4 Select Save As from the File menu and save the captured image as a 16-color bitmap
(BMP) file.
5 E-mail or fax the captured image to the Leitch service center with a description of the
hardware and software configuration and a summary of what you were attempting to do
when the problem occurred.
323
B Frequently Asked Questions
What are the CCS Magellan CCS Navigator Licensing Options?

When CCS Magellan CCS Navigator is installed, its 30-day free license has all options
enabled. When this license expires, you can purchase just the options you need. To review
the licenses currently installed on your Magellan CCS Navigator system, see Viewing Your
License Key on page 20.
License options for Magellan CCS Navigator are described in Navigator Licenses on
page 2.
Can I use CCS Software to Configure my Devices?

Yes. See these topics:
 CCS Device Configuration on page 127

 Volume 6: Routing Configuration
 NUCLEUS Configuration on page 161
 NEO Frame Configuration on page 221
 LCP and RCP Configuration on page 227
Can I use Magellan CCS Navigator to Build a Graphical Network Model?

Yes. Even without any optional licenses, an Administrator user of a Magellan CCS Navigator
Server can build a graphical hierarchical model of all CCS devices on the broadcast network.
This model can also include non-CCS devices to which CCS has communication gateways.
See Network View Construction on page 93.
What is the Navigation Pane?

The Navigation pane is the interface to the Navigation tool. This pane contains the
resource tree. Administrator users on a Magellan CCS Navigator Server use the Navigation
tool to customize the hierarchical resource tree, a representation of the CCS network, using
resource icons presenting the devices and their environments.
324 Chapter
What is Graphical Navigation?

The NAVIGATOR-SRV license contains tools to create custom graphical pages that represent
your network and its various environments around the world. You can associate objects on
these pages with network events, user-defined actions, and other pages. You can
consolidate, simplify, and centralize the status monitoring of the network's many devices
and environments on a few easy-to-use and -understand pages. This can lead to more
efficient and economical operation of your network.
Magellan CCS Navigator comes with a collection of buttons, symbols, and images,
for creating the custom graphical pages. However, you can also import a business logo,
map, engineering drawings, or other image files in *.bmp or *.jpg format for use in
creating your custom graphical pages.
Magellan CCS Navigator Clients, which require a Magellan CCS Navigator Server on the
network, can control and monitor Graphical Navigation pages and devices to which they
have been granted access.
What is the Graphical Navigation Window?

A Graphical Navigation window is the interface to the Graphical Navigation tool. In
Build mode, you will use the Graphical Navigation tool to create custom graphical pages
that represent your network and its various environments in the Graphical Navigation
window. In Control mode, these pages enable you to monitor network events across the
various network environments and implement user-defined actions affecting them.
What is a Magellan CCS Navigator Page?

A Magellan CCS Navigator page is a document containing graphics that represent
a network environment. The page, which can be saved as a file with the extension *.nav,
uses the following objects to represent network devices and their environment: symbols,
images, buttons, links, and text. All these objects can be clicked, have shortcut menus, and
can have user-defined actions associated with them.
You can associate two pages together by associating a “load page” action with an object
on one of the pages. The user-defined action identifies the other page as the target page to
load.
Can I Create my Own Magellan CCS Navigator Pages?

Creating and using Graphical Navigation pages is described in depth in Magellan CCS
Navigator CCS RouterNAV: Router Specific Plug-in. Administrator users of Magellan CCS
Navigator Servers can create pages.
What are Magellan CCS Navigator Actions?

Magellan CCS Navigator actions are activities that occur when defined events and
conditions happen. Administrator users of Magellan CCS Navigator Servers can define these
actions, events, and conditions as rules for Magellan CCS Navigator objects and pages. See
Rules for Magellan CCS Navigator Pages and Objects on page 59.
User Manual
Can CCS Magellan CCS Navigator Monitor the Overall Status of

Network Devices?
Yes. With a NAVIGATOR-CLI, NAVIGATOR-DEV, NAVIGATOR-SNMP, or NAVIGATOR-SRV
license, CCS Magellan CCS Navigator can report the overall status of the devices
on the network.
Can CCS Magellan CCS Navigator Monitor Network Device Environments?

Yes, CCS Magellan CCS Navigator can report on network device environments, whether
they are beside the PC, in the next room, or on the other side of the world. You can create
summary pages to which a number of alarms will bubble up, so you can consolidate the
status monitoring of the network on just one or a few summary pages.
Can CCS Magellan CCS Navigator Perform Router Operations?

With NAVIGATOR-CLI, NAVIGATOR-RTR, and NAVIGATOR-SRV licenses, Magellan CCS
Navigator can perform many router operations, including the following:
Table B-1 Router-Specific Actions Available

Action Function
Clear Selected Salvo Clears the current salvo selection
Clear Selected Clears the current router selection
Execute Salvo Sets up and immediately takes a router salvo
Execute Selected Salvo Performs a router salvo
Lock Selected Locks the selected router destination
Destination
Protect Selected Protects the selected router destination
Destination
Query Destination Queries the status of the router destination
Status
Query Signal Presence Queries the signal presence status
Status
Restrict Crosspoint Sets up and prevents a particular source and
destination from being taken
Restrict Selected Prevents a selected source and destination
Crosspoint from being taken
Select Destination Presets the desired destination in preparation
for a Take command
Select Salvo Presets the desired salvo in preparation for
Execute Selected Salvo command
Select Source Presets the desired source in preparation
for a Take command
326 Chapter
Table B-1 Router-Specific Actions Available (Continued)

Action Function
Set Crosspoint Match Sets the matching algorithm type used by the
Type On Crosspoint Status event
Swap Destinations Swaps the crosspoints of two specified
destinations
Take Crosspoint Sets up and immediately takes a router
crosspoint
Take Selected Takes the selected router source and
destination
For more information on router events and actions, see Router Rule Creation on page 89 of
CCS RouterNAV: Router Specific Plug-in.
Can I Keep the Application Always on Top?

Due to how the Windows operating system handles window positioning, using the Always
On Top feature does not guarantee that this application’s interface will always be on top.
Some other Windows applications with the Always On Top feature selected may take
precedence.
By selecting the Always On Top menu entry of the Window menu, the Magellan CCS
Navigator application interface is always on top of other applications. When this option is
set, if you start another application within or outside of the application, the new application
will appear below the current application. To have Magellan CCS Navigator always appear
on top, in the Window menu select Always On Top.
Figure B-1 The Always On Top Menu Entry
Can I Select Multiple Check Boxes at Once?

Sometimes columned grids have multiple check boxes that you are required to select or
clear. You can use common Windows methods for selecting multiple adjacent or
nonadjacent check boxes, and then select or clear them simultaneously.
User Manual
Figure B-2 Sample Grid with Multiple Check Boxes
1 To select multiple rows, complete one of these steps:

 To select multiple adjacent rows, press and hold SHIFT on your keyboard, and then
click the first and last row within the column you want to select.
 To select multiple nonadjacent rows, press and hold CTRL on your keyboard, and
then click each row within the column you want to select.
2 To select or clear the highlighted check boxes simultaneously, press the SPACEBAR on your
keyboard.
328 Chapter
329
C Copyright, Trademark, and

Warranty Information
Copyrights Copyright 2003-2014, Imagine Communications. All rights reserved.
Portions © 1981-1999, Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved.
Portions © 1994-1996, QLogic Corporation. All rights reserved.
Portions © 2004-2007 Amino Communications Ltd. All rights reserved.
Portions © 1989, 1991, 1992, 1998 Carnegie Mellon University. All rights reserved.
Derivative Work - 1996, 1998-2000 Portions © 1996, 1998-2000 The Regents of the
University of California. All Rights Reserved
Portions © 2001-2003, Networks Associates Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
Portions © 2001-2003, Cambridge Broadband Ltd. All rights reserved.
Portions © 2003 Sun Microsystems, Inc., 4150 Network Circle, Santa Clara, California
95054, U.S.A. All rights reserved.
Portions © 2003-2008, Sparta, Inc. All rights reserved.
Portions © 2004, Cisco, Inc and Information Network. All rights reserved.
Trademarks
CCS, CCS CoPilot, Magellan CCS Navigator, CCS Pilot, Command Control System,
CineTone, CinePhase, CineSound, DigiBus, DigiPeek, Digital Glue, DigiWorks, DTV Glue,
EventWORKS, EZ HD, Genesis, HDTV Glue, Icon, Iconlogo, IconMaster, IconMaster Nav,
IconSet, IconStation, Image Q, Inca, Inca Station, InfoCaster, Inscriber, Inscriber CG—FX,
Integrator, LeFont, Leitch, LogoMotion, MediaFile, MIX BOX, NEO, the NEO design,
330 Appendix C
<$paratextAppTitle]
NEOSCOPE, NewsFlash, Nexio, Opus, Panacea, PanelMAPPER, Platinum, Portal, PROM-Slide,

RouterMAPPER, RouterWORKS, Signal Quality Manager, SpyderWeb, SuiteView,
TitleMotion, UNIFRAME, Velocity, VelocityHD, VideoCarte, Videotek, and X75 are
trademarks of Imagine Communications, which may be registered in the United States,
Canada, and/or other countries.
Adobe, Acrobat and Reader are registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems
Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.
Microsoft, Windows, Windows 2000, Windows NT, Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows
7, Windows, ODBC, and Visual FoxPro are trademarks and/or registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
Software User License and Warranty Agreement

Carefully read all of the terms and conditions of this license agreement before using
Magellan CCS Navigator, CCS Pilot, or CCS CoPilot. By using this software, you indicate
your complete and unconditional acceptance of these terms and conditions.
This document constitutes a legal agreement between you and Imagine Communications,
concerning the use of CCS Navigator, CCS Pilot, or CCS CoPilot. This agreement constitutes
the complete agreement between you and Imagine Communications.
License Imagine Communications grants the licensee a non-exclusive license to use the software
in this package on one server or workstation in a single network installation, which
installation shall consist of no more than 1,000 servers or workstations. A network is
defined as any continuously connected group of computers on one cabling scheme without
software or hardware bridges.
You may make up to two copies of the software for backup purposes only. Imagine
Communications retains title to and ownership of this copy and all backup copies and all
proprietary rights related to the software and the accompanying manuals. You may not
copy any part of the accompanying manuals, copy the software except as permitted above,
make alterations or modifications to the software, or attempt to decompile or discover the
source code of the software.
The software may not be transferred, sublicensed, rented or leased. Both the license and
your right to use the software terminate automatically if you violate any part of this
agreement. In the event of termination, you must immediately destroy all copies
of the software or return them to Imagine Communications.
Limited If you discover physical defects in the media on which the software is distributed or in the
Software accompanying manuals, Imagine Communications will replace the media or manuals for a
period of ninety (90) days after purchase by you. You must return the disk or manuals to
Warranty Imagine Communications, prepaid, within the warranty period, accompanied by proof of
purchase.
User Manual
This warranty does not apply to defects due directly or indirectly to misuse, abuse,
negligence, accident, repairs, or alterations made by the customer or another party or if the
serial number has been removed or defaced.
Imagine Communications disclaims all implied warranties, including without limitation

warranties of merchantability, performance, and fitness for a particular purpose. Imagine
Communications will not be liable for any bug, error, omission, defect, deficiency, or
nonconformity in any software. As a result, the software is sold “as is,” and the purchaser
assumes the entire risk as to its suitability, quality and performance.
Limitation of Liability
Imagine Communications shall in no event be liable for direct, indirect, special, incidental,
contingent, or consequential damages resulting from any defect in the software or its
documentation, including damages from loss of data, downtime, goodwill, damage to or
replacement of equipment or property, and any costs of recovering, reprogramming, or
reproducing any program or data used in conjunction with Imagine Communications
products, even if Imagine Communications has been advised of the possibility
of such damages.
You agree that Imagine Communications liability, arising out of contract, negligence, strict
liability in tort or written or oral information or advice given by Imagine Communications
employees, dealers, or agents will in no way increase the scope of this warranty. Nor may
you rely on any such written or oral communication.
The laws of the Province of Ontario, Canada, shall govern this agreement.
NET SNMP Various copyrights apply to this package, listed in various separate parts below. Please
License make sure that you read all the parts.
---- Part 1: CMU/UCD copyright notice: (BSD like) -----
Copyright 1989, 1991, 1992 by Carnegie Mellon University
Derivative Work - 1996, 1998-2000
Copyright 1996, 1998-2000 The Regents of the University of California
All Rights Reserved
Permission to use, copy, modify and distribute this software and its documentation for any
purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice
appears in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear
in supporting documentation, and that the name of CMU and The Regents of the University
of California not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software
without specific written permission.
332 Appendix C
<$paratextAppTitle]
CMU AND THE REGENTS OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES
WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE, INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL CMU OR THE REGENTS OF THE
UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM THE LOSS OF USE, DATA
OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS
ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS
SOFTWARE.
---- Part 2: Networks Associates Technology, Inc copyright notice (BSD) -----
Copyright (c) 2001-2003, Networks Associates Technology, Inc
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are
permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer.
 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials
provided with the distribution.
 Neither the name of the Networks Associates Technology, Inc nor the names of its
contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS''
AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
---- Part 3: Cambridge Broadband Ltd. copyright notice (BSD) -----
Portions of this code are copyright (c) 2001-2003, Cambridge Broadband Ltd.
User Manual
 The name of Cambridge Broadband Ltd. may not be used to endorse or promote
products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY
THEORY OF LIABILITY,WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
---- Part 4: Sun Microsystems, Inc. copyright notice (BSD) -----
Copyright © 2003 Sun Microsystems, Inc., 4150 Network Circle, Santa Clara, California
Use is subject to license terms below.
This distribution may include materials developed by third parties.
Sun, Sun Microsystems, the Sun logo and Solaris are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the U.S. and other countries.
 Neither the name of the Sun Microsystems, Inc. nor the names of its contributors may
be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific
prior written permission.
---- Part 5: Sparta, Inc copyright notice (BSD) -----
Copyright (c) 2003-2008, Sparta, Inc

334 Appendix C
<$paratextAppTitle]
 Neither the name of Sparta, Inc nor the names of its contributors may be used to
endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written
permission.
---- Part 6: Cisco/BUPTNIC copyright notice (BSD) -----
Copyright (c) 2004, Cisco, Inc and Information Network
Center of Beijing University of Posts and Telecommunications.
 Neither the name of Cisco, Inc, Beijing University of Posts and Telecommunications, nor
the names of their contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived
from this software without specific prior written permission.
User Manual

---- Part 7: Fabasoft R&D Software GmbH & Co KG copyright notice (BSD) -----
Copyright (c) Fabasoft R&D Software GmbH & Co KG, 2003
oss@fabasoft.com
Author: Bernhard Penz
 The name of Fabasoft R&D Software GmbH & Co KG or any of its subsidiaries, brand or
product names may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this
software without specific prior written permission.
THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
336 Appendix C
<$paratextAppTitle]
337
D Glossary
Index to Terms
A
Acknowledge A command that clears a selected alarm from the Diagnostics tool’s Monitor
and Selected tabs. The command also changes the status of the alarm’s
Acknowledged field from No to Yes.
Action Component used to perform specific tasks within the Graphical Navigation tool.
CCS actions perform Magellan CCS Navigator-related tasks, router actions perform
router-specific tasks, and Magellan CCS Navigator actions perform GUI-related
tasks.
Administrator A software user with special access rights to set up a software application
at a user site. An administrator generally works in a company’s computer support
department.
Advanced Router An optional plug-in that adds to Magellan CCS Navigator tools for controlling and
Control plug-in monitoring routers.
Administrators A user group responsible for installing, configuring, and supporting the CCS
software at a company.
Alarm A message that CCS software generates to alert users when an extraordinary
event occurs on the CCS network, such as a loss of input, loss of power, loss of
connection, or a malfunctioning or removed card.
API Application Program Interface. The specification describing how a programmer
writing an application accesses the behavior and state of classes and objects.
AuthenticationFai An SNMP trap generated by an agent on an SNMP-managed device that
lure indicates that an instance of authentication failure has occurred.
B
BO/S Broadcast Operating System. The operating system created by Leitch
Technology to manage its Command Control System (CCS) products over a
CCS network.
Breakaway Occurs when a logical source is partially switched to a logical destination.
switch or
breakaway take
338 Chapter
We can define a router system to have two levels, video and audio, because the
video and audio signals typically are electrically distinct and not transmitted on
the same wire. Two routers or router modules must operate in tandem across
the two levels to switch the audio and video. (One router frame may support
multiple levels through different modules in the same physical router frame.)
Magellan CCS NavigatorImagine a router system that has two logical sources, VR1
and VR2, and two logical destinations, SAT1 and SAT2. Each of these logical
sources and destinations has two levels of signals (both audio and video), which
comprise the complete “logical” signal.
If you switch, or take, the logical source VR1 to the logical destination SAT1,
you actually take two crosspoints to switch the complete logical source VR1
signals to the logical SAT1 destination. One is the crosspoint for the video level
and the other is the crosspoint for the audio level.
If you want the SAT1 logical designation to carry the video component of the
VR1 source and use the audio component from the VR2 source (for example,
during a voice-over of a news story, when the reporter narrates over stock
footage), you take the crosspoint on the video level of VR1 to SAT1 as usual, but
then take the crosspoint on the audio level of VR2 to SAT1. This partial switch, in
which only part of a logical source appears at a logical destination, or a logical
output carries signals from two or more logical sources, is called a breakaway
switch or a breakaway take.
Browse sequence A group of related Help topics that guide users through a software application’s
process or a set of information. Users navigate browse sequences with
Previous and Next buttons.
Build mode An operational mode in a CCS software application that is used to discover
CCS devices, build hierarchical views of the network, and configure
individual devices.
C
Catalog folder A folder in the Navigation pane that contains icons representing each of the
devices that a CCS software product supports.
CCS Command Control System. Hardware and software connected together
over a BO/S network.
CCS CoPilot™ A CCS configuration tool for installation on Windows-based PCs that offered
a quick, easy way of installing and upgrading CCS devices. CoPilot worked only
in Build mode, and had similar functionality to Magellan CCS Navigator without
any license keys. CoPilot was integrated into the high-end CCS software and
also available as a standalone product.
CoPilot can scan your network to find devices residing on the network. Then you
can configure their network settings, transfer software upgrades, look up version
information for the device’s hardware and software, and perform other
configuration tasks specific to the device, such as restarting the device after you
make configuration changes.
User Manual
CCS A device that translates the DPS Communications Network (DCN) language into
DPS-Gateway Command Control System (CCS) language, the language understood
by Magellan CCS Navigator, and CCS into DCN, the language of Leitch’s
popular DPS-575 digital processing synchronizers. This enables Magellan CCS
Navigator, Pilot, and CoPilot software to communicate with Leitch DPS-575 digital
processing synchronizers, which are not CCS devices. Magellan CCS Navigator
also offers some degree of remote monitoring of the synchronizers via the
gateway.
Magellan CCS A CCS software application for installation on Windows-based PCs that enables
Navigator™ you to easily create custom browser pages that represent your network and its
various environments around the world. You can associate objects on these
pages with network events, user-defined actions, and other browser pages.
These pages consolidate, simplify, and centralize the status monitoring of the
network's many devices and environments on a few easy-to-use and
-understand browser pages. This can lead to more efficient and economical
operation of your network.
Magellan CCS Navigator comes with a gallery of buttons, symbols, images, and
page templates for creating the custom browser pages. However, you can also
import your business logo and other image files for use in creating your custom
browser pages.
CCS Pilot™ A CCS software application for installation on Windows-based PCs that enabled
a user to discover, navigate, control, monitor, and secure access
to CCS-enabled devices on a network. Features included remote control of all
CCS components, centralized or distributed monitoring of all CCS components,
and network and component topology management. This product was replaced
with the NAVIGATOR-DEV license.
CCS Protocol™ Command Control System Protocol. A binary/ASCII protocol used to connect
existing control and automation systems to CCS-compliant devices. It is a simple
protocol accessed via a serial port or TCP/IP sockets.
CCS RouterNAV A CCS software application based on Magellan CCS Navigator, which only
provides control and configuration functionality for routers.
CCS software Software that implements the Command Control System of device control.
applications These applications currently include the Magellan CCS Navigator, Pilot, and CoPilot
software.
Check box An element used in forms in which users select choices by clicking a box.
When a check box shows a check mark or X, the feature is selected or on.
When the check box is blank or clear, the feature is not selected or off.
Child resource A resource contained by the parent resource.
Clipboard A temporary storage place for retaining information that was selected and copied
or cut from a file.
Coaxial cable A type of copper cable. It includes one channel that carries the signal,
surrounded first by a layer of insulation and then by another concentric physical
channel running along the same axis. The outer channel serves as a ground.
Coldstart An SNMP trap generated by an agent on a managed device that indicates that
the sending agent is re-initializing with significant changes to its configuration.
340 Chapter
Command A distributed real-time command and control system used to configure,

Control System™ provision, and monitor CCS and third-party equipment. CCS provides open and
(CCS) scalable access via standard communication protocols
(TCP/IP, SNMP, HTML, and serial) to all components of a networked studio.
CCS components include the following:
 Monitoring and control applications
 Discovery and inventory management applications
 Network and device configuration applications
 Local and remote device control panels
 Gateways to interface to third-party and existing CCS networks
 Web browser interfaces
Condition Part of a rule. Some actions only trigger an event when a condition is met.
Conditions are used by rules when the Magellan CCS Navigator installation
includes a NAVIGATOR-SRV or NAVIGATOR-SNMP license.
Conditional event An event that must happen in a specific way for an action to be triggered.
Conditional events are used by rules when the Magellan CCS Navigator installation
includes a NAVIGATOR-SRV or NAVIGATOR-SNMP license.
Configuration A folder in the Navigation tool in which a CCS software user creates
folder configurations for frames, control panels, and gateways.
Configuration A resource icon that appears as a descendant of the top Configuration folder
node and represents configuration information for a frame or control panel and its
assigned functional blocks (resource cards).
Configuration An interface to the Configuration tool.
dialog box
Configuration tool A CCS software tool for configuring CCS devices connected to a CCS network.
Contents The table of contents for the Help file that shows the structure of the Help file
in an expandable and collapsible hierarchy. Use it to move through the
application’s Help system and find information. Book and Help Topic icons
represent topic destinations.
Shortcut menu A menu that shows when you right-click an object. The menu contains a list
of commands specific to the right-clicked object.
Control mode An operational mode in CCS software used to control CCS devices.
Control panel A device that regulates the control parameters of one or more devices.
Control tool A CCS software tool for controlling CCS devices connected to the CCS network.
Control dialog An interface to the Control tool.
box
Cross-reference A keyword linked to another keyword in the index. When you select
the cross-reference in the index, your cursor jumps in the file to the related
keyword.
Crosspoint A physical connection between a router input (I) and a router output (O).
For each of the outputs in a router, the number of crosspoints is equal
to the number of inputs. Only one crosspoint, however, may be active
at any given time. When a crosspoint is active, the input and output pair (I, O)
associated with the crosspoint are connected, and the signal present at input I is
sent to output O of the router.
User Manual
Custom property A variable that holds a temporary value that defines or triggers events. Custom
properties are used by rules when the Magellan CCS Navigator installation includes
a NAVIGATOR-SRV or NAVIGATOR-SNMP license.
D
DBMS Database Management System.
Device Control The NAVIGATOR-DEV license supports the remote discovery, configuration,
license monitoring, control and diagnostics of supported devices.
Device hierarchy Logical organization of devices.
Diagnostics tool A CCS software tool for locating and diagnosing problems with CCS devices connected
to a broadcast network.
Diagnostics An interface to the Diagnostics tool.
dialog box
Dialog box A Windows-based box containing command buttons and options to carry out
a particular command or task.
Discovery The process of finding devices on a network.ADD detail.
Discovery folder A folder containing the results of a discovery, a process in which the CCS
software locates all CCS devices attached to each of a network's IP addresses.
Discovery tool A CCS software tool used to find devices connected to a CCS network, using the
devices’ IP addresses.
Discovery pane An interface to the Discovery tool.
DLL Dynamic Link Library.
DNS Domain Name System.
Drag-and-drop A technique for moving an object from one location to another using the mouse.
operation
Drop-down menu An element in forms that enables you to make a selection from a hidden list. You
click an arrow to the right of the list field and then select an item from the
resulting list.
E
EgpNeighborLoss An SNMP trap that an agent on a managed device generates that indicates that
the agent's EGP protocol has lost an EGP peer relationship.
Engineer user A CCS software user responsible for building, configuring, installing, and
repairing the component devices that together comprise the CCS network.
EnterpriseSpecific An SNMP trap that an agent on a managed devices generates that indicates the
occurrence of an enterprise-specific event.
Error A device state which may occur when CCS software encounters a problem
communicating with a device—for example, when someone removes a card
from a frame or replaces one card with another card type.
Ethernet The most widely installed local area network (LAN) technology. An Ethernet LAN
typically uses coaxial cable or special grades of twisted pair wires.
342 Chapter
Event Part of a Navigator rule. Events trigger actions. Some events are conditional.
Events are available in Magellan CCS Navigator installations that include a
NAVIGATOR-SRV or NAVIGATOR-SNMP license.
Extensible Built so that later users or designers can extend its capabilities.
F
Favorites A tab or page in the Help file on which you can store a list of Help topics that
you commonly reference.
A user-defined subset of parameters for a device that can be used to configure a
control panel.
Format A control domain that groups a device parameters according to signal formats.
Frame A box or chassis that contains product modules—such as cards, power supplies
and fans.
FTP File Transfer Protocol, a TCP/IP protocol that enables you to transfer files
between two different computers on a TCP/IP network.
Full-text search An Online Help feature that creates a database of Help information so you can
search for words that occur in the content of Help topics.
Function A control domain that groups device parameters according to their function.
Functional block A card controlled as a single unit in a frame.
G
General user A CCS software user who has no responsibility for installing or supporting
the software. A general user can create unique tree views of the network,
but has no control over the creation of user or group accounts or the assignment
of device access rights.
Generic Control A generic CCS software tool for controlling CCS devices connected to a CCS
dialog box network.
Global property A page property that is available for all pages, rather then just the page where it
was created (as opposed to a custom property). In a Graphical Navigation page,
global properties are used to create rules and macros.
GUI Graphical User Interface.
H
Host In Internet Protocol (IP) specifications, any device that has full two-way access
to other devices on the TCP/IP network.
Hot-swappable Term used to describe a device that a user can remove from a frame and replace
without interrupting power to the frame or affecting the operation of any other
device, other than those that directly depend on the removed device.
The replacement device should configure automatically to the same working
state and settings as its predecessor without special user intervention.
Hotspot A clickable area in a topic or image that opens other topics, shows text-only
pop-ups, plays sound or video, or jumps to websites, news groups, or other
destinations.
User Manual
HTTP Hypertext Transfer Protocol. The set of rules for exchanging files on the World
Wide Web.
Hyperlink An area in a Help topic or Web page that changes when a user clicks the spot.
It is normally indicated by underlined and colored text. The mouse cursor turns
into a hand when the user hovers the mouse over the text or graphic. The hand
indicates that if the user clicks the area, another topic or a piece of linked
information will appear.
I
ICMP Internet Control Message Protocol. A message-control and error-reporting
protocol that uses IP packets.
IconMasterNav Another name for the optional Master Control license for Magellan CCS
Navigator that complements the IconMaster hardware panel and allows faster
access to many of the operational feature submenus and audio meters.
IE (Microsoft) Internet Explorer.
Interface Control An optional plug-in that provides tools for device control and monitoring when a
plug-in NAVIGATOR-INT license is available.
IP Internet Protocol. This protocol within TCP/IP determines the breakup of data
messages into packets, the routing of the packets from the sender to the
destination network and station, and the reassembly of the packets into the
original data messages at the destination.
IP address A sequence of four numbers, each containing from one to three digits, that
together identify an Internet Protocol address for a host device connected
to a TCP/IP network.
IP packet The unit of data routed between an origin and a destination on the TCP/IP
network. Each of these packets is separately numbered and includes the
Internet address of the source and destination.
L
License A purchased option that adds tools to your Magellan CCS Navigator installation.
Magellan CCS Navigator normally starts with all options activated on a temporary
basis.
Link A line or arrow in Magellan CCS Navigator’s Browser dialog box that links two
symbols.
LinkDown An SNMP trap that an agent on a managed device generates to indicate a failure
in one of the sending agent’s communication links.
LinkUp An SNMP trap that an agent on a managed device generates to indicate that the
normal running status of one of the sending agent’s communication links has
been restored.
Local Active A device state that indicates that a device is operating and can only be
controlled with a control panel or card-edge controls.
Locked The state of a router destination that a user is preventing from receiving signals
from any new router source. Only the user who locked a router destination can
unlock it.
344 Chapter
M
Macro A group of actions that can be executed at a specific event. Macros are
associated with rules if you have a NAVIGATOR-SRV or NAVIGATOR-SNMP
license.
Master Control Combines tools to create and operate pages to control IconMaster switchers.
plug-in
MDI Multiple Document Interface. (CCS software and its tools run primarily
as standalone MDI worksheet applications.)
MIB Management Information Base. A formal description of a set of network objects
that can be managed using and defined by the Simple Network Management
Protocol (SNMP).
Monitor point Property of a device that can be set through the Navigation Properties dialog.
This property corresponds to the name of a configured router source that is
physically connected to the signal monitoring output of a device.
N
Navigator page A page containing objects that represent a network environment as well as any
user-defined actions. The page uses the following objects to represent network
devices and their environment: symbols, images, buttons, links, and text. All
these objects are clickable, have shortcut menus, and can have user-defined
actions associated with them.
You can associate two Navigator pages together by creating a “load page” action
for an object on one of the pages. The user-defined action identifies the other
page as the target page to load.
Navigation tool A tool that enables CCS software users to create hierarchical views
of the organization of their CCS devices.
Navigation pane An interface to the Navigation tool that contains the resource tree. One uses the
Navigation tool to customize the resource tree, using resource icons presenting
the devices and their environment.
Network active A device state in which a CCS device is operational and can be controlled
remotely.
Network folder A folder containing a hierarchical view of a CCS network. The view contains
icons representing all the studios, racks, servers, frames, products, and
functional blocks comprising the network.
Node A connection point in a network that serves as either a redistribution point or an
end point for data transmissions.
Not ready A device state in which the TCP/IP connection with a resource has been lost
when the resource was restarting or was disconnected from the network.
O
ODBC Open Database Connectivity.
Operation A control domain that groups a device parameters according to operations on
signals.
User Manual
Operational mode A method of operating in a software application. CCS software generally has two
operational modes: Build and Control. If your Magellan CCS Navigator install has no
license, or if the license has expired, Magellan CCS Navigator operates only in Build
mode.
Operator user A typical CCS software user who works as an equipment operator and is
responsible for setting and monitoring the control values of different signals as
these signals flow through the CCS network. This person typically has no need
to go inside the frame of a particular device, but manipulates exterior controls of
products or functional blocks residing inside the frame.
P
Parameter ID An integer value that uniquely identifies a controllable parameter on a device.
Parameter name The name of a controllable parameter on a device.
Parent resource A resource that acts as a container or parent for one or more other CCS devices.
PDF Portable Document File, a file that can be read by Adobe's Acrobat Reader
software.
Ping A user command and an underlying protocol based on ICMP that enables users
to verify that a particular IP address exists and can accept requests.
Plug-in An item which is not available in all versions of Magellan CCS Navigator. Examples
of plug-ins include Advanced Router Control, Master Control and Interface
Control.
Preset A predefined control setting for one or more CCS devices.
Preset folder A Navigation folder that contains preset files.
Product Two or more functional blocks controlled as a single unit.
Property sheet A dialog box that shows the properties for an object in the interface.
Protected The state of a router destination that is prevented from receiving the signal of
any new router source except when the request is made by the user who
protected the destination. Only the user who protected a router destination can
unprotect it.
Protocol In information technology, a special set of rules that the end points
of a telecommunication connection use to communicate.
Push-Pin icon A pictorial symbol found on a property sheet that enables you to keep
the property sheet open while you perform other tasks. When selected, the icon
changes appearance to show that it is enabled.
R
Rack A shelving unit containing broadcast equipment.
Radio button An element used in forms that enables you to select only one alternative from a
group. Radio buttons are presented in a list, one of which is selected by default.
Clicking a new button may at times clear a previously selected item.
Refresh A command that causes a device to restart without losing power—that is, a soft
reboot.
346 Chapter
Resource status A bar that shows information about a CCS device's connection to the network
bar and indicates if the resource is ready for control through the CCS Control tool.
Router A device that directs one or more input signals to more than one destination.
Routing switchers can direct analog video or audio, digital video or audio, HDTV,
time code, RS-232/422 data, Ethernet, etc.
Router folder A folder in the Navigation pane that contains routers and routing views. From
this folder, you can start a router configuration dialog box.
Router input An individual signal in a source.
Router A combination of output signals.
destination
Router level A type of signal, such as audio or video.
Router output An individual signal in a destination.
Router source A combination of input signals.
Rule A combination of an event and a condition which trigger an action.
S
Salvo A predefined list of (router) crosspoint operations that, when executed, occur
simultaneously.
Serial The transmission of individual bits of data one at a time with time separating
the individual bits.
Server A computer or program on a network that responds to commands from a client
program or computer.
Server icon A pictorial symbol that represents one IP address. Each IP address may serve
one or more frames, products, or functional blocks in CCS software.
Server node In CCS software, this type of node represents any device that supports the TCP/
IP protocol.
Shortcut icon An icon that gives CCS software users one-click access to resource icons in the
Network, Discovery, Configuration, Temporary, Catalog, or Preset folders in
the Navigation pane without moving down through the hierarchical structure
of the Resource tree.
Signal monitoring A CCS software tool that enables you to output a signal from a CCS device to an
tool external monitor or a dialog box on the application’s desktop.
Signal monitoring The user interface to the Signal monitoring tool.
dialog box
Simple Network SNMP. A protocol that enables SNMP applications to manage devices through
Management SNMP agents across a network. CCS supports SNMP as one of several
Protocol mechanisms for managing equipment. SNMP, based on UDP, is best suited
for monitoring and controlling devices in an environment that does not have
real-time requirements. Other CCS-supported protocols, such as those based
on TCP/IP, are better suited for the real-time monitoring and control of devices.
SNMP See Simple Network Management Protocol.
SNMP Control An optional plug-in that provides tools for building Navigator pages (with a
plug-in NAVIGATOR-SNMP license) for communicating with SNMP-enabled devices.
User Manual
SNMP trap An SNMP packet generated by devices supporting the SNMP protocol. The
seven types of SNMP traps are as follows: coldstart, warmstart, linkup, linkdown,
authenticationfailure, egpNeighborloss, and enterprisespecific.
Specific Control A specific CCS software tool for controlling a specific CCS device.
Dialog Box
Stream A control domain that groups a device parameters according to their position
in the signal processing stream.
Studio A broadcast studio managed as one unit.
Subnet An identifiable subunit of a network, such as the devices in one geographic
location, in one studio, or on the same local area network.
SuiteView Control An optional plug-in that provides conditional events and actions to the
plug-in NAVIGATOR-SRV or NAVIGATOR-SNMP license specifically for the purpose of
communicating with SuiteView multiviewers.
T
Tab A page in a dialog box or property sheet with an index-style tab.
Take The act of making a crosspoint active in terms of a source and a destination.
For example, the statement “Take Input 2 to Output 5” makes the crosspoint that
connects Input 2 to Output 5 active—taking In 2 to Out 5.
Take crosspoint The act of making a crosspoint active.
TCP Transmission Control Protocol. A set of rules for exchanging messages with
other Internet points at the information packet level.
TCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol, developed by the U.S.
Department of Defense for communications between computers. TCP/IP has
become the standard for data transmission over networks.
Telnet A user command and an underlying TCP/IP protocol that enables you to access
remote computers.
Temporary folder A folder like the Network folder that contains a network hierarchy,
but the Temporary folder’s network is a draft or preliminary version.
Only the Network folder’s network view operates. Temporary folders are
a place to build rough drafts of tree views of the network. You can also use these
folders to hold information about equipment temporarily offline.
Tree A hierarchical diagram in the CCS Navigation pane that reflects
the organization of the CCS network.
U
UDP User Datagram Protocol. A communications protocol that offers a limited amount
of service when messages are exchanged between computers in a network that
uses the Internet Protocol (IP).
URL Uniform Resource Locator. The address of a resource accessible on the TCP/IP
network. The type of resource depends on the Internet application protocol.
User account An account representing one application user with a unique user name and
password.
User group One or more users who have the same access rights to a set of actions.
348 Chapter
User interface The set of dials, knobs, operating system commands, graphical display formats,
and other devices provided by a computer or a program to enable you to
communicate and use the computer or program.
User profile A group of settings that define how your e-mail software is set up for a particular
user. These settings control how your e-mail system addresses and delivers
your mail and how it stores your mail and folders. Your e-mail software creates
this user profile.
V
Virtual device A user-defined group of devices that can be controlled by a control panel as if
they were a single device.
Virtual Device A folder in the Navigation pane where users can construct virtual devices while
folder in Build mode.
W
Warmstart An SNMP trap generated by an agent on a managed device that indicates
that the sending agent is re-initializing itself with no changes in its configuration.
The agent re-initializes its previous configuration tables.
Wildcard An advanced search technique using asterisks (*) and question marks (?) to
expression represent any characters (*) or character (?). You can use wildcards in full-text
searching to narrow the target of your search.
Workbook mode A mode that enables you to flip easily between multiple Control dialog boxs to
work with them simultaneously. Each dialog box is on a separate tab or page in
the Control dialog box. The tabs are located at the bottom of the dialog box. The
command to activate workbook mode is on the View menu.
349
Index
A Amino STB 98
configuration 111
Access options, NUCLEUS 199
API 337
Access rights 23, 104, 106, 119, 268
Application, third-party 107
administrator 25, 337
Auto-assignment, NUCLEUS 201
device 28
general users 31, 342
pages 30 B
presets 29 BO/S 337
user groups 347 Boot file, upgrading device 146
Acknowledge alarms 244, 337 Browse sequence 338
Add Upgrade Files box 146 Build mode 6, 37, 338
Add user group 26
Add/remove programs 17
Adding indexes to a routing panel 183, 184, 185 C
Administrator 23 Capturing a screen image 321
defined 337 Cards, seating of 318
view of Navigation pane 93 Cascading windows 55
Advanced Router Control plug-in 49 Catalog folder 14, 338
Agent, SNMP configuration 70 Third party devices 111
Alarms 237–247 Categories, NUCLEUS 175
acknowledging 244 Category menus, NUCLEUS 194
Alarm Event ID 239 Category/Index selection, CENTRIO 181
alarm query failed 313 CCS control panels 157, 222, 228, 234
at card edge 313 configuring 227
clearing 245 refreshing 233
column in Navigation pane 122 software upgrade 297
disabled 313 transferring configuration 231
EDGE-DPS575 215 CCS devices 1
failing to report 313 discovering 75, 308
filtering column in Navigation pane 124 in alarm tables 239
filtering LCP/RCP 235 in Diagnostics dialog box 238
forwarding SNMP 73 CCS DPS-Gateway 96, 211
listing 239, 245, 246 configuring 211
X75 261 discovering 76
log 245, 246 CCS host communications 237
saving 245 CCS Protocol 158
properties 246 CCS, defined 338
saving to file 245 CENTRIO 98, 116
setting 261 adding to a NUCLEUS configuration 164
SNMP traps 314 icons in Navigation pane 96
tab, X75 261 in Navigation pane 116
troubleshooting 312 NUCLEUS license for 161
350 Index
PIP names 181 configuring 227

CENTRIO Panel Configuration Wizard 164, 180 LCP/RCP 227
selecting displays 183 NUCLEUS 161
selecting PIP attributes 181 configuration 186
selecting source categories 184 refreshing 233
selecting source indexes 185 tab 232
selecting sources and PIPs 182 transferring LCP/RCP configuration 231
starting 180 Copy forward alarms 74
Child resource 339 Custom view, Navigation pane 44
Clear "alarm query failed" message 267 Customer service, contacting 321
Client, Navigator
Navigation pane view 94
Client, Navigator license 5
D
Clipboard 339 DBMS 341
Columns in Alarm tables 238 Default IP address 308
COM port settings 60 Deleting indexes from a routing panel 183, 184, 185
Command Control System (CCS) 337, 340 Destination categories in NUCLEUS 175
Command tab 107 Destination routing indexes 176
Communication options 59, 62 Destination status, NUCLEUS 175
setting 311 Destinations 311
Communication Settings tab 109 Destinations, NUCLEUS 174
Configuration 59–74 Device category NUCLEUS configuration 188
CCS devices 127 Device class 104
device network settings 129 Device control 2
EDGE-DPS575 211 Device ID 104
editing 213 discovering 78, 86, 87
File transfer tab 143 in alarm lists 241
LCP/RCP control panel 227 in alarm tables 239
log 154 in Diagnostic dialog box 314
NEO frame 221 in Signal Monitor dialog box 288
NUCLEUS 161, 186 of SNMP server 111
creating folder 163 setting device tab 105
router Wizard 186 Device menus, creating 193
routing panel destinations and sources 186 Device menus, NUCLEUS 196
transferring from 208 Device unity, NUCLEUS 198
NUCLEUS for Routers 164 Devices 119, 239
setting device IP address 129 adding to a NUCLEUS configuration 165
status bar 128 status column in Navigation pane 122
Connection idle time 62 supported 1
for Keep Alive 311 Device-specific alarms 237
Connection status 267 Diagnostics dialog box 237, 239
Context menu 340 clearing 246
configuration 156 clearing alarms 245
control 266 definition 341
discovery 92 Diagnostics tool definition 341
navigation 117 options 247
Context-sensitive help 340 refreshing 245
Control 2 resizing columns 240
context menu 266 setting alarms for 261
dialog box 256, 268, 318, 340 Dialog box 341
DPS-575 261 Digital Processing Synchronizer. See DPS-575
tool 267, 340 Disable alarm 237
Control access rights 119 Discovery 44, 75
Control mode 37, 237, 255, 256–264, 340 by administrator 75
troubleshooting 318 column in Navigation pane 92, 124
Control panel, Windows 17 context menu 92
Control panels 157, 222, 234 folder 341
User Manual Volume 1: Device Control
IP hosts, setting 82 Format, defined 342

options, setting 77 FR6802+ frames 115
pane 341 Frames, defined 342
partial 86 FTP 156, 157, 319
results 91 defined 342
running a full discovery 85 Full screen, signal monitor tool setting 289
save options 83 Full-text search, in online help 342
tool 341 Function, defined 342
Discrete port selection 181 Functional block, defined 342
Display name 121
Display properties, hardware 8
G
DLL 341
DNS 309, 341 Gateway 127, 135, 308
DNS Service Search Order 309 EDGE-DPS575 212
Docked window, in user interface 53 Gateway tab 213
DPS HTML Interface 217 General users, definition 342
DPS-475/575 211 Generic control dialog box 257, 342
control 215 Genesis frame 308
HTTP control 216, 293 Group, user 25, 26
in NUCLEUS configurations 165 add 26
updating firmware 218 properties 31
Uploader Utility 218 remove 31
Drag and drop, defined 341 GUI 342
DRFM 98
Drop-down menu, defined 341 H
Dynamic name 121 Hardware requirements, installation 8
Help, device-specific 119
E Host IP address 82
EDGE-DPS575 Hotspot, definition 342
configuration, deleting 214 Hot-swappable 342
configuration,editing 213 HTTP 99, 104, 293, 294
controlling 215 defined 343
gateway 211 DPS-475/575 control 216
in NUCLEUS configurations 165 properties 108
E-mail forwarding service 251 Hyperlink, definition 343
Engineer user 341
Error ID 239 I
Error level 239
ICE6800+ modules 298
Error message during installation 296
Index navigation, NUCLEUS 197
Ethernet crossover cable 308
Indexes, routing 176, 178
Ethernet device 311
Input condition for alarms 237
Installation 7
F CCS control panel firmware 297
Failed download during firmware upgrade 142 CCS software 12
Failure, card 237 exits without finishing 296
Favorites 166–170 firmware versions 297
copying 170, 231 ICE6800+ firmware 298
in Help system 342 Microsoft Installer 10
in NUCLEUS configurations 168 Microsoft Internet Explorer 10
on LCP/RCP control panels 229 Microsoft Messaging Queue 11
virtual devices 167 Microsoft XML parser 10
Filter alarms 237, 239 NEO RES-E firmware 297
Find monitored device in signal monitor tool 289 SQL Server 11
Firmware upgrades 143 troubleshooting 295
Floating window, in user interface 53 uninstalling Navigator 12
updating user database 297
352 Index
X75 firmware 297 M

Installation failure, module 237
MDI 344
Interface Control plugin 50
Menu bar 58
Interface overview 37
Menu unity, NUCLEUS 198
Internet host 285
Menus, NUCLEUS 192
Interpreting alarms 241
MIB Browser 66
alarm list 239
MIB files 62
by color 241
defined 344
IP address 318
line breaks in 315
alarms 314
Microsoft Messaging Queue 11
configuration 129, 309 Modes
defined 343 Control 256–264
discovery 308 Modes, operational, switching 37
host 82 Modifying group properties 31
new CCS device 130 Monitor point 104, 108, 344
PC 131 column in Navigation pane 124
X75 285 Monitor tab 239
IP host 82 Monitoring video signals 288
IP, defined 343 MPEG4
configuring 285
K configuring video 285
system requirements for 12
Keep alive 59
Multi bus routing panels 172
L N
Layout Designer 98, 116
Navigation options 120, 319
Layouts 56, 57
Navigation pane 44, 93, 121, 344
LCD assignment configuration 188
Amino STB 111
LCD auto-assignment, NUCLEUS 201
finding items in 98
levels 178
live names 121
License keys 149
naming conventions for devices 121
activating 162
optional columns 122
affect on operational modes 39
Navigation pane, launching panels from 256
changing a Navigator license 20
Navigation properties 100, 103, 111, 119
device control 2
setting 104
Graphical Navigation 3
Navigation Properties box
managing Navigator licenses 19
Amino STB tab 111
Master Control option 6
Navigation tool 269, 344, 347
Navigator FAQs 323
Navigator pages 3, 344
Navigator options 2
NEO frame 157, 158, 221, 225
router control 162
NEO RES-E
SNMP option 5, 6
software upgrade 297
streaming 277
Network folder, defined 344
troubleshooting 300
Network resource 103
viewing Navigator licenses 20 Network settings
License, Navigator 13 PC 133
Link, defined 343 Network settings, device 129
Live name 121 Network view 93, 99
Lock NUCLEUS destination 200 New Configuration dialog 187
Log file 245, 246 No Video 304
Log, alarm 245 Non-Pilot application 107
Log, user 35 NSM card 311
Logging off 25 NUCLEUS 161
Logging on 24, 303 access options 199
Login options 26, 32, 34 adding CENTRIO devices 164
adding devices 194
adding off-line devices to a configuration 166 Discovery 77

adding processing devices to a configuration 165 Navigation 120
adding routers to a configuration 164 Plug-in 49
adding virtual devices to a configuration 166 Signal Monitor 290
blank configuration 193 SNMP 62, 150
category menus 194 User Accounts 32, 33, 34, 35
configuration 171 User Groups 25
configuring for DPS-575 214
creating a CENTRIO panel 180
P
creating a configuration 186
creating a configuration folder 163 Panels
creating a routing panel 171 launching from Navigation pane 256
editing a routing panel 179 Parameters 258
license keys 162 favorites 170
menu and device unity 198 IDs in Diagnostics dialog box 239
modifying panel configurations 202 in NUCLEUS 192, 196
options 198 navigating in Control dialog boxes 260
parameters 196 Parameters Panel 45
transferring configuration 205 Parameters panel 43
unity buttons 198 Parent resource 345
NUCLEUS configuration Password 24, 32, 34, 302, 303
access options 199 changing 34
adding devices 194 Paste forward alarms 74
adding menus 192, 194, 196 PC monitor 8
adding parameters 193, 196 PDFs 345
assigning parameters 191 of user manuals 157, 268
auto-assignment order 201 Permissions 23
blank 188 device 27, 28
configuration options 198 NUCLEUS 200
deleting 210 pages 30
editing 202 presets 29
exporting 208 Ping IP address 84, 308
Home button 198 PIP names 117, 121, 181
listing 210 Plug-ins 49
modifying index items 197 advanced router control 49
transferring 205 Interface control 50
Unity buttons 198 Master control 50
without a wizard 193 SNMP control 50
SuiteView control 51
Power failure alarms 300, 313
O Power supply, monitoring 237
Object ID 66 Presets 270
object ID 67 copying 274
Off-line devices in NUCLEUS configurations 166 deleting 274
Operating system 9 in Control dialog boxes 271
Operational mode 37, 261, 344 in the Navigation pane 109, 272
Operational status 49, 238, 239, 246, 261 loading 272, 273
alarm 239 modifying 273
Operational status of a device 318 saving 271, 272
Operator user 26, 345 undo/redo of 120
optional columns 121 Processing devices
Options menu 58 adding to a NUCLEUS configuration 165
communications 59 Product information 119
Configuration 155 Product, defined 345
Control 268 Protect destination
Diagnostics 247 using NUCLEUS 200
354 Index
Q selecting destination categories 175

selecting destination indexes 176
QSEE6800+ modules 116
selecting destination statuses 175
selecting destinations 174
QuickTime monitoring 285
selecting levels 175
selecting source categories 178
R selecting source indexes 178
Rack, defined 345 selecting sources 173
Radio button, defined 345 starting 171
Reboot device 148, 313 Routing panels 165
Redundant NEO resource modules 144 adding and deleting indexes 183, 184, 185
Refresh 232, 245, 267 cat/index mode 172, 175, 178
alarm list 243, 245 configuring destinations and sources 186
alarm status 313 creating for NUCLEUS 184, 186
CCS device 266, 267 Routing views 98, 165
control panel 233
defined 345 S
NEO frame 224
Screen image, capturing 321
tree view 117
Serial connection preferences 60
Registry Editor 19
Serial port
Remove software 17
troubleshooting 311
Remove user group 31
Server 346
Required hardware 8
icon 346
Resizing columns 240
Navigator-server license 3
Resource icon 99, 267
SNMP 111
copying 102
Set alarm 261
deleting 101
Shortcuts 104, 109, 124
finding 267
Show product information 119
moving 102
Signal monitor 287, 319
renaming 97
context menu 289
setting text color of 103
find associated device 289
Resource icons 95
options 290
Resource status bar 346
Resource tree 44, 94
video properties 289
navigating 97
Simple Network Management Protocol. See SNMP
Restart 304 Single bus routing panels 172
Router 346 SNMP 64, 99, 111, 150
adding to a NUCLEUS configuration 164
control plug-in 50
control with NUCLEUS 171
enabling 110
creating a panel for NUCLEUS 171
load errors 314
icons in Navigation pane 96
servers 111
license for NUCLEUS 161
setting options 62, 150
TRAX configuration for NUCLEUS 202
status monitoring 110
Router Control Views 171
traps 64, 111, 237, 314
Router gateway 320
SNMP Agent 70
Router TRAX 202
SNMP value expressions, creating 68
Router troubleshooting 311
SNMP variable values 67
Router/Centrio Views folder 164
Software installation 12
Routing categories in NUCLEUS 175, 178
Software uninstall 16
Routing destination status 175 Software Upgrade tab 146
Routing destinations
Software Upgrade tool 135
NUCLEUS 174
Software upgrade tool 47
Routing indexes 176, 178
Software User License 330
routing levels 178
Source categories in NUCLEUS 178
Routing panel configuration 171
Source Name 121
Routing Panel Configuration Wizard 186
Source routing indexes 178
editing a routing panel 179
Sources, NUCLEUS 173 DPS-475/575 218

Split navigation NUCLEUS configuration 188 NEO resource modules 144
SQL server 11 Upgrade tool 135
Standalone program 52 Uploader Utility 218
Static name 121 USB storage device, with NUCLEUS 200
Status bar 49 User access 25
Status message, operational 318 User account 347
Status Monitor 110 adding 32
Amino STB 111 modifying account information 34
Streaming removing 33
system requirements for 12 User accounts
Subnet 75, 211, 308 viewing account information 34
mask 127, 135 User groups 26, 34, 347
SuiteView control plug-in 51 add 26
Supported devices 1 User log 35
System requirements 7, 9 viewing 36
installation order 11 User manuals 157
signal monitor tool 12 User name 32
streaming 12 User profile, defined 348
third-party software 10 User tab in Navigation pane 99
System view, Navigation pane 93 User view, of Navigation pane 84
T V
TCP/IP 132, 309, 347 Value expressions, creating 68
Telnet 134, 135, 347 Variable values, SNMP 67
Temporary folder 91, 347 Version information, module 152
Third party devices 98 Video properties in Signal Monitor tool 289
Amino STB 111 Video server 293
Third-party software 296 Video server, control through HTTP 293
Tile windows 55 Video signal monitoring 288
Toolbars 41 Video status monitoring 237
create objects 42 View menu 49
Graphical Navigation 42 Virtual devices 166
standard 42 in NUCLEUS configurations 166
Tools menu 43, 51, 52, 53, 58
configuration 127
W
diagnostics 237–245
discovery 75–92 Warranty Agreement 330
navigation 120 Web server 104, 293, 294
signal monitor 287–291 Wildcard expression, defined 348
standalone 51 Window menu 55, 256
Tracking options in Control dialog boxes 268 Windows, cascading 55
Transferring configurations, NUCLEUS 206 Wizards
CENTRIO configuration for NUCLEUS 180
TRAX 202
new page (Graphical Navigation tool) 10, 41
license keys 162
NUCLEUS router 171
NUCLEUS license for 161
routing panel configuration 171
Tree View tab 121
Tree, defined 347 SuiteView upgrade 139
troubleshooting 311
Workbook mode 54, 348
U
Undo/redo tools 42 X
Unity, NUCLEUS 198
Unlock routing destination 311 X/Y routing panels 172
X75
Unprotect routing destination 311
alarms 261
Updating 135
software upgrade 297
356 Index
streaming source 285 XML files from NUCLEUS 208

system requirements 12
Installation and Operation Manual
Volume 2: Graphical Navigation
Edition J
175‐000236‐01
Trademarks
Contact Information
iii
Contents
Preface ......................................................................................................................... ix
Manual Information ...................................................................................................... ix
Purpose ..................................................................................................................... ix
Audience ................................................................................................................... ix
Revision History ......................................................................................................... ix
Writing Conventions ......................................................................................................x
Obtaining the User Manuals .........................................................................................x
Chapter 1 Introduction to Graphical Navigation ......................................................... 1

Graphical Navigation Overview ................................................................................... 1
Setting Graphical Navigation Options ......................................................................... 2
General Options for the Graphical Navigation Pane ................................................... 2
Build Mode Options for Graphical Navigation Pages .................................................. 3
View Options for Graphical Navigation Pages ............................................................ 4
Chapter 2 Graphical Navigation Page Creation ............................................................. 7

Illustrating the Network Environments ....................................................................... 7
Creating a New Graphical Navigation Page ................................................................ 8
Creating a Frame View Page ...................................................................................... 8
Saving Graphical Navigation Pages .......................................................................... 10
Opening an Existing Page ........................................................................................ 11
Deleting a Navigator Page ....................................................................................... 11
Previewing and Printing a Page ................................................................................ 11
Using Zoom Tools .................................................................................................... 12
Panning in a Graphical Navigation Page ................................................................... 12
Defining Global Properties ......................................................................................... 13
Deleting a Global Property ....................................................................................... 14
Setting the Properties of a Page ................................................................................ 14
Setting a Color Fill as a Page Background ................................................................ 14
Setting an Image as a Page Background .................................................................. 15
Defining Custom Properties for a Page .................................................................... 15
Adding Objects to a Graphical Navigation Page ...................................................... 17
Adding Buttons ........................................................................................................... 17
iv Contents
Creating a Button .................................................................................................... 18

Setting the Properties of a Button ............................................................................ 18
Creating Buttons to Load Other Magellan CCS Navigator Pages ............................... 22
Adding a Hot Button ................................................................................................... 23
Creating a Hot Button .............................................................................................. 23
Setting the Properties of a Button ............................................................................ 23
Adding a Text Object ................................................................................................... 24
Setting the Properties of a Text Object ..................................................................... 24
Adding an Image ......................................................................................................... 25
Adding a Hotspot ........................................................................................................ 26
Adding a Signal Monitor ............................................................................................ 27
Adding a Navigator Frame ......................................................................................... 28
Streaming in a Graphical Navigation Page ................................................................ 29
Creating a Multi-Monitor Streaming Page ................................................................ 29
Adding a Thumbnail or Stream to a Graphical Navigation Page ................................ 32
Starting a QuickTime Player From a Graphical Navigation Page ................................. 34
Adding a Streaming Icon .......................................................................................... 35
Adding a Resource Icon Symbol ................................................................................. 36
Adding a Symbol with the Create Objects Toolbar or Menu ..................................... 38
Adding a Symbol from the Resource Tree ................................................................. 38
Setting the Properties of a Symbol ........................................................................... 39
Setting the View for Graphical Navigation Symbols .................................................. 40
Creating Links Between Symbols .............................................................................. 41
Deleting Nodes from the Resource Tree ................................................................... 42
Adding Controls ........................................................................................................... 42
Adding an ActiveX Control ...................................................................................... 43
Adding a Timer Control ........................................................................................... 45
Setting a LTIMultiCharacter Display .......................................................................... 47
Adding a Spin Control ............................................................................................. 48
Setting ActiveX Properties ........................................................................................ 49
Adding a Player Control ........................................................................................... 50
Adding a Software Clock to a Navigator Page .......................................................... 51
Adding a Gauge Control to a Navigator Page ........................................................... 53
Editing a Page .............................................................................................................. 56
Resizing Graphical Navigation Objects ...................................................................... 56
Moving a Graphical Navigation Object ..................................................................... 57
Cutting, Copying and Pasting Graphical Navigation Objects ..................................... 57
Setting the Display Order of Graphical Navigation Objects ........................................ 58
Aligning and Spacing Graphical Navigation Objects .................................................. 58
Using the Graphical Navigation Context Menus ...................................................... 58
Chapter 3 Rules for Magellan CCS Navigator Pages and Objects .................... 61
Setting Rules to Perform Actions ............................................................................... 61
Flow Chart of Generic Rule Creation Process ............................................................ 62
Setting a Rule for a Magellan CCS Navigator Object or Page .................................... 62
Setting an Event .......................................................................................................... 66
Defining Conditions .................................................................................................... 67
Navigator’s Advanced Graphical Navigation v
User Manual
Defining an Event or Action Property for the First Time ............................................ 68

Reusing or Editing a Previously Set Condition ........................................................... 68
Setting Conditions for a “Multiple Events” Event ..................................................... 68
Setting Conditions for “On Alarm” Events ............................................................... 69
Setting Conditions for an ‘On Custom Property Change’ Event ................................ 71
Setting an Action ........................................................................................................ 72
Setting the Action Properties ..................................................................................... 74
Reusing the Event Properties .................................................................................... 74
Setting Properties for Alarm Filtering Actions ........................................................... 74
Setting Properties for a ‘Configuration’ Action ......................................................... 75
Setting Properties for a ‘Control’ Action .................................................................. 76
Setting Properties for an ‘Execute Macro’ Action ..................................................... 76
Setting Properties for a ‘Launch Application’ Action ................................................. 77
Setting Properties for a ‘Load Layout’ Action ........................................................... 77
Setting Properties for a ‘Load Page’ Action .............................................................. 78
Setting Properties for a ‘Load Frame Page’ Action .................................................... 78
Setting Properties for a ‘Load Preset’ Action ............................................................ 79
Setting Properties for a ‘Product Info’ Action ........................................................... 80
Setting Properties for a ‘Product User Manual’ Action .............................................. 81
Setting Properties for a ‘Set Button Properties’ Action .............................................. 81
Setting Properties for a ‘Button Blink Mode’ Action ................................................. 82
Setting Properties for a ‘Set Custom Property’ Action .............................................. 82
Setting Properties for a ‘Set Frame Custom Property’ Action .................................... 83
Setting Properties for a ‘Set Link Properties’ Action .................................................. 84
Setting Properties for a ‘Set Symbol Properties’ Action ............................................. 85
Setting Properties for a ‘Set Text Properties’ Action .................................................. 85
Setting Properties for a ‘Set ActiveX Properties’ Action ............................................ 85
Setting Properties for a “Set Page Refresh Option” Action ....................................... 86
Setting Properties for a ‘Set Screen Mode’ Action .................................................... 86
Setting Properties for the ActiveX Method’s Action .................................................. 87
Working with Macros ................................................................................................. 88
Creating a Macro .................................................................................................... 88
Modifying a Macro .................................................................................................. 90
Deleting a Macro ..................................................................................................... 90
Chapter 4 Router Rule Creation .......................................................................................... 91

Router Rule Creation Overview ................................................................................. 91
Setting Router-Specific Events ................................................................................... 91
Using ‘On Crosspoint Status’ Events ........................................................................ 92
Using ‘On Lock/Protect Status’ Events ...................................................................... 94
Using ‘On Salvo Status’ Events ................................................................................. 95
Using ‘On Restrict Status’ Events .............................................................................. 96
Using ‘On Signal Presence Status’ Events ................................................................. 97
Setting Router-Specific Actions .................................................................................. 98
Setting Properties for a ‘Select Destination’ Action ................................................... 99
Setting Properties for a ‘Select Source’ Action ........................................................ 100
Setting Properties for a ‘Clear Selected’ Action ...................................................... 101
vi Contents
Setting Properties for a ‘Query Destination Status’ Action ...................................... 101

Setting Properties for a ‘Query Signal Presence Status’ Action ................................ 101
Setting Properties for a ‘Take Crosspoint’ Action .................................................... 102
Setting Properties for a ‘Take Selected’ Action ....................................................... 103
Setting Properties for a `Set Crosspoint Match Type' Action ................................... 103
Setting Properties for a ‘Protect Selected Destination’ Action ................................. 104
Setting Properties for a ‘Lock Selected Destination’ Action ..................................... 105
Setting Properties For a “Swap Destinations” Action .............................................. 106
Setting Properties for a ‘Restrict Crosspoint’ Action ................................................ 108
Setting Properties for a ‘Restrict Selected Crosspoint’ Action .................................. 109
Setting Properties for a ‘Select Salvo’ Action .......................................................... 110
Setting Properties for a ‘Execute Selected Salvo’ Action .......................................... 111
Setting Properties for a ‘Execute Salvo’ Action ........................................................ 112
Setting Properties for a ‘Clear Selected Salvo’ Action .............................................. 112
Chapter 5 SNMP Plug-in ........................................................................................................ 115

SNMP Plug-in Overview ............................................................................................ 115
Setting Conditions for ‘On SNMP Variable Value Update’ Events ......................... 115
Setting Conditions for ‘On SNMP Trap’ Events ....................................................... 116
Setting Properties for an ‘SNMP Get Variable Value’ Action ................................. 118
Setting Properties for an ‘SNMP Set Variable Value’ Action .................................. 119
Setting Properties for a ‘SNMP Get Table’ Action ................................................... 120
Chapter 6 SuiteView Plug-in ............................................................................................... 121

SuiteView Actions Overview .................................................................................... 121
Setting Rules to Perform SuiteView Actions ........................................................... 121
Setting Properties for ‘Set Fullscreen On’ Action ..................................................... 122
Setting Properties for ‘Set Fullscreen Off’ Action .................................................... 122
Setting Properties for ‘Load SuiteView Preset’ Action ............................................. 123
Setting Properties for a ‘Send String to COM Port’ Action ...................................... 123
Setting Communication Options .............................................................................. 124
Creating a Preset ................................................................................................... 125
Creating a NEO SuiteView Navigator Page ............................................................. 125
Creating a Navigator Page using the ‘Load SuiteView Preset’ Action ...................... 125
Creating a Navigator Page using the ‘Load Preset’ Action ....................................... 126
Recalling a Preset Page ........................................................................................... 128
Chapter 7 Using Graphical Navigation Pages ............................................................. 129

Controlling Navigation Pages Overview ................................................................. 129
Refreshing a Graphical Navigation Page ................................................................. 129
Using Navigation Pages in Control Mode ................................................................ 129
Moving between Magellan CCS Navigator Pages ................................................... 130
Using the Graphical Navigation Context Menus ..................................................... 130
Using the Graphical Navigation Toolbar ................................................................. 131
Navigator’s Advanced Graphical Navigation vii
User Manual
Custom Properties Window ..................................................................................... 132
Appendix A Graphical Navigation Troubleshooting.................................................... 135

Graphical Navigation Troubleshooting OverView .................................................. 135
Build Mode Problems ................................................................................................ 135
Navigator Fails to Display Button State Images ....................................................... 135
Custom Non-Rectangular Buttons Appear Rectangular .......................................... 135
Background Does Not Update After Image File Is Modified .................................... 136
In Frame Wizard, Modules Do Not Appear in Frame Correctly ................................ 136
Problems Using AutoCAD Drawings as Backgrounds on Graphical Navigation pages ...
136
Control Mode Problems ........................................................................................... 137
CPU Usage Goes to 100% When Navigator Executes a Rule .................................. 137
Global Properties Do Not Work Across Pages ......................................................... 138
Alarms “Bubble Up” Incorrectly ............................................................................. 138
Cannot Find Navigator Pages ................................................................................. 138
Alarms Fail to Appear on a Navigator Page ............................................................ 138
Index......................................................................................................................... 141
viii Contents
ix
Preface
Manual Information
Purpose CCS Navigator User Manual Volume 2: Graphical Navigation is a companion to CCS
Navigator User Manual Volume 1: Device Control.
This manual details the features, operational procedures, and specifications of Graphical
Navigation tools. For information on the basic tools and interface of CCS Navigator, please
refer to the CCS Navigator User Manual Volume 1: Device Control.
Audience This manual is written for engineers, technicians, and operators responsible for the setup
and/or operation of the graphical navigation tools of CCS Navigator software.
Revision
History
Edition Software Version Release Date
A Navigator 4.0 September 2007
B Navigator 4.1 November 2007
C Navigator 4.3 August 2008
D Navigator 4.4 November 2008
E Navigator 4.5 April 2009
F Navigator 4.6 November 2009
G Navigator 4.6.1 June 2010
H Navigator 4.7 January 2011
I Navigator 4.7.1 July 2011
J Navigator 4.8 March 2012
x Preface
Writing Conventions
Table 1-1 Conventions

and selection names
of menus and windows
elsewhere

Application including CCS Navigator, CCS Pilot, and CCS CoPilot

1
1 Introduction to Graphical
Navigation
Graphical Navigation Overview

This book outlines tools that are available with the NAVIGATOR-SRV and
NAVIGATOR-SNMP licenses. The basic interface is covered in Magellan CCS
NavigatorUser Manual Volume 1: Device Control.
The NAVIGATOR-SRV and NAVIGATOR-SNMP licenses are used to create Navigation pages.
A Navigation page is a document containing graphics that represent a network
environment.
The NAVIGATOR-RTR license and router pages are described in Volume 6.
In Build mode, Administrator users with a NAVIGATOR-SRV or NAVIGATOR-SNMP license

can create pages that include buttons, symbols, links, images, Navigator frames, ActiveX
controls, signal monitors and text objects. Each of the graphical objects have configurable
properties that determine their appearance and how they respond to specific, defined
events, such as mouse clicks and router events. You can add objects to a page and then
reposition, resize, and configure them as required.
If you need other images in addition to the supplied ones, you can import any *.bmp or
*.jpg files.
Navigation pages can be created using a panel wizard, or they can be created by hand. CCS
Magellan CCS Navigator has wizards for creating specific pages depending on the plug-ins
you have. Those wizards are described in the plug-in documentation to which they relate.
Panels fall into two categories:
 Navigator pages
A Navigator page—for example, a Source Preview panel or Multi Display panel—has
router elements as part of the panel.
The Navigator page can have rules (actions and events) applied to it, and can be edited
after creation using page building elements, such as those outlined in the following
topics:
 Graphical Navigation Page Creation on page 7
 Router Rule Creation on page 91
 Control GUIs
A control GUI usually represents a single routing view or IconMaster device. A control
GUI cannot be edited to add buttons, rules, etc., but provides easy access to a wide
range of routing operations.
2 Chapter 1
Introduction to Graphical Navigation
Setting Graphical Navigation Options

You cannot set Graphical Navigation options unless the Graphical Navigation tool is
open.
To access the Graphical Navigation options, click the Options menu and select Graphical
Navigation. The Graphical Navigation Options dialog box has three tabs. They are
described in the following sections:
 General Options for the Graphical Navigation Pane on page 2

 Build Mode Options for Graphical Navigation Pages on page 3
 View Options for Graphical Navigation Pages on page 4
General Options for the Graphical Navigation Pane

The Graphical Navigation Options dialog box’s General tab looks like this:
Figure 1-1 General Graphical Navigation Options Dialog Box

The following table describes the features you can adjust on this tab of the Graphical
Navigation Options dialog box.
Table 1-1 General Graphical Navigation Options

Section Options Result
Graphical Page Width Type the pixel width for your page.
Options
Height Type the pixel height for your page.
Use default page size The default page size is 1000 pixels by
1000 pixels. At this size, you may need
to maximize the page or use
the horizontal and vertical scroll bars to
move to hidden areas of the page.
Navigator’s Advanced Graphical Navigation 3
User Manual
Table 1-1 General Graphical Navigation Options (Continued)

Section Options Result
Home Page Home Page Either type the path to a home page in
Options the box, or click browse [...] and use the
resulting page to find the *.nav file you
want to use as the home page.
Use Current Page Sets the default home page to load in
the Graphical Navigation page when
the Graphical Navigation tool opens.
Default Page Select one of two buttons:
 Last Used Page to have your last
used *.nav file appear as the default
page.
 Select Set Home Page to set the
default page as the home page.
Alarm Border Size Hotspot border size Adjusts the size of alarm borders on
Options (pixels) hotspots
Graphical Symbol Border Adjusts the size of alarm borders on
Size (pixels): graphical symbols
Set Defaults Returns both hotspot and graphical
symbol alarm border size settings to 3
Build Mode Options for Graphical Navigation Pages

Only an Administrator user can change Magellan CCS Navigator’s Build mode options.
Magellan CCS Navigator must be in Build mode to make these changes.
The Build Mode Options section has three check boxes and one menu.
Figure 1-2 Build Options of the Graphical Navigation Options Dialog Box
4 Chapter 1
The following table describes the features you can adjust on this tab of the Graphical
Table 1-2 Build Mode Options

Option Function
Show Grid Shows a drawing grid in Build mode to help you size and position your
drawings as you place graphical objects on the page. The grid is not
visible in Control mode
Snap to Grid Makes the graphical objects snap to the grid points, as if they are
magnetically attracted to them
Use Options for this field are:
 Icon
 Front View (when available)
 Hotspot
 LED
 Streaming control (when available)
The icon is the default view for graphical objects you create. When the
front view is not available for the newly created graphical object and this
option is selected, an icon is used instead
Hide Theme Every time there is a change in the button theme, a dialog box asks for
save confirmation of the changes. Select this option and the application will
confirmations no longer ask for confirmation every time you make a change to the
button theme.
View Options for Graphical Navigation Pages

The View Options tab contains four check boxes.
Figure 1-3 View Options in the Graphical Navigation Options Dialog Box
1 The following table describes the features you can adjust on this tab of the Graphical
User Manual
Table 1-3 View Options

Show Graphical Navigation Toolbar appears on the page in Control mode to assist
Toolbar (Control Mode) you in navigating the pages representing your network.
Show Graphical Navigation Status bar appears at the bottom of each graphical page.
Status Bar
Show Navigation window on If the Navigation paneis not open, selecting an object in
top when a device symbol is the Graphical Navigation page opens the Navigation
selected pane.
Page Initial View When this is not checked and you open a page, it opens
to its default size and zoom ratio. When this option is
selected, the two items below it become available. You
can choose one or the other but not both.
Fit to Window fits the new page to the size of the
Graphical Navigation area.
Remember zooming ratio applies the same zoom factor
to a page that is being opened that was applied to it the
last time it was visited
6 Chapter 1
7
2 Graphical Navigation Page

Creation
Illustrating the Network Environments

You must have a NAVIGATOR-SRV or NAVIGATOR-SNMP license to create pages, and a
NAVIGATOR-SRV, NAVIGATOR-SNMP, or NAVIGATOR-CLI license to use use pages to
monitor and control devices. Only Administrator users can create and modify pages.

environment.
An Administrator user with a NAVIGATOR-SRV or NAVIGATOR-SNMP license can create

Navigation pages using a panel wizard, or by hand. CCS Magellan CCS Navigator has
wizards for creating specific pages depending on the plug-ins you have. Those wizards are
described in the plug-in documentation to which they relate.
The following sections describe the Build mode tools used to create pages. If you are an
Administrative user with a NAVIGATOR-SRV or NAVIGATOR-SNMP license, you can add
buttons, symbols, links, images, Navigator frames, ActiveX controls, signal monitors, and
text objects to a Navigation page. If you need images other than those supplied, you can
import *.bmp or *.jpg files. Each graphical object has configurable properties that
determine its appearance and how it responds to specific, defined events, such as mouse
clicks and router events. You can reposition, resize, and configure objects after adding them
to a page.
You can associate two pages together by associating a “load page” action with an object on
one of the pages, and then identify the other page as the target page to load.
In Control mode, the finished drawing becomes a Navigation page, *.nav, which you can
use for monitoring and control of your network environment. On a page, you can click
buttons, symbols, links and other objects, open shortcut menus and define actions to
associate with objects. See Using Graphical Navigation Pages on page 129.
8 Chapter 2
Graphical Navigation Page Creation
Creating a New Graphical Navigation Page

Do NOT try to copy pages or databases from one folder to another. Do NOT
rename *.nav files. Unpredictable results may occur, including program crashes and
loss of data.
When creating a new Graphical Navigation page, Magellan CCS Navigator must be in
Build mode. Only an Administrator user with a NAVIGATOR-SRV or NAVIGATOR-SNMP
license can create Graphical Navigation pages. To create a new, blank Navigation page,
do one of the following:
 Click the New icon on the toolbar. A blank, unnamed Graphical Navigation page
appears.
or
 From the main menu, select Tools > Graphical Navigation. A new, unnamed
Graphical Navigation page appears in the Graphical Navigation area.
or
 Click File > New. The New Page Wizard opens.
Pick the icon for the type of page you want to create. To create a generic page, pick the
Blank Page icon on the General tab.
Various wizards may be available depending on your system’s configuration.
The wizard may have multiple pages, if you have plug-ins installed as part of your
Magellan CCS Navigator system. Follow the instructions for the type of page you are
creating.
For plug-in related New Page Wizards, see following the specific plug-in documentation
To edit the properties of the page, including its background, custom properties, rules and
page properties, see Setting the Properties of a Page on page 14.
For information on adding objects and buttons to the page, see Adding Objects to a
Graphical Navigation Page on page 17, Editing a Page on page 56, and Setting a Rule
for a Magellan CCS Navigator Object or Page on page 62.
To save the page, see Saving Graphical Navigation Pages on page 10. To re-open the
page, see Opening an Existing Page on page 11.
Creating a Frame View Page

Before you can create a Frame View page using the Frame View Wizard, the frame must be
discovered. You must be an Administrator user with a NAVIGATOR-SRV or
NAVIGATOR-SNMP license to discover the frame, or to build a page. See CCS Device
To create a Frame View page, follow these steps:
1 In the File menu, select New....

The Navigator New Page Wizard opens.
2 Click the General tab.

User Manual
The box now shows the format options for the new Opus panel and includes a preview of
the two layout options, Blank Page and Frame View.
3 Double click on the Frame View icon.

The Page Wizard opens.
Figure 2-1 Frame View Wizard

4 Choose the frame for which you want to create a page from the drop-down menu at the
top of the dialog box.
Check the information about the frame that appears below it. This can help you ensure that
it is the right frame, if it has been named obscurely.
5 Choose a background from the Page Background menu.

6 Click Finish.
A progress bar appears while Magellan CCS Navigator builds your frame image.
10 Chapter 2
Figure 2-2 Finished Frame page

You can create a rule to load a frame page. See Setting Properties for a ‘Load Frame
Page’ Action on page 78 for more information.
Saving Graphical Navigation Pages

The Save command saves the contents of the currently active page. To save the current
Graphical Navigation page, click Save on the toolbar, or click File on the menu bar and
then select Save.
To save all unsaved content in all open pages, click Save All on the toolbar, or click File on
the menu bar and then select Save All. This command can speed the closing of multiple
pages in Magellan CCS Navigator.
If the Graphical Navigation page has been saved before, it will overwrite the previous file.
If the Graphical Navigation page has not been saved before, a Save As dialog box will
open.
Figure 2-3 Save As Dialog Box for a Graphical Navigation Page

Filling in the contents of this dialog box is optional. You can enter a descriptive name or
leave the Page Name at its default. You can add a Description. You can place checks
beside each user and user group that will have access to this page.
User Manual
You can assign or alter access to this page from the User Accounts or User Groups
screens at any time. See Changing User Account Information on page 34 of CCS Navigator:
Advanced Graphical Navigation Application. Pages are stored in the Magellan CCS
Navigator Server , and can be accessed by a Magellan CCS Navigator Client user (with a
NAVIGATOR-CLI license) who has the appropriate privileges.
To create a duplicate of a page, right click on the page and then select Save Page As from
the menu that appears. A page created in this manner can be modified without altering the
original.
Opening an Existing Page

To open an existing Graphical Navigation page, click the Open File icon on the toolbar, or
click File on the menu bar and then select Open. When the Open box appears, select a
.nav file from the list of files in the Page folder, and then click Open.
You can have multiple Graphical Navigation pages open for editing or control.
Deleting a Navigator Page

 Click Delete on the toolbar.

 Choose File > Delete from the main menu.
The Delete dialog box opens.
Figure 2-4 Navigator Page Delete Dialog Box

2 Click a row, and then click Delete.
You can only delete one row at a time.
Previewing and Printing a Page

The Print Preview and Print commands are only available when a Graphical Navigation
page is open.
To show what a page will look like when it prints, click Print Preview on the toolbar or File
menu in the page is open.
To print a Magellan CCS Navigator page, click Print on the toolbar or File menu when the
page is open.
12 Chapter 2
Using Zoom Tools

No other functions are available while you are in Zoom Window mode. To perform other
actions, exit Zoom Window mode.
To use the Zoom menu to view a Graphical Navigation page, right-click in an empty area of
the page, and select Zoom. Then select one of the four options on the Zoom menu. These
options are as follows:
Table 2-1 Commands on the Zoom Menu

Command Function
Fit in Window Sizes the objects to fit in the existing page
Actual Size Shows the objects in their actual size in the
existing page
Zoom In Enlarges the objects in the existing page
(Keyboard shortcut: Press CTRL++)
Zoom Out Shrinks the objects in the existing page
(Keyboard shortcut: Press CTRL+-)
Zoom Window Zooms to a specific region
Zoom Previous Switches back to the previous zoom percentage
Also, on the Graphical Navigation toolbar, there is a Zoom button. See Using the
Graphical Navigation Toolbar on page 131 for more information.
Panning in a Graphical Navigation Page

No other functions are available while you are in Pan mode. To perform other actions, exit
the Pan mode.
The Pan function aids in moving within the Graphical Navigation page. It turns the cursor
into a hand. Click and drag to move the page about within the Graphical Navigation
page. The cursor will change to a closed hand while you are dragging the page.
To access the Pan function, do one of the following:

 Press CTRL+A.
 Right-click in the Graphical Navigation page and from the resulting shortcut menu,
select Pan. The cursor will change from an arrow to an open hand.
 Click Pan on the Graphical Navigation toolbar (Control mode only). The button
remains selected while the function is activated.
To Exit Pan Mode, do one of the following:

 Press CTRL+A
 Right-click within the Graphical Navigation page and select Exit from the shortcut
menu.
 Click Pan on the Graphical Navigation toolbar to deselect it (Control mode only)
User Manual
Defining Global Properties

You can also define custom properties, which only apply to a single page.
Magellan CCS Navigator has two types of properties: global properties and custom
properties. Global properties are available for all pages, and you can use them to define
rules for all pages, whereas custom properties are only available on the page where you
created them. Global properties are identified by a preceding (GP) in all Properties lists.
See Defining Custom Properties for a Page on page 15.
To create a global property:
1 From the main menu, choose Tools > Rules and Macros...
A dialog box appears.
2 Click the Global Properties tab.
Figure 2-5 Rules and Macros Dialog Box’s Global Properties Tab
3 Click New in the top right of the screen. A new row of blank cells will appear under the
Name, Initial Value and Description columns.
4 Click in the cell in the Name column and type in a name for the resource you want to
define.
5 Click in the cell in the Initial Value column and type in your definition for the resource in
that instance.
6 Click in the cell in the Description column and type in a description that makes sense to
you.
To add another global property, click New and another new empty row of cells will appear
below the existing one. Define this property as you did the previous one.
7 When you have finished defining all global properties, click Close.
For tips on where to use a global property, see the following topics:
 Setting Properties for a ‘Set Custom Property’ Action on page 82

 Setting an Event on page 66
14 Chapter 2
Deleting a Global Property

To delete one or more global properties, complete these steps:
The Rules and Macros dialog box appears.
2 Click the Global Properties tab.

3 Click in the row of the global properties list that you want to delete, and click Delete in the
tab toolbar.
4 Repeat the last step to delete other custom properties from the list.
5 To close the Global Properties box, click Close.
Setting the Properties of a Page

The Page Properties box for a Graphical Navigation page has three tabs: Background,
Custom Properties, and Rules. These tabs are only available in Build mode, for an
Administrative user on a PC with a NAVIGATOR-SNMP or NAVIGATOR-SRV license.
 On the Background tab, you can set a color fill to serve as the background for a page.
Or you can import an image—such as a map, drawing, or logo—to serve as the
background for the page. Imported background images must be in Windows bitmap or
JPEG format. See Setting a Color Fill as a Page Background on page 14 and
Setting an Image as a Page Background on page 15.
 On the Custom Properties tab, you can define the function of the resources you have
assigned to a page. To develop your own custom pages, you may want to add custom
properties. For example, you could use custom properties to track the current selected
router destination or source. See the following topics for more information:
 Defining Custom Properties for a Page on page 15
 Setting Conditions for an ‘On Custom Property Change’ Event on page 71
 On the Rules tab, you will define events and conditions that will trigger specified
actions. For example, you may create a rule that will cause something to happen when
the page loads or unloads. See Rules for Magellan CCS Navigator Pages and
Objects on page 61.
Setting a Color Fill as a Page Background

To set a color fill as the background for a Graphical Navigation page, complete these steps:
1 Right-click in an empty area of the page and select Properties....

2 On the Background tab of the Page Properties box, click the arrow by the Fill box and
then select a color from the resulting color palette, or click Other... to show an extended
color palette in the Color box.
3 In the Color box, select from the Basic Colors section, or click the mouse in the color and
black-to-white spectrums at right to show the color you want in the Color/Solid box.
If the page background is currently set to white, you may need to use the slider beside the
vertical color brightness bar which is located to the right of the color spectrums. This will
ensure that your selected color appears in the Color/Solid box.
User Manual
4 To add the color in the Color/Solid box to the Custom Colors palette, click Add to
Custom Colors.
5 Click OK to close the Color box.
6 Click Close to close the Page Properties box.
See Defining Custom Properties for a Page on page 15 to set the Custom Properties
tab of the Page Properties box.
Setting an Image as a Page Background

When you set an image to be a page background, the page will be automatically resized to
match the image. If the image is too small to “hold” all of the objects on the page, you will
need to manually modify the width and height of the Graphical Navigation page.
To set an image as the background for a Graphical Navigation page, complete these
steps:
1 Right-click in an empty area of the page and select Properties....

2 On the Background tab of the Page Properties box, click browse (...) at the right end of
the Image box.
3 When the Select Image File dialog box appears, browser to find a suitable *.bmp or *.jpg
image file.
A copy of the selected image is stored in the Magellan CCS Navigator *.nav page. If you
modify the original image, the changes will not be automatically shown in the Graphical
Navigation page. See Background Does Not Update After Image File Is Modified on
page 136.
4 Select the file, and then click Open.

The image will appear in the top left corner of the page.
5 Click Close to close the Page Properties box.

See Defining Custom Properties for a Page on page 15 to set the Custom Properties
tab.
Defining Custom Properties for a Page

You can also define global properties, which apply to all pages. See Creating a New
Graphical Navigation Page on page 8. Custom properties are identified by a preceding
(CP) in the Properties lists.
To develop your own custom pages, you may want to add custom properties and rules for
the page. Custom properties are available for all objects within a page, and you can use
them to define rules for the page. For example, the currently selected router destination or
source can be defined as a custom page property. Then you can create a page rule, defining
an action that will occur when that custom property, such as the router source, changes.
Custom properties work like variables, holding temporary values that define events while
Magellan CCS Navigator operates. If you need to store a certain value, such as the currently
selected router destination, you need to define a property for this—a “Destination”
property, for example.
16 Chapter 2
The Custom Properties table serves as a definition of your resources in terms of their
function or conditions of use. In the case of a router-control page, a Custom Properties
table might look something like this:
Table 2-2 Sample Custom Properties Table

Name Initial Value Description
Source1 Camera1 Source value when the page is loaded
Destination1 VTR1 Destination value when the page is
loaded
Destination2 VTR2 Destination value when page is
unloaded
Later, when you define rules for each of the objects on the page, you will call on these
definitions in associating specific Magellan CCS Navigator objects, events, conditions, and
actions with a specific Graphical Navigation page. See Rules for Magellan CCS Navigator
Pages and Objects on page 61 for more information.
Setting Custom Page Properties

To set the custom Graphical Navigation page properties, complete these steps:
1 Click the Custom Properties tab.

The Custom Properties table has three columns: Name, Initial Value, and Description.
The toolbar for the Custom Properties tab has two tools: New and Delete.
2 Click New on the toolbar.

A new row of blank cells will appear under the Name, Initial Value, and Description
columns.
3 Click in the cell in the Name column, and type in a name for the resource you want to
define.
4 Click in the cell in the Initial Value column and type in your definition for the resource in
that instance.
5 Click in the cell in the Description column and type in a description that makes sense to
you.
To add another custom property, click New and another new empty row of cells will appear
below the existing one. Define this property as you did the previous one.
6 When you have finished defining all custom properties for the page, click Close.
See Rules for Magellan CCS Navigator Pages and Objects on page 61 for how to set
rules that define events, conditions, and actions for specific objects and pages.
Deleting a Custom Property for a Page

You cannot delete custom page properties used to define events and actions.
To delete one or more custom properties for a page, complete these steps:
1 Right-click in an empty part of a Graphical Navigation page and select Properties....

2 Click the Custom Properties tab of the Page Properties box.
User Manual
3 Click in a row of the custom properties list that you want to delete, and click Delete on the
tab toolbar.
4 Repeat the last step to delete other custom properties from the list.
5 To close the Page Properties box, click Close.
Adding Objects to a Graphical Navigation Page

In Build mode, an Administrative user with a NAVIGATOR-SRV or NAVIGATOR-SNMP license
can add objects to a Graphical Navigation page. You have a variety of graphical object
types to use in customizing pages. There are two methods for adding these objects to the
Graphical Navigation page:
 Right-click and use the resulting shortcut menu

 Use the Create Objects toolbar, which is divided into three sections:
 A series of buttons, see Table 2-3
 The Symbols menu, see Adding a Resource Icon Symbol on page 36
 The Controls menu, see Adding Controls on page 42
Table 2-3 Graphical Tools Used to Build Pages

Tool Button Description Procedure
Arrow Changes the cursor from whatever tool had been
selected back to an arrow
Button Creates a button that looks and acts like a Windows Adding Buttons on page 17
button, with four customizable button states
Text Creates a customizable text object which does not Adding a Text Object on
support shadow, glow, or embossing page 24
Image Opens a dialog so you can import a *.bmp or *.jpg file, Adding an Image on page 25
like a symbol but with no label
Link Connects two symbols with a line, and tracks (follows) Creating Links Between
the symbols it links. You can customize the width, style, Symbols on page 41
color, and endpoints
Hotspot Creates an invisible object that floats over other objects, Adding a Hotspot on page 26
which flashes an alarm when it detects an error or
warning for a device or an associated Graphical
Navigation page
Signal Shows video signals, and can work in conjunction with Adding a Signal Monitor on
monitor hotspots page 27
Navigator A dialog box for viewing and controlling other pages Adding a Navigator Frame on
Frame within a page page 28
Adding Buttons
Only an Administrator user with a NAVIGATOR-SRV or NAVIGATOR-SNMP license can add
buttons. Buttons are added in Build mode.
18 Chapter 2
Buttons are clickable objects. You can use a pre-created theme (Magellan CCS Navigator
comes with many of them), you can edit pre-created buttons, or you can develop your own
buttons in a bitmap program such as Paint, Paintshop Pro or Adobe Photoshop.
Buttons can be either selected or unselected. A button is selected when the user clicks on
the button with the mouse cursor. If the button is a Toggle button, the button remains
selected when the user releases the mouse button.
Buttons can be either highlighted or unhighlighted. The exact meaning of highlighted or

unhighlighted is up to you. A button might be highlighted in response to a specific event,
and unhighlighted in response to a different event.
Since whether a button is selected has no bearing on whether it is highlighted, it has four
possible states:
 Selected, highlighted
 Selected, unhighlighted
 Unselected, highlighted
 Unselected, unhighlighted
You can associate a bitmap with each state. The only state that must have a bitmap is the
unselected/unhighlighted state. If the other states do not have bitmaps assigned to them,
this bitmap will be used for all states.
Creating a To create a button, complete these steps:

Button
1 Click the Add Button icon on the Create Objects toolbar, or right-click an empty spot in a
Graphical Navigation page, and then click Create > Button.
The cursor turns into the Add Button cursor.
2 Click on the Graphical Navigation page to create a button that is a preset size, or drag the
cursor to create a rectangular outline.
The button appears when you release the mouse button.
See Setting the Properties of a Button on page 18 for more information.
Setting the Properties of a Button

The Class and Subclass options on the Object tab are read-only.
To set the Object Properties for a button, complete these steps:
1 Right-click the button and select Properties....

The Object Properties dialog box appears with the Button tab displayed.
User Manual
Figure 2-6 Object Properties: Button

See the table below for instructions on completing the Button tab:
Table 2-4 Button Tab Options and User Action

Option User Action
Caption Type in the button caption text that you want to appear over the
button.
Click Font to the right of the caption to open a dialog box where you
can alter the font, style, size, effects and color of the button’s caption.
Word wrap Check to use word wrap, or clear the check box to disable. When word
wrap is disabled, text appears on a single line. If it is too long to fit on
the button, you will see the beginning of the text. If word wrap is on,
text will fill one line and then move to the next line below.
Color Click the arrow by the Color box, and select a color for the button from
the palette.
If you select an image for the button, you can still use the color palette
to select a color for the button.
Mouse Click: Click this button to configure behavior of the button (which may differ
Repeat depending on whether you are using a regular monitor and mouse, or a
touch screen). See Configuring Mouse Click Repeat on page 22 for
more information.
Toggle button When a button toggles, you can click on it when the associated feature
is on to turn that feature off and click it when that feature is off to turn
the feature on.
Select the check box to turn on button toggling; or clear the box
to disable toggling.
Button theme Click in the field to choose a pre-made theme. A button theme is a
grouping of bitmaps to represent the four different button states
(whether the button selected and/or highlighted). When you open the
drop-down menu, you can choose from the provided Magellan CCS
Navigator Button Themes (NBT) and Custom Button Themes (CBT)
Use Add to create a new theme, or the Modify button to edit a theme.
Both of these buttons open the Modify Theme dialog box. See Using
the Modify Themes Dialog Box on page 20
Use Remove to delete custom button themes only.
20 Chapter 2
Table 2-4 Button Tab Options and User Action (Continued)

Option User Action
Adjust button Select the check box to turn on, or clear the check box to disable size
size to match matching. When this is enabled, the button grows or shrinks to fit
image’s the image without distorting it.
Preview The Preview section of the screen displays the currently chosen button
theme.
Selected / Click the buttons to the left of the Selected and Highlighted boxes to
Highlighted preview the theme in the button’s four states.
See Setting the Properties of a Button on page 18 to set the button theme.
2 Complete the Rules tab. See Rules for Magellan CCS Navigator Pages and Objects on
page 61 for information on completing the Rules tab. For information on rule topics
specific to buttons, see:
 Setting Properties for a ‘Set Button Properties’ Action on page 81
 Setting Properties for a ‘Button Blink Mode’ Action on page 82
3 After you have completed the Rules tab, click Close.
Using a Pre-made Button Theme

To select a button theme, click the down arrow beside the Theme list box, and select a
theme from the list that shows. The Preview dialog box displays a view of how the selected
button theme appears for each button state.
To see the appearance of each of the different button states, use the Selected and
Highlighted check boxes below the Preview dialog box. These check boxes do not
change the bitmap used. They only show you which of the four bitmaps you are currently
viewing.
Using the Modify Themes Dialog Box

If you choose to add a new button theme (by clicking the Add button in the Button
Object Properties dialog box) or modify an existing theme (by clicking the Modify button
in the Button Object Properties dialog box), the Modify Theme dialog box will open.
User Manual
Figure 2-7 Modify Theme Dialog Box
The following table describes the sections of the Add Theme and Modify Theme dialog
boxes:
Table 2-5 Sections of the Add Theme or Modify Theme Dialog Box
Section Description
Theme Name Displays the name of the theme. If you are creating a new theme, type
the new theme name here. You may leave the theme name blank if you
are simply customizing the look and feel of one button, and do not
want to save the changes as a theme in the database.
Transparent Magellan CCS Navigator buttons are rectangular. To make a portion of
the button area appear as background (for example so the button can
be round or donut-shaped), use a pixel-editing program such as Paint,
Paintshop Pro or Photoshop to apply a transparency color to the areas
you want to appear as background.
Transparency Click the button to open a color palette and choose the color that will
Color be transparent on your buttons. The default transparency color is
magenta with RGB values of 255, 0, 216.
Custom Images Displays the location of the bitmaps used to show each button state.
Each state can have a corresponding bitmap associated with it. The only
state that must have a bitmap is the unselected/unhighlighted state; all
other states are optional.
See Adding Buttons on page 17 for more information about button
states.
Save these (Modify Theme dialog box only). Select the check box to create a new
changes as a theme, and type a name in the Theme Name box. Leave the box
new theme unselected to modify the properties only for this button; no changes to
the theme will result.
22 Chapter 2
Removing Custom Button Themes

You cannot remove any of the Magellan CCS Navigator button themes provided with
Magellan CCS Navigator, but you can remove any custom button themes that you have
created. To remove a custom button theme, select the theme to be removed from the
Theme drop-down list, and click the Remove button.
Configuring Mouse Click Repeat

On the Button tab of the Object Properties dialog box, click Mouse Click Options to
open the Mouse Click Repeat dialog box.
Figure 2-8 Mouse Click Repeat Dialog Box

There are three options:
 Single Click - No matter how long the mouse button is held down, it will be recorded
as a single click.
 Mouse Click Repeat - A click will be interpreted as multiple clicks, the duration
determined by the durations you set for Repeat delay (which will be interpreted as click
duration) and Repeat wait (which will be interpreted as the time between virtual clicks).
 Press & Hold - This option should be chosen in instances where a button must be held
for a longer-than-normal duration in order to perform a function, such as panel lock.
To set the area of the button that is sensitive to clicking as less than the entire area of the
button, enter a percentage in the Sensitivity area field. This number cannot be set to
greater than the size of the button.
Creating Buttons to Load Other Magellan CCS Navigator Pages

If you create a non-rectangular shape for a button bitmap—such as a circle, ellipse, or star,
then use a pixel-editing program like PhotoShop or PaintShop Pro to create a pink-colored
mask for the shape so that just the shape itself shows. If you do not create a mask for the
shape, the entire rectangle occupied by the bitmap will appear.
Set the RGB color of the mask to 255, 0, 216. Magellan CCS Navigator is configured
to show this color as transparent, so your custom shape will show through when you insert
the bitmap on the Magellan CCS Navigator page.
To create navigation buttons that load another page, follow these general steps:
1 In Build mode, create a button.

See Adding Buttons on page 17 for details.
User Manual

See Setting the Properties of a Button on page 18 for details.
3 Set an action to load a Magellan CCS Navigator page.

See Setting Properties for a ‘Load Page’ Action on page 78 for details.
4 Set the action properties for loading a page.

See Setting Properties for a ‘Load Page’ Action on page 78 for details.
Adding a A hot button carries traits of buttons and of hot spots. When a rule assigned to a hot
button is triggered, the button automatically changes color as defined in the properties of
Hot Button the button.
Creating a Hot Button

To create a button, complete these steps:
1 Click the Add Hot Button icon on the Create Objects toolbar, or right-click an empty spot
in a Graphical Navigation page, and then click Create > Hot Button.
The cursor turns into the Add Hot Button cursor.
2 Click on the Graphical Navigation page to create a hot button that is a preset size, or drag
the cursor to create a rectangular outline.
The button appears when you release the mouse button.
See Setting the Properties of a Button on page 18 for more information.
Setting the Properties of a Button

To set the Object Properties for a button, complete these steps:

The Object Properties dialog box appears with the Hot Button tab displayed.
24 Chapter 2
Figure 2-9 Object Properties: Button

2 Enter text that will appear on the hot button in the Caption field.
3 Click Font to change the font, color, size, and effects on the text.
4 Click Word wrap if you want the title to make line breaks to fit on the button; otherwise,
leave Word wrap clear to have the text cropped if it exceeds the size of the button.
5 For each of the alarm states, pick a color.
6 Complete the Rules tab.
See Rules for Magellan CCS Navigator Pages and Objects on page 61 for information
on completing the Rules tab.
Adding a Text Object

text objects. Text objects are added in Build mode.
To create a text object, right-click an empty area on the Graphical Navigation page, and
then select Create > Text, or click Create Text on the Create Objects toolbar. The cursor
will turn into the Create Text cursor. Click the mouse to place the text on the page.
To resize a text object, drag one of its eight sizing handles with the mouse. This does not
change the font size of the text —just the boundaries of the object. To change the size of
the font, you must change the Object Properties of the text.
Setting the Properties of a Text Object

To set the Object Properties box for a text object, right-click the Text object and select
Properties....
User Manual
The Object Properties box for a Text object has three tabs: Text, Object, and Rules. The
options in the Text tab are described in the table below:
Table 2-6 Text Options and Suggested User Action

Option User Action
Text box Type in your text.
Word wrap Select the check box to enable word wrap, or clear it to disable
word wrap.
Horizontal Alignment Select Left, Center, or Right.
Vertical Alignment Select Top, Middle, or Bottom.
Font Select a font family, weight, and size.
Text Color Select a color from the Color list.
Text Effects: Select the check box by a text effect to enable that effect. Clear
• Underline the check box to disable the effect.
• Strikeout
The Class and Subclass options on the Object tab are read-only. The class is “Text,” and
the subclass is blank.
about how to complete the Rules tab. See Setting Properties for a ‘Set Text Properties’
Action on page 85 for information on a rule commonly applied to text.
Adding an Image
Images can only be added to the active Graphical Navigation page. Only an Administrator
user with a NAVIGATOR-SRV or NAVIGATOR-SNMP license can add images. Magellan CCS
Navigator must be in Build mode.
Custom graphics, such as maps of a network or custom corporate logos, become images
when imported into Magellan CCS Navigator. Images can be *.bmp or *.jpg files.
To import a *.bmp or *.jpg image file, complete these steps:
1 Click Create Image on the Create Objects toolbar; or right-click an empty area of a
Graphical Navigation page, click Create > and then select Image.
2 Use the Select Image File box to browse for the image file.
3 Select the file you want, and then click Open.
The cursor changes to a special add image cursor.
4 Click on the Graphical Navigation page.

The image appears.
Setting the Properties of an Image

To change the object properties of an image, complete these steps:
26 Chapter 2
1 Right-click the image, and then select Properties....

The Object Properties box for an image contains these tabs: Image, Object, and Rules.
2 If the image is a *.bmp file, you will have the following options:
Table 2-7 Image Tab Options for *.bmp Files

Option User Action
Transparent Select the check box to enable the fill in a *.bmp file to appear
transparent, or clear the check box to disable the transparency
feature.
Transparent Color Click the arrow, and then select a color for the transparency
from the color palette.
3 See Rules for Magellan CCS Navigator Pages and Objects on page 61 for information
about how to complete the Rules tab.
Adding a Hotspot
You can adjust the size of the alarm borders on all symbols on the Graphical Navigation
Options dialog box. See General Options for the Graphical Navigation Pane on

hotspots. Hotspots are added in Build mode.
Hotspots float invisibly over your Graphical Navigation page, ready to be used for any
Magellan CCS Navigator action that you have assigned to them. For example, if a hotspot
has a rule for detecting errors and warnings on a particular device and an error or warning
is detected, the hotspot begins to flash an alarm. When the alarm causes the hotspot to
flash in the Graphical Navigation page, alarm information is provided to the Diagnostics
dialog box and Navigation pages and, in some cases, the Slot Status section of frame
Control dialog boxes. The hotspot alarms follow the existing alarm color-coding system in
To create and link a hotspot, follow these steps when in Build mode:
1 Click Create Hotspot on the Create Objects toolbar, or right-click anywhere in the
Graphical Navigation page, and then click Create > Hotspot in the resulting shortcut
menu.
A special hotspot cursor appears.
2 Click and drag the cursor to create a rectangular outline.

3 Right-click on the rectangle and select Properties from the resulting shortcut menu.
The Object Properties box contains these tabs: Symbol, Object, Graphics, and Rules.
User Manual
4 On the Symbol tab, enter a Short Name, Name, Alternate Name, and Description for
the hotspot. The Show as Label box has no effect.
5 To associate a device with this hotspot, select the Object tab, and then type in the IP
address for the device.
6 To associate a rule with this hotspot, select the Rules tab and define the rule accordingly.
on how to complete the Rules tab.
7 Click OK.
Alternatively, you can drag-and-drop a symbol from the resource tree into a Graphical
Navigation page, and then turn it into a hotspot by right-clicking the icon, pointing to
View>, and selecting Hotspot. All object property information is inherited by the newly
created hotspot icon from the resource tree, including the icon description, IP address, and
associated rules. See Adding a Symbol from the Resource Tree on page 38.
Adding a Signal Monitor

You cannot have a signal monitor object open at the same time as a Signal Monitor due to
limitations in the ActiveX control.
Only an Administrator user with a NAVIGATOR-SRV or NAVIGATOR-SNMP license can add a

signal monitor to a Navigator page. Magellan CCS Navigator must be in Build mode.
Before creating a signal monitor object, the signal monitor properties must be set, as the
properties that are set for a signal monitor affect the signal monitor object as well.
To learn more about signal monitor settings, see Video Output Monitoring on page 287 of
CCS Navigator: Advanced Graphical Navigation Application.
To create a signal monitor object, follow these steps:
1 Click Create Signal Monitor on the Create Objects toolbar, or right-click anywhere in the
Graphical Navigation page, and then click Create > Signal Monitor in the resulting
shortcut menu.
A special monitor icon cursor appears.
2 Left-click in the Graphical Navigation page, and a 4:3 aspect ratio Signal Monitor
appears.
This object can be moved, scaled and linked just like any other object on the Graphical
Navigation page.
3 Right-click the Signal Monitor object and select Properties from the resulting shortcut
menu.
This opens the Object Properties box.
28 Chapter 2
Figure 2-10 Object Properties Dialog Box for the Signal Monitor
4 Complete the Object Properties box, which is described in the following table.
Table 2-8 Controllable Signal Monitoring Properties

Property Description
Customized object The object can be scaled to any desired size within the Graphical
size Navigation page. If the aspect ratio is locked, the object will
maintain the specified aspect ratio throughout scaling.
Fit-to-Page object The object will enlarge to fit the Graphical Navigation page. If
size the aspect ratio is locked, the object will scale to fill the page while
maintaining its aspect. If the aspect ratio is not locked, the object
will scale to fit the entire Graphical Navigation page.
Lock aspect ratio When checked, the object will be constrained to the selected
aspect ratio. When you check this, choose either 4:3 or 16:9 aspect
ratio.
Adding a Navigator Frame

Only an Administrator user with a NAVIGATOR-SRV or NAVIGATOR-SNMP license can add a
Navigator frame. Frames are added in Build mode.
A Magellan CCS Navigator frame displays another Graphical Navigation page inside the
current page. To add a new Magellan CCS Navigator frame to the Graphical Navigation
page follow these steps:
1 Click the Add Navigator Frame icon in the Create Objects toolbar, or right-click in the
Graphical Navigation page and select Create > Navigator Frame.
The Add Navigator Frame cursor appears.
2 Drag the cursor to create to create a rectangular outline.

The Class and Subclass options of the Object tab are read-only. To set the Object
Properties for a Navigator Frame, complete these steps:
3 Right-click the frame, and then select Properties....

The Navigator Frame tab, in the Frame View Options section, has three options:
User Manual
 Automatically fit the page in area - When selected, Graphical Navigation pages
being viewed and controlled in the Magellan CCS Navigator frame are scaled to fit
within the frame. If the check box is unselected, Graphical Navigation pages being
viewed and controlled in the Magellan CCS Navigator frame appear actual size;
horizontal and vertical scroll bars appear when necessary.
 Disable vertical scroll - When selected, no scroll bar will appear at the bottom of
the screen. Any data outside the frame’s visible area will be unavailable.
 Disable horizontal scroll - When selected, no scroll bar will appear at the right
side of the screen. Any data outside the frame’s visible area will be unavailable.
See Setting Properties for a ‘Set Frame Custom Property’ Action on page 83 to
complete the Rules tab.

You can also create a Frame Page using the New Page Wizard. See Creating a Frame View
Page on page 8 for more information.
Streaming in a Graphical Navigation Page

streaming objects to a page. Pages are built in Build mode.
A streaming component in a Graphical Navigation page can be created either manually or

using a wizard. Your options include the following:
 Create a streaming page using a wizard. See Creating a Multi-Monitor Streaming

Page on page 29.
 Create a streaming window on any page. See Adding a Streaming Icon on page 35.
Creating a Multi-Monitor Streaming Page

If you need to create a streaming page using X75, QSEE6800+, and/or FR6802+QXF inputs,
you can use the Multi-Monitor wizard. Follow these steps:
1 From the main menu, choose File > New. The New Page wizard opens.
2 Click on the Quality Control tab, and then double click the Multi-Monitor View icon.
30 Chapter 2
Quality
Control tab
Figure 2-11 Quality Control Tab of the New Page Wizard

The Page Wizard (step 1 of 2) opens.
Figure 2-12 Wizard Step 1of 2

3 Click Add to open a Device Selection dialog box.
The Device Selection dialog box lists the contents of the Discovery and Network folders
of the Navigation pane.
You can only add one item at a time. To add another item, click Add again.
4 Select one of the following types of item:

 QSEE6800+ module (all inputs to that modules are added by default, but you can
change this later)
 Input below a QSEE6800+ module
 6800+ETH module (all modules that support streaming that are in the frame are
selected by default)
And then click OK to close the Device Selection dialog box.
5 Edit your selections on the Step 1 of 2 page.

User Manual
You can switch the selected input for a QSEE6800+ module by clicking the Input field. This
opens a drop-down menu that lists All plus each of the individual inputs.
You can add multiple individual inputs from the same QSEE6800+ or 6800+ETH by
selecting it multiple times in the Device Selection dialog box, however, each individual
input can only be selected once. If, for example, you choose a QSEE6800+ module (with All
selected in the Input field of the table), and an input to that module as well, you will
receive an error message. You must remove one of the selections from the Device
Selection (Thumbnails) table before proceeding.
6 Click Next>> to proceed to the Step 2 of 2 screen.
Figure 2-13 Wizard Step 2 of 2
The FR6802+QXF frame does not support MPEG-4 streaming. If you only select modules
from the frame, the MPEG-4 option will not be available.
The Name field only accepts data in English. If you are using an alternate operational
7 Choose the number of MPEG-4 players you wish to have on the Navigator page. You must
have the QSEE6800+HS option to view video in an MPEG-4 player.
You can only have one MPEG-4 player per QSEE6800+ module, and four per Navigator
page.
If you don’t have the QSEE6800+HS option, or do not wish this page to contain an MPEG-4
player, click None.
8 If you choose One or Two MPEG-4 players, you can choose from four preset layouts. Select
an option to view a preview of it on the Step 2 of 2 screen. These are the options:
32 Chapter 2
Table 2-9 QSEE6800+ Layouts

Layout Description
Top Thumbnails at the top of the page, and streaming video at the bottom
Bottom Thumbnails at the bottom of the page, and streaming video at the top
Clockwise Thumbnails arranged in a spiral, starting from the top left corner (and
moving clockwise), with streaming video components at the center
Counter Thumbnails arranged in a spiral layout, starting from the top left corner
Clockwise (and moving counter clockwise), with streaming video components at
the center
If you did not choose any MPEG-4 players, there will not be any Grid Layout options.
Thumbnails will be laid out from left to right, top to bottom on your Graphical Navigation
page.
9 (Optional) To apply a custom background, click Select to browse for an image. For best
results, your background should be the same size as the viewing area that it will be seen on.
Otherwise it will be cropped or will leave blank areas.
The background image can be a .BMP or .JPG graphic file.
10 Click Finish.
There may be a slight delay while your page is built.
Switch to Control mode to view your page, or stay in Build mode to add or edit controls,
change thumbnail sizes, etc.
Adding a Thumbnail or Stream to a Graphical Navigation Page

You can manually add the following resources to a Graphical Navigation panel as a
thumbnail:
 Input to a QSEE6800+
 Module that supports streaming in a Selenio frame
 6800+ module that supports streaming that is installed in an FR6802+QXF frame with
a 6800+ETH resource module
 X75 (with X75STR-OPT option)
If the X75 has the X75STR-OPT option, or if the QSEE6800+ has the QSEE6800+HS option,
you can also use this method to stream MPEG-4 video.
To add a thumbnail to any Graphical Navigation page, follow these steps:
1 In Build mode, drag the thumbnail source from the Navigation pane to a Graphical
Navigation page.
For information on special QSEE6800+ features like waveform, vectorscope, and audio
meters, see QSEE6800+ Control Dialog Boxes on page 278 of CCS Navigator: Advanced
Graphical Navigation Application.
2 Right click on the Input icon and then choose View > Thumbnail or View > Streaming
(if the selected resource is equipped with a QSEE6800+HS option or X75OPT-STR option
only).
User Manual
3 Reposition the dialog box by clicking on the thumbnail or MPEG-4 streaming dialog box and
holding down the mouse button while dragging it to a new position.
4 To adjust the settings, right click on the thumbnail or streaming icon and select Properties.
See Setting the Streaming Object’s Properties on page 35 for more information.
5 To change the size of a thumbnail, right click on it and choose Size and then select from the
menu that appears.
Sizes are defined in the table below:
Table 2-10 Thumbnail Sizes for QSEE6800+

Low Quality Medium Quality High Quality Thumbnail
Thumbnail Thumbnail
Standard definition
128×96 192×144 256×192

High definition
128×72 192×108 256×144

SD/HD CIF MPEG-4
HD = Letterbox
You can also drag the corners of a thumbnail or MPEG-4 stream to resize it.
If you choose two thumbnails, you have additional options of Same Size, Same Width
and Same Height. These options set the size of all selected thumbnails to match the
proportion of the last-selected thumbnail.
To change the MPEG-4 stream, in Control mode, drag and drop a thumbnail onto the
Streaming window.
Alarms Monitoring
Alarms are indicated on the borders for thumbnails in Graphical Navigation pages.
Alarm borders are not available for modules in a Selenio frame.

34 Chapter 2
The outside border of a thumbnail indicates its alarm level.
Table 2-11 Color Indicators for Alarm Levels

Alarm Level Border Color
No alarm Black
Warning Yellow
Critical Red
Acknowledged Orange
For QSEE6800+ modules, you can set which alarms are active, and you can set their trigger
thresholds. These settings are set on an input-by-input basis, and appear on each input’s
Control dialog box. For more information, see Using a QSEE6800+ Input Control Dialog Box
on page 282 of CCS Navigator: Advanced Graphical Navigation Application. For a complete
description of alarm settings, see your QSEE6800+ Installation and Operation Manual.
Starting a QuickTime Player From a Graphical Navigation Page

When you start a Quicktime player to view streaming video, you can listen to audio output,
in addition to monitoring the video. To add a button to start streaming video, follow these
steps:
1 With Magellan CCS Navigator in Build mode, place a button on a Graphical Navigation
page. See Adding Buttons on page 17 for more information.
2 Right-click on the button and select Properties... from the menu that appears.
The Object Properties dialog box appears.
3 Select the Rules tab, and then click the New Rule button.
A new line appears in the Rules table.
4 In the new rule’s Event list, select OnMouseClick.

The default Condition setting for this event is Always; you can leave that as it is, or you
can change it by clicking the Condition button. See Defining Conditions on page 67 for
more information.
5 From the new rule’s Action list, select Launch Application.
Magellan CCS Navigator is compatible with QuickTime version 7.1.
6 Click Action Properties.

The Action Property dialog box appears. Fill it in with the following information:
Command: c:\program files\quicktime\quicktimeplayer.exe

(Or the complete path to your QuickTime Player installation, if it differs from the above)
Arguments: rtsp://[IP Address]:554/x75streaming
(Note replace [IP Address] by the IP address of the X75 streaming Ethernet port)
OR
Arguments: rtsp://[IP Address]:554/streaming
(Note replace [IP Address] by the IP address of the QSEE6800+ module)
You can leave the Initial Directory field blank.
User Manual
7 Click OK to close the Action Properties dialog box. Close the Object Properties dialog
box by clicking the X in the top right corner.
When you enter Control mode, the new button will open a QuickTime Player and play
streaming video from the selected source.
Adding a You can add streaming icons to a Graphical Navigation page from the following
Streaming streaming items:
Icon
 X75 with X75OPT-STR option
 Input listed under a QSEE6800+ module
 Q-SEE compliant 6800+ module when installed in a FR6802+QXF frame that also
contains a 6800+ETH resource module (Q-SEE compliant modules can output
thumbnails only)
Follow these steps:
The number of streaming icons you can have without slowing down your computer will
depend on the specifications of your computer system.
1 Open both the Navigation pane and Graphical Navigation page in Build mode.
2 Perform one of the following actions:
 Drag a streaming item from the resource tree, and drop it on the Graphical
Navigation page.
OR
 Cut item that is capable of streaming from the resource tree, and then paste it on
the Graphical Navigation page.
OR
 Copy item that is capable of streaming from the resource tree, and then paste it on
the Graphical Navigation page.
An icon representing that item will appear on the Graphical Navigation page.
3 Right click on the new icon in the Graphical Navigation page and choose View >
Thumbnail or View > Stream (not available for Q-SEE compliant 6800+ modules in
FR6802+QXF frames).
Setting the Streaming Object’s Properties

A streaming object (thumbnail or MPEG-4 video streaming icon) has a properties page.
To adjust the settings, right click on the Thumbnail or Streaming monitor and select
Properties. The Object Properties dialog box appears:
36 Chapter 2
Figure 2-14 Object Properties Streaming Player Tab

If the Streaming Player tab is not the active tab, click on it to bring it to the foreground.
Settings include the following:
Table 2-12 Streaming Player Options

Option Function
Name Enter a label that will appear on the Graphical Navigation page only;
by default, the name is a combination of the module name and input
UMD ID (in the case of a QSEE6800+ or Q-SEE compliant 6800+
module) or the X75 unit’s network name
Use name Check here to use the UMD ID from the module/input (if available)
from module/
input
Hide Player Check here to view just the thumbnail or streaming icon without
Controls buttons or border.
Hide Player Check here to turn off display of the thumbnail’s name, audio meters,
Controls alarm border and Waveform and Vectorscope buttons
Aspect Ratio When checked, the object will be constrained to the selected aspect
ratio when resizing
URL Enter the URL for any streaming source you wish to view (This option
will not work if you create the streaming icon from a QSEE6800+
module/X75 frame. Rather, to stream from an external URL, right click
on your Graphical Navigation page and select Create > Streaming
Player to stream from a URL, open the Properties dialog and type the
URL)
Adding a Resource Icon Symbol

symbols. Symbols are added in Build mode.
User Manual
Items in the Symbol menu produce a graphic with a label underneath which can be
connected to another symbol with a Link object. You can set its device ID. Many of the
items in the Symbol list can be discovered and appear in the tree view. If you want to
duplicate an item from the Discovery folder of the Tree view, just click on that item and
drag it to the Graphical Navigation page.
Some Symbol menu items first open a dialog box allowing you to choose the type of object
in that particular category. Others do not (these ones have nothing in the Options field of
the table below). The symbol menu contains the following items:.
Table 2-13 Graphical Objects Available in the Symbol Menu

Object Options
Studio
Rack
Server...
Select from a Generic, Generic Video, Nexio or VR server.
Frame... Choose from:
 Generic Frame  FR-3903-E (3RU Frame)  Prophesy Series
 6800+ Frame  FR-3923-E (3RU Frame)  NetVX Video Networking
 Combiner System  HD Series System (SYS-1700,
SYS-200, SYS-300, or
 DL-810 (SD Digital  Integrator Series (4RU, 6RU, SYS-350)
Legalizer) or 8RU Frame)
 VIA32 Series
 DL-860 (SD/HD Digital  MIX BOX Series
Legalizer)  Digital Processing
 Opus Frame Synchronizer (X50, X75, or
 EDGE DPS575  PANACEA Series (1RU or 2RU X85)
 FR-3901-E (1RU Frame) Frame)  XPlus Series (1RU or 2RU
 FR-3901-E-P (1RU Frame  Platinum Series (15RU, 28RU, Frame)
with LCP) 5RU, or 9RU Frame)  XPress Series
Product
Functional Choose from:
Block...  Generic Functional Block  NetVX module (various)  Platinum Module (various,
 3901PS  FBC-6001 including PM-xxx and
PT-xxx modules)
 3901RES-E  Integrator Control Card
 Predator PiP or System
 3902PS  Integrator Module
 SQM ModuleVIA32 Module
 6800+ Module, 6800+ PS,  Integrator PS or PS
or Eth Card  NEO Module VIA32 Module
 Centrio Module, PiP, or
System
Control Choose from:
Panel...  Generic Control panel  NUCLEUS Control Panel 1RU  RCP-X75 Remote Control
 LCP-3901-1U  Opus Master Control Panel
 NUCLEUS Control Panel  RCP-CCS-1U  Router Control Panel

38 Chapter 2
Table 2-13 Graphical Objects Available in the Symbol Menu

Object Options
Gateway... Select from:
 Generic gateway
 CCS Protocol gateway
 Digibus gateway
 EDGE gateway
Folder
Router Control
HTTP Server
Routing System
Magellan CCS Navigator provides three methods for adding symbols. See the following
topics:
 Adding a Symbol with the Create Objects Toolbar or Menu on page 38

 Adding a Symbol from the Resource Tree on page 38
Adding a Symbol with the Create Objects Toolbar or Menu

1 Click on the Graphical Navigation page and then click the Symbol pull-down menu on the
Create Objects toolbar.
OR
Right-click in the Graphical Navigation page and click Create>.
2 Select from the list of symbols which includes: Studio, Rack, Server…, Frame…, Product,
Functional Block…, Control Panel…, Gateway…, Folder, Router Control, Routing
System, and HTTP Server.
Many of these 12 symbol types provide a choice of symbols in a new dialog box. For
example, selecting Create > Server prompts a Create Server box to appear.
In the Create Server box, click the arrow on the Type box, select from the list of server
options, and then select either Icon or Front View. Note that not all symbols have a Front
View.
Adding a Symbol from the Resource Tree

This function is only available to Magellan CCS Navigator resource icons, linked graphical
objects, and Graphical Navigation pages that have been created in Magellan CCS Navigator
1.7 or later.
Dragging a resource icon from the resource tree onto the Graphical Navigation page
creates a link between the resource icon and the graphical object. With this link (a child
icon), Magellan CCS Navigator remembers the resource icon’s parent location in the
resource tree and the parent’s assigned functions. A graphical object in the Graphical
Navigation page performs the same actions as it could when it was part of the resource
tree. Now, when you double-click on a resource icon, the icon’s assigned action occurs as if
you had double-clicked on the parent node in the resource tree.
User Manual
Resource icons on which you can perform these actions include all discovered and
configured devices in the Network, Discovery, Temporary, Configuration, Catalog, and
Routers folders
Some of the actions that you can assign to an object in the resource tree include the ability
to open the Configuration dialog box, Control dialog box, URL locations for the HTTP
control of devices, and to start an external program in either Build or Control mode.
To add a symbol to a Graphical Navigation page from the resource tree, complete these
steps:
1 Open both the Navigation pane and the Graphical Navigation page.
2 Perform one of the following actions to create a symbol from an icon in the resource tree:
 Drag a resource icon from the resource tree, and drop it on the Graphical
Navigation page.
OR
 Cut or copy a resource icon from the resource tree, and then paste it on the
Graphical Navigation page.
An icon representing the selected device will appear on the Graphical Navigation page.
Some devices have various views you can choose from. Right-click the newly created icon,
point to View>, and then select from Icon, Front, Hotspot, or LED.
All object property information is inherited by newly created icons dragged/copied/cut from
the resource tree, including the icon description, IP address, and associated rules. When
Magellan CCS Navigator is in Control mode, if a CCS or SNMP device is configured to
display alarms, the border of the icon will display the alarm. When you click on a CCS
device in the Navigation pane, you can open its Control dialog box.
3 To change device information, right-click the new icon, select Properties..., and then make
the required changes within the Object Properties box.
You cannot move a Magellan CCS Navigator object from a Graphical Navigation page
to create an icon on the resource tree—only vice versa.
Setting the Properties of a Symbol

A symbol inherits the device ID of the object from which you created it. For example, if you
create a new graphical object by dragging the resource icon for a discovered device
from the Navigation pane into the Graphical Navigation page, the new graphical object
will inherit the IP address of that device on your network.
However, if you create the object using the Create menu or by dragging and dropping an
undiscovered graphical object from the Catalog folder, then the new object will have the
default IP address assigned to the device during manufacture. This is a placeholder IP
address that does not function. You must set the IP address of the graphical object before
Magellan CCS Navigator will recognize that it represents an actual device on your network.
To set the properties for a symbol, complete these steps:
1 Right-click the symbol and select Properties....

The Object Properties dialog box appears. This dialog box has four tabs: Symbol, Object,
Graphics, and Rules.
2 On the Symbol tab, you can change the names for the device or type in a description of it.
40 Chapter 2
The naming options for a device are the same as those in the Navigation panel. For a
complete description of these names, see Setting General Navigation Properties for a
Device on page 104.
To choose the name by which the symbol will be will be labeled on the Graphical Navigation
page, choose an item from the Show Label as: drop-down box. The options are as follows:
Table 2-14 Show Label As Options for Navigation Symbols

Option Function
Do not show label No label is shown
Short Name Short name is shown
Same as Navigation Tree Label is displayed as set in
Setting Table 7-14 in Volume 1.
3 On the Object tab, you can type a new IP address into the Device ID box.
To enter a new IP address, select the existing numbers in the corresponding box, and then
type in the numbers of the IP address of the actual device on your network that the symbol
represents.
You must change the IP address portion of the ID if you want the symbol to represent a
device of the same product type and family that resides at a different IP address.
Note that the Class and Subclass boxes on the Object tab are read-only.
4 On the Graphics tab, you can view the path to the image file used as the symbol. The box
is read-only.
5 On the Rules tab, you can create rules for a Graphical Navigation object or page. See Rules
for Magellan CCS Navigator Pages and Objects on page 61 for information
on completing the Rules tab. See Setting Properties for a ‘Set Symbol Properties’
Action on page 85 for information on the Set Symbol Properties action, which is commonly
applied to symbols.
6 Click Close to close the Object Properties box.
Setting the View for Graphical Navigation Symbols

All options may not be available for all symbols.
To set the view for Graphical Navigation symbols, right-click the symbol, select View>, and
then select from one of the four options described below.
Table 2-15 Commands on the View Menu and Their Functions

Command Function
Icon The symbol is shown as an icon
Front The symbol is shown as a front view, if that view
exists. If that view is not available, the Front option
will be disabled
Hotspot The object is shown as a hotspot
Hot button Shows the object as a hot button
User Manual
Table 2-15 Commands on the View Menu and Their Functions(Continued)

Command Function
LED Shows the object as an LED
Thumbnail Shows a thumbnail video image from the device
represented by the object
Stream Shows a streaming video from the device
represented by the object
Creating Links Between Symbols

See Setting Properties for a ‘Set Link Properties’ Action on page 84 for an action that
is commonly applied to links.
To link two Graphical Navigation symbols, complete these steps:
1 Click Add Link on the Create Objects toolbar, or right-click on the Graphical Navigation
page outside of any objects on the page, click Create> from the shortcut menu, and then
select Link.
The cursor will change into a plus (+) sign. When you move the cursor onto a symbol, a
circle will appear around the plus sign.
2 Click the mouse once on the start (source) symbol.

3 Move the cursor to an end (destination) symbol and click.
By default, the link will appear as an arrow, with its tail at the start symbol and its head just
outside of the end symbol.
Tips:
 Press the SHIFT key when moving the cursor if you want the link to snap to a
straight horizontal or vertical position on the page.
 Left-click anywhere on the Graphical Navigation page, prior to clicking the end
symbol, if you want to create a corner or non-direct link/route to the destination.
4 Right-click the link and select Properties....
The Object Properties box opens.
Figure 2-15 Object Properties for a Link

5 On the Link tab, adjust the appearance of the link. The table below describes the various
options:
42 Chapter 2
Table 2-16 Link Tab Options and User Action

Option User Action
Color Click the arrow by the Color box and select a color from the resulting
palette.
Transparent Select the check box to make the line appear transparent, or clear the
box to disable transparency. You cannot make lines with arrowheads
transparent.
Line style Select a line style from the list.
Line width Select a line width from the list.
Arrowheads: Select the check box by the Start or End option to assign it an
• Start arrowhead. Clear the check box by the Start or End option to disable
• End the arrowhead.

To view Link object properties, on the Object Properties dialog box, click the object tab. A
link’s class is “Link” and has no subclass.
For information on creating rules for a link, see Rules for Magellan CCS Navigator Pages
and Objects on page 61.
Deleting Nodes from the Resource Tree

This function is only available to Magellan CCS Navigator resource icons, its linked graphical
objects, and Graphical Navigation pages that have been created in Magellan CCS Navigator
1.7 or later.
Magellan CCS Navigator tracks the links of nodes that are dragged from the resource tree
and the resulting graphical objects in Graphical Navigation pages.
When you chose to delete a node from the resource tree, if it is linked to any graphical
objects, a Confirm Delete box appears. This box lists all of the linked pages and their paths,
and gives you the option to either continue with the deletion or to cancel your request. If
you delete the node, any linked graphical objects will lose the double-click actions of their
parent, but will retain any rules that have been defined for them.
Adding Controls
controls. Controls are added in Build mode.
User Manual
Objects in the Controls menu are customizable and able to generate or respond to events.
Table 2-17 Graphical Objects Available in the Controls Menu

Object Description Procedure
ActiveX Control Potentially adds any ActiveX control Adding an ActiveX
that is installed on your computer Control on page 43
Character Display Adds a display for showing string Setting a
status messages LTIMultiCharacter
Display on page 47
Timer Control Adds a time of day display or Adding a Timer
stopwatch-style timer Control on page 45
Spin Control Adds a control to the desktop to Adding a Spin
increment or decrement values on Control on page 48
another control
Player Control Adds a MPEG-4 streaming icon, Adding a Player
which you can use to view an RTSP Control on page 50
stream
Matrix Classic These options are only available in RouterNAV and the full
version of Magellan CCS Navigator. See Volume 6: Routing
Matrix Panel
Configuration for more information.
Multi-bus Panel
Multi-Bus Panel with
Salvo
Single Bus Panel
Single Bus Panel with
Monitor
We cannot guarantee the behavior of any non-LTI ActiveX controls. Ensure that you
understand the various events and actions that are available for the ActiveX controls that
you choose.
In Magellan CCS Navigator, you are able to insert any ActiveX control that is available on
your computer into a Graphical Navigation page. You can then call the methods of the
control, set the properties of the control, or respond to events generated by the control.
There are three menu options for the Controls button on the Create Objects toolbar:
ActiveX Controls, Character Display, and Timer Control. See these topics for more
information about the controls:
Other controls will be available, depending on your system’s configuration.
 Adding an ActiveX Control on page 43

 Adding a Timer Control on page 45
 Setting a LTIMultiCharacter Display on page 47
 Adding a Spin Control on page 48
Adding an ActiveX Control

ActiveX controls can only be added to the active Graphical Navigation page.
44 Chapter 2
To insert an ActiveX control into your Graphical Navigation page, follow these steps.
1 In Build mode, click Controls on the Create Objects toolbar and select ActiveX Control,
or right-click in the Navigation page and in the resulting shortcut menu select Create >
ActiveX Control....
This opens the Insert ActiveX Control box listing the ActiveX controls that are available on
your computer.
Figure 2-16 Sample List of Available ActiveX Controls

2 Select the control that you require from the list and then click OK.
3 The list box closes and the mouse cursor turns into the ‘Insert Control’ cursor.
4 Drag the cursor over the location where you want the ActiveX control to be placed. A
dotted line graphically shows the area the control will occupy.
Figure 2-17 Dotted Line Depicting Area Chosen for ActiveX Control
5 When the area is the size that you want, release the mouse button. The ActiveX control is
created.
User Manual
Figure 2-18 New ActiveX Control
Adding a The timer object helps you to define your operations based on a period of time. The timer
Timer object can display the current time of day (derived from your PC’s clock), or one of two
Control stopwatch-style timers. The timers can be started or stopped independently, and each timer
can count either up or down.
To insert an ActiveX Timer, complete the following steps:
1 Select Controls, and then Timer Control, on the Create Objects toolbar.
OR
Right-click in the Navigation pane and in the shortcut menu select ActiveX Control. In
the ActiveX Control dialog box that appears, select LTITimer.
2 Drag the cursor over the location where you want the Timer control to be placed. A dotted
line graphically shows the area the control will occupy.
3 When the area is the size that you want, release the mouse button. The Timer control is
created.
Figure 2-19 ActiveX Timer Control

 Events Generated by the LTITimer Control on page 45

 LTITimer Control Actions on page 46
 Setting the ActiveX Properties for the LTITimer Control on page 47
Events Generated by the LTITimer Control

The timer object generates these Magellan CCS Navigator events:
 LTITimer Control:OnStartTimer1: Generated when timer 1 starts

 LTITimer Control:OnStartTimer2: Generated when timer 2 starts
 LTITimer Control:OnStopTimer1: Generated when timer 1 is counting down, and when
it reaches zero, but not when the StopTimer action is called
46 Chapter 2
 LTITimer Control:OnStopTimer2: Generated when timer 2 is counting down, and when

it reaches zero. This is not generated when the StopTimer action is called.
Setting TimerIndex Actions

See Setting the ActiveX Properties for the LTITimer Control on page 47 for details on
setting the parameter values, such as timerIndex.
The timer object adds specific actions to the Actions in the rules grid. For all actions which
specify a timerIndex, the timerIndex indicates which timer the action applies to. timerIndex
0 affects the time-of-day display, timerIndex 1 affects timer 1, timerIndex 2 affects timer 2,
and timerIndex -1 affects the currently-displayed timer (-1 is not supported for the
DisplayTimer action). If an invalid timerIndex is specified, the action is ignored. If timerIndex
-1 is specified and the timer control is displaying the time of day, the action is ignored.
LTITimer Control Actions

The following table explains the effect of LTITimer control actions.
Table 2-18 LTITimer Control Actions

Properties
Action Effect
Used
LTITimer Control: Selects which timer to view timerIndex
Display Timer
LTITimer Control: Opens a dialog where you can enter specific timerIndex
InputTimerValue hours, minutes and seconds for the timer
LTITimer Control: Resets the specified timer to the last time value timerIndex
ResetTimer entered
LTITimer Control: Sets the timer to the specified time timerIndex;
SetTime This action is ignored if Hours is not between 0 Hours;
and 23, or if either Minutes or Seconds are not Minutes;
between 0 and 59. Seconds
LTITimer Control: Indicates whether the timer should count up or timerIndex;
SetTimerDirection down CountingUp
If CountingUp is 'true', or a number other than
zero, the timer counts up. If CountingUP is
'false' or the number 0, the timer counts down.
When the timer counts up, it wraps at 24
hours, i.e. the next value after 23:59:59 is
0:00:00, and continues counting. If the timer is
counting down, when it reaches 0:00:00 it
stops counting and sends an OnStopTimerX
event.
The timer displays a green arrow indicating the
direction time timer counts. The green arrow is
dim when the timer is stopped, and bright
when the timer is running.
LTITimer Control: Starts the specified timer timerIndex
StartTimer If the timer is not already running, this action
triggers an OnStartTimerX event.
User Manual
Table 2-18 LTITimer Control Actions (Continued)

Properties
Action Effect
Used
LTITimer Control: Stops the specified timer timerIndex
StopTimer This action does not trigger an OnStopTimerX
event.
LTITimer Control: Starts or stops the specified timer timerIndex
TimerStartStop If the timer is running, the control will behave
as if a StopTimer action was called. If the timer
is not running, the control will behave as if a
StartTimer action was called.
LTITimer Control: Reverses the direction the timer is counting. timerIndex
ToggleCountDirection
LTITimer Control: Switches the time of day between 12-hour None
ToggleTimeFormat format and 24-hour format
Setting the ActiveX Properties for the LTITimer Control

Two LTITimer Control ActiveX properties may be set through the Set ActiveX Properties
dialog.
Table 2-19 Set ActiveX Properties Dialog Box

ActiveX Property Effect
TimeFormat If set to 'true', or a number other than 0, displays the time in
12-hour format. If set to 'false' or 0, displays the time in 24-hour
format. Any other value will cause unpredictable results.
Enabled Enables or disables the ActiveX control. This property should
generally not be changed, unless you are familiar with ActiveX
and COM programming. A complete discussion of this topic is
beyond the scope of this manual.
Setting a LTIMultiCharacter Display

The LTIMultiCharacter Display ActiveX object is used to display string status messages.
To insert a Character Display ActiveX control, complete the following steps:
1 Select Controls, and then Character Display, on the Create Objects toolbar.
OR
Right-click in the Navigation pane and in the shortcut menu select ActiveX Control. In
the ActiveX Control dialog box that appears, select LTI MultiCharDisplay.
2 Drag the cursor over the location where you want the Character Display to be placed. A
dotted line graphically shows the area the display will occupy.
3 When the area is the size that you want, release the mouse button. The character display is
created.
48 Chapter 2
Figure 2-20 Example of the ActiveX Character Display Object

The character display object’s features are caption and set display properties.
LTIMultiCharacterDisplay Control Events

The character display does not generate any events.
LTIMultiCharacterDisplay Control Actions

LTIMultiCharDisplay Control: SetCaption: Sets the text displayed by the control.
Properties used: strNewValue: The new text string to display.
Adding a The ActiveX Spin Control object is used to increment or decrement values on a specific
Spin Control control.
To insert a spin control, complete the following steps:
1 Select Controls, and then Spin Control, on the Create Objects toolbar, or right-click in
the Navigation pane and in the shortcut menu select ActiveX Control. In the ActiveX
Control dialog box that appears, select LTITimer.
2 Drag the cursor over the location where you want the spin control to be placed. A dotted
3 When the area is the size that you want, release the mouse button. The spin control is
created.
Figure 2-21 Example of the ActiveX Spin Control Object
LTISpinControl Events
LTISpinControl: OnUpdate
This event is generated whenever the spin control's value changes.

User Manual
LTISpinControl Actions
Table 2-20 LTISpinControl Actions
Action Effect Properties Used
LTISpinControl: Increases or decreases the current relativeAdjust
ModifyValue: value of the spin control by the
specified amount.
LTISpinControl: Sets the minimum and maximum Minimum,
SetRange: values for the spin control. Maximum.
LTISpinControl Properties
 Horizontal: Indicates if the buttons should be displayed horizontally or vertically.
Figure 2-22 Horizontal LTISpinControl Buttons
Figure 2-23 Vertical LTISpinControl Buttons
 MinimumValue: The lowest value the spin control uses. Default is zero.
 MaximumValue: The highest value the spin control uses. Default is 100.
 Wrap: If set to 'true' or a non-zero value, the spin control will wrap around when it
reaches its maximum or minimum. If set to 'false' or to 0, the spin control will clip to
the maximum or minimum. For example, if the CurrentValue is set to the
MaximumValue, and Wrap is False, any attempt to increase the CurrentValue will result
in 100. If Wrap is True, then adding 1 to the CurrentValue will wrap to the beginning of
the range, MinimumValue.
 CurrentValue: The current value of the control.
Setting ActiveX control properties are set using the SetActiveXProperty action. See the following
ActiveX for more information:
Properties
 Setting Properties for a ‘Set ActiveX Properties’ Action on page 85
 Setting Properties for the ActiveX Method’s Action on page 87
Event, Property and Method Compatibility, and OLE Types

ActiveX events and methods are compatible if all parameters use OLE types that are
supported by Magellan CCS Navigator. The SetActiveXProperty dialog shows only those
properties which use OLE types that are supported by Magellan CCS Navigator. The values
that are entered into the combo box, or are retrieved from the Event Property or Custom
Property, are converted into the appropriate type if possible. If this is not possible, the call
does not succeed and nothing happens.
The supported OLE types are:
 Integer — whole numbers

50 Chapter 2
 Number — floating point values (3.1415 for example)

 Currency
 Date
 Text — any text
 Error code — whole numbers
 True/False
True/False
True/False is a BOOLEAN type. The allowable values are True, False (which are not case
sensitive) or any integer. 0 means False, all other numbers mean True. The preferred number
for True is -1.
Date
The Date is a text string containing a date, time or both. The date format is heavily
dependent on the regional settings of the control panel. For example 3/1/2 is interpreted as
January 2, 2003 if the regional settings are yy/mm/dd, or as March 1, 2003 if the regional
settings are in the US-style of mm/dd/yy. The regional settings of the control panel can be
overridden by entering the month as text instead of as an integer.
For best results, enter the date using text values for the date. (January 3 2003 instead of 1/
3/3, for example.)
If the date is not specified, it will default to December 30, 1899. If the time is not specified,
it will default to midnight.
The AM/PM indicators and month names are not case-sensitive. Time can be entered with
or without minutes and seconds and using either a 24-hour or a 12-hour clock using the
AM/PM indicators in the regional settings.
Examples using the Regional Date Settings of MM/DD/YY

 2003/12/31 23:59:59
 10:00 — interpreted as December 30, 1899, 10:00 AM
 3/1/2 — interpreted as March 1, 2002
 2002/3/1 — interpreted as March 1, 2002
 Mar 1, 2002
 March 1, 2002 13:55
 Mar 1 2002 1:55 PM
 2002 mar 1 10am
 1 mar 2002
Adding a You might add a Player control to a Graphical Navigation page when you want to view an
Player RTSP stream from an external source.
Control
To insert a Player control, complete the following steps:
1 Select Controls, and then Player Control, on the Create Objects toolbar.
User Manual
OR
Right-click in the Navigation pane and in the shortcut menu select Player Control. In the
ActiveX Control dialog box that appears, select Player Control.
2 Drag the cursor over the location where you want the Player control to be placed. A dotted
3 When the area is the size that you want, release the mouse button. The Player control is
created.
Figure 2-24 Player Control

4 Right click on the Player control and choose Properties...
An Object Properties dialog box appears.
5 On the Object Properties dialog box’s Streaming tab, enter the URL of an RTSP stream.
(See Setting the Streaming Object’s Properties on page 35)
You will be able to view the stream when you switch Magellan CCS Navigator to Control
mode.
Adding a Software Clock to a Navigator Page

You can add an ActiveX software clock to a Navigator page. By creating clock styles, you
can have the clocks display different time zones.
 Creating Clock Styles on page 52

 Adding a Clock to a Navigator Page on page 52
To download the software clock ActiveX control, follow this procedure:
1 Go to our website and find the SWC-5200 to download.

2 Click on the swc5200zx_setup_1_0.exe link.
3 Enter your e-mail address and password. If you do not have a password, click Create one
now! and fill in the screen that follows. When it is complete, a password will be mailed to
you and you can continue.
4 Place a check beside I have read the above section and agree, and then click Begin
Download.
5 Follow the installation procedure.
52 Chapter 2
Creating Clock Styles

The default setting for the control is to display a 12-hour analog clock, with the current
date displayed underneath, using the time zone configured in the Windows Control Panel.
If you want to change any of these settings, you need to create new clock styles. For
example, if you want to place three clocks on the page, showing the time in three different
time zones, then you would create three different clock styles.
To create a clock style, follow this procedure:
1 Start the clock as an independent process by browsing to the folder where it was installed
and clicking clock.exe.
The Leitch Clock application starts.
2 Right click on the Leitch Clock dialog box, and from the shortcut menu that appears,
choose Clock Properties.
The Clock Settings dialog box appears.
3 In the Clock Setting Style field, type a name for the new clock style.
4 Click Modify. The rest of the fields on the screen become available. For detailed instructions
on the settings you can apply to a clock style, refer to the Software Clock Help file.
5 Click Save.
The Clock Style file is saved.
6 Repeat steps 3 - 5 to create more clock styles.

7 Click OK to close the dialog box.
Adding a Clock to a Navigator Page

Once you have installed the SWC-5200 software clock, you can add it to a Navigator page.
Clock styles are stored with the login ID of the person logged onto the computer. If the
person who created the styles logs off and a different person logs on, using a different
Windows User name, the clock styles will not be available to that person.
1 In Build mode, right click on a Navigator page and choose Create > ActiveX Control...
from the menu.
The Add ActiveX Control dialog box appears.
2 Scroll down and click on Leitch DAC Clock Control, and then click OK.
The Add ActiveX Control dialog box closes and the cursor turns into the “Insert Control”
cursor.
3 Drag the cursor over the location where you want to place the control.
A dotted line graphically shows the area that the control will occupy.
4 When the area is the size you want, release the mouse button, and the ActiveX control is
created.
User Manual
5 To apply a clock style, right click and select Properties. Create a rule with the following
properties:
Event: OnLoadPage
Action: Leitch DAC Clock Control:SetActiveXProperty
The Action Property dialog box appears.
7 Enable the checkbox beside the namedStyle property. In the Value column, type in the
name of the desired clock style (this will be the same name as displayed in the Select Clock
Style list in the Software Clock's properties dialog).
8 Click OK to close the Action Property dialog box.
The clock properties will load when Magellan CCS Navigator is placed in Control mode.
Adding a Gauge Control to a Navigator Page

LTIGauge Control is an ActiveX control which can be used in Navigator pages to simulate a
gauge. The LTIGauge Control has many properties that can be set to produce different
appearances. Follow these steps:
1 In Build mode, right click on a Navigator page and do either of the following:
 On the Create Objects toolbar, select Control > GaugeControl.
 Click the ActiveX Control > LTIGauge Control.
2 Right click the LTIGauge control and select Properties.
From the popup dialog, you can add rules and set the following properties for the LTIGauge
control:
Table 2-21 LTIGauge Control Properties

LTIGauge Control Function or Range
Property
Value Current value of the LTIGauge control
MinValue The minimum value displayed on the LTIGauge control
MaxValue The maximum value displayed on the LTIGauge control
CenterX The horizontal center of the gauge (in the control's client
area), as measured from the top left (0, 0) corner of the
control’s client area
CenterY The vertical center of the gauge (in the control's client
area), as measured from the top left (0, 0) corner of the
control’s client area
Cap_Idx The number of the caption. A gauge can have up to five
captions, labeled 0 to 4. Each caption can have the
following properties:
 CapColor—The color of the caption, as an integer (so
Red would be 16711680 decimal)
 CapText—The text of the caption.
 CapPositionX— The horizontal position of the caption.
 CapPositionY— Thevertical position of the caption.
BaseArcColor The color of the base arc
54 Chapter 2
Table 2-21 LTIGauge Control Properties (Continued)

LTIGauge Control
Function or Range
Property
BaseArcRadius The radius of the base arc, measured in distance from the
center
BaseArcStart The start angle of the base arc, measured by clockwise
rotation from the centere horizontal line to the left-most
position of the arc
BaseArcSweep The sweep angle of the base arc
BaseArcWidth The width of the base arc
ScaleLinesInterColor The color of the inter scale lines which are the middle scale
lines for an uneven number of minor scale lines
The inner radius of the inter scale lines which are the
ScaleLinesInterInnerRadius middle scale lines for an uneven number of minor scale
lines
The outer radius of the inter scale lines which are the
ScaleLinesInterOuterRadius middle scale lines for an uneven number of minor scale
lines
ScaleLinesInterWidth The width of the inter scale lines which are the middle
scale lines for an uneven number of minor scale lines
ScaleLinesMinorNumOf The number of minor scale lines
ScaleLinesMinorColor The color of the minor scale lines
The inner radius of the minor scale lines
ScaleLinesMinorInnerRadius
The outer radius of the minor scale lines
ScaleLinesMinorOuterRadius
ScaleLinesMinorWidth The width of the minor scale lines
The step value of the major scale lines
ScaleLinesMajorStepValue
ScaleLinesMajorColor The color of the major scale lines
The inner radius of the major scale lines
ScaleLinesMajorInnerRadius
The outer radius of the major scale lines
ScaleLinesMajorOuterRadius
ScaleLinesMajorWidth The width of the major scale lines
User Manual
Table 2-21 LTIGauge Control Properties (Continued)

LTIGauge Control
Function or Range
Property
Range_Idx The number of the range that is being defined. A gauge
can have up to five ranges, labeled 0 to 4. Each range can
have the following properties:
 RangeEnabled—Enables or disables the range selected
by Range_Idx.
 RangeColor—The color of the range.
 RangeStartValue—The start value of the range, must
be less than RangeEndValue.
 RangeEndValue—The end value of the range. Must
be greater than RangeStartValue.
 RangeInnerRadius— The inner radius of the range.
 RangeOuterRadius—The outer radius of the range.
ScaleNumbersRadius The position of the scale numbers as measured from the
center of the gauge
ScaleNumbersColor The color of the scale numbers
ScaleNumbersRotation The angle relative to the tangent of the base arc at a scale
line that is used to rotate numbers, set to 0 for no rotation
or e.g. set to 90
NeedleType The type of the needle, options are
 Type 0
 Type 1
NeedleRadius The length of the needle, as measured from the centre of
the gauge
NeedleColor1 The first color of the needle:
 0 Gray
 1 Red
 2 Green
 3 Blue
 4 Yellow
 5 Violet
 6 Magenta
NeedleColor2 The second color of the needle
NeedleWidth The thickness of the needle
BackgroundColor The color of the background
56 Chapter 2
Editing a Page
To move items on a Graphical Navigation page, the Navigation option Allow drag and
drop operations in build mode must be selected. See Setting Navigation Options on
page 120.
Only an Administrator user with a NAVIGATOR-SRV or NAVIGATOR-SNMP license can edit

pages. Magellan CCS Navigator must be in Build mode.
When you select, more and resize objects on a page, Magellan CCS Navigator behaves like
most drawing tools.
To select a single Graphical Navigation object, click inside its boundaries. The object has
eight sizing handles that appear when the object is selected.
Magellan CCS Navigator provides three methods for selecting multiple Graphical Navigation
objects:
 Press the SHIFT key or CTRL key and keep it depressed while you select the multiple
objects with individual mouse clicks.
 Click on an empty area and drag the mouse to form a rectangular area around the
objects you want to select. A rectangle bound by a dashed line will appear on the page.
When you release the mouse, all objects having their boundaries within the area of the
rectangle are selected. This is called a marquee select.
 Right-click in the Graphical Navigation page. In the shortcut menu that appears, click
Select All. This will select all of the objects in the Graphical Navigation page.
To clear the selection, select File > Clear from the main menu. This clears multiple
selections in the Navigation pane or Graphical Navigation page, leaving only one
selected item. This deletes nothing from the Navigation or Graphical Navigation page.
Magellan CCS Navigator has the following options for editing Graphical Navigation pages:
 Resizing Graphical Navigation Objects on page 56

 Moving a Graphical Navigation Object on page 57
 Cutting, Copying and Pasting Graphical Navigation Objects on page 57
 Setting the Display Order of Graphical Navigation Objects on page 58
 Aligning and Spacing Graphical Navigation Objects on page 58
Resizing Graphical Navigation Objects

To resize a Graphical Navigation object and retain its proportional dimensions, press the
SHIFT key and then click and drag one of the four corner sizing handles of the object with
the mouse while keeping the SHIFT key pressed.
To resize a Graphical Navigation object and change its relative height and width, drag any of
the eight sizing handles of the object. This will distort the appearance of the object.
To resize multiple Graphical Navigation objects so that they are the same size, same width,
or same height; follow this procedure:
1 Select one object, hold own the Shift key and select the other objects.
User Manual
2 Right-click one of the selected objects, select Size, and then select from one of the three
options described below.
Table 2-22 Commands on the Size Menu

Command Function
Same Size Scales the objects so they are the same size vertically and horizontally
Same Width Scales the objects so they are the same width
Same Height Scales the objects so they are the same height
Moving a Graphical Navigation Object

To move items on a Graphical Navigation page, the Navigation option Allow drag and
drop operations in build mode must be selected. See Setting Navigation Options on
page 120.
To move a Graphical Navigation button, symbol, image or text object, click on the object
and hold the mouse button down while dragging the object to a new location. Release the
mouse button when the object is where you want it.
For fine adjustment of an object’s position on the page, select the object and use the arrow
keys on your keyboard to move the object into position. Turning on the Show Grid and
Snap to Grid features in the Graphical Navigation Options can help you line up the objects
with respect to each other. See Aligning and Spacing Graphical Navigation Objects on
page 58.
If you select and drag a linked symbol on a Graphical Navigation page, any links to it will
track the moving symbol on the page.
Cutting, Copying and Pasting Graphical Navigation Objects

To copy a Graphical Navigation object, select the object and click the Copy tool on the
toolbar, or right-click the object and then select Copy.
Or, to cut a Graphical Navigation object, select the object, and then click the Cut tool
on the toolbar; or right-click the object and select Cut.
Then, to paste the cut or copied object on the page, move the mouse cursor to a new
location, then click the Paste tool on the toolbar; or right-click and select Paste.
To delete a Graphical Navigation object, select the object, and then click the Delete tool
on the toolbar; or right-click the object and select Delete.
Keyboard shortcuts are as follows:
 Cut—Press CTRL+X
 Copy—Press CTRL+C
 Paste—Press CTRL+V
 Delete—Press CTRL+D or DELETE
58 Chapter 2
Setting the Display Order of Graphical Navigation Objects

To set the display order of Graphical Navigation objects—whether the objects are buttons,
links, symbols, images or text—right-click an object, select Order>, and then select from
one of the four options described below.
Table 2-23 Commands on the Order Menu and Their Functions

Command Function
Bring to Front Brings the selected object to the top layer in a set of layered objects
Send to Back Sends the selected object to the bottom layer in a set of layered
objects
Bring Forward Brings the selected object forward one layer in a set of layered objects
Send Backward Brings the selected object back one layer in a set of layered objects
Aligning and Spacing Graphical Navigation Objects

To align and space Graphical Navigation objects, right-click one of the selected objects,
select Align or Space>, and then select from one of the eight options described below.
Table 2-24 Commands on the Align and Space Menu

Command Function
Align Top Aligns the tops of the objects horizontally
Align Middle Aligns the centers of the objects horizontally
Align Bottom Aligns the bottoms of the objects horizontally
Align Left Aligns the left side of the objects vertically
Align Center Aligns the centers of the objects vertically
Align Right Aligns the right side of the objects vertically
Space Across Evenly distributes objects horizontally
Space Down Evenly distributes the objects vertically
Using the Graphical Navigation Context Menus

You cannot perform build operations, such as drag-and-drop, scaling, object creation, or
attribute definition, when Magellan CCS Navigator is in Control mode.
When you right-click a Graphical Navigation page or object in any operational mode, a
shortcut menu appears.
User Manual
The table below lists the commands available from these shortcut menus in build mode.
Depending whether you right-click a page or an object, some commands are not available.
Table 2-25 Shortcut Menu Commands, Build Mode

Command Function
Control Opens the Control dialog box of the selected symbol if it has a valid
device ID
Configuration Opens the Configuration dialog box of the selected symbol if it has a
valid device ID
Cut Cuts the selected object or objects
Copy Copies the selected object or objects
Paste Cuts the selected object or objects
Delete Deletes the selected object or objects
Select All Selects all objects on the page
Order > Shows the Order submenu; see Setting the Display Order of
Graphical Navigation Objects on page 58
Align or Space > Aligns of spaces selected objects on the page; see Aligning and
Spacing Graphical Navigation Objects on page 58
Size > Resizes selected objects on the page; see Resizing Graphical
Navigation Objects on page 56
View > Shows the View submenu; see Setting the View for Graphical
Navigation Symbols on page 40
Create > Shows the Create submenu; see these topics:
 Adding Objects to a Graphical Navigation Page on page 17
 Adding a Resource Icon Symbol on page 36
 Adding Controls on page 42
Zoom > Shows the Zoom menu; see Using Zoom Tools on page 12
Pan Uses the Pan submenu to move about in the Graphical Navigation
page; the Pan submenu contains these options:
 Pan (Keyboard shortcut: press CTRL+A)
 Zoom
Properties... Opens the Object Properties box of the selected object
Component Recalls the wizard that created the component; This command will be
Wizard... disabled if the component was not created by a wizard
Options... Opens the Graphical Navigation Options box
Help... Opens a Help topic on the Graphical Navigation tool
60 Chapter 2
61
3 Rules for Magellan CCS
Navigator Pages and Objects
Setting Rules to Perform Actions

You must have a NAVIGATOR-SRV or NAVIGATOR-SNMP license to create rules for Magellan
CCS Navigator objects and pages. Only an Administrator users can create rules.
In Build mode, you can define rules for Magellan CCS Navigator objects and pages. A rule
consists of an event or condition which causes Magellan CCS Navigator to perform an
action.
An event is a trigger for an action to be performed. Some examples of events that always
trigger an action are: On Load Page, On Mouse Click, and On Unload Page. For a list of
events available in Magellan CCS Navigator, see Setting an Event on page 66.
A conditional event must happen in a specific way for an associated action to be triggered.
Some examples of conditional events are On Custom Property Change and On MGI Lamp
Status. See Defining Conditions on page 67.
An action occurs in response to an event or a conditional event.
Actions can be divided into two basic types: those related to the Magellan CCS Navigator
and those related to specific plug-in (such as SuiteView or Advanced Router). Magellan CCS
Navigator actions are found in this chapter. Actions related to specific plug-ins are found in
the chapters dealing with those specific plug-ins.
For an extensive list of actions, see Setting an Action on page 72.
When configuring rules for ActiveX objects, Magellan CCS Navigator will automatically add
actions to this list that will invoke the ActiveX object’s methods, or set the ActiveX object’s
properties.
62 Chapter 3
Rules for Magellan CCS Navigator Pages and Objects
Flow Chart of Generic Rule Creation Process
Figure 3-1 Setting a Rule for a Magellan CCS Navigator Object or Page
Setting a Rule for a Magellan CCS Navigator Object or Page

When an event is conditional, you can type your own description of the event in the
Condition box. However, if the event is unconditional (that is, the Condition box reads
“always”), you cannot type in a Condition box.
The generic procedure for creating a new rule for a Magellan CCS Navigator object or page
is as follows:
User Manual
1 Right-click the object or page.

2 Select Properties... to display the Object Properties box.
3 Click the Rules tab.
New Rule Delete Rule Condition

button button button
Figure 3-2 Object Properties Dialog Box’s Rules Tab
Only an Administrator user with a NAVIGATOR-SRV or NAVIGATOR-SNMP license can

create or edit rules.
4 Click New Rule on the Rules tab toolbar. See Using the Rules Tab Toolbar on page 65.
A new record will appear as a new row in the Rules list. See Using the Rules Table on
page 65.
After providing a default description (which is based on the condition/action properties),

Magellan CCS Navigator will not change the description if you changed the one provided by
Magellan CCS Navigator. However, if you do not change these descriptions, but rather the
properties of either the event or action, Magellan CCS Navigator will provide a new set of
descriptions that match the properties of the event/action.
5 Click the arrow in the Event column, and then select an event from the list.
See Setting an Event on page 66.
6 If the event that you have chosen requires that you set a condition, click Condition and
complete the Event Condition tab of the Condition dialog box. See Defining
Conditions on page 67.
If the event does not require you to set conditions, the Condition button is still available.
When you click it, there will be a single tab labelled Custom Property Condition.
Custom property conditions can trigger and execute an action only when an event happens
AND the value of a custom property(ies) is (are) met (for example).
To create a custom property condition, follow this procedure:

64 Chapter 3
Figure 3-3 Custom Properties Tab

a Type a name for this custom property in the Description field.
b Click New to create a new line in the Conditions table.
c Use the buttons near the bottom of the dialog box to create an expression.
Open bracket Property Value and Close bracket

property
Remove open Equals, Not Not Contains

bracket equals, Value/CP/EP# Remove close
Contains or bracket
Figure 3-4 Custom Property Condition Buttons
These buttons create content for the Condition field.

Just like an algebraic equation, parentheses apply precedence to some events over
others. Your expression can extend across multiple rows in the table.
If you, for example, add an open bracket, you must add a close bracket as well or you
cannot progress to the next dialog box.
In the Logic column, you can click to choose AND or OR.
An event that contains NOT takes precedence over an event that contains AND, and an
event that contains AND takes precedence over an event that contains OR.
When your expression is complete, click OK to return to the Rules dialog box.
7 Click the arrow in the Action column, and select an action from the list. Depending on the
object you are applying rules to, different options may be available. For example, you can
only apply ActiveX actions to an ActiveX object, and you can only apply button actions to a
button. See Setting an Action on page 72 for more information.
8 Click Action Properties and set the properties in the resulting box.
User Manual
When you close the Action Properties box, the Description field for this rule is updated.
You can edit the content of this field by typing a description of the new rule that makes
sense to you.
9 To add additional rules to the list, click New Rule and repeat steps 5 -8.
Using the Rules Tab Toolbar

The Rules tab has its own toolbar.
New Delete Copy Paste Up Down
Figure 3-5 Rules Button Bar

The names and functions of the tools on this toolbar are as follows:
Table 3-1 Toolbar for the Rules Tab

Name Function
New Adds a new row to the list of rules
Delete Deletes a selected row from the list of rules
(Use to delete empty rules -- you cannot close the Object Properties dialog
box if there are incomplete or empty rules)
Copy Copies the contents of the currently selected rule
Paste Pastes the contents of the rule on the clipboard (after a copy operation) into
a new row of the properties dialog; you may use paste to copy rules
between properties dialog boxes
Up Moves the selected rule up one row in the sequential order of rules
(Magellan CCS Navigator executes the rules sequentially in general, but
rules with the same type of event trigger [such as on mouse click] are
processed virtually simultaneously if they list sequentially.)
Down Moves the selected rule down one row in the sequential order of rules
(Magellan CCS Navigator executes the rules sequentially in general, but
rules with the same type of event trigger (such as on mouse click) are
processed virtually simultaneously if they list sequentially.)
Condition Opens a dialog in which you can define conditions for the event to occur
Action Opens a dialog in which you can define properties for the new action
Properties
Using the Rules Table

The Rules list is a four-column table.
Figure 3-6 Rules Table Titlebar

66 Chapter 3
The columns and their functions are as follows:
Table 3-2 Columns in the Rules Table

Column Function and Help Reference
Event Lists events for which you can define an action.
Condition States whether the action always or conditionally occurs. If the text is
conditional, you can click Condition and define the conditions in the
resulting dialog box.
Action Lists the possible actions for events associated with a Magellan CCS
Navigator object.
Description Allows you to type in a description of the rule that suits your needs.
Setting an Event
An event is the trigger for an action.
Some actions happen only when a certain condition occurs. On Crosspoint Status and On
Custom Property Change are conditional events. You must define the conditions of the
events that trigger these events. To do this, you must complete the Condition dialog box.
The items in the events list depend to some extent on the options available for your system.
For example, router options will only appear if you have the router plug-in available. Events
applicable to specific objects can be found in the chapters dealing with those objects.
When configuring rules for ActiveX objects, Magellan CCS Navigator will automatically add
events to this list that basevd on any Events that the ActiveX object fires.
The event types On Load Page, On Mouse Click, and On Unload Page always trigger an
action.
User Manual
The Events list on the Rules table has these options:
Table 3-3 Default Event Options in the Rules Table

Event Description
Multiple Events When any one of a defined list of events occurs
See Setting Conditions for a “Multiple Events” Event on
page 68
On Alarm When a specific alarm is triggered
See Setting Conditions for “On Alarm” Events on page 69
On Custom When a defined custom property for a Magellan CCS Navigator
Property Change object or page changes
See these topics:
 Creating a New Graphical Navigation Page on page 8
 Defining Custom Properties for a Page on page 15
 Setting Conditions for an ‘On Custom Property Change’
Event on page 71
 Setting Properties for a ‘Set Custom Property’ Action on
page 82
On Load Page When a Graphical Navigation page opens
On Mouse Click When you click the mouse
On Unload Page When a page closes
Defining Conditions
Some events are conditional. This means they occur on some occasions when an action is
performed, but not on others. You can determine the conditions which trigger this type of
event.
Events that are conditional are listed in the following table.
Table 3-4 Default Conditional Events in Magellan CCS Navigator

Event Reference
On Multiple Events Setting Conditions for a “Multiple Events”
Event on page 68
On Alarm Setting Conditions for “On Alarm” Events on
page 69
On Custom Property Change (this Setting Conditions for an ‘On Custom
event can also use global properties) Property Change’ Event on page 71
68 Chapter 3
Defining an Event or Action Property for the First Time

When you define an event or action property for the first time, the application creates a
default condition description (Condition box) and a default rule description (Description
box). After providing a default description (based on the condition/action properties),
Magellan CCS Navigator will not change the description if you have changed it. However, if
you do not change these descriptions, but rather the properties of either the event or
action, Magellan CCS Navigator will provide a new set of descriptions that match the
properties of the event/action.
Reusing or Editing a Previously Set Condition

Rather than creating a new condition set, you can also reuse previously set conditions or
select a similar set and edit them.
1 Click Event Condition on the Rules toolbar, then click Existing Conditions>> to show a
box listing previously defined conditions.
2 Select from the list to reuse previously set conditions or select a similar set of conditions and
edit them, and then click OK.
Setting Conditions for a “Multiple Events” Event

The Event Condition Dialog - Multiple Events dialog box is very similar to the Object
Properties - Rules dialog box, but with the addition of a Description field at the top of
the dialog box and a Logical Event type column where the Description column is in the
Object Properties dialog box.
The effect of creating a Multiple Event event is to list a series of events. When any of these
events occurs, the resulting action occurs. The content of the Logical Event type field is
always OR.
To complete the “Multiple Events” event condition box, complete these steps:
1 Enter a name or description for the Multiple Events Condition that you are creating in the
Description field.
2 Click New on the Multiple Events toolbar.
A new record will appear as a new row in the Events list.
3 Click the arrow in the Event column, and then select an event from the list.
See Setting an Event on page 66.
4 If the Condition column reads “Conditional,” click Condition and complete the resulting
conditions dialog box.
See Defining Conditions on page 67.
5 Repeat steps 2 - 4 if you need to create more conditions.

6 Click OK to return to the Page Properties - Rules dialog box. You are now ready to add an
action that will occur when any of the events you have specified trigger it. See Defining an
Event or Action Property for the First Time on page 68.
User Manual
Setting Conditions for “On Alarm” Events

The “On Alarm” event is not available for Q-SEE enabled 6800+ devices. if you select a
Q-SEE enabled device in the Condition dialog for this event, after polling the device, you
will receive an error message.
Conditions for the “On Alarm” event determine the specific alarm on the specific device
that must happen to trigger the action that will follow it. For information on alarms, see
Network Event Diagnostics on page 237.
To complete the “On Alarm” Event Condition box, complete these steps:
Figure 3-7 Event Condition Dialog for On Alarm Events

1 Click Select... and select a device to monitor.
Magellan CCS Navigator polls the selected device to retrieve the device’s alarm and
parameter information.
2 Choose By Alarm Level, By Alarm Name, or By Parameter, and then make the
appropriate selections as determined by the chart below:
70 Chapter 3
Table 3-5 Settings Options for On Alarm Events

Condition Settings
By Alarm Level Level - from the left drop-down menu, choose either Equals, Not
Equals or Any Value.
 Equals triggers when any alarm is the specified level.
 Not Equals triggers when the alarm is not the specified level.
 Any Value triggers on any alarm, regardless of level.
If you choose Equals or Not Equals, from the right drop-down
menu, choose the alarm level: Critical, Warning, Information, or
Cleared.
Acknowledged - Click here if you want to trigger the rule when
the alarm is acknowledged.
By Alarm Name Name - From the left drop-down menu, choose Equals or Not
Equals.
From the right drop-down menu, choose from the list of available
alarms for the selected device.
Cleared - Check here if you want to trigger the rule when the
alarm is cleared. If this box is unchecked, this rule will trigger when
the selected alarm is activated.
OR
Acknowledged -Click here if you want to trigger the rule when
the alarm is acknowledged.
By Parameter Name - From the left drop-down menu, select Equals or Not
Equals.
From the right drop-down menu, choose the parameter you want
to single out. All this device’s parameters that provide alarm
feedback are listed.
Alarm - from the left drop-down menu, choose Equals, Not
Equals or Any Value. If you choose Equals or Not Equals, from
the right drop-down menu, choose an alarm for that parameter.
Value - From the left drop-down menu, choose Equals, Not
Equals or Any Value. If you choose Equals or Not Equals, use the
up/down buttons to select a number in the range for that
parameter.
Cleared -Check here if you want to trigger the rule when the alarm
is cleared. If this box is unchecked, this rule will trigger when the
selected alarm is activated.
OR
Acknowledged - Click here if you want to trigger the rule when
the alarm is acknowledged
3 Click OK to close the Event Condition box.

User Manual
Setting Conditions for an ‘On Custom Property Change’ Event

If the Magellan CCS Navigator page contains a Magellan CCS Navigator Frame, any custom
property changes on the Frame will be “bubbled up” to the containing page, triggering an
On Custom Property Page event on the main page.
A custom property is a variable. If you do not have any custom properties set, see Setting
Custom Page Properties on page 16.
To complete the “On Custom Property Change” Condition box, complete these steps:
1 Type a name for the custom property in the Property box, or click the arrow and select a
name for the custom property or global property from the Property list.
2 Click the arrow in the box to the right of the Property box, and select a condition: Equals,
Not Equals, or Any Value.
Set property action behavior is normally grayed out.
3 In the Value section, select Custom Value, Router Value, or Event/Custom Properties,
depending on your goal for that custom or global property.

Navigator object.
Table 3-7 Event Conditions And How To Set Them

Value How To Set
Custom Value Type the custom value in the Value box.
Router Value Select the router by clicking Select... in the Device ID field.
If the router does not appear in the Router Selection dialog box, then you
must first configure the router.
See Volume 6: Routing Configuration.
Then click the arrow in the Router Value box and select from the list of
sources and destinations for the specified router. Sources have the prefix
“[Src]” and destinations have the prefix “[Dst].”
Event/Custom Type the value in the Event Value box. This option is only available if
Properties there are properties associated with the event.
Database Click here if you want the custom property to be retrieved from the
value database.
Save the Click here if you want to save the value of the custom property in the
changed value Magellan CCS Navigator database. When a value is saved in this way, you
to database will be able to retrieve it even after rebooting Magellan CCS Navigator.
72 Chapter 3

Navigator object.

Navigator object.
4 Click OK to close the Event Condition box.

For information on reusing an “On Custom Property Change” condition, see Reusing or
Editing a Previously Set Condition on page 68.
Setting an Action
Magellan CCS Navigator initiates actions in response to events. Together, an event and its
associated action constitute a rule. The following table lists the available actions, their
function, and a Help reference. See Setting Rules to Perform Actions on page 61.
Table 3-10 Default Actions List

Action Function Reference Topic
Alarm Toggles alarm filtering on or Setting Properties for Alarm Filtering
Filtering off Actions on page 74
Configuration Loads a device Setting Properties for a ‘Configuration’
configuration dialog box Action on page 75
Control Loads a device control Setting Properties for a ‘Control’
dialog box Action on page 76
Execute Loads a pre-created macro Setting Properties for an ‘Execute
Macro Macro’ Action on page 76
User Manual
Table 3-10 Default Actions List (Continued)

Launch Starts an application from Setting Properties for a ‘Launch
Application the Graphical Navigation Application’ Action on page 77
page
Load Layout Loads a pre-created layout Setting Properties for a ‘Load Layout’
Action on page 77
Load Page Loads another Magellan Setting Properties for a ‘Load Page’
CCS Navigator page Action on page 78
Load Preset Loads a preset Setting Properties for a ‘Load Preset’
Action on page 79
Load Frame Loads a Magellan CCS Setting Properties for a ‘Load Frame
Page Navigator page in a Page’ Action on page 78
Magellan CCS Navigator
frame
Product Info Opens a device product Setting Properties for a ‘Load Preset’
brochure or spec sheet Action on page 79
Product User Opens a device user manual Setting Properties for a ‘Product User
Manual Manual’ Action on page 81
Set Button Sets the appearance and Setting Properties for a ‘Set Button
Properties behavior for a button Properties’ Action on page 81
Set Button Sets the blink mode to on, Setting Properties for a ‘Button Blink
Blink Mode off, or toggle Mode’ Action on page 82
Set Custom Changes the current value Setting Properties for a ‘Set Custom
Property of a custom or global Property’ Action on page 82
property
Set Frame Sets a custom value or event Setting Properties for a ‘Set Frame
Custom for the frame Custom Property’ Action on page 83
Property
Set Link Changes the appearance of Setting Properties for a ‘Set Link
Properties a link Properties’ Action on page 84
Set ActiveX Sets the properties for an Setting Properties for a ‘Set ActiveX
Properties ActiveX control object Properties’ Action on page 85
Set Page Determines whether or not Setting Properties for a “Set Page
Refresh the page will be updated Refresh Option” Action on page 86
Option automatically
Set Screen Sets or disables full screen Setting Properties for a ‘Set Screen
Mode mode Mode’ Action on page 86
Set Symbol Changes the highlighted Setting Properties for a ‘Set Symbol
Properties symbol’s state Properties’ Action on page 85
Set Text Changes text in response to Setting Properties for a ‘Set Text
Properties specified events Properties’ Action on page 85
Invoke Allows parameters to be set Setting Properties for the ActiveX
ActiveX for an ActiveX control Method’s Action on page 87
Method
74 Chapter 3
In addition, when configuring rules for ActiveX objects, Magellan CCS Navigator will
automatically add actions to this list that will invoke the ActiveX object's methods, or set
the ActiveX object's properties.
Setting the Action Properties

Each of the different actions you can choose in the Action field of the Rules tab of the
Object Properties dialog box has properties to be set.
Click Action Properties to open the specific rules for the action you have selected.
To create a rule, see Setting Rules to Perform Actions on page 61.
Reusing the Event Properties

Many events have additional information associated with them. For example, 'On Custom
Property Change' events indicates which custom property has changed and its new value.
These are called Event Properties.
You can copy Event Properties into many of Action Property dialogs. For example, you could
set up a Text object to change its text to the custom property value contained in the 'On
Custom Property Change’ event.
To select the Event Property, in the appropriate Action Property dialog will have an option
labelled Event Properties or Event/Custom Properties, with a list of properties to choose
from. Event Properties have the prefix [EP], and Custom Properties have the prefix [CP].
Setting Properties for Alarm Filtering Actions

See Setting an Action on page 72 for instructions on how to set an Action. For more
information on alarm filtering, see Setting Alarm Filtering Options on page 249.
An Alarm Filtering action turns alarm filtering on or off. To set alarm filtering action
properties, complete these steps:
1 Select the correct device ID by clicking Select if the selected Magellan CCS Navigator object
has not inherited the appropriate ID from the object from which you created it.
You can avoid having to set the device ID and other configuration information if you create
a symbol from a fully configured device in the resource tree. The symbol will inherit
the configuration details of the device as well as its navigation properties.
Also, if you double-click the symbol, you will automatically show the symbol’s
Configuration dialog box in Build mode or its Control dialog box in Control mode.
2 In the Alarm Filtering box, click the arrow and select one of these options:
User Manual
Table 3-11 Alarm Filtering Options and Functions

Option Function
On Turns on alarm filtering
Off Turns off alarm filtering
Toggle Enables toggling alarm filtering on and off
(If alarm filtering is on, the action will turn it off; if alarm filtering is off, the
action will turn it on.)
3 Click OK to close the action properties box.
Setting Properties for a ‘Configuration’ Action

You do not need to set an action to open a Configuration dialog box when using a symbol
object with a valid device ID—unless you want to open a Configuration dialog box for a
device that is not represented by the symbol. To open a Configuration dialog box for a
symbol with a valid device ID, double-click the symbol when Magellan CCS Navigator is
in Build mode.
See Setting an Action on page 72 for instructions on how to set an Action. For
information on configuration options and settings, see CCS Device Configuration on
page 127.
A Configuration action opens a specific device’s Configuration dialog box. To set

configuration action properties, complete these steps:
1 Select the correct device ID by clicking Select, if the selected Magellan CCS Navigator
object has not inherited the appropriate ID from the object from which it was created.
2 Type the coordinates in the Left and Top fields where you want the Control dialog box to
be opened. You can start/stop capturing the mouse position by pressing CTRL+ALT+S. You
can also define the width and height of the Control dialog box by typing in values on the
appropriate fields. The Width and Height fields are initialized with the default values of the
selected device.
3 If you have already set a similar action, you can click Existing Actions>> and select one
from the list in the resulting dialog box. Then edit the action as required for the new
circumstances.
76 Chapter 3
Setting Properties for a ‘Control’ Action

You do not need to set an action to open a Control dialog box when using a symbol object
with a valid Device ID—unless you want to open a Configuration dialog box for a device
that is not represented by the symbol. To open a Configuration dialog box for a symbol
with a valid device ID, double-click the symbol when Magellan CCS Navigator is
in control mode.
See Setting an Action on page 72 for instructions on how to set an action. A Control
action opens a device’s Control dialog box. For information on Control dialog boxes, see
CCS Device Control on page 255.
If you have chosen a Control action, complete these steps:
1 Select the correct Device ID, if the selected Magellan CCS Navigator object has not inherited
the appropriate ID from the object from which you created it.
You can avoid having to set the Device ID and other configuration information if you create
Depending on your system’s configuration, you may not have access to various different
devices for control.
2 Type the coordinates in the Left and Top fields where you want the Control dialog box to
be opened. You can start/stop capturing the mouse position by pressing CTRL+ALT+S. You
can also define the width and height of the Control dialog box by typing in values in the
appropriate fields. The Width and Height fields are initialized with the default values of the
selected device.
circumstances.
Setting Properties for an ‘Execute Macro’ Action

See Setting an Action on page 72 for instructions on how to set an Action.
The Execute Macro action triggers a pre-defined group of actions. If you haven’t created
any macros, you may not have an appropriate macro to load. See Creating a Macro on
page 88.
To set the Execute Macro action properties, complete these steps:
1 In the Macro Name box, click the arrow and select one of the available macro names.
circumstances.
See Working with Macros on page 88 and CCS Device Control on page 255.
User Manual
Setting Properties for a ‘Launch Application’ Action

You can also start an application from the Navigation pane. See Setting the Command
Tab on page 107 and Starting Non-Magellan CCS Navigator Applications from the
Navigation Pane on page 107.
A Launch Application action starts an application from the Graphical Navigation page.
To set Launch Application action properties, complete these steps:
1 Do one of the following to have the path to the application’s executable file appear in the
Command box:
 Type the path to the executable file in the Command box.
OR
 Click Browse [...], and then use the resulting Set Application to Launch box to
find the application on your network.
When you find the *.exe or *.bat file that starts the application, select it, and click
Open.
2 Type any special arguments in the Arguments box.
3 Do one of the following to have the path to the initial directory appear in the Initial
Directory box:
 Type the path to the initial working directory in the Initial Directory box.
OR
 Click Browse [...], and then use the resulting Select Initial Directory box to find
the initial working directory.
When you find the initial working directory, select it, and then click OK.
circumstances.
Setting Properties for a ‘Load Layout’ Action

A layout is a file that preserves the positions of various pages and panels on the Magellan
CCS Navigator desktop. The Load Layout action returns the pages and panels to these
positions. If you have not created any layouts, you may not have an appropriate layout to
load. See Working with Layouts on page 56.
To set the Load Layout action properties, complete these steps:
1 In the Layout Name box, click the arrow and select one of the available layout names.
circumstances.
78 Chapter 3
Setting Properties for a ‘Load Page’ Action

When you define a “Load Page action” for an object, you are creating a link between that
object and the page. That object is now a parent object for that page, and any other pages
that are linked to it. Any alarm that occurs on any object on a linked page will “bubble up”
to its parent object, causing the parent object to flash an alarm.
This action loads a Graphical Magellan CCS Navigator page. For more information on
creating pages for loading, see Graphical Navigation Page Creation on page 7.
To set Load Page action properties, complete these steps:
1 Do one of the following to have the path to the Magellan CCS Navigator page appear in
the Graphical Page box:
 Type the path to the Magellan CCS Navigator page in the Graphical Page box.
OR
 Click Browse [...], and then use the resulting Open box to find the Magellan CCS
Navigator page.
The default location for all Magellan CCS Navigator pages is the Pages folder,
which displays by default.
When you find the Magellan CCS Navigator page, select it, and then click Open.
2 Select Open Page in a New Window if you want the new page to open in a separate
dialog box.
3 Type the coordinates in the Left and Top fields where you want the dialog box to be
opened. You can start/stop capturing the mouse position by pressing CTRL+ALT+S. You can
also define the width and height of the Control dialog box by typing the values on the
appropriate fields.
circumstances.
Setting Properties for a ‘Load Frame Page’ Action

The Load Frame Page action loads a Graphical Magellan CCS Navigator frame page. This
action can only be performed on a Navigator Frame object. For information on adding a
Navigator Frame to your page, see Adding a Navigator Frame on page 28 and Creating
a Frame View Page on page 8.
To set Load Frame Page action properties, complete these steps:
1 Do one of the following to have the path to a Magellan CCS Navigator page appear in the
Custom Value box:
 Type the path to the Magellan CCS Navigator page in the Custom Value box.
OR
 Click Browse [...], and then use the resulting Open box to find the Magellan CCS
Navigator page.
The default location for all Magellan CCS Navigator pages in the Pages folder,
which displays by default.
When you find the Magellan CCS Navigator page, select it, and then click Open.
User Manual
Figure 3-8 Action Property Dialog - Load Frame Page

2 To open a customized page in the Magellan CCS Navigator Frame, select
Event/Custom Properties, and then use the down arrow to select from the list.
circumstances.
4 Select Attempt to initialize the loaded page's custom properties to match the
actual page if you want to set all the matching custom properties, by name, on the loaded
page, to the actual (parent) page’s value. For example, if both pages have a custom property
called 'Source', when the page in the frame gets loaded, its Source custom property will be
set to the value of the Source property of the actual (parent) page.
Setting Properties for a ‘Load Preset’ Action

Depending on your system’s configuration, you may not have access to various different
devices for control.
See Setting an Action on page 72 for instructions on how to set an action.
The Load Preset action applies a set of pre-defined control settings for one or more devices.
If you have not created any presets, you may not be able to complete this action. For
information on creating presets, refer to Using Presets on page 270 of CCS Navigator:
Advanced Graphical Navigation Application.
If you choose a Load Preset action, click the Action Products button. The Action
Property - Load Preset dialog box appears.
Figure 3-9 Action Property Dialog Box (Load Preset Action Setting)
Complete these steps:
80 Chapter 3
1 Click Select... to select a device.

The Device Selection dialog box opens.
Figure 3-10 Device Selection Dialog Box

2 Select a device.
Note the listed Device Location to ensure you are selecting the correct device.
3 Click OK.
The selected device ID now appears in the corresponding field within the Action Property
dialog box.
4 In the Preset Name box, click the arrow and select one of the available preset names.
circumstances.
See Using Presets on page 270 and CCS Device Control on page 255.
Setting Properties for a ‘Product Info’ Action

A Product Info action can only be applied to Magellan CCS Navigator objects. This action
displays a product brochure or specification sheet when triggered. For more information,
see Showing Product Information for a CCS Device on page 119.
To set the Product Info action properties, complete these steps:
1 Select the correct device ID by clicking Select, if the selected Magellan CCS Navigator
object has not inherited the appropriate ID from the object from which you created it.
User Manual
circumstances.
Setting Properties for a ‘Product User Manual’ Action

A Show Product User Manual action can only be applied to a Magellan CCS Navigator
object. This action opens a PDF of the user guide for the selected item when triggered. For
more information on showing a user manual, see Showing the User Manual for a CCS
Device on page 157.
To set Product User Manual action properties, complete these steps:
1 Select the correct device ID by clicking Select , if the selected Magellan CCS Navigator
object has not inherited the appropriate ID from the object from which you created it.
circumstances.
Setting Properties for a ‘Set Button Properties’ Action

The Set Button Properties action can only be set for a Magellan CCS Navigator button.
You can set different button properties to represent different actions. For example, you can
have a button’s state change when it is clicked on, or make it take on a highlighted state
when an alarm is triggered. For information on creating buttons, see Adding Buttons on
page 17.
To set button action properties, complete these steps:
1 Select the Color check box if you want to set a color for the button other than the default
gray, or clear the check box (if not already cleared) if you prefer the default gray.
If you select the Color box, click the arrow in the color palette box to its right and select a
color from the resulting color palette, and select a percentage for Transparency.
2 Click the arrow in the Disable box and select one of these three options:
 If you do not want the button to change, select Don’t Change.
 If you want the button to appear selected, select True.
82 Chapter 3
This will have a visible effect on the button only if the button is a toggle button. If it
is not a toggle button—that is, if the Toggle check box on the button properties
page has been cleared—then the button will be selected but will immediately
become unselected.
When True is selected, the No grey text option becomes available. When No grey
text is selected, the button will appear available even when it is not.
 If you do not want the button to appear selected, select False.
3 Click the arrow in the Highlighted box and select one of these three options:
 If you do not want the button to change, select Don’t Change.
 If you want the button to appear highlighted, select True.
 If you do not want the button to appear highlighted, select False.
4 In the Caption box, select one of these two options:
 For unchanging text on the button face, select Custom Value and type the text in
the text box.
 For button face text that changes in response to events, select Event/Custom
Properties and choose the text-changing event using the down arrow.
circumstances.
Setting Properties for a ‘Button Blink Mode’ Action

This action is used to make a button blink or stop blinking, depending on its current state.
The Set Button Blink Mode action can only be set for Magellan CCS Navigator buttons.
For information on creating buttons, see Adding Buttons on page 17.
To complete the Button Blink Mode action properties box, complete these steps:
1 Select the Blink Mode from the list.

The options are On, Off, or Toggle.
2 Select Color or Bitmap.

If Color is selected, click the arrow in the color palette box to its right and select a color for
the blink from the resulting color palette. In the Transparency box, enter the level of
transparency for the button, while in blink mode. The higher the number, the more
transparent the button.
If Bitmap is selected, click Browse to select a graphic file. When the button is blinking in
Control mode, it will display the graphic in its “on” state.
Setting Properties for a ‘Set Custom Property’ Action

For a complete explanation of what custom properties are and how you can use them on a
Graphical Navigation page, see Defining Custom Properties for a Page on page 15.
To complete the Set Custom Property action properties box, complete these steps:
User Manual
1 In the Property drop-down menu, select a custom property (CP) or global property (GP).
Instead of completing the following steps, you can instead click Existing Actions>> to
show a box listing previously defined conditions. Select from the list to reuse previously set
conditions or select a similar set of conditions and edit them. Then click OK.
2 Under Set property action behavior, choose an option from the drop-down menu.
Options include Replace, Append to, or Remove from existing property value.
If you choose Append or Remove, the Value Separator menu becomes available. Choose
an item from the list.
Select Mute custom property change event if you want to suppress any events that the
action triggers.
3 In the Value section, select Custom Value, Router Value, Event /Custom Properties, or
Database value depending on whether you want to set a custom value, a router value, or
an event property value for the custom or global property.
 If you select Custom Value, type the custom value in the Value box.
 If you select Router Value, click Select... in the Device ID box and select a router
from the list of configured routers.
Then click the arrow in the Router Value box and select from the list of sources
and destinations for the specified router. Sources have the prefix “[Src]” and
destinations have the prefix “[Dst].”
If the router does not appear in the Router Select dialog, then you must first
configure the router. See Volume 6: Routing Configuration.
 If you select Event/Custom Properties, select the value from the list.
The values in the event property list are dependent upon the event that the action
is associated with. Not all events enable the Event Property option.
 If you select Database value, the custom property is set to its previously saved
value from the database.
It you want to save the value of the custom property in the Magellan CCS Navigator
database, click Save the changed value to the database. When a value is saved in this
way, you will be able to retrieve it even after rebooting Magellan CCS Navigator.
Click OK to close the Set Custom Property action property box.
Setting Properties for a ‘Set Frame Custom Property’ Action

This action can only be performed on a Navigator Frame object. For information on adding
a Navigator Frame to your page, see Adding a Navigator Frame on page 28.
To complete the Set Frame Custom Property action properties box, complete these steps:
1 Type a name for the custom property in the Custom Property box, or click the arrow and
select a name for the custom property from the Custom Property list.
Instead of completing the following steps, you can instead click Existing Actions>> to
show a box listing previously defined conditions. Select from the list to reuse previously set
conditions or select a similar set of conditions and edit them. Then click OK.
2 Select Custom Value or Event/Custom Properties depending on whether you want to

set a custom value or event/custom property value for the frame custom property.
84 Chapter 3
 If you select Custom Value, type the custom value in the Value box.
 If you select Event/Custom Properties, type the custom value in the box, or select
an event or custom property from the list.
3 Click OK to close the Set Frame Custom Property action property box.
Setting Properties for a ‘Set Link Properties’ Action

This action can only be applied to a link. You can use it to change the appearance of a link
when the action is triggered. For more information on links, see Creating Links Between
Symbols on page 41.
See Setting an Action on page 72 for instructions on how to set an Action. To complete
the Set Link Properties action properties box, complete these steps:
1 If you want the line to become transparent, place a check in the box beside Transparent. If
the line becomes transparent, its color, style and width become irrelevant, as they are
invisible.
Figure 3-11 Set Link Properties Dialog Box

2 To change the color of the line, place a check in the Color box.
To select a new color for the line, click the color square beside the Color check box. A
palette opens. When you click on the color you desire on the palette, that color is selected
and the palette closes.
3 To change the style and weight of the line, place a check in the Line box.
From the Style menu, click on the style (solid, dash, dot and so forth). The style options
available only affect the lines that have a width of 0 point (1 pixel).
From the Width menu, click on the weight of line you want to see. Use the scroll bar at the
right of the menu to scroll up and down to review the entire list.
When you are satisfied with your choices, click OK to return to the Object Properties -
Rules screen.
User Manual
Setting Properties for a ‘Set Symbol Properties’ Action

The Set Symbol Properties action can only be set for a Magellan CCS Navigator symbol.
When triggered, this action changes the highlighted state of a symbol. For information on
creating Navigator symbols, see Adding a Resource Icon Symbol on page 36.
To set symbol action properties, complete these steps:
1 Click the arrow in the Highlighted box and select one of these three options:
 If you do not want the symbol’s label to change, select Don’t Change.
 If you want the symbol’s label to appear highlighted, select True.
 If you do not want the symbol’s label to appear highlighted, select False.
circumstances.
Setting Properties for a ‘Set Text Properties’ Action

A Set Text Properties action can only be set for text objects. When triggered, the Set Text
Properties action can change the color of text, or change the text’s content (what it says).
For information on adding text to a Navigator page, see Adding a Text Object on
page 24.
To complete the Set Text Properties action properties box, complete these steps:
1 Select Color, if the color of the text is to change, and then select a color from the list.
2 Select Custom Value to preset the text that appears.
3 Select Event/Custom Properties to associate the text with a set event, custom property
(CP), or global property (GP). From the Event/Custom Properties list, select the event that
will define the changed text. This creates dynamic text that changes in response to events or
changes to custom properties.
4 Click OK to close the Set Text Properties action property box.
Setting Properties for a ‘Set ActiveX Properties’ Action

The Set ActiveX Properties action can only be set for ActiveX controls. For information on
creating an ActiveX control, please refer to Adding Controls on page 42.
In the Action Property dialog box, the Name column indicates the name of the ActiveX
property, and the Type column indicates the OLE type of the property.
To set Set ActiveX Properties action properties, complete these steps:

86 Chapter 3
Figure 3-12 The Action Property Box

1 Select the check boxes for the values that you want to change.
By selecting a check box, you enable the Value for that property. Only properties that have
been checked will be changed.
You can specify the value to assign to the property in the Value list. You can type in a value,
or extract it from either an event property (indicated by the prefix ‘[EP]’), a global property
(indicated by the prefix ‘[GP]’), or a custom property (indicated by the prefix ‘[CP]’).
When an ActiveX control has more than eight properties, a scroll-bar appears on the right
side of the dialog box so you can select the remaining properties.
2 Click OK to close the Action Properties box.
Setting Properties for a “Set Page Refresh Option” Action

The Set Page Refresh Option action can only be assigned to a page.
From the Refresh Control menu, choose On or Off.
This option determines whether or not the page will be updated automatically.
Setting Properties for a ‘Set Screen Mode’ Action

User Manual
Figure 3-13 Set Screen Mode Action Properties Dialog Box

This action activates or deactivates full-screen mode.
From the Full Screen Mode menu, choose On or Off.
Under Tool Options, select whether you want the following regions of the screen to change
their state when this action is triggered.
 Graphical Navigation toolbar (at the top of the screen)

 Graphical Navigation status bar (at the bottom of the screen)
 Navigation pane (defaults to the upper left of the screen)
 Diagnostics (defaults to the lower portion of the screen)
For each of these options, you can choose the following options:
 Don’t Change - leaves the particular screen component in its current state on top or
below the Graphical Navigation page
 Show - activates the screen element if it is hidden, or leaves it on the screen if it is
already there
 Hide - deactivates the screen element if it was on the screen, or leaves it off if it was
not there previously
Setting Properties for the ActiveX Method’s Action

An Invoke ActiveX Method action can only be sent from an ActiveX control. For
information on creating an ActiveX control, please refer to Adding Controls on page 42.
If the ActiveX method that you select accepts parameters, click Action Properties to open
the Action Property dialog and configure that action.
88 Chapter 3
Figure 3-14 Action Property Dialog Box

This dialog is very similar to the SetActiveXProperty dialog, except that the check boxes
are not available as all the items are automatically enabled.
See Event, Property and Method Compatibility, and OLE Types on page 49 for more
information.
Working with Macros

create or edit actions.
A macro is a group of actions that can be executed at a specified event. You can use a
macro over and over on different events throughout Magellan CCS Navigator.
If a series of actions are set up to initiate at one event, that series of actions will be sent in
the order they appear in the macro list. Depending on timing of the various other
equipment, all actions may or may not appear to happen simultaneously.
Creating a Macro
Macros can only be created in Build mode.
2 Click the Macros tab.

User Manual
Copy and
Paste buttons
are available
when a row is
selected, and
allow you to
duplicate a row
within the
macro.
Figure 3-15 Rules and Macros Dialog Box, Macros Tab

Macros and descriptions are listed.
3 Click New. Another dialog box appears.
Figure 3-16 New Macro Dialog Box

4 Type a name and description of the macro in the fields provided at the top of this dialog
box.
5 Click New Action.
A new field appears in the Action and Description lists below. Make a selection from a
drop-down menu in the Action field. If there are other rules in the list, a new rule is always
added at the bottom of the list. When the list grows longer than fits inside the visible frame,
a scroll bar appears so you can move up and down the list.
6 Click Action Properties. The dialog box it opens offers options specific to that action.
Once you have set the action properties and clicked OK to close the Action Properties
dialog box, the Description field is automatically filled in with a definition of the action to be
performed.
7 You can now create more actions following steps 5 and 6.

90 Chapter 3
8 When you are done creating rules, click OK to save it. Otherwise, click Cancel to delete the
macro.
To use a macro, see Setting Properties for an ‘Execute Macro’ Action on page 76.
Modifying a Once a macro has an action in it, that macro can be deleted.
Macro

3 Select a macro by clicking on it in the Macro/Description field.
4 Click Modify or double click on the macro in the Macros list, and then make your
modifications.
5 Click OK to save the changes to your macro, or Cancel to delete them.
Deleting an Action from a Macro

To delete an action from the macro list:
1 Click the action you would like to delete. If you click in the Description field for the action,
the field becomes outlined. If you click the Action field, a down arrow at the right of the
field appears.
2 Click Delete Action. When a rule is deleted, the next rule below it becomes selected.
Moving an Action in a Macro

To move an action in its order in the macro list:
1 Select the action.

2 Click Move Up or Move Down to switch the rule’s position with the rule above or below
it.
Deleting a Macro
Macros that are in use can not be deleted until the rules that use them are deleted.
Once a macro has an action in it, that macro can be deleted.

3 Select a macro by clicking on it in the Macro/Description field.
4 Click Remove. A message asking if you are sure appears. If you click Yes, the macro is
deleted forever and irretrievably from your system. If you click No, the macro will stay.
91
4 Router Rule Creation
Router Rule Creation Overview

You must have a NAVIGATOR-SRV or NAVIGATOR-SNMP license to create rules for Navigator
objects and pages. Only an Administrator user can create or edit rules.
Rules are not specific to routers; for a general overview of the standard rules that can be
applied to any Navigator system, please see Rules for Magellan CCS Navigator Pages
A rule consists of two separate parts: an event and an action. In a defined rule, an event
triggers an action. Some events have conditions, and all rules have preferences that need to
be defined. Rules are not necessarily router-specific, but an event or an action can be
router-specific, or both can be. This section describes the event and action settings that
apply specifically to routers.
Setting Router-Specific Events

Only an Administrator user with a NAVIGATOR-SRV or NAVIGATOR-SNMP license can create
or edit rules.
When you are creating a rule, you must set an event before you can set an action. You can,
of course, set all sorts of actions on a router-related page. See Rules for Magellan CCS
Navigator Pages and Objects on page 61 for more information.
To create a rule, right click on an object and select Properties > Rules.
92 Chapter 4
Router Rule Creation
The following events that can only be set for routers.
Table 4-1 Router-Related Conditional Events

Event Description Reference
On Crosspoint When the crosspoint status meets Using ‘On Crosspoint
Status conditions defined in the Event Status’ Events on page 92
Conditions box
On Lock/Protect When you want to determine Using ‘On Lock/Protect
Status whether a destination is locked, Status’ Events on page 94
protected or released (not locked
or protected)
On Salvo Status When a salvo’s status is changed Using ‘On Salvo Status’
Events on page 95
On Restrict Status When a crosspoint’s status is Using ‘On Restrict Status’
Event restricted/unrestricted Events on page 96
On Signal Presence When a specific input or output Using ‘On Signal Presence
Status signal presence status changes Status’ Events on page 97
One default event (as outlined in Setting an Event on page 66) that can be
router-specific. That Event is described in Setting Properties for a ‘Set Custom
Property’ Action on page 82. Its Destination (prefixed with Dst), Source (prefixed with
Src), or Salvo Value (prefixed with [Sal]) can be defined.
Using ‘On Crosspoint Status’ Events

On Crosspoint Status events are automatically set for router sources when you create a
router page using the Multi Display or Source Preview wizards.
A crosspoint is the physical connection between a router input and a router output. You can
execute a crosspoint (make it active) in two ways: Take Crosspoint or Take Selected.
When you take crosspoint, you must define which source input will connect to which
destination output.
However, when you take selected, you must perform two actions before executing the take
crosspoint: you must first execute a Select Source action and then execute a Select
Destination action. If you maintain this preset state within the router, the router waits for
the user to click an object that triggers a Take Selected action.
A router output may only have one crosspoint active at any given time.
When a crosspoint is active, the input and output pair associated with the crosspoint are
connected, and the signal present at the designated input is sent to the designated output.
If you set an action to occur “On Crosspoint Status,” the action will occur when the
crosspoint status meets the conditions defined in the Event Condition box.
 Graphical Navigation Page Creation on page 7

 CCS Device Control on page 255 of CCS Navigator: Advanced Graphical Navigation
Application
User Manual
 Volume 6: Routing Configuration

 Reusing or Editing a Previously Set Condition on page 68
Setting Conditions for ‘On Crosspoint Status’ Events

To set an On Crosspoint Status event, you must set the crosspoint conditions that need to
be met. If the source, destination, etc. are all set as defined on the On Crosspoint Status
dialog box, then an event is triggered. To set the crosspoint conditions, complete these
steps:
1 Click Condition on the Rules toolbar. This dialog box appears:
Figure 4-1 On Crosspoint Status Condition Dialog Box

2 Click the arrow in the Device ID box and select a configured router from the list.
If the target router does not appear in the device ID list, then you must first configure the
router. See Volume 6: Routing Configuration.
3 Click the arrow in the left Destination box, and select one of these three conditions, if
there are custom conditions that apply:
Table 4-2 Destination Condition Options

Option Function
Equals Destination is the same as that designated
Not Equals Destination is not the same as that designated
Any Value Ignore the value
4 Click the arrow in the right Destination box, and select the name of the destination for
which that custom condition applies.
94 Chapter 4
The Destination list may have additional entries for custom properties. These entries are
prefixed by “[CP].” When Navigator receives a crosspoint status event, it tests to see if the
status of the destination is equal to the current value of any custom property called
“Destination.” This gives you the flexibility to create the sample router control page like that
described in Volume 6: Routing Configuration.
5 Click the arrow in the left Source box, and select one of these three conditions, if there are
custom conditions that apply:
Table 4-3 Source Condition Options

Option Function
Equals Source is the same as that designated
Not Equals Source is not the same as that designated
Any Value Ignore the value
6 Click the arrow in the right Source box, and select the name of the source for which that
custom condition applies.
Options include inputs and Breakaway. The Source list may have additional entries for
custom properties. These entries are prefixed by “[CP].”
When Navigator receives a crosspoint status event, it tests to see whether the status source
is equal to the current value of any custom property called “Source.” This gives you the
flexibility to create the sample router control page like that described in Volume 6: Routing
Configuration.
7 If this will be a breakaway take, check the Breakaway check box. Set the options—Equals,
Not Equals, or Any Value—from the first drop-down list beside each level. Then, from the
second drop-down list beside each level, select the input or Disconnect.
If this will not be a breakaway take, then clear the Breakaway check box.
8 Click OK when you have finished setting the crosspoint conditions.
Using ‘On Lock/Protect Status’ Events

Locking a destination prevents anyone from changing the destination until it is unlocked.
The router protect feature also prevents inadvertent changes to the destination, but it
differs from a lock in one respect: with the protect feature enabled, the person who
enabled the protect feature can change the destination at will, but other users cannot
change the destination until the protect is removed.
The On Lock/Protect Status event is triggered when the lock or protect status of the
chosen destination is altered.
If you set a Lock/Protect Status event, you must also set the conditions for it. To set the
conditions, complete these steps:
1 Click Event Condition on the Rules toolbar and complete the resulting Lock Protect
Status box.
2 Click the arrow in the Device ID box and select a router from the list of configured routers.
If the router does not appear in the Device ID list, then you must first configure the router.
User Manual
3 Click the arrow in the left Destination box, and select one of these options:

Option Function
Status Released The specified destination is neither locked nor protected.
Locked? The specified destination is unprotected.
Protected? The specified destination is protected.
4 Click the arrow in the right Destination box, and select a destination from the list of
available destinations for that router.
5 Click OK when you have finished setting event conditions.
See Reusing or Editing a Previously Set Condition on page 68.
Using ‘On The salvo status feature triggers an action when a salvo’s status (lock, protect, active or
Salvo Status’ inactive) changes.
Events
If you set an On Salvo Status event, you must also set the conditions for it. To set the
1 Click Event Condition on the Rules toolbar and complete the resulting On Salvo Status
box.
Figure 4-2 Condition Dialog - On Salvo Status

2 Click the arrow in the Device ID box and select a router from the list of configured routers.
If the router does not appear in the device ID list, then you must first configure the router.
3 From the Salvo menu, choose your desired salvo.

4 Click the Status box, and select the option that will trigger an action:
96 Chapter 4

Option Function
Active The selected salvo has been taken
Inactive The selected salvo does not match the preset
Protected One or more of the selected salvo’s destinations are protected
Locked One or more of the selected salvo’s destinations are locked
Status released One or more of the selected salvo’s destinations are unlocked or
unprotected
5 Click the arrow in the right Destination box, and select a destination from the list of
available destinations for that router.
Using ‘On Restrict Status’ Events

The On Restrict Status feature triggers an action when a crosspoint status becomes
restricted or unrestricted.
If you plan to set a Restrict Status event, you must also set the conditions for it. To set the
1 Click Event Condition on the Rules toolbar and complete the resulting On Restrict
Status box.
Figure 4-3 Condition Dialog for On Restrict Status Event

2 Click the arrow in the Device ID box and select a device from the list of configured routers.
User Manual
3 Click the arrow in the Source box, and select a source from the list of available sources for
that router.
4 Click the arrow in the Destination box, and select a destination from the list of available
destinations for that router.
5 Click the arrow in the Restrict Level box, and select one specific level, or select Any Level,
and an action can be triggered on any level restriction in the crosspoint.
6 Click the arrow in the left Restricted State box, and select one of these options:

Option Function
Restricted The specified crosspoint cannot be taken.
Unrestricted The specified crosspoint is unprotected.

Using ‘On Signal Presence Status’ Events

The ‘On Signal Presence status’ event triggers an action when the signal presence status
(normally if a router source loses or regains signal) changes.
If you plan to set a Signal Presence Status event, you must also set the conditions for it.
To set the conditions, complete these steps:
1 Click Event Condition on the Rules toolbar and complete the resulting On Signal
Presence Status box.
Figure 4-4 Condition Dialog: On Signal Presence Status Event

98 Chapter 4
2 Click the arrow in the Device ID box and select a device from the list of configured routers.
3 From the Signal Status menu, choose either Present, Not Present, or Either.
4 In the Source or Destination Selection area, click the radio button for either Source
Signal or Destination Signal. From the menu beside the option you have chosen, select
the value (custom property, input, or output).
5 In the Signal Level section of the screen, select any level from the drop-down menu.
Setting Router-Specific Actions

An action must be set after you have set an event in the Rules dialog box. For more
information on setting up rules, please see Rules for Magellan CCS Navigator Pages
Table 4-7 Router-Specific Actions

Clear Selected Salvo Clears the current salvo Setting Properties for a ‘Clear
selection Selected Salvo’ Action on
page 112
Clear Selected Clears the current router Setting Properties for a ‘Clear
selection Selected’ Action on page 101
Execute Salvo Sets up and immediately Setting Properties for a ‘Execute
takes a router salvo Salvo’ Action on page 112
Execute Selected Salvo Performs a router salvo Setting Properties for a ‘Execute
Selected Salvo’ Action on
page 111
Lock Selected Locks the selected router Setting Properties for a ‘Lock
Destination destination Selected Destination’ Action on
page 105
Protect Selected Protects the selected router Setting Properties for a ‘Protect
Destination destination Selected Destination’ Action on
page 104
Query Destination Queries the status of the Setting Properties for a ‘Query
Status router destination Destination Status’ Action on
page 101
Query Signal Presence Queries the signal presence Setting Properties for a ‘Query
Status status Signal Presence Status’
Action on page 101
User Manual
Table 4-7 Router-Specific Actions (Continued)

Restrict Crosspoint Sets up and prevents a Setting Properties for a ‘Restrict
particular source and Crosspoint’ Action on page 108
destination from being
taken
Restrict Selected Prevents a selected source Setting Properties for a ‘Restrict
Crosspoint and destination from being Selected Crosspoint’ Action on
taken page 109
Select Destination Presets the desired Setting Properties for a ‘Select
destination in preparation Destination’ Action on page 99
for a Take command
Select Salvo Presets the desired salvo in Setting Properties for a ‘Select
preparation for Execute Salvo’ Action on page 110
Selected Salvo command
Select Source Presets the desired source Setting Properties for a ‘Select
in preparation for a Take Source’ Action on page 100
command
Set Crosspoint Match Sets the matching Setting Properties for a `Set
Type algorithm type used by the Crosspoint Match Type'
On Crosspoint Status event Action on page 103
Swap Destinations Swaps the crosspoints of Setting Properties For a “Swap
two specified destinations Destinations” Action on
page 106
Take Crosspoint Sets up and immediately Setting Properties for a ‘Take
takes a router crosspoint Crosspoint’ Action on page 102
Take Selected Takes the selected router Setting Properties for a ‘Take
source and destination Selected’ Action on page 103
Some actions are meant to follow other actions. For example, you must select one or more
router destinations before you can set an action to Lock Selected, Protect Selected, or
Take Selected.
Do not list rules for both an action to query router status (a select or query action) and an
action to invoke a router command (a clear, lock, protect, or take action) sequentially on the
Rules tab if they have the same event trigger. Navigator needs to process a status action
fully before it can implement a command action. If rules with the same event trigger list
sequentially on the Rules tab, Navigator actually processes them simultaneously. Instead,
set one of the actions to occur after a different event.
Setting Properties for a ‘Select Destination’ Action

Multiple destinations can be simultaneously selected, and selecting a destination does not
automatically clear a previously selected destination.
For information on creating a rule, see Setting a Rule for a Magellan CCS Navigator
Object or Page on page 62.
Use the Select Destination action to choose a router destination (output). To set the Select
Destination action properties, complete these steps:
100 Chapter 4
1 Click the arrow by the Device ID box and select the target router.
2 In the Destination box, click the arrow and select a destination.

3 In the State Select box, click the arrow and select one of the three options:
Table 4-8 State Select Options

Option Function
On Always selects the destination
Off Always unselects the destination
Toggle Always toggles the destination
If the destination is selected, it becomes unselected; or, conversely, if the
destination is unselected, it becomes selected.
circumstances.
Setting Properties for a ‘Select Source’ Action

Use the Select Source action to select the source (input) for a router. To set Select Source
action properties, complete these steps:
2 In the Source box, click the arrow and select a source.

Options include inputs and Disconnect.
3 In the State Select box, click the arrow and select one of the three options:
Table 4-9 State Select Options

Option Function
On Always selects the source
Off Always unselects the source
Toggle Always toggles the source
If the source is selected, it becomes unselected; or, conversely, if the source
is unselected, it becomes selected.
4 If this will be a breakaway take, check the Breakaway check box. For each level, select the
source for that level. You can disconnect the source (Disconnect), leave the source alone
(--No Change--), or select a level name, custom property or global property to use for that
level.
User Manual
circumstances.
Setting Properties for a ‘Clear Selected’ Action

To set Clear Selected action properties for a Router, complete these steps:
Setting Properties for a ‘Query Destination Status’ Action

This status query action could become the trigger for an “On Crosspoint Status” event.
Then you may want to set button properties for additional actions.
To set Query Destination Status action properties, complete these steps:
2 In the Destination box, click the arrow and select the destination to query.
Setting Properties for a ‘Query Signal Presence Status’ Action

This action queries for signal presence status, using either a logical source or a logical
destination. This status query action could become the trigger for an “On Signal Presence
Status” event.
102 Chapter 4
To set Query Signal Presence Status action properties, complete these steps:
If the target router does not appear in the Device ID list, then you must first configure the
2 In the Source or Destination Selection area, click the radio button for either Source
Signal or Destination Signal. From the menu beside the option you have chosen, select
the logical source or destination.
Setting Properties for a ‘Take Crosspoint’ Action

A Take Crosspoint action requires that the source and destination be defined before you
trigger the action. The source and destination that are taken are independent of any prior
actions that involved setting source or destination.
An action to take a crosspoint is independent of this series of three actions:
1 Select source.
2 Select destination.
3 Take selected (source and destination).
For example, when you can perform this series of actions, Destination 1 and Source 1 will
remain the selected items:
1 Select Destination 1.
2 Select Source 1.
3 Take crosspoint of Destination 2 and Source 2.
To set Take Crosspoint action properties, complete these steps:
2 In the Destination box, click the arrow and select a destination.

3 In the Source box, click the arrow and select a source.
The State Select box is unavailable.
4 If this will be a breakaway take, check the Breakaway check box. For each level, select the
source for that level. You can disconnect the source (Disconnect), leave the source alone
User Manual
(--No Change--), or select a level name, custom property or global property to use for that
level.
circumstances.
Setting Properties for a ‘Take Selected’ Action

A Take Selected action differs from a Take Crosspoint action in that you are required to
perform a Set Source action before you can Take Selected.
When you take selected, you must perform two actions before executing the take: First you
must execute a Set Source action and then you must execute a Set Destination action. If you
maintain this preset state within the router, the router waits for you to click an object that
triggers a Take Selection action.
An action to take selected requires this series of three actions:
1 Select source.
2 Select destination.
3 Take selected (source and destination).
To set Take Selected action properties, complete these steps:
circumstances.
Setting Properties for a `Set Crosspoint Match Type' Action

By default, the 'On Crosspoint Status' event uses the 'Full Match' type when extracting the
logical source information from the event.
104 Chapter 4
The logical source information from the 'On Crosspoint Status' event is assembled based on
the input values provided by the event. As you might have inputs on the crosspoint event
that do not correspond to your logical source configuration, the event matching algorithm
is not able to determine which logical source corresponds to the input values in the 'On
Crosspoint Status' event, assigning blank values to both Source ID and Source Name event
parameters. This operation changes the matching algorithm that is used by the On
Crosspoint Status event when reporting logical source information.
Figure 4-5 Action Property Dialog - Set Crosspoint Match Type
To set Set Crosspoint Match Type action properties, complete these steps:
1 Click Select... by the Device ID box and select the target router.
router. See Configuring Routers.
2 In the Match Type box, click the arrow and select one of the four match type options:
Table 4-10 Match Type Options for Set Crosspoint Match Type Action
Match Type Criteria
Full Match Crosspoint status must match all levels configured
Highest Level Crosspoint status must match the highest level configured
Lowest Level Crosspoint status must match the lowest level configured
[Level Name] Crosspoint status must match on the level specified
Setting Properties for a ‘Protect Selected Destination’ Action

You must have selected a destination before you can protect it. See Setting Properties for
a ‘Select Destination’ Action on page 99.
User Manual
Rules tab if they have the same event trigger.
Navigator needs to process a status action fully before it can implement a command action.
If rules with the same event trigger list sequentially on the Rules tab, Navigator actually
processes them simultaneously. Instead, set one of the actions to occur after a different
event.
With the protect feature enabled, the person who enabled the protect feature can change
the destination at will, but other users cannot change the destination until the protect is
removed.
To set Protect Destination action properties, complete these steps:
2 Click the arrow in the Protected Selected Destination box and select one of the
following three options:
Table 4-11 Protect Selected Destination Options

Option Function
Protect Protects the selected destination
Unlock Unlocks the selected destination.
Toggle Toggles from the state from protected to unprotected or from unprotected
to protected.
Setting Properties for a ‘Lock Selected Destination’ Action

You must have selected a destination before you can lock it. See Setting Properties for a
‘Select Destination’ Action on page 99.
Rules tab if they have the same event trigger.
Navigator needs to process a status action fully before it can implement a command action.
If rules with the same event trigger list sequentially on the Rules tab, Navigator actually
processes them simultaneously. Instead, set one of the actions to occur after a different
event.
Locking a destination prevents anyone from changing the destination until it is unlocked.
106 Chapter 4
A lock action toggles the current lock state. This means that the action unlocks the lock if
the destination is currently locked, but locks the destination if the destination is currently
unlocked.
A locked destination can only be unlocked by the Navigator user who applied the lock.
To set Lock Destination action properties, complete these steps:
2 Click the arrow in the Lock Selected Destination box and select one of the following
three options:
Table 4-12 Lock Selected Destination Options

Option Function
Lock Locks the selected destination
Unlock Unlocks the selected destination.
Toggle Toggles from the state from locked to unlocked or from unlocked to
locked.
Setting Properties For a “Swap Destinations” Action

This action swaps the crosspoints of two specified destinations.
User Manual
Figure 4-6 Action Property Dialog - Swap Destinations

To set Swap Destinations action properties for a Router, complete these steps:
2 From the Destination 1 drop-down menu, choose a destination.

3 From the Destination 2 drop-down menu, choose a different destination.
4 Use the Available Levels and Selected Levels fields to determine which levels will be
swapped. At least one level must be selected.
To add a level from the Available Levels to the Selected Levels, select a level in the
left-hand field and click the > button to move it to the Selected Level list. You can select
multiple levels in the available section by holding down the shift key, clicking on the first
desired level and clicking on the last desired level. This selects all levels in the range between
the first chosen and last chosen level, inclusive. You can select individual levels by holding
down the CTRL key and clicking on levels one at a time. If you click the >> button, all levels
in the available level list are moved to the Selected level list.
Click < to return the level to the Available Levels list and remove it from the Preferred
Levels list, or click << to remove all levels from the Preferred Levels list and place them all
back in the Available Levels list

108 Chapter 4
Setting Properties for a ‘Restrict Crosspoint’ Action

A restrict action is like a lock, but instead of being tied to a whole destination, a restrict ties
itself to a specific crosspoint. You could, for example, restrict Dest 1 to Src 1, so no one
would be able to take to that crosspoint, making a take to Dest 1 to Scr 1 impossible.
This action creates a specific restriction action.
Figure 4-7 Action Property Dialog - Restrict Crosspoint

To set Restrict Crosspoint action properties, complete these steps:
2 Click the arrow in the Source box and select one of the source inputs.
3 Click the arrow in the Destination box and select one of the destinations.
4 Click the arrow in the Restricted State box and select one of the following three options:
User Manual
Table 4-13 Restrict Crosspoint Options

Option Function
Restrict Restricts the selected crosspoint
Unrestrict Unrestricts the selected crosspoint
Toggle Toggles from the state from restricted to unrestricted or from unrestricted
to restricted
5 Use the Available Levels and Selected Levels fields to determine which levels will be
restricted. At least one level must be selected.
To add a level from the Available Levels to the Selected Levels, select a level in the
left-hand field and click the > button to move it to the Selected Level list. You can select
multiple levels in the available section by holding down the shift key, clicking on the first
desired level and clicking on the last desired level. This selects all levels in the range between
the first chosen and last chosen level, inclusive. You can select individual levels by holding
down the CTRL key and clicking on levels one at a time. If you click the >> button, all levels
in the available level list are moved to the Selected Level list.
Click < to return the level to the Available Levels list and remove it from the Preferred
Levels list, or click << to remove all levels from the Preferred Levels list and place them all
back in the Available Levels list
Setting Properties for a ‘Restrict Selected Crosspoint’ Action

A restrict action is like a lock, but instead of being tied to a whole destination, a restrict ties
itself to a specific crosspoint. You could, for example, restrict Dest 1 to Src 1, so no one
would be able to take to that crosspoint, making a take to Dest 1 to Scr 1 impossible.
This action works in co-ordination with a Select Source and Select Destination action. When
you set a Restrict Selected Crosspoint, the source and destination that you set with the
previous actions cannot be connected (you cannot do a take between them).
Figure 4-8 Action Property Dialog - Restrict Selected Crosspoints

To set Restrict Crosspoint action properties, complete these steps:
110 Chapter 4
2 Click the arrow in the Restricted State box and select one of the following three options:
Table 4-14 Restrict Selected Crosspoint Options

Option Function
Restrict Restricts the selected crosspoint
Unrestrict Unrestricts the selected crosspoint
Toggle Toggles from the state from restricted to unrestricted or from unrestricted
to restricted
Setting Properties for a ‘Select Salvo’ Action

This action presents a salvo for an action to be taken on that selected salvo. Salvos are
pre-configured before you begin working on Navigator pages. If the router is not properly
configured (this includes the router not having a salvo defined for it), a yellow notice will be
displayed.
Figure 4-9 Action Property Dialog - Select Salvo

To set Select Salvo action properties for a Router, complete these steps:
2 From the Salvo drop-down menu, choose your desired salvo.

3 From the State Select drop-down menu, choose the Salvo’s state. Options are On and Off.
User Manual
Setting Properties for a ‘Execute Selected Salvo’ Action

This Action requires you to have set a Select Salvo action. See Setting Properties for a
‘Select Salvo’ Action on page 110 for more information.
If you have set a Select Salvo action, you can set an Execute Selected Salvo action to
perform the operation on that salvo. You can either take that salvo, disconnect it, lock it, or
protect it.
This operation works on all selected salvos, if you have selected more than one. Salvos are
pre-configured before you begin working on Navigator pages. If the router is not properly
configured (this includes the router not having a salvo defined for it), a yellow notice will be
displayed.
Figure 4-10 Action Property Dialog - Execute Selected Salvo

To set Execute Selected Salvo action properties for a Router, complete these steps:
For lock and protect salvo actions, you can set the option to lock always, unlock always, or
toggle the current state.
2 From the Salvo Action drop-down menu, choose your action.
Table 4-15
Salvo Action Effect
Take Salvo Attempt to establish all crosspoints
Disconnect Salvo Set all the defined destinations to disconnect
Lock Salvo Lock all the defined destinations
Protect Salvo Protect all defined destinations

112 Chapter 4
Setting Properties for a ‘Execute Salvo’ Action

Similarly to the Take Crosspoint and Take Selected crosspoint actions, the Execute Salvo
executes the salvo right away. You can either take that salvo, disconnect it, lock it, or
protect it. Salvos are pre-configured before you begin working on Navigator pages. If the
router is not properly configured (this includes the router not having a salvo defined for it),
a yellow notice will be displayed.
Figure 4-11 Action Property Dialog - Execute Salvo

To set Execute Salvo action properties for a Router, complete these steps:
2 From the Salvo drop-down menu, choose your desired salvo.

3 From the State Select drop-down menu, choose the Salvo’s state. Options are On and Off.
4 From the Salvo Action drop-down menu, choose your action.
Table 4-16 Salvo Action Options

Salvo Action Effect
Take Salvo Attempt to establish all crosspoints
Disconnect Salvo Set all the defined destinations to disconnect
Lock Salvo Lock all the defined destinations
Protect Salvo Protect all defined destinations
Setting Properties for a ‘Clear Selected Salvo’ Action

This operation clears all the previously selected salvos that have been selected using the
Select Salvo action. Salvos are pre-configured before you begin working on Navigator
pages. If the router is not properly configured (this includes the router not having a salvo
defined for it), a yellow notice will be displayed.
User Manual
Figure 4-12 Action Property Dialog - Clear Selected Salvo

To set Clear Selected Salvo action properties for a Router, complete these steps:
If the target router does not appear in the device ID list, you must first configure the router.

114 Chapter 4
115
5 SNMP Plug-in
SNMP Plug-in Overview

CCS Navigator objects and pages. Only an Administrator user can create rules. You must be
in Build mode.
SNMP is a communication protocol like TCP/IP, FTP and HTTP. The SNMP plug-in is an
optional component of Magellan CCS Navigator.
Using the SNMP plug-in, you can monitor SNMP traps and variable changes, just like you can
monitor alarms via other forms of control in CCS Magellan CCS Navigator. You can use
these events as triggers for other actions. And, you can trigger events by changing SNMP
variables.
There are two SNMP events that are included in the SNMP Plug-in. For information, see the
following topics:
 Setting Conditions for ‘On SNMP Variable Value Update’ Events on page 115
 Setting Conditions for ‘On SNMP Trap’ Events on page 116
An SNMP action does not have to follow an SNMP event. The SNMP actions that are
included in the SNMP plug-in are described in the following sections:
 Setting Properties for an ‘SNMP Get Variable Value’ Action on page 118
 Setting Properties for an ‘SNMP Set Variable Value’ Action on page 119
For information on general rule creation, see Setting a Rule for a Magellan CCS
Navigator Object or Page on page 62.
Setting Conditions for ‘On SNMP Variable Value Update’ Events

If you set an action to occur On SNMP Variable Value Update, the action will occur when
the SNMP variable value reaches the conditions defined in the Condition box, or more
simply put, when the variable value changes.
To set an On SNMP Variable Value Update event, you must set the SNMP variable value
conditions by completing the following steps:
116 Chapter 5
SNMP Plug-in
1 Follow the instructions in Setting a Rule for a Magellan CCS Navigator Object or
Page on page 62, stopping with step 5, after choosing On SNMP Variable Value Update
as your event.
2 Click Condition on the Rules toolbar. The Condition dialog box appears.
3 Click Select... and choose the SNMP device you want to monitor.
All OID strings should be prefaced with a “.”.
4 Beside Variable Object ID, choose Value or Property from the drop-down menu on the
left, and to complete the field on the right, do one of the following:
 If the Variable Object ID is a Value, enter the object ID of the SNMP variable that
you want to compare against.
 If the Variable Object ID is a Property, choose the property from the drop-down
menu.
5 Click the arrow in the first Variable Value box, and select one of the three conditions:
.
Table 5-1 Variable Value Condition Options

Option Function
Equals The specified variable value is the same as that designated
Not Equals The specified variable value is not the same as that designated
Any Value Ignore the variable value
6 Click the arrow in the second Variable Value box, and choose Value or Property.
 If you choose Value, enter the value of the SNMP variable that you want to
compare against.
Although Magellan CCS Navigator correctly displays SNMP values on rendered pages using
enumeration names defined in the MIB, the “value” specified in this third box must be the
enumeration index (interger value) associated with the item.
 If you choose Property, choose the property from the drop-down menu.
7 In the third Variable Value box, enter the defined custom properties. If it is a value, you
can type the SNMP variable that you want to set. If it is a Property, choose from a
pre-defined selection in the drop-down list.
8 (Optional) Place a check beside Variable Polling Enabled.
When selected, the value of the SNMP variable is polled according to the polling interval set
for the device in the Device Properties. If you do not select the check box, this event will
occur for any response from an SNMP Set Variable or SNMP Get Variable value action. By
default this check box is unselected. See Setting SNMP Navigation Properties on page 110
of CCS Navigator: Advanced Graphical Navigation Application.
Setting Conditions for ‘On SNMP Trap’ Events

If you set an action to occur On SNMP Trap, the action will occur when the SNMP trap is
triggered. To configure an On SNMP Trap event, you must set the SNMP trap conditions by
completing the following steps:
User Manual
Page on page 62, stopping with step 5, after choosing On SNMP Trap as your event.
2 Click Condition on the Rules toolbar. The SNMP Trap Event Condition box opens.
Figure 5-1 On SNMP Trap Event Condition Dialog

3 In the Device ID field, select <Existing SNMP Server> to enable the Select button.
4 Click Select to select the device you want to monitor the SNMP traps.
You can also select either a Global Property or Custom Property that contains the device ID
of a device you want to monitor.
You can create a condition that monitors a certain SNMP device by its type, for instance.
Selecting Any Value will make the application to catch any trap generated by the device.
5 In the first combo box of the Trap Type field, click the arrow to select one of the three
conditions:
.

Option Function
Equals The specified trap type is the same as that designated
Not Equals The specified trap type is not the same as that designated
Any Value Ignore the trap type
6 Select the trap type using the second combo box of the Trap Type field.
Table 5-3 Trap Types

Trap Type Definition
Cold Start The agent is booting.
Warm Start The agent is rebooting.
Link Down An interface has gone down.
Link Up An interface has come up.
118 Chapter 5
SNMP Plug-in
Table 5-3 Trap Types

Trap Type Definition
Authentication An invalid community (password) was received in a message.
Failure
EGP Neighbor Loss An EGP peer has gone down.
Enterprise Specific An enterprise specific trap has happened. Look in the enterprise
code for information on the trap.
7 Click the New button to create an entry in the Variable table.
8 To enter data in the new field in the Variable OID column, type the OID that you want to
compare against the list of variables that comes within the trap pdu (variable binding list).
9 In the Comparison column, define the type of comparison you want to perform. Options in
this column are Equals, Not Equals, and Any Value.
10 In the Value column, define the expected value (if you didn’t choose Any Value in the
Comparison column).
enumeration names defined in the MIB, the “value” specified in this box must be the
11 Repeat steps 6 - 9 to associate other variables with the event.

12 When you have finished adding variables, click OK to close the Condition dialog box.
Setting Properties for an ‘SNMP Get Variable Value’ Action

To set an SNMP Get Variable Value action, complete these steps:
Page on page 62, stopping with step 7, after choosing SNMP Get Variable Value as your
action.
The Action Properties Dialog—SNMP Get Variable Value box opens.
4 Click Select to choose the target SNMP device.
of the target device.
Variable Value and Variable Type are always unavailable on this screen.
 If the object is a value, enter the object ID of the SNMP variable that you want to
control.
User Manual
 If the object is a property, choose the property from the drop-down menu.
6 Click OK when you have finished setting the action property.
Setting Properties for an ‘SNMP Set Variable Value’ Action

To set an SNMP Set Variable Value action, complete these steps:
Page on page 62, stopping with step 7, after choosing SNMP Set Variable Value as your
action.
The Action Properties Dialog—SNMP Set Variable Value box opens.
4 Click Select to choose the target SNMP device.
of the target device.
 If the object is a value, enter the object ID of the SNMP variable that you want to
control.
 If the object is a property, choose the property from the drop-down menu.
6 Click the arrow in the Variable Value condition box, and select one of the three conditions:
.

Option Function
Equals The specified variable value is the same as that designated
Not Equals The specified variable value is not the same as that designated
Any Value Ignore the variable value
7 In the Variable Value menu, choose Value or Property.

 If you choose Value, enter the value of the SNMP variable that you want to set.
enumeration names defined in the MIB, the “value” specified in this third box must be the
 If you choose Property, choose the property from the drop-down menu.
8 From the Variable Type box, select a supported SNMP data type for the SNMP variable to
control from the drop-down list.
9 Click OK when you have finished setting this action property.
120 Chapter 5
SNMP Plug-in
Setting Properties for a ‘SNMP Get Table’ Action

This action selects a table for placement on a Graphical Navigation page.
Figure 5-2 SNMP Get Table Properties Dialog Box

To complete the SNMP Get Table action, follow these steps:
1 Under Device ID, choose a device.

Device IDs that have been chosen before will appear in the menu; if the device you need is
not there, click Select to choose from a table.
2 Beside Variable object ID, choose Value, and then click MIB to select the table to get.
Tables are indicated by this icon:
The Variable Value and Variable Type rows are always unavailable for this action.
3 Click OK.
121
6 SuiteView Plug-in
SuiteView Actions Overview

CCS Navigator objects and pages. Only an Administrator user can create rules and pages.
SuiteView Control is an optional component of Magellan CCS Navigator.
To control a SuiteView multisource display processor from a Magellan CCS Navigator panel,
you need to set rules for conditional events and actions. The SuiteView-specific rules are
listed in Setting Rules to Perform SuiteView Actions on page 121. If you are unfamiliar
with how, when and why to make rules in Magellan CCS Navigator, see Rules for
Magellan CCS Navigator Pages and Objects on page 61.
Setting Rules to Perform SuiteView Actions

You must be in Build mode to define rules for Magellan CCS Navigator objects and pages.
SuiteView rules occur in response to events and conditional events and trigger pre-defined
actions.
The following table lists the Magellan CCS Navigator actions that are specific to SuiteView.
Table 6-1 SuiteView-Specific Actions for Rule Creation

Action Description Reference
Send String to COM Sends a command string Setting Properties for a ‘Send
Port to a specified serial port String to COM Port’ Action on
page 123
Load SuiteView Preset Loads a SuiteView preset Setting Properties for ‘Load
SuiteView Preset’ Action on
page 123
Set FullScreen On Sets the SuiteView device Setting Properties for ‘Set
screen to full screen Fullscreen On’ Action on page 122
Set FullScreen Off Returns the SuiteView Setting Properties for ‘Set
device screen to Fullscreen Off’ Action on page 122
window-size
122 Chapter 6
SuiteView Plug-in
Setting Properties for ‘Set Fullscreen On’ Action

Attempts to apply the Set Fullscreen On action to non-SuiteView devices will not work.
The Set Fullscreen On action makes a channel input PiP in a SuiteView device open in
full-screen size on an output monitor. To configure Set Fullscreen On action properties,
1 Follow the instructions in see Setting a Rule for a Magellan CCS Navigator Object or
Page on page 62, stopping at step 7, after selecting Set Fullscreen On as your action.
The Action Properties Dialog—Set Fullscreen On box opens.
3 Click the arrow in the Device Name field, and then select a SuiteView device to which you
want to send a command.
If the device you want is not listed, or you need to change device communication
preferences and connection information, you will need to create a serial configuration. See
Setting Communication Options on page 59.
4 Click the arrow in the Video Input field, and then type an input channel from the list.
(There are only 16 video inputs available to choose from.)
This is the input channel on which the Set Fullscreen On action will be implemented.
Setting Properties for ‘Set Fullscreen Off’ Action

Attempts to apply the Set Fullscreen Off action to non-SuiteView devices will not work.
The Set Fullscreen Off action returns SuiteView devices to the layout positions they held
prior to full-screen mode. To configure Set Fullscreen Off action properties, complete
these steps:
Page on page 62, stopping at step 7 after selecting Set Fullscreen Off as your action.
The Action Properties Dialog—Set Fullscreen Off box opens.
3 Click the arrow in the Device Name field, and then select a SuiteView device from the list
to which you want to send a command.
Communication Options and SNMP Configuration on page 59.
4 Click the arrow in the Input Channel field, and then type an input channel from the list.
This is the input channel on which the Set Fullscreen Off action will be implemented.

User Manual
Setting Properties for ‘Load SuiteView Preset’ Action

Attempts to apply the Load SuiteView Preset action to non-SuiteView devices will not
work.
The Load SuiteView Preset action loads a pre-configured layout to a SuiteView system. To
configure Load SuiteView Preset action properties, complete these steps:
Page on page 62, stopping at step 7, after selecting Load SuiteView Preset as your
action.
The Action Properties box opens.
Communication Options and SNMP Configuration on page 59.
4 Click the arrow in the Preset Name field, and then select a preset from the list.
Setting Properties for a ‘Send String to COM Port’ Action

Command strings sent to a specific device must make use of commands that device can
understand. See your device manual for a list of available commands.
See Setting Rules to Perform Actions on page 61 for instructions on how to set an
Action.
The Send String to COM Port command sends a command string to a device.To configure
Send String to COM Port action properties, complete these steps:
Page on page 62, stopping at step 7, after selecting Send String to COM Port as your
action.
The Action Properties dialog box opens.
Setting Communication Options on page 59.
String data can only be in English. If you are using an alternate operational language, your
keyboard will be automatically switched to English for data entry for strings. If you switch
the keyboard and enter text in an alternate language, data corruption could occur.
4 In the String field, enter a command string acceptable to that device.

124 Chapter 6
SuiteView Plug-in
Command strings sent to a specific device must make use of commands that device can
understand. See your device manual for a list of available commands.
5 Click OK to send the command string and to close the Action Properties box.
Setting Communication Options

If you are connected serially to NEO SuiteView via RS-232, and you intend to create a
Magellan CCS Navigator page using the Load SuiteView Preset method (see Creating a
Navigator Page using the ‘Load SuiteView Preset’ Action on page 125 for details),
then you will need to make the following communication settings:
1 In Build mode, open the Options menu and click Communication.

The Communication Options dialog box opens.
2 Click the Serial Settings tab, and then select the SuiteView device from the Device Name
list.
Click the Serial

Settings tab
Select a device
from this list, or
add a new device
by clicking Add
Complete these
Connection
Preferences
settings
Figure 6-1 Communication Options Dialog Box, Serial Settings Tab

If the SuiteView device is not listed, you will need to first add it by following these steps:
a Click Add.
The Add Device dialog box opens.
b Type a name in the Name field, and then click OK to close the dialog box.
c Select the new device name from the Device Name list.
3 Select the appropriate COM port from the Port list, and then make the following selections
from these Connection Preferences lists:
 Bits per second: 57600
 Data bits: 8
 Parity: None
User Manual
 Stop bits: 1
 Flow control: None
4 Click Apply, and then click OK to close the dialog box.
Creating a To create a preset, you must be in Control mode.

Preset
1 Right click an NSV-OUT card in the Navigation pane a Control dialog box.
2 From the shortcut menu that appears, select Presets > Save the current CCS settings to
capture all CCS, SuiteView, and NEO SuiteView settings currently applied to this module.
Creating a NEO SuiteView Navigator Page

On a customized Navigator page, you can create buttons that will load various presets that
have been designed and saved. Building a custom NEO SuiteView Navigator page provides
flexibility for recalling a layout from a customized page instead of using the standard CCS
interface.
You can control Magellan CCS Navigator from a custom Navigator page by two different
methods: using either a Load SuiteView Preset action or a Load Preset action.
Load SuiteView Preset method has the following characteristics:
 Control though serial RS-232 (see Setting Communication Options on page 124 to
configure)
 Loads a NEO SuiteView preset layout only, and no other parameters
See Creating a Navigator Page using the ‘Load SuiteView Preset’ Action on
page 125.
Load Preset method has the following characteristics:
 Control through Ethernet IP/TCP

 Loads all the parameters included in the preset, including the NEO SuiteView preview
layout parameter
See Creating a Navigator Page using the ‘Load Preset’ Action on page 126.
Creating a Navigator Page using the ‘Load SuiteView Preset’ Action

Ensure a serial connection via RS-232 cable is established, and that the communication
settings have been made (see Setting Communication Options on page 124).
The Load SuiteView Preset action loads just the NEO SuiteView Navigator page preset
layout. To use the Load SuiteView Preset action, follow these steps:
1 With a Graphical Navigation page open in Build mode, right-click and select Create, and
from the shortcut menu, select an object/element (for example, Button), and place it on
the page.
2 Right-click on the object/element, and select Properties from the shortcut menu.
126 Chapter 6
SuiteView Plug-in
The Object Properties dialog box opens.
Delete rule button (Use this to Condition button

New Rule
button remove partial or empty rules.
You cannot close the dialog box
if there are incomplete rules).
Figure 6-2 Setting a Load SuiteView Preset Action

4 Set the event (for example, On Mouse Click) from the Event list.
5 Click Condition (the button, not the column heading) to set the event condition (typically
set to Always).
For more information on event conditions, see Defining Conditions on page 67.
The action Load SuiteView Preset is different from the action Load Preset. See
Creating a Navigator Page using the ‘Load Preset’ Action on page 126 for more
information.
6 Open the Action list, and then select Load SuiteView Preset.
7 Enter an event description, following these steps:
a Click Action Properties.
The Action Property—Load SuiteView Preset dialog box appears.
b Select a device name from the corresponding list.
If there are no presets available, see Creating a Preset on page 125.
c From the Preset Name list, select a preset layout name that can be recalled/loaded.
d Click OK.
8 Close the Object Properties dialog box, and then save the newly created page.
Creating a Navigator Page using the ‘Load Preset’ Action

If there are no presets available, see Creating a Preset on page 125.
The Load Preset action loads all the CCS settings that have been saved under a preset
name, not just the NEO SuiteView Navigator page preset layout. Controlling NEO SuiteView
using this method requires an active Ethernet connection.
User Manual
If you have assigned the Load Preset action to an object/element’s event, then the Action
Properties dialog box where you enter descriptive device and preset information will be
different than that shown in Creating a Navigator Page using the ‘Load SuiteView
Preset’ Action on page 125. Follow these steps when assigning a Load Preset action to
an event:
1 With a Graphical Navigation page open in Build mode, right-click and select Create, and
from the shortcut menu, select an object/element (for example, Button), and place it on
the page.
2 Right-click on the object/element, and select Properties from the shortcut menu.
Condition button
Figure 6-3 Object Properties Dialog Box

4 Set an event (for example, On Mouse Click) from the Event list.
5 Click Condition to set the event condition (typically set to Always).
For more information on event conditions, see Setting Properties for a ‘Load Preset’
Action on page 79.
6 From the Action list, select Load Preset. Click Action Properties.
7 The Action Property—Load Preset dialog box opens.
Figure 6-4 Action Property Dialog Box (Load Preset Action Setting)
128 Chapter 6
SuiteView Plug-in
8 Click Select... to open the Device Selection dialog box, and then select a device from the
list.
Figure 6-5 Device Selection Dialog Box

Note the listed Device Location to ensure you are selecting the correct device.

The selected device ID now appears in the corresponding field within the Action Property
dialog box.
10 From the Preset Name list, select a preset name and then click OK.
11 Close the Object Properties dialog box, and then save the newly created page.
Recalling a Preset Page

If you have not closed the Navigator page you just created in the previous steps, it will open
directly once you enter Control mode.
You will get different results depending on the action assigned in the Object Properties
dialog box.
However, if you closed the newly created Navigator page after saving it, or if you want to
open a different page, you can recall it by clicking File > Open in the main menu and then
browsing for the desired page.
Navigator pages have a .nav file extension.

129
7 Using Graphical Navigation

Pages
Controlling Navigation Pages Overview

environment.
Magellan CCS Navigator must be in Build mode for discovery, configuration, and page
construction and editing; however, Magellan CCS Navigator must be in Control mode
for monitoring and control activities.
You must have a NAVIGATOR-SRV or NAVIGATOR-SNMP license to create pages, and a

NAVIGATOR-SRV, NAVIGATOR-SNMP, or NAVIGATOR-CLI license to use pages to monitor
and control devices.
In Control mode, the finished drawing becomes a Navigation page, *.nav, which you can
use for monitoring and control of your network environment. On a page, you can click
buttons, symbols, links and other objects, open shortcut menus and define actions to
associate with objects. See Rules for Magellan CCS Navigator Pages and Objects on
page 61.
Refreshing a Graphical Navigation Page

Only an Administrator user can alter Graphical Navigation pages. When changes are
made to the Graphical Navigation page on a Magellan CCS Navigator Server (with a
NAVIGATOR-SRV or NAVIGATOR-SNMP license), all users on connected Magellan CCS
Navigator Clients (NAVIGATOR-CLI license) receive notification that a network resource has
been updated. When they reload (by clicking Reload from the toolbar, or by selecting View
> Reload from the main menu), the Graphical Navigation page is updated.
Using Navigation Pages in Control Mode

This page is composed of eight symbols (the frame and its six modules), seven links (the
arrows), and one text object (“QA 6800+ Frame”).
When you activate a Magellan CCS Navigator page by changing to Control mode, the page
shows alarms on symbols (including CCS and SNMP device icons) and their linked parent
symbols.
130 Chapter 7
Using Graphical Navigation Pages
Figure 7-1 Sample Magellan CCS Navigator Page with a Frame With Six Modules Linked to
it in Build Mode
Any alarms on the devices show as flashing highlights: yellow for a warning alarm, and red
for a critical alarm. The child devices relay the alarm to their parent device - in this case, the
frame.
This object has a

yellow warning
alarm.
This object has a

red critical alarm.
Figure 7-2 Same Sample Magellan CCS Navigator Page, Control Mode
Moving between Magellan CCS Navigator Pages

To move between Magellan CCS Navigator pages, you must do one of the following:
 Click an object that loads another Magellan CCS Navigator page.

 Click the Back, Forward, or Home tool on the Graphical Navigation toolbar.
 Click one of the navigation commands on the shortcut menu.
Using the Graphical Navigation Context Menus

When you right-click a Graphical Navigation page or object in any operational mode, a
shortcut menu appears.
User Manual
When you right-click a Magellan CCS Navigator object when Magellan CCS Navigator is
control mode, these commands are available from the shortcut menu:
Table 7-1 Graphical Magellan CCS Navigator Shortcut Menu, Control Mode
Command Function
Control Opens the Control dialog box for the selected object
Configuratio Opens the Configuration dialog box for the selected object
n
Thumbnail Opens the thumbnail dialog box for the selected object (if available)
Stream Opens the streaming dialog box for the selected object (if available)
Actions> Displays a submenu for all actions defined on an object. Selecting an
action will execute it.
Back Moves to the previous page
Forward Moves back to the page from which you have just returned
Home Load the first page in the hierarchy
Zoom > Displays the Zoom submenu: Fit in Window, Actual Size, Zoom In,
Zoom Out, Zoom Window, and Zoom Previous
Pan Moves a page within the Graphical Navigation area
Refresh Redraws the page
Reload Gets the Graphical Navigation page from the server
All fields are read-only in Control mode
Using the Graphical Navigation Toolbar

An optional toolbar appears on top of the Graphical Navigation area when Magellan CCS
Navigator is in Control mode. To show this toolbar, select the check box in the View
Options section of the Graphical Navigation Options box. See View Options for
Graphical Navigation Pages on page 4.
The table below lists the tools on the Graphical Navigation toolbar and their functions.
Table 7-2 Tools on the Graphical Navigation Toolbar in Control Mode

Tool Function Reference
Back Loads the previous Magellan CCS Navigator
page
Forward Reloads a Magellan CCS Navigator page you
recently loaded when you clicked Back
132 Chapter 7
Table 7-2 Tools on the Graphical Navigation Toolbar in Control Mode (Continued)
Tool Function Reference
Zoom Allows you to magnify or shrink your view in Using Zoom Tools on
the Graphical Navigation page. page 12
Pan Turns the cursor into a hand; click and drag to Panning in a Graphical
move the page. Navigation Page on
Click the button again to deactivate. page 12
Home Reloads the first visited Magellan CCS
Navigator page
Custom Properties Window

When you are in Control mode, you can use the Custom Properties viewer. If the Custom
Properties window is closed, open it by choosing Tools > Custom Properties from the
main menu.
By default, the Custom Properties window appears in the left portion of the screen, below
the Navigation pane if that is open. You can click on it and drag it and drop it so that it
floats over the other items in the screen, or you can dock it to the top, bottom, left or right
of the screen.
Figure 7-3 Custom Properties Panel
Table 7-3
Column Function
Name A user-assigned title (limited in size?) of the property
Runtime Value The current valueof the property
Initial Value The value that was assigned to the property when it was created
Scope Whether the value is global or page-based, and if page-based, the
page that the value is used on
Description Displays whatever is entered into the Description field of the
property
User Manual
Custom properties variables store and share data between Magellan CCS Navigator rules
and pages in control mode. Global custom properties are accessible across the entire
application. Local custom properties only affect a particular instance of a given page. The
Custom Properties window always shows the global properties. To show the custom
properties for a page, open the page in Magellan CCS Navigator, and then click Refresh in
the top right corner of the Custom Properties window.
Click Refresh at any time to update the list of custom properties and their values.
If more than one instance of the same page is opened, all instances are displayed in the
same order as the pages were open. For best results, do not open more than one instance
of the same page with this tool.
134 Chapter 7
135
A Graphical Navigation
Troubleshooting
Graphical Navigation Troubleshooting OverView

The hints and tips in this chapter relate specifically to Graphical Navigation tools, pages and
panels.
 Build Mode Problems on page 135

 Control Mode Problems on page 137
For general troubleshooting problems, refer to Troubleshooting on page 295 of CCS
Navigator: Volume 1.
Build Mode Problems

Graphical Navigation Build mode problems may happen in systems that have a
NAVIGATOR-SRV or NAVIGATOR-SNMP license key.
Navigator Fails to Display Button State Images

Navigator displays a button image only if the first image (Unselect/Unhighlighted state field)
is defined on the Button tab of the Object Properties box.
If the image properties have not been defined for the state set by the Set Button
Properties action, the button image will not display.
See Setting Properties for a ‘Set Button Properties’ Action on page 81 for more
information.
Custom Non-Rectangular Buttons Appear Rectangular

If you create a custom non-rectangular shape for a button bitmap—such as a circle, ellipse,
or star—that you plan to use on a Navigator page, then you must use a pixel-editing
program like PhotoShop or PaintShop Pro to create a colored mask for the shape so that just
the shape itself shows. If you do not create a mask for the shape, the entire rectangle
occupied by the bitmap will appear.
136 Chapter
Set the RGB color of the mask to 255, 0, 216. Navigator is configured to show this color as
transparent, so your custom shape will show through when you insert the bitmap on the
Navigator page. You can also customize the color that you want to show as transparent in
the Create Button area of the Button Themes section of the Button Properties dialog
box. See Setting the Properties of a Button on page 18.
Background Does Not Update After Image File Is Modified

This problem can afflict *.bmp, *.jpg, and so on, when used as a background for a
Navigator page.
A copy of the background image is stored inside the .nav page. Changing the original file
will have no effect on the page that is displayed. In addition, once Navigator has loaded the
background into memory, it will continue to use the image in memory. In order to update
the image, follow these steps:
1 Open the page in Build mode.

2 Clear the background image, so no image is selected.
3 Save the page.
4 Exit Navigator.
5 Restart Navigator and log in.
6 Open the page in Build mode.
7 Set the background image.
In Frame Wizard, Modules Do Not Appear in Frame Correctly

The placement on the modules (where they go) by the wizard is directly related to their slot
number, which is part of the device ID. This number indicates where the module appears on
the frame. If you are adding this information manually (not thought the discovery process),
you have to change this number as well. To do that, follow these steps:
1 Select the node on the tree.

2 Right-click on the node and select the Properties... menu entry.
4 Change the last field of the device ID.
Problems Using AutoCAD Drawings as Backgrounds on Graphical Navigation

pages
Before you can use an AutoCAD image as a background in Navigator, it must be converted
to a JPG image, or you will lose all zoom detail on the image.
The bigger your settings (paper size), the bigger the image, resolution, and file size will be.
1 Open your image in AutoCAD

2 Select the Plot... command found in the File menu.
3 In the Plot Configuration area, select PublishToWeb JPG.pc3 as the name of the plotter (Plot
Device Tab)
4 Click in the Properties... button (to open the Plotter Configurator Editor)
User Manual
5 In the Device and Document Settings tab, select Custom Paper Sizes and click
Add... to add a page that is the same size as your drawing. (Follow the instructions in the
wizard.)
6 Click the OK button to close the Plotter Configurator Editor.
7 In the Plot to file area, type in the name of the file you want to generate. This plotter will
create a JPG image.
8 Select Plot Settings tab and in the Paper size and paper units area, select the
custom paper size that you have added before using the Paper size combo box.
9 Click in the OK button.
Now, follow the instructions for importing your image as a background in Navigator, as
found in Setting an Image as a Page Background on page 15.
Control Mode Problems

Graphical Navigation Control mode problems may happen in systems that have a
NAVIGATOR-SRV, NAVIGATOR-SNMP, or NAVIGATOR-CLI license key.
You must have a Navigator Page Customization license to create pages and use pages to
monitor and control devices.
If you are having problems with the Graphical Navigation page, please refer to the
following topics:
 Navigator Fails to Display Button State Images on page 135

 Custom Non-Rectangular Buttons Appear Rectangular on page 135
 Background Does Not Update After Image File Is Modified on page 136
 In Frame Wizard, Modules Do Not Appear in Frame Correctly on page 136
 CPU Usage Goes to 100% When Navigator Executes a Rule on page 137
 Global Properties Do Not Work Across Pages on page 138
 Alarms “Bubble Up” Incorrectly on page 138
 Cannot Find Navigator Pages on page 138
 Alarms Fail to Appear on a Navigator Page on page 138
CPU Usage Goes to 100% When Navigator Executes a Rule

If you execute a rule which has a recursive element in it, your CPU usage will go to 100%,
and Navigator will not respond to further commands.
Essentially, a recursive element creates a loop that goes back to the start of the rule and
causes it to trigger again. To avoid this situation, when creating a rule, ensure that an On
Update type of event is not followed by a Set Property type of action for the same element.
A similar situation can occur with one rule triggering another rule that in turn triggers the
first rule. For example, never define a rule that loads page B whenever loading page A, and
then define another rule that loads page A whenever loading page B.
138 Chapter
Global Properties Do Not Work Across Pages

The On Custom Property event may not update global properties that are updated in
different sessions.
If you create a global custom property and use it on different pages, and have that property
update triggered by an On Load Page event, the global property will not update, because
the "Load Page" event for the first page came before the page’s session actually started,
and so the original condition for the custom property is used.
Alarms “Bubble Up” Incorrectly

When you define a “Load Page action” for an object, you create a link between that object
and the page. Any alarm that occurs on an object on the linked page will “bubble up” to
the parent object, causing the parent object to flash an alarm.
This flexible approach allows you to monitor the status of your pages hierarchy by only
defining “Load Page” actions. However, if you create a button on a child page that loads
the parent page back again (so that it behaves like a “Back” button on a Web browser), you
run the risk of making Navigator report an alarm on a parent object when the alarm is
actually on a child object.
To avoid this, do not create new “Back” and “Forward” buttons, as they are already
provided in Navigator. To display the Navigator Back and Forward buttons, follow these
steps:
1 Right-click on a page (but not on an object), and then select Options.

2 Check the Show Graphical Navigation toolbar field.
The Navigation toolbar appears, including the Back and Forward navigation buttons.
Cannot Find Navigator Pages

The first time you save a page, you have the opportunity to save to a folder location other
than the default Pages. This is a one-time opportunity to select a save-as destination. After
this time, the page will automatically save to the previously selected destination.
Navigator pages are saved on the NAVIGATOR-SRV or NAVIGATOR-SNMP licensed PC that

created them. Pages can be found at Program Files > Harris > Navigator > Users >
Admin > Pages (assuming the CCS Navigator application was installed in the default
directory).
Alarms Fail to Appear on a Navigator Page

 Did you set the background color of a page as red, yellow, or green?
The background color of a Navigator page can mask or camouflage a flashing alarm
color.
Since CCS applications use red, yellow, and green for alarm monitoring, you should
avoid using these three colors when defining the background color of your Navigator
pages. See Setting a Color Fill as a Page Background on page 14.
User Manual
 Is there a node in the Network folder of the Navigation pane that represents the
device you want to monitor?
You must have discovered and manually configured the target device in the
Navigation pane. If you have not discovered and configured the device for which you
expect to see an alarm, you must complete these tasks before an alarm will appear
either in the Navigation pane or a Navigator page. See Discovery Overview on
page 75 and CCS Device Configuration Overview on page 127.
 Have you set the device ID of the symbols for which you expect to see alarms?
To monitor a device whose icon appears in the Navigation pane, the device ID of the
companion symbol on the Navigator page should have the identical device ID. The
easiest way to ensure that a Navigator symbol inherits the correct device ID is to create
the symbol by dragging and dropping the configured resource representing the device
from the Navigation pane into the Navigator page.
 Did you define a Load Page action for the Navigator object?
When you define a Load Page action for an object, you create a link between that
object and the page it loads. Any alarms that occur on any object on the linked page
also will “bubble up” to the parent object, causing the parent object to flash an alarm.
140 Chapter
141
Index
Symbols set custom property 82

set frame custom property 83
*.bmp 25, 26
Set Fullscreen Off 122
*.jpg 1, 7, 25
Set Fullscreen On 122
*.nav 7, 129
set link properties 84
set symbol properties 85
A set text properties 85
Actions 61, 66, 98, 121 SNMP Get Variable Value 118
action properties 74 SNMP Set Variable Value 119
activeX method 87 Swap Destinations 106
alarm filtering 74 Take Crosspoint 102
button blink mode 82 Take Selected 103
clear selected 101 using event properties 74
Clear Selected Salvo 112 ActiveX 1, 7, 43
configuration 75 adding controls 43
control 76 available controls 44
defining 68 Character display 47
execute macro 76 limitations 27
Execute Salvo 112 properties 85
Execute Selected Salvo 111 set ActiveX Method’s action 87
launch application 77 set ActiveX properties action 85
load frame page 78 setting properties 49
load layout 77 Spin control 48
load page 78 Timer control 45
Load Preset 126 Alarm filtering action 74
load preset 79 Alarms 129
Load SuiteView Preset 123, 125 alarm filtering action 74
Lock Selected Destination 105 filtering 72
product info 80 filtering action properties 74
product user manual 81 on alarm event 69
properties 74 AutoCAD 136
Protect Selected Destination 104
Query Destination Status 101 B
Query Signal Presence Status 101
Restrict Crosspoint 108 Build mode 1, 7, 61, 121
Restrict Selected Crosspoint 109 Build operations 58, 130
Select Destination 99 Buttons 17, 18, 23
Select Salvo 110 actions 81, 82
Select Source 100 adding 17
send string to COM port 123 blink mode action 82
set activeX properties 85 button state images 135
set button properties 81 loading Navigator pages 22
Set Crosspoint Match Type 103 properties 18, 23
142 Index
set blink mode action 82 G

set button properties action 81
Global properties 13
themes 20
deleting 14
Graphical navigation toolbar 131
C Graphical objects 1, 7
Clear selected action 101 GUI 7
Clear selected salvo action 112
Color fill 14 H
Communication options 124
Hotspot 17
Conditional events 61
Conditions 61
editing 68 I
event 66 Image 1, 7, 17, 25
multiple events 68 Image file 25
reusing 68
Configuration
action 72
L
action properties 75 Launch Application 73
Control action 72 Layouts 77
Control mode 7, 129, 131 Link 1, 7, 17, 41
Copy page 11 Load frame page 73
Create Objects toolbar 38 Load frame page action 78
Create Server box 38 Load layout action 77
Crosspoints 92 Load Page 73
Custom graphics 25 Load page action 78
Custom properties 15, 16 Load preset action 79, 126
custom property change event 71 Load SuiteView Preset action 123, 125
tab 14 Lock selected destination action 105
Lock/Protect Status 94, 95
Locks 95, 96
D
Disconnect 94, 100, 102, 111
M
Macros 88, 90
E creating 88
Events 61, 66, 91 deleting 90
conditional 61 modifying 90
defining 68
event conditions 67
multiple events conditions 68 N
on alarm 69 Navigator frame 1, 7, 17
On Crosspoint Status 92 adding to pages 28
on custom property change 71 Navigator pages 125
On Lock/Protect Status 94 new 8
On Restrict Status 96 properties 14
On Salvo Status 95
On Signal Presence Status 97 O
ON SNMP Trap 116
Object properties 18, 23, 24, 25, 26, 41
On SNMP Variable Value Update 115
On alarm event 69
Execute salvo action 112
On crosspoint status events 93
Execute selected salvo action 111
On custom property change event 71
On lock/protect status events 94
F On restrict status events 96
Frames 8 On salvo status events 95
set frame custom property action 83 On signal presence status events 97
wizard 8 On SNMP Trap events 116
User Manual
On SNMP Variable Value Update 115, 116 Save all 10

Options menu Save Navigator pages 10, 138
Graphical Navigation 2 Save page as 11
Select destination action 99
P Select salvo action 110
Select source action 100
Pages 7, 129 Selecting multiple Navigator objects 56
adding hotspots 26 Send String to COM Port action 123
adding images 25 Set activeX properties action 85
adding symbols 36 Set button properties action 81
adding text 24 Set custom property action 82
controls on 42 Set frame custom property action 83
copy 11 Set FullScreen Off action 122
custom properties 17 Set FullScreen On action 122
editing 56 Set link properties action 84
frame view 8 Set symbol properties action 85
new 8 Set text properties action 85
new page wizard 8 Signal monitor 1, 7, 17
properties 14
adding to pages 27
saved location of 138
Signal presence status 97
saving 10
Signal status 98
Pan mode 12
SNMP actions 115
PDF 81
Set Variable Value 119
Plug-ins
SNMP control plug-in 115
SNMP control 115
Streaming icon 35
SuiteView control 121
SuiteView actions 121
Presets 85, 125
Set FullScreen Off 122
load action 79
Set FullScreen On 122
recalling 128
SuiteView control plug-in 121
Product information 73
SuiteView presets 125
Product user manual 73
Symbols 1, 7
Protect 94
creating 38
Protect selected destination action 104
links between 41
properties action 85
Q
Query destination status action 101 T
Query signal presence status action 101
Take Crosspoint 92
Take crosspoint action 102
R Take selected 92
Resource tree 39 Take selected action 103
Restrict crosspoint action 108 Text 1, 7, 17
Restrict selected crosspoint action 109 adding to pages 24
Restricting status 97 set text properties action 85
Router-specific actions 98 Text object 24
Router-specific events 91 Timer control 45
Rules 14, 61, 62, 121 TimerIndex actions 46
macros 88 Toolbars 17
SuiteView 121 create objects 17
Rules Tab toolbar 65 Graphical navigation 131
Rules, router 91 rules tab 65
Tools menu
graphical navigation 7, 129
S rules and macros 61, 90
Salvos Transparency 26
status 95 Troubleshooting 135
Save 10
144 Index
U frame view 8, 136

new page 8
User manual, opening 81
W X
X75 streaming icon 35
Wizards 8
component 59
Volume 3: IconMaster Software Control Panel
Edition E
175‐100002‐00
Trademarks
Contact Information
iii
Contents
Publication Information .................................................................................................ii

Trademarks .....................................................................................................................ii
Support Contact Information ........................................................................................ii
Preface ..........................................................................................................................v
Manual Information .......................................................................................................v
Purpose ......................................................................................................................v
Audience ....................................................................................................................v
Revision History ..........................................................................................................v
Writing Conventions ..................................................................................................... vi
Obtaining the User Manuals ........................................................................................ vi
Chapter 1 Introduction to ISCP ............................................................................................. 1

IconMaster Software Control Panel Overview ........................................................... 1
IconMaster Software Control Panel (ISCP) .................................................................. 2
ISCP-LITE ................................................................................................................... 3
Chapter 2 Installation and Logging On............................................................................. 5

Required Hardware, Operating System and Software ............................................... 5
Hardware Requirements ............................................................................................ 6
Software Requirements ............................................................................................. 6
Installing IconMaster Software Control Panel ............................................................ 6
Removing ISCP Software .............................................................................................. 7
Logging On and Setting the Operational Mode ......................................................... 7
Logging On ............................................................................................................... 7
Activating a License ...................................................................................................... 8
Chapter 3 ISCP and ISCP-LITE Configuration ............................................................... 11

ISCP and ISCP-Lite Overview ...................................................................................... 11
Configuring ISCP ......................................................................................................... 11
iv Contents
Defining ISCP Master Control Channels ................................................................... 12

Creating an ISCP Panel ............................................................................................. 13
Using the ISCP Wizard ............................................................................................. 15
Adjusting a Configuration ........................................................................................ 16
Configuring ISCP-LITE .................................................................................................. 17
Defining ISCP-LITE Master Control Panels ................................................................. 18
Creating an ISCP-LITE Panel ..................................................................................... 19
Chapter 4 Using ISCP and ISCP-LITE Panels.................................................................. 21

Overview ...................................................................................................................... 21
Displaying the ISCP or ISCP-LITE Control Panel ......................................................... 21
Lock Panel (ISCP Only) .............................................................................................. 22
Choosing Devices to Control .................................................................................... 23
Selecting an IconMaster Channel to Control (ISCP Only) ........................................... 23
Selecting Groups for Control (ISCP Only) .................................................................. 24
Dynamic Menu Selector Buttons .............................................................................. 25
Clock and Timer ....................................................................................................... 25
Machine Control ...................................................................................................... 26
Using the Primary Control Bus Cluster (ISCP Only) ................................................... 26
Aux Bus ................................................................................................................... 26
Preset (PST) Bus and Program (PGM) Bus (ISCP Only) ................................................ 28
Taking Selections On-Air (ISCP Only) ......................................................................... 31
Performing Successful Transitions (ISCP Only) .......................................................... 31
Configurable Transition Functions (ISCP Only) .......................................................... 31
Enabling a Key Transition (ISCP Only) ....................................................................... 32
Enabling a Background (Preset to Program) Transition (ISCP Only) ............................ 34
Enabling an Audio-Over Transition (ISCP Only) ......................................................... 34
External Keyers ........................................................................................................ 35
Internal Keyers ......................................................................................................... 37
Selecting an Effect ................................................................................................... 39
Quick Selects .......................................................................................................... 41
Audio Monitoring ........................................................................................................ 42
Audio Control .......................................................................................................... 42
Audio Monitor Output ............................................................................................. 45
Audio Profile Assign ................................................................................................. 46
Channel Group ........................................................................................................ 47
Appendix A Software User License and Warranty Agreement................................. 49

License ..................................................................................................................... 49
Limited Software Warranty ...................................................................................... 49
Index ........................................................................................................................... 51
v
Preface
Manual Information
Purpose IconMaster Software Control Panel Initial Startup Guide is a companion guide to CCS
Navigator: Advanced Graphical Navigation Application.
This manual outlines how to get started using the IconMaster Software Control Panel
software. For information on the basic tools and interface of CCS Navigator, please refer to
the CCS Navigator: Advanced Graphical Navigation Application user manual, which is
included as a PDF on your installation DVD.
installation, setup, and/or operation of the IconMaster Software Control Panel software.
Revision
History
Table 1-1 Manual Revision History
A Navigator 4.3 and higher with August 2008
ICONM-SCP license key
B Navigator 4.4.1 and higher with January 2009
ICONM-SCP or ICONM-LITE license key
C Navigator 4.6 and higher with November 2009
D Navigator 4.6 and higher with June 2010
E Navigator 4.7 and higher with January 2011
vi Preface
Writing Conventions

and selection names
of menus and windows
elsewhere

Application including CCS Navigator, IconMasterNav, CCS Pilot, and
CCS CoPilot

1
1 Introduction to ISCP
IconMaster Software Control Panel Overview

Two versions of the IconMaster Software Control Panel are available.
Figure 1-1. ISCP Figure 1-1. ISCP-LITE
 The ISCP (ISCP) replicates the functionality of the IconMaster Hardware Control Panel
and can be used to control and monitor the IconMaster switcher hardware.
 ISCP-LITE contains the functionality for parametric control of the IconMaster, but does
not have the source control, channel management, transition, or keyer controls of ISCP.
The ISCP-LITE is not designed for stand-alone operation, and must be physically and
logically paired with an IconMaster Hardware Remote Control Panel.
ISCP and ISCP-LITE are both standalone plug-ins for Magellan CCS Navigator. If you have
one of these plug-ins on your system, you cannot have any other Magellan CCS Navigator
plug-ins included on the install at the same time. With an ISCP or ISCP-LITE plug-in,
Magellan CCS Navigator cannot control or monitor other hardware.
ISCP and ISCP-LITE are configured by an administrator user in Build mode, and are operated
in Control mode.
ISCP is not the same as IconMasterNav. You cannot run IconMasterNav and ISCP on the
same PC. IconMasterNav is compatible with version 2.2 of the IconMaster switcher. ISCP is
compatible with IconMaster 3.0 and above. ISCP-LITE replaces IconmasterNav as of
Iconmaster 3.0.
2 Chapter 1
Introduction to ISCP
IconMaster Software Control Panel (ISCP)

The ISCP was designed for use with a touch-screen monitor. Figure 1-2 shows a typical
ISCP interface.
Channel
Figure 1-2. IconMaster Software Control Panel Interface
The functionality for the ISCP matches the functionality of the hardware control panel, with
the following modifications:
 The ISCP will update the name of a bus when it changes its function; for example,
when you switch the Aux bus
 Button labelling on the ISCP is dynamic, meaning that button names update themselves
when, for example, the inputs to those buttons are changed
For operational instructions of redundant functionality, see your IconMaster Master Control
Switcher Functional Operation and Configuration Manual.
This document describes the unique functions and implementations on the IconMaster
Software Control Panel, including the following:
 Configurable buttons
 Setup etc
 Dynamic parameter control (which is similar to the IconMasterNav tools)
 ISCP support
ISCP 3
Initial Startup Guide
If you have purchased the standalone version of IconMaster Software Control Panel, you
will have only received the IconMaster Software Control Panel Initial Startup Guide. The full
Magellan CCS Navigator manual is available on the Magellan CCS Navigator installation
DVD as a PDF.
The IconMaster Software Control Panel (ISCP) is not a fully-featured version of Magellan
CCS Navigator. To use some features described in the Magellan CCS Navigator manual, you
must purchase separate Magellan CCS Navigator licenses after the 30-day trial period.
ISCP-LITE The ISCP-LITE is designed for use with a touch-screen monitor. Figure 1-3 shows a typical
ISCP-LITE interface.
Figure 1-3. ISCP-LITE Interface
ISCP-LITE is designed for use directly with an IconMaster hardware remote control panel
(RCP). ISCP-LITE complements the operation of the hardware RCP, and is not designed for
stand-alone operation.
4 Chapter 1
Introduction to ISCP
5
2 Installation and Logging On

IconMaster Software Control Panel is installed as part of Magellan CCS Navigator. Before
installing your ISCP software, take the time to ensure you have the necessary hardware and
software. SeeRequired Hardware, Operating System and Software on page 5.
Basic installation instructions are provided in the section Installing IconMaster Software
Control Panel on page 6. For an in-depth treatment of installation possibilities, see the
Installation chapter of your Magellan CCS Navigator User Manual (available as a PDF on your
installation DVD).
When you install the Magellan CCS Navigator software, it will start with a 30-day trial
license of all features of Magellan CCS Navigator. To add your permanent IconMaster
Software Control Panel license, see Activating a License on page 8.
Required Hardware, Operating System and Software

When configuring the IconMaster Software Control Panel, you will need to meet the
Magellan CCS Navigator Server hardware and software requirements.
The other hardware, operating system and software minimum system requirements for ISCP
are the same as those for Magellan CCS Navigator Server. For a complete list of
requirements, see the “Installation” chapter of your accompanying Magellan CCS Navigator:
Advanced Graphical Navigation Application User Guide.
6 Chapter 2
Installation and Logging On
Hardware Requirements
Install the ISCP software on a PC that meets or exceeds the following hardware
requirements:
Table 2-1 System Requirements for ISCP and ISCP-LITE

Minimum Supported Requirements
Processor Intel Core i5 3.20 GHz
System Memory 16 GB DRAM or better
Network Connection 10/100/1000 Gigabit Ethernet Connection
HDD Drive 160 GB Hard Disk Drive
Available Disk Space 5 GB
Optical Drive DVD-ROM Drive
 ISCP: 1280 × 1024 (19-inch touch-screen recommended)
Display  ISCP-LITE: 1024 × 768 (15-inch touch-screen
recommended)
For best results, do not run ISCP or ISCP-LITE on a system that is running or hosting other
applications or servers.
Software Requirements
The following software is required for Magellan CCS Navigator to complete its install.
 Adobe® Acrobat® Reader 4.0 minimum; 8.0 preferred

 Microsoft Windows Installer 3.1
 Microsoft XML parser 3.0
 Microsoft Internet Explorer 7.0
 Windows XP Service Pack 3
If you are running Windows XP Service Pack 2, you must update to SP3 before installing
 Microsoft .Net 2.0

 SQL Server Express 2005 (SP2) (Magellan CCS Navigator Server installations only)
 Microsoft Messaging Queue
 RouterMapper (Magellan CCS Navigator Server installations only)
During your install, if the following software is not found, an installer for the missing
program may start.
Installing IconMaster Software Control Panel

To install the Magellan CCS Navigator and IconMaster Software Control Panel, complete
these steps:
Resources DVD into the PC DVD-ROM drive.
ISCP 7
Initial Startup guide


If you do not have all the required software that is needed to run Magellan CCS Navigator,
the installation may abort. All the required software is included on the Magellan CCS
Navigator installation DVD. Once the required software is installed, start your Magellan CCS
Navigator installation again.
Removing ISCP Software

Only an Administrator user can properly and entirely remove the IconMaster Software
Control Panel software.
For information on removing the ISCP software, please refer to your Magellan CCS
Navigator: Advanced Graphical Navigation Application User Guide.
Logging On and Setting the Operational Mode

For the first login after an installation or reinstallation of Magellan CCS Navigator,
the User Name box will show the name Administrator. At subsequent logins, the
User Name box will show the name of the person who last logged on.
Logging On To start Magellan CCS Navigator, complete these steps:
1 Find the Magellan CCS Navigator application icon in Windows Explorer and double-click the
icon.
By default, a new Magellan CCS Navigator installation has no password. However, if you are
upgrading from Magellan CCS Navigator 1.0, the default password is Leitch.
Or click Start, point and click on Programs > Magellan CCS Navigator [VersionNo.].
VersionNo. represents the Magellan CCS Navigator software version number.

 If you are logging on as a User, enter your assigned user name. (You do not need to
For more information on administrative and log-in permissions, see your Magellan CCS
Navigator: Advanced Graphical Navigation Application User Manual, available on the
installation DVD as a PDF file.
 If you are logging on as an Administrator user, type

Administrator
 If you are logging on as a Support user, type
8 Chapter 2
Support
4 Click Log On.

Magellan CCS Navigator Client installations have Control mode only.
Magellan CCS Navigator has two operational modes, as described in Chapter Four of your
accompanying Magellan CCS Navigator: Advanced Graphical Navigation Application User
Manual (available as a PDF on your installation DVD). Panel creation requires Magellan CCS
Navigator to be in Build mode, and operating the panels requires Control mode.
To set Magellan CCS Navigator’s mode, from the main menu, point to File > Operational
Mode, and then click on either Build or Control.
Activating a License
When you run an installation from the Imagine Communications Infrastructure and
Networking Documentation DVD, by default all licenses will be active with a 30-day trial
period. You must contact Customer Service in order to activate your ICONM-SCP or
ICONM-SCP-LT license after that time.
To control modules other than IconMaster, you must have other licenses. See CCS
Navigator: Advanced Graphical Navigation Application for more information.
To active a license, you must be logged onto Windows as an administrator.
To activate a license, follow these steps:
A dialog box opens:

PDF license request
form.
Figure 2-1 License Dialog Box

2 Provide the serial number from the License dialog box to your sales representative.
ISCP 9

3 Enter the provided key in the License Key field.
After a restart of Magellan CCS Navigator, your license will be recognized.
10 Chapter 2
11
3 ISCP and ISCP-LITE

Configuration
ISCP and ISCP-Lite Overview

The following topics are described in this section:
 Configuring ISCP
 Configuring ISCP-LITE on page 17
Configuring ISCP
Only an Administrator user can create IconMaster Software Control Panel pages.
ISCP configuration is a Build mode operation that involves creating graphical (or “soft”)
control panels for master control frames.
Before you can configure your ISCP, you will use the Master Control Plug-in tool to enter
an IP address for each IconMaster connected to the system. See Defining ISCP Master
Control Channels on page 12.
Once your channels are defined, using the wizard, you can create a master control panel,
which provides switching and audio monitoring information for the selected channel and a
series of dynamic menus for operating some commonly used areas of your IconMaster
master control switcher. See Creating an ISCP Panel on page 13.
12 Chapter 3
ISCP and ISCP-LITE Configuration
Channel or Group
management buttons
User-
assignable
buttons
Figure 3-1 Portions of an ISCP That are User-Configurable
Defining ISCP Master Control Channels

Before controlling IconMaster devices using the IconMaster Software Control Panel,
Magellan CCS Navigator needs to know each channel’s name and IP address.This procedure
can be done with the MKEs already configured, or the MKEs can be configured separately.
However, you do need to know the IP addresses of the MKE modules. You must be in Build
mode to create channels.
1 With ISCP in build mode, click Options > Plug-ins in the main menu.
The Plug-ins dialog box opens.
ISCP 13
Figure 3-2 Plug-ins Dialog Box

2 Click Master Control in the Configure Plug-ins list and then click Configure...
The IconMaster Control Configuration dialog box opens.
Deletes a
selected
channel
from the list
Opens a
dialog box
where you
can modify
the name or
IP address of
Figure 3-3 Master Control Configuration Dialog Box for ISCP

3 Click Add.
The Add Channel dialog box opens.
Figure 3-4 Add Channel Dialog Box

4 Beside Channel Name, type a descriptive name.
5 Enter the IconMaster MKE-3901 Module’s IP address.
6 Click OK to close the dialog box, and then OK to close the Plug-ins dialog box.
You can now create master control soft panels. See Creating an ISCP Panel on page 13.
Creating an After completing the steps in Defining ISCP Master Control Channels on page 12, while
ISCP Panel still in Build mode, you can use a wizard to create new IconMaster Software Control Panels.
Only an Administrator user can create ISCP pages.

14 Chapter 3
To create an IconMaster soft control panel, follow these steps:
1 With Magellan CCS Navigator in Build mode, select File > New....
2 Click the Master Control tab.

The box now shows the format options for the new Master Control panel and includes a
preview of the selected layout option.
Figure 3-5 Master Control Tab of the New Page Wizard

3 Click IconMaster Software Control Panel, and then click OK.
4 In the first page of the Page Wizard, first choose one of the following options:
 ISCP Single Device Control—allows you to select up to eight panels to control.
 ISCP Device Group Control—Allows you to select one or more groups of panels
to control. Panel groups are created in the IconMaster Configuration Utility (ICU)
and saved in an XML file. If ICU and Magellan CCS Navigator are not installed on
the same computer, you must transfer the XML file to the computer on which ISCP
is installed.
5 Follow the instructions that appear on the screen to complete the wizard.
6 Click Finish. The panel is created.
After you switch to Control mode, you can use the IconMaster Software Control Panel.
ISCP 15
Using the The following terms are used in the IconMaster Software Control panel wizard.
ISCP Wizard
Table 3-1 Terms Used in IconMaster Software Control Panel Wizard
Term Function
> Adds highlighted items from the Available field to the Selected field. New items always
appear at the bottom of the Selected list.
< Removes highlighted items from the Selected field.
Up Moves highlighted items up one position in the Selected field.
Down Moves highlighted items down one position in the Selected field.
Next >> Moves on to the next step of the new panel wizard. At least one item must appear in the
Selected field for this option to be available.
<< Back Returns to the previous page in the wizard.
Close Exits the wizard without creating a panel.
Finish Selects the defaults on all the following pages, closes the wizard and creates a panel. At
least one item must appear in the Selected field for this option to be available.
Available channels All channels that have been made visible to Magellan CCS Navigator (see Defining ISCP
Master Control Channels on page 12)
Selected channels You can select up to eight MKEs (channels) for the ISCP to control.
On the created panel, the buttons will appear in the order, from top to bottom , that they
appear on this ilst.
Group Groups allow you to control more than eight MKE devices at one time. Available groups are
included in an XML file that is created in IconMaster Configuration Utility (ICU).
Profile A profile consists of the IP address, profile name, UMD name, and multiviewer name.
Multiviewer profiles are created using the IconMaster Configuration Utility.
When you switch channels on the ISCP, the multiviewer will load the profile(s) selected on
this screen. You can associate up to three multiviewer profiles with each IconMaster
channel.
If you do not assign a profile to a particular channel, when you switch to that channel using
the ISCP, the multiviewer will retain the profile that is already loaded. Profiles can be added,
removed or changed after the ISCP panel has been created.
You must type the exact name of the profile. Profile names are case-sensitive.
Button assignment Assigns functions to the user-configurable buttons on the ISCP. See Figure 3-1 on page 12
for the location of the user-configurable buttons.
Current Displays the function of the specified button.
Assignment
Once a function is assigned to a button, it cannot be assigned again to a different button.
Page name Defines the name for your IconMaster Software control panel. Once an ISCP is defined, that
you cannot rename it or delete it, so give each ISCP layout a meaningful name.
GPO 1-13, Ext-1 Triggers the specified GPO.
GPO 1 - 24, Ext-2
GPO 1 - 24 GPOs are assigned using the IconMaster configuration utility software.
(General Purpose
Output Control)
16 Chapter 3
Table 3-1 Terms Used in IconMaster Software Control Panel Wizard (Continued)
Term Function
Quick Select 1-8 Recalls the previously stored combination of function attributes.
FTB Causes the video program outputs to immediately fade to black.
(fade to black)
Silent Causes the audio program outputs to immediately fade to silence.
Fast Reset Resets PST or PGM source audio gains, audio over gains, keyer settings, individual AES
gains, individual audio cluster gains, and mono channel gains.
Play/Stop/Cue/ Provides standard machine control functionality.
Mark/Rewind/
Fast Forward
FX/FXI When FX is selected, if an automation system controls the switcher, it can activate and
deactivate all effects. When FXI is selected, an automation system cannot deactivate effects
that are assigned from an RCP or an ISCP, though the automation system can control all
other functions of the switcher. Effects triggered from an RCP or ISCP must be deactivated
(removed) by an RCP or ISCP.
Adjusting a Configuration
Once created, you can make the following changes to an ISCP (changes must be done in
Build mode):
 Changing User-Configurable Button Assignments on page 16

 Reconfiguring Channels and Changing Multiviewer Profile Assignments on
page 17
Changing User-Configurable Button Assignments

To revise the function of a user-configurable button, while in Build mode, follow these
steps:
1 Right-click on the button that you want to change on the ISCP page, and choose
Component Wizard from the shortcut menu.
The Component Wizard for that button opens.
ISCP 17
Figure 3-6 Component Wizard for User Button 6

2 Choose an item from the drop-down menu.
3 Click Finish.
The text on the selected button is updated.
You have to open the Component Wizard for each button you want to change.
Reconfiguring Channels and Changing Multiviewer Profile

Assignments
Use the Component Wizard to add or subtract channels from an open ISCP in Build mode,
or change the multiviewer profile that loads when you select a channel.
1 Right-click on a channel and choose Component Wizard from the shortcut menu.
The Component Wizard appears.

For a list of concepts and terminology used in the wizard, see Using the ISCP Wizard on
page 15.
3 Click Finish to close the Component Wizard.

The column of channel buttons updates to reflect the changes you have made.
Configuring ISCP-LITE
Only an Administrator user can create IconMaster Software Control Panel pages.
ISCP-LITE configuration is a Build mode operation that involves creating graphical (or
“soft”) control panels for master control frames.
18 Chapter 3
Before you can configure your ISCP-LITE, you will use the Master Control Plug-in tool to
enter an IP address for each IconMaster Hardware Control Panel connected to the system.
See Defining ISCP-LITE Master Control Panels on page 18.
Once your panels are defined, using the wizard, you can create an ISCP-LITE page, which
provides audio monitoring information for the selected panel and a series of dynamic
menus for operating some commonly used areas of your Hardware Control Panel. See
Creating an ISCP-LITE Panel on page 19.
Defining ISCP-LITE Master Control Panels

Before creating an ISCP-LITE Panel, Magellan CCS Navigator needs to know the associated
Hardware Control Panel’s name and IP address. You must be in Build mode to select panels.
1 With ISCP-LITE in build mode, click Options > Plug-ins in the main menu.
The Plug-ins dialog box opens. (See Figure 3-2.)
2 Click Master Control in the Configure Plug-ins list and then click Configure...
The IconMaster Control Configuration dialog box opens.
Deletes a
selected
panel from
the list
Opens a
dialog box
where you
can modify
the name or
IP address of
Figure 3-7 Master Control Configuration Dialog Box for ISCP-LITE

3 Click Add.
The Add Panel dialog box opens.
Figure 3-8 Add Channel Dialog Box

4 Beside Panel Name, type a descriptive name.
5 Enter the Hardware Control Panel’s IP address.
6 Click OK to close the dialog box, and then OK to close the Plug-ins dialog box.
You can now create ISCP-LITE panels. See Creating an ISCP Panel on page 13.
ISCP 19
Creating an ISCP-LITE Panel

Only an Administrator user can create ISCP-LITE pages.
To create an ISCP-LITE panel, follow these steps:
2 Click the Master Control tab.

The box now shows the format options for the new Master Control panel and includes a
preview of the selected layout option.
Figure 3-9 New Page Wizard with ISCP-LITE License

3 Click Lite-IconMaster Software Control Panel, and then click OK.
4 Follow the instructions that appear on the screen to complete the wizard.
For a list of concepts and terminology used in the wizard, see Using the ISCP Wizard on
page 15.
5 Click Finish.
The panel is created.
After you switch to Control mode, you can use the ISCP-LITE Panel.
You can modify the button assignments for an ISCP-LITE panel after it has been created. See
Changing User-Configurable Button Assignments on page 16 for more information.
20 Chapter 3
21
4 Using ISCP and ISCP-LITE

Panels
Overview Once an ISCP or ISCP-LITE has been created, when you switch to Control mode, you can
start controlling and/or monitoring devices. See Setting the Operational Mode on page 8.
The ISCP-LITE only works in conjunction with a paired IconMaster Hardware Control Panel to
monitor and control audio and provide dynamic parameter control.
The functionality of the ISCP is largely the same as that of the hardware control panel.
Figure 4-1 and Figure 4-2 on page 22 compare the locations of the buttons on both
panels. If you have multiple IconMaster hardware and software control panels, and use them
to control and monitor the same IconMaster hardware, changes you make on one panel are
reflected on the others.
Displaying the ISCP or ISCP-LITE Control Panel

If you have just created an IconMaster panel in Build mode (see ISCP and ISCP-LITE
Configuration on page 11) and you switch to Control mode, the panel will open.
If you have previously used ISCP or ISCP-LITE and left a panel open when you closed
Magellan CCS Navigator, by default the panel will open when you relaunch the software.
To open a panel if you have previously closed the panel, follow these steps:
1 From the main menu, choose File > Open.

2 Browse to the location of your panel file.
The main panel and all its dynamic menus are stored together in a single folder. If you open
a dynamic menu, it will not connect to the pre-configured channels (IconMaster master
control switchers) and the buttons will have no effect.
3 Click Open.
Magellan CCS Navigator will by default automatically load an ISCP or ISCP-LITE if it is
defined, and will automatically go to full screen mode.
ISCP pages are designed to be displayed on a 19” 1280 × 1024 screen in full screen mode.
ISCP-LITE pages are designed to be displayed on a 15” 1024 × 768 screen in full screen
mode. Both ISCP and ISCP-LITE are intended to be used with a touch-screen monitor.
From the main menu, select View > Full Screen (or press F11 on your keyboard) to switch
to full screen mode.
22 Chapter 4
Using ISCP and ISCP-LITE Panels
To exit full screen mode, click the Exit FullScreen Mode button that appears on the
interface, or press the F11 key on your keyboard.
Configurable cluster 1 Parameter adjustment control cluster
Optional audio
control panel Configurable
cluster 2
Shift key Transition

(22 input mode) controls
Primary control
busses Fader bar
Transition
Configurable Transition functions “hot” button
Figure 4-1. IconMaster Hardware Control Panel
Audio control panel

Dynamic Menus
Parameter adjustment control cluster
Contextual
controls
Dynamic menu
selectors
Shift key
(22 input mode)
User assignable Transition
buttons controls
Primary
control buses Transition
“hot” button
Transition
functions
Figure 4-2. IconMaster Software Control Panel
Lock Panel When the panel is locked, clicking any button has no effect, until the panel is unlocked.
(ISCP Only)
Hold the button down for two seconds to lock the panel. A countdown appears on the
button as you approach the target duration.
When a panel is locked, the Lock button will flash. Pressing any button for any length of
time will have no effect.
ISCP 23
To unlock the panel, hold down the Lock button down for a quarter of a second. A
countdown appears briefly on the button.
Choosing Devices to Control

In the top left corner of the panel is a System label. Depending on how your panel is
configured, it can display Groups or Channels here.
To configure ISCP to control both channels and groups at the same time, create a group for
each individual channel you want to control, and assign a single channel to that group.
Figure 4-3 Channel Button
Figure 4-4 Group Button

A logo in the top left corner indicates when a button controls a group.
Selecting an IconMaster Channel to Control (ISCP Only)

Each channel represents a different IconMaster system. There can be up to eight, as
configured using the wizard. See Creating an ISCP Panel on page 13 for more
information.
Click a Channel Select button to choose a different channel (IconMaster system). The
active channel’s button is red. All subsequent actions you make on the ISCP panel will apply
to that channel and all orange-lit secondary channels, until you select a different IconMaster
system by clicking another Channel Select button.
Configuring Primary and Secondary Channels (ISCP Only)

When you configure a primary channel and then program secondary channels to that
primary channel, every change you make on the primary channel is replicated on the
secondary channel until the relationship is changed.
When selecting IconMaster channels as primary and secondary channels, they must all be
the full version of IconMaster, or all be IconMaster Lite. Do not mix IconMaster and
IconMaster Lite channels when configuring primary and secondary channels.
1 To select a channel as a primary channel, press it.

The channel’s button turns red.
2 Press the primary channel again.

Its label updates to say Primary.
3 Press once on each channel you want to follow the primary channel (secondary channels).
Each secondary channel button turns orange.
24 Chapter 4
Pressing an orange button (already selected as a secondary channel) deselects it as a

secondary channel.
When a secondary channel has been selected, the Sync Now button lights, also orange.
You can press Sync Now to sync the secondary channels to the first channel. If you press
Sync Now and then select more secondary channels, but do not press Sync Now again,
not all secondary channels will be synced to the primary channel.
4 Press the Primary channel once.

The channels all return to their normal labelling. The primary channel retains its red label,
and the secondary channels retain their orange labels.
The Sync Now button ceases to be lit.
To remove a secondary channel from the group, press the primary channel, then press the
secondary channel(s) you want to remove, and then press the primary channel again to set
the change.
If you are not in primary/secondary selection mode and you press an orange (secondary)
channel, it becomes the primary channel.
If you are not in primary/secondary selection mode and you press a white channel, all
primary/secondary channels are disconnected, and the one you pressed becomes the
primary channel.
If you are not in primary/secondary selection mode and you press the red (primary) channel,
you are put into primary/secondary selection mode.
If you are in primary/secondary selection mode and you press the red (primary) channel, you
are taken out of primary/secondary selection mode.
Selecting a Multiviewer Profile (ISCP Only)

In the Master Control wizard, you have the opportunity to assign up to three multiviewer
profiles with each IconMaster channel (see Creating an ISCP Panel on page 13). These
profiles are available on the contextual control buttons to the right of the eight
user-assignable buttons.
To load a profile, press one of the Profile buttons.
When you select a channel on the IconMaster switcher, the first multiviewer profile
associatd with that channel is automatically loaded. If no profiles are associated with a
channel, the multiviewer will continue to display the currently-loaded profile.
Selecting Groups for Control (ISCP Only)

Groups are configured within IconMaster Configuration Utility, and can contain up to 35
channels.
Click a Group Select button. The active group’s button is red. All subsequent actions you
make on the ISCP panel will apply to that group.
When an ISCP is configured to control groups of devices, an extra button appears second
from the right on the Dynamic Menu bar:
ISCP 25
Figure 4-5 Channel Group Button

To further configure which device is the primary device within the group, and which devices
follow that device, see Channel Group on page 47.
Dynamic Menu Selector Buttons

The eight Dynamic Menu Selector buttons (see Figure 4-2 on page 22 for the location of
these buttons) on the ISCP provide access to parameter controls.
When you press one of these buttons, the region to the left of these buttons updates to
reflect the options that are available under that particular tool. For information on each of
these dynamic menus, see the following topics:
 External Keyers on page 35

 Internal Keyers on page 37
 Selecting an Effect on page 39
 Quick Selects on page 41
 Audio Control on page 42
 Audio Monitor Output on page 45
 Audio Profile Assign on page 46
Tracking
In order to allow the Dynamic Menu Selector buttons to follow the actions that are used on
other parts of the switcher -- the external keyer buttons, etc., the IconMaster Software
Control Panel has a tracking feature.
If one of the dynamic Menu Selector buttons is selected (lit), then the dynamic page that is
selected will be continuously displayed. Tracking can be considered to not be in effect.
If none of the dynamic Menu Selector buttons is selected, then the dynamic page section of
the ISCP will follow the operational state of the system. In this case, tracking is in effect.
Thus, if an internal keyer button is pressed, the dynamic page will display the internal keyers
dynamic page. If the FX button is pressed, the effects dynamic page will appear. If an
assignable source is pressed, the source assignment page will load.
For tracking to be active, no Dynamic Menu Selector buttons can be lit.
Clock and Both the ISCP and the ISCP-Lite have clock and timer functionality. The IconMaster MKE
Timer hardware routinely provides clock and timer information. Clock and timer are configured in
the IconMaster Configuration Utility. See your IconMaster hardware documentation for
more information.
26 Chapter 4
Figure 4-6 Clock and Timer on ISCP or ISCP-LITE

On both interfaces, clock and timer data in the lower right quadrant of the screen.
The clock appears on top, and displays the current time.
The timer appears below the clock. The timer is an up-counting timer, and normally tracks
the time since the last transition, or from when Start was pressed.
Machine You can configure ISCP or ISCP-LITE’s user-configurable buttons to display various machine
Control control options. See Creating an ISCP Panel on page 13 and Creating an ISCP-LITE
Panel on page 19.
The devices these buttons control is determined by the IconMaster Configuration Utility. See
your IconMaster hardware documentation for more information.
Using the Primary Control Bus Cluster (ISCP Only)

At the center of the main control panel, there are 3 primary buses: Auxiliary (Aux), Preset
(PST), and Program (PGM). These buses are used to monitor or select inputs and outputs.
The buttons show the name of the source currently assigned to each of the inputs. A shift
key becomes available on both the PGM and PST buses when you have configured the
IconMaster to operate in the 22 input mode. (The Auxiliary bus controls 12 inputs, whether
the system is in 12 or 22 input mode.)
Figure 4-7. PST, PGM, and AUX Buses on the Software Control Panel
Aux Bus The Aux bus is typically used to switch external effect backgrounds, external
key/fills, and external audio routers.
You can assign input sources to the Aux buses using the ICU Auxiliary Bus Configuration
dialog box. See your IconMaster Installation and Configuration manual for instructions.
ISCP 27
The Aux bus holds up to 12 different input sources. Each of the 12 Aux buses can be
considered to be a 12×6 router, which allows a single aux button press to switch up to 6
simultaneous inputs to 6 destinations on multiple router levels. With 12 aux buses and 12
buttons per bus, each button can address up to 6 independent router levels. In addition, the
Aux bus allows you to perform such tasks as
 Manage effects backgrounds (effects background input)

 Monitor other sources such as VTRs and servers
 Control a secondary router connected to the primary router
 Manage video or (video with embedded audio) external backgrounds
 Manage audio through an audio router
 Manage additional key fields
Aux Bus Dynamic Controls

When you press Auxiliary Bus Select under Dynamic Menu Selectors, the following
dynamic menu appears:
Figure 4-8 Auxiliary Bus Select Dynamic Menu

Aux bus selections that are made on a hardware panel will affect the data that appears on
this page.
This dynamic menu routes Sources to Destinations, as on the Auxiliary bus of the
IconMaster master control switcher. Initially it displays the last selected Destination and the
Source that is currently taken to that Destination.
To route a source to a destination, follow these steps:
1 Press one of the Destination buttons (Aux 1 to Aux 12).

28 Chapter 4
A Source button lights up to update to indicate the source that is currently routed to that
destination (if any).
2 Press one of the Source buttons (Src 1 to Src 12) to route a different Source to the selected
Destination.
Only one Source and one Destination at a time can be selected.
Sources and Destinations are defined using IconMaster Configuration Utility software. See
the section “Auxiliary Bus Configuration Dialog Box” in your IconMaster Master Control
Switcher Configuration Utility Software Reference Manual for more information.
Selecting Aux Bus Source Selections

Use the Aux button to assign control of any preconfigured Auxiliary buses. You can
configure up to 12 different buses, with 12 selections on each bus. For best results, unused
buses are recommended to be disabled.
To use an Aux bus, select the Aux bus you want.
You can configure this control through the ICU Aux Bus dialog box. See your IconMaster
Installation and Configuration Manual for instructions.
Preset (PST) Bus and Program (PGM) Bus (ISCP Only)

The PST bus is typically used to select a video and/or audio input that will be placed on-air
during the next transition. It displays what will go on air. Its sources are connected to the
IconMaster through a router. When you perform a transition, the content that was
displayed on the PST bus goes on air, and the content that was on the PGM bus goes to the
PST bus.
The PST bus can be set to use 12 inputs (in 12 input mode) or 22 sources (in 22 input mode,
the last source select pushbutton on the PGM and PST buses acts as a shift between two
banks of 11 inputs, 1-11 and 12-22). These sources are assigned through the ICU.
The PGM bus displays what is currently on-air. Its sources are connected to the IconMaster
through a router. It is typically used as an on-air bus for output signals of video and audio.
When you perform a transition, the content that was displayed on the PST bus goes on air,
and the content that was on the PGM bus goes to the PST bus.
Selecting PST or PGM Bus Source Selections (ISCP Only)

Inputs are assigned to the PGM and PST bus buttons (through the ICU) as a static input or
as a dynamic input.
The process for selecting a new input source is the same for each of the primary buses: on
the selected bus, press the button that corresponds to the input. The button tally will
illuminate to confirm the selection.
You can configure this control through the ICU Primary Inputs dialog box. See your
IconMaster Installation and Configuration Manual for instructions.
ISCP 29
Selecting 22 Input Mode (ISCP Only)

IconMaster supports up to 22 directly accessible sources in a function called “22 input
mode.” In 22 input mode, the last button in the PGM bus bank acts as a shift button. which
allows you to shift from one bank of 12 inputs to two banks of 11 inputs: 1-11 and 12-22.
Pressing the Shift button toggles thebutton labels, so you know which source is currently
selected. One source is always selected on the PST and PGM buses.
If a source is showing on the PST or PGM bus, and the Shift button is pressed to change
banks, buttons 1 through 11 will not be illuminated. If you see just the Shift button pressed,
simply press it again to toggle to the other bank. A source button will now be seen
illuminated.
You can set up this function through the ICU System Configuration dialog box. See your
Program Bus “Hot” Punch Operation (ISCP Only)

Selections on the PGM bus automatically perform a PGM bus cut (or “hot” punch)
operation; that is, if you press a PGM bus source button, the selected source goes
immediately on air. The PST bus is used in this operation, but will return to its original source
after the action is performed, and the Preset output of the switcher momentarily shows the
selection of the PGM input. Operationally, no feedback is shown to the end user and the
action taken is transparent to the operator.
This function is not the same as the Transition Hot Key in the Transition Control cluster.
Changing Input Sources (Dynamic Inputs)

You can change router input sources through a procedure called “dynamic inputs.” Use the
Dynamic input functionality to change the router selection for an IconMaster source button.
This feature is works in both 12- or 22-input mode.
This function is enabled through the ICU Primary Inputs dialog box. See your IconMaster
Each IconMaster source is set up to be either static or dynamic.
 A static source is not changeable at the control panel; it can only be changed through
the ICU. This selection is appropriate for sources that will always be needed.
 A dynamic source has its initial router source defined in ICU, but can be changed at
any time at the control panel. If the selected PST is the same as the current on air PGM
source, PST dynamic selection is blocked.
An IconMaster control panel can have any mix of static and dynamic inputs.
When you select a source on the PST bus or press Source Select under Dynamic Menu
Selectors, the following dynamic menu appears:
30 Chapter 4
Figure 4-9 Dynamic Routing Dynamic Menu

Settings made on this page are only valid and usable if IconMaster is configured to run with
Router Database Mode enabled.
Each button in the Dynamic Routing section of the screen displays a source name, as
defined by RouterMapper when you created the routing panel.
Each IconMaster source is set up to be either static or dynamic.
 A static source is not changeable at the control panel; it can only be changed through
the ICU. This selection is appropriate for sources that will always be needed.
 A dynamic source has its initial router source defined in ICU, but when it is not on air,
it can be changed at any time at the control panel.
An IconMaster control panel can have any mix of static and dynamic inputs.
To change a dynamic input source:

1 Press an Input button.
The Current field indicates the Source currently taken to that input.
2 Press the Up and Down buttons beside Category to scroll through the list of available
categories.
The currently selected category is green.
3 Press the Up and Down buttons beside Index to scroll through the list of available indexes
that are in that category.
4 Press Assign to set the currently selected source to the selected Input.
The Current field updates to the selected.
ISCP 31
Taking Selections On-Air (ISCP Only)

Taking a selection on- or off-air is part of the transition process. Depending on the
selection’s transition type (background, key, or audio-over), press the appropriate transition
control button. This will set up a transition from the PST to the PGM bus. Then, press Take
to take the selection on-air.
Performing Successful Transitions (ISCP Only)

You can perform four types of transitions: background transitions, key transitions,
audio-over transitions, and effects transitions.
On the IconMaster, transitions are performed through the Transition Functions button
cluster and the Transition Control buttons cluster. Using the IconMaster configuration utility
software, you can choose from a list of available functions to redefine these buttons. In this
way, you can customize the operation of the panel for optimum ease of use.
Configurable Transition Functions (ISCP Only)

The Transition Functions cluster controls the selection of transition type and rate that will
occur upon activation of the next transition.
Automation Hold Transition rates Breakaway Transition FX Transition types
Figure 4-10. Configurable Transition Functions
Table 4-1 Configurable Transition Functions

Function Button
Stop IconMaster’s Hold
response to automation
commands
Select transition rates Slow
Med
Fast
Cut
Set up breakaways Audio
Video
Selects an Effects FX The Effects page of the Dynamic menus displays the preconfigured
transition effects. See Selecting an Effect on page 39.
32 Chapter 4
Table 4-1 Configurable Transition Functions (Continued)

Function Button
Select transition types Cut-Fade
Cuts the program off air, and then fades the preset up
Fade-Cut,
Fades the transition down, and then, when the program
is off air, cuts the preset up
V-Fade
Fades the program down, and then, when the program
is off air, fades the preset up
Cross-Fade
Fades the program down and at the same time fades the
preset up
To perform a transition:
1 Select the content.

You select content sources through the BKGD button and a PST bus source and, optionally
through one or more of the key buttons or audio over buttons.
2 Determine whether the transition will be a background transition, effect transition, key
transition, or audio-over transition, alone or in combination.
3 Select a transition type.
4 Select a transition rate.
5 Select the elements that will be included in the transition.
One background and eight keyer enable buttons are used to enable which source(s) will be
included in the next transition. Pressing these buttons will toggle the button on and off.
Any source that is illuminated will be included in the next transition. Sources that are not
illuminated will not be included in the next transition.
6 Trigger the transition.

This is most simply done by pressing the Take button, but you can also press the Preroll
button.
Enabling a Key Transition (ISCP Only)

A key makes it possible to cut a “hole” in the program input and replace it with a separate
key fill of the same size.
 Keys 1 and 2 are “external” keys; that is, they allow you to key in the video from an
external device, such as an external graphics system or character generator, onto the
PGM video.
 Keys 3 through 6 are “internal” keys; that is, they allow you to control the IconMaster’s
internal IconLogo generator.
Internal keyers show their logo name and number. External keyers show the name that has
been programmed in ICU. The top of the button displays the following states:
 Red: The keyer is on-air.

ISCP 33
 Orange: The keyer is not synced to external keyers.

 Green: The keyer is available, but not on-air.
 Off: The internal or external keyer is not available.
Indicator
Figure 4-11 Keyer Button With Indicator
The key source and attributes can be set using the Dynamic Menus, and transitioning the
keys is accomplished using the Transition Controls.
You can configure this control through the ICU Keyer dialog box. See your IconMaster
Taking a Key On Air

1 Press a Key button. It illuminates, indicating that a keyer transition (from the Preset bus to
the Program bus) will occur when Take is selected.
2 If necessary, adjust the keyer parameters using the Dynamic menus.
3 Press Take. Once the transition is taken, the input source display indicator illuminates red
(to indicate that the keyer is on-air) and the key button remains illuminated. This means that
the keyer selection will once again be included in the next set of transitions.
Keeping a Key On Air

If a key is on-air (its indicator is red), press the Key button until the indicator is off. The key
transition will be disabled for the next transition, and the key will remain on-air.
Taking a Key Off Air

The keyer’s indicator will be red, to display that the keyer is currently on air.
1 Press the Key button until the button tally is illuminated.

2 Press Take.
The indicator turns green and the key button remains illuminated.
3 To keep the key off air, press the Key button to turn off its tally light.
Using the Transition “Trans HotKey”

The TRANSITION HOTKEY is located just above the TAKE pushbutton in the Transition
Control cluster. Press the TRANS HOTKEY button. It illuminates, indicating that HOTKEY
mode is enabled. This feature provides quick access to turn keyers on and off, without
selecting the transition enable buttons and using the TAKE process.
34 Chapter 4
Unlike the Hardware Control Panel, on the ISCP the TRANS HOTKEY is a toggle. Each time
you press it, it changes on if it was off, or off if it was on. When you press one of the keyers
to transition it, the TRANS HOTKEY will remain in whatever state it was in. If the TRANS
HOTKEY is lit and you press some other button on the ISCP, such as a source selection, the
TRANS HOTKEY will be automatically turned off.
Pressing a keyer button while the TRANS HOTKEY button is enabled will immediately
transition the keyer on or off air. It will not change the keyer enable state, just the on-air
status. The keyer transition type and speed follows whatever transition type and speed are
currently selected.
Enabling a Background (Preset to Program) Transition (ISCP Only)

Background transitions are controlled through the BKGD button. The BKGD button
operates like a toggle button, and allows you to enable or disable a selected background
transition.
Taking a Background On Air

1 Press the BKGD button. The button tally illuminates, indicating that a background transition
from the PST bus to the PGM bus will occur when you select Take or Preroll.
2 Ensure the correct PST source is selected. This source will be shown on the Preset output.
3 Press the Take button to cause the next transition to start immediately; or, press the Preroll
button to cause the next transition to preroll the appropriate play machine.
Disabling a Background Transition

Press the BKGD button until the button tally light is off. The background transition will be
disabled for the next transition. As a result, the Program background source is also
displayed on the Preset output.
Effects are not available when the BKGD button is off.
Enabling an Audio-Over Transition (ISCP Only)

An audio-over allows you to reduce the level of the audio on the program channel and mix
a separate audio channel on top.
An indicator is located at the top of each audio-over button. The display can be
programmed using the ICU to indicate the source ID, and it illuminates red when the
audio-over is on-air.
The audio-over source and attributes can be set using the Dynamic menus, and
transitioning the audio-over is accomplished using the Transition Control Cluster.
You can configure these controls through the ICU Audio Over Matrix dialog box. See your
If you have the optional IconMaster audio control panel, it can be used to adjust the audio
over mix ratio. See page 42 for more information.
ISCP 35
Taking an Audio-Over On Air

1 Press an A/O button. It illuminates, indicating that an audio-over transition (from the
Preset bus to the Program bus) will occur when Take is selected.
2 Press Take. Once the transition is taken, the A/O button’s indicator illuminates red (to show
that the audio-over transition is on-air). This means that the keyer selection will once again
be included in the next set of transitions.
If an audio over is in progress, and the SIL (fade to silence) function is used, IconMaster
audio will turn off, and the Audio Over tally will no longer be red. it will return to an active
(red) state when the SIL function is exited.
Keeping an Audio-Over On Air

If an audio-over is on air and the A/O button’s indicator is red, press the A/O button until
the indicator is off. The audio over transition will be disabled for the next transition, and the
key will remain on-air.
Taking an Audio-Over Off Air

The A/O indicator will be red, indicating that the audio-over transition is currently on air.
1 Press the A/O button until the indicator is illuminated.

2 Press Take.
The indicator will turn green.
3 To keep the key off air, press the A/O button to turn off its tally light.
External To activate the External Keyers control, do one of the following:

Keyers
 Press External Keyers under Dynamic Menu Selectors
 Press External Keyer (1 or 2) in the dynamic menu
The following appears:
36 Chapter 4
Figure 4-12 External Keyer Control Dynamic Menu

This screen allows you to select each of the two external keyers on the selected IconMaster
master control switcher and adjust the parameters associated with that key. These settings
can also be adjusted using the keyer Control menu in the upper level menu list of the
Control Cluster. See “Navigating the Keyer Control” in your IconMaster Master Control
Switcher Installation and Operation Manual for more information.
1 Press Ext Key 1 or Ext Key 2. The relevant sections of the dynamic menu update with data
retrieved from the IconMaster channel (the status and values of that key on the channel).
2 Adjust the processing parameters of the selected key by pressing the up/down arrow
buttons.
Table 4-2 Processing Parameters for Keys 1 and 2

Parameter Function Range
Gain Applies gain to the key signal after application 0 - 16
of the clip/offset value
Transparency Adjusts the amount of transparency of the 0 (off) - 100% (on)
resulting keyed signal
Clip Subtracts the clip or offset value from the key 0 - 896
signal input
ISCP 37
Table 4-2 Processing Parameters for Keys 1 and 2 (Continued)

Hue (Only available when Modified Matte Fill is 0 - 359
selected) Adjusts the phase of the chrominance
of the signal
Saturation (Only available when Modified Matte Fill is 0 - 100%
selected) Adjusts the chrominance of the signal
Luminance (Only available when Modified Matte Fill is 0 - 100%
selected) Adjusts the brightness of the signal
3 The following buttons are active:
Table 4-3 Key Types

Button Effect
Self Key Forces the luminance channel of the fill input signal to generate the key
instead of using an external key input signal to cut it
External Key Causes an external fill input signal to be inserted in to the shape cut by
the key input signal
Additive Key Inserts the fill without processing (the fill must have a black background)
Table 4-4 Key Modifiers

Button Effect
Matte Fill Causes the key effect in which the inserted fill input signal is created by
a local matte (a solid color signal that may be adjusted for chrominance,
hue, and luminance) generator
External Fill Causes an external fill input signal to be inserted into the shape cut by
the key input signal
Polarity Inverse Inverts the polarity of the key
Use these buttons to build a key. As you select or deselect buttons here, the data is sent to
the IconMaster Key.
When the configured key is triggered on the channel, the new data sent from ISCP will be
used.
4 When the changes to your key are complete, press Take to put it on air.
Internal This screen allows you to select each of the logo keyers on the selected IconMaster master
Keyers control switcher and adjust the parameters associated with that key. These settings can also
be adjusted using the keyer Control menu in the upper level menu list of the Control
Cluster. See “Navigating the Keyer Control” in your IconMaster Master Control Switcher
Installation and Operation Manual for more information.
To Configure an Internal Keyer, follow these steps:
1 To activate the Internal Keyers control, do one of the following:

38 Chapter 4
 Press Internal Keyers under Dynamic Menu Selectors, and then click on the Logo
keyer button that corresponds to the logo you want to modify.
If you load the current on-air logo, you run the risk of changing that logo while it is
on air.
 Press one of the four Internal Keyers in the transitions cluster.
The following dynamic menu appears:
Figure 4-13 Keyer Control Dynamic Menu

2 Under Keyer Settings, adjust the Gain, Clip and Transparency fields by pressing the up/
down arrow buttons.
The Up and Down buttons control the control that is active. To adjust the Transparency, for
example, you must first press the TRANSP button.
Table 4-5 Processing Parameters for Keys 3, 4, 5, and 6

Gain Applies gain to the key signal after application of 0-8
the clip/offset value
Transparency Adjusts the amount of transparency of the 0 (off) - 100% (on)
resulting keyed signal
Clip Subtracts the clip or offset value from the key 0 - 896
signal input
3 Under Logo Select, press Up and Down buttons to the right of the logo list to scroll
through the list of available logos.
ISCP 39
4 Press the Load Logo button.

The logo that is highlighted in red is sent to the keyer.
The name of the logo in that keyer appears in the Current Logo field.
5 Press the arrow buttons in the Logo Position section of the screen to move the logo. The
Horizontal Pixels and Vertical Lines fields update to indicate the position
0, 0 represents the top left corner of the screen.
Selecting an In an IconMaster environment, effects are created through the IconMaster configuration
Effect software utility, or ICU. Before you can use any of these effects, they must be uploaded to
the IconMaster frame.See your IconMaster Installation and Configuration Manual for
instructions.
You may or may not have access to the ICU software. If you do not, you must ask your
system administrator to perform these operations for you.
You can select an effect through the FX button or through the Effects dynamic menu. For
the effect to be performed, the Background transition must be selected.
In a two-channel effect, IconMaster can be configured for Preview operation or PST

squeeze. In the Preview mode, the Preset output will always show the upcoming segment
of the selected effect. In the PST mode, the second channel squeezes back the PST bus
output and offers a fully independent two-channel squeeze effort. Preview is not allowed
in this operational mode.
1 Press the FX button.

The effect name will be displayed in the Selected Effect section of the Effects Dynamic
menu. The Effects Dynamic menu only appears if it is context locked using the Dynamic
Menu selector button for Effects, or if context lock is off, in which case the ISCP will
automatically go to the Effects Dynamic menu.
40 Chapter 4
Figure 4-14 Effects Dynamic Menu of the Software Control Panel

2 Continue pressing the FX button to scroll through the pre-configured effects until you have
selected the effect you need.
If there is no squeeze background (that is, the Squeeze Bkgd input on the MKE-3901 is
not connected), one of these conditions will apply:
 NONSYNC will be displayed in the control cluster display next to the effect name
(HRCP panel only).
 The squeeze background is untimed due to the wrong video standard on the input.
If Channel “B” is the background source for an effect, a “flash” may result, because you
are trying to use the “B” channel as both the background and a squeeze source at the same
time. You should only use this type of operation in a single channel environment while
using the Squeeze Background “C.”
The screen updates to display the names of the effects that are currently loaded on the
IconMaster (updated every time you press the Effects button). If there is not an effect
associated with any particular button, that button will be greyed out.
The effect that is currently active on the channel (the effect that will be used in the next
transition) is lit orange.
To make an effect the active effect on the channel, press one of the Pre-Select buttons
(Effect 1 to Effect 16) to choose a specific effect.
Enabling an effect does not trigger that effect; it makes that effect the active effect for the
next transition triggered by the IconMaster channel.
Effects are all pre-configured in the Config Utility software. See the “Effects Dialog Box”
section of your IconMaster Master Control Switcher Configuration Utility Software
Reference Guide for complete instructions on creating effects.
ISCP 41
Quick Selects When you press Quick Selects under Dynamic Menu Selectors, the following dynamic
menu appears:
Figure 4-15 Quick Selects Dynamic Menu

A Quick Select is a macro that can contain the following:
 PGM or PST sources

 Auxiliary bus configurations
 Keyer (1 - 6)
 Audio Overs, including ratio
 Parametric values for each keyer
 External keys, both on and off-air
 Background state
 Transition rate and type
 FX and F button state
The data from these items is stored as it was on the IconMaster master control switcher at
the time it was stored. Recalling a Quick Select overwrites the information in those regions
of the IconMaster master control switcher with the stored data.
There are eight Quick Select Store buttons, and eight corresponding Recall buttons.
To create a Quick Select, press one of the Store buttons, and then click Enable. The
IconMaster’s settings are saved to that bank in their current state. The corresponding Recall
button lights briefly to indicate that it has saved information.
To send a previously created Quick Select’s settings to the channel, press a Recall button.
For more information on IconMaster Quick Selects, see the IconMaster Master Control
Switcher Installation and Operation Manual section “Navigating the Quick Selects Control”.
42 Chapter 4
Audio The upper right portion of the screen provides tools to monitor the audio for the selected
Channel (IconMaster system).
Monitoring
ISCP displays 32 audio channels, showing the Preset audio meters on the left, and Program
audio meters on the right. Each channel has a cumulative gain indicator, which displays the
cumulative effect of Cluster, AES, and Mono gain adjustments on that channel.
Figure 4-16 Audio Monitor Component of IconMaster Panel

Visual indicators provide feedback to show which channels are being modified, when one
of the Audio Controls Dynamic menus is displayed. The indicators at the bottom of the
display are backlit in green.
Audio When you press Audio Control under Dynamic Menu Selectors, the dynamic menu that
Control appears has three buttons at the top. The selected button will determine the controls
available on the rest of the dynamic menus. These three buttons are:
 Audio LEVELS on page 42

 Audio Pair Processing on page 43
 Audio Mono Proc on page 45
Audio LEVELS
A cluster is an arbitrary grouping of audio channels. A cluster could be composed of audio
from different channels. For information on creating audio clusters, see “Audio Clusters
Dialog Box” in your IconMaster Master Control Switcher Configuration Utility Software
Reference Guide.
When you press Audio LEVELS under Audio Controls, the following dynamic menu
appears:
ISCP 43
Figure 4-17 Cluster Levels Dynamic Menu

Audio output gain is adjustable for the Preset and Program buses only. You can only control
the Preset if the BKGD control is active.
Clusters and AES can be named using ICU. The name of the cluster or AES is displayed on
the control selectors.
To adjust the audio output gain on a specific cluster, AES group, Mono group, Audio Over
or Logo Audio, follow these steps:
1 Press the button for the cluster, AES group, Mono group, Audio Over or Logo Audio.
This brings up the controls for that object.
2 Select a Program or Preset cluster to adjust.

In the Program and/or Preset sections of the screen, the buttons update to indicate the
audio channels associated with that bus.
The Gain field below each button updates to reflect the actual gain of that cluster, which it
retrieves from the IconMaster master control switcher.
3 Select a button within the Program or Preset group.

4 Use the Up and Down buttons to adjust the gain.
Your changes take effect immediately.
Audio Pair Processing

When you press Audio Pair Proc under Dynamic Menu Selectors, the following dynamic
menu appears:
44 Chapter 4
Figure 4-18 Audio Pair Processing Dynamic Menu

To map audio functions for the Preset and the two Audio-Over sources, and to control AES
channel groupings, follow these steps:
1 Press Preset, Audio Over 1, or Audio Over 2.

The labels on the AES pairs update to indicate the pairs that are currently mapped for that
source.
2 Press one of the eight AES PAIR buttons.

3 Press the Channel Mapping option to assign to that AES pair.
The options are outlined in the following table:
Table 4-6 Channel Mapping Options

Button Function
NORM Left channel input goes to left output, and right input goes to right output
L to LR Left channel input goes to both left and right channel outputs
R to LR The right channel input goes to both left and right channels’ outputs
Chan Swap Swaps the left and right channels within the selected pair so the left input
goes to the right output and right input goes to left output
Chan Sum Adds the left and right channels within the selected AES input and divides
the total by two, maintaining a relative signal gain; then, it copies the result
to both channels within the AES pair, turning the stereo input pair into a
mono output
ISCP 45
These same mapping options are available in the IconMaster master control switcher’s
Control Cluster Audio menu. For more information, see “Navigating the Audio Control” in
your IconMaster Master Control Switcher Installation and Operation Manual.
Audio Mono Proc

When you press Mono Control under Audio Control, the following dynamic menu
appears:
Figure 4-19 Mono Control Dynamic Menu

Mono control functions are available for the Preset and the two Audio-Over sources, To
configure the processing for a mono channel, follow these steps:
1 Press Preset, Audio Over 1, or Audio Over 2.

The channels mapped for that source appear on the 16 buttons below the Mono Channels
heading.
When Audio Over 1 or Audio Over 2 is selected, the Phase and Mute buttons are not
available.
2 Press Up and Down to adjust the gain for the currently selected channel.
You can either press the button repeatedly, or hold the button down and then release it
when a specific number is reached.
3 Press a Channel button, and to configure that channel, do one of the following:
 Press Phase Rev to invert the polarity of the selected audio channel.
 Press Mute to turn off the audio of the selected audio channel.
Audio When you press Audio Monitor Output under Dynamic Menu Selectors, the following
Monitor dynamic menu appears:
Output
46 Chapter 4
Figure 4-20 Audio Monitor Output Dynamic Menu

Press the channel of the audio to monitor. Press the Up and Down arrows to change the
percentage of monitor outputs on the MKE-3901.
PST and PGM A through D indicate the audio pair that are being monitored.
Audio Profile When you press Audio Profile Assign under Dynamic Menu Selectors, the following
Assign dynamic menu appears:
This field is read-only and

is retrieved from the
hardware.
Figure 4-21 Audio Monitor Output Dynamic Menu

To complete this screen:
ISCP 47
1 Choose the source to assign a profile from the 22 Source buttons.

The Current field updates to indicate the profile currently assigned to that source.
2 From the Audio Profile Select field, use the up and down buttons to view the list of
available profiles.
3 When the highlight bar is on the profile you want, click Assign.
Each source has a default profile, assigned in the IconMaster Configuration Utility. To revert
the audio profile to the default, click Reset to Default.
Channel When you press Channel Group under Dynamic Menu Selectors, the following dynamic
Group menu appears:
Figure 4-22 Channel Group Dynamic Menu

The top portion of the menu has a button for each channel in the group.
One button on this panel is red. That is the primary device to be controlled. This button has
two states: one where it displays the name of the device, and the other where it displays
[primary]. When the master device’s button displays [primary],
 Click any orange device button to remove it from the controlled group.
 Click any grey device button to add control of that device.
When the master device’s button displays the device’s name, click any other device to make
that device the primary device.
48 Chapter 4
Other buttons on this menu are:
Table 4-7 Channel Group Dynamic Menu Buttons

Button Function
Select All Selects all devices for control by the master device
Clear All Deselects all devices except the master device.
Sync NOW Synchronizes all slaved devices so they display the same
data onscreen as the master device
Centrio Profile Displays the profiles that are configured to display with
the master device
49
A Software User License

and Warranty Agreement
Carefully read all of the terms and conditions of this license agreement before using CCS
Navigator, CCS Pilot, or CCS CoPilot. By using this software, you indicate your complete and
unconditional acceptance of these terms and conditions.
This document constitutes a legal agreement between you and Imagine Communications
concerning the use of CCS Navigator. This agreement constitutes the complete agreement
between you and Imagine Communications.
installation shall consist of no more than 1,000 servers or workstations. A network is defined
as any continuously connected group of computers on one cabling scheme without
proprietary rights related to the software and the accompanying manuals. You may not copy
any part of the accompanying manuals, copy the software except as permitted above, make
alterations or modifications to the software, or attempt to decompile or discover the source
code of the software.
purchase.
Imagine Communications serial number has been removed or defaced.
50 Appendix A

of such damages.
51
Index
A Dynamic inputs 29
Add channel 13, 18
Administrator 7 E
Audio Effects, creating 39
audio overs External key/fill 37
transitions 34–35
Audio Control sub-panel 42
Audio gain 43, 45 F
Audio Mapping sub-panel 29, 43 Fade-Take buttons 32
Audio monitoring 42 FullScreen mode 21
Aux
bus 26, 28
button 28 G
Auxiliary Bus Select sub-panel 27 Gain 43
B H
Background Hardware requirements, installation 6
BKGD button 34 Hardware, required 5
Build mode 12–19 Hot punch operation 29
Busses
Aux bus 26, 28
preset 28
I
program 28 IconMaster Wizard 13–??, 14–19
Buttons Input mode
aux button 28 22 input mode 28
BKGD button 34 Installation 6
fade-take 32 Microsoft Installer 6
key buttons 32 Microsoft Internet Explorer 6
Microsoft Messaging Queue 6
Microsoft XML parser 6
C RouterMapper 6
Changing sources 29
Channel 23
Channel Select buttons 23
K
Channel swap 44 Key
Configurable transition functions 31, 32 buttons 32
Configuration 11–14 Keyer Control sub-panel 35, 38
Control mode 21–45
Creating effects 39 L
Logging on 7
D
Destination select 27
52 Index
M RouterMapper
installation 6
Master control configuration options 12, 18
Routing 27
Master Control plug-in 11, 21
Matte fill 37
Microsoft Messaging Queue 6 S
Modes 8 Selecting
Build 12–19 sources 28
Control 21–45 22 input mode 29
FullScreen 21 AUX bus 28
operational, switching 8 hot punch operation 29
Modify channel 13, 18 Self key 37
Monitoring audio 42 Software User License 49
Mono Control sub-panel 45 Software, required 5
Mono output 44 Source select 27
Mute 45 Sources
22 input mode 29
changing 29
N selecting 28
Navigator installation 7 Squeeze Bkgd input 40
New Page dialog box 13 SrcSEL parameter 29
Stereo output 44
O Storing quick selects 41
On air 31 System control sub-panels 45
Operating system, required 5 Cluster Control 42
Operational modes, switching 8 Keyer Controls 35, 37
Mono Control 45
Quick Selects 41
P System requirements 5
Panels 45
opening 21
Parameters
T
SrcSEL 29 Taking selections on air 31
Password 8 Transition control cluster
Phase reverse 45 BKGD button 34
Plug-in, master control 11, 21 Transition functions cluster 31
Polarity inversion 37 Transitions
audio over 34–35
Pre-Selects 40
functions cluster 32
Preset bus 28
Preset/Program audio source 43
Program bus 28 U
Uninstalling software 7
Q
Quick Selects sub-panel 41 V
View full screen 21
R
Recalling quick selects 41 W
Remove channel 13, 18 Warranty Agreement 49
Required hardware 6 Wizards 13–??, 14–19
Requirements, system 5
Volume 4: NAVIGATOR‐NX Startup Guide
Edition D
175‐100017‐00
Trademarks
Contact Information
iii
Contents
Preface ..........................................................................................................................v
Purpose ......................................................................................................................v
Audience ....................................................................................................................v
Chapter 1 Introduction to NexioNAV ................................................................................. 1

Overview ....................................................................................................................... 1
Features .................................................................................................................... 2
Chapter 2 Installation ............................................................................................................... 5

Activating a NAVIGATOR-NX License ......................................................................... 7
Logging On ............................................................................................................... 8
Chapter 3 NEXIO Configuration With a NAVIGATOR-NX License Key ................ 9

Using Device Discovery on NEXIO Servers ................................................................... 9
Completing the First Page of the NEXIONav Wizard ................................................. 14
Configuring SNMP Settings ..................................................................................... 15
Adding Items in the Nexio Wizard ............................................................................ 16
Adding NEXIO MIB Files ........................................................................................... 21
Chapter 4 NEXIO Control and Monitoring ...................................................................... 25

Opening Nexio System Pages Using the Open Menu ................................................ 26
Opening Nexio Control Pages from the Navigation Pane .......................................... 26
Navigating Within NEXIO Pages ............................................................................... 27
Using the Graphical Navigation Toolbar ................................................................... 27
Using Graphical Navigation Context Menus ............................................................. 28
Navigating Away From the NEXIO Home Page ......................................................... 28
Controlling and Monitoring Transmission Servers ..................................................... 32
Controlling and Monitoring News Servers ................................................................ 36
iv Chapter
Controlling and Monitoring MGX Servers ................................................................. 37

Controlling and Monitoring Speciality Servers .......................................................... 41
Controlling and Monitoring Farad Storage Devices ................................................... 43
Viewing Data Storage Devices .................................................................................. 44
Monitoring Alarm Conditions ................................................................................... 46
Setting E-Mail Notification of Alarms ........................................................................ 48
Index ........................................................................................................................... 51
v
CCS Navigator User Manual: Volume 4:
Preface
Manual Information
Purpose CCS Navigator User Manual: Volume 4: NAVIGATOR-NX Startup Guide is a companion
guide to CCS Navigator: Advanced Graphical Navigation Application.
This manual outlines how to get started using the NAVIGATOR-NX license key. For
information on the basic tools and interface of CCS Navigator, please refer to the CCS
Navigator: Advanced Graphical Navigation Application user manual, which is included as a
PDF on your installation DVD.
installation, setup, and/or operation of CCS Navigator and the NAVIGATOR-NX license key.
Revision
History
A NEXIONav March 2008
B Navigator 4.3 August 2008
C Navigator 4.6 November 2009
D Navigator 4.7.1 July 2011
vi Preface
Writing Conventions

Bold Indicates a dialog box, property sheet, field,
button, check box, list box, combo box,
menu, submenu, window, list, and selection
names
Italics Indicates email addresses, names of books
and publications, and first instances of new
terms and specialized words that need
emphasis
CAPS Indicates a specific key on the keyboard,
such as ENTER, TAB, CTRL, ALT, DELETE
Code Indicates variables or command-line entries,
such as a DOS entry or something you type
into a field
> Indicates the direction of navigation through
a hierarchy of menus and windows
hyperlink Indicates a jump to another location in the
document or elsewhere
Indicates important information that helps
to avoid and troubleshoot problems

CCS Software A generic term for any CCS software
Application applications

1
1 Introduction to NexioNAV
Overview The NAVIGATOR-NX license allows you to monitor the health and operational parameters of
NEXIO systems across a LAN or WAN. Working in conjunction with agents on the NEXIO™
server platform, you can monitor system notifications, make setting adjustments, and
control basic server configuration from a remote PC.
The figure below presents some of the components available in a NEXIO system:
Velocity
Servers
Ethernet
Switches
MGX
Fiber Switches
Storage
Figure 1-1 NEXIO Components

Using the NAVIGATOR-NX license, you can configure a set of pages containing
alert-threshold levels that help to diagnose equipment problems before they become on-air
failures. Communication with the Server network is based on SNMP protocol, allowing you
to monitor SNMP traps. (Servers should be running SNMP Agent 2.9.1 or greater.)
Information on system setup parameters, RAID storage errors, power supply status, fan
status, and system temperature can be accessed, monitored, or controlled from remote
locations.
Before you can configure Magellan CCS Navigator with a NAVIGATOR-NX license, log in and
set the operational mode. (See Logging On and Setting the Operational Mode on
page 8.)
2 Chapter 1
Introduction to NexioNAV
In Build mode, connect to devices using either of the following methods:
 Use the NEXIO Wizard to enter the IP addresses for each Magellan CCS Navigator
Server connected to the system.
 Use the Discovery tool to discover NEXIO servers along with data enclosure devices.
Within Magellan CCS Navigator, each individual Server is also referred to as a Node. (See
Creating NEXIO Systems Using the Wizard on page 12.)
In a server system, many nodes support different redundant paths. Many of the servers have
two network interfaces, co-existing on different sub-nets. The same idea applies to server
gateways, such as MGXs. You can have gateways with six different network interfaces all
being monitored independently in Magellan CCS Navigator. In order to be monitored,
nodes need to exist in the graphical navigation tree.
The NAVIGATOR-NX license replaces NEXIO Pilot as the monitoring tool of server systems.
Note however that this version does not implement all functionality delivered by NEXIO Pilot
at this point.
The NEXIO Wizard creates all nodes after creating the Navigator pages (under the Network
folder) every time a user runs it. Pages can contain different components, including servers,
newsroom solutions, media Gateways, and data storage.
Features The following are some of the features of the NAVIGATOR-NX license key:
 Display and handle different types of server notifications

 Email handling for server notifications (traps)
 Create all NEXIO pages using the NEXIO Wizard in Magellan CCS Navigator
 Create all NEXIO nodes in the navigation tree using the NEXIO Wizard in Magellan CCS
Navigator
 Load NEXIO MIB files during application start-up
 Discover NEXIO devices, and create their Control pages
 Enable/disable NEXIO Server license option
This document will get you started with the NAVIGATOR-NX license key.
Topics covered include:
 Installing Magellan CCS Navigator (see Installing Magellan CCS Navigator

Software on page 6).
 Activating a NAVIGATOR-NX license (see Activating a NAVIGATOR-NX License on
page 7).
 Removing Magellan CCS Navigator software (see Removing Magellan CCS
Navigator Software on page 7).
If you have purchased just the NAVIGATOR-NX license, you will have only received the
NAVIGATOR-NX Startup Guide. The full Magellan CCS Navigator manual is available on your
Magellan CCS Navigator installation DVD as a PDF.
InterfaceNav 3
CCS Navigator User Manual: Volume 4:
Magellan CCS Navigator with a NAVIGATOR-NX license is not a fully-featured version of

Magellan CCS Navigator. To use some features described in the Magellan CCS Navigator
manual, you must purchase separate Magellan CCS Navigator licenses.
4 Chapter 1
Introduction to NexioNAV
NexioNav 5
User Manual
2 Installation

Before installing your Magellan CCS Navigator software, ensure you have the necessary
hardware and software. SeeRequired Hardware, Operating System and Software on
page 5.
Basic installation instructions are provided in the section Installing Magellan CCS
Navigator Software on page 6. For an in-depth treatment of installation possibilities, see
the Installation chapter of your Magellan CCS Navigator User Manual (available as a PDF on
your Documentation and Product Resources DVD).
When you install the Magellan CCS Navigator software, it will start with a 30-day trial
license of all features of Magellan CCS Navigator. To add your permanent NAVIGATOR-NX
license, see Activating a NAVIGATOR-NX License on page 7.

NAVIGATOR-NX was designed to work with a 15-inch or greater touch screen, but if you
use it with a mouse, any size monitor is acceptable.
When communicating with a Farad G2 server, you need SNMP Agent version 7.0.0.8 or
newer. Brocade switches require SNMP Agent v1 in order to be monitored for traps.
The other hardware, operating system and software minimum system requirements for
NAVIGATOR-NX are the same as those for Magellan CCS Navigator. For a complete list of
requirements, see the “Installation” chapter of your accompanying Magellan CCS
Navigator: Advanced Graphical Navigation Application User Guide.
6 Chapter 2
Installation
Install the Magellan CCS Navigator software on a PC that meets or exceeds the following
hardware requirements::
Table 2-1 PC Requirements for NAVIGATOR-NX

Minimum Supported Requirements
Processor Intel Core i5 3.20 GHz
System Memory 16 GB DRAM or better
Network Connection 10/100/1000 Gigabit Ethernet Connection
HDD Drive 160 GB Hard Disk Drive
Available Disk Space 5 GB
Optical Drive DVD-ROM Drive
 Video graphic module with 256MB DDR3 SDRAM
Display supporting up to a minimum 1920x1080 resolutions
 LCD Monitor supporting up to 1920x1080 resolution
For best results, do not run Magellan CCS Navigator on systems that are running or hosting
other applications or servers.
This system is based on SNMP protocol. The performance depends on the Network traffic.
Servers should be running SNMP Agent 2.9.1 or greater. Farad G2 servers require SNMP
Agent 7.0.0.8 or newer. Brocade switches require SNMP Agent v1 in order to be monitored
for traps.
Installing Magellan CCS Navigator Software

To install the Magellan CCS Navigator software, complete these steps:


the installation may abort. All the required software is included on the Magellan CCS
All functionality is packaged within the Magellan CCS Navigator application, and a set of
specific “wizards” creates the graphical interface to control and monitor NEXIO systems.
The page configuration is done via a wizard.
All data is maintained when either re-installing the application (same version) or upgrading
to a higher version. In both cases, the data is backed up.
NexioNav 7
User Manual
Activating a NAVIGATOR-NX License

The NAVIGATOR-NX license must be enabled in order to create pages using NEXIO Wizard.
When you run an installation from the Magellan CCS Navigator DVD, by default all licenses
will be active with a 30-day trial period. You must contact Customer Service in order to
activate your NAVIGATOR-NX license after that time. To activate a NAVIGATOR-NX license,
you must be logged onto Windows as an administrator.
To activate a license, follow these steps:
A window opens:

PDF license request
form.
Figure 2-1 License Dialog

2 Provide the serial number from the License Dialog window to your sales representative.

Your NEXIO Server license should be recognized immediately. A restart of Magellan CCS
Navigator or the PC is not required.
Removing Magellan CCS Navigator Software

For information on removing the Magellan CCS Navigator software and the
NAVIGATOR-NX license, please refer to your Magellan CCS Navigator: Advanced Graphical
Navigation Application User Guide.
8 Chapter 2
Installation
Only an Administrator user can properly and entirely remove the Magellan CCS
Navigator software.
Logging On and Setting the Operational Mode

For the first time after an installation or reinstallation of Magellan CCS Navigator, the User
Name will show the name Administrator. At subsequent logins, the User Name box
will show the name of the person who last logged on.
Logging On To start Magellan CCS Navigator, complete these steps:
1 Find the Magellan CCS Navigator application icon in Windows Explorer and double-click the
icon.
Or click Start, point and click on Programs > Magellan CCS Navigator [VersionNo.].
VersionNo. represents the Magellan CCS Navigator software version number.

 If you are logging on as a User, enter your assigned user name. (You do not need to
 If you are logging on as an Administrator user, type Administrator.
By default, a new Magellan CCS Navigator installation has no password. However, if you are
upgrading from Magellan CCS Navigator 1.0, the default password is Leitch.
4 Click Log On.
For more information on administrative and log-in permissions, see your Magellan CCS
Navigator: Advanced Graphical Navigation Application User Manual, available on the
installation DVD as a PDF.

Magellan CCS Navigator has two operational modes, as described in Chapter Four of your
accompanying Magellan CCS Navigator: Advanced Graphical Navigation Application User
Guide (available as a PDF on your installation DVD). Page creation requires Magellan CCS
Navigator to be in Build Mode and the monitoring of the servers requires control mode.
To set Magellan CCS Navigator’s mode, from the main menu, point to File > Operational
Mode, and then click on either Build or Control.
Build mode functionality is described in Chapter 3, NEXIO Configuration With a

NAVIGATOR-NX License Key on page 9. Control mode functionality is described in
Chapter 4, NEXIO Control and Monitoring on page 25.
NexioNav 9
User Manual
3 NEXIO Configuration With a

NAVIGATOR-NX License Key
Configuration Overview
You must be in Build mode to configure Magellan CCS Navigator to control and monitor
NEXIO Servers. To set Magellan CCS Navigator’s mode, from the main menu, point to File >
Operational Mode, and then click on Build. Configuration tools include a NEXIO Server
Wizard where you will enter the IP addresses for each Server connected to the system.
Only an Administrator user on a Magellan CCS Navigator Server can create NEXIO pages.
Discovering NEXIO Servers

Magellan CCS Navigator can discover NEXIO servers as SNMP devices by providing their IPs
or their subnet. The Discovery tool detects existing NEXIO server types (including Data
storages). See Using Device Discovery on NEXIO Servers on page 9.
When you save the results of the Discovery, these NEXIO servers are added to the
Navigation tree as regular SNMP devices. See Graphical Navigational Tree on page 21.
Using Device Discovery on NEXIO Servers

When you run a discovery targeting the IP addresses of NEXIO devices, Magellan CCS
Navigator detects the various server types based on their video functionality. When you save
the results of the discovery, Magellan CCS Navigator automatically groups multiple IP
addresses under one server name.
1 If the Discovery pane is closed, open it by selecting Tools > Discovery from the main
menu.
When docked, the Discovery pane defaults to the bottom left of the Magellan CCS
Navigator screen.
10 Chapter 3
NEXIO Configuration With a NAVIGATOR-NX License Key
Figure 3-1 Discovery Pane

2 Click Options... on the Discovery pane button bar to open the Discovery Options box.
3 On the Hosts tab, select the Enable scanning of IP addresses check box, if it is not
already selected.
Figure 3-2 Start Options Section of Hosts Tab

Do not select Enable scanning of MAC addresses when discovering a NEXIO system.
4 Click Add....
The Add Hosts dialog box appears.
5 Under Select Products for Discovery, select SNMP.

Unselect any other products that may be selected.

 Select Add a Host IP and then add the IP address of a NEXIO device.
 Select Add a range of host IPs to add a group of IP addresses from a specific
subnet for your NEXIO devices, for example
172.10.20.1 to 255
172.10.30.1 to 255
7 Click Apply after adding each IP address or range of IP addresses.
This adds the IP addresses to the Hosts tab of the Discovery Options window.
NexioNav 11
User Manual

8 Set your Discovery Save options. (See Setting Discovery Save Options on page 113 of CCS
Navigator: Advanced Graphical Navigation Application for more information.)
The Discovery tool pings all IP addresses you have defined, and then logs the IP addresses
and device IDs for all responding devices in the Discovery pane’s Status box.

The button bar in the Discovery pane includes a Stop button. To halt the discovery, click
Stop. If you do not click Stop, the discovery will stop automatically when it finishes
searching the SNMP Network.
12 Chapter 3
Figure 3-5 Discovery Folder of Navigation Pane With NEXIO Devices

In Control mode, you can open Control pages for NEXIO devices by double-clicking in the
Discovery folder. The pages required for monitoring the operational parameters of
discovered servers are automatically created. You do not need to run the NEXIO wizard to
control and monitor discovered NEXIO devices.
Creating NEXIO Systems Using the Wizard

Magellan CCS Navigator’s NEXIO wizard creates a set of NEXIO monitoring/controlling
pages for a redundant or non-redundant NEXIO system. It creates nodes and their
associated pages needed to monitor the health and operational parameters of the NEXIO
systems across a LAN or WAN. Magellan CCS Navigator creates specific folders for NEXIO
device types (such as Transmission servers), and saves discovered servers according to their
types within their corresponding folders.
NexioNav 13
User Manual
You can use the Nexio wizard to manually create NEXIO server devices in the graphical
navigation tree and their associated pages based on their functionality, their motherboard
type, and their network connection setup. You can also input your NEXIO IPs, their types,
and their network dependencies.
Before creating NEXIO monitoring pages, you need to ensure that you have the NEXIO
Server license in Magellan CCS Navigator. NEXIO Wizard is enabled only for those users that
have a NAVIGATOR-NX license.
Close all Graphical Navigation pages before starting the wizard.
To create a new NEXIO system site configuration, verify that you are in Build mode (from
the main menu select File > Operational Mode > Build) and then follow these steps:
1 In the File menu, select New....
Figure 3-6 Server Tab of New Page Wizard

The Magellan CCS Navigator New Page Wizard opens.
2 Click the Server tab and select Nexio Wizard.

The box now shows the format options for the Server site configuration and includes a
preview of the suggested home page.
3 Click NEXIO Wizard and then click OK.

4 Complete each screen, following the instructions in one of the following sections:
 “Adding a Pre-Defined Server” on page 23
14 Chapter 3
 Adding Previously Undefined Servers and Switches on page 17

 Adding Storage Solutions by Polling on page 19
Click Next to proceed to the following screen.
5 When you have completed the last screen of the wizard, click Finish.
Messages will appear on the screen, and pages will appear as each screen of the Graphical
Navigation panel is created.
The Nexio wizard creates a system “home” page, various group pages (for groups where
there is more than one item), server detail pages illustrating redundant environments for
HDX and Velocity servers in MIOH setups, and connects these to control pages for all Nexio
server types integrated with Magellan CCS Navigator. To navigate these pages, see
Navigating Away From the NEXIO Home Page on page 28.
Different pages may appear when you have created a NEXIO system using the wizard. Not
all the pages will appear in every system. If, for example, you have a single transmission
server, and no other devices, then the only page that will appear is a control page for the
transmission server. If you have many transmission servers, but only one news server, then
the System “home” page will appear, and the Transmission servers group and detail pages,
in addition to the Transmission control pages. But when you click on the news server icon
on the System “home” page, the news server control page will open.
Items that do not have a control page attached are created for status monitoring only.
6 Once the Wizard has completed creating the pages, select Control Mode to verify proper
operation.
7 A dialog box appears prompting you to save pages. Click OK.
Completing the First Page of the NEXIONav Wizard

The following options are available in the first page of the NEXIONav wizard.
Table 3-1 NEXIONav System Components

Item Contents
Name NEXIO Wizard requires a NEXIO System Name to be selected; once that
has been entered, the configuration can be customized to represent your
specific equipment. The naming convention should match the existing
site configuration wherever possible.
Select If servers have already been defined or discovered, click Select to open a
browsing window. Select a server, and then click OK. All the IP addresses
belonging to that server are added to the wizard.
Pre-defined servers can be

 Discovered (see Using Device Discovery on NEXIO Servers on
page 9)
 Added from the Catalog folder (see Creating NEXIO Systems
Using the Wizard on page 12)
 Created on a previous use of the Nexio wizard (only from the Add
Groups dialog boxes in the Nexio wizard)
NexioNav 15
User Manual
Table 3-1 NEXIONav System Components

Item Contents
Components of the System
Transmission Servers  NX3601HDI
 NX3601HDX
 NX3600HDI
 NX3600HDX
 NXVolt (NX1410HDX)
Newsroom Solution Velocity servers include the following:
 NX3000VNXES
 NX3000VESX
Specialty Servers  NX2101LRS
 ICM (Ingest Control Manager)
 MOS GATEWAY
 MOS Playlist Manager
 Mirror Manager
 Instant Online
 Content Manager
 NEXIO Remote
 CIFS Server
MGX Servers  NX1000MGX Media Gateway server
 NX1010MIOH Media I/O Host
Storage Solutions n/a
Farad Storage Solutions  Farad1
 Farad G2
Ethernet Switches  Extreme Summit 200 series
 Extreme Black Diamond series
 Brocade switches
Fiber Switches  Qlogic SAN 5000 series.
SNMP settings Modifies the SNMP settings for all devices in the in the NEXIO System you
are creating.
To activate the button, select the Apply these settings for all devices
in the NEXIOSystem checkbox.
You may change individual settings later. See Configuring SNMP
Settings on page 15
Configuring You can configure SNMP settings as part of the first step of the NEXIO Wizard. These
SNMP settings propagate to all the devices within the NEXIO system, and are accessible once the
Settings system is set up by right-clicking a specific NEXIO device, choosing Properties, and then
selecting the SNMP tab. These settings should be aligned according to your network and
SNMP agent configuration.
1 Select the SNMP Settings button and change the settings as appropriate.
16 Chapter 3
Figure 3-7 SNMP Global Settings

2 Place a check beside SNMP enabled. This confirms that the server is in fact an SNMP
device, and can be status monitored.
3 Select the SNMP version, either SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c.
4 If you want to monitor the status of the device, check Status Polling.
Even when Status Polling is disabled, the device is still queried for status when starting
Magellan CCS Navigator, when switching to Control mode, and with every Refresh or
RefreshAll command.
5 Enter the name of the Read Community, if different from the default of public.
6 Enter the name of the Write Community, if different from the default of private.
7 Enter the SNMP Port for the device.
The default port is 161. The port can number can range from 0 to 65535.
8 Enter the Timeout period, in seconds.

The allowable timeout period can range from 1 to 1000 seconds.
9 Enter the Number of Retries to be allowed.

The default number of retries is 1. The number of retries can range from 1 to 1000.
10 Enter the Polling Interval, in seconds.

The default polling interval is 30 seconds. The interval can range from 1 to 65535 seconds.
11 Click OK.
Adding Items can be added in the pages of the Nexio wizard using the following methods:
Items in the
Nexio Wizard  “Adding a Pre-Defined Server” on page 23
 Adding Previously Undefined Servers and Switches on page 17
 Adding Storage Solutions by Polling on page 19
NexioNav 17
User Manual
Adding a Pre-Defined Server

Pre-defined servers can be
 discovered (see Using Device Discovery on NEXIO Servers on page 9)

 added from the Catalog folder of the Navigation pane
 created on a previous use of the Nexio wizard (only from the Add Groups dialog boxes
in the Nexio wizard)
1 If servers have already been defined or discovered, click Select to open a browsing window.
Figure 3-8 System Selection Dialog Box

2 Select a server, and then click OK.
All the IP addresses belonging to that server are added to the wizard.
Adding Previously Undefined Servers and Switches

If a server has not been discovered or added using the Navigation pane’s Catalog folder, you
can still add it using the Nexio wizard.
1 To a row to the list of servers, click the New button .

18 Chapter 3
New button
Figure 3-9 Transmission Server Name

2 To complete the row, do one of the following:
 To complete the row with pre-saved data, select an existing server from the
graphical navigation tree by clicking in the '...' button beside the server name.
 To populate the row with new data, first enter the name of the server in the name
Field, and then enter the IP address(es) of the server you just created by clicking the
“...” button.
You would normally enter more than one IP if you have redundant, backup IP addresses.
NEXIO Velocity news servers and NEXIO Transmission servers can have two IP addresses
listed, and MGX servers can have up to six.
Figure 3-10 Transmission Server Component IP

For MGX servers only, on the Server Information screen, for each row there is a second
option, Connect to IP.
NexioNav 19
User Manual
Figure 3-11 MGX Network Connections

Click in the Connect to IP field to choose the IP address of the server that corresponds to
the site layout network connection.
Highlight the Platform Type box to view the drop down menu, and then select the
server type.
This option is only available/required on Transmission servers, Newsroom solutions,
and MGX servers.
You can create as many rows as are required to describe the devices on your network.
To delete an existing server, select the row that contains the server and click the 'X' button.
3 When all servers have been entered, click Next to move to the next screen of the wizard, or
Finish if it is the last screen of the wizard.
Adding Storage Solutions by Polling

This option is only available for data enclosures and Farad cores. You must complete the
screen for MGX and Transmission servers correctly for polling to work.
1 If you want the wizard Poll command to retrieve the Enclosure Serial numbers from NEXIO
Transmission servers, check Include Transmission Servers when polling.
If this option is unchecked, the polling will address only MGX servers from the current
system setup.
2 On the data enclosures screen, press Poll.

The NEXIO Wizard will automatically poll the data enclosures via MGX servers for the Serial
Numbers and enter the value on the page.
20 Chapter 3
Figure 3-12 Farad Cores Page

Farad storages are defined by serial number of their cores, their IP addresses, and the first
logical unit number (LUN).
3 If the NEXIO Wizard is unable to detect the Data Enclosures, enter the value manually by
clicking New and typing the serial number of each enclosure.
Figure 3-13 Data Enclosure Page

4 When all storage solutions have been entered, click Next to move to the next screen of the
wizard, or Finish if it is the last screen of the wizard.
NexioNav 21
User Manual
Graphical Navigational Tree

In a server system, many nodes support different redundant paths. For instance, many of
the servers have two network interfaces, co-existing on different sub-nets. The same idea
applies to server gateways, such as MGXs. In this case however, you can have gateways
with six different network interfaces. All of this needs to be monitored independently in
Magellan CCS Navigator. In order to be monitored, nodes need to exist in the graphical
navigation tree.
Magellan CCS Navigator’s discovery tool creates nodes in the Discovery folder (see
Figure 3-5 on page 12). The NEXIO wizard creates all nodes after creating the Magellan
CCS Navigator pages (under the Network folder) every time you run it. Below is a
representation of the sub-tree created by the wizard, containing different components
(Servers, newsroom solutions, data storage, etc.).
Figure 3-14 Navigational Tree
Adding NEXIO MIB Files

All NEXIO MIB files are distributed within Magellan CCS Navigator. After installation, these
MIBs are loaded by default in the internal MIB parser to properly translate traps. Or they
may be downloaded directly from your website.
To access the SNMP Options dialog box, follow these steps:
1 In build mode, right-click on any SNMP device, and then select Properties from the menu
that appears.
2 Click on the SNMP tab.
3 Click MIB, and then click Load MIB.
22 Chapter 3
The SNMP Options dialog box displays all the MIB files that have been loaded into
Magellan CCS Navigator. When you install Magellan CCS Navigator, all the MIBs you need
to control and monitor NEXIO devices are already loaded.
Figure 3-15 SNMP Options

To load a MIB, follow these steps:
1 Copy the corresponding MIB files to the MIB subdirectory:

C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application
Data\Harris\CCS\Files\mib
2 Click SNMP on the Options menu to open the SNMP Options dialog box.
3 Click Add and then select the MIB files you want to open.
The new MIB files will show under the MIB Files to Load list with a check mark. To
temporarily disable the loading of a MIB file, clear the check mark beside its name.
4 If an error occurs when the MIB files are loaded, an alert box will show. Click OK to
acknowledge the box, then click View Log to read the description of the load errors. Either
remove the MIB files that caused the error or add any missing MIB files. See SNMP MIB
Load Errors Appear on page 314 for more information.
Servers should be running SNMP Agent 2.9.1.
Customizing Your Server Pages

You can modify or update your NEXIO system pages when the actual NEXIO setup has
changed. This can include adding items, removing items, or changing IP addresses.
NexioNav 23
User Manual
Before creating or reopening a Nexio Server page in the wizard, close all open Graphical
Navigation pages.
1 With Magellan CCS Navigator in Build mode, choose File > New from the main menu.
2 In the New Page wizard, select the Server tab, and then double-click on the Nexio
Wizard icon.
The first page of the New Page wizard opens.
3 Under What is the name of the Nexio System? click Select, choose a previously defined
NEXIO system, and then click OK.
Choose an item
at this level
Figure 3-16 System Selection Dialog Box

Back on the first page of the New Page wizard, the already defined components are
checked.
4 Check any components you want to add to the system, or check the option to change
SNMP settings.
Unchecking items will not remove their pages from the system. If you need to remove pages
from the system, use the Delete function. See Volume 2 of your Magellan CCS Navigator
User Manual for more information.
5 Click Next to progress through the pages of the wizard.

Depending on the options you checked under Components, there may be as few as one or
as many as seven more pages in the wizard. Some pages may already be populated with
data. You can edit this data to update server information. You must complete the pages
that are devoid of data. For information on modifying and/or completing pages, see
Adding Storage Solutions by Polling on page 19.
6 On the last page of the wizard, click Finish.

Using the settings you have defined, Magellan CCS Navigator creates new pages and
modifies existing pages.
24 Chapter 3
NexioNav 25
User Manual
4 NEXIO Control and

Monitoring
NAVIGATOR-NX Operation Overview

Figure 4-1 shows how Magellan CCS Navigator typically appears in Control mode.
Navigation
Graphical
Pane Interface
and/or
Control
dialog box
Diagnostic
Window
Mode Select
should be set
to Control.
Figure 4-1 Magellan CCS Navigator Interface in Control Mode

With a NAVIGATOR-NX license, after discovering NEXIO devices, when you switch Magellan
CCS Navigator to Control mode, you can immediately monitor and control those devices
using control pages. See Opening Nexio Control Pages from the Navigation Pane on
page 26.
After using the Nexio Wizard in Build mode, when you switch to Control mode, you can use
Graphical Navigation pages to control and monitor your NEXIO devices. See Opening
Nexio System Pages Using the Open Menu on page 26.
If you have just created NEXIO pages using the Nexio wizard in Build mode, (see Creating
NEXIO Systems Using the Wizard on page 12) and you switch to Control mode, the
pages will open.
26 Chapter 4
NEXIO Control and Monitoring
Opening NEXIO Pages

When operating with a NAVIGATOR-NX license key, ensure that a single setup or control is
opened at a time (no multiple pages opened). This will ensure that the operations are done
in the intended server.
In Magellan CCS Navigator, you can monitor and control as many NEXIO Systems as you
like. Every time a NEXIO system is created, the wizard creates a Home Page for the system.
You can load the last home page (for the latest NEXIO System) by clicking Home. (See
Using the Graphical Navigation Toolbar on page 27 if the Home button is not
available.)
Opening Nexio System Pages Using the Open Menu

If you close all pages, you can open an existing Graphical Navigation page by following
these steps:
1 Click the Open File icon on the toolbar, or click File on the menu bar and then select
Open.
The Open dialog box appears.
Figure 4-2 Open Dialog

2 In the Page Description column, look for items that share the name of the NEXIO system.
3 From those items, choose the item with the name NEXIO System followed by a string of
numbers in the Page Name column.
4 Click Open.
The Open dialog box contains all pages created for all Magellan CCS Navigator
Opening Nexio Control Pages from the Navigation Pane

To open a Control page, click on a device’s reference IP address in the Navigation pane. You
must be in Control mode to open Control pages.
NexioNav 27
User Manual

transmission server Control
page
You can only open Control
pages for a NEXIO data
storage device if they were
created by the NEXIO wizard
Click here to open a MGX
server Control page
Click here to open a Velocity
news server Control page
Figure 4-3 NEXIO Server Components in Navigation Pane
Navigating Within NEXIO Pages

When you use the NEXIO wizard, you create customized Magellan CCS Navigator interfaces
to control and monitor servers. (See Creating NEXIO Systems Using the Wizard on
page 12.)
The Graphical Interface displays the current NEXIO page. To navigate away from the
NEXIO home page, click on an item. You can navigate back towards the home page in the
following ways:
 Using the Graphical Navigation Toolbar on page 27

 Using Graphical Navigation Context Menus on page 28
Using the Graphical Navigation Toolbar

A toolbar appears on top of the Graphical Navigation window when Magellan CCS
Navigator is in Control mode. To show this toolbar, select the check box in the View
Options section of the Graphical Navigation Options box. The table below lists the tools
on the Graphical Navigation toolbar and their functions:
Table 4-1 Graphical Navigation Tools

Tool Function
Back Loads the previous Navigator page
Forward Reloads a Navigator page you recently loaded when you clicked Back
Zoom Allows you to magnify or shrink your view in the Graphical
Navigation window
Pan Turns the cursor into a hand; click and drag to move the page. Click
the button again to deactivate
Home Reloads the Home page
28 Chapter 4
Using Graphical Navigation Context Menus

When you right-click on the background of a Graphical Navigation window while in Control
mode, a context menu opens. The table below lists the tools on the Graphical Navigation
context menu and their functions:
Table 4-2 Graphical Navigation Tools

Tool Function
Back Loads the previous Navigator page
Forward Reloads a Navigator page you recently loaded when you clicked Back
Home Reloads the Home page
Zoom Allows you to magnify or shrink your view in the Graphical
Navigation window
Pan Turns the cursor into a hand; click and drag to move the page. Click
the button again to deactivate
Refresh Redraws the page
Reload Gets the Graphical Navigation page from the server
All fields are read-only in Control mode
Navigating Away From the NEXIO Home Page

Each time you use the Nexio wizard, you create a new series of connected pages so that you
can navigate between all the defined devices to view pages and alarms to control and
monitor. Every NEXIO System you create starts with its own Home Page. Icons on the home
page represent the main components of the system.
If there is only one device in the NEXIO system, then that device’s page will be the home
page.
Each icon on the diagram represents all the items of that type. When you click on a storage
icon, you load a page where you can choose a specific device in that group. From any other
page within the NEXIO group of pages, you can go back to the Home page by clicking in
the Home button.
If there is an alarm on any item in the group, the icon representing that group displays a
flashing red outline.
A redundant NEXIO system may appear as in Table 4-4.

NexioNav 29
User Manual
Figure 4-4 Home Page

Figure 4-4 shows all the possible components for a NEXIO system. If you have not included
a device type when building the system using the wizard, that device type will not appear
on the NexioNAV home page.
An administrator user can customize the home page. See Customizing Your Server
Pages on page 22.
When you click on the Transmission Server icon, if there is more than one of that type of
server, a Group Server page appears.
30 Chapter 4
Network
connection
Server
Figure 4-5 Group (Server/Velocity/MGXs) Page

The Group page groups all servers of a type. The icon representing a server displays a
flashing red outline when there is an alarm on that server.
Click a specific server to load a Detailed Server page.
The Detailed Server page does not appear when a server has just one IP address (as in a
non-redundant system).
NexioNav 31
User Manual
Figure 4-6 Detailed (Server/Velocity/MGXs) Page

The Detailed page shows the detailed configuration of the servers (or Velocities, MGXs,
etc.). When a server is in an alarm state, the icon representing that server displays a flashing
red outline.
Click a device to see specific data for a specific device. Data is available for the following
types of Devices:
 Controlling and Monitoring Transmission Servers on page 32

 Controlling and Monitoring MGX Servers on page 37
Using Control Dialog Boxes for Devices

You can reach a Control dialog box for a device by selecting that device in a Detailed Server
page in a nexio system in the Graphical Navigation pane, or by clicking on the device in the
Navigation pane. The following NEXIO devices have Control dialog boxes:
 Controlling and Monitoring Transmission Servers on page 32

 Controlling and Monitoring MGX Servers on page 37
32 Chapter 4
Controlling and Monitoring Transmission Servers

The IP address of the server being monitored appears in the top center of the page (i.e.
IP:172.10.20.12). If the IP address shows <Unknown>, no server was selected. Return to
the detailed page or the Home page and select a server to monitor/control.
Figure 4-7. Transmission Servers Monitor Control Dialog Box (NX1410HDX Server Shown)
NexioNav 33
User Manual
Figure 4-8. Transmission Servers Monitor Control Dialog Box (NX3601HDX Server Shown)
The Setup section of the screen displays the current server settings, which can be
reconfigured as described in Table 4-3:
Table 4-3 Setup Options

Section Option Settings
Voltages
Depending on the specific Current Displays the current status for that item.
model of server, voltages
Alarm Low Limit Enter the low threshold for the voltage. If the voltage
listed may vary.
dips below this value, an alarm is generated.
Alarm High Limit Enter the high threshold for the voltage. If the voltage
exceeds this value, an alarm is generated.
System Drive (Percentage Low Limit Enter the threshold for the low limit.
of low drive space used)
High Limit Enter the threshold for the high limit.
Fans
Depending on the specific Current Displays the current speed of the fan.
model of server, fans listed
Low Limit Enter the low speed threshold for the CPU Fan. If the
may vary.
CPU Fan speed dips below this value, an alarm is
generated.
34 Chapter 4
Table 4-3 Setup Options (Continued)

CPU Usage % Percentage of CPU use over 5 minutes.
Memory Usage % Percentage of memory use over 5 minutes.
Logical Drive Setup
 DISK READ Critical Threshold Sets the high and low threshold alerts.
 DISK WRITE If you set the critical threshold to 2% and the Warning
Threshold to 5%, you will get a warning alert when the
 TOTAL LIPS
drive capacity reaches 5% remaining and a critical alert
 Drive 1 Warning Threshold
when the drive capacity reaches 2% remaining.
 Drive 2
Status (Does Not Appear for All Server Models)
 SD Channels Indicates how many channels of each type are
 HD Channels available.
 Proxy Channels
 Genlock Resolution Indicates where genlock data comes from, and Genlock
 Genlock Source quality.
 PL Realtime Version
 PL Realtime State
Network Table Displays Ethernet data, including speed and data port.
In the Status and Motherboard sections of the screen, you can review version data and
other un-configurable information.
Configuring Magellan CCS Navigator as an Agent to Send Traps to

a Receiver
Magellan CCS Navigator can set NEXIO server trap destination IPs. The server can send traps
to up to five Trap IP addresses for monitoring purposes.
Figure 4-9 Configuring to Send Traps to a Receiver

To add a trap address:
1 Enter the digit that will indicate the trap (1 for the first address, 2 for the second address,
and so on) in the Add trap IP Address field.
2 Following the digit that indicates the trap address number, enter a space, and then enter
the IP address of the address where you would like traps sent.
If you are adding more than one IP address for a single index, separate them by a space.
You can add up to six IP addresses per trap IP address.
3 Press ENTER on your keyboard, and then click Refresh.

The Trap IP Addresses field updates to display the addresses that traps are sent to. Each
trap is separated by | spacer bars.
NexioNav 35
User Manual
If a trap address already exists and you need to add one or more IP addresses to that trap
address, you must re-enter the entire string of IP addresses.
To delete a trap address:
1 In the Delete String # field, enter the digit that indicates the IP address you want to delete.
2 Press ENTER on your keyboard, and then click Refresh.
The Trap IP Addresses field updates to remove the selected IP address.
Control Options
The Control Options section of the screen offers the ability to restart/reboot/stop SNMP
services, NXOS, and LLM. It also offers the ability to configure SNMP managers to receive
traps.
Servers should be running SNMP Agent 2.9.1.
Table 4-4 Server Control Options

Menu Item Availability Description
Restart SNMP All Restarts the SNMP agent. This button may be used when
you add IP addresses or update the firmware version on
the server.
Start NXOS+LLM Transmission servers only Starts the NXOS and LLM (server systems only) on the
selected system.
Start LLM All Starts the LLM (low-level module) application on the
selected system.
Stop NXOS+LLM Transmission servers only Stops the NXOS and LLM (server systems only) on the
selected system.
Refresh All Triggers a poll to refresh data from the server.
Reboot All Shuts down and restarts the selected system.

36 Chapter 4
Controlling and Monitoring News Servers

Figure 4-10. News Servers Monitor Control Dialog Box

Voltages
 VCORE A Low Limit Enter the low threshold for the voltage. If the voltage dips
 VCORE B below this value, an alarm is generated.
 +3.3V
 +5V
High Limit Enter the high threshold for the voltage. If the voltage
 +12V exceeds this value, an alarm is generated.
 VBAT
Temperatures
NexioNav 37
User Manual
Table 4-5 Setup Options (Continued)

 CPU1 Temp Alarm Limit Enter the high threshold for the Temperature. If the
 CPU2 Temp Temperature exceeds this value, an alarm is generated.
 SYSTEMTemp1 Alarm Hysteresis Enter the difference between the value where the alarm
turns ON from turning OFF and the value where it turns OFF
from turning ON.
Fans
Logical Drive Setup
 DISK WRITE
If you set the critical threshold to 2% and the Warning
 TOTAL LIPS
 CHANNEL 1 DRIFT Warning Threshold
 CHANNEL 2 DRIFT when the drive capacity reaches 2% remaining.
For information about sending traps to a receiver, see Configuring Magellan CCS
Navigator as an Agent to Send Traps to a Receiver on page 34.
For information about the control buttons at the bottom of the control page, see Control
Options on page 35.
Controlling and Monitoring MGX Servers

From the Home page, click on the MGX server to view the following screen.
This screen only appears when there is more than one MGX server. When there is one MGX
server and you click on it, the MGX Monitor Control dialog box opens.
38 Chapter 4
Figure 4-11 MGX Servers Page

You can click on each of the connections below the icon for a server to monitor and control
the redundant IPs for that connection. An MGX server can have up to six redundant
connections.
Click an MGX to view the following page.

NexioNav 39
User Manual
IP:172.10.20.32). (If the IP address shows <Unknown>, no server was selected. Return to
the detailed page or the Home page and select a server to monitor/control.)
Figure 4-12. MGX Servers Monitor Control Dialog Box (NX100MGX Server is Shown)

Voltages
Depending on the specific Current Displays the current temperature
model of server, voltages
Low Limit Enter the low threshold for the voltage. If the voltage dips
listed may vary.
below this value, an alarm is generated
High Limit Enter the high threshold for the voltage. If the voltage
exceeds this value, an alarm is generated
 CPU TEMP Current Displays the current temperature
 SYSTEM High Limit Enter the high threshold for the voltage. If the voltage
40 Chapter 4

Fans
Depending on the specific Current Displays the current temperature
model of server, fans
Low Limit Enter the low threshold for the CPU Fan. If the CPU Fan
listed may vary.
speed dips below this value, an alarm is generated
Logical Drive Setup
 DISK WRITE If you set the critical threshold to 2% and the Warning
 TOTAL LIPS
 DRIVE 1 Warning Threshold
when the drive capacity reaches 2% remaining.
 DRIVE 2
The Network Table (if present) details information about the Ethernet connection, including
its speed and port data.
Options on page 35.
NexioNav 41
User Manual
Controlling and Monitoring Speciality Servers

Figure 4-13. Transmission Server Monitor Control Dialog Box
Table 4-7 Transmission Server Monitor Control Setup Options

Voltages
 CPU Volts Current Displays the current status for that item
 +3.3Volts
 +12 Volts Alarm Low Limit Enter the low threshold for the voltage. If the voltage dips
 +5 Volts below this value, an alarm is generated
 VBAT
Alarm High Limit Enter the high threshold for the voltage. If the voltage
 CPU temp
 System
42 Chapter 4
Table 4-7 Transmission Server Monitor Control Setup Options (Continued)

Fans
 Fan 1 Current Displays the current speed of the fan.
 Fan 2
 Fan 3 Low Limit Enter the low speed threshold for the CPU Fan. If the CPU
 Fan 4 Fan speed dips below this value, an alarm is generated
 Fan 5
Logical Drive Setup
 DISK WRITE
If you set the critical threshold to 2% and the Warning
 TOTAL LIPS
 Drive 1 Warning Threshold
 Drive 2 when the drive capacity reaches 2% remaining.
Options on page 35.
NexioNav 43
User Manual
Controlling and Monitoring Farad Storage Devices

When you click on a Farad Storage device within a Navigator page, a page for Farad Cores
opens. Depending on the number of enclosures, the page displays a different number of
Cores. Figure 4-14 displays a Farad storage system with two cores, but your system may
have one or more.
Click to load the StorView address.

page for the device at that IP
Figure 4-14. Farad Core Storage Control Dialog Box
When you click thebutton to the right of an IP address in this page, you open the
HTTP-based StorView application. This application can be run in either Build or Control
mode. For a complete description of the StorView tools, see your Farad documentation.
When a Farad core has an alarm, the LUN storage graphic on this page displays a red or
yellow alarm border. To find the source of the alarm, use the StorView tools.
44 Chapter 4
Viewing Data Storage Devices

Click Storage in the NEXIO Servers home page to view the Data Storage page as shown
below.
Individual drive
with an alarm
Drive enclosure
(contains 16
drives)
Figure 4-15. MGX—Storage Page
The Storage page displays a graphical representation of each of the drive enclosures
connected to the system. Each drive enclosure may multiple drives. You can click on
individual drives within the enclosure to see them highlighted in the Navigation pane. A
highlighted drive indicates a warning (yellow) or a critical (red) condition.
If you are in the Monitor tab in the Diagnostic window, you can view the alarms for all of
the Storage drives monitored by MGX or transmission servers in the system.
If you are in the Selected tab in the Diagnostic window, you can view the alarms for the
highlighted Storage drive that you have selected.
NexioNav 45
User Manual
Monitoring Network Status
Figure 4-16 Navigation Pane

The Navigation Pane has the following columns:
 Navigation Tree: Indicates the type of server and monitors the various server gateways
and network interfaces.
 Alarm: Indicates which node has an alarm. A red icon indicates a critical alarm and a
yellow icon indicates a warning. Note that for any type of alarm, a notification is sent.
Orange color represents an acknowledged alarm.
 Status: Indicates the status of the node- either active or inactive.
 Monitor: This column is only used in router configurations. It is not applicable in SNMP.
 Filter: Select this checkbox if you don’t want an alarm sent. The alarm will still be
recorded and viewable in the Diagnostic window (Logged tab only), but will not be
sent/emailed.
46 Chapter 4
Monitoring In Control mode, the Diagnostics tool monitors the network for unusual events and
Alarm operating conditions. The Diagnostics tool reports alarms when variations occur. (Refer to
Conditions Magellan CCS Navigator User Manual Volume 1 for more information on the Diagnostics
tool.)
Figure 4-17 Diagnostic Window

The trap monitoring functionality required by the Magellan CCS Navigator application is
built using the Magellan CCS Navigator SNMP trap monitoring capabilities.
Below is a list of notifications that are monitored by Magellan CCS Navigator:
Table 4-8 NEXIO Notifications

System(s) Failure Type
Storage If the available space on the video/audio storage systems for data falls below a
pre-configured level as specified by the customer
NXA1000MGX A failed media Gateway server (notification of failover to secondary gateway server)
NX3600, A failed connection of a media client (HDX) to a media Gateway server
NX3601,
NXA1000MGX
NX3600, NX3601, A failed connection of a media client (Velocity and Mac Pro-CIFS) to a media Gateway
NXA1000MGX server
for VelocityNX
and CIFS
NX3600, NX3601, A broken logical disk—LLM Alerts

NXA1000MGX
NX3600, NX3601 Power supply failure (specific to chassis, not to the power supply)
NXA1000MGX,
ICM, NMG
NX3600, NX3601, SATA/System drive failure
NXA1000MGX,
ICM, NMG
NX3600, NX3601, LLM failure
NXA1000MGX
NX3600, NX3601, Read/write/FC errors
NXA1000MGX
NX3600, NX3601, LIP events— Logged
NXA1000MGX
VelocityESX Power supply failure (specific to chassis, not to the power supply)
VelocityESX SATA/System drive failure
VelocityESX LLM failure
VelocityESX Read/write/FC errors
NexioNav 47
User Manual
Table 4-8 NEXIO Notifications (Continued)

System(s) Failure Type
VelocityESX LIP events—Logged
System Drives A system drive failure on any system component that is critical to normal system
production (exception: ICM—Ingest Control Manager)
All Loss of network connection on critical system components- Pilot Manager will
periodically poll key system components and report loss/failure of response from a
platform. This will be implemented for Server I/O frames (NX3600HDX and
NX4000TXS), VelocityESX platforms, NEXIO ICM, MOS and Media Gateway Servers,
network and fibre channel switches, and media disk arrays.
All that use FC Loss of Fibre Channel connectivity on any component
1644 Power supply failure
SBOD Failed storage array drive
SBOD Failed storage array controller
SBOD Failed storage array power supply
RAID Intrinsic mirroring RAID Tool—Provides notification via NEXIO Pilot in the event any
critical errors are detected (e.g., reporting disparities on both the primary and mirrored
RAID)
Handling Server Notifications

The NAVIGATOR-NX license provides the ability to handle server notifications. More
specifically:
 A trap (warning or critical) state generated from the servers is logged onto the
Diagnostic window and the Navigation tree displays a red or yellow icon.
 An email message is sent to various recipients (if configured).
 The trap notification is displayed in the Diagnostic window (Selected tab) when
selecting the device on the Navigation tree or in the Navigator page that has the device.
 Right-clicking in the log entry (trap) in the Diagnostic window brings a short-cut menu
(see Figure 4-18 below).
 Selecting the 'Local Acknowledge' option locally acknowledges the selected trap.
Selecting 'Ignore' removes the trap from the 'Selected' device.
 In the case of acknowledgement, an email is sent to report that the alarm has been
acknowledged.
 The Diagnostic window (log entry) and Navigator page with the device on it is
highlighted in 'orange' color (color that indicates “acknowledged”). If there is another
critical notification for the device, the color remains red (highest alarm level). While the
alarm condition exists, no further emails are sent.
 If an operator does not acknowledge the alarm, the log entry in the Diagnostic
window and the Navigator page stays highlighted at the original “warning” (yellow) or
“critical” (red).
 Upon the alarm condition being cleared (level 0), the clearing trap is logged (Log tab),
the highlight on the original trap log entry and GUI page is removed, and an email is
sent announcing the alarm as being cleared. No operator action is necessary with
No further traps are logged nor emails sent until the condition occurs again.
48 Chapter 4
Figure 4-18 Acknowledgement Menu

If the application is shut-down and the trap condition that was once acknowledged is
received again, a new email is sent. Clearing of traps from 3rd party devices is directly
related to the vendor implementation. Some vendors will send a “clear” trap level; others
will stop sending the trap after the condition is cleared. Magellan CCS Navigator can
automatically clear the alarm once the trap notification stops coming.
Email Handling for Notifications

When email notification is configured, Magellan CCS Navigator sends emails in the
following circumstances:
 When the condition starts

 When the condition is acknowledged
 When the condition is cleared
No email is sent when alarms are ignored. In failure conditions where multiple traps are
created (like an MGX failure), multiple traps are logged and a email is sent for each trap.
Setting E-Mail Notification of Alarms

The network must have an enabled e-mail messaging service for the E-mail Forwarding
Service to work. If the network does not have e-mail support, then no e-mails will reach
their destinations.
To set the options on the E-mail Forwarding Service tab of the Diagnostics Options
2 Select the E-mail Forwarding Service tab.
NexioNav 49
User Manual
Figure 4-19 Diagnostic Options E-mail Forwarding Service Tab

You can enable or disable the e-mail notification, add or remove e-mail recipients, and set
the severity levels for the generation of alarms on the E-mail Forwarding Service tab.
3 Select the E-mail Forwarding Service check box to enable the CCS application to send
e-mail notifications of resource errors.
4 In the Send an E-mail for section, select the check box beside each error type for which
you want to receive e-mail notification. Clear the check box beside each error type for
which you do not want e-mail notification.
The five error types are Critical, Warning, Information, Acknowledged, and Error Level
Change.
5 In the E-mail Send Options section, click the arrow and select the method in which you
want to send the e-mail.
Choose from MAPI (your Outlook mail profile settings) or SMTP (configured server).
6 Click Properties.
Depending on the e-mail sending method chosen in step 5, either the MAPI Mail
Properties or SMTP Properties dialog box opens.
7 To configure the settings in the MAPI Mail Properties dialog box, follow these steps:
a Click the arrow from the Profile Name box, and then select a profile name from the
list.
b If the required name is not in the list, click Add to add a new profile name to the list.
The Add Profile Name box opens.
c Type a sender profile name in the Add Profile Name box, and then click OK.
8 To configure the settings in the SMTP Properties dialog box, follow these steps:
a Specify the SMTP server name, port number, and reply e-mail addresses in the
corresponding fields.
b If your SMTP server requires authentication in order to send external e-mail, complete
the Authentication section of this dialog box.
9 In the E-mail Addresses of Recipients section, click Add... to show the Add Recipient
box.
10 Type the e-mail address of a proposed error notification recipient in the box, and then click
OK.
This closes the Add Recipient box and lists the new e-mail recipient in the E-mail
Addresses of Recipients box.
50 Chapter 4
11 Repeat steps 6 and 7 to enter the e-mail addresses of other proposed recipients of
notification e-mails.
51
Index
A Installation 6
Interfaces 27
Adding NEXIO MIB Files 21
Introduction 1
Administrator 8, 9
Alarm High Limit 33, 36, 39, 41
Alarm Limit 37 L
Alarm Low Limit 33, 36, 39, 41 Licensing Mechanism 21
Limitations 45
C
Capacity 45 M
Creating NEXIO Nodes 21 MGX 37
Monitor 5
D Motherboard
Fans 33, 36, 39, 41
Device ID
Motherboard Tab
discovering 11
Temperatures 37
Diagnostics Window 46
Voltage Selections 33, 36, 39, 41
Voltages 33, 36, 39, 41
E
Editing Your Page 21 N
E-mail forwarding service 48
Navigation Pane 27
Email Handling for Notifications 48
Navigational Tree 21
Navigator installation 7
F NEXIO Devices 21
Features 2 Notifications 46
G O
Graphical Interface 46 Operating system, required 5
H R
Handling Server Notifications 47 Requirements, system 5
Hardware, required 5
HDX S
Detailed Server page 29
SNMP
Group Server page 29
enabling 16
Menu Selections 35
status monitoring 16
Software, required 5
I Status Monitor 16
Info Tab System requirements 5
System Status 33, 36, 39, 41
52 Index
T U
Touch screen monitor 5 Uninstalling software 7
Volume 5: NAVIGATOR‐INT Initial Startup Guide
Edition A
175‐100033‐00
Trademarks
Contact Information
iii
Contents
Publication Information .................................................................................................ii

Trademarks .....................................................................................................................ii
Support Contact Information ........................................................................................ii
Preface ..........................................................................................................................v
Manual Information .......................................................................................................v
Purpose ......................................................................................................................v
Audience ....................................................................................................................v
Writing Conventions ..................................................................................................... vi
Obtaining the User Manuals ........................................................................................ vi
Chapter 1 Introduction to InterfaceNAV.......................................................................... 1

NAVIGATOR-INT Overview ........................................................................................... 1
Chapter 2 Installation and Logging On............................................................................. 3

Required Hardware, Operating System and Software ............................................... 3
Hardware Requirements ............................................................................................ 4
Installing Navigator ...................................................................................................... 4
Activating a NAVIGATOR-INT License .......................................................................... 5
Removing Navigator Software .................................................................................... 6
Chapter 3 Configuration Using NAVIGATOR-INT .......................................................... 7

Configuration Overview ............................................................................................... 7
Selecting Devices .......................................................................................................... 7
Discovering Devices ................................................................................................... 8
Adding MIBs for SNMP Devices .................................................................................. 9
Creating Off-Line Devices ........................................................................................ 10
Configuring Favorites ................................................................................................. 11
Selecting Device Favorites ........................................................................................ 11
SNMP Trap Configuration ........................................................................................ 13
iv :
:
Creating New Trap Rules .......................................................................................... 16

Configuring Favorites for an SNMP Device ............................................................... 19
Adding Missing MIBs ............................................................................................... 20
Creating Customized Pages ....................................................................................... 21
Editing the Elements of a Parameter or Alarm .......................................................... 22
Editing the Rules on a Control .................................................................................. 23
Custom Control Views ................................................................................................ 28
Chapter 4 Using Customized Pages ................................................................................... 31

Overview ...................................................................................................................... 31
Displaying Customized Pages .................................................................................... 31
Parameter Controls ...................................................................................................... 32
Appendix A Software User License and Warranty Agreement................................. 35

License ..................................................................................................................... 35
Limited Software Warranty ...................................................................................... 35
NET SNMP License ................................................................................................... 36
Index ........................................................................................................................... 41
v
Preface
Manual Information
Purpose NAVIGATOR-INT Initial Startup Guide is a companion guide to CCS Navigator: Advanced
Graphical Navigation Application.
This manual outlines how to get started using tools that go with the NAVIGATOR-INT
license. For information on the basic tools and interface of CCS Navigator, please refer to the
CCS Navigator: Advanced Graphical Navigation Application user manual, which is included
as a PDF on your installation DVD.
Audience This manual is written for engineers, technicians, and operators responsible for configuring
and using the NAVIGATOR-INT license tools.
Revision
History
A Navigator 4.4 and higher with November 2008
NAVIGATOR-INT license key
vi Preface
Writing Conventions

Bold Indicates dialog box, property sheet, field, button,
check box, list box, combo box, menu, submenu,
window, list, and selection names
> Indicates the direction of navigation through a
hierarchy of menus and windows
elsewhere

Application including CCS Navigator, IconMasterNav, CCS Pilot,
and CCS CoPilot
Obtaining The documentation for your product is included in your Documentation and Product
the User electronic document integrated into the software. While working in the application, you
Manuals can open the Online Help and print out individual topics.
1
1 Introduction to InterfaceNAV
NAVIGATOR-INT Overview
When your Magellan CCS Navigator installation includes a NAVIGATOR-SRV or
NAVIGATOR-SNMP license, in Build mode you can create pages and panels that open control
dialog boxes for various products. Then, in Control mode, you can open those pages and
control devices, view feedback parameters, and receive alarms.
When you combine a NAVIGATOR-INT license with either a NAVIGATOR-SRV or

NAVIGATOR-SNMP license, you can place individual parameters and alarms from various
devices to create customized pages. These pages can display just the parameters that your
facility uses, or contain just the parameters that a specific operator or group of operators
can access. You can put alarms beside the controls that correct them, place feedback
parameters beside the controls that they provide feedback for, and combine controls and
feedback for different devices on the same page.
In order to operate pages that have been created using these tools, only a NAVIGATOR-CLI
license is required. For more information on acquiring and adding licenses to your Magellan
CCS Navigator installation, see Activating a NAVIGATOR-INT License on page 5.
2 Chapter 1
Introduction to InterfaceNAV
Figure 1-1. Workspace With Parametric Controls in Build mode
The NAVIGATOR-INT Startup Guide will get you started with the tools to create customized
pages. Topics covered include:
 Installing Magellan CCS Navigator and adding the NAVIGATOR-INT license (see
Installing Magellan CCS Navigator on page 4)
 Configuring devices to provide parameter and alarm favorites (see Configuring
Favorites on page 11)
 Building pages that contain individual parameters and alarms from Imagine
Communications or third-party devices (see Creating Customized Pages on page 21)
 Operating pages (see Using Customized Pages on page 31)
If you have purchased NAVIGATOR-INT as an add-on license, you receive only the
NAVIGATOR-INT Initial Startup Guide. The full Magellan CCS Navigator manual is available
on the Magellan CCS Navigator installation DVD as a PDF.
A NAVIGATOR-INT license alone will not provide all the features of Magellan CCS Navigator.
To use some features described in the Magellan CCS Navigator manual, you must purchase
separate Magellan CCS Navigator licenses after the 30-day trial period. See Activating a
NAVIGATOR-INT License on page 5 for more information.
3
2 Installation and Logging On

Before installing any software, take the time to ensure you have the necessary hardware and
prerequisite software. See Required Hardware, Operating System and Software on
page 3.
When you install the Magellan CCS Navigator software, it starts with a 30-day trial license of
all features of Magellan CCS Navigator, including NAVIGATOR-INT. Basic installation
instructions are provided in the section Installing Magellan CCS Navigator on page 4. For
more information, see the Installation chapter of your Magellan CCS Navigator User Manual
(available as a PDF on your installation DVD).
When the trial period runs out, you must purchase both a NAVIGATOR-INT and either a
NAVIGATOR-SRV license or a NAVIGATOR-SNMP license. To add your permanent
NAVIGATOR-INT and other licenses, see Activating a NAVIGATOR-INT License on page 5.

To create pages and panels using NAVIGATOR-INT, you will need to meet the
NAVIGATOR-SRV hardware and third-party software requirements. To operate pages and
panels that include elements created using NAVIGATOR-INT, only the NAVIGATOR-CLI
system requirements need to be met.
For a complete list of requirements, see the “Installation” chapter of your accompanying
Magellan CCS Navigator: Advanced Graphical Navigation Application User Manual.
4 Chapter 2
:
Install the NAVIGATOR-INT software on a PC that meets or exceeds the following hardware
requirements:
Table 2-1 System Requirements for Magellan CCS Navigator Clients and Servers
Client Server
Minimum Supported Minimum Supported
Requirements Requirements
3 GHz Pentium IV Intel Core i5 3.20 GHz
Processor
processor
8 GB DRAM 16 GB DRAM or better
System Memory
(16 GB recommended)
100-BaseT 10/100/1000 Gigabit Ethernet
Network Connection
Connection
HDD Drive 20 GB 160 GB Hard Disk Drive
Available Disk Space 1 GB 5 GB
Optical Drive DVD-ROM Drive DVD-ROM Drive
Super VGA supporting  Video graphic module with
1152 × 864 (19-inch 256MB DDR3 SDRAM
recommended) supporting up to a minimum
Display 1920x1080 resolutions
 LCD Monitor supporting up to
1920x1080 resolution
Do not run Magellan CCS Navigator on a system that is running or hosting other
(non-Magellan CCS Navigator) applications or servers. If NAVIGATOR-SRV is installed
remotely, systems running NAVIGATOR-CLI should connect to the NAVIGATOR-SRV system
through VPN, which offers a layer of protection.
Installing Magellan CCS Navigator



the installation may quit. All the required software is included on the Magellan CCS
InterfaceNav 5
Activating a NAVIGATOR-INT License

The NAVIGATOR-INT license requires a NAVIGATOR-SRV license or NAVIGATOR-SNMP
license to operate, and can work on a system that also has a NAVIGATOR-NX license. The
NAVIGATOR-INT license cannot be installed on the same system as an ICONM-SCP license.
The NAVIGATOR-INT license is required to layout and build graphical navigation pages that
contain individual controls and feedback objects from various devices. Only a
NAVIGATOR-CLI license is required to operate and monitor these pages.
NAVIGATOR-INT cannot be installed in the same system as Pilot or CoPilot.
When you run an installation from the Magellan CCS Navigator DVD, by default all licenses
will be active with a 30-day trial period. You must contact Customer Service in order to
activate your NAVIGATOR-INT license after that time.
To use the features of a NAVIGATOR-INT license, you must also have a NAVIGATOR-SRV or
NAVIGATOR-SNMP license. Contact your Sales representative.
When a NAVIGATOR-INT license is added to a system that already contains a

NAVIGATOR-SRV or NAVIGATOR-SNMP license, the Parameters option in the Tools menu
becomes available when Magellan CCS Navigator is in Build mode.
To activate a NAVIGATOR-INT license, you must be logged onto Magellan CCS Navigator as
an administrator.
A dialog box opens:

PDF license request
form.
Figure 2-1 License Dialog Box

2 Provide the serial number from the License dialog box to your Sales representative.
 By phone. Contact your Sales representative.

clicking License Form. The form includes information about where the form
should be sent. Acrobat Reader is required.
6 Chapter 2
:
You should restart Magellan CCS Navigator for the license changes to take effect.
Removing Magellan CCS Navigator Software

Only an Administrator user can properly and entirely remove the Magellan CCS Navigator
software.
For information on removing the Magellan CCS Navigator software, please refer to your
Magellan CCS Navigator: Advanced Graphical Navigation Application User Manual.
7
3 Configuration Using
NAVIGATOR-INT
Configuration Overview
Configuration using NAVIGATOR-INT tools involves creating pages and panels that include
parameters and alarms from SNMP and CCS-P devices. All configuration is done in Magellan
CCS Navigator’s Build mode.
Only an Administrator user on a system equipped with a NAVIGATOR-SRV or

NAVIGATOR-SNMP license can create NAVIGATOR-INT pages.
You can add parameters and alarms from any Imagine Communications or third-party device
(depending on the licenses you have installed) but first that device must be made available
to Magellan CCS Navigator.
 If devices are available, you can discover them. See Discovering Devices on page 8
and Configuring Favorites for an SNMP Device on page 19.
 If devices are not available, because they are being retasked from another purpose or
are on a different network, you can create these devices as off-line devices and then
connect later when the devices are available. See Creating Off-Line Devices on
page 10.
If you will be working a great deal with a particular device or device type, you can create
favorites for that device. You can then copy and paste favorites from one device to another
like device. This is particularly useful with products like the X75 that have a large number of
parameters and alarms. You are not required to select favorites. If you do not select favorites
for a device, you will always have the full range of parameters and alarms to choose from for
that device.
To add parameters and alarms to pages and panels, you drag and drop them from the
Parameters pane. For a complete description of how to create pages and panels, see Volume
2 of your Magellan CCS Navigator User Manual.
Selecting Before you can create custom pages with control and monitor options, you need to define
the devices that will be controlled and monitored. The most direct method of defining these
Devices devices is by discovering them. After discovery, the devices appear in the Navigation pane.
When you click on a device that is connected and online, the Parameters pane displays the
alarms and parameters for that device. See Discovering Devices on page 8.
If the device is off-line or not available (perhaps because it is in a mobile truck), you can
create that device off-line. See Creating Off-Line Devices on page 10.
8 Chapter 3
Configuration Using NAVIGATOR-INT
Discovering You can discover both Imagine Communications and third-party devices. You must be in
Devices Build mode to discover devices. Normally, you need to connect to devices that are on the
same Ethernet subnet, or connect directly using a cross-over cable. For more information on
connecting and discovering devices, see “CCS Device Discovery” on page 101 of Volume 1
of your Magellan CCS Navigator User Manual.
1 Click Options on the Discovery pane.

The Discovery Options dialog box appears.

2 On the Hosts tab, select Enable scanning of IP addresses.
3 Click Add.
The Add Host dialog box appears.
4 Under Add a Host IP, enter the IP address of a device that is available for discovery.
Under Select Products for Discovery, select the types of devices to discover at that IP
address.
5 Click OK to confirm the IP address.
The Add Host process can be repeated more than once, so you can discover multiple IP
addresses in one discovery session.
6 On the Hosts tab of the Discovery Options dialog box, make sure checks appear beside
the IP addresses of devices you want to discover.
7 Click OK.
8 Click Start on the Discovery pane’s button bar.
The Discovery tool will ping all IP addresses on the network, and then log the IP addresses
and device IDs for all responding devices in the Status box of the Discovery pane.
InterfaceNav 9

If you do not click Stop, the discovery stops automatically when it finishes searching the
Network.
9 Click Save to transfer the discovery results to the Discovery folder in the Navigation
pane.
If your device is CCS-P compliant, and that is how you will be controlling and monitoring it,
you can now create pages. See Creating Customized Pages on page 21. If the device will
be controlled and monitored using SNMP, see Adding MIBs for SNMP Devices on page 9.
Adding MIBs for SNMP Devices

After discovering an SNMP device using Magellan CCS Navigator, you need to add the MIBs
for that device.
To use SNMP with Magellan CCS Navigator, you must have a NAVIGATOR-SNMP license
key.
1 Save the MIBs for your device in the MIB directory.

The data folder can be found by clicking Start > Programs > Navigator > Navigator
Data Folder > Open Files > Mib.
2 In the Navigation pane, right-click on the device and select Properties.

3 On the SNMP tab, click MIB.
The SNMP MIB Browser dialog box opens.
4 Browse to the node on the tree that corresponds to the selected device.
10 Chapter 3
Figure 3-3 SNMP MIB Browser Dialog Box

5 If the MIB for your device does not appear, click Load MIB, and in the SNMP Options
dialog box, select the MIB you want to associate with this device.

If the MIB does not appear in the SNMP Options dialog box, click Add. In the Open dialog
box, choose MIBs and then click OK.
6 Click OK to close the SNMP Options dialog box.
Creating If the devices for which you want to create pages and panels are not available, you can add
Off-Line elements from those devices by creating those devices as off-line devices. The specific
Devices devices must be added to the Network or Discovery folder of the Navigation pane.
1 While Magellan CCS Navigator is in Build mode, browse to the unavailable device in the
Catalog folder of the Navigation pane.
InterfaceNav 11
2 Right-click the specific device, and then choose Copy from the shortcut menu.
3 Right-click in the Network folder, and then choose Paste from the shortcut menu.
You must add the Device ID information for these devices when the off-line devices are
available. See Updating Device IDs From Off-Line Devices Using Information From
On-Line Devices on page 11 and Configuring Favorites on page 11 for more
information.
Updating Device IDs From Off-Line Devices Using Information

From On-Line Devices
If you add elements to a page that are from an off-line device, you must update the Device
ID information for that device using the on-line device (after discovering it) in order to
render the page or panel fully functional in Control mode.
1 Discover the device that you want to monitor/control (if it has not been discovered already),
and then save the results of your discovery.
Follow the steps outlined in Discovering Devices on page 8.
2 Right-click on the device, and then choose Properties from the context menu.
3 On the Device tab of the Properties dialog box, click Copy.
4 Right-click on the identical device that has been copied from the Catalog folder, and then
choose Properties from the context menu.
5 On the Device tab, click Paste.
Parameters on an off-line device may not perfectly match those on the actual device. The
device catalog information stored in NAVIGATOR-INT may be older or newer than that
stored on the actual device. If the parameter lists do not match, some assigned parameters
may not be available in the favorites list.
For best results, compare your panels to the actual device before using them.
If you have the IP address of a device without one in the Navigation pane, you can update
it. See “Editing an IP Address” on page 138 of Volume 1.
Configuring Favorites
Some devices have hundreds of parameters and alarms. Whether a device is CCS-P or
SNMP-enabled, use the Favorites feature to limit the options in the Parameters panel.
Device favorites are the elements that you expect to control and monitor most frequently.
For information on configuring favorites for a control panel, see “Configuring Favorites for a
Device” on page 309. You can copy and paste favorites from the Parameters panel to with
control panels by using the right-click menu in the Navigation pane.
Selecting Device Favorites

When you select a device in the Navigation pane, the Parameters panel updates to display
the favorite parameters (on the Parameters tab) and alarms (on the Alarms tab) for that
device. If favorites for a device are not configured, then the two tabs will display all the
parameters and alarms for that device.
12 Chapter 3
Displays parameters
and alarms for the
selected device
Figure 3-5 Parameters Panel

To configure favorites for a device:
1 Click Favorites in the top right corner of the Parameters panel.

The Favorites dialog box opens. This dialog box has two tabs: Parameters and Alarms.
Figure 3-6 Favorites Dialog for a Typical Device

2 Select each element that you would like to appear in the device’s Favorites list. By default,
no parameters or alarms are selected.
3 (Optional) Change the name by which a selected parameter appears by clicking in its field in
the Alias column. Use the Delete key to remove the default or old alias and type your new
parameter name.
You can search by an alarm alias in alarm log databases.
language, your keyboard is automatically switched to English for data entry in this field. If
occur.
InterfaceNav 13

The Parameters panel updates to display just the parameters and alarms that have been
selected.
To sort the favorites, click on a column header.
For advanced configuration of favorites for SNMP devices only, see Configuring Favorites
for an SNMP Device on page 19.
Refreshing Parameters
When you click on a device in the Navigation pane, Magellan CCS Navigator polls that
device and displays the parameters and alarms (if available) in the Parameters pane.
Normally this data stays cached in the memory until you close Magellan CCS Navigator.
If you change the device in some way, perhaps by installing new firmware or updating the
license key options on the device, click Refresh on the Parameters pane to read the list of
parameters from the device, irrespective of the version in the database, or the data that
Magellan CCS Navigator has cached.
This new data remains cached in memory until the application is shut down, or until
Refresh is clicked again. If the refresh button is clicked for a different device instance that is
of the same product ID, the parameters are retrieved from that specific device. When
Magellan CCS Navigator closes, the cached data is not saved, even if different (provided
that the version is the same as the one in the Database).
Copying Favorites Between Devices

create or edit Favorites for a device.
You can copy the favorites list from one device to another identical unit (for example, from
one X75 to another).
To copy and paste control panel display favorites for a device, follow these steps:
1 Right-click a device and select Copy Favorites.

2 Right-click on the second identical device and select Paste Favorites.
The parameter/alarm selection created previously will be replicated in the second device.
If the device you have chosen to paste favorites to is unsuitable -- for example, the devices
are not identical -- the Paste Favorites option will not be available.
SNMP Trap Configuration

SNMP traps are notification events issued by a managed device to the network
management station (i.e. Magellan CCS Navigator) when a significant event (not necessarily
an outage, a fault, or a security violation) occurs. A SNMP trap contains information about
the event, which might be complex in nature, combining many different bits of data into a
single message.
14 Chapter 3
A NAVIGATOR-SNMP license provides tools to interpret SNMP traps, so they can be treated,
for example, like alarm triggers and alarm clears. Within Magellan CCS Navigator, you can
group traps into a single trap group. Multiple trap groups can be used to represent a single
device, or you can have one group per device.
1 From the main menu, choose Tools > SNMP > Traps.
The SNMP Trap Configuration dialog box appears.
New Delete
Figure 3-7 SNMP Trap Configuration Dialog Box

2 Click the New button to add a row to the Groups table.
New rows are added at the bottom of the list.
To delete a row, click the Delete button. The selected row will be deleted, and all associated
data in the Trap Definitions field will be removed as well.
3 Under Group Name, enter a descriptive name for the specific device for which you are
defining traps.
The Group Type is automatically filled in as “Enterprise.”
4 Under Trap Definitions, click Add.

The Trap Definition dialog box opens.
InterfaceNav 15
Click here to find parameters that are

variables or part of a trap.
Figure 3-8 Trap Definition Dialog Box

5 Beside Trap Name, do either of the following:
 Type a name for the customized trap.
 Click MIB.
In the SNMP MIB Browser dialog box, browse to a trap. Click OK and the name of this
trap (alarm) will fill in the Trap Name field. (If you choose an invalid object, an error
message will appear.)
One or more rows will appear in the Trap Object IDs table.
6 If another trap should be associated with this trap, click Associate with existing trap and
then choose that trap from the drop-down menu.
This option could be used, for example, to associate the trap that creates an alarm and the
trap that clears the alarm. In the Parameters pane, one trap with two states would appear.
If you click Ignore Trap it will be ignored completely, except if there are rules that use that
trap.
7 Click Add to add new rows to the Trap Object IDs table, or Delete to remove rows.
With a row selected, click MIB to open an SNMP MIB Browser, and then browse to a
condition that generates a trap. Click OK, and then click the variable or parameter, and its
Object ID (OID) will fill the selected row.
8 If you need to define rules to go with your traps, see Creating New Trap Rules on
page 16. If rules already exist in the table, you can modify them using the following tools:
 Copy a rule by selecting it and then clicking Copy. An exact duplicate of the rule
appears in the List of Trap Rules table.
 If a rule already exists, modify it by selecting it and then clicking Modify. The dialog
box that opens is described in Creating New Trap Rules on page 16.
 Delete a rule by selecting it and then clicking Delete.
16 Chapter 3
9 Click OK to close the Trap Definition dialog box, and then OK to close the SNMP Trap
Creating New Trap Rules

1 Under Trap Rules on the Trap Definition dialog box, click Add.
The Trap Rule Configuration dialog box opens.
New
Delete
New
Delete
Figure 3-9 Trap Rule Configuration

2 Enter a name for the rule. This name identifies the rule in subsequent dialog boxes.
3 If another rule should be associated with this rule, click Associate with existing rule and
then choose that rule from the drop-down box.
This option could be used, for example, to associate an alarm and the alarm that clears it. It
would mean that in the Parameters pane, only one instance of the trap would appear, and
it would have two states.
4 Under Rule Conditions, click New to add a new row.
To delete a row from this table, click Delete.
5 In the Variable field, select an object ID.

The drop-down box lists all the object IDs that are part of the trap definition.
6 If the device is not unique—not the only one that would use the associated MIB—enter its
value in the Instance ID field.
InterfaceNav 17
7 To complete the Value field, do either of the following:

 Enter a value.
 Click Value Expression, and then complete the Bitrate Expression Builder
screen that appears. See Creating a Value Expression on page 17.
 Click MIB, and then choose a value from the MIB Browser that appears.
8 Under Rule Actions, click New, and then select an Action Name from the drop-down box
that appears in the new row.
9 To complete the Description field, do either of the following:
 Enter substrings and/or SNMP variable values.
 Click Description Expression, and then complete the Alarm Description
Builder dialog box that appears. See Building an Alarm Description on page 18.
10 On the Trap Rule Configuration dialog box, enter a Trigger time (measured in
milliseconds).
11 Click OK to close the Trap Rule Configuration dialog box.
Creating a Value Expression

Value expressions help specify a specific condition, where your SNMP device may combine
many bits of data into a single trap.
Figure 3-10 Bitwise Expression Builder Dialog Box

1 From the Bit box, choose a Bit that pertains to the rule you are defining.
2 Beside Value, enter the value that must be met, and then click Add.
The Expression field (read-only) updates.
3 Repeat as many times as required to define the value specific to the alarm or parameter
from the string.
You can remove the selected row by clicking Remove.
4 Click OK.
18 Chapter 3
Building an Alarm Description

An alarm description provides information to help operators correct the alarm condition.
Before using the Alarm Description Builder, you need to know what data that the alarm
sends to Magellan CCS Navigator when it is triggered. You can retrieve this data by
triggering the alarm.
Figure 3-11 Action Description Builder Dialog Box

The trap normally consists of a description, including a header and variables. The expression
builder operates in a linear fashion, starting at the beginning of the description and making
changes in sequence as it progresses towards the end of the description. So, the order in
which you present your expression is very important.
If, for example, you use a rule to remove the third word of the description, you cannot
subsequently remove the first word. If there is a later instance of the same word, you will
remove that instead. Otherwise, your instruction will be ignored.
1 Choose an option from the Conversion Rule field.

Options include the following:
Table 3-1 Conversion Rules for SNMP Alarm Expressions

Conversion Rule Function
Keep text up to a Keeps the text, starting from the previous action, up to and
specific string including the specified attribute
Add specific string Adds text at the spot where the previous action took place
Add remaining text Keeps all text until the next specified rule, or until the end of the
alarm expression if no other rule follows this rule
Remove text up to a Deletes the text between the previous action and the specified
specific string attribute (but not including the specified attribute)
Remove specific string Searches forward and removes the next instance of the specified
attribute
2 Enter text or a variable in the Attributes field.

If no variable value or string token is specified, the entire string is displayed.
InterfaceNav 19
3 Under Description Entries, click Add.

The addition to your alarm description appears in the Expression String field.
4 Repeat steps 1–3 to add to your expression, keeping in mind that the change will always
take place at a point later in the description than the change you just made.
5 Click OK.
Configuring Favorites for an SNMP Device

If you have configured traps using the SNMP Traps tool as described in SNMP Trap
Configuration on page 13, the configured traps appear in the Alarms tab of the
Parameters pane when the device associated with them (the object with the same object
ID) is selected in the Navigation pane’s Network or Discovery folder.
For SNMP devices only, the Favorites dialog box has a MIB button. This button allows you
to add multiple Object ID (OID) root nodes to the favorites for this device. The Parameters
pane will display all Object IDs (OIDs) listed under these root SNMP nodes (in case the
SNMP-managed device provides access to other OIDs implemented in different branches of
the SNMP MIB).
1 In the Parameters panel, click Favorites, and then click Configure.
Figure 3-12 SNMP Device Configuration Dialog Box

2 Click MIB.
If the Object ID you want to include is not listed in the MIB tree, you need to add the MIB
that contains this definition before proceeding. See Adding Missing MIBs on page 20.
3 In the SNMP MIB Browser dialog box, browse to the specific Object (parameter) or Trap
(alarm).
SNMP devices from third-party manufacturers appear according to their own hierarchy. See
the documentation for that SNMP-enabled device for more information.
20 Chapter 3
Figure 3-13 SNMP MIB Browser in Magellan CCS Navigator

4 Click OK.
The ID is added to the table in the SNMP Device Configuration dialog box.
5 Repeat steps 8 and 9 until the SNMP Device Configuration dialog box contains all the
OIDs that you would select as favorites for that SNMP device.
6 Click OK to close the SNMP Device Configuration dialog box, and then OK to close the
Favorites dialog box.
New variables appear in the Parameters tab of the Parameters pane, and new traps
appear in the Alarms tab of the Parameters pane.
Adding If the Object ID you want to include is not listed in the MIB tree, you need to add the MIB
Missing MIBs that contains this definition.
1 In the Parameters panel, click Favorites > Configure > MIB > Load Mib.
The SNMP Options dialog box opens.
InterfaceNav 21

2 For each SNMP-enabled device you want to control, click Add, and then browse to the
location of the MIB file for that device.
3 Select each MIB file, and then click Open.
4 Ensure that checks appear beside the MIBs that you have just added to the MIB Files to
Load list.
5 Click OK.
Creating Customized Pages

After discovering CCS-P and SNMP devices, you can create new pages.
The Navigator New Page Wizard opens, and shows the format options for the new page,
including a preview of the selected layout option.
22 Chapter 3
Figure 3-15 New Page Wizard

2 On the General tab, click Blank Page, and then click OK.
3 Drag items from the Parameters panel and drop them on the Graphical Navigation
page.
To select a range of parameters, hold down the SHIFT button on your keyboard while
clicking the first and last parameters or alarms in the range.
To select multiple parameters or alarms that are not in a sequence, hold down the CTRL
button on your keyboard while clicking each parameter or alarm you want to select.
Any device (including devices icons, parameters, and alarms) that is used on a page has to
exist on the navigation tree for the page to work properly.
Each parameter on a page consists of two elements: the parameter’s label, and its control.
In Build mode, you can modify these elements. See Editing the Elements of a Parameter
or Alarm on page 22.
Each alarm on a page consists of two elements: the alarm’s label, and a status indicator.
Editing the Elements of a Parameter or Alarm

When a parameter or alarm is added to a Graphical Navigation page, it consists of two
elements, the control and its label. Both of these elements can be edited.
To edit a label, follow these steps:
1 Right-click on the label and select Properties from the shortcut menu.
2 Choose the Text tab, and then make any changes.
See “Chapter 2: Graphical Navigation Page Creation” in Volume 2 of your Magellan CCS
Navigator User Manual for more information.
InterfaceNav 23
To edit a control, follow these steps:
1 Right-click on the control and select Properties from the shortcut menu.
2 Choose the Rules tab, and then edit the rules assigned to the control element of the
parameter or alarm.
This is described in Editing the Rules on a Control on page 23.
When you drag and drop a parameter or alarm onto a page, it is automatically assigned
rules that make that parameter or alarm work to its default configuration. In some
circumstances, you may want to modify the rules assigned to a parameter, for example to
limit the available range for a slider when certain operators are controlling a device.
Actions and events that are specific to NAVIGATOR-INT parameters and alarms include the
following:
Table 3-2 Events Specific to Parameters and Alarms

Event Function Reference
On Device Change Triggers an action when the state of the specified Editing an On Device Change
CCS device changes Event on page 24
On Graphical Object Triggers an action when the state of the specified Editing an On Graphical Object
State Change device (which can be either a CCS-P device or an State Change Event on page 26
SNMP device) changes
Table 3-3 Actions for Parameters and Alarms

Action Function Reference
Get Device Value Select a device and parameters to retrieve Editing a Get Device Values
Action on page 27
Set Parameter Value Select a device and a parameter to set, and the Editing a Set Device Values
value to set it to Action on page 28
Editing the Rules on a Control

To edit the rules assigned to a control, which can apply to a parameter, alarm, or SNMP trap
on a Graphical Navigation page, follow these steps:
1 Right-click on the control in a Graphical Navigation page, and then choose Properties from
the shortcut menu.
2 Select the Rules tab.

24 Chapter 3
Figure 3-16 Default Rules For a Parameter Control

For all controls, this tab will already contain several rules.
3 Make your changes to the rules.

Changes include the following:
 Adding new events and actions

 Editing events and actions by clicking the Condition and Action Properties buttons
and filling out the dialog boxes they open
 Deleting entire rules
See “Chapter 3: Rules for Navigator Pages and Objects” in Volume 2 of your Magellan CCS
Navigator User Manual.
4 Close the Object Properties dialog box by clicking the X in the top right corner.
If you switch from Magellan CCS Navigator to another program (perhaps to check incoming
email) and then return, if there are no errors on the Object Properties dialog box and it is
not pinned to the desktop (the icon in the top left corner of the dialog box), the dialog box
closes, saving your changes.
You will not be able to close the Object Properties dialog box until all rules are complete.
This includes Condition and Action properties. Delete any rows that you do not want to add
events and actions to.
Editing an On Device Change Event

This event is triggered when the status of a parameter or alarm for a device changes. This
event is only available for CCS-P devices. You can open this dialog box by clicking the
Condition button when On Device Change is the selected event in the Rules tab of the
Properties dialog box.
InterfaceNav 25
Figure 3-17 On Device Change Dialog Box

By default, the Device ID will be the module the parameter or alarm is for.
1 Click Select to browse for a different module in an interface similar to the Navigation pane.
2 Select an option from the Event Type box.
Depending on the Event Type you select, the Parameter box has the following options:
Table 3-4 Actions for On Device Change Events

Event Type Engine Properties Parameter Options
Alarm Acknowledge [EP] Device ID The Parameter box
Change [EP] Alarm ID updates to list all the
[EP] Alarm Acknowledge Value available alarm options
Alarm Enable Change [EP] Device ID
[EP] Alarm ID
[EP] Alarm Enable Value
Alarm Level Change [EP] Device ID
[EP] Alarm ID
[EP] Alarm Level Value
Alarm Priority Change [EP] Device ID
[EP] Alarm ID
[EP] Alarm Priority Value
Alarm Trigger Change [EP] Device ID
[EP] Alarm ID
[EP] Alarm Trigger Value
26 Chapter 3
Table 3-4 Actions for On Device Change Events (Continued)

Event Type Engine Properties Parameter Options
Parameter [EP] Device ID The Parameter box
Enumeration Values [EP] Parameter ID updates to list all the
Change [EP] Parameter Enumeration Value available parameter
[EP] Parameter Display Value options
Parameter Precision [EP] Device ID
Change [EP] Parameter ID
[EP] Parameter Precision Value
Parameter Range [EP] Device ID
[EP] Parameter Min Value
[EP] Parameter Max Value
Parameter State [EP] Device ID
EP] Parameter Enabled State
Parameter Stringlist [EP] Device ID
[EP] Parameter String Value
Parameter Units [EP] Device ID
[EP] Parameter Units Value
Parameter Value [EP] Device ID
[EP] Parameter Value
3 Choose a parameter or alarm from the Parameter box.

4 Beside Value, choose Equals, Not Equals, or Any Value.
5 For Equals or Not Equals, from the next box to the right, choose Value or Property.
 If you choose Value, then enter a value.
 If you choose Property, then choose a property from the drop-down box to the
right of the Property field.
Editing an On Graphical Object State Change Event

There are no event conditions for an On Graphical Object State Change event.
Editing a Set Graphical Object State Action

You can use this action to set additional object enable/disable states (other than User access
rights) and device network status, which by default are provided by the “On Graphical
Object State Change” event.
InterfaceNav 27
Figure 3-18 Set Graphical Object State Dialog Box

1 Beside User Mandated Object State, choose a state for your graphical object.
Options include <No change>, Enabled, Disabled, and Read Only.
2 Beside Parameter/Alarm Access, choose from <No change>, No Access, Read/Write,

and Read Only.
The Get Object State option takes into account a device’s access rights and status. The
device is defined on the Object tab of the Object Properties dialog box.
Editing a Get Device Values Action

This action retrieves the current status of a parameter or alarm for a device.
Figure 3-19 Get Device Value Dialog Box

By default, the Device ID is the module that the parameter or alarm is for.
2 From the Action Type box, select an option:
Depending on the option you choose, the contents of the Parameter box will contain
different items, as described in Table 3-5.
Table 3-5 Action Type Options for the Get Device Values Action
Action Type Parameter Options
Get Alarm Values The Parameter box lists all the device’s alarm options
Get Parameter Values The Parameter box lists all the device’s parameter options
3 Choose an option from the Parameter box.

The Value fields will not update.
4 Click OK to close the Action Property Dialog - Get Device Values dialog box.
28 Chapter 3
Editing a Set Device Values Action

This action changes the value of a parameter or alarm on a device.
Figure 3-20 Get Device Value Dialog Box

By default, the Device ID is the module that the parameter or alarm is for.
2 Choose the effect you want to cause from the Action Type box.
Depending on the Action Type you select, the Parameter box has the following options:
Table 3-6 Action Types for Set Device Values Action

Action Type Parameter Options
Set Alarm Acknowledge The Parameter box lists all the device’s alarm options
Set Alarm Clear
Set Alarm Enable
Set Alarm Priority
Set Alarm Trigger
Adjust Parameter Value The Parameter box lists all the device’s parameter
options
Set Parameter Value
3 Choose a parameter or alarm from the Parameter box.

4 In the Value box, choose Value or Property.
 If you chose Value, enter the value in the unlabeled field to the right of the box.
 If you chose Property, select an item from the drop-down box to the right of the
Value box.
6 Click OK to close the Action Property Dialog - Set Device Value dialog box.
Custom Control Views

When you double-click on a device in the Navigation pane in Control mode, by default
Magellan CCS Navigator opens a Control dialog box. To configure Magellan CCS Navigator
to open a Navigator page instead, follow these steps:
InterfaceNav 29
1 Right-click on a device, and then select Properties from the context menu that appears.
Figure 3-21 Device Properties Dialog Box

3 From the Control dialog box drop-down box, choose Custom.
4 Click Browse.
Figure 3-22 Choosing a Page to Open

5 Click a row in the Select Page table, and then click Open.
The Navigation Properties dialog box updates to indicate the name of the page that
opens when you click on this device in Control mode, in the Navigation pane, and on
icons associated with this device in Graphical Navigation pages.
30 Chapter 3
31
4 Using Customized Pages
Overview To use pages and panels that include Imagine Communications or third-party parameters
and alarms created using NAVIGATOR-INT tools, only a NAVIGATOR-CLI license is required.
Before attempting to view SNMP objects and traps, ensure that the device is configured to
send traps to the Magellan CCS Navigator PC. See Volume 1 of your Magellan CCS
Navigator User Manual for more information.
The following topics are described in this chapter:
 Displaying Customized Pages on page 31

 Parameter Controls on page 32
 Parameter Controls on page 32
Displaying Customized Pages

If you have just created a page or panel in Build mode (see Creating Customized Pages on
page 21) and you switch to Control mode, the panel opens.
If you have used Magellan CCS Navigator previously and left a panel open when you closed
Magellan CCS Navigator, by default the panel will open when you restart the software.
To open a panel if you have previously closed the panel:
1 From the main menu, choose File > Open.

2 Browse to the location of your panel file.
3 Click Open.
32 Chapter 4
Using Customized Pages
Your panel opens.
Figure 4-1. Page or Panel in Full Screen Mode
From the main menu, select View > Full Screen to switch to full screen mode.
To exit full screen mode, click Exit FullScreen Mode.
In Build mode, you can configure whether Magellan CCS Navigator opens a Control dialog
box or a Navigation page when you click on a specific device in Control mode. To force
Magellan CCS Navigator to open the non-default option when in Control mode, you must
return to Build mode and change it there. See Custom Control Views on page 28.
Parameter Both CCS-P parameters and SNMP variables can appear on pages created by Magellan CCS
Navigator with a NAVIGATOR-INT license key.
Controls
InterfaceNav 33
Slider control
Menu controls
Feedback
parameters
Figure 4-2 Parameters on a Navigator Page in Control Mode

Available controls fall into the following categories:
 Sliders - Drag the slider to increase or decrease its value. The value on the device is
changed when you release the control.
 Menus - Click the drop-down menu to open a list of options.
 Buttons - Added to a panel by the person who created it, buttons can have a wide
variety of functions. They can lead to other pages and controls for other devices, or
other aspects of the same device.
Unavailable controls will be dimmed. Parameters can be unavailable for a variety of reasons.
 You may not have control access rights to a device. To view your access rights to a
device:
a Right-click on the device in the Navigation pane.
b Choose Properties, and then click on the Device tab.
If you have control privileges for the device, Access Rights will show Enabled.
 The device may be off-line. Devices can be off-line because they are powered down, or
because the network connection is not available.
 The device may be undergoing a state change. If firmware is being uploaded to the
device, or if it is in the process of restarting, wait three to four minutes and then access
the device again.
 The IP address of the device may have been changed. If you have access to Build mode,
you can attempt to rediscover the device.
Any device (including devices icons, parameters, and alarms) that is used on a page has to
exist on the navigation tree for the page to work properly.
Feedback parameters provide information about the state of the device that is being
controlled and monitored.
Imagine Communications and third-party alarm indicators indicate whether the alarm is
triggered or cleared. If the device that is connected to the alarm is not online or available to
send alarms, this can be an alarm in itself.
34 Chapter 4
Using Customized Pages
Figure 4-3 Alarms on a Navigator Page

35
A Software User License

and Warranty Agreement
Carefully read all of the terms and conditions of this license agreement before using CCS
Navigator, CCS Pilot, or CCS CoPilot. By using this software, you indicate your complete and
unconditional acceptance of these terms and conditions.
This document constitutes a legal agreement between you and Imagine Communications,
concerning the use of CCS Navigator. This agreement constitutes the complete agreement
between you and Imagine Communications.
installation shall consist of no more than 1,000 servers or workstations. A network is defined
as any continuously connected group of computers on one cabling scheme without
proprietary rights related to the software and the accompanying manuals. You may not copy
any part of the accompanying manuals, copy the software except as permitted above, make
alterations or modifications to the software, or attempt to decompile or discover the source
code of the software.
purchase.
Imagine Communications serial number has been removed or defaced.
36 Appendix A

of such damages.
NET SNMP Various copyrights apply to this package, listed in various separate parts below. Please
License make sure that you read all the parts.
---- Part 1: CMU/UCD copyright notice: (BSD like) -----
Copyright 1989, 1991, 1992 by Carnegie Mellon University
Derivative Work - 1996, 1998-2000
Copyright 1996, 1998-2000 The Regents of the University of California
All Rights Reserved
Permission to use, copy, modify and distribute this software and its documentation for any
purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice
appears in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear
in supporting documentation, and that the name of CMU and The Regents of the University
of California not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software
without specific written permission.
CMU AND THE REGENTS OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES
WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE, INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL CMU OR THE REGENTS OF THE
UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM THE LOSS OF USE, DATA
OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS
ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS
SOFTWARE.
InterfaceNav 37
---- Part 2: Networks Associates Technology, Inc copyright notice (BSD) -----
Copyright (c) 2001-2003, Networks Associates Technology, Inc
 Neither the name of the Networks Associates Technology, Inc nor the names of its
contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
without specific prior written permission.
---- Part 3: Cambridge Broadband Ltd. copyright notice (BSD) -----
Portions of this code are copyright (c) 2001-2003, Cambridge Broadband Ltd.
 The name of Cambridge Broadband Ltd. may not be used to endorse or promote
products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
38 Appendix A

THEORY OF LIABILITY,WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
---- Part 4: Sun Microsystems, Inc. copyright notice (BSD) -----
Copyright © 2003 Sun Microsystems, Inc., 4150 Network Circle, Santa Clara, California
Use is subject to license terms below.
This distribution may include materials developed by third parties.
Sun, Sun Microsystems, the Sun logo and Solaris are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the U.S. and other countries.
 Neither the name of the Sun Microsystems, Inc. nor the names of its contributors may
be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific
prior written permission.
---- Part 5: Sparta, Inc copyright notice (BSD) -----
Copyright (c) 2003-2008, Sparta, Inc
InterfaceNav 39
 Neither the name of Sparta, Inc nor the names of its contributors may be used to
endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written
permission.
---- Part 6: Cisco/BUPTNIC copyright notice (BSD) -----
Copyright (c) 2004, Cisco, Inc and Information Network
Center of Beijing University of Posts and Telecommunications.
 Neither the name of Cisco, Inc, Beijing University of Posts and Telecommunications, nor
the names of their contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived
from this software without specific prior written permission.
---- Part 7: Fabasoft R&D Software GmbH & Co KG copyright notice (BSD) -----
Copyright (c) Fabasoft R&D Software GmbH & Co KG, 2003

40 Appendix A
oss@fabasoft.com
Author: Bernhard Penz
 The name of Fabasoft R&D Software GmbH & Co KG or any of its subsidiaries, brand or
product names may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this
software without specific prior written permission.
THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
41
Index
A L
Administrator 6 Licenses
Alarms activating 5
favorites Navigator 2
CCS-P 11 required 1
SNMP 19 software user license 35
monitoring 33
M
B MIB Browser 15
Build mode 8–28 MIBs
loading into Navigator 9
Modes
C Build 8–28
CCS-P devices Control 28–34
configuring favorites 11 FullScreen 32
creating pages and panels 21
discovery 8
Configuration 7–29 N
Control mode 28–34 Navigation pane, launching panels from 28
Navigator installation 6
D
Device ID O
discovering 8 Object ID 15
Discovery 8 object ID 16, 19
off-line devices 10, 11 Off-line devices
creating 10
F indicators in Control mode 33
Operating system, required 3
Favorites 11–20
configuring CCS-P 11
configuring SNMP 19 P
conforming off-line and on-line devices 11 Panels
copying 13 creating 21–28
FullScreen mode 32 launching from Navigation pane 28
monitoring 32–34
opening 31
H Parameters
Hardware requirements, installation 4 favorites 13
CCS-P 11
I SNMP 19
using controls 32
Installation 3–6
42 Index
R System requirements 3
Required hardware 4
U
S Uninstalling software 6
SNMP
alarm indicators 33 V
configuring favorites 11, 19 Value expressions, creating 17
devices on pages and panels 21 Variable values, SNMP 17
events and actions for 23 View full screen 32
SNMP value expressions, creating 17
SNMP variable values 17
Software User License 35 W
Software, required 3 Warranty Agreement 35
Volume 6: Routing Components
Edition F
175‐100032‐00
Trademarks
Contact Information
iii
Contents
Preface ...................................................................................................................... xvii

Manual Information ................................................................................................... xvii
Purpose .................................................................................................................. xvii
Audience ................................................................................................................ xvii
Revision History ...................................................................................................... xvii
Obtaining the User Manuals ..................................................................................... xvii
Writing Conventions ..................................................................................................xviii
Contacting Us .............................................................................................................. xix
Technical Support .................................................................................................... xix
Product Information ................................................................................................ xix
Introduction to Routing Components ........................................................ 1

Basic Routing Components Features ........................................................................... 1
Router Volume Features ............................................................................................... 1
Router Node Functionality ........................................................................................... 3
Routing Operations Tools ............................................................................................. 4
Router Shortcut Menus .............................................................................................. 4
Discovering Routing Devices ............................................................................ 7

Router Device Discovery .............................................................................................. 7
Setting Router Discovery Options ............................................................................... 7
Setting Host IP Addresses for a Router Discovery ........................................................ 7
Setting Discovery Save Options ................................................................................ 10
Running a Discovery for a Router ............................................................................ 11
Creating and Maintaining Routing Systems ........................................... 13

Routing Systems Overview ........................................................................................ 13
Chapter 1 Creating a Routing System .............................................................................. 15

Routing System Creation Overview .......................................................................... 15
iv Contents
Using the Routers Folder of a Navigation Pane ........................................................ 15

Creating a Routing System via Discovery .................................................................. 17
Creating a New Routing System ................................................................................ 18
Manually Adding Components to a Routing System ................................................. 19
Editing Components of a Routing System ................................................................ 21
Working With Salvos ................................................................................................... 22
Creating a Salvo ....................................................................................................... 22
Editing Salvos ........................................................................................................... 25
Using the Categories Tab ......................................................................................... 27
Using the Grouping Tab ........................................................................................... 28
Using the Tielines Tab .............................................................................................. 28
Chapter 2 Routing System Maintenance ......................................................................... 31

Maintaining Routing Systems .................................................................................... 31
Using the Advanced Router Control Plug-in ............................................................ 31
Setting Preferences .................................................................................................. 31
Using the Imagine Communications Router Service .................................................. 34
Setting Router Engine Options ................................................................................. 35
Deleting a Routing Configuration .............................................................................. 36
Creating a Router Database Backup .......................................................................... 37
Restoring a Router Database ...................................................................................... 38
Polling Devices ............................................................................................................. 39
Polling Status Indicators ........................................................................................... 39
Possible Polling Problems ......................................................................................... 41
Combiner System Polling Problems .......................................................................... 41
Downloading Device Definitions ............................................................................... 44
Chapter 3 Router Page and Panel Construction .......................................................... 45

Page and Panel Construction for Routers .................................................................. 45
Choosing a Router Panel ............................................................................................. 45
Multi Display Panel ................................................................................................... 46
Source Preview Panel ............................................................................................... 46
Grid Panel ................................................................................................................ 47
Matrix and Matrix Classic Panels .............................................................................. 48
Multi-Bus and Multi-Bus with Salvo Panels ............................................................... 50
Single-Bus Panel and Single-Bus Panel with Monitor ................................................. 51
Creating a Multi Display or Source Preview Router Page ........................................ 53
Choosing the Router for a Source Preview or Multi Display Page .............................. 53
Selecting Sources ..................................................................................................... 54
Selecting Destinations .............................................................................................. 55
Creating Grid, Single-Bus, Multi Bus and Matrix Panels ........................................... 56
Starting the Routing Panel Configuration Wizard ..................................................... 57
Selecting Levels ........................................................................................................ 59
Selecting Destinations .............................................................................................. 60
Selecting Sources ..................................................................................................... 61
Selecting Routing Operations and Display Properties ................................................ 62
Navigator Routing Components v
User Manual
Router Components on a Navigator Page ................................................................. 66

Adding a Router Component to an Existing Navigator Page ..................................... 66
Editing a Router Control Panel on a Navigator Page ................................................. 66
Using Panel Information .......................................................................................... 67
Running Diagnostics ................................................................................................... 68
Viewing the Activity of a Router ............................................................................... 69
Manually Creating a Router Control Page ................................................................ 70
Summary: Manually Creating a Router Control Page ................................................ 71
Logical Database Setup ..................................................................................... 77

Logical Databases Overview ...................................................................................... 77
Chapter 5 Using the Logical Database Editor Tool ................................................... 79

Database Editor Overview ......................................................................................... 79
Working with Common Controls ............................................................................... 79
Auto Validation ........................................................................................................... 79
The Logical Database Editor Dialog Box ................................................................... 80
Using Graphical Tools .............................................................................................. 84
Manipulating Display Elements ................................................................................ 99
Chapter 6 Configuring Sources .......................................................................................... 107

Sources Tab Components .......................................................................................... 107
Adding Logical Sources ............................................................................................. 109
Removing Logical Sources ........................................................................................ 109
Renumbering Sources ............................................................................................... 110
Assigning Images to Sources .................................................................................... 110
Assigning and Editing Names .................................................................................. 110
Statusing and Status Names .................................................................................. 110
Assigning Source or Status Names ......................................................................... 112
Adjusting Source Numbers .................................................................................... 113
Renaming Status Names and Related Sources ........................................................ 113
Working with Levels from the Sources Tab ............................................................. 114
Assigning Level Inputs and Physical Inputs ............................................................. 114
Adding Levels ........................................................................................................ 115
Removing Levels .................................................................................................... 115
Hiding and Unhiding Levels ................................................................................... 115
Adjusting Level Inputs ............................................................................................ 115
Mapping Logical Sources to Level Inputs ................................................................ 116
Sharing Level Inputs ............................................................................................... 118
Chapter 7 Configuring Destinations ............................................................................... 119

Destinations Tab Components ................................................................................. 119
Adding Logical Destinations .................................................................................... 121
vi Contents
Removing Logical Destinations ................................................................................ 121

Assigning Images to Destinations ............................................................................ 122
Assigning and Editing Names ................................................................................... 122
Understanding Statusing and Status Names ........................................................... 122
Assigning Destination or Status Names .................................................................. 122
Adjusting Destination Numbers .............................................................................. 123
Renaming Status Names and Related Destinations ................................................. 124
Working with Levels from the Destinations Tab ..................................................... 125
Assigning Level Outputs and Physical Outputs ........................................................ 125
Adding Levels ........................................................................................................ 125
Removing Levels .................................................................................................... 125
Hiding and Unhiding Levels .................................................................................... 126
Adjusting Level Outputs ......................................................................................... 126
Mapping of Level Outputs ........................................................................................ 127
Chapter 8 Configuring Levels ............................................................................................. 129

Levels Tab Components ............................................................................................ 129
Specifying Logical Router Size ................................................................................. 130
Adding Levels ............................................................................................................ 131
Removing Levels ........................................................................................................ 131
Assigning or Changing Level Numbers .................................................................... 131
Importing Levels ........................................................................................................ 132
Exporting Levels ........................................................................................................ 132
Sorting Levels ............................................................................................................ 132
Assigning or Changing Level Names ....................................................................... 132
Modifying Level Colors ............................................................................................. 133
Assigning Icons to Levels .......................................................................................... 134
Setting the Actual Number of Inputs and Outputs ................................................ 135
Adding Level Descriptions ........................................................................................ 135
Chapter 9 Configuring Categories and Indexes......................................................... 137

Categories Tab Components ..................................................................................... 137
Defining Category Indexing ..................................................................................... 138
Creating and Managing Categories ......................................................................... 139
Adding a New Category ......................................................................................... 139
Assigning Sources or Destinations to a Category .................................................... 139
Associating an Index Name to a Category .............................................................. 140
Generating Category Names .................................................................................. 140
Changing a Category Name ................................................................................... 141
Viewing Sources Affected by a Category ................................................................ 142
Viewing Destinations Affected by a Category ......................................................... 142
Deleting a Category ............................................................................................... 142
Creating and Managing Indexes .............................................................................. 143
Adding a New Index .............................................................................................. 143
Changing an Index Name ....................................................................................... 143
Assigning Sources or Destinations to an Index ........................................................ 143
Navigator Routing Components vii
User Manual
Associating an Index Name to a Category .............................................................. 144

Generating Index Names ....................................................................................... 144
Viewing Sources Affected by an Index ................................................................... 144
Viewing Destinations Affected by an Index ............................................................ 144
Deleting an Index .................................................................................................. 144
Chapter 10 Configuring Grouping....................................................................................... 147

Grouping Overview .................................................................................................. 147
Grouping Tab Components ....................................................................................... 147
Creating and Managing Groups ............................................................................... 149
Adding a New Group ............................................................................................ 149
Assigning Items to a Group ................................................................................... 149
Renaming a Group ................................................................................................ 150
Deleting an Entire Group ....................................................................................... 150
Deleting Individual Entries from a Group ................................................................ 150
Chapter 11 Managing Enhanced Tielines ........................................................................ 151

Enhanced Tieline Management Overview .............................................................. 151
Tielines Tab Components .......................................................................................... 152
Tieline-Specific Toolbar Components ....................................................................... 153
Activating the Tieline Function ................................................................................ 154
Adding Tielines ......................................................................................................... 154
Adding Tielines at the Sources or Destinations Tab ................................................ 156
Adding Tielines at the Tielines Tab ......................................................................... 156
Controlling and Monitoring Tielines ....................................................................... 158
Controlling Tielines ................................................................................................ 158
Monitoring Tielines ................................................................................................ 158
Advanced Functions .................................................................................................. 164
Chapter 12 Managing Dynamic Routing Threads for Legacy Products ............. 171
Dynamic Routing Thread Management Overview ................................................. 171
Adding Dynamic Routing Threads ........................................................................... 172
Editing Dynamic Routing Threads ........................................................................... 175
Editing Remote Access Lists ..................................................................................... 176
Deleting Dynamic Routing Threads ......................................................................... 179
Optimizing Dynamic Routing Threads ..................................................................... 181
Downloading Dynamic Routing Thread Information ............................................. 181
Chapter 13 Using Database Editor Wizards ................................................................... 183

Database Editor Wizards Overview ......................................................................... 183
Using the Device Type Wizard .................................................................................. 183
Understanding the Device Type Wizard Dialog Box ................................................ 184
Creating a New Device Type ..................................................................................... 185
viii Contents
Selecting a Create Device Type Option ................................................................... 185

Selecting Connection Types ................................................................................... 186
Selecting Levels ...................................................................................................... 188
Configuring Connection Types ............................................................................... 189
Selecting Device Type Details ................................................................................. 191
Editing and Managing Device Types ........................................................................ 191
Editing Device Types .............................................................................................. 191
Deleting Device Types ............................................................................................ 192
Managing Device Types ......................................................................................... 192
Using the Insertion Wizard ....................................................................................... 193
Understanding the Insertion Wizard Dialog Box ...................................................... 193
Inserting Sources and Destinations ......................................................................... 193
Physical Device Setup ...................................................................................... 197

Physical Device Setup Overview .............................................................................. 197
Chapter 15 Configuring Platinum Frames....................................................................... 199

Platinum Frame Configuration Overview ................................................................ 199
Selecting the Frame Size ........................................................................................... 199
Setting Up a Matrix ................................................................................................... 200
“Quick-Adding” a New Matrix ............................................................................... 200
Manually Adding a New Matrix .............................................................................. 201
Enabling Redundant Crosspoints ............................................................................ 212
Changing Sync Settings ......................................................................................... 213
Changing Initial Source Mode Settings ................................................................... 213
Partitioning the Matrix ............................................................................................. 214
Selecting Matrix Partitioning Types ......................................................................... 214
Assigning Physical Map Order ................................................................................ 220
Selecting Matrix Monitoring .................................................................................... 222
Selecting Controls ...................................................................................................... 224
Setting up Platinum Frame Identification ................................................................ 225
Setting up Platinum FTP Functions .......................................................................... 225
Setting Up Platinum Network Settings .................................................................... 225
Setting Up Platinum I/O Sync and References ......................................................... 227
Setting up SNMP .................................................................................................... 228
Updating License Keys and Logical Settings ............................................................ 232
Changing Protocol Settings .................................................................................... 233
Enabling TDM Starting Slot Offset .......................................................................... 241
Completing the Control Settings Entries ................................................................. 242
Editing the Router Matrix ......................................................................................... 242
Configured Matrices Tab ........................................................................................ 242
Detected Matrices Tab .......................................................................................... 249
Monitoring Matrices Tab ........................................................................................ 256
Firmware Tab ......................................................................................................... 257
Control Settings Tab .............................................................................................. 258
Setting Up HView SX Hybrid Virtual Destinations ................................................ 259
Navigator Routing Components ix
User Manual
Chapter 16 Configuring Panacea Frames ........................................................................ 263

Panacea Frame Configuration Overview ................................................................. 263
Selecting a Frame ...................................................................................................... 263
Configuring the Routing Matrix .............................................................................. 264
Selecting a Matrix Type .......................................................................................... 264
Configuring the Matrix Type .................................................................................. 266
Changing Frame Properties .................................................................................... 267
Partitioning the Matrix ........................................................................................... 267
Configuring the Control Card ................................................................................... 271
Editing Protocols .................................................................................................... 272
Setting up the SNMP Agent ................................................................................... 275
Advanced Control Card ......................................................................................... 278
Editing a Frame’s Configuration .............................................................................. 282
Router Frame Tab .................................................................................................. 282
Configured Matrices Tab ....................................................................................... 283
Partitioning Tab ..................................................................................................... 287
Detected Matrices Tab ........................................................................................... 288
Detected Cards Tab ............................................................................................... 288
I/O Hardware Module Dialog Box ........................................................................... 289
Destinations Tab .................................................................................................... 290
Sources Tab ........................................................................................................... 291
Alarm Tab ............................................................................................................. 292
General Tab ........................................................................................................... 293
Configuring Panacea Parametric Settings ............................................................... 293
Parametric Settings Tab ......................................................................................... 294
Clean Switch Tab ................................................................................................... 294
Quiet Switch Tab ................................................................................................... 296
Clean Switch Tab (P-SCQ and P-HSCQ Modules) .................................................... 297
Transition Tab (P-SCQ and P-HSCQ Modules) ......................................................... 298
Audio Gain ............................................................................................................ 302
Panacea Web Panels Tab ........................................................................................... 304
Panacea Web Users Tab ............................................................................................ 305
Chapter 17 Configuring Integrator Frames.................................................................... 307

Integrator Frame Configuration Overview ............................................................. 307
Selecting a Frame ...................................................................................................... 307
Configuring the Routing Matrix .............................................................................. 308
Selecting a Matrix Type .......................................................................................... 308
Configuring Regular Matrix Types .......................................................................... 309
Configuring Data Router Matrix Types ................................................................... 310
Configuring Integrator Gold Matrix Types .............................................................. 314
Partitioning the Matrix ........................................................................................... 317
Setting Up Optional Output Monitoring ................................................................. 320
Adding Combiner Systems ....................................................................................... 324
Restrictions ............................................................................................................ 325
Setting Up a Combiner System .............................................................................. 325
Adding Combiner System Components ................................................................. 325
x Contents
Editing a Frame’s Configuration ............................................................................... 328

Router Frame Tab .................................................................................................. 328
Editing the Router Matrix ......................................................................................... 329
Configured Matrices Tab ........................................................................................ 329
Partitioning Tab ..................................................................................................... 331
Detected Matrices Tab ........................................................................................... 332
Detected Cards Tab ............................................................................................... 332
Control Card(s) Tab ................................................................................................ 334
Chapter 18 Configuring Legacy Frames ........................................................................... 335

Legacy Frame Configuration Overview ................................................................... 335
Adding Other (Legacy) Imagine Communications Frames ..................................... 335
Chapter 19 Configuring Edge Protocol Gateways........................................................ 339

Edge Gateway Configuration Overview ................................................................. 339
Adding Edge Configurations .................................................................................... 339
Setting Serial Port Protocol Assignments and Options .......................................... 340
Setting Mapping Values for Pro-Bel Configurations ................................................ 342
Setting Ethernet Protocol Option Values ................................................................ 346
Viewing the Detected Cards Tab .............................................................................. 348
Setting Network Information for Edge ................................................................... 349
System Information ................................................................................................ 349
Network Information ............................................................................................. 349
SNMP .................................................................................................................... 350
Advanced Control Options ..................................................................................... 350
SNMP Agent Options ............................................................................................. 350
Advance Settings Dialog Box .................................................................................. 354
Edge Web Router Application .................................................................................. 357
Chapter 20 Configuring Alphanumeric Breakaway (ABA) Panels ...................... 359

ABA Panel Configuration Overview ........................................................................ 359
RCP-ABA 1RU Models ............................................................................................ 359
RCP-ABA 2RU Models ............................................................................................ 360
Accessing the Edit Panel Dialog ............................................................................... 360
Edit Button Function Dialog Box .............................................................................. 362
Moving a Selection Key ............................................................................................ 362
Limiting the Sources and Destinations Available to a Panel .................................. 363
Assigning View Order for Assignments Tab and Panel .......................................... 365
Denying Access to Specific Sources or Destinations ............................................... 367
Allowing Access to a Limited Set of Sources and Destinations ............................. 367
Assigning a Favorite Source or Destination to a Selection Key ............................. 369
Clearing Selection Key Assignments ........................................................................ 371
Editing Details of a Panel Definition ........................................................................ 372
Configuring the Auxiliary Keys ............................................................................... 372
Navigator Routing Components xi
User Manual
Resolving Auxiliary Key Definition Errors ................................................................ 372

Setting the Levels Affected ................................................................................... 373
Determining Destinations Accessible to the Panel .................................................. 375
Determining Sources Accessible to a Panel ............................................................. 379
Assigning Sources to a Panel ................................................................................. 379
Assigning a Category Key ...................................................................................... 381
Resolving Inaccessibility Errors ................................................................................ 383
Changing a Panel Definition .................................................................................... 383
Changing the Panel Name, ID, Style, Brand, or Protocol ......................................... 384
Changing Protocols ............................................................................................... 385
Chapter 21 Configuring RCPp Panels ................................................................................ 391

RCPp Panel Configuration Overview ....................................................................... 391
Models ....................................................................................................................... 391
Accessing the Edit Panel Dialog ............................................................................... 391
Edit Button Function Dialog Box ............................................................................ 392
Configuring the Auxiliary Keys ................................................................................ 393
Defining the Destinations ........................................................................................ 393
Assigning Selection Keys ........................................................................................ 395
Clearing Selection Key Assignments ....................................................................... 396
Defining the Sources ................................................................................................. 397
Assigning Selection Keys ........................................................................................ 399
Clearing Selection Key Assignments ....................................................................... 399
Configuring the Levels Affected .............................................................................. 400
Changing Panel Name, ID, or Style .......................................................................... 400
Setting Up Button Pages ........................................................................................ 403
Monitoring Device Addresses ................................................................................. 405
Setting Network Information ................................................................................. 409
Activating a Group License (RCP-IDe 32x32 and 64x1 Panels Only) ........................ 410
Setting Up Grouping Functions
(RCP-IDe 32x32 and 64x1 Panels Only) .................................................................... 411
Setting Up Source Groups ..................................................................................... 412
Setting Up Destination Groups .............................................................................. 414
Setting Up Group Options ..................................................................................... 416
Previewing Grouping Setups .................................................................................. 419
Editing LCD Button Displays (RCP-IDe Panels Only) ............................................... 421
Setting Up Button Text .......................................................................................... 422
Setting Up Button Images ...................................................................................... 424
Setting Up Button Colors ....................................................................................... 425
Finishing .................................................................................................................... 427
Controlling Backlight Intensity ................................................................................ 427
Changing Intensity for Auxiliary Keys ..................................................................... 428
Changing Intensity for Panel Keys .......................................................................... 428
Chapter 22 Configuring the Web Router Application .............................................. 429

Web Router Application Configuration Overview ................................................. 429
xii Contents
Adding Web Router Application Devices ................................................................ 429

Before You Begin Setting Up Web Panels or Users ................................................. 430
Configuring Web Panels ........................................................................................ 430
Adding Pushbutton Panels ..................................................................................... 431
Adding Index Panels ............................................................................................... 434
Setting Up Web Users ............................................................................................... 437
Adding Users ......................................................................................................... 438
Assigning Configurations ....................................................................................... 439
Editing User Information ........................................................................................ 439
Deleting Users ........................................................................................................ 440
Chapter 23 Configuring IP3 ................................................................................................... 441

IP3 Configuration Overview ..................................................................................... 441
IP3 Controller Initial Configuration .......................................................................... 441
Preparing to Connect an IP3 Controller to a CCS Network ..................................... 442
Connecting Navigator to an IP3 Controller ............................................................. 443
DBEditor IP3 Configuration ...................................................................................... 444
IP3 Routing System Logical Configuration .............................................................. 447
Adding an IP3 to a Legacy Router System ............................................................... 449
Reconfiguring a Hybrid Router System With an IP3 ............................................... 453
Configuring Tielines .................................................................................................. 454
Basic Routing System Control ...................................................................... 455

Routing System Control Overview ........................................................................... 455
Using Control Mode “Tools” ..................................................................................... 455
Advanced Controls ................................................................................................ 455
Basic Controls ........................................................................................................ 455
Accessing the Router Control ................................................................................... 456
Taking a Source to a Destination .............................................................................. 456
Doing a Breakaway Take ........................................................................................ 457
Taking a Disconnect Source ................................................................................... 457
Taking a Disconnect Breakaway Source .................................................................. 457
Locking and Protecting Router Destinations ........................................................... 458
Locking a Router Destination ................................................................................. 458
Unlocking a Router Destination .............................................................................. 458
Protecting a Router Destination .............................................................................. 459
Unprotecting a Router Destination ......................................................................... 459
Platinum Control ........................................................................................................ 459
Chapter 25 Grid and Bus Panel Operation ...................................................................... 461

Grid and Bus Panel Operation Overview ................................................................. 461
Monitoring Signal Presence ...................................................................................... 461
Performing Takes With a Grid or Bus Panel ............................................................. 462
Takes with a Single-Bus Panel ................................................................................ 462
Navigator Routing Components xiii
User Manual
Takes With a Multi-Bus Panel ................................................................................. 463

Takes on a Grid Panel ............................................................................................ 465
Disconnecting a Destination .................................................................................. 466
Clearing a Selected Source .................................................................................... 467
Swapping Destinations .......................................................................................... 467
Crosspoint Restrictions ............................................................................................. 467
Restricting a Crosspoint ......................................................................................... 467
Unrestricting a Crosspoint ..................................................................................... 468
Using Presets ............................................................................................................. 468
Using Salvos .............................................................................................................. 468
Locking and Protecting Destinations and Salvos .................................................... 469
Locking a Destination or Salvo ............................................................................... 469
Unlocking a Salvo or Destination ........................................................................... 470
Protecting Destinations and Salvos ......................................................................... 470
Unprotecting Destinations and Salvos .................................................................... 470
Chapter 26 Matrix Panel Operation ................................................................................... 473

Using Matrix Panels Overview ................................................................................. 473
Monitoring Signal Presence ................................................................................... 474
Performing Takes with a Matrix Panel .................................................................... 474
Locking and Protecting Destinations ...................................................................... 475
Disconnecting a Destination .................................................................................. 478
Swapping Destinations .......................................................................................... 478
Using Salvos .............................................................................................................. 478
Executing a Salvo ................................................................................................... 478
Locking and Protecting a Salvo .............................................................................. 479
Chapter 27 Source Preview and Multi Display Page Operation .......................... 481
Source Preview and Multi Display Page Operation Overview .............................. 481
Performing Takes ...................................................................................................... 481
Locking and Protecting Destinations ....................................................................... 482
Locking a Destination ............................................................................................ 482
Using a Source Preview Panel .................................................................................. 484
Chapter 28 Matrix Partitioning ............................................................................................ 485

Matrix Partitioning Overview .................................................................................. 485
Matrix Partitioning Types ......................................................................................... 485
No Partitioning (With Advanced Settings) .............................................................. 485
RGB/Stereo Partitioning (Advanced) ...................................................................... 487
Contiguous Partitioning (With Advanced Settings) ................................................ 488
Wild Partitioning .................................................................................................... 489
Shared Inputs (With Advanced Settings) ................................................................ 489
xiv Contents
Mono Breakaway (With Advanced Settings) ........................................................... 490

Stereo Breakaway (With Advanced Settings) .......................................................... 490
Appendix B Configuring Control Panel Buttons ........................................................... 493

Control Panel Button Configuration Overview ....................................................... 493
Creating a Source Select Key .................................................................................... 495
Creating a Destination Select Key ............................................................................ 496
Creating a Crosspoint Select Key ............................................................................. 497
Creating a Category/Index Key (ABA Series Panels Only) ...................................... 498
Creating a Salvo Select Key ...................................................................................... 499
Adding or Editing a Salvo ....................................................................................... 499
Creating a Command Select Key .............................................................................. 501
Adding Commands ................................................................................................ 502
Editing Commands ................................................................................................ 502
Deleting Commands .............................................................................................. 502
Creating a Function Key ............................................................................................ 503
Creating a Panel Status Key ...................................................................................... 504
Creating a Page Key (ABA Series Panels Only) ........................................................ 505
Creating a Lock Key ................................................................................................... 506
Creating a Protect Key .............................................................................................. 507
Creating a Breakaway/Follow Key ........................................................................... 508
Creating an Alarm Key (RCP Panels, RCP-IDe, RCP-32x8CQp, 16x2CS, and 32x2CS Pan-
els Only) ..................................................................................................................... 509
Using the Alarm Editor ........................................................................................... 510
Adding Alarm Types ............................................................................................... 510
Editing Alarm Types ............................................................................................... 513
Deleting Alarm Types ............................................................................................. 514
Creating a Source Alarm Select Key ......................................................................... 514
Creating a Destination Alarm Select Key ................................................................. 515
Creating a Parametric Key ........................................................................................ 517
Using the Parametric Editing Setup Capability ........................................................ 518
Adding Parametric Settings .................................................................................... 518
Editing Parametric Settings ..................................................................................... 521
Deleting Parametric Settings .................................................................................. 521
Creating a Chop Key (RCP-ABA and RCPp-LCD only) .............................................. 521
Creating an On-Air Swap Key (RCP-12×2BAp only) ................................................ 522
Appendix C Troubleshooting and Frequently Asked Questions ........................... 525

Troubleshooting Router Panel Problems ................................................................. 525
Frequently Asked Questions ..................................................................................... 526
Database Editor Sources and Destinations .............................................................. 527
Database Editor Advanced Functions ...................................................................... 527
Appendix D Function Mapping: RouterMapper to Navigator.................................. 529

Navigator Routing Components xv
User Manual
Function Mapping Overview .................................................................................... 529
Index......................................................................................................................... 531
xvi Contents
xvii
Preface
Manual Information
Purpose CCS Navigator User Manual: Volume 6: Routing Configuration Guide is a companion guide
to CCS Navigator: Advanced Graphical Navigation Application.
This manual outlines how to use Navigator’s routing configuration capability. For information
on the basic tools and interface of CCS Navigator, please refer to the CCS Navigator:
Advanced Graphical Navigation Application user manual, which is included as a PDF on your
installation DVD.
installation, setup, and/or operation of routers, router control panels, web routing, and Edge
protocol gateways.
Revision Table iii-1 Manual Revision History

History
A CCS Navigator 4.5 May 2009
B CCS Navigator 4.6 November 2009
C CCS Navigator 4.6.1 May 2010
D CCS Navigator 4.7.1 July 2011
E CCS Navigator 4.8 April 2012
F CCS Navigator 4.9 July 2012

The printed documentation for your product is included with your Installation DVD, as well
as on the Installation DVD as an Adobe Acrobat PDF file. The online help is an electronic
document integrated into the software.
xviii Preface
To obtain printed copies of these manuals, you have three options:
 Use the included Adobe Acrobat Reader software to open and print the consolidated
Adobe PDF file of the user manuals included on the Installation DVD.
 Download and print the consolidated Adobe PDF file from our website.
 Order the user manuals in printed, spiral-bound form from Imagine Communications.
When you order user manuals, refer to the specific part numbers in the table above to
ensure that you get the user manuals you require.
Table iii-2 Manual Part Numbers

User Manual Part Number
CCS Navigator User Manual Volume 1: Device 175-000114-00
Control
CCS Navigator User Manual Volume 2: 175-000236-01
Graphical Navigation
IconMaster Software Control Panel Startup
Guide
NEXIONav
NAVIGATOR-INT Initial Startup Guide
CCS Navigator User Manual Volume 6: Routing 175-100032-00
Configuration
While working in the application, you can open the Online Help and print out individual
topics.
Writing Conventions
Table iii-3 Writing Conventions

Term or
Description
Convention
Bold Indicates dialog boxes, property sheets, fields,
buttons, check boxes, list boxes, combo boxes,
menus, submenus, windows, lists, and selection
names
Italics Indicates E-mail addresses, the names of books or
publications, and the first instances of new terms
and specialized words that need emphasis
CAPS Indicates a specific key on the keyboard, such as
ENTER, TAB, CTRL, ALT, or DELETE
Code Indicates variables or command-line entries, such as
a DOS entry or something you type into a field
Navigator Routing Components xix
User Manual
Table iii-3 Writing Conventions (Continued)

Term or
Description
Convention
> Indicates the direction of navigation through a
hierarchy of menus and windows
hyperlink Indicates a jump to another location within the
electronic document or elsewhere
Indicates important information that helps to avoid
and troubleshoot problems
Application including CCS Navigator, IconMasterNav, CCS Pilot,
and CCS CoPilot
Contacting If you have questions about this or other Imagine Communications products, contact us for
technical support and product information.
Us
Technical We are committed to providing round-the-clock, 24-hour service to our customers around
Support the world. Visit our website for information on how to contact the Customer Service team
in your geographical region.
Product If you would like the latest product information or documentation, contact your dealer or
Information our Sales Department; or, visit our website for more information.
xx Preface
Contacting Us
1
Introduction to Routing
Components
Basic Routing Components Features

Developing a Magellan CCS Navigator routing system is a multi-step process that requires
you to do the following:
 Discover the devices

 Create a routing system
 Set up the logical database
 Set up the physical devices (routers, control panels, Edge, web routers)
 Control the devices
The chapters in this book are laid out in this same basic order. Each process step is
introduced by a section marker that briefly describes the functions of that process step. The
chapters that follow each section marker provide detailed information on how to fulfill each
function.
Router Discovering Devices

Volume Discovery is the process by which Magellan CCS Navigator finds and connects to the IP
addresses of devices so that you can access the devices remotely from the PC. Information
Features about discovering devices starts on page 7; information on how the Discovery process
operates is covered in Magellan CCS Navigator User Manual Volume 1: Device Control.
Creating Routing Systems

Information about creating a routing system starts on page 13.
Setting Up Logical Databases

A logical database can be described as the overall “picture” of the entire routing system. A
database includes one or more levels, as well as a number of logical sources and logical
destinations. Information about setting up logical databases starts on page 77.
Setting Up Physical Devices

Imagine Communications router frames and control hardware can be added to the database
by discovering devices or by polling the control network for installed devices. Information
about setting up physical devices starts on page 197.
2
Introduction to Routing Components
Controlling Routing Systems

Information about controlling devices starts on page 455.
Additional Information
Various appendices in this volume provide details about functions used in router control.
Appendix information starts on page 485.
RouterMapper Function Remapping

Experienced RouterMapper users will find virtually all of the same functions and features
remapped within Magellan CCS Navigator. Information about remapping starts on
page 529.
Navigator Routing Components 3
User Manual
Router Node Functionality

Figure 1-1 shows you what actions will take place when you are in Build or Control mode
when setting up your routing system.
NAVIGATION
BUILD MODE CONTROL MODE
WINDOW
Can create routing systems
Poll whole system (right click > Poll)

Download whole system (right click >
Download)
Set communcation (right click >
Properties)
Double-click launches Navigator

Double click launches Database Editor
Category Index control
In Control Mode double clicking will

Created by default when creating a new
launch the appropriate Routing Control
configuration
(Matrix/MB/SB) with default options (all
(In Build mode they do nothing)
sources and destinations assigned)
Double clicking on Salvo folder launches Double clicking on Salvo folder launches
Salvo Editor to create Salvo Editor to view
Will show status – Active/Inactive

Selects the salvo in Salvo Editor Can right-click > Execute to take salvo
Double clicking on actual device Nodes

will launch the configuration of that
device
Double clicking on actual module’s

nodes will launch their configuration
window (if available) Double clicking will launch the CCSP
control or other control (like P-HSCQ if
available)
Double clicking on actual device nodes

will launch the configuration of that
device
Double clicking will launch the Wizard to Double clicking will launch the custom
configure this software panel routing panel created
Double clicking launches routing Double clicking launches DRFM to

configuration tool to configure tielines control tielines
Figure 1-1. Quick Reference Chart: Routing System Node Functionality

4
Routing Operations Tools

The following operation tools are available for router databases. The tools you have
available differ, depending on the stage of routing system development. Unavailable tools
are greyed out and not selectable.
Router Shortcut Menus

Shortcut menus contain a list of options relevant to a selected object, a current dialog box,
or a current operational mode. For routing operations, shortcut menu selections are
available by selecting an object, and then right-clicking the mouse.
Selections for routing operations only are shown in Table 1-1. See “Using the Graphical
Navigation Context Menus” in Volume 2: Graphical Navigation for information about other
selections.
Some options may be unavailable in the context imposed by the active operational mode, or
the selected item.
Table 1-1 Routing Operations Shortcut Menu Selections

Command Functions
Configuration This selection launches the routing configuration utility tool for the
selected object. See the pertinent configuration and editing chapters for
specific objects (Platinum, Panacea, Integrator, control panels, Edge) for
more information.
Poll This selection is used to query the control system for any programmable
devices that may be present. Polling obtains information about the
current configuration of each physical device, and compares it to the
information found in the database to determine if the database
information matches the actual configuration.See “Polling Devices” on
Download This selection is used to download information about a physical device
so that a new configuration can take effect. See “Downloading Device
Definitions” on page 44 for more information.
Reload This selection is used to refresh the contents of the routing system from
the database.
Rediscover This selection is used to rediscover a device or routing system that had
been discovered previously.
Backup This selection is used to make copies of data; these additional copies
may be used to restore the original if a data loss event occurs. See
“Creating a Router Database Backup” on page 37 for more information.
Restore This selection is used to return data from a backup to a designated
location. See “Restoring a Router Database” on page 38 for more
information.
User Manual
Table 1-1 Routing Operations Shortcut Menu Selections

Command Functions
Create > This selection is used to show the Create submenu. Submenu selections
allow you to add and configure selected parts of a routing system, such
as router frames, hardware and software and panels, Edge frames,
salvos, and tie lines. See “Physical Device Setup” on page 197.
Rename This selection is used to change the name of the selected control system.
6
7
Discovering Routing Devices
Router Device Discovery

Discovery is the process by which Magellan CCS Navigator finds and connects to the IP
addresses of devices so that you can access the devices remotely from the PC. You will
initially use the Discovery tool to find the devices on your network. Later, you may want to
run a full or partial discovery when you make changes to your network.
The information in this section is based in the supposition that you have a working
knowledge of Magellan CCS Navigator and have used its other capabilities, so the discussion
concentrates only on those processes that are specific to routing components. If you are not
familiar with the Discovery process, please refer to “CCS Device Discovery” in Volume 1:
Device Control before you continue the Discovery process.
Setting Router Discovery Options

To set the discovery options, complete these steps:
If the Discovery pane is closed, open it by selecting Tools > Discovery from the main menu.
When docked, the Discovery pane defaults to the bottom left of the Magellan CCS
Navigator screen.
2 Select and complete the Hosts tab. See “Setting Host IP Addresses for a Router Discovery”
on page 7.
3 Select and complete the Save tab. See “Setting Discovery Save Options” on page 10.
4 Click OK to save the discovery options.
Setting Host IP Addresses for a Router Discovery

1 Set Magellan CCS Navigator to Build mode: From the main menu, select File > Operational
Mode > Build. If your status bar is open, a yellow Build indicator appears in the bottom
right corner of the Magellan CCS Navigator screen.
2 Click Options on the Discovery Window.
The Hosts tab of the Discovery Options box opens.
8

3 Check the Start Options selections as appropriate, and then do one or both of the
following:
 To add the default IP addresses, click Add Default and ensure that the check box
to the left of IP address 192.168.100.250 and/or 192.168.100.251 is enabled. You
will typically use the default device IP addresses—192.168.100.251 for control
panels and 192.168.100.250 for all other devices—to configure a newly purchased
device connected to the PC on the same Ethernet hub or through an Ethernet
crossover cable.
If you are unsure of the IPs of your devices or have not set them up, enable the scanning of
MAC addresses for a quicker discovery.
User Manual
 To add other IP addresses, click Add, and then, in the Add Host dialog box that
opens, add the IP address of a device available for discovery.

4 Under Select Products for Discovery, click the check boxes that correspond to your
preferences. By default the first item is checked.
 The X75, NEO...Platinum... selection includes CCS-enabled devices. Use this
selection to discover a Platinum router.
 The Routing Devices selection includes X-Y enabled devices such as Panacea,
Integrator, Edge, ABA and programmable panels, and so forth
5 If you select the first check box, its Options button is enabled. (If you do not select this
check box, proceed to step 6.) To change the communication settings, click Options.
The Communication Settings dialog box opens. Choose one of the following settings:
Table 1-1 Discovery Communication Settings

Option Function
Broadcast (default) Communicates with devices that are on the same subnet as the
CCS application
Point-to-Point Communicates with devices that are on a different subnet and
cannot be discovered using the Broadcast option
Authentication Not currently implemented
Click OK to save the selection and return to the Add Host box, and then proceed to step 6.
6 If you select the second check box, its Options button is enabled. (you do not select this
check box, proceed to step 7.) To change the router settings, click Options.
10
The Router Discovery Settings box opens. Choose one of the following settings:
Table 1-2 Router Discovery Settings

Option Function
Full Discovery Discovers all routing devices, including such legacy frames as XPlus and
XPRESS
Express Discover only later-model devices such as Panacea or Integrator. This
selection takes less time to process, but will not include your complete
routing system if it contains legacy devices.
7 If you select the third check box, its Options button is enabled. (you do not select this
check box, proceed to step 8.) To change the SNMP information settings, click Options.
The SNMP Information box opens. Choose one of the following settings:
Table 1-3 SNMP Information Settings

Option Function
Read Community Enter the name here if it differs from the displayed default value
Port Enter a number from 0 to 65535; the default port is 161
Timeout Desired time period (in seconds) before a discovery gives up on
finding the SNMP device; the time period can range from 1 to
1000 seconds
Retries Number of times to try to discover devices if the initial attempt
fails; the number of retries if the discovery fails can range from 1
to 1000
8 If you selected the fourth check box, click the Options button to the right of the check box.
(you do not select this check box, proceed to step 9.) To change the HTTP port values, click
Options.
The HTTP Port(s) box opens. Verify the port number in the corresponding text box, or
change it if desired.
9 If desired, select the last two items, and then click OK to close the Add Host dialog box.
Setting Discovery Save Options

1 Click on the Save tab to review the options about how the results of your discovery will be
placed in the Navigation Window pane’s Discovery folder. You can
 Replace or append the previous contents of the Discovery folder
 Define the naming conventions for discovered devices
For more detailed information about this function, see Volume 1: Device Control.
2 Click OK to close the Discovery Options window.

User Manual
Running a Discovery for a Router

1 Click Start on the Discovery Window button bar.
and device IDs for all responding devices in the Status box of the Discovery Window.
2 When the discovery is complete, click Save on the Discovery Window button bar to
transfer the discovery results to the Discovery folder in the Navigation Window pane.
For more detailed information about this function, see Volume 1: Device Control.
Figure 1-3 Routing System Saved in the Discovery Window

You are now ready to set up a routing system. Proceed to the section “Creating and
Maintaining Routing Systems” on page 13.
12
13
Creating and Maintaining

Routing Systems
Routing Systems Overview

A Routing System is a set of interconnected devices that direct signals from a set of sources
to a set of destinations. When a routing system is organized into a configuration, it can be
controlled through a routing view.
Navigator Server links directly to routing configuration utility, where you can define logical
routing views containing sources, destinations, and switching levels. You can also import
configurations from existing RouterMapper databases.
A router database is shared among all users within the system. Adding a new router
configuration makes this configuration available to all users. Replacing or deleting a
configuration affects all users who are currently making use of that configuration (for
example, using it in Navigator pages). Be careful when replacing or deleting a router
configuration.
 See Creating a Routing System on page 15 for information about creating a routing
system via discovery or manually.
 See Router Page and Panel Construction on page 45 for information about creating
router pages and software panel definitions.
 See Routing System Maintenance on page 31 for information about operational
functions available for database maintenance.
14
Creating and Maintaining Routing Systems
15
1 Creating a Routing System
Routing System Creation Overview

To a router with Magellan CCS Navigator, the PC must be connected to a serial port or a
network port in the routing system. This can be done using a CCS Router Gateway or by
connecting directly to the Ethernet port of the router.
To create a routing system, you can discover the router using Magellan CCS Navigator’s
discovery tools or you can create a system manually, configuring the matrix and partition
settings. If you create the system manually, all the cards will be missing.
A router database is shared among all users within the system. Adding a new router
configuration makes this configuration available to all users. Replacing or deleting a
configuration affects all users who are currently making use of that configuration (for
example, using it in Magellan CCS Navigator pages). Be careful when replacing or deleting a
router configuration.
Only an Administrator user of a Magellan CCS Navigator Server can create a routing system.
Using the Routers Folder of a Navigation Pane

The Routers folder of the Navigation pane contains nodes and folders for configuration,
control, and monitoring of your entire routing environment. Figure 1-1 shows a view of the
Routers folder and Table 1-1 defines the folder components.
16 Chapter 1
Creating a Routing System
One or more Router System

folders, which contain
Logical Mappings and Salvos
folders
One Routing Devices folder,

which contains devices,
including discovered
Platinum frames, router
frames, control panels, and
gateways
Figure 1-1 Routers Folder of the Navigation Pane

User Manual
Table 1-1 Components of a Routers Folder

Folder Function
Control Views Contains a Routing View icon; may contain more than one Routing View
if you had a previous version of Magellan CCS Navigator and created
multiple routing views within a routing system
Routers Contains one icon for each device used within a routing system, including
router frames, control panels and gateways
Control Can contain the following:
panels  Software Control Panels folder with links for matrix panel, multi bus
panel, and so on
 Edge Devices folder that contains Edge protocol gateways
 Control Panels folder containing hardware routing panels
Salvos Lists available salvos, if a routing system has salvos defined
Creating a Routing System via Discovery

1 Make sure that Magellan CCS Navigator is in Build mode.
2 Discover your devices as described in the Discovering Routing Devices section.
The new routing group selection appears under the Discovery folder in the Navigation
pane.
3 Select the new routing group selection name, and then drag-and-drop it onto the Router
folders.
.The Create Routing System shortcut menu opens.
Figure 1-2 Create Routing System Dialog Box

4 In the Routing System Name field, enter a name for the routing system, and then click
OK.
The new routing system appears under the Routers folder in the Navigation pane. (This
may take a few seconds.)
5 Expand the Discovery folder selection, and then select the routing group that was just
discovered.
6 Drag-and-drop the routing group frame selection into the new routing system folder.
When an alert box asks you to confirm the process, click Yes.
The discovered routing group is copied into the new routing system folder.
7 Collapse the Discovery folder (this avoids possible confusion between the different folder
selections).
18 Chapter 1
8 Expand the Routers folder and newly-created routing system folder to display a series of
subfolders. Expand the subfolder titled Routers to see the routing group selection.
9 Right-click on the routing group selection name, and then click Poll.
Magellan CCS Navigator queries all downloadable devices connected to the control system
to determine which devices exist, and whether the configuration of each is up-to-date with
respect to the database.
If desired, you can manually add individual components to the routing system. See
“Manually Adding Components to a Routing System” on page 19 for more information.
10 When the Poll is complete, expand the Control views folder, and then double-click the new
routing system name.
A series of tabs with logical database configuration information become available. You may
accept the configuration information as it appears, or you can change the configuration as
desired. See the Logical Database Setup section for more information about configuring
the logical database.
11 Double-click the newly-polled routing group selection.

A series of tabs with hardware configuration information pertinent to the router type
become available. You may accept the configuration information as it appears, or you can
change the configuration as desired. See the Physical Device Setup section for more
information about configuring the different device types.
Creating a New Routing System

1 Make sure that Magellan CCS Navigator is in Build mode.
2 Right click on Routers in the Navigation pane, and then select Create > Routing System
from the context menu.
The New Routing System Configuration dialog box opens.
Figure 1-3 New Routing System Configuration Dialog Box

User Manual
3 In the Name field, enter a name for the routing system.

This is the name that will appear in the Navigation window.
4 Under Create Options, choose one of the following:

 Start from a blank configuration - This selection allows you to designate a new
routing system, and then populate it manually or with a system poll.
 Use an existing RouterMapper DA4 file or a routing system backup file -
This selection allows you to use an existing RouterMapper database (*.DA4) or a
routing system backup file (*.XML) to create a routing system.
Click the browse button to open a window, where you can choose the file to load.
Figure 1-4 Creating a Routing System from a DA4 File

 Use a configuration from a remote routing server - enter the IP and login
information for the device which has had the routing system backed up to it
5 (Blank system option only) You may place a check beside Perform System Poll to preform
a poll of a specific port or IP when creating the system.
In the Connection field, choose Serial or TCP/IP.
 If you select Serial, enter the comm port and baud rate.
 If you select TCP/IP, enter an IP address.
6 Click OK.
7 Expand the Control views folder, and then double-click the new routing system name.
A series of tabs with logical database configuration information become available. You can
set up the configuration as desired. See the Logical Database Setup section for more
information about configuring the logical database.
8 You can manually add devices to your new router system as described in “Manually Adding
Components to a Routing System” on page 19.
Manually Adding Components to a Routing System

1 Right click on the name of the newly-created routing system in the Navigation pane, and
then select Create >.
A shortcut menu opens.
20 Chapter 1
Figure 1-5 Create Shortcut Menu Selections
Adding a Router Frame

1 Choose Router Frame... from the context menu.
The Select Router Type dialog box opens.
2 Choose one of the following selections:

 For a Platinum router, click the Platinum icon, and then follow the configuration
steps provided in Chapter 15.
 For a Panacea router, click the Panacea icon, and then follow the configuration
 For a combiner system, click the Combiner System icon, and then follow the
configuration steps provided in Adding Combiner Systems in Chapter 17.
 For an Integrator router, click the Integrator icon, and then follow the configuration
 For any of the remaining router selections, click the corresponding icon, and then
follow the configuration steps provided in Chapter 18.
Adding an Edge Frame

1 Choose Edge Frame... from the context menu.
The Add Edge dialog box opens.
2 Follow the configuration steps provided in Chapter 19.
Adding a Hardware Routing Panel

1 Choose Hardware Routing Panel... from the context menu.
2 The Add Panels dialog box opens.
 For an Alphanumeric Breakaway (ABA) panel, follow the configuration steps
provided Chapter 20.
The RCP-ABA (1RU) is available in these models: the XY, the SB, and the AFV/MB models.
The RCP-ABA (2RU) is available in these models: the XY, the SB, and the MB models. These
panels differ in appearance and functionality, but use similar configuration procedures.
 For a programmable panel, follow the configuration steps provided Chapter 21.
User Manual
Programmable panels (1RU) are available in these models: 4×1, 4×4, 8×1, 8×8, 16×1, 16×1
LCD (RCP-IDe), 16×4, 16×8, 16×16, 32×1, 32×8, and 32×8CQp. These panels differ in
appearance and functionality, but use similar configuration procedures.
Configuration information for RCP-16PB, RCP-48PB, RCP-96PB, RCP-32PB-OLED,

RCP-16LCD, RCP-32LCD, RCP-24LCD-OLED is provided in their respective installation and
operation manuals.
Programmable panels (2RU) are available in these models: 16×16 LCD (RCP-IDe), 32×1 LCD
(RCP-IDe), 32×4, 32×32, 32×32 LCD (RCP-IDe), 64×1, 64×1 LCD (RCP-IDe). These panels
differ in appearance and functionality, but use similar configuration procedures.
Configuration information for RCP-48LCD-OLED, RCP-64LCD, RCP-64PB-OLED is provided

in their respective installation and operation manuals.
Adding a Software Routing Panel

1 Choose Software Routing Panel... from the context menu.
2 A shortcut menu opens.
 For a classic matrix software panel, choose the Matrix Classic... selection, and
then follow the configuration steps provided in Creating Grid, Single-Bus, Multi
Bus and Matrix Panels on page 56.
 To monitor and control the status of an entire router system from a single screen,
choose the Matrix Panel... selection, and then follow the configuration steps
provided in Creating Grid, Single-Bus, Multi Bus and Matrix Panels on
page 56.
 To select any number of destinations and then assign a source; choose the
Multi-Bus Panel... selection, and then follow the configuration steps provided in
Creating Grid, Single-Bus, Multi Bus and Matrix Panels on page 56.
 To assign a source to a single pre-determined destination, choose the Single-Bus
Panel... selection, and then follow the configuration steps provided in Creating
Grid, Single-Bus, Multi Bus and Matrix Panels on page 56.
Adding a Routing Salvo

1 Choose Routing Salvo.... from the context menu.
The Salvo Editor dialog box opens as shown in Figure 1-7 on page 23.
2 Follow the configuration steps provided in “Working With Salvos” on page 22.
Adding a Routing Tie-Line

1 Choose Routing Tie-Lines.... from the context menu.
The TieLine Configuration dialog box opens.
2 Follow the configuration steps provided in Chapter 12.
Editing Components of a Routing System

Only an Administrator user of a Magellan CCS Navigator Server can edit components of a
Routing System. Magellan CCS Navigator must be in Build mode.
22 Chapter 1
To edit components of a routing system that has already been created, click on an item in
the Navigation pane:
 If you are an Administrator user at a Magellan CCS Navigator Server, click on a Routing
View node. The logical configuration opens. Go to the appropriate section of this
volume, and then follow the steps outlined to make any changes. See the Logical
Database Setup section for more information about configuring the logical database.
 Click on a Software control panel view. The corresponding configuration window
opens. Go to the appropriate section of this volume, and then follow the steps outlined
to make any changes. See Chapter 3.
The default panels cannot be configured.
 Click on a router frame icon or module. The corresponding configuration window

to make any changes. See the Physical Device Setup section for more information
about configuring the different device types.
 Click on a Salvo folder to trigger the Salvo Editor.
The Salvo Editor shows the list of available salvos, and if you click on a specific salvo,
the Salvo Editor opens for that salvo (see Working With Salvos on page 22).
Administrator and General users can create and edit salvos.
 Click on the Tieline node to will open the tieline configuration window. (See
Managing Dynamic Routing Threads for Legacy Products on page 171 for more
information.)
Working With Salvos

All salvos associated with a router appear in that router’s Salvos folder.
Figure 1-6 Routers Section of the Navigation Pane

You can create and edit salvos using Magellan CCS Navigator’s Salvo Editor. Salvos that
have been created in the RouterMapper can be imported into Magellan CCS Navigator for
use on Routing panels. See the following topics:
 “Creating a Salvo” on page 22

 “Editing Salvos” on page 25
Creating a Salvo
Salvos can be created by Administrator and General users of Magellan CCS Navigator
Servers.
To add a salvo, follow these steps:
1 Right click on Router Systems > Salvo in the Navigation pane and select Create >
Routing Salvo.... from the context menu.
User Manual
The Salvo Editor opens.
Salvo that is currently

being edited
Click the + to open a list of

all the connections
contained in the salvo
Enhanced salvos have a

slightly redder icon than
regular salvos
Salvos that are bold in the

list have been changed
since they were last saved
Figure 1-7 Salvo Editor

2 Click New.
The Rename Salvo dialog box opens.
Figure 1-8 New Salvo Dialog Box

3 Type a new name.
4 (Optional) Place a check beside Enhanced Salvo.
An enhanced salvo can execute on locked or protected sources and destinations, based on
the unlock option you choose:
 No Force Unlock—The salvo will override protected sources and destinations only.
 Force Unlock current user destinations—The salvo will override sources and
destinations locked by the same user that executes the salvo.
 Force Unlock all users’ locked destinations—The salvo will override sources and
destinations locked by any user.
Enhanced salvos must be published to the applicable device before they can be executed.
Device firmware must be Platinum 4.3, Panacea 4.1, and Magellan 1.3 or higher to execute
an enhanced salvo. Devices with firmware older than the specified will ignore enhanced
salvos.
To determine whether a salvo is normal or enhanced, click SalvoIndex Info. The dialog box
that opens also lists the unique index number assigned to each salvo.
5 Click OK to save the name and close the window.

24 Chapter 1
Your salvo appears in the list at the left of the screen.
The following list describes the various buttons surrounding the list of salvos in the Salvo
Editor window:
Table 1-2 Salvo Menu Buttons

Button Function
Rename Opens a window to change the currently selected salvo’s display title
Save Saves changes to the currently selected salvo
Undo Removes the last-made change to the currently selected salvo
Delete Removes the currently selected salvo from the list
New Adds a new salvo to the list
Save All Saves the state of all salvos in the list
Undo All Reverts all salvos back to their saved status
Delete All Removes all salvos from the list
Responder Defines the router for enhanced salvos; select the router from the
drop-down menu
You can now use the salvo editing tools to create your salvo.
6 When you are done creating salvos, click Publish to Devices.

A dialog box opens:
7 From the upper portion of the screen, choose the devices you want to send the salvos and
all other logical information to, and then click Start Transfer.
Salvos and other logical information, including the names.txt files, is sent to applicable
devices in the routing system.
Publish is an Ethernet-only operation. Most legacy devices do not support the Publish
feature in Magellan CCS Navigator. Other devices may require a software upgrade.
Platinum frames require PT-RES version V4.1 or higher, and Panacea frames with enhanced
resource cards require V4.0 or higher in order to properly support the publish feature.
Magellan control panels support publish with any version.
User Manual
Editing To edit a salvo, follow these steps:

Salvos
1 Use one of the following methods to select the salvo you want to edit:
 Double click on the Salvo folder in the Navigation pane to open a list a of all
salvos. On this list you can select a salvo and click OK to open it in the Salvo Edit
dialog box.
 Double click on a salvo in the Salvo folder to open that salvo in the Salvo Edit
dialog box.
2 Create crosspoints on the grid by clicking at intersections between Inputs and Destinations.
The Level Legend in the top right corner of the screen contains one colored entry for each
level in the routing system. As you click on the grid to create crosspoints, all buttons that
are colored are created on the grid. To add breakaway takes, click on the level you want to
add. (To add more than one level at a time, hold the shift button down to activate multiple
levels on the level legend). Then click on the grid.
Navigating the grid:
 Click Grid Size to open a dialog to adjust the grid size of the crosspoint matrix
 Move the sliders on the top and right edges of the grid
You can also use the Quick Select buttons, which appear across the top of the Salvo Edit
screen:
Table 1-3 Salvo Quick Select Buttons

Button Function
Clear All Removes all crosspoints for the currently
Diagonal Creates a default set of crosspoints, connecting In 1 to Dst 1, In
2 to Dst 2, and so forth
Rev Diagonal Creates a default set of crosspoints, connecting In 1 to Dst 64,
In 2 to Dst 63, and so forth
Capture Creates a salvo from a snapshot of the routing system
Merge Opens a window where you can choose another salvo (one of
the other salvos that appears in the Salvo Editor window) to
combine with the currently selected salvo
Execute Executes the actual salvo as it appears
Click on Destination column header buttons to select them. Hold <Shift> or <Ctrl> on
your keyboard to select multiple destinations at the same time. Right click on a Destination
column header. There is one option: Clear column. This removes any crosspoints assigned to
that destination.
To create a disconnect on any destination, click below that destination in the Discnct row.
To create a breakaway disconnect, first select the level(s) in the top left corner that you
would like to disconnect, and then click below the destination in the Discnct row.
26 Chapter 1
Right click an input row marker to see three options:
Table 1-4 Input Right Click Options

Option Function
Clear row Removes all crosspoints from that input
Set all Assigns all levels of all destinations to that input
Set all selected destinations Assigns all levels of all selected (Destinations with blue
column markers) destinations to that input
If you modify a salvo, it needs to be published to routing devices again.
 “Using the Categories Tab” on page 27

 “Using the Grouping Tab” on page 28
 “Using the Tielines Tab” on page 28
At the Sources tab, you can add, edit, or remove sources; assign or change source names;
associate selected icons with sources; add new levels without having to leave the Sources
tab; and assign level inputs to logical sources.
Each column on the Sources tab has its own unique function, as described on page 107.
For detailed information about configuring router sources, see Chapter 6, Configuring
Sources on page 107.
At the Destinations tab, you can add, edit, or remove sources; assign or change
destination names; associate selected icons with destinations; add new levels without
having to leave the Destinations tab; and assign level outputs to logical sources.
Each column on the Destinations tab has its own unique function, as described in
Destinations Tab Components on page 119.
For detailed information about configuring router destinations, see Chapter 7,

Configuring Destinations on page 119.
A level is a way of grouping inputs and outputs together.

User Manual
At the Levels tab, you can add, edit, or remove levels; assign or change level names;
associate selected icons with levels; enable or disable any level (Levels 0-15) allowed in the
system, regardless of whether there is a router on that level; specify a logical router size;
modify level colors, and designate the number of actual hardware inputs and outputs
configured for a level.
Each column on the Levels tab has its own unique function, as described in Levels Tab
Components on page 129.
For detailed information about configuring router levels, see Chapter 8, Configuring
Levels on page 129.
Using the A category is a point to which a source signal is routed. Navigator simplifies the creation of
Categories categories by automatically creating an appropriate category name when a Source or
Tab Destination name is entered in a database. In most cases, the assigned category name does
not require editing. However, for more complex databases, a powerful interface for
managing and editing categories is included on the Categories tab.
At the Categories tab, you can add, edit, or delete categories; assign or change category
names; view sources and destinations affected by a particular category; add, edit, or delete
indexes; change index names; and view sources and destinations affected by a particular
index.
Each column on the Categories tab has its own unique function, as described in
Categories Tab Components on page 137.
For detailed information about configuring router categories and indexes, see Chapter 9,
Configuring Categories and Indexes on page 137
Figure 1-9 Router Configuration - Categories Tab

28 Chapter 1
Using the Grouping allows multiple sources and/or destinations to be grouped together to act as
Grouping Tab categories and indexes.
At the Grouping tab, you can add, edit, or remove grouping sources, destinations, and
salvos.
Each column on the Grouping tab has its own unique function, as described in Levels Tab
For detailed information about configuring groups, see Chapter 10, Configuring
Grouping on page 147.
Figure 1-10 Router Configuration - Grouping Tab
Using the A tieline is a logical connection between one or more sources or destinations, which links
Tielines Tab two components. Tielines allow the sources/destinations from one frame (the upstream
connection) to be available to another frame or frames (the downstream connection[s]).
Figure 11-1 on page 151 shows an illustration of upstream and downstream connections.
Tielines help you expand the size of your system, make resources available to several users
at the same time, or to restrict remote user access to available sources.
At the Tielines tab you can add, edit, or remove tielines; monitor tielines; and perform
advanced tieline procedures.
Each column on the Tielines tab has its own unique function, as described in Tielines Tab
User Manual
For detailed information about configuring tielines, see Chapter 11, Managing Enhanced
Tielines on page 151.
Figure 1-11 Router Configuration - Tielines Tab

30 Chapter 1
31
2 Routing System Maintenance
Maintaining Routing Systems

Once a routing system is created and configured, there are a number of operational
functions used for database maintenance. Using different plug-ins and shortcut menu
options, you can view router configurations, set preferences, backup and restore routing
system databases, and update router databases.
Using the Advanced Router Control Plug-in

Within Magellan CCS Navigator, Administrator users of a Magellan CCS Navigator Server
can use the Advanced Router Control plug-in to set preferences and active or deactivate
router configurations. The plug-in also has tools for setting router engine options.
For more information, see the following:
 Setting Preferences on page 31

 Using the Imagine Communications Router Service on page 34
 Creating a Router Database Backup on page 37
 Restoring a Router Database on page 38
Setting This function allows you to set selections that display certain kinds of helpful information
Preferences when you edit router databases or panel settings.
1 From the Navigation pane, select Options > Plug-ins....

The Plug-ins dialog box opens. This window displays all plug-ins installed on your system.
2 Select the Advanced Router Control plug-in entry from the list on the left side of the
screen, and then click Configure.
The Router Configuration dialog box opens.
3 In the Editing Options box, click Preferences.

The Editor Preferences dialog box opens. Table 2-1 provides a list of the dialog box
selections and their descriptions.
32 Chapter 2
Routing System Maintenance
Figure 2-1 Editor Preferences Dialog Box
Table 2-1 Editor Preferences Selection Descriptions

Selection Description
Hints: Router Database Allows display of warnings whenever a user reassigns logical source or
Editing destination definitions
Hints: Copy Panels Allows display of hints on how to copy a panel's button definitions from one
panel to another panel
Hints: Override Configured Allows display of warnings when you copy Integrator’s Detected Matrix database
Matrix over to a Programmed Matrix database
Hints: Unknown Status Allows display of warnings whenever you download a configuration: a device
Devices with an unknown status
Hints: Panacea And Edge Allows display of warnings when you remove a frame’s configuration files after a
download or an upload, or reset a frame after a download
Hints: User Download Allows display of messages about selecting different options for downloading
Options devices (see “Downloading Device Definitions” on page 44 for more information
about this topic)
Allows display of three download options:
 Download selected devices
Normal  Download changed devices
 Download all devices
See Figure 2-2 for an example of this selection preference
Allows display of appropriate download options based on available devices in a
database (it “filters” the device option to allow you to either download panels or
Advance
other devices separately)
See Figure 2-3 for an example of this selection preference
User Manual
Table 2-1 Editor Preferences Selection Descriptions (Continued)

Turn on Long Name Allows the downloading of long names added from the Database Editor Sources
Download and Destinations configuration functions
Hints: Panel Definition Editing Allows display of warnings when you delete a panel's button definition and
when you redefine a panel's button definition
Legacy Frame  Keeps and shows all found legacy frames (VIA, XPlus, XPRESS, MixBox, and so
forth) when a system poll is completed
 Removes all legacy frames from the database when a system poll is completed
 Asks which of the above operations to perform after a system poll is
completed
Logical Database Allows display of messages when logical database changes require updates to
Synchronizationa the Platinum, Panacea, and Edge products that support logical names
synchronization
a Logical names synchronization allows dynamically updatable name support within a router control system. The feature
provides a means by which all devices using the same source and destination names can receive notifications when the
name has changed. As a result, the user does not have to download the device database information for the name
synchronization to take place.
34 Chapter 2
Figure 2-2 Normal Download Display
Figure 2-3 Advance Download Display
Only an Administrator user at a Magellan CCS Navigator Server in Build mode can do this
procedure.
1 Plug-ins....
2 The Plug-ins dialog box opens. This window displays all plug-ins installed on your
system.Select the Advanced Router Control plug-in entry from the list on the left side of
the screen, and then click Configure.
3 AdvancedIf desired,
Using the Imagine Communications Router Service

You may occasionally get a message displaying “Server Busy”. This occurs if the Router
Service, which is acting as a server in this context, is busy performing a task when you
attempt to perform another task on the Router Service. In this case, wait a moment and
then click Retry to perform the action that triggered the message.
User Manual
The Imagine Communications Router Service, also known as the router engine, provides
control and monitoring of Imagine Communications and other supported routing devices. It
combines routing devices into routing configurations that can be represented by routing
views though mapping of inputs and outputs to logical sources and destinations.
When you install Magellan CCS Navigator in your system, the Router Service is installed as
well. The Router Service is activated when Magellan CCS Navigator is started up, and
de-activated when Magellan CCS Navigator is closed.
You can change the way the Router Service communicates by setting Router Engine
options. See Setting Router Engine Options on page 35.
Setting Router Engine Options

The router engine is available in Build mode only, on Magellan CCS Navigator Servers. To set
router engine options, follow these steps:
1 From the Navigation pane, select Options > Plug-ins... The Plug-ins dialog box opens.
This window displays all plug-ins installed on your system.
2 Select the Advanced Router Control plug-in entry from the list on the left side of the
screen, and then click Configure.
The Advanced Router Configuration dialog box opens.
3 Click on the Router Engine tab if it is not the active tab.
Figure 2-4 Advanced Router Configuration - Engine Options

36 Chapter 2
Table 2-2 Router Configuration Engine Options

Option Result
Enable Logging Turns on logging of all routing events to a file
Log File The file name used for logging of routing events
Device Polling The interval at which the router engine checks for devices within
Period (seconds) active configurations. Configurations are activated when they are
saved in the Navigation window and you switch to Control mode
Module Polling The interval at which the router engine checks for modules within
Period (seconds) active configurations. Configurations are activated when they are
saved in the Navigation window and you switch to Control mode
Device/Module The amount of time a device or module can be missed within an
Timeout (seconds) active configuration before a notification is sent from the router
engine indicating an inactive device or module
Generate Alarms When selected, prevents notification of alarms
on Critical Status
Warn use of Serial When selected, a warning will pop up when you load Magellan CCS
Connection Navigator if the default router configuration uses a serial connection.
Routers When the default router configuration uses a serial connection, COM
1 will not be available for other uses.
4 When you are satisfied with your selections, click OK to close the Advanced Router
Configuration screen.
Deleting a Routing Configuration

Only an Administrator user at a Magellan CCS Navigator Server in Build mode can delete a
routing configuration.
A router database is shared among all users within the system, and not per user. Adding a
new router configuration will make this configuration available to all users. Replacing or
deleting a configuration will affect all users who are currently making use of this particular
configuration (for example, using it in Magellan CCS Navigator pages). Therefore, be careful
when replacing or deleting existing router configurations within the system.
1 To delete a routing configuration, right click on the item you want to delete in the
Navigation pane.
2 Select Delete from the menu that appears.
This will remove the routing configuration from the Magellan CCS Navigator router
database. Any pages or graphical router control panels based on the configuration will be
inoperable.
User Manual
Creating a Router Database Backup

This operation backs up a single router database. It is not a substitute for the Magellan CCS
Navigator backup operation, which backs up all Magellan CCS Navigator data, including
router system configurations, Navigator pages, graphical images, and discovered devices.
Only an Administrator user at a Magellan CCS Navigator Server in Build mode can backup a
database. Follow these steps:
1 In the Navigation panel, right-click on the name of the routing system you want to backup.
2 Choose the Backup selection from the menu list.

3 The Backup Routing System dialog box opens.
Figure 2-5 Backup Routing System Dialog Box

4 Select one of the following:
 Choose To a ZIP file with embedded XML to back up a routing system database
to a ZIP file in XML format.
If necessary, click the ... box to the right of the File text box, and then navigate to
the location to where you want to backup the routing system file.
 Select To a remote router server to backup the routing system to a remote server.
 Enter the IP address of the remote router server.
 Select a remote router server from the list of available routing devices in the
drop-down list box. After selecting the router device, enter the FTP user name and
password for the remote server (default user name is leitch; default password is
leitchadmin).
6 Click OK to launch the backup procedure.
When saving a database, the connection to the router will be interrupted, and then
automatically reconnected once saving is complete.
38 Chapter 2
Restoring a Router Database

This operation restores a single router database. It does not replicate the functionality of the
Magellan CCS Navigator restore operation, which restores all Magellan CCS Navigator data,
including router system configurations, Navigator pages, graphical images, and discovered
devices.
Only an Administrator user at a Magellan CCS Navigator Server in Build mode can restore a
router database using a previous backup. Note that this operation will overwrite the existing
database So, you might want to backup (save) the current database before restoring a new
one, to prevent information from being lost.
1 In the Navigation panel, right-click on the name of the routing system you want to backup.
2 Choose the Restore selection from the menu list.

3 The Restore Routing System dialog box opens.
Figure 2-6 Restore Routing System Dialog Box

4 Select one of the following:
 Choose From a ZIP file with embedded XML to restore a routing system (in XML
format) from a ZIP file.
If necessary, click the ... box to the right of the File text box, and then navigate to
the location from where you want to restore the routing system file.
 Select From a remote router server to restore a database from a remote server.
Do one of the following:
 Enter the IP address of the remote router server.
 Select a remote router server from the list of available routing devices from the
drop-down list box. After selecting the router device, enter the FTP user name
and password for the remote server (default user name is leitch; default
password is leitchadmin).
5 Click OK launch the restore procedure.
User Manual
Polling Polling may be used to add control panels and/or Platinum, Panacea, and Integrator series
frames to the database. Polling may also be used to determine whether the configuration of
Devices the physical devices is up-to-date with respect to the database configuration. When polling
is initiated, Magellan CCS Navigator compares a version stamp stored within the device
with a version stamp stored in the editor database. If the versions do not match, the
physical device must be updated with the current database information. Device information
must be downloaded again, as explained in “Downloading Device Definitions” on page 44.
To initiate a poll, follow these steps:
1 Highlight the device entry that requires polling. Use standard Windows selection techniques
to select multiple devices.
2 Right-click the mouse button to access the Poll function.
3 Select Selected Devices(s) or Entire Router System.

Magellan CCS Navigator queries all downloadable devices connected to the control system
to determine which devices exist, and whether the configuration of each is up-to-date with
respect to the database.
 If new devices are found, the device list at the Navigation pane is updated. Table
2-3 on page 39 shows a listing of the polling status designators.
Specialized dialog boxes can help you pinpoint and correct polling problems in a Combiner
system. See “Combiner System Polling Problems” on page 41 for explanations and
examples.
 If errors are found during the polling process, Magellan CCS Navigator lists the
errors at the main window. Table 2-4 on page 41 shows a listing of possible
problem conditions and their corrective actions.
4 After the Poll is successfully completed, the device definitions must be downloaded to the
physical device before the new configuration can take effect. See “Downloading Device
Definitions” on page 44 for information on how to perform this process.
Polling Status Indicators

Table 2-3 Polling Status Indicators
Status Indicator Description
Configuration Errors Device has one or more errors in configuration setup
Device Type Mismatch Device’s configuration does not correlate to its device type
External Thread Failed Integrator frame in a Combiner system has invalid thread(s) connections
Flash Not Installed Integrator frame’s logic card does not have flash memory
Hardware Changed Integrator frame’s read-only data has been updated based on latest device’s
hardware setup
Multiple Devices Two or more same type devices have the same ID
Needs Download Device’s configuration and/or thread connections (only in Integrator frame) are
mismatched, or device configuration has been modified
New New device is added to the database
40 Chapter 2
Table 2-3 Polling Status Indicators(Continued)

Status Indicator Description
Not Found Device is not found
OK Device is found with matching configuration. If device is an Integrator frame, it
has valid Thread connection(s)
Out of Memory Integrator frame does not have enough memory to store configuration data
Partial Found Combiner system has one or more Integrator frame(s) that are missing
System Errors Combiner system has one or more Integrator frame(s) that have one or more of
the following errors:
 Configuration errors
 Device type mismatch
 Flash not installed
 Hardware change
 Multiple devices
 Out of memory
Thread Failed Unable to retrieve Integrator frame’s thread connection(s)
Unknown Magellan CCS Navigator does not recognize the device type or needs to do a
system poll to update its database (every time a database is loaded, all devices’
status is reset to “Unknown”)
User Manual
Possible Polling Problems

Table 2-4 Polling Problems and Corrective Actions
Failure Condition Cause Corrective Action
Device did not The device is defined in the database, but could Verify that a device with the specified
respond not be found on the network. ID is in the control system; verify the
physical device’s DIP switch settings
Device style mismatch The type setting in the database did not match Edit the Device Style setting
the type of the physical device found at the Check device IDs
specified ID.
Multiple devices at Two or more physical devices of the same style Change one of the devices to a
same ID were found sharing the same ID. different ID
Multiple styles with Two or more physical devices of different styles Change the ID settings (all devices
same ID were found sharing the same ID. sharing an ID must be the same style)
Combiner System Polling Problems

Specialized dialog boxes help you pinpoint and correct polling problems in a Combiner
system. These dialog boxes will pop up after you have performed a system poll. (See
Polling Devices on page 39 for more information about performing a system poll).
1 If there are problems in your Combiner system, Magellan CCS Navigator displays a
Combiner System Error Report.
Figure 2-7 Combiner System Error Report Dialog Box

The Combiner System Issues box shows all of the hardware included as part of the
Combiner system. Frames with associated errors are marked with a red “X” superimposed
over the frame icon.
1 Click any of the frames with errors associated.

A Device Description dialog box opens, which displays frame-specific information such as
Frame ID, Level, Matrix, and so on. In the System Error Description box, Magellan CCS
Navigator lists all Combiner system errors.
42 Chapter 2
Figure 2-8 Error Report for Specific Frame

2 Highlight any of the error descriptions, and then click Detail... to display the Error
Description dialog box.
Figure 2-9 Error Description Dialog Box

3 The Error Description dialog box describes the system issue or error, and provides
information on how to correct the error. See Table 2-5 on page 42 on for a list of Combiner
system polling failure conditions and their associated corrective actions.
4 After reviewing the error description, click OK to return to the Combiner System Error
Report dialog box, and then click OK to return to the Navigation pane.
5 Perform all recommended corrective actions, and then perform another poll to make sure
that all Combiner system errors have been corrected.
Table 2-5 provides a list of Combiner system polling failure conditions and their associated
corrective actions.
Table 2-5 Combiner System Polling Problems and Corrective Actions

Combiner system has One or more frame members Contact Customer Service representative to get a
old firmware have old firmware version; firmware upgrade
system’s Dynamic Routing
Fabric database is incomplete
Same frame configured One or more frame members Option 1: Configure a new system, and then
in multiple combiner are configured to be part of download devices to update this system’s invalid
system another Combiner system frames
User Manual
Table 2-5 Combiner System Polling Problems and Corrective Actions (Continued)
Option 2:
Leaving one valid frame (that is, with OK status)
turned ON, power down the rest of the frames that
are part of this Combiner system (make sure the
control cable is directly connected to the frame which
is turned on.
Repoll the Combiner system
If the polled system has a valid configuration, power

up the rest of the frames and download this valid
configuration to those frames (a default Combiner
system will be rebuilt after the system poll)
Special configuration to the system will be lost, since
one or more frames were powered down during the
poll
Frame is no longer part One or more frame members Option 1: Configure a new system, and then
of a combiner system are no longer part of this download devices to update this system’s invalid
Combiner system frames
Option 2:
Leaving one valid frame (that is, with OK status)
turned ON, power down the rest of the frames that
are part of this Combiner system.
Make sure the control cable is directly connected to

the frame which is turned on
Repoll the Combiner system
If the polled system has a valid configuration, power

up the rest of the frames and download this valid
configuration to those frames (a default Combiner
system will be rebuilt after the system poll)
Special configuration to the system will be lost, since

one or more frames were powered down during a
poll
One or more frames are One or more frame members Check the control cable and make sure that the
missing are missing frames are powered ON
Delete this Combiner system from the database
Perform another system poll (if the hardware is
unavailable, add the necessary hardware before you
repoll the system.)
Combiner system One or more frame members’ Configure a new system, and then download devices
matrix size is not configuration does not fit with to update this system’s invalid frames
matched this Combiner system
44 Chapter 2
Downloading Device Definitions

After device definitions have been created and edited, they must be downloaded to the
physical device before the new configuration can take effect.
To download a device, follow these steps:

1 Highlight the device entry that requires downloading. Multiple devices may be selected
using standard Windows selection techniques (hold down the <Shift> or <Ctrl> keys to
select multiple devices).
2 Right-click the mouse button to access the Download function.
 If the download process is completed without errors, a summary dialog box opens. This
dialog box lists the number of devices that were successfully downloaded. The Device
List is updated to reflect the current status of the devices (the devices will be marked
“OK”).
 If errors are encountered during the download process, a Download Failures dialog
box opens. This dialog box lists the error(s) encountered for each device. After all errors
are corrected, download the devices again. (See Table 2-6 for corrective actions.)
Table 2-6 Download Problems and Corrective Actions
Device did not The device is defined in the database, Verify that a device having the specified ID is in
respond but could not be found on the network. the control system and is in Program Mode
(devices that have been downloaded must
remain in Program Mode after the download is
complete); verify the physical device’s DIP
switch settings
Device style The Device Style setting in the database Edit the Device Style setting.
mismatch did not match the style of the physical
device found at the specified ID.
Multiple styles with Two or more physical devices of Change the ID settings (all devices sharing an
same ID different styles were found sharing the ID must be the same style).
same ID.
Panel brand User tried to download an Imagine Download the appropriate panel brand (see
mismatch Communications panel configuration to Changing a Panel Brand on page 403 for
a Leitch panel, or a Leitch panel more information).
configuration to an Imagine
Communications panel (a Download
error dialog box will appear and
“Configuration Errors” will appear in
the Navigation pane status row)
45
3 Router Page and Panel

Construction
Page and Panel Construction for Routers

You must have a NAVIGATOR-SRV license to create pages and use pages to monitor and
control devices. Only Administrator users can create pages.
Before creating a router panel, you need to create and configure one or more routers. See
Creating and Maintaining Routing Systems on page 13 for information.
Navigator provides nine types of panels to aid you in your routing work. For an overview of
the different types of panels, see “Choosing a Router Panel” on page 45.
If the control panels created by the wizard do not meet your needs, you can also create a
router control panel by starting from a blank page. See Manually Creating a Router
Control Page on page 70. You can add rules that include events and actions.
You can also place a router Control dialog box (Matrix Classic, Matrix Panel, Multi-Bus
Panel, Multi-Bus Panel with Salvo, Single-Bus Panel, or Single-Bus Panel with Monitor) on a
Navigator page. See Router Components on a Navigator Page on page 66.
Choosing a Router Panel

You must have a NAVIGATOR-SRV license to create pages, and a NAVIGATOR-SRV or
NAVIGATOR-CLI license to use pages to monitor and control devices. Only an Administrator
user can create or edit panels, or grant other users access to panels
The NAVIGATOR-SRV license includes a Routing Panel Wizard for creating nine different
types of routing panel, depending on the type of work you will be doing. All panels are
graphical interfaces that can have optional features such as signal presence, crosspoint
restriction, lock/protect and preset (if your router supports these features).
The panels that can be created with the Routing Panel Configuration wizard are as
follows:
 Multi display panel

 Source preview panel
 Grid panel
 Matrix and matrix classic panels
46 Chapter 3
Router Page and Panel Construction
 Multi-bus and multi-bus with salvo panels

 Single-bus panel and single-bus panel with monitor
Multi Display The Multi Display panel can display up to sixteen source (input) buttons and sixteen
Panel destination (output) buttons for a router, providing an operator the ability to connect any
source to any destination on the panel or one source to various destinations. Destinations
can be locked or protected. Breakaway and AFV take modes are managed via rules.
Sources appear in the top half of the screen, and destinations appear below them. Across
the bottom of the screen are Take, Clear, Lock and Protect buttons. These buttons are
available as options when the screen is built.
Figure 3-1 Sample Router Multi Display
To configure this type of panel, from the main menu, choose File > New, click the Routers
tab, and then double click Multi Display. The Page Wizard is launched. See “Creating a
Multi Display or Source Preview Router Page” on page 53 for information on how to
complete this process.
Source The Source Preview panel can display up to sixteen source (input) buttons and four
Preview destination (output) buttons for a router, so an operator can connect any source to any
Panel destination on the panel. Destinations can be locked or protected. Breakaway and AFV take
modes are managed via rules.
The Source Preview panel also provides a destination display for a fifth destination. To use
the Destination monitor, you must install a video card that is compatible with Microsoft
DirectX 8.1 or later. See “Requirements for Using the Signal Monitor Tool” in Volume 1:
Device Control for more information.
Sources appear in the top half of the screen, and destinations appear below them.Take,
Clear, Lock and Protect buttons are optional.
User Manual
Figure 3-2 Sample Router Source Preview
tab, and then double click Source Preview. The Page Wizard is launched. See “Creating a
Multi Display or Source Preview Router Page” on page 53 for information on how to
complete this process.
Grid Panel Grid panels let you make a quick routing switch on one Destination at a time.
Figure 3-3. Sample Grid Panel
When operating a Grid panel, you select a destination, and then you right click and choose
an Input either in the space below the Destination to switch all selected Inputs to that
destination, or in the space below the destination adjacent to the level you want to switch.
A Grid panel can have up to eight visible levels, and up to 16 visible destinations. The total
number of levels and destinations are defined by your routing system control view.
48 Chapter 3
Lock, Protect, Swap, and Disconnect buttons are optional.
For information about how to operate a grid panel, please see Grid and Bus Panel
Operation on page 461.
tab, and then double click the Grid Panel icon. The Routing Panel Configuration wizard
is launched. See “Creating Grid, Single-Bus, Multi Bus and Matrix Panels” on page 56 for
information on how to complete this process.
Matrix and Matrix Classic Panels

With a Matrix or Matrix Classic panel, you can monitor and control the status of an entire
router system from a single screen. A Matrix panel can display a complete router, by making
use of basic Windows scroll bars. Using the Wizard, you can determine the order that
destinations and sources are displayed in, so the more commonly used items appear in the
top right, or so items that are used together are clustered together.
Crosspoints are displayed in a matrix format with intersecting source and destination lines.
Sources and destinations are connected by clicking at the desired crosspoint.
In a Matrix panel, the sources are displayed as a row of buttons along the side and
destinations are displayed as a row of buttons across the top of the matrix panel. Each
control button may include the source or destination name and icon. These are optional
settings.
Figure 3-4 Matrix Panel

User Manual
In a Matrix Classic panel, sources appear horizontally across the top and destinations appear
vertically down the right side. Sources and destinations are connected by double-clicking at
the desired crosspoint. The Matrix Classic panel has been designed for people who are
accustomed to the RouterWorks panel. Each control button may include the source or
destination name and icon. These are optional settings.
Figure 3-5 Matrix Classic Panel

Crosspoints in the router are monitored via colored markers at the intersections of the
source and destination lines. The markers are displayed as pie-shaped wedges that
correspond to the colors of the Level buttons. If, for example, a video level button is colored
blue, a blue marker at the intersection of a source and destination line indicates that the
source is connected on the video level. If more than one colored marker is present at an
intersection, the source is connected on each of the levels displayed. If a source is selected
on ALL levels in the system, the crosspoint marker will appear as a multi-colored circle,
consisting of all colors of the active levels.
Lock and Protect buttons restrict user access to the destination to prevent inadvertent
changes to destination changes. The Take button assigns the selected source to the
destination. The Preset button queues crosspoints until an action such as take is pressed. If
your page contains a Clear button, you can remove a selection without performing an
action such as Take. If it has a Restrict button, you can prevent a source and destination
from being connected. If there is a Swap button, you can switch the sources of two
destinations.
Salvos appear across the bottom of the Matrix panel. You can monitor and execute salvos
using an active salvo display.
For more information about how to operate a matrix panel, please see Matrix Panel
See Creating Grid, Single-Bus, Multi Bus and Matrix Panels on page 56 for
information on using the Routing Panel Configuration wizard to create a matrix panel.
50 Chapter 3
Multi-Bus and Multi-Bus with Salvo Panels

With the Multi-Bus and Multi-Bus with Salvo panels, you can monitor and control any
number of router destinations from one panel. Multiple sources and destinations are
simultaneously displayed on the on-screen panel. If you chose a Multi-Bus with Salvo panel,
Salvos appear simultaneously as well.
Destinations appear at the top of the Multi-Bus panel. The destination section includes a
status display that lists the sources connected on each level to the selected destination.
Destinations are selected by clicking on the desired Destination button. Levels which are
highlighted on the right side of the screen are the levels that will be switched.
Sources appear below destinations on a Multi-Bus panel. The Sources section includes a
button for each source. Sources may be connected to selected destinations to perform
either AFV or breakaway takes. Changes made on other control panels in the system will
also be reflected on the Multi-Bus panel.
Figure 3-6 Multi-Bus Panel Page

In the case of Multi-Bus with Salvo panels, below the sources are salvo buttons. You can
monitor and execute salvos using an active salvo display. A salvo is active when all
crosspoints of the salvo are in effect. The page will display both salvos and enhanced salvos.
User Manual
Figure 3-7 Multi-Bus With Salvo Page

Lock and Protect buttons provide user access to the destination to prevent inadvertent
changes to destination changes. The Take button assigns the selected source to the
destination. The Preset button queues crosspoints until an action such as take is pressed. If
you add a Clear button to your page, you can remove a selection without performing an
action such as Take. If your page contains a Restrict button, click it to prevent a source and
destination from being connected. And if your page contains a Swap button, you can
switch the sources of two destinations.
For more information about how to operate a multi-bus panel, please see Grid and Bus
Panel Operation on page 461.
See “Creating Grid, Single-Bus, Multi Bus and Matrix Panels” on page 56 for information
on using the Routing Panel Configuration wizard to create a multi-bus panel.
Single-Bus Panel and Single-Bus Panel with Monitor

The Single-Bus panel provides control over one destination at a time, with any number of
sources. It is divided into two main sections, with the destination status at the top and the
sources at the bottom.
52 Chapter 3
Figure 3-8 Single-Bus Panel

A Single-Bus Panel with Monitor contains a preview monitor.
Figure 3-9 Sample Single-Bus Panel with Monitor

The destination section includes a status display that lists the sources connected on each
level to the destination. Levels which are highlighted on the right side of the screen are the
levels that will be switched.
Sources may be connected to the destination on some or all levels. Source status on each
individual level is clearly indicated on the on-screen panel. Logical source connections may
be easily changed from the on-screen control panel. Changes made on other control panels
in the system will also be reflected on the single-bus panel whenever the affected
destination is selected.
Use Lock and Protect buttons to prevent inadvertent changes to destinations, and the
Take button to assign the selected source to the destination. The Preset button queues
crosspoints until an action such as Take is pressed. The optional Clear button removes a
selection without performing an action such as Take. The optional Restrict button prevents
a source and destination from being connected. And the optional Swap button switches
the sources of two destinations.
For information about how to operate a single-bus panel, please see Grid and Bus Panel
User Manual
See “Creating Grid, Single-Bus, Multi Bus and Matrix Panels” on page 56 for information
on using the Routing Panel Configuration wizard to create a single-bus panel.
Creating a Multi Display or Source Preview Router Page

Multi Display or a Source Preview pages perform simple router actions.
These panels are described in the following sections:
 Multi Display Panel on page 46

 Source Preview Panel on page 46
You can use a wizard to make either panel, and the steps are as follows:
1 Choosing the Router for a Source Preview or Multi Display Page on page 53
2 Selecting Sources on page 54
3 Selecting Destinations on page 55
For information on operating panels, please see Source Preview and Multi Display Page
Before you can create a router panel, the router must be configured. See Physical Device
Setup on page 197 for more information.
Choosing the Router for a Source Preview or Multi Display Page

1 From the main menu, choose File > New, click the Routers tab, and then double click
either Multi Display or Source Preview.
The Page Wizard opens.
This section only

appears on the
Source Preview
Wizard
Figure 3-10 Page Wizard Dialog Box - Step 1 of 3

54 Chapter 3
Click Select..., and then choose the router you want to use. Routers must be configured
before you can create a panel. If there is no router configured, a yellow warning message
will appear. For more information, see Physical Device Setup on page 197.
2 Under Page Options, choose which buttons you want to appear on your page. Options
include Take, Clear, Lock, and Protect. You can have any or all of them.
3 (Source Preview Panel only) Check Include Signal Monitor Object, if you want to include
a Signal Monitor object for confidence monitoring of video signal. From the drop-down
menu, you can then choose the output (destination) from your router that is connected to
the video card in your PC. See “Requirements for Using the Signal Monitor Tool” in Volume
1: Device Control.
4 Click Next >> to continue to the next step of the wizard.
Selecting On this page, you can choose the source inputs for your router panel and determine the
Sources button theme for source inputs. The list on the upper left of the screen displays the sources
configured on the selected router. The list on the right displays the sources that will appear
on the panel.

1 From the Available Sources list, click on the items you want to have available on the
Navigator page. If you click a single item, and then click another item, the first item you
selected is un-selected. To select multiple items in a range, hold the shift key down and click
on the first item you want to select and then, while still holding the shift key down, click on
the last item you want to select. All items between those two items are selected. To select
multiple individual items, hold the Control key down while you click on items.
Click the right arrow to add selected items to the Selected Sources list. You may have up
to eight items in the Selected Sources list.
2 Use the other arrows to determine the order of items in the Selected Sources list.
 To remove items from the list, select them and click the left arrow.
 To move an item up in the list, select it and click the up arrow.
User Manual
 To move an item down in the list, select it and click the down arrow.
The position items hold in the Selected Sources list determines where they will appear in
relation to each other when the page is completed.
3 From the Selected Theme drop-down menu, choose a button theme for the Selected
Sources. The selected button appears in the Preview section of the screen.
4 From the Match logical source on: box, click the arrow and select one of the four match
type options:
Table 3-1 Match Type Options for Logical Sources

Match Type Criteria
Full Match Logical source must match all levels configured
Highest Level Logical source must match the highest level configured
Lowest Level Logical source must match the lowest level configured
[Level Name] Logical source must match on the level specified
5 Click Next >> to move on to the next page of the wizard.
Selecting Destinations
If you are creating a Source Preview panel, the Available Destinations list will not include the
destination you assigned as the Destination to Monitor. See Choosing the Router for a
Source Preview or Multi Display Page on page 53.
On this page, you can choose the destinations for your router panel and determine the
button theme for destinations. The list on the upper left of the screen displays the
destinations configured on the selected router. The list on the right displays the destinations
that will appear on the panel.
56 Chapter 3

1 From the Available Destinations list, click on the items you want to have available on the
Navigator page. If you click a single item, and then click another item, the first item you
selected is un-selected. To select multiple items in a range, hold the shift key down and click
on the first item you want to select and then, while still holding the shift key down, click on
the last item you want to select. To move an item down in the list, select it and click the
down arrow.
The position items hold in the Selected Destinations list determines where they will
appear in relation to each other when the page is completed. You can always move the
buttons later if you are not happy with their configuration on the page the Wizard creates.
You are limited to four destinations with a Source Preview dialog box.
2 From the Selected Theme drop-down menu, choose a button theme for the Selected
Destinations. The selected button appears in the Preview section of the screen.
Some panels cannot be viewed in Build mode. Switch to Control mode to view your finished
panel.
3 Click Finish to close the dialog box and start the building process for the panel. A progress
bar appears on screen. The build process may take a few moments to complete.
Creating Grid, Single-Bus, Multi Bus and Matrix Panels

Grid, bus and matrix panels are graphical router control panels that include such features as
preset, take, lock, protect, level status, breakaway, multiple select and salvo execution.
These panels provide traditional router control interfaces.
These panels are described in the following sections:
 Grid Panel on page 47

User Manual
 Single-Bus Panel and Single-Bus Panel with Monitor on page 51

 Multi-Bus and Multi-Bus with Salvo Panels on page 50
 Matrix and Matrix Classic Panels on page 48
You can use a wizard to make these panels. The steps are as follows:
1 Starting the Routing Panel Configuration Wizard on page 57

2 Selecting Levels on page 59
3 Selecting Destinations on page 60
4 Selecting Sources on page 61
5 Selecting Routing Operations and Display Properties on page 62
For information on operating panels, please see the following:
 Matrix Panel Operation on page 473

 Grid and Bus Panel Operation on page 461
Before you can create a router panel, the router must be configured. See Physical Device
Setup on page 197 for more information.
Starting the Routing Panel Configuration Wizard

To configure a grid type of panel, from the main menu, choose File > New, click the
Routers tab, and then double-click the Grid Panel icon. The Routing Panel Configuration
wizard is launched. Proceed to step 4 on page 58 to continue the process.
The routing portion of a panel configuration is created from a routing view using the
Routing Panel Configuration wizard. To start the wizard, follow these steps:
A shortcut menu opens as shown in Figure 1-5 on page 20.
2 Choose the Software Routing Panel > selection.

3 Choose the selection for the type of panel you want to create (matrix classic, matrix,
multi-bus, or single-bus).
The Component Wizard dialog box opens. The title of the step will vary, depending on the
type of panel you selected from the shortcut menu. Otherwise, except where noted, the
steps are identical for each panel type.
58 Chapter 3
Figure 3-13 Routing Panel Configuration Wizard Dialog Box

4 In the Name text box, enter a descriptive name for your software panel. The name can be
up to 60 characters long.
5 From the Address drop-down list box, select a unique identification (ID) number for the
panel address. Selections range between 0 and 127.
This panel address is the ID the routers “see” when you lock or protect a destination.
6 Select a routing configuration format for the panel from the drop-down list box. If only one
configuration format exists, this selection is greyed out.
7 Select a routing view for the panel, and then click Next >> to continue to the next step of
the wizard.
User Manual
Selecting Levels
Figure 3-14 Setting Levels

The choices you make on the Levels dialog box determine the number and order of router
levels when using this panel. If you place the most frequently used levels early in the list,
they will be most easily accessible.
Items can either appear in the Available field or in the Selected field, but not in both. The
order of items in the Selected list is the order they will appear on the control panel. By
default, all items appear in the Selected column in logical database order.
To move an item between the Selected and Available fields, first click on it to highlight it.
If you click a single item, and then click another item, the first item you clicked on is
un-highlighted. Multiple levels may be selected using standard Windows selection
techniques (hold down the <Shift> or <Ctrl> keys while selecting the levels)
With items highlighted, you can perform the following functions:
Type partial text in the Filter field to limit the contents of the Available column to only the
items that start with the characters you have entered.
 Click > to add highlighted items from the Available field to the Selected field. New
sources always appear at the bottom of the Selected list.
 Click >> to move all visible sources from the Available field to the Selected field. If
you have applied filtering to the Available field, only those items that are visible will be
moved.
 Click < to remove highlighted items from the Selected field.
 Click << to remove all items from the Selected field.
 Click the A-Z button to place all items in alphanumeric order.
 Click the Z-A button to place all items in reverse alphanumeric order.
60 Chapter 3

If you want to select a different level to be statused, select the new status level from the
drop-down list box.
To leave this screen, you have these options:
 Click Next >> to move on to the next step of the new panel wizard. At least one item
 Click << Back to return to the previous page in the wizard.
 Click Cancel to exit the wizard without creating a panel.
available.
When you have completed this page, click Next >> to continue to the next step of the
wizard.
Selecting Destinations
Figure 3-15 Selecting Destinations

The Destinations dialog box opens after you have defined the levels in the Configuration
wizard.
The choices you make on the Destinations dialog box determine the number and order of
router destinations when using this panel. If you place the most frequently used
destinations early in the list, they will be most easily accessible.
When you create a single bus routing panel, you can choose only a single destination.
The tools for filling out the Destinations dialog box are the same as those on the Levels
dialog box. See “Selecting Levels” on page 59 for more information.
User Manual
If you are creating a single-bus routing panel, you have a modified version of the
Destinations dialog box. In a single-bus routing panel you only have one pre-defined
destination, so you can only select one destination on this screen.
When you click the > button to add a highlighted item from the Available field to the
Selected field, the new destination will replace any destination already in the Selected list.
wizard. You must have at least one destination in the Selected Destinations field in order
to proceed.
Selecting Sources
Figure 3-16 Selecting Sources

The Sources dialog box opens after you have defined the destinations in the Configuration
wizard.
The choices you make on the Sources dialog box determine the number and order of
router sources when using this panel. If you place the most frequently used sources early in
the list, they will be most easily accessible.
The tools for filling out the Sources dialog box are the same as those on the Levels dialog
box. See “Selecting Levels” on page 59 for more information.
wizard.
62 Chapter 3
Selecting Routing Operations and Display Properties
Figure 3-17 Selecting Routing Operations and Display Properties
Routing Operations
Selecting the Routing Options button launches a dialog box that allows you to tell your
control panel what control and monitoring operations are allowed to operate on your
routing system. When the Routing Options button is clicked, the Router Operations
dialog box opens.
User Manual
Figure 3-18 Routing Operations Selections

This tabbed dialog box contains selections for options for routing and protection. Routing
options are as follows:
Table 3-2 Routing Options

Option Effect
Do you want to perform multiple If Yes is selected, you can take multiple sources to
crosspoint take requests at once? their destinations all at the same time.
Do you want to automatically This option is not available for panels that can
take the crosspoint when perform multiple simultaneous crosspoints. When Yes
selecting the destination and the is selected, a Take button appears on the panel.
source? Otherwise, takes are executed upon selection of a
destination and a source.
Do you want to perform When Yes is selected, you can cut to a different
breakaway take requests? source on only selected levels. Otherwise, all takes will
be on all levels.
Do you want to perform source When Yes is selected, a menu item is enabled so you
disconnect take? can disconnect all destinations that are currently
connected to a specific source.
Do you want the panel to When Yes is selected, after a breakaway take, all
automatically reset the level levels are reset to switch together.
selection to follow mode?
64 Chapter 3
Table 3-2 Routing Options (Continued)

Option Effect
Do you want to perform When Yes is selected, you are able to set actions to
destination swap? (not available swap the crosspoints of two specified destinations.
for Single-Bus panels)
Do you want the panel to display When Yes is selected, the panel displays whether all/
tally status? (Bus panels only) specified inputs and outputs (such as locks) match a
single source for a destination.
Do you want to enable When Yes is selected, various panel switching
diagnostics? combinations are activated and router monitoring is
enabled
Click the appropriate radio button for the desired routing options, and then select the
Protection tab.
The routing options for protecting are all available as rule actions when you set them.
Figure 3-19 Routing Protection Selections

Table 3-3 Router Protection Option
Option Effect
Do you want to perform If Yes is selected, destinations and salvos can be set
destination and salvo lock/unlock so they cannot be used.
operations?
Do you want to perform If Yes is selected, destinations and salvos can be set
destination and salvo protect/ so other users cannot use them, but the user who set
unprotect operations? the protect can, no matter what panel he is at.
User Manual
Table 3-3 Router Protection Option (Continued)

Option Effect
Do you want the panel to If Yes is selected, the panel can override lock and
override lock and protect protect operations, but other access points cannot.
operations?
Do you want to perform If Yes is selected, restrictions can be set so a specific
crosspoint restriction? source and a specific destination cannot be
connected.
Click the appropriate radio button for the desired protection options, and then click OK to
return to the Router Operations dialog box.
Display Properties
Selecting the Appearance Options button launches a dialog box that allows you to tell
your control panel how to display your routing system. When the Appearance Options
button is clicked, the Display Environments dialog box opens.
Figure 3-20 Display Environments Selections

The display environment is set using the same interface for Grid, Single-Bus, Multi-Bus,
Multi-Bus with Salvo, Matrix and Matrix Classic panels. These settings are all optional. If you
choose nothing, Navigator will use the default settings to produce your panel.
1 In the Transparent Background Style section of the screen, select Yes or No.
Transparency mainly affects the buttons on your screen.
2 Under Items, from the drop-down menu, choose List Control Items.
 Click the Font button to choose a font, color, style, and size for your buttons.
 Click the Color button to choose a color for your buttons. You will not be able to
see the color if you have chosen a transparent background style.
 Click the Show drop-down menu to choose which items to display on the buttons.
You can show Image and text, Image only, or Text only.
 Click the Size drop-down menu to choose a button size. Options are Large and
Small.
If you have chosen Image and Text from the Show menu, you can set your text alignment.
From the Text Alignment drop-down menu, choose At the bottom, On the left, On the
right, or Same space as image. Text alignment is only relevant when Image and Text is
chosen under the Show menu, because it determines where the text appears in relation to
each button’s image.
66 Chapter 3
3 Under Items, from the drop-down menu, choose List Control Title. Click the Font button
to choose a font, style, color, and size for the titles on your panel. The Color, Show, Size
and Text Alignment buttons are unavailable for the list control title.
4 In the Panel background section of the dialog box, click the Browse button to look at
pre-created background images, or choose one of your own (BMP format). If an image is
larger than the screen, it is cropped to fit. If it is smaller, it is tiled.
5 In the Control position section of the screen, enter numbers in the Horizontal and
Vertical fields to adjust the positioning of the buttons from the top left corner of the
screen. Your offset is indicated on the preview to the right of the dialog box, as well.
6 Click OK to return to the Router Operations dialog box, and then click Finish to accept all
changes.
Router Components on a Navigator Page

You can also place a router control panel (Matrix Classic, Matrix Panel, Multi-Bus Panel,
Multi-Bus Panel with Salvo, Single-Bus Panel, and Single-Bus Panel with Monitor) on an
existing Routing Components page. See the following topics:
 Adding a Router Component to an Existing Navigator Page on page 66

 Editing a Router Control Panel on a Navigator Page on page 66
Adding a Router Component to an Existing Navigator Page

To add a router component to a Navigator page, place Navigator in Build mode and follow
these instructions:
1 In the Create Object toolbar, click Control....

2 Select the router component you want to create. The corresponding router wizard will
appear.
3 Follow the instructions for the router type you want to create, at Creating Grid,
Single-Bus, Multi Bus and Matrix Panels on page 56.
The control can be resized after it has been inserted.
4 Click Finish. The cursor will change to a drawing tool. Drag a rectangle by holding down
the mouse button while you move the mouse on the page.
The router component appears in the box.
Editing a Router Control Panel on a Navigator Page

A router control panel that has been created and inserted into the Navigator page can be
edited, so you do not have to recreate it from scratch just to make a minor change. There
may be occasions where a Bus or Matrix panel almost meets your requirements, and you
want to make minor modifications to it.
To edit a software routing panel, double click on the software routing panel in the
Navigation pane in Build mode.
To edit a router control component of a Navigator page, place Navigator in Build mode and
follow these instructions:
User Manual
1 Right click on the router control component while in Build mode.

2 Select Component Wizard... from the menu that appears. This opens the wizard that
created the object. The wizard will contain the values used to create the component.
3 Progress through the wizard until you find the screen where your change should be made.
Make your changes.
4 Click Finish (available on all screens if you are editing a panel). Navigator will recreate your
panel, replacing the previous version.
Alternatively, you can create the router panel type of your choice using the Navigator New
Panel Wizard and choose the XML file of a panel you would like to replicate under Panel
Configuration File,
Using Panel Panel Information is available for Matrix, Matrix Classic, Single-Bus, Single-Bus with
Information Monitor, Multi-Bus and Multi-Bus with Salvo panels. To open panel info, in Control mode,
right click in the background, not on a button. Select Panel Info... from the menu.
The data presented is for informational purposes. You cannot change it here.
Figure 3-21 Panel Info Dialog Box

Table 3-4 Panel Information
Panel Information Item Source
Panel Name The name you assigned on page 1 of the panel wizard
Address A unique identifier assigned to the panel on page 1 of
the panel wizard
Configuration / ID The router configuration file you set on page 1 of the
panel wizard
Routing View / ID The view you chose from the router configuration file on
page 1 of the panel wizard
Levels Number of levels this router panel supports (as defined in
the router configuration file)
Destinations Number of destinations this router panel supports (as
defined in the router configuration file)
68 Chapter 3
Table 3-4 Panel Information (Continued)

Panel Information Item Source
Sources Number of sources this router panel supports (as defined
in the router configuration file)
Salvos Number of salvos this router panel supports (as defined
in the router configuration file)
Panel File Name Name of this panel’s XML file
Panel File Location Drive location of this panel’s XML file
Running Diagnostics
The Diagnostics capability must be enabled at the Routing Operations dialog box. See
Diagnostics operation is available for standard single-bus, multi-bus and matrix panels; it
cannot be used with custom panels. To open Diagnostics, in Control mode, right click in the
background, not on a button. Select Diagnostics... from the menu.
The Diagnostics dialog box opens.
Figure 3-22 Diagnostics Dialog Box

User Manual
This dialog box contains selections for the types of diagnostic operations desired. The
effects of the different selections in this dialog box are provided in Table 3-5.
Table 3-5 Diagnostics Selections

Selection Effect
All to All For all destinations in range, goes through all sources and switch
them to those destinations (for example,. destinations 57 to 64
to source 59, then to source 60, then to source 61, and so forth,
through the rest of the range)
Each Crosspoint Goes source to destination and then advances one, one switch
at a time (for example, source 59 to destination 57, source 60 to
destination 58, source 61 to destination 59, and so forth)
Each Destination, Iterates through destinations, and then switches to a random
Random Source source in the range (for example destination 57 to source 64,
destination 58 to source 60, destination 59 to source 63, and so
forth)
Random Crosspoint Takes a random source and a random destination from within
the range, and then does a switch
Range:Sources Selects the range of sources to be affected
Range:Destinations Selects the range of destinations to be affected
Switch Mode:Preset When doing multiple switches, executes the switches
simultaneously
Switch When doing multiple switches, executes each crosspoint one by
Mode:Crosspoint one
Delay between Sets the time delay between each switch (in milliseconds)
Operations
Viewing the Activity of a Router

To view the status of a router in real time, in Control mode, right click in the background,
not on a button. Select View Router Activity... from the menu.
The Router Activity dialog box opens. Status and time information about the currently
selected router streams into the text box.
70 Chapter 3
Figure 3-23 Router Activity Dialog Box

 Click Save to send the streamed contents output to a TXT file.
 Click Pause to stop the streamed contents output. (When the output is paused, the
Pause button label changes to Resume.)
Click Resume to restart the output contents stream.
 Click Clear to clear the display box. (This does not stop the output contents stream; it
only clears the currently displayed information.)
 Click Close to close the dialog box.
Manually Creating a Router Control Page

There may be occasions when you want to create your own buttons and controls for a
simple router control panel.
To manually set up a router control page, you will need a configured router in the resource
tree of the Navigation pane. You must be logged on as an Administrator user with a
NAVIGATOR-SRV or NAVIGATOR-SNMP license to create or edit router control pages.
User Manual
Figure 3-24 Sample Router Control Page

Router Pages generally consist of four types of buttons:
 Destination - When you click a Destination button, Opus 1, Opus 2, Opus 3, or

Opus 4, the actions created for the page select that destination, deselect all other
destination buttons, and change the selected source button to indicate the current
source for the selected destination.
The names of the sources and destinations are for illustration purposes only. These
names are dependent on name assignments made in the current router configuration.
 Source - When you click on a Source button, the actions created for the page select
that source in preparation for a Take command. Navigator visually shows which button
is preset.
 Take - When clicked, the actions created for the page take the selected Source to the
selected Destination, and the buttons are accordingly updated.
 Clear - When clicked, an action created for the Clear button clears the selected preset.
Summary: Manually Creating a Router Control Page

To manually create a router control page, complete these steps:
1 Set custom properties for the page. See Creating the Custom Page Properties on
page 72.
2 Create the first input button, and then set object properties for it. See Creating the First
Input Button on page 72.
3 Create clones of the input button. See Creating Input Button Clones on page 73
4 Differentiate the input button clones. See Differentiating the ‘Cloned’ Input Buttons on
page 73.
5 Create the first output button, and then set object properties for it. See Creating the First
Output Button on page 74.
72 Chapter 3
6 Create clones of the output button. See Creating Output Button Clones on page 75.
7 Differentiate the input button clones. See Differentiating the ‘Cloned’ Output
Buttons on page 75.
8 Create a Take button. See Creating a Take Button on page 76.
9 Create a Clear button. See Creating a Clear Button on page 76.
10 Test the page in Control mode.
Creating the Custom Page Properties

You must create two custom page properties for the router control page.
1 First, add a custom page property named Destination, and leave the initial values blank.
2 Then, add a custom page properties named Source, and leave the initial values blank.
Creating Rules to Select a Destination when a Page Loads

To automatically select a specific router destination when a page is loaded, then add the
following rules to the page:
Table 3-6 Rules for Selecting a Destination on a Load Page Event
Event Event Action

Conditions
On Load Page (Always) Set Custom Property: Destination - Router Value
(desired destination)
On Load Page (Always) Select Destination (to desired destination)
Creating the First Input Button

To create the first input button for the router control page, complete these steps:
1 Create a button for the input.

To create multiple buttons, create one button, completely configure it, and then copy and
paste the button several times. Then fine-tune the configuration for each button.
2 On the Button tab of the button Object Properties box:

a Set the Caption to the name of the input—for example, “Bars.”
b Select the Toggle button check box.
3 In the Themes section, choose a theme for the four button states.
4 Select the Adjust Button Size check box.
5 Select the Rules tab, and then add the rules as described in Table 3-7.
Rules 1-3 make the buttons behave like radio buttons. When you click on one button, the
other buttons become deselected.
Rule 4 tells Navigator to select the specified source in preparation for a take command.
Rule 5 causes the button to react to the Clear button being clicked.
User Manual
Table 3-7 Rules to Set for Buttons

No. Event Event Conditions Action Action Properties
1 On Custom Property: Source EQUALS Set Button Highlighted: Don't Change
Property Change Router Value [Src] In 1 Properties Selected: True
2 On Custom Property: Source NOT EQUAL Set Button Highlighted: Don't Change
Property Change Router Value [Src] In 1 Properties Selected: False
3 On Mouse Click (Always) Set Custom Property: Source
Property Router Value: [Src] In 1
4 On Mouse Click (Always) Select Source Router Source In 1
5 On Custom Property “Source” EQUALS Set Button Highlighted: False
Property Change Custom Value “xxx” Properties Selected: False
6 On Crosspoint Destination EQUALS [cp] Set Button Highlighted: True
Status Destination Source EQUALS Properties Selected: False
In 1
7 On Crosspoint Destination EQUALS [cp] Set Button Highlighted: False
Status Destination Source Properties Selected: Don’t Change
NOT EQUAL In 1
Rules 6-7 causes the button to react to router crosspoint status events in a radio button
style—only one button can be active at a time.
The Event Condition uses the [CP] Destination as the destination, so that the buttons will
not change if a different output changes. For example, if you have clicked Destination 1 and
another user changes Destination 2, you do not want your source buttons to change.
6 Close the Object Properties box, and save the page.
Creating Input Button Clones

To create clones of the first input button, complete these steps:
1 Select the button and copy it.

2 Paste the button several times, until you have enough input buttons.
3 Move the buttons where you want them on the page.
4 Save the page.
Differentiating the ‘Cloned’ Input Buttons

For each button, you must also set the device ID to the correct settings for the indicated
CCS device.
To differentiate the identical input buttons, complete these steps:
1 Open a Button Object Properties page, and then click the push-pin icon in the top left
corner of the Object Properties box.
2 For each button that you want to differentiate:
a Type the name of a different input in the Caption box.
74 Chapter 3
b For each On Custom Property Change and On Crosspoint Status rule, change the
Event Condition from “[Src] In 1” to the name of the source that the button
represents.
c In each On Mouse Click rule, change the Action Properties from “In 1” to the source
that the button represents.
3 Save the page.
Creating the First Output Button

To create the first output button, complete these steps:
1 Create a button to represent the first output, and then open its Object Properties page.
2 Select the Button tab.
3 In the Caption box, type in the name of the output.
4 Select the Adjust Button Size check box.
5 Select the Toggle button check box.
6 Select a theme for the button states.
7 Select the Rules tab, and then add the rules as described in Table 3-8.
A Clear Selected action must precede a Select Destination action.
8 Save the page.

User Manual
Table 3-8 Rules for the First Output Button

Event Action
No. Event Action Effect
Conditions Properties
1 On Mouse (Always) Clear Selected Clears any selected destinations
Click and sources, since multiple
destinations can be
simultaneously active. On this
page, we only want one
destination to be active at a
time.
2 On Mouse (Always) Select Destination: Tells Navigator to select this
Click Destination Out 1 destination.
State Select: ON
3 On Mouse (Always) Set Custom Property: Source Clears the source buttons’
Click Property states, since Rule 1 has cleared
any selected sources.
4 On Mouse (Always) Set Custom Property: Makes the buttons behave like
Click Property Destination radio buttons.
Router Value:
[Dst] Out 1
5 On Custom Property: Set Button Selected: True Makes the buttons behave like
Property Destination Properties Highlighted: radio buttons.
Change EQUALS Don’t Change
Router Value
[Dst] Out 1
6 On Custom Property: Set Button Selected: False Makes the buttons behave like
Property Destination Properties Highlighted: radio buttons.
Change NOT EQUALS Don’t Change
Router Value
[Dst] Out 1
Creating Output Button Clones

To create clones of the first output button, complete these steps:
1 Select the output button and copy it.

2 Paste the output button several times, until you have enough output buttons.
3 Move the output buttons where you want them on the page.
4 Save the page.
Differentiating the ‘Cloned’ Output Buttons

To differentiate the identical output buttons, complete these steps:
1 Open a button Object Properties page, and then click the push-pin icon in the top left
corner of the Object Properties box to keep it open.
2 For each of the “On Mouse Click” events, change the Action Properties “Out 1” to the
destination that the button represents.
3 For each of the “On Custom Property Change” events, change the Event Conditions
“Out 1” to the destination that the button represents.
76 Chapter 3
4 Save the page.
Creating a Take Button

1 Create a button with the caption “Take.”
2 Create one rule for it.
Table 3-9 Take Button Rule

Action
Event Event Conditions Action Properties
On Mouse Click (Always) Take Selected
3 Save the page.
Creating a Clear Button

For each button, you must also set the device ID to the correct settings for the indicated
CCS device.
1 Create a button with the caption “Clear.”

2 Create these three rules for the Clear button.
Table 3-10 Clear Button Rules

Action
Event Event Conditions Action
Properties
On Mouse Click (Always) Clear Selected
On Mouse Click (Always) Set Custom Property Property: Destination
Custom Value: xxx
On Mouse Click (Always) Set Custom Property Property: Source
Custom Value: xxx
3 Save the page.

4 Change to Control mode to test the router control page.
77
Logical Database Setup
Logical Databases Overview

A logical database can be described as the overall “picture” of the entire routing system. A
database includes one or more levels, as well as a number of logical sources and logical
destinations. Editing the database might include the following elements:
 Adding, editing, or deleting logical sources and destinations

 Assigning unique names, colors or icons to the levels, logical sources and destinations
 Adding, editing, and deleting tielines
 Enabling or disabling statusing
 Editing status names
 Assigning new or additional icons for use in the database and for display in other
database-related applications
Information on defining each property is included in the sections listed:
 “Using the Logical Database Editor Tool” on page 79

 “Configuring Sources” on page 107
 “Configuring Destinations” on page 119
 “Configuring Levels” on page 129
 “Configuring Categories and Indexes” on page 137
 “Configuring Grouping” on page 147
 “Managing Enhanced Tielines” on page 151
See Chapter 13, Using Database Editor Wizards for information about adding device
configuration information to your database quickly and easily.
Please keep in mind that these configuration procedures are for the database setup only. For
information on how to configure physical devices, see “Physical Device Setup” on page 197.
78 Chapter
Logical Database Setup
79
5 Using the Logical Database

Editor Tool
Database Editor Overview

The Logical Database Editor is an easy-to-use Microsoft® Windows based tool for
configuring your routing products. Using the Database Editor, you may create a database
that describes a routing system (that is, available levels, sources, and destinations). That
database may be downloaded to a control panel and/or router frame, through Magellan
CCS Navigator. Currently the Database Editor is only accessible when Magellan CCS
Navigator is installed on your PC.
To access the Logical Database Editor, do one of the following:
 If you are an Administrator user at a Magellan CCS Navigator Server, click on a Routing
View node. The logical configuration opens. Go to the appropriate section of this
volume, and then follow the steps outlined to make any changes. See the Logical
Database Setup section for more information about configuring the logical database.
 Click on a Software control panel view. The corresponding configuration window
to make any changes. See Chapter 3.
Working with Common Controls

The Database Editor tabs use certain navigational and display manipulation techniques
common to all Database Editor elements. See the following topics:
 Identifying Icons on the Database Editor Toolbar has information and explanations
of icons and the Icon toolbar.
 Using Shortcut Menus describes how to use shortcut menus.
 Manipulating Columns has information and explanations of hiding, unhiding, and
sorting columns.
 Navigating Through Selections describes various navigation techniques.
Auto When you make any change to a source, destination, category, index, group, or tieline, or
click Resync to update the logical database and then you save the database, a router panel
Validation auto-validation occurs in the background.
80 Chapter 5
Using the Logical Database Editor Tool
When auto validation occurs and you subsequently download or publish changes to the
panels, panel buttons that were assigned to removed items become unassigned in the
interface.
After auto validation, some panels may need to be edited to add in new items or to recreate
removed items in the panel.
The Logical Database Editor Dialog Box

The Logical Database Editor dialog box is a tabbed dialog that includes all functions
necessary for configuring a logical database. When this dialog box is accessed the Sources
tab is automatically selected.
Figure 5-1. Logical Database Editor Dialog Box
Sources Tab
See “Sources Tab Components” on page 107 for a detailed explanation of the tab’s
components.
User Manual
Figure 5-2 Sources Tab
Destinations Tab
At the Destinations tab, you can add, edit, or remove destinations; assign or change
destination names; associate selected icons with destinations; add new levels without
having to leave the Destinations tab; and assign level inputs to logical destinations.
See “Destinations Tab Components” on page 119 for a detailed explanation of the tab’s
components.
Figure 5-3 Destinations Tab
Levels Tab
associate selected icons with levels; add new levels; specify a logical router size; modify level
colors, and designate the number of actual hardware inputs and outputs configured for a
level.
82 Chapter 5
See “Levels Tab Components” on page 129 for a detailed explanation of the tab’s
components.
Figure 5-4 Levels Tab
Categories Tab
indexes; change index names; and view sources and destinations affected by a particular
index.
See “Categories Tab Components” on page 137 for a detailed explanation of the tab’s
components.
User Manual
Figure 5-5 Categories Tab
Grouping Tab
At the Grouping tab, you can set up groups for sources, destinations, and salvos.
See “Grouping Tab Components” on page 147 for a detailed explanation of the tab’s
components.
84 Chapter 5
Figure 5-6 Grouping Tab
Tielines Tab
At the Tielines tab you can add, edit, or remove tielines, as well as set advanced tieline
configuration options. The Tielines tab is activated when the Show Tielines Column
button is pressed (see page 87).
Some of the icons in the Database Editor Toolbar have different functions when they are
accessed from the Tielines tab.
See “Tielines Tab Components” on page 152 for a detailed explanation of the tab’s
components.
Figure 5-7 Tielines Tab
Using Database editing is done via using the tools found on either the Icon toolbar at the top of
Graphical the Logical Database Editor dialog box, or via a series of shortcut menus that can be
Tools accessed via right-clicking the mouse button (see Figure 5-19).
User Manual
Identifying Icons on the Database Editor Toolbar

The Database Editor includes graphical icons for commonly-needed
configuration tasks. These icons are shown in the toolbar at the top of the
Logical Database Editor pane.
Toolbar icon selections are explained in Table 5-1. If you do not remember
the function of a particular icon, you can hover the screen cursor over the
icon for a moment until the icon function appears onscreen. In addition,
each menu icon appears by its counterpart command whenever you
access a shortcut menu.
86 Chapter 5
Table 5-1 Icon Toolbar Selections and Functions

(• = Where Accessible)
Used With
Destinations
Categories/
Icon Function
Indexes
Sources
Tielines
Levels
Save • • • • •
Saves the current configuration
Publish Logical Names to Devices • • • • •

Provides the capability to distribute salvos and the information in the
names.txt file to all devices in a routing system (see page 96 for more
information)
Print • • • •
Prints the currently selected tab
Cut • • •
Removes a selected item, but saves it in memory so that it can be
accessed (this function is particularly useful when using information
from external programs such as Microsoft Excel or another Windows
application)
Copy • • • •
Copies a selected item and saves the copy in memory so that it can
be accessed (this function is particularly useful when using
information from external programs such as Microsoft Excel or
another Windows application)
Paste • • • •
Places the item stored in memory into a specified location (this
function is particularly useful when using information from external
programs such as Microsoft Excel or another Windows application)
Undo • • •
Cancels a previously performed task; for example, accidentally
deleting a source (when a user moves away from a tab, the Undo
selections for that tab are cleared from memory)
Redo • • •
Repeats a previously performed task that was cancelled (when a user
moves away from a tab, the Redo selections for that tab are cleared
from memory)
Add • • •
Adds a new source or destination to the end of an existing list
Insert; Add Multiple Tielines • • • •

At the Sources and Destinations tabs, adds a new source or
destination to a specified location in an existing list
At the Tielines tab, allows the addition and setup of more than one
tieline at the same time (see page 157 for more information)
Configure Device Types Wizard • •
Allows a user to configure predefined types for inserting sources and
destinations
User Manual
Table 5-1 Icon Toolbar Selections and Functions (Continued)

Used With
Destinations
Categories/
Icon Function
Indexes
Sources
Tielines
Levels
Delete • • • •
Removes selected item from the existing database; item can be
accessed via the Undo and Redo functions (when a user moves away
from a tab, the Undo and Redo selections for that tab are cleared
from memory, so the deleted item can no longer be accessed)
Add New Level • • •
Adds a new level to an existing database
Sort • •
Allows database elements to be sorted in ascending (A...Z; 1, 2, 3...)
or descending (Z...A; ...3, 2, 1) order
Refresh Threads (Tieline tab only) •
See Chapter 11, Managing Enhanced Tielines for more information
Download Tielines (Tieline tab only) •

See Chapter 11, Managing Enhanced Tielines for more
information
Poll Tielines (Tieline tab only) •
information
Change Partition Details (Tieline tab only) •
information
Find/Replace • •
Locates specific information within a selected tab; also allows
searches for specified information that can be replaced with other
information
Hide Selected Column • •
Removes a selected source or destination column from view but does
not cut or delete the selected column (you must use the Show
Tielines Column icon to hide visible tieline columns)
Hide Status Names • •
Removes a selected source or destination column from view but does
not cut or delete the selected column
Show/Hide Tielines Column • •
When in Show mode, displays the tielines associated with sources
and destination; displays the Tielines tab
When in Hide mode, removes a selected source or destination tieline
column from view but does not cut or delete the selected column;
hides the Tielines tab
information
88 Chapter 5
Table 5-1 Icon Toolbar Selections and Functions (Continued)

Used With
Destinations
Categories/
Icon Function
Indexes
Sources
Tielines
Levels
Show All Columns • •
Returns all hidden source and destination columns to view (you must
use the Show Tielines Column icon to reveal hidden tieline
columns)
Filtering Options • •
Allows mono and tieline sources and tieline destinations to be hidden
Resync List • •
Resynchronizes the selected source or destination logical IDs to
match the physical row order from 1 to x (where x represents the
highest source or destination number in the database)
Edit Images • • • • •
Launches the Icon Management utility (see page 89 for more
information)
Export • • • • •
Allows database names to be exported for protocols that use names
(rather than numeric indices) in commands to identify router levels,
sources, and destinations
Database names can be exported in TXT format or into a Microsoft
Excel spreadsheet format
(see page 92 for more information)
Import • • •
Allows database names to be imported from a file or from a device
(see page 94 for more information)
Status Names Drop-Down Box • •
Provides Status names, physical viewa, or matrix viewb capability for
Sources and Destinations
Options • • • • •
Allows customizing of certain functions to include warning
messages, additional informational messages, and number
adjustment (see page 97 for more information)
Help • • • • •
Allows access to on-line and context-sensitive help information
a Lists level inputs by frame name:slot number:port

b Lists level inputs or outputs by frame name:matrix name:matrix index
User Manual
Using the Image Management Utility

Selecting the Edit Images icon opens the Image Management dialog box. (see
Figure 5-8). You can add and delete unique image icons assigned to sources and
destinations via the this dialog box. These icons are displayed in the Icon boxes on the
Sources and Destinations tabs, and on control panels. You can add new icons, remove
icons, or restore the default icons that come with Magellan CCS Navigator.
Figure 5-8 Image Management Dialog Box

The Image Management dialog display box provides a thumbnail view of each one of the
icons currently available for use in a database.
Populating the Image Management Dialog Box

When you open the Image Management dialog box for the first time, the display box is
empty. To populate the display box, click Defaults.
Adding Icons
The Add button brings up a dialog that allows you to extract a single icon from any icon file
or executable file (*.ico, *.dll, or *.exe). You can use the dialog to select a file to extract the
icon from, and then to select the icon you want from within the file.
This option allows you to choose one icon at a time. To select multiple icons, use the Add
Multiple option.
To add a single custom icon, follow these steps:
1 Select the Edit Images icon from the Navigator Icon toolbar.
The Image Management dialog box opens.
2 Click Add.
The Change Icon dialog box (Figure 5-9) opens.
The file name and path for Microsoft® Windows standard icons are highlighted in the File
Name box and thumbnail views of all of these standard icons are displayed in the Current
Icon box.
90 Chapter 5
Figure 5-9 Change Icon Dialog Box

 If the icon you want is displayed
a Click on the thumbnail for the icon you want to add, and then click OK.
The selected icon’s thumbnail appears in the Image Management display box.
b Click OK to accept the changes.
 If the icon you want is not displayed
a Click Browse....
The Change Icon browse box (Figure 5-10) opens.
b Use Windows navigation techniques to move to the location of the file you want to
display.
c Highlight the name of the file you want, and then click Open.
A thumbnail view of the icon file you selected appears in the Change Icon browse box.
d Click OK.
User Manual
Figure 5-10 Change Icon Browse Box

The selected icon’s thumbnail appears in the Image Management display box.
e Click OK to accept the changes.
To add multiple custom icons, follow these steps:
2 Click Add Multiple.

The Select Icons to Add dialog box (Figure 5-11) opens.
Figure 5-11 Select Icons to Add Dialog Box

3 Use Windows navigation techniques to move to the location of the files you want to add.
92 Chapter 5
4 Highlight the names of the files you want, and then click Open. Multiple files may be
selected using standard Windows selection techniques (hold down the <Shift> or <Ctrl>
keys) to select multiple files.
The selected icons’ thumbnails appear in the in the Image Management display box.
Restoring Default Icons

When restoring the default icon list, Magellan CCS Navigator deletes any icons that you
added to the original list.
2 Click Defaults.
An information message appears.
3 Click Yes.
The default icon list appears in the Image Management display box.
4 Click OK to accept the changes.
Removing Icons
2 Click on the thumbnail for the icon you want to remove.

3 Click Delete.
The selected icon is removed from the Image Management display box.
To remove all icons, click Delete All.
Any icons listed in the Image Management display box are removed.
Exporting Database Names

The Export function allows database names to be exported for protocols that use names
(rather than numeric indices) in commands to identify router levels, sources, and
destinations.
Selecting the Export icon opens a selection box. The selections available are for exporting
database names into a text file format (*.TXT) or a Microsoft Excel 2007 macro-enabled file
format (*.XLSM). This spreadsheet is available for offline editing if desired.
Exporting into a Text File Format

1 Click the Export icon from the Navigator Icon toolbar.
2 A selection box opens.
3 Select Export Database Names.
The Save Names Export dialog box (Figure 5-12) opens.
User Manual
Figure 5-12 Save Names Export Dialog Box

4 In the File name box, enter a name for the file you want to export.
Make sure that t Logical Configuration files (*.txt) is selected in the Save as type box.
5 Choose one of the following:

 To save the file in the default location, skip to step 6.
 To save the file in a different location than the default, click the Save in drop-down
list box, and then navigate to the desired file location.
6 Click Save.
The file is saved in the selected location.
7 If desired, open the exported text file.

The text file is set up with comma-delimited field entries for import into a different format
desired.
Exporting into a Spreadsheet File Format
The Export function creates spreadsheet files that can be edited directly in Microsoft Excel
2007. In other Excel versions, the original spreadsheet appears as read-only; it must be
saved under another name to perform editing tasks.
1 Click the Export icon from the Navigator Icon toolbar.

3 Select Export to Microsoft Excel.
The Excel Export dialog box (Figure 5-12) opens.
94 Chapter 5
Figure 5-13 Excel Export Dialog Box

4 In the File name box, enter a name for the file you want to export.
Make sure that Microsoft Excel Macro-Enabled Files (*.xlsm) is selected in the Save as
type box.

 To save the file in the default location, skip to step 6.
 To save the file in a different location than the default, click the Save in drop-down
list box, and then navigate to the desired file location.
6 Click Save.
The file is saved in the selected location.
7 If desired, open the exported spreadsheet for editing.

The spreadsheet layout has a similar “look and feel” as the Database Editor layout. Different
tabs are set up for sources, destinations, levels, categories, device types, and tielines (if
used).
When opening an exported spreadsheet in Excel, make sure to select the Enable Macros
function.
8 Edit the spreadsheet entries in Excel, and then save the file. The changed file can be
uploaded into Database Editor via the Import function.
You may also save this spreadsheet under different names, and then edit them as
appropriate. These other spreadsheets can be uploaded into Database Editor via the Import
function.
Importing Files for Database Editor

The Import function allows database information to be uploaded from Excel spreadsheets
or from other devices. This information can then be used by Database Editor for
configuration purposes.
User Manual
Importing from a File

1 Click the Import icon from the Navigator Icon toolbar.
3 Select Import from File.
The Import dialog box (Figure 5-12) opens.
Figure 5-14 Import Dialog Box
Importing text files to or from a device does not include tieline or wizard type information.
 To import a text file, set the Files of type drop-down box to Logical
Configuration Files.
 To import a spreadsheet file, set the Files of type drop-down box to Microsoft
Excel Macro-Enabled Files (*.xlsm).
4 If the file is located in a subdirectory different from the one that is open, navigate to the
file’s location.
5 Highlight the appropriate file name, and then click Open.
A warning message opens. Click Yes to continue.
The file is imported into Database Editor.
Importing from Another Device

1 Click the Import icon from the Navigator Icon toolbar.
3 Select Import from Device.
The IP Address dialog box (Figure 5-15) opens.
96 Chapter 5
Figure 5-15 IP Address Dialog Box

4 Enter the IP address of the device to import from, and then click OK.
A warning message opens. Click Yes to continue.
The file is imported into Database Editor.
Publishing Logical Files to Devices

To facilitate easier distribution of logical information, Database Editor allows you to
distribute salvos and other database information in the names.txt file to all of the devices in
the routing system.
Publish is an Ethernet-only operation. Most legacy devices do not support the Publish
feature in Magellan CCS Navigator. Other devices may require a software upgrade.
Platinum frames require PT-RES version V4.1 or higher, and Panacea frames with enhanced
resource cards require V4.0 or higher in order to properly support the publish feature.
Magellan control panels support publish with any version.
To publish salvos and names.txt files to a routing system’s devices, follow these steps:
1 Click the Apply Logical Names To Devices icon on the Database Editor toolbar.
The Publishing To Devices... dialog box opens.
Figure 5-16 Publishing To Devices Dialog Box

All existing device list components are preselected; however, you can uncheck any selection
that you do not want to publish to.
2 Click the Start Transfer button at the bottom left corner of the dialog box.
The file transfer begins. As the file transfer takes place, information messages are displayed
in the Overall Status text box.
User Manual
3 After each device has the names.txt transferred to it, Database Editor sends an X-Y
command to the system to let the devices know to refresh their names.txt files. Once that
command is sent, the transfer is complete.
Figure 5-17 File Transfer Completion Message
If some devices fail to transfer or the command fails to send, the Retry button is displayed.
Clicking the Retry button enables Database Editor to repeat the process for the failed
devices.
Using the Options Dialog

Selecting the Options icon opens the Options dialog box. This dialog box provides the
means by which you can allow certain functions (such as warnings, informational messages,
and logical device number adjustments) to appear onscreen as you perform various
configuration tasks.
You can enable or disable the options for each tab separately; in addition, you can enable or
disable different adjustments for the type of task being performed. For example, to allow
Database Editor to automatically adjust existing source numbers when a new device is
added, the check box for Source Page > Insert > Adjust Source Number must be
selected.
98 Chapter 5
Figure 5-18 Options Dialog Box
To use the advanced insertion and deletion functions, the Show Dialog selection must be
enabled. If it is not enabled, the Insert Options dialog box does not appear.
Using Shortcut Menus

The Database Editor includes shortcut menus that list selections for some
commonly-needed configuration tasks used with Sources, Destinations, and Levels.
(Shortcut menus are not available for Categories.) Whenever you access a shortcut menu,
the selection display will show the appropriate icon to the left of its counterpart selection,
and the associated keyboard command appears to the right of its counterpart selection.
If a menu option is not available it is disabled.
Most of the shortcut menu functions are described in Table 5-1; however, the Icon toolbar
does not include icons for the Select All, Go To, Fill Series, and Fill Selection menu items.
These selections are defined in Table 5-2.
User Manual
Figure 5-19 Shortcut Menu Selections

Table 5-2 Menu-Specific Selections and Functions
Icon Function
Select All
Selects all of the lines/cell locations within a Sources, Destinations, or Levels
tab
Go to
Moves immediately to the line location that corresponds to the number
designated in the Go to text box
Fill Series
Copies the contents (incrementing by one for each cell) of the first selected
cell into one or more contiguous cells below the selected cell; most useful
with cells that contain numerals or both text and numerals
Fill
Copies the exact contents of the first selected cell into one or more
contiguous cells below the selected cell
Manipulating Display Elements

Each tabbed dialog has certain display elements that can be manipulated within Navigator.
You can hide or display selected columns, fill one or more cells with exact or similar
information, and sort columns in ascending or descending order.
Manipulating Columns
Hiding a Column
These methods do not hide tieline columns. To hide a tieline column, click the Show
Tielines Column icon in the Icon toolbar.
100 Chapter 5
There are two methods to hide (not delete) a column so that you can no longer see it while
you are working:
 Method 1: Select the column you want to hide, and then click the Hide Selected
Column icon from the Logical Database Editor toolbar.
 Method 2:
a Right-click the name (at the top of the dialog box) of the level column you want to
hide.
b Select Hide Column.

The chosen column will be hidden from view.
Method 1
Method 2
Figure 5-20 Hiding a Column
Unhiding a Column
To “unhide” a previously hidden column (so that you can see it while you are working), click
the Show All Columns icon on the Icon toolbar.
The Show All Columns icon does not unhide tieline columns. To unhide a tieline column,
click the Show Tielines Column icon on the Icon toolbar.
Filtering Columns
The column filter option allows mono sources, tieline sources, and tieline destinations to be
hidden from view without hiding the rest of the column’s entries.
To set the desired filtering options,
1 Click the Filtering Options icon on the Icon toolbar.

The Filtering Options dialog box opens.
User Manual
Figure 5-21 Filtering Options Dialog Box

2 Click the check box to the right of the desired Filtering Options selection.
3 Click OK to accept the changes and return to the main Database Editor window.
Selected sources and/or destination types are hidden from view, while all other sources and
destinations are still displayed.
Sorting a Column
Columns can be sorted in be sorted in ascending (A...Z; 1, 2, 3...) or descending (Z...A; ...3,
2, 1) order.
 Method 1: Highlight the column you want to sort, and then click the Sort icon on the
Icon toolbar.
 Method 2:
a Highlight the column you want to sort, and then right-click the mouse.
b Select Sort Column.
c If the column is sorted in the wrong order (ascending instead of descending, or vice
versa), repeat steps a and b.
The column will be sorted in ascending or descending order according to the column
chosen for the sort.
Method 1
Method 2
Figure 5-22 Sorting Columns

102 Chapter 5
Sorting Multiple Columns

Multiple columns can be sorted in the Sources and Destinations tabs.
1 Highlight the column you want to use for the primary sort.
2 Double-click the column title to sort the column’s contents in the desired order (ascending
or descending).
3 Highlight the column you want to use for the secondary sort.
4 Hold down the <Ctrl> key, and then double-click the column title to sort the column’s
contents in the desired order (ascending or descending).
Filling a Column
If you have information that you want to copy from one cell to one or more other cells in a
column (or in multiple columns), you can use the Fill or Fill Series command from the
shortcut menu. (No icon exists for the Fill or Fill Series command.)
 Use the Fill command to copy the exact contents of the first selected cell into one or
more selected cells.
 Use the Fill Series command to numerically increment the contents (incrementing by
one for each cell) of the first selected cell into one or more contiguous cells below the
selected cell.
Results of Fill
Results of Fill Series
Figure 5-23. Fill and Fill Series Results
The Fill Series will truncate entries if they have more characters than allowed in a column.
For example, if a Source Name is called “CameraSource 999” and the Fill Series function is
used to enter information into selected cells, a user would expect “CameraSource 1000” to
be the next cell value. Because the Name column only allows up to 16 characters (and
“CameraSource 999” has 16 letters), the 0 will be cut off, thereby making the entry
“CameraSource 100.”
User Manual
Navigating Through Selections

In addition to the traditional Windows navigation techniques (such as using the Page Up
and Page Down keys), Navigator has several specialized navigation techniques that allow
you to move quickly and easily up and down a selected tab. These navigation techniques
include the Find and Go to commands.
Finding Text
Use the Find command to locate specific information within the selected tab. You can use
any combination of text and/or numbers.
There are three different methods to select the Find capability:
 Method 1: Click the Find icon on the Icon toolbar.

 Method 2: Right-click the mouse, and then select Find from the shortcut menu list.
 Method 3: Use the <Ctrl> F keyboard command.
The Find/Replace dialog box opens.
Figure 5-24 Finding Information

Enter the search parameters (that is, text and/or number combinations) in the appropriate
list box, and then click Find Next. You may refine your search by selecting the appropriate
check boxes and drop-down list selections.
When your search is complete, click Close to return to the originally selected tab.
Replacing Text
Use the Find command to locate and change specific information within the selected tab.
You can use any combination of text and/or numbers.
There are three different methods to select the replace capability:
 Method 1: Click the Find icon on the Icon toolbar.

 Method 2: Right-click the mouse, and then select Find from the shortcut menu list.
 Method 3: Use the <Ctrl> F keyboard command.
The Find/Replace dialog box opens.
Figure 5-25 Replacing Information

1 Enter the search parameters (that is, text and/or number combinations) in the appropriate
list box.
104 Chapter 5
2 Enter the replacement parameters in the Replace with list box. You may refine your search
by selecting the appropriate check boxes and drop-down list selections.
 Click Replace to change only one instance of the change parameters.
 Click Replace All to change all instances of the change parameters.
The Replace/Replace All functions will truncate entries if they have more characters than
allowed in a column.
4 When your replacement is complete, click Close to return to the originally selected tab.
Moving to a Specific Line Location

To move to a specific line location within the originally selected tab, right-click the mouse,
and then enter the desired line number in the Go to selection box in the shortcut menu.
(No icon exists on the Icon toolbar for the Go to command.)
Enter desired line location

number here
Figure 5-26 Go To Command
Error Feedback
The Database Editor indicates database errors via a variety of color-coding, embedded
messages, and error messages.
Color Codes
DB Editor color codes give you a general idea of the severity of a database error. These
colors appear in the cell body where the error appears.Color codes are as follows:
 Red: The error must be fixed before the database can be saved.
 Yellow: The error on that cell data is not severe enough to keep the database from
being saved, but should be checked to make sure that it is correct.
Embedded Messages
In most cases you will be able to determine an error based on color coding alone. However,
at times the color “message” alone will not provide a sufficient explanation. For more
detailed description of an error, drag the mouse over the affected cell. An embedded
message that describes the error will appear.
User Manual
Figure 5-27 Tool Tip
Error Messages
During a Database Editor session, special information messages will appear to inform you of
issues within a database. These messages may indicate errors or provide you with useful
information
Figure 5-28 Error Message

Before Database Editor completes a save, it will send out a summary of the existing errors
within the database. Click on the error message within the summary dialog to be
transferred to the error location.
Figure 5-29 Error Summary List

106 Chapter 5
107
6 Configuring Sources
Sources Tab Components
Figure 6-1. Sources Tab
Each column on the Sources tab has its own unique function, as follows.
 Source Number: The Source Number is a non-editable ordering (or index) of available
logical sources. Control panels bring in sources in the Source Number order.
108 Chapter 6
Configuring Sources
 Name: When a database is first created, each logical source is assigned a generic name
such as “In 1,” “In 2,” and so forth. Each logical source can be renamed with a
uniquely identifying name. This name appears on RouterWorks and ABA control panels,
and on printed key caps for push button control panels.
A source name can contain any 8 or 161 2 alphabetic or numeric characters. See
“Assigning and Editing Names” on page 110 for more information.
 Long Name: The Long Name further clarifies the source by allowing a longer, more
descriptive name.
A long name can contain any 402 alphabetic or numeric characters. See “Assigning and
Editing Names” on page 110 for more information.
The Long Name field supports Unicode input.
 Alias: The Alias column is used for any additional clarifying name for a source.
An alias can contain any 302 alphabetic or numeric characters. See “Assigning and
 Image: A unique icon can be assigned to each logical source. The icon appears on
RouterWorks control panels. The Image column contains a drop-down list of currently
available icons to you can use to represent a particular source. (Icons are not used on
ABA or pushbutton hardware panels.) See “Assigning Images to Sources” on page 110
 Description: The Description field is used to include information that the user may find
useful for further identifying a source. For example, you may want to include a source’s
location or the kind of input device it is.
Description information can contain any 1003 alphabetic or numeric characters.
 Tielines: The Tielines field is used to expand the size of a system, make resources
available to several users at the same time, or to restrict remote user access to available
sources.
The Tielines field does not appear unless you have enabled the Show Tielines Column
setting from the Database Editor toolbar (page 87).
See Chapter 11, Managing Enhanced Tielines for detailed information about setting
up tielines.
 Grouping: The Grouping field is used to display the names of any group in which a
source is included.
See Chapter 10, Configuring Grouping for detailed information about setting up
grouping.
 Level: Each Level column consists of two subcolumns: the Index column and the Name
column.
 The Index column displays the level input index, to address the physical connection
in a matrix.
 The Name column displays what known as the Status name; that is, the name that
identifies which sources are connected on each level.
See “Statusing and Status Names” on page 110 for more information.
The Sources tab uses certain navigational and display manipulation techniques common to
all Database Editor elements. See “Working with Common Controls” on page 79 for
detailed information about these techniques.
1. The capability for enabling 16-character names is set in the Options dialog box (see page 97).
2. The Database Editor truncates entries if they have more characters than allowed.
3. The Database Editor truncates entries if they have more characters than allowed.
User Manual
Adding Logical Sources

 Method 1: Click the Add icon at the Logical Database Editor toolbar. This works on a
line-by-line basis and useful for adding one source at a time.
The new source appears at the bottom of the Sources list.
 Method 21:
a Highlight the entire row where you want to add sources, and then click the Insert icon
at the Logical Database Editor toolbar.
b Select Insert Before or Insert After Selected Rows.
The Insert Options2 dialog box opens.
c Select the desired options, and then click OK.
The new sources appear at the location you selected.
 Method 31:
a Highlight the entire row where you want to add sources, and then right-click the
mouse.
b Select Insert Sources.
c Select Insert Before or Insert After Selected Rows.
d Select the desired options, and then click OK.
The new sources appear at the location you selected.
 Method 4:
a Highlight the entire row where you want to add sources, and then right-click the
mouse.
b Select Insert from Device Type.
The Insertion Wizard opens.
c Follow the procedures outlined in “Using the Insertion Wizard” on page 193.
Removing Logical Sources

 Method 1: Highlight the source you want to remove, and then click the Delete icon.
 Method 2: Highlight the source you want to remove, and then right-click the mouse.
Click Delete Sources.
 Method 3: Highlight the source you want to remove, and then press the Delete key.
The source is removed from the Sources list.
1. This method is useful for entering multiple rows via the Insert Options dialog box. The selection
of this method for adding a logical source is more fully explained in “Using the Insertion Wizard”
on page 193.
2. The Insert Options dialog box does not appear unless you have selected the appropriate Show
Dialog check boxes at the Options dialog box. See “Using the Options Dialog” on page 97 for
more information on this function.
110 Chapter 6
Configuring Sources
Renumbering Sources
After sources are added or deleted, the remaining sources do not automatically renumber
themselves. For automatic renumbering to take place, you must select the appropriate
Show Dialog check box at the Options dialog box. See “Using the Options Dialog” on
page 97 for more information on this function.
Assigning Images to Sources

See “Using the Image Management Utility” on page 89 for information about adding
images to a routing configuration database.
1 Click the drop-down arrow next to the Image box of the desired Source selection.
A drop-down list containing icons for a number of common audio and video devices
appears.
2 Using the scroll bar, scroll through the list of icons.

3 Click the desired icon to associate with the Source selection.
See page 94 for information on how to import sources from a database or from another
device.
See page 92 for information on how to export sources to a database or a text file.
Assigning and Editing Names

You can perform the following naming actions:
 Statusing and Status Names on page 110

 Assigning Source or Status Names on page 112
 Adjusting Source Numbers on page 113
 Renaming Status Names and Related Sources on page 113
Statusing RCP-ABA control panels include four windows that can be used to display the current status
and Status of the router (that is, which sources and destinations are connected on each level). The
Names name assigned to the source or destination is displayed in the window, and a status LED is
lit to indicate that the panel is operating in statusing mode.
User Manual
Status names
Figure 6-2 Magellan CCS Navigator Status Name Indicators
Figure 6-3 RCP-ABA Statusing

If a level input is assigned to more than one logical source on a level, how does the panel
know which Status Name to display in the status window? For example, consider a router
database that includes two logical sources named “Test 1” and “Test 2.” When Test 1 is
selected, you want BARS to be connected on the video level, and SILENCE on the audio
level. When Test 2 is selected, you want BARS to be connected on the video level, and TONE
on the audio level. The logical source-to-level input mapping would look like Figure 6-4.
Figure 6-4 Status Name Mapping Example

But if both logical sources in our example share the BARS input, how would the ABA panel
know which Status Name to display on the video level? Should it display “Test 1” or “Test
2?” To solve this problem, the ABA panels display Status Names in the status windows
instead of the Source Names. In our example, the status windows would look like
Figure 6-5.
112 Chapter 6
Configuring Sources
Figure 6-5 RCP-ABA Status Name Usage
Assigning Source or Status Names

The source name1 you assign here also appears in the Assigned Sources box of the
Categories tab (or, if no category is generated, in the Unassigned Sources box). This name is
also used to generate new categories and indexes. For more information, see “Creating and
Managing Categories” on page 139.
When a Source name is entered in the database, Magellan CCS Navigator uses the name to
automatically create a category and index. Magellan CCS Navigator finds the last space in
the Source name, and then uses all characters to the left of that space as the category (the
space is included in the category name). All characters to the right of the space becomes
the index. For example, if a logical source is named “VTR 1,” Magellan CCS Navigator
creates a category named “VTR.” Similarly, if a logical destination is named “SAT 1,” a
category named “SAT” is created.
If the Source name does NOT include a space, the entire name is used to create the
category name. For example, if “VTR1” is typed WITHOUT a space, the category “VTR1” is
created. This may limit the number of sources that can be accessed from the panel. Use
spaces appropriately when naming sources. If any character after the space is not a valid
index character (valid characters are any combination of numbers, 0-9), the entire name is
used to create the category name. For example, if “VTR 10B” is typed, a category named
“VTR 10B” is created (not a category “VTR” and an index “10B”).
Keep in mind how the choice of a source name impacts category indexing. (Category
indexing is the primary method of selecting sources and destinations on an ABA panel.)
Database Editor automatically generates categories and indexes when source names are
assigned, so it is important to understand the category indexing process before a source
name is selected. See Chapter 9, Configuring Categories and Indexesfor a detailed
explanation of category indexing.
The process for assigning source names and status names is identical.
1 Highlight the text in the Name and/or Long Name box(es).

2 Over-type the text with the new name.
If you want to make sure that the source name is associated with both a category and an
index, make sure to include an index number with the name (for example, Test 1 or Test1).
Database Editor uses this information to create a new category and index when the
Generate Missing Categories and Indexes function is run.
1. Status names display the current status of a router and appear in the Source displays of a control panel.
User Manual
Certain characters are “illegal” when assigning or editing source or status names. These
characters are the ~,\, and all non-printable ASCII characters (<Alt> and <Ctrl> characters).
These characters may corrupt the database, so they cannot be stored in the database.
Adjusting By default, when source are added or deleted, the remaining source numbers do not
Source automatically readjust. To allow automatic number readjustment, enable the Adjust
Numbers Source Number selection for the Sources Page in the Options dialog box.
Figure 6-6 Adjust Source Number Selection Enabled
Renaming Status Names and Related Sources

To allow automatic parallel renaming of status names or related sources when an initial
source is renamed, enable the Renaming selections for the Sources Page in the Options
dialog box.
114 Chapter 6
Configuring Sources
Figure 6-7 Renaming Selections Enabled
When you select “Renaming Related Sources On Name Change,” Magellan CCS Navigator
looks for sources (like mono sources) related to the source you are renaming and
automatically updates those names.
Working with Levels from the Sources Tab

You can perform the following actions on levels in the Sources tab:
 Assigning Level Inputs and Physical Inputs on page 114

 Adding Levels on page 115
 Removing Levels on page 115
 Hiding and Unhiding Levels on page 115
 Adjusting Level Inputs on page 115
Assigning Level Inputs and Physical Inputs

The Sources tab includes one Level Input column for each level. A logical source can be
disabled on one level and enabled on others. For example, if your source is named
“CAMERA,” you probably want to disable all audio levels for that source. Likewise, an
audio deck source only requires that audio levels be enabled.
1 If necessary, add a new level as described.

2 Click the Level Input number.
A drop-down list box arrow appears.
3 Click the arrow to display a list of valid choices, and then select the desired physical source.
Alternatively, type the desired Level Input number in the box.)
User Manual
Figure 6-8 Assigning Level inputs
Adding You can add levels from the Sources tab by clicking the Add New Level icon in the Logical
Levels Database Editor toolbar. The new level is added to the logical database. The number that
appears in the Levels list for each source is the level (or physical) input. This newly-added
level is accessible for updates or changes via the Levels tab.
Removing You cannot remove a level from the Sources tab. You must switch to the Levels tab to
Levels remove a level.
Hiding and See page 99 for information on how to hide and unhide Levels columns.
Unhiding
Levels
Adjusting By default, when sources are added or deleted, the level input index and level input names
Level Inputs do not automatically readjust. To allow automatic level input selection readjustment, enable
the Level Input selections for the Sources Page in the Options dialog box.
Figure 6-9 Level Input Selections Enabled

116 Chapter 6
Configuring Sources
Mapping Logical Sources to Level Inputs

A logical source need not include connections on all levels in the system. It is possible to
define video-only or audio-only logical sources. Unused level inputs can then be used to
create separate logical sources. In the example below, the system includes several cameras
(video-only inputs). The unused audio inputs is used to create separate logical sources for
audio-only devices. Because the audio-only devices are defined as separate logical sources,
they are independent of the cameras and can be selected without having to perform a
breakaway operation.
Figure 6-10. Mapping of Logical-to-Physical Sources

User Manual
If a logical source involves multiple levels, the input numbers used by the device need not be
the same on all levels. For example, a VTR may connect to input 5 on the video level, input
13 on the audio level and input 3 on the time code level. Once the logical source has been
defined, the fact that different inputs are used on different levels is completely hidden from
the user. All appropriate inputs are selected when the logical source is selected. This feature
allows the various levels to be of different sizes and allows them to be wired independently
of each other.
Figure 6-11. “Wild-Mapping” of Sources

118 Chapter 6
Configuring Sources
Sharing A level input may be assigned to more than one logical source on a level. A common
Level Inputs application of this feature is a system configuration in which a user wishes to associate the
same audio signal to multiple video-only sources. For example, when broadcasting an auto
race, you might wish to associate the announcer’s audio with all cameras. Whenever any
camera source is connected to a video and audio destination, the announcer’s audio is also
selected on the audio level. By allowing multiple camera logical inputs to share the same
audio signal, level inputs are saved.
Figure 6-12. Shared Sources

119
7 Configuring Destinations
Destinations Tab Components
Figure 7-1. Destinations Tab
At the Destinations tab, you can add, edit, or remove destinations; assign or change
destination names; associate selected icons with destinations; add new levels without having
to leave the Destinations tab; and assign level inputs to logical destinations.
Each column on the Destinations tab has its own unique function, as follows
 Destination Number: The Destination Number is a non-editable ordering (or index) of

available logical destinations. Control panels bring in destinations in the Destination
Number order.
120 Chapter 7
Configuring Destinations
 Name: When a database is first created, each logical destinations is assigned a generic
name such as “In 1,” “In 2,” and so forth. Each logical destination can be renamed
with a uniquely identifying name. This name appears on RouterWorks and ABA control
panels, and on printed key caps for push button control panels.
A destination name can contain any 8 or 161 2 alphabetic or numeric characters. See
“Assigning and Editing Names” on page 122 for more information.
 Long Name: The Long Name further clarifies the destination by allowing a longer,
more descriptive name.
A long name can contain any 402 alphabetic or numeric characters. See “Assigning and
The Long Name field supports Unicode input.
 Alias: The Alias column is used for any additional clarifying name for a destination.
An alias can contain any 302 alphabetic or numeric characters. See “Assigning
Destination or Status Names” on page 122 for more information.
 Image: A unique icon can be assigned to each logical destination. The icon appears on
RouterWorks control panels. The Image column contains a drop-down list of currently
available icons to you can use to represent a particular destination. (Icons are not used
on ABA or pushbutton hardware panels.) See “Assigning Images to Destinations” on
 Description: The Description field is used to include information that the user may find
useful for further identifying a destination. For example, you may want to include a
destination’s location or the kind of input device it is.
Description information can contain any 2563 alphabetic or numeric characters.
 Tielines: The Tielines field is used to expand the size of a system, make resources
available to several users at the same time, or to restrict remote user access to available
sources.
The Tielines field does not appear unless you have enabled the Show Tielines Column
setting from the Database Editor toolbar (page 87).
See Chapter 11, Managing Enhanced Tielines for detailed information about setting
up tielines.
 Grouping: The Grouping field is used to display the names of any group in which a
destination is included.
See Chapter 10, Configuring Grouping for detailed information about setting up
grouping.
 Level: Each Level column consists of two subcolumns: the Index column and the Name
column.
 The Index column displays the level output index, to address the physical
connection in a matrix.
 The Name column displays what known as the Status name; that is, the name that
identifies which sources are connected on each level.
See “Understanding Statusing and Status Names” on page 122 for more
information.
The Destinations tab uses certain navigational and display manipulation techniques
common to all Database Editor elements. See “Working with Common Controls” on page
79 for detailed information about these techniques.
1. The capability for enabling 16-character names is set in the Options dialog box (see page 97).
2. Database Editor truncates entries if they have more characters than allowed.
3. Database Editor truncates entries if they have more characters than allowed.
User Manual
Adding Logical Destinations

 Method 1: Click the Add icon at the Logical Database Editor toolbar. (This works on a
line-by-line basis and useful for adding one destination at a time.)
The new destination appears at the bottom of the Destinations list.
 Method 21: Highlight the entire row where you want to add destinations, and then
click the Insert icon at the Logical Database Editor toolbar.
a Select Insert Before or Insert After Selected Rows.
b Select the desired options, and then click OK.
The new destinations appear at the location you selected.
 Method 31:
a Highlight the entire row where you want to add destinations, and then right-click the
mouse.
b Select Insert Destinations.
c Select Insert Before or Insert After Selected Rows.
d Select the desired options, and then click OK.
The new destinations appear at the location you selected.
 Method 4:
a Highlight the entire row where you want to add destinations, and then right-click the
mouse.
b Select Insert from Device Type.
The Insertion Wizard opens.
c Follow the procedures outlined in “Using the Insertion Wizard” on page 193.
Removing Logical Destinations

 Method 1: Highlight the destination you want to remove, and then click the Delete
icon.
 Method 2: Highlight the source you want to remove, and then right-click the mouse.
Click Delete Destinations.
 Method 3: Highlight the source you want to remove, and then press the Delete key.
The source is removed from the Destinations list.
1. This method is particularly useful for entering multiple rows via the Insert Options dialog box.
The selection of this method for adding a logical destination is more fully explained in “Using
the Insertion Wizard” on page 193.
2. The Insert Options dialog box does not appear unless you have selected the appropriate Show
Dialog check boxes at the Options window. See “Using the Options Dialog” on page 97 for more
information on this function.
122 Chapter 7
Assigning Images to Destinations

See “Using the Image Management Utility” on page 89 for information about adding
images to a routing configuration database.
1 Click the drop-down arrow next to the Image box of the desired Destination selection.
appears.

3 Click the desired icon to associate with the Destination selection.
See page 94 for information on how to import destinations from a database or from
another device.
See page 92 for information on how to export destinations to a database or a text file.
Assigning and Editing Names

You can perform the following naming actions:
 Understanding Statusing and Status Names on page 122

 Assigning Destination or Status Names on page 122
 Adjusting Destination Numbers on page 123
 Renaming Status Names and Related Destinations on page 124
Understanding Statusing and Status Names

Statusing and status names are not currently used in Database Editor destinations. They will
be included in future releases.
Assigning Destination or Status Names

The destination name1 you assign here also appears in the Assigned Destinations box of the
Categories tab (or, if no category is generated, in the Unassigned Destinations box). For
more information, see “Creating and Managing Categories” on page 139.
When a Destination name is entered in the database, Navigator uses the name to
automatically create a category and index. Navigator finds the last space in the Destination
name, and then uses all characters to the left of that space as the category (the space is
included in the category name). All characters to the right of the space becomes the index.
For example, if a logical source is named “VTR 1,” Navigator creates a category named
“VTR.” Similarly, if a logical destination is named “SAT 1,” a category named “SAT” is
created.
1. Status names display the current status of a router and appear in the Destination displays of a
control panel.
User Manual
If the Destination name does NOT include a space, the entire name is used to create the
category name. For example, if “VTR1” is typed WITHOUT a space, the category “VTR1” is
created. This may limit the number of destinations that can be accessed from the panel. Use
spaces appropriately when naming destinations. If any character after the space is not a
valid index character (valid characters are any combination of numbers, 0-9), the entire
name is used to create the category name. For example, if “VTR 10B” is typed, a category
named “VTR 10B” is created (not a category “VTR” and an index “10B”).
Keep in mind how the choice of a destination name impacts category indexing. (Category
indexing is the primary method of selecting destinations and destinations on an ABA panel.)
Database Editor automatically generates categories and indexes when destination names
are assigned, so it is important to understand the category indexing process before a
destination name is selected. See Chapter 9, Configuring Categories and Indexesfor a
detailed explanation of category indexing.
The process for assigning destination names and status names is identical.
1 Highlight the text in the Name and/or Long Name box(es).

If you want to make sure that the destination name is associated with both a category and
an index, make sure to include an index number with the name (for example, Dest 1 or
Dest1).
Database Editor uses this information to create a new category and index when the
Generate Missing Categories and Indexes function is run.
Certain characters are “illegal” when assigning or editing destination and status names.
These characters are the ~,\, and all non-printable ASCII characters (<Alt> and <Ctrl>
characters). These characters may corrupt the database, so they cannot be stored in the
database.
Adjusting By default, when destination are added or deleted, the remaining destination numbers do
Destination not automatically readjust. To allow automatic number readjustment, enable the Adjust
Numbers Destination Number selection for the Destinations Page in the Options dialog box.
124 Chapter 7
Figure 7-2 Adjust Destination Number Selection Enabled
Renaming Status Names and Related Destinations

To allow automatic parallel renaming of status names when an initial destination is
renamed, enable the Renaming selection for the Destinations Page in the Options dialog
box.
Figure 7-3 Renaming Selection Enabled

User Manual
Working with Levels from the Destinations Tab

You can perform the following actions on levels in the Destinations tab:
 Assigning Level Outputs and Physical Outputs on page 125

 Adding Levels on page 125
 Removing Levels on page 125
 Hiding and Unhiding Levels on page 126
 Adjusting Level Outputs on page 126
Assigning Level Outputs and Physical Outputs

To understand how level outputs, physical outputs and logical destinations work together
within a router, consider the following scenario:
An operator wishes to connect VTR 1 to a destination. He selects the logical source VTR 1
on the control panel. The control panel requests a switch on level input one. The router
interprets the request as a switch on physical inputs 1, 2, and 3. When VTR 1 is pressed on
the control panel, the router performs the RGB switch on physical inputs 1, 2, and 3.
The Destinations tab window displays one Level Output column for each level. A logical
destination can be disabled on one level and enabled on others. For example, if your
destination is named “MONITOR,” you probably want to disable all audio levels for that
destination. A line in the Level Output box indicates that the destination is disabled on that
level.
1 If necessary, add a new level as described.

2 Click the level output number.
A drop-down list box arrow appears.
3 Click the arrow to display a list of valid choices, and select the desired physical destination.
(Alternatively, type the desired level output number in the box.)
Figure 7-4 Assigning a Level Output
Adding You can add levels from the Destinations tab by clicking the Add New Level icon in the
Levels Logical Database Editor toolbar. The new level is added to the logical database. The number
that appears in the Levels list for each source is the level (or physical) input. This
newly-added level is accessible for updates or changes via the Levels tab.
Removing You cannot remove a level from the Destinations tab. You must switch to the Levels tab to
Levels remove a level.
126 Chapter 7
Hiding and Unhiding Levels

See page 99 for information on how to hide and unhide Levels columns.
Adjusting Level Outputs

By default, when destinations are added or deleted, the level output index and level output
names do not automatically readjust. To allow automatic level output selection
readjustment, enable the Level Output selections for the Destinations Page in the Options
dialog box.
Figure 7-5 Level Output Selections Enabled

User Manual
Mapping of Level Outputs

A logical destination need not include connections on all levels in the system. It is possible
to define video-only or audio-only logical destinations. Unused outputs can then be used to
create separate logical destinations. In the example below, the system includes a pair of
router outputs that feed a Still Store (video-only). The unused audio outputs is used to
create separate logical destinations for audio-only devices such as audio monitoring
speakers. Because the audio monitoring speakers are defined as separate logical
destinations, they are independent of the Still Stores and can be selected without having to
perform a breakaway operation. The use of video-only and audio-only destinations helps
maximize use of router outputs.
Figure 7-6. Mapping of Logical-to-Physical Destination

128 Chapter 7
If a logical destination involves multiple levels, the output numbers used by the device need
not be the same on all levels. For example, a VTR may connect to output 5 on the video
level, output 13 on the audio level and output 3 on the time code level. Once the logical
destination has been defined, the fact that different outputs are used on different levels is
completely hidden from the user. All appropriate outputs are selected when the logical
destination is selected. This feature allows the various levels to be of different sizes and
allows them to be wired independently of each other.
Figure 7-7. “Wild-Mapping” of Logical Destinations

129
8 Configuring Levels
Levels Tab Components
Figure 8-1 Navigator Levels Tab
In Navigator, a level is a way of grouping inputs and outputs together.
associate selected icons with levels; enable or disable any level (Levels 0-15) allowed in the
system, regardless of whether there is a router on that level; specify a logical router size;
modify level colors, and designate the Number of actual hardware inputs and outputs
configured for a level.
Each column on the Levels tab has its own unique function, as follows
130 Chapter 8
Configuring Levels
 Logical Router Size: The logical router size, represented in the Sources and
Destinations drop-down list boxes, is defined as the number of inputs and outputs seen
by the system and the operator. See Specifying Logical Router Size on page 130 for
more information.
 Level Number: The Level Number is an editable ordering (or index) of available logical
levels. Control panels bring in levels in the Level number order. See Assigning or
Changing Level Numbers on page 131 for more information.
 Name: When a database is first created, each logical level is assigned a generic name
such as “Level 0,” “Level 1,” and so forth. Each logical level can be renamed with a
uniquely identifying name. A level name can contain any 8 alphabetic or numeric
characters. See Assigning or Changing Level Names on page 132 for more
information.
 Color: A unique color can be assigned to each logical level. The level is represented by
the selected color on all control panels based on this database. See Modifying Level
Colors on page 133 for more information.
 Image: A unique icon can be assigned to each logical level. The icon appears in
RouterWorks and on control panels. The Image column contains a drop-down list of
currently available icons to you can use to represent a particular level. (Icons are not
used on ABA or pushbutton hardware panels.) See Assigning Icons to Levels on page
134 for more information.
 Inputs: This column displays the number of actual hardware inputs you have
configured for this level in this database. The number of inputs you have is constrained
by the specified logical router size. See Setting the Actual Number of Inputs and
Outputs on page 135 for more information.
 Outputs: This column displays the number of actual hardware outputs you have
configured for this level in this database. The number of outputs you have is
constrained by the specified logical router size. See Setting the Actual Number of
Inputs and Outputs on page 135 for more information.
The Levels tab uses certain navigational and display manipulation techniques common to
all Database Editor elements. See Working with Common Controls on page 79 for
Specifying Logical Router Size

The logical router size is defined as the number of inputs and outputs seen by the system
and the operator. The values for the logical router size set the maximum values allowed in
the Inputs and Outputs fields for each level. See page 135 for more information about
setting values for the inputs and outputs.
To specify the logical size of the router:
1 Click the Up or Down arrows in the Logical System Size spin boxes or type the appropriate
number in each box.
2 After the change has been made, the Apply and Cancel buttons appear to the right of
the selection.
 Click Apply to accept the changes.
 Click Cancel to discard the changes.
User Manual
Click Up or Down
Enter number
Figure 8-2 Specifying Logical Router Size
Adding Logical Levels can be added by one of two methods:

Levels  Method 1: At the Logical Database Editor window, click the Add New Level icon.
Note: You can use the Add New Level icon selection to add a Level from the Sources and
the Destinations tabs.
 Method 2: Right-click anywhere on the spreadsheet.

Click Add New Level.
The new level is added to the end of the Levels list.
Removing Levels
Logical Levels can be removed by one of three methods:
 Method 1: Highlight the level you want to remove, and then click the Delete icon.
 Method 2: Highlight the level you want to remove, and then right-click the mouse.
Click Delete Levels.
 Method 3: Highlight the level you want to remove, and then press the Delete key.
The level is removed from the Levels list.
Assigning or Changing Level Numbers

Levels are how a routing system organizes and segregates data. A router database can
include up to 16 independent router Levels. Levels are numbered from 0 to 15. These level
numbers correspond to the level number(s) that each physical router frame occupies in the
routing system.
You can assign or change level numbers as follows:
To assign or change a level number, follow these steps:

132 Chapter 8
Configuring Levels
1 Click the drop-down list box arrow next to the Level Number.
A list of valid choices for level numbers appears.
2 Select the desired level number. The newly selected level number appears in the Level
Number list box.
Figure 8-3 Changing Level Numbers
Importing Levels
See page 94 for information on how to import levels from a database or from another
device.
Exporting Levels
See page 92 for information on how to export levels to a database or a text file.
Sorting Levels
See page 99 for information and explanations of hiding, unhiding, and sorting columns.
Note: This function is not dynamic; that is, it does not automatically sort the Levels list as
you add or subtract Levels.
Assigning or Changing Level Names

When the database is first created, each logical level is assigned a generic name such as
“Level 0,” “Level 1,” and so forth. Each logical level can be renamed to uniquely identify it.
This is the name that appears on RouterWorks and ABA control panels, and on printed key
caps for push button control panels.
User Manual
A Level Name can contain any 8 characters; however, the name cannot contain “~,” “\,”
“...,” and non-printable characters.
To assign or change the Level Name, follow these steps:
1 Highlight the existing text in the Name box.

3 Make any other changes (as described in this section).
Figure 8-4 Changing Level Names
Modifying Level Colors

Navigator includes different color palettes from which a unique color can be selected to
represent each level. The level is represented by the selected color on all control panels
based on this database.
To select a color, follow these steps:
1 Click the color box for the appropriate level.

The preset color palette appears. You can select from three different tabs (see Figure 8-5):
 The Palette tab includes a standard RGB color palette from which a unique
color can be selected to represent each level
 The Web tab includes colors commonly used on websites.
 The System tab includes colors commonly used on systems.
134 Chapter 8
Configuring Levels
Figure 8-5 Level Color Tabs

2 Click the desired color.
3 Click OK.
The selected color appears in all buttons and LEDs associated with this level.
Assigning Icons to Levels

A unique icon can be assigned to each logical level. This icon appears on RouterWorks
control panels.
Note: Icons are not used on ABA or pushbutton hardware panels.
To assign an icon, follow these steps:
1 Click the drop-down arrow next to the Image box of the desired Levels selection.
appears.

3 Click the desired icon.
User Manual
Figure 8-6 Assigning an Icon
Setting the Actual Number of Inputs and Outputs

The actual inputs/outputs are the number of actual hardware inputs/outputs you have
configured for this level in this database. The number of inputs and outputs you have are
constrained by the specified logical router size (see page 130).
To set the actual number of inputs, do one of the following:
 Click the up or down arrow next to the Inputs box of the desired Levels selection until
the Level input number you want appears.
 Type the desired Level Input number in the box.
To set the actual number of outputs, do one of the following:
 Click the up or down arrow next to the Outputs box of the desired Levels selection
until the Level output number you want appears.
 Type the desired Level Output number in the box.
Adding Level Descriptions

In the Levels Description field, you may add a 100-character description of each level in
the database. Any combination of alphabetic characters, numerals, and special characters
can be used.
To enter descriptive information, double-click on the Description field of the desired

Levels selection.
136 Chapter 8
Configuring Levels
137
9 Configuring Categories and

Indexes
Categories Tab Components
Figure 9-1 Categories Tab
In Navigator, a category is a point to which a source signal is routed. Navigator simplifies the
creation of categories by automatically creating an appropriate category name when a
Source or Destination name is entered in a database. In most cases, the assigned category
name does not require editing. However, for more complex databases, a powerful interface
for managing and editing categories is included on the Categories tab.
indexes; change index names; view sources and destinations affected by a particular index.
Each column on the Categories tab has its own unique function, as follows:
138 Chapter 9
Configuring Categories and Indexes
 Categories and Indexes: The Categories list box shows the names of
currently-assigned categories for the database you are currently using. Each category
may have one or more index names associated with it, as displayed in the Indexes list
box. When combined, the category and index govern which sources and/or
destinations are assigned.
 Selection buttons: The Selection buttons under their respective list boxes allow you
to create and manage categories and indexes.
 Assigned Sources and Assigned Destinations: These list boxes display the
sources and/or destinations that are assigned to each category and index combination.
The assignments may vary, depending the category and index number selected. For
example, the assigned sources for a category named “SAT” and an index named “5”
may be completely different from the sources assigned to category “SAT” and index
“3.”
 Unassigned Sources and Unassigned Destinations: These list boxes display
the sources and/or destinations that are not currently assigned to a particular category
and index combination.
The Categories tab uses certain navigational and display manipulation techniques common
to all Database Editor elements. See Working with Common Controls on page 79 for
Defining Category Indexing

Category indexing is the primary method of selecting sources and destinations on an
RCP-ABA panel. With category indexing, both a category (for example, VTR, CAM, MIC,
and so forth) and an index (for example, 21, 2, 36, and so forth) are required to identify a
device. The first click of a button selects the category; the second click selects the index (see
Figure 9-2).
Destination Source
Status
F1 VTR 2 SAT 5 CAM 1 VTR 2 Preset
CAM
A
SAT
B
SAT
C
EDIT
1
Studio
2
Uplink
3
TX
4
DDR
5
TAKE
Select Select Select Select VTR TRUNK MIC AUX Mon QC Clear
F2
Dest
Lock
Dest
Clear
Dest
Clear
Dest
Clear 9 0 All
D E F 6 7 8
1 2
Press the Press the
CATEGORY SELECT key INDEX SELECT key
The category “SAT” The index “5”

is selected is selected
Figure 9-2 Selecting Sources and Destinations via Category Indexing

(ABA Panels Only)
This method of category indexing allows many sources to be accessed from a single panel
without the need for hundreds of selection buttons. A Broadcast Center, for example, could
contain twenty monitors, each of which could be accessed using the one button labeled
“MON” followed by the appropriate index number. Similarly, each of twenty cameras could
be selected using only one button labeled “CAM” followed by the appropriate index
number. Up to 16 categories can be used with a 1RU ABA panel (48 categories on a 2RU
panel). For that reason, the use of generic category names is generally recommended to
minimize the number of categories required.
User Manual
Note: Grouping is a specialized type of category-indexing used with32×32 and 64×1

RCP-IDe panels. See Setting Up Grouping Functions (RCP-IDe 32x32 and 64x1 Panels
Only) on page 411 for information and instructions on how to set up source and
destination groups.
Creating and Managing Categories

You can perform the following actions on categories:
 Adding a New Category on page 139

 Assigning Sources or Destinations to a Category on page 139
 Associating an Index Name to a Category on page 140
 Generating Category Names on page 140
 Changing a Category Name on page 141
 Viewing Sources Affected by a Category on page 142
 Viewing Destinations Affected by a Category on page 142
 Viewing Destinations Affected by a Category on page 142
 Deleting a Category on page 142
Adding a New Category

1 Click New Category.
The New Category list box opens.
2 Enter a category name in the list box, and then click OK.
The new category name appears (in alphabetical order) in the Categories box.
Note: Only 16 categories can be used with a 1RU ABA panel (48 categories on a 2RU
panel). For that reason, we recommend the use of generic category names (for example,
MON, CAM, Edit, SAT, and so forth) to minimize the number of categories required.
Assigning Sources or Destinations to a Category

Sources and destinations are assigned to categories at the Sources or Destinations
tabs. To assign a source or category, follow these steps
1 At the appropriate tab, assign the desired name to a source or destination, as described in
the following sections:
 See Assigning Source or Status Names on page 112 for more information about
assigning source names.
 See Assigning Destination or Status Names on page 122 for more information
about assigning destinations name.
2 Switch to the Categories tab, and then click Generate Missing Categories and
Indexes.
Depending on how the source or destination is named, the new category appears in the
Categories list box. (The new category may also appear as a blank or single-letter entry.).
3 Highlight the category name.

140 Chapter 9
The assigned sources or destinations appears in the Assigned Sources or Assigned

Destinations list boxes, as appropriate.
4 If necessary, change the Category name as described in Blank Category Name with
Assigned Source on page 141.
Associating an Index Name to a Category

Index names are assigned to categories at the Sources or Destinations tabs. To
associate an index name with a category, follow these steps
the appropriate sections.
When assigning the name, make sure to include an index number with the category name
(for example, Test 1 or Test1).
Indexes.
The new category appears in the Categories list box.
3 Highlight the category name, and then select the corresponding index number.
The assigned sources or destinations appears in the Assigned Sources or Assigned
Generating Category Names

To generate categories for all logical sources and destinations according to the rules
described in Assigning and Editing Names on page 110, click Generate Missing
Categories and Indexes. All new categories appear in the list box, but may be
displayed as blank or as a single-letter entry. (See Figure 9-3.) You can change the blank
“name” to whatever you wish, as described in Blank Category Name with Assigned
Source on page 141.
To quickly create a category name, double-click an unassigned Source or Destination. The

Database Editor creates new categories or indexes necessary to assign to that Source or
Destination.
User Manual
Figure 9-3 Blank Category Name with Assigned Source
Changing a Category Name

1 Double-click the name in the Category list box to produce the Edit box.
2 Overtype the existing text with the new name.
Note: By default, categories are automatically generated if sources or destinations are

added. To allow automatic category creation, enable the Generate New Categories
selection for the Categories Page in the Options dialog box.
142 Chapter 9
Figure 9-4 Generating New Categories Selection
Viewing Sources Affected by a Category

To view a list of the sources affected by a particular category, click the category name
shown in the Categories list box. The Assigned Sources list box displays all the logical
sources associated with that category. Any unassigned sources are shown in the Unassigned
Sources list box at the bottom of the Categories dialog box.
Viewing Destinations Affected by a Category

To view a list of the destinations affected by a particular category, click the category name.
The Assigned Destinations list box displays all the logical destinations associated with that
category. Any unassigned destinations are shown in the Unassigned Destinations list box at
the bottom of the Categories dialog box.
Deleting a Category
1 Click the category name in the category list box.
Select multiple categories by holding down either <Shift> or <Ctrl> while clicking on the
names.
2 When all desired categories are selected, click Delete Categories.

The selected categories are removed from the Categories list.
To completely clear the category list, click Delete All Categories.
All of the listed categories are removed from the Categories list.
User Manual
To delete all categories that are not assigned to logical sources or destinations, click Delete
Unused Categories.
The unused categories are removed from the Categories list.
Note: When a category is deleted, any sources or destinations assigned to it are moved to
the Unassigned Source or Unassigned Destination list box. When the corresponding index is
deleted, any sources or destinations assigned to it remain assigned to the category.
See page 94 for information on how to import categories from a database or from another
device.
See page 92 for information on how to export categories to a database or a text file.
Creating and Managing Indexes

You can perform the following actions on indexes:
 Adding a New Index on page 143

 Changing an Index Name on page 143
 Assigning Sources or Destinations to an Index on page 143
 Associating an Index Name to a Category on page 144
 Generating Index Names on page 144
 Viewing Sources Affected by an Index on page 144
 Viewing Destinations Affected by an Index on page 144
 Deleting an Index on page 144
Adding a New Index

Note: The total number of characters on a selection key (Category and Index combined)
cannot exceed 8 characters.
1 Click New Index.

The new Index list box opens.
2 Enter an index name in the list box, and then click OK.
The new index name appears (in alphanumeric order) in the Index box.
Changing an Index Name

To change an index name, click the name in the Index list box, and then overtype the
existing text with the new name.
Assigning Sources or Destinations to an Index

Sources and destinations are assigned to categories at the Source or Destination tabs. To
assign a source or category, follow these steps
144 Chapter 9
the following sections.
When assigning a name, make sure to include an index number with the category name
(for example, Test 1 or Test1).
 See Assigning Source or Status Names on page 112 for more information about
assigning source names.
 See Assigning Destination or Status Names on page 122 for more information
about assigning destinations name.
Indexes.
The new category appears in the Categories list box.
3 Highlight the category name, and then select the corresponding index number.
The assigned sources or destinations appear in the Assigned Sources or Assigned
Associating an Index Name to a Category

See Associating an Index Name to a Category on page 140 for information on this
function.
Generating Index Names

To generate indexes for all logical sources and destinations according to the rules described
in Assigning and Editing Names on page 110, click Generate Missing Categories
and Indexes.
Viewing Sources Affected by an Index

To view a list of the sources affected by a particular index, click the index name shown in
the Indexes list box. The Assigned Sources list box displays all the logical sources associated
with that Index. Any unassigned sources are shown in the Unassigned Sources list box at
the bottom of the Categories dialog box.
Viewing Destinations Affected by an Index

To view a list of the destinations affected by a particular index, click the index name. The
Assigned Destinations list box displays all the logical destinations associated with that index.
Any unassigned destinations are shown in the Unassigned Destinations list box at the
bottom of the Categories dialog box.
Deleting an Index
1 Click the index name in the indexes list box. Multiple indexes can be selected by holding
down either the <Shift> or the <Ctrl> key while clicking on the names.
2 When all desired indexes are selected, click Delete Index.
All selected indexes are removed from the Indexes list.
To completely clear the index list, click Delete All.

User Manual
All of the listed indexes are removed from the Indexes list.
To delete all indexes that are not assigned to logical sources or destinations, click Delete
Unused Indexes.
The unassigned indexes are removed from the Indexes list.
Note: When an index is deleted, any sources or destinations assigned to it remain assigned
to the corresponding category. When that category is deleted, any sources or destinations
assigned to it are moved to the Unassigned Source or Unassigned Destination list box.
Unassigned sources and destinations are not accessible in Category/Index control
operations.
146 Chapter 9
147
10 Configuring Grouping
Grouping Grouping allows multiple sources, destinations, and/or salvos to be grouped together to act
as categories and indexes. See Defining Category Indexing on page 138 for a more
Overview in-depth explanation of categories and indexes. When grouping is enabled, you can set up
grouping sources, destinations, and salvos.
Note: The grouping function for sources, destinations, and salvos is set via the Grouping
tab (Figure 10-1 on page 147). The grouping function for RCP-IDe control panels is set by
enabling Group mode at the Address, Style tab (Figure 21-27 on page 411).
Grouping Tab Components
Figure 10-1 Grouping Tab
Each column on the Grouping tab has its own unique function, as follows:
148 Chapter 10
Configuring Grouping
 On the left side of the dialog box is the Grouping Tree box. It displays a list all of the
currently available groups and the items currently assigned to each group. (The default
group contains your categories that have assigned items and the items that are under
it. The default group always appears, but you can change the default group name to
something more useful.)
System groups appear grey in the Grouping Tree box. Custom groups are black.
 The Which Logical Items should be visible drop-down list box filters the
display to show all items, sources only, destinations only, or salvos only.
You can hide the contents of a group by clicking the “-” indicator to the left of the
group name. The group assignments disappear but the group name still appears in the
Grouping Tree box and a “+” indicator is displayed. Click the “+” indicator to expand
the group assignment list.
Hide Empty Nodes: Hides any item in the Grouping Tree that contains no items.
Hide System Nodes: Hides the auto-generated (grey) nodes.
Exclude System Groups when Publish: Publishes only user-created group
information to router devices.
 The buttons to the right of the Grouping Tree list box allow you to perform group
administration functions.
 New Group: Click to create a new custom group under the current selected
Group Node. You can then drag items from the Logical Items list to create
groups, for example, for control panel configuration.
 Delete: Use the Delete button to delete a source group, or to delete an individual
source from a group.
 Rename Group: Use the Rename Group button to change the name of an
existing group.
 Move Up: Use the Move Up button to move a group (or an individual selection
within a group) up the assignment list.
 Move Down: Use the Move Down button to move a group (or an individual
selection within a group) down the assignment list.
Note: You may also drag-and-drop groups and selections to anywhere within the
assignment list.
Note: Assignment list placement affects the order in which source group buttons are
displayed on the control panel.
 Reset to Default: Restore the original name and assignments to a group based
on the original source category definitions, deleting any user-created groups.
 On the right side of the dialog box is the Logical Items box. It displays all of the items
available for assignment to a group.
 The Logical Items Available drop-down list box filters the display to show all
available items, available sources only, available destinations only, available or salvos
only.
 Use the Assign Selected button at the bottom of the Logical Items box to assign
one or more items to a selected group. You may also assign items to more than one
group.
The Grouping tab uses certain navigational and display manipulation techniques common
to all Database Editor elements. See Working with Common Controls on page 79 for
User Manual
Creating and Managing Groups

Group creation and management involves adding new groups, deleting existing groups,
renaming groups, or resetting existing groups to their default settings.
 Adding a New Group on page 149

 Assigning Items to a Group on page 149
 Renaming a Group on page 150
 Deleting an Entire Group on page 150
 Deleting Individual Entries from a Group on page 150
Adding a New Group

1 Select the grouping filter type from the Which Logical Items should be visible
drop-down list box. You can select sources, destinations, or salvos only; or all items (sources,
destinations, and salvos).
2 Highlight the ROOT directory name1, and then click the New Group button to the right of
the Grouping Tree list box.
A group entry with the title New Node appears.
3 Enter a name for the group being added, and then press the Enter key.
4 If desired, move the new group within the assignment list by one of these methods:
 Highlight the group name, and then click the Move Up button to move the group
up one level at a time.
 Highlight the group name, and then click the Move Down button to move the
group down one level at a time.
 Highlight the group name, and then drag the selection to the desired location in
the assignment list.
5 From the Logical Items box, select the entries to assign to the new group, and then click
Assign Selected, or drag the entries from the Logical Items box and drop them into the
Grouping Tree box. (Use standard Windows selection techniques to select and deselect
multiple entries.)
The selected entries are assigned to the new group.
6 Click OK to save the selection.

The new group assignments are displayed in the appropriate cells in the Grouping column
of the Sources and/or Destinations tab.
Assigning Items to a Group

1 In the Grouping Tree box, select the name of the group to which the item will be assigned.
2 In the Logical Items box, select the entry to be assigned to the group. (Use standard
Windows selection techniques to select and deselect multiple entries.)
3 Click the Assigned Selected button to add the entries to the selected group, or drag
the entries from the Logical Items box and drop them into the Grouping Tree box.
Note: An individual item may be assigned to multiple groups.

1 Youcan nest new groups within other groups. To nest a group within another group, highlight the appropriate group name,
and then click the New Group button.
150 Chapter 10
Configuring Grouping
Renaming a Group
1 Highlight the appropriate group name in the Grouping Tree box.
2 Click the Rename Group button, and then enter a new name for the group.
3 Press the Enter key to accept the change.
Deleting an Entire Group

To delete a group, highlight the appropriate group name in the Grouping Tree box, and
then click the Delete button.
The selection is removed from the Grouping Tree box.
Deleting Individual Entries from a Group

To delete entries from a group, highlight the appropriate assignment in the Grouping Tree
box, and then click the Delete button.
The assigned entry is removed from the Grouping Tree box.
Note: Deleting an assigned entry from a group does not delete the entry from the Logical
Items box.
151
11 Managing Enhanced Tielines
Enhanced Tieline Management Overview

An enhanced tieline is a logical connection between one or more sources or destinations,
which links two components. Tielines allow the sources/destinations from one frame (the
upstream connection) to be available to another frame or frames (the downstream
connection[s]). Figure 11-1 shows an illustration of upstream and downstream connections.
Tielines help you expand the size of your system, make resources available to several users at
the same time, or to restrict remote user access to available sources.
Figure 11-1 “Upstream” and “Downstream” Frames
Note: Tielines also support path finding with processing devices in a path, as well as
loopback tielines to go from a downstream frame back to an upstream frame.
152 Chapter 11
Managing Enhanced Tielines
Tielines Tab Components
Figure 11-2 Tielines Tab
At the Tielines tab you can add, edit, or remove tielines; monitor tielines; and perform
advanced tieline procedures.
Each column on the Tielines tab has its own unique function, as follows:
 Tieline: The Tieline column displays the upstream-to-downstream path of each

thread in a tieline system.
A synopsis of the selected tieline system appears directly below the Tieline column
header. This synopsis displays the name of the upstream frame, the name of the
downstream frame, and the total number of tielines in the system.
 Output: The Output column displays the starting destination that is set for a
particular tieline and relates to the upstream frame. You cannot edit this column
selection here; this information is entered in the Tielines column on the Destinations
tab or at the Starting Destination drop-down list box on the Add Tielines dialog
box.
 Output Level: The Output Level column displays the output level that is set for a
particular upstream tieline. You may edit this column selection here; when setting up
multiple tielines at the Tielines tab, this information is entered in the Add Tielines
dialog box.
 Physical Output: The Physical Output column displays the actual physical router
location for a particular upstream tieline. You cannot edit this column selection; the
information is read-only.
 Input: The Input column displays the starting source that is set for a particular tieline
and relates to the downstream frame. You cannot edit this column selection here; this
information is entered in the Tielines column on the Sources tab or at the
Starting Source drop-down list box on the Add Tielines dialog box.
 Input Level: The Input Level column displays the input level that is set for a
particular downstream tieline. You may edit this column selection here; when setting up
multiple tielines at the Tielines tab, this information is entered in the Add Tielines
dialog box.
 Physical Input: The Physical Input column displays the actual physical router
location for a particular downstream tieline. You cannot edit this column selection; the
information is read-only.
User Manual
 Weight: The Weight column displays the priority set for a particular tieline’s
processing. The highest weight/priority is 1. You may edit this column selection here;
when setting up multiple tielines at the Tielines tab, this information is entered in the
Add Tielines dialog box.
 Comment: The Comment column displays any information added by a user or
administration. You may edit this column selection here; when setting up multiple
tielines at the Tielines tab, this information is entered in the Add Tielines dialog
box.
Tieline-Specific Toolbar Components

The Tielines tab has its own icon toolbar, with functions that are related to tieline
processing.
Table 11-1 Tieline Icon Toolbar Selections and Functions

Icon Function
Save
Saves the current tielines configuration
Print
Prints the currently selected tab
Copy
Copies a selected item and saves the copy in memory so that it can be accessed
Paste
Places the item stored in memory into a specified location
Add Multiple Tielines
Allows the addition and setup of more than one tieline at the same time
Delete
Removes selected item from the existing database
Refresh Threads
Recreates tielines based on source-to-destination connections
Download Tielines
Downloads changes to the appropriate database(s) after changes are made to
tieline configuration
Poll Tielines
Polls an existing database to determine current tieline configuration
Change Partition Details

 Displays currently existing tieline system partitions
 Allows changes to park source, frame and switch timeouts, and signal delay
 Allows options for unused tielines (park, disconnect, or last status)
 Enables destination groups functions
154 Chapter 11
Table 11-1 Tieline Icon Toolbar Selections and Functions (Continued)

Icon Function
Export
Allows database names to be exported for protocols that use names rather than
numeric indices in commands to identify router levels, sources, and destinations
(see Exporting Database Names on page 92 for information on how to use
this function)
Edit Images
Launches the Icon Management utility (see Using the Image Management
Utility on page 89 for information on how to use this utility)
Options
Allows customizing of certain functions to include warning messages, additional
informational messages, and number adjustment (see Using the Options
Dialog on page 97 for information on how to use this dialog)
Help
Allows access to on-line and context-sensitive help information
Activating the Tieline Function

To activate the tieline function, click the Show Tielines icon in the Navigator icon toolbar.
Adding Tielines
The number of tielines you may add is limited by the number of outputs available on the
downstream device.
 You may divide all of your upstream outputs equally between your downstream
frames.
 You may send some of your upstream outputs to a single downstream frame.
 You may divide some of your upstream outputs between your downstream frames,
with one downstream frame receiving more tielines than the other downstream
frame.
Figure 11-3 shows some possible ways in which you can add tielines.
User Manual
Figure 11-3 Tieline Distribution Examples
To add tielines to a routing system, follow these steps:
1 Create a routing system and its corresponding logical database.

Keep in mind the following requirements:
 The tieline routing system must contain at least one Platinum router to serve as the
tieline controller.
 On hardware with matrices that have tielines between each other, configure the
hardware offset and on the same level
 Choose the Platinum frame to be the tieline controller
 For proper tieline status, activate the following settings on the tieline controller
frame:
 Protocols tab: Select the LRCProtocol setting.
 Server tab: Select the LRC TCP Server setting; set Max Clients to the
desired number of tielines.
See Changing Protocol Settings on page 233 for more information.
2 Select the tielines routing system, and then switch to Database Editor mode.
3 If necessary, rename your upstream and downstream sources/destinations to names that are
meaningful to you.
If desired, switch to physical view, and then make sure that the desired upstream and
downstream sources are coming from the appropriate upstream or downstream frame
slots. In this example, the upstream frame is labeled TomsPlatinum and the downstream
frame is labeled Downstream.
156 Chapter 11
Figure 11-4 Checking Upstream and Downstream
4 Activate the tieline function.

The Tielines column opens on the Database Editor Sources and Destinations tabs,
and the Tielines tab is added.
5 Select one of the following addition methods: Add tielines at the Sources tab,
Destinations tab, or Tielines tab.
Adding Tielines at the Sources or Destinations Tab

1 Select the Sources or Destinations tab.
2 At the first downstream destination, select the Tielines drop-down list box, and then scroll
down to the upstream source to associate with this destination.
You can use the Fill and Fill Series shortcut menu selections to add other items to the
Tielines column.
3 The tieline assignment information appears in the Tielines column on both the Sources
and Destinations tabs. The same assignment appears on the Tieline tab, displayed by
row with complete description information included.
Adding Tielines at the Tielines Tab

1 Select the Tielines tab.
2 Click the Add Multiple Tielines icon.
The Add Tielines dialog box opens.
User Manual
Figure 11-5 Add Tielines Dialog Box

3 Set up selections as follows.
 Selections made in the From box relate to the upstream frame.
 Starting Destination: Select the initial upstream destination.
 Level: Choose the upstream level if it is different from the original level set for
the frame.
Note: Tielines must be on the same level.
 Selections made in the To box relate to the downstream frame.

 Starting Source: Select the initial downstream source.
 Level: Choose the downstream level if it is different from the original level set
for the frame.
 Selections made in the Tieline Options relate to the tielines themselves.
 Select Weight to set the default priority. For example, if you want all of the
tielines to have equal priority, set the Weight to 1, and then set the Quantity
to Insert to the total number of tielines to the assigned to the routing system.
If you want individual tielines to have different priorities, set the weight
selection to the desired priority, and then set the Quantity to Insert for the
number of tielines to be assigned this priority level. The highest priority is 1.
For example, a tieline with a weight of 3 has a higher priority than a tieline
with a weight of 10.
 Add any Comments about the tieline options.
 The Quantity to Insert selection is for the number of tielines to add to the
routing system for this weight.
4 Click OK to accept the changes and return to the Tielines tab.
5 Save the changes, and then select the Download Tielines icon from the Navigator
toolbar.
158 Chapter 11
Controlling and Monitoring Tielines

Tieline control features include taking a basic tieline switch and. statusing of tielines.
Monitoring features include tieline status, use count, tracing a thread, tracing a destination,
and troubleshoot/preview switch functionality.
Controlling Tieline control can be performed from any routing panel, both software and hardware, that
Tielines have access to the upstream sources and downstream destinations. See Performing Takes
with a Matrix Panel on page 474 for an example.
Monitoring Most tieline monitoring features are accessed through the TLCMonitorShell.exe file,
Tielines which is located external to Navigator. To access this file, follow these steps:
1 Open a new window outside of Navigator, and then navigate to the file’s location at C:/
Program Files/Harris/CCSCommon/bin.
2 Click on the file name.
The Choose Configuration dialog box opens.
Figure 11-6 Choose Configuration Dialog Box

3 Select the appropriate configuration from the Configuration Name drop-down box, and
then click Launch Tieline Monitor.
The Tieline Monitoring dialog box opens. This dialog box is for informational and
troubleshooting purposes only; you cannot change the tieline setup here.
Figure 11-7 Tieline Monitoring Dialog Box
At the top of the dialog box, Navigator displays the number of tielines and the IP address of
the tieline controller (upstream). The different columns display specific information about
each tieline.
The information displayed in the first four columns is unique to the Tieline Monitoring
dialog box:
User Manual
 Current Source: The Current Source column the current source that is passing
through the given tieline; if blank, the tieline is available.
 Input Name: The Input Name column displays the source number and name for the
selected tieline thread.
 Use Count: The Use Count column displays the number of downstream
destinations that are using this thread.
 Tieline Status: The Tieline Status column displays the current operating status of
the thread.
The information displayed in the remaining columns is the same as the information that
appears on the Tieline tab. See page 152 for descriptions.
 Tieline
 Output
 Output Level
 Physical Output
 Input
 Input Level
 Physical Input
 Weight
 Comment
Several advanced monitoring functions are available for specific threads listed on this dialog
box: tracing threads, tracing destinations, troubleshooting, and previewing. To access these
advanced functions, highlight a thread and then right-click.
Figure 11-8 Advanced Monitoring Shortcut Menu
Trace Thread
The purpose of the Trace Thread function is to get more information abouta current
thread as well as a way to manually free the thread. Selecting this function opens the
Thread Trace information box for the currently selected tieline.
160 Chapter 11
Figure 11-9 Thread Trace Information Box
This box displays the thread’s tieline destination, tieline source, current source, and which
destinations use this thread.
If desired, you can click Free Thread to remove the thread’s assignments without deleting
the thread. This Free Thread operation disconnects all those destinations using the
thread and park them. It is best to notify users of those destinations before freeing the
thread.
Troubleshoot Switch
Selecting this function opens the Troubleshooting Switch information box with an
Attempt Take button displayed.
Figure 11-10 Attempt Take Selection
This box allows you to select the crosspoint on which you want to perform a take. It will
either perform the take or it will notify you of problems or issues with the attempted take
process.
1 Select the desired Source, Destination, and Level selections from the drop-down list boxes.
User Manual
2 Click Attempt Take.

The results of the troubleshooting review are displayed in the Switch Status box.
 If the take is successful, the Status Switch box displays the message Take
Succeeded.
 If the take is not successful, the Switch Status box displays the message Found all
paths to be full; Click analyze to find available paths.
i. Click Analyze.
The Crosspoint Override dialog box opens.
Figure 11-11 Crosspoint Override Dialog Box
The paths displayed in this dialog box are the ones that have the least impact on
the crosspoint. Keep in mind that selecting one of these paths disconnects the
shown destinations affected.
ii. Scroll through the Paths Available list until you reach the desired selection.
iii. Click Use Selected Path.
The new tieline thread information is displayed in the Tieline Monitoring tab.
Preview Switch
Selecting this function opens the Troubleshooting Switch dialog box with a Preview
button displayed.
The Preview switch has the same functionality as Troubleshoot switch except, when
querying the possible crosspoint, it will not take the switch if the path is free. When
querying the possible crosspoint, Troubleshoot switch will take the switch.
162 Chapter 11
Figure 11-12 Preview Switch Selection
This box allows you to select the crosspoint on which you want to perform a take. It will
notify you whether a take should be successful (it does not try to perform the take), or
notify you of possible problems or issues with the attempted take process.
1 Select the desired Source, Destination, and Level selections from the drop-down list boxes.
2 Click Preview Switch.
The results of the preview are displayed in the Switch Status box.
 If the take is successful, the Status Switch box displays the message Take
Should Succeed.
Click Close, and then perform the take on the panel matrix.
 If the take is not successful, the Switch Status box displays the message Found all
paths to be full; Click analyze to find available paths.
i. Click Analyze.
The Crosspoint Override dialog box opens. (See Figure 11-11 on page 161.)
The paths displayed in this dialog box are the ones that have the least impact on
the crosspoint. Keep in mind that selection of one of these paths may disconnect a
different crosspoint.
ii. Scroll through the Paths Available list until you reach the desired selection.
iii. Click Use Selected Path.
The new tieline thread information is displayed in the Tieline Monitoring tab.
Trace Destinations
Selecting this function opens the Trace Destinations information box.
The purpose of trace destination is to see what paths a given destination is using without
having to go trace specific threads. This could be useful if the destination is not receiving
the signal properly and you do not know what path the signal is taking to get there.
User Manual
Figure 11-13 Trace Destinations Dialog Box
This dialog box displays the thread’s available destination and level selections.
1 Select the desired Destination and Level selections from the drop-down list boxes.
2 Click Trace.
The results of the trace are displayed in the Destination Status box. These results list all
the internal sources and destinations that the given signal is flowing through (if that
destination is using tielines).
Enable Thread
The purpose of the Enable Thread function is to re-enable threads that might have been
disabled previously.
Selecting this function allows you to enable threads for use in the current tieline system.
1 Using standard Windows selection techniques, select one or more threads that you want
enabled.
2 Right click, and then select the Enable Thread option.
A message opens to ask if you want to enable all selected threads for use.
3 Click Yes to enable the selected threads.

The status for the thread changes to “OK.”
Disable Thread
The Disable Thread function allows you to take tielines out of use in the system without
having to reconfigure tielines in the system This is useful if, for example, there is a bad cable
or a transmit line has gone temporarily bad. After the line is repaired, the tieline should be
activated again using the Enable Thread function.
Selecting this function allows you to disable threads used in the current tieline system.
1 Using standard Windows selection techniques, select one or more threads that you want
disabled.
2 Right click, and then select the Disable Thread option.
A message opens to ask if you want to disable all selected threads for use.
164 Chapter 11
3 Click Yes to disable the selected threads.

The status for the thread changes to “Disabled.”
Keep in mind that, when a thread is disabled, the tieline system does not interrupt or
change the crosspoints on a panel matrix. When the operator tries to take a crosspoint
switch, the tielines system will use the next available thread for the crosspoint switch
instead of trying to use the disabled thread.
Advanced You can perform the following advanced functions:

Functions  Weight on page 164
 Park on page 165
 Disconnect on page 166
 Handling Tieline Options when Tielines are Unused on page 166
 Destination Groups on page 166
Weight
The tieline weight is its priority set for a particular tieline’s processing. This allows you to set
a numeric priority for which path a tieline should take. The lowest weight/highest priority is
1; the tieline system will always take the lowest weighted path possible.
For example, you might want a signal to take the path that uses point to point fiber rather
then the path that goes through a satellite uplink. In such a case you would assign a lower
weight/higher priority to the point to point fiber path and a higher weight/lower priority to
the satellite uplink path. You might assign a weight of 5 to the fiber path and a weight of
10 to the satellite uplink. Since 5 is a lower weight than 10, the signal is routed to the fiber
path before the satellite path.
You may add or edit the weight in the Weight column selection at the Tielines tab;
when setting up multiple tielines at the Tielines tab, this information is entered in the
Add Tielines dialog box.
Setting Weight at the Tielines Tab

1 Select the Tielines tab, and then click inside the Weight list box for the appropriate
tieline.
A blinking cursor appears in the list box.

 Type in the desired weight for the selected tieline.
 Click the Up and Down arrows to the right of the box until the desired weight
appears. Remember that Up indicates higher weights/lower priorities, while Down
indicates lower weights/higher priorities.
Setting Weight at the Add Tielines Dialog Box

1 Select the Tielines tab, and then click the Add Multiple Tielines icon.
The Add Tielines dialog box opens. (See Figure 11-5 on page 157.)
User Manual
2 In the Tieline Options box, click inside Weight list box.

 For all tielines to have equal priority, set the Weight to 1, and then set the
Quantity to Insert to the total number of tielines to the assigned to the routing
system.
 For individual tielines to have different priorities, set the weight selection to the
desired priority, and then set the Quantity to Insert for the number of tielines to
be assigned this priority level.
Park
This function is used to send a destination to a known good output and free the tieline it
was using.
For example, DST 25 is using a tieline. You want to free it without disconnecting it, but do
not know a good local source available for switching. In such a case you can switch DST 25
to park.
To use this you must do the following:
 Create a global park source, which is mapped to “P” on the tieline level.
 Specify what the good input is for a given matrix.
Creating a Global Park Source

To create a global park source, follow these steps:
1 Add a new source at the Sources tab.

2 Name this source something identifieable as the global park.
3 Assign it to level index P on all tieline levels.
4 Switch to the Tieline tab.
5 Click the Change Partition Details icon in the Tieline toolbar.
The Configure Tieline Partitions box opens.
Figure 11-14 Configure Tieline Partitions Dialog Box

6 Specify the “good” input for the appropriate matrix by entering the input number in the
Park Source column.
7 From the When Tieline Destinations are Unused drop-down list box, select Park.
(See Handling Tieline Options when Tielines are Unused on page 166 for more
information about this selection.)
8 Click Close to accept the change and return to the Tielines tab.
9 Save all changes, and then click the Download Tielines icon in the Tieline toolbar to
download the new configuration.
166 Chapter 11
Disconnect
This function is used to send a destination to a disconnect output without deleting the
actual tieline, and freeing the actual tieline.
For example, DST 25 is using a tieline, but you want to disconnect it. In such a case you can
switch DST 25 to disconnect.
To use this you must do the following:
 Create a global disconnect source, which is mapped to “X” on the tieline level.
 Specify what the good input is for a given matrix.
Creating a Global Disconnect Source

To create a global disconnect source, follow these steps:
1 Create a new source at the Sources tab.

2 Map the source to X on the levels you want.
3 Save, and add this source to panels you want to be able to disconnect from.
4 Download the panels and switch a given source to disconnect.
Handling Tieline Options when Tielines are Unused

The purpose of this selection is to decide what you want as status when your internal tieline
destinations are not in use. You can make one of the following selections:
 Park: Use this selection to send the tileines to a good local source so a signal goes
through.
 Disconnect: Use this selection to make tieline destinations identifieable that they are
free from a panel.
 Last status: Use this selection to leave the tielines at the status they were.
Destination Groups
If you need to allocate a certain amount of paths between one frame to another frame for
a specific set of destinations, you can set up destination groups to accomplish the task.
For example, if DST 43 cannot go off air and if it requests a tieline source, it must have
tielines available. You can create a group for with that destination and allocate a tieline to
that group so that the tieline is pre-allocated for that destination.
Adding Destination Groups

The Configure Tieline Partitions box opens. (See Figure 11-14 on page 165.)
2 Click Configure Destination Groups....

The Destination Groups dialog box opens.
User Manual
Figure 11-15 Destination Groups Dialog Box

3 Click Add Group.
The Add Destination Group box opens.
Figure 11-16 Add Destination Group Box

4 Enter the desired group name in the Destination Group Name box, and then click OK.
Note: There is an 8-character limit on group names.
The Destination Groups dialog box opens, and the name of the newly-added group is
highlighted.
5 Using standard Windows selection techniques, select the names of the destinations to add
to the group from the Available Destinations group assignments list.
6 When the selections are complete, click Assign.
The available destination names are transferred to the Assigned Destinations group
assignments list.
If any of the transferred destinations are incorrect or unwanted, highlight the destination
name in the Assigned Destinations group assignments list, and then click Unassign.
The unassigned destination name is moved back to the Available Destinations group
assignments list.
7 Click Close to accept the changes and return to the Configure Tieline Partitions
dialog box.
Assigning Destination Groups

1 At the Configure Tieline Partitions box, click Assign Destination Groups....
The Destinations Group Allocations dialog box opens. (See Figure 11-17.) The
Frame Connections box displays the names of the available frame connections.
168 Chapter 11
Figure 11-17 Destinations Group Allocations Dialog Box

2 Highlight the name of the frame that receives the group allocations. The available
destination group names are displayed in the Destination Groups Allocations box.
3 In the destination group’s Thread Allocation column, do one of the following:
 Type in the desired number of threads to allocate to the highlighted frame.
 Click the Up and Down arrows to the right of the box until the desired allocation
number appears.
dialog box.
5 Save all changes, and then click the Download Tielines icon in the Tieline toolbar to
download the new configuration.
Editing Destination Groups
Note: You cannot rename an existing destination group. You cannot copy the contents of
an existing destination group to a new destination group; you must use the Add Group
process as described in Adding Destination Groups on page 166.


The Destination Groups dialog box opens. (See Figure 11-15 on page 167.)
3 Highlight the name of the group you want to edit.

 To add destinations to the group assignments list, use standard Windows selection
techniques to select the names of the destinations from the Available
Destinations group assignments list.
When the selections are complete, click Assign.
The selected destination names are transferred to the Assigned Destinations
group assignments list.
 If any of the assigned destinations are incorrect or unwanted, use standard
Windows selection techniques to select the names of the destinations from the
Assigned Destinations group assignments list.
When the selections are complete, click Unassign.
User Manual
The selected destination names are transferred to the Available Destinations group
assignments list.
dialog box.
Removing Destination Groups


The Destination Groups dialog box opens. (See Figure 11-15 on page 167.)
3 Highlight the name of the group you want to remove, and then click Remove Groups.
The selected group is deleted from the Destination Groups list.
dialog box.
170 Chapter 11
171
12 Managing Dynamic Routing

Threads for Legacy Products
Note: When designing a new system, use the information found in Chapter 11, Managing
Enhanced Tielines for tieline setup.
Dynamic Routing Thread Management Overview

A dynamic routing thread (DRT) is a physical or logical connection between two or more
frames that allows the sources from one frame (the upstream frame) to be available to
another frame or frames (the downstream frame[s]). Figure 12-1 shows an illustration of
upstream and downstream connections.
Dynamic routing thread s help you expand the size of your system, make resources available
to several users at the same time, or to restrict remote user access to available sources.
The dynamic routing thread creation and management process consists of the following
items:
 Adding dynamic routing threads

 Editing dynamic routing thread s when necessary
 Editing remote access lists when necessary
 Deleting dynamic routing thread s when necessary
 Optimizing dynamic routing thread s and creating a dynamic routing thread database
file (this function is performed automatically)
 Downloading dynamic routing thread information to frames
Note: Before configuring dynamic routing threads, you need to create a routing system and
set up a logical database. See Creating and Maintaining Routing Systems on page 13
and Logical Database Setup on page 77 for more information.
172 Chapter 12
Managing Dynamic Routing Threads for Legacy Products
Upstream
Frame 1
“Upstream” to Frame 2 DRT makes Frame 1
and Frame 3 sources available to
Frame 2
DRT makes Frame 1

Frame 2 and Frame 2 sources
“Upstream” to Frame 3 available to Frame 3
“Downstream” to Frame 1
Downstream
Frame 3
“Downstream” to Frame 1
and Frame 2
Figure 12-1 “Upstream” and “Downstream” Frames
Adding Dynamic Routing Threads

Note: You cannot edit or delete dynamic routing threads in a combiner system; however,
you can edit dynamic routing thread remote accessible sources in a combiner system.
The number of dynamic routing threads you may add is limited by the number of outputs
available on the downstream device.
 You may divide all of your upstream outputs equally between your downstream
frames.
 You may send some of your upstream outputs to a single downstream frame.
 You may divide some of your upstream outputs between your downstream frames,
with one downstream frame receiving more dynamic routing threads than the
other downstream frame.
Figure 12-2 shows examples of different ways in which you can add dynamic routing
threads.
User Manual
Figure 12-2 Dynamic Routing Thread Distribution Examples
To add dynamic routing threads, follow these steps:
1 Create a routing system and configure the router frames.

A shortcut menu opens, as shown in Figure 1-5 on page 20.
3 Choose Routing Tie-Lines... from the context menu.

The TieLine Configuration dialog box appears.
174 Chapter 12
Figure 12-3 Tie Line Configuration Dialog Box
4 Click Add.
The Add Dynamic Routing Threads dialog box opens.
“Upstream”
frame selections
“Downstream”
frame selections
Figure 12-4 Add Dynamic Routing Threads Dialog Box

User Manual
5. Make the selections from the drop-down list boxes as follows.
Upstream
Frame ID: Choose the upstream frame.
Level: Choose the upstream level.
Starting Level Output: Choose the first upstream source.
Downstream
Frame ID: Choose the downstream frame.
Level: Navigator automatically fills in the level for you.
Starting Level Input: Choose the first downstream destination.
Add Dynamic Routing Threads
How many dynamic routing threads?: Enter the number of dynamic routing
thread connections you want to add.
5 Click OK to accept the changes and return to the TieLine Configuration dialog box.
Dynamic routing threads are created based on information entered in the Add Dynamic
Routing Threads dialog box and appear in the list control of the Dynamic Routing
Threads tab.
Note: All dynamic routing thread entries are highlighted when they first appear in the
TieLine Configuration dialog box. To deselect them, click the left or right mouse button.
The level outputs and level inputs are numbered sequentially, based on your beginning
selection and the number of dynamic routing thread connections you add.
Editing Dynamic Routing Threads

You may edit dynamic routing thread entries from the Dynamic Routing Threads tab on the
TieLine Configuration dialog box.
Note: Navigator does not allow you to use the dynamic routing thread Edit function on a
connection within a combiner system.
1 Double-click the dynamic routing thread connection you want to edit (or highlight the
dynamic routing thread connection, and then click Edit).
The Edit Dynamic Routing Thread dialog box opens and all currently-selected options
fills the drop-down boxes.
176 Chapter 12
Figure 12-5 Editing Dynamic Routing Threads
2 Make any editing changes in the drop-down list boxes as necessary. You do not have to
re-enter items that do not change.
Upstream
Frame ID: Upstream frame
Level: Upstream level
Starting Level Output: First upstream source
Downstream
Frame ID: Downstream frame
Level: Downstream level
Starting Level Input: First downstream destination
Add Dynamic Routing Threads
How many dynamic routing threads?: Enter the number of dynamic routing
thread connections you want to add.
Note: Dynamic routing threads must be on the same level. This version of Navigator does
not support dynamic routing threads that span levels.
3 Click OK to accept the changes and return to the Tie Line Configuration dialog box.
Editing Remote Access Lists

Navigator allows you to limit one or more downstream frame’s access to upstream sources
through the use of the remote access list editing function.
User Manual
The example in Figure 12-6 shows how remote access lists can be used to restrict frame 3
from accessing frame 1’s sources, while still allowing frame 2 to access all of frame 1’s
sources and frame 3 to access frame 2’s sources.
Upstream
Frame 1 DRT
(Limits to Frame 3 access
Frame 1 of Frame 1 sources set via
DRT remote access lists)
Unlimited Limited
remote remote
Frame 2 access access Frame 2
Can access all Still has access to
Frame 1 sources DRT all Frame 1 sources DRT
Downstream
Set access limits

Frame 3 Frame 3
Can access all Frame Still has access to all
1 and Frame 2 sources Frame 2 sources but only
limited access to Frame 1
sources
Figure 12-6 Limiting Remote Access Example
To edit remote access lists, follow these steps:
1 Choose Create > Routing Tie-Lines... from the context menu.

The Tieline Configuration dialog box opens and all existing dynamic routing thread
connections are displayed.
2 Highlight the connection you want to edit, and then click Access List.
The Edit Remote Access List dialog box opens.
178 Chapter 12
Figure 12-7 Edit Remote Access List Dialog Box

This dialog lists all dynamic routing thread connections for the upstream frame and for the
downstream frame to which it is physically connected.
 By default, each connection appears twice: once in the Inputs Frame section, and
once in the Inputs Accessible section.
 The source(s) you want the others to access is selected from the Inputs Frame list.
 The Thread Request Wait Time is the time required (in seconds) for waiting on a
thread connection before timing out.
The function buttons located between the two lists are used to select the specific
configuration.
Table 12-1 Remote Access List Button Functions

Function Button Description
Assign Assigns a source from the Inputs Frame list to the Inputs
Accessible remote access list
Delete Deletes an assigned source from the Inputs Accessible remote
access list
Assign All Assigns all sources from the Inputs Frame list to the Inputs
Accessible remote access list
Delete All Deletes all assigned sources from the Inputs Accessible
remote access list
To assign a specific source to the remote access list, follow these steps:
1 At the Select Accessible Inputs drop-down list, select the frame ID for the dynamic
routing thread to which the downstream frame is physically connected.
2 Click Delete All to clear the assigned sources from the Inputs Accessible remote
access list.
User Manual
3 Highlight the specific source that you want to assign to the remote access list.
4 Click Assign.
The source name appears in the Inputs Accessible list.
To assign all sources to the remote access list, follow these steps:
2 Click Assign All to add the assigned sources to the Inputs Accessible remote access
list.
To delete a specific source from the remote access list, follow these steps:
2 Highlight the specific source that you want to delete from the remote access list.
3 Click Delete.
The source name is removed from the Inputs Accessible list.
To delete all sources from the remote access list, follow these steps:
2 Click Delete All to clear the assigned sources from the Inputs Accessible remote
access list.
Deleting Dynamic Routing Threads

Note: Navigator does not allow you to use the dynamic routing thread Delete function on
a connection within a combiner system.
To delete one dynamic routing thread entry, follow these steps:

1 Highlight the entry to be deleted, and then click Delete.
2 This message appears:
180 Chapter 12
Figure 12-8 Deleting One Connection

3 Click Yes.
The selected dynamic routing thread connection is removed from the list.
To delete several dynamic routing thread entries not adjacent to one another,
follow these steps:
1 Highlight the first entry to be deleted.
2 Hold down the <Ctrl> key on the keyboard, and then select the next entry to be deleted.
Only the chosen entries are highlighted.
3 Click Delete.
This message appears:
Figure 12-9 Deleting Several Non-Adjacent Dynamic Routing Thread Connections
4 Click Yes.
All highlighted connections are removed from the list.
To delete all dynamic routing thread entries or several entries adjacent to one
another, follow these steps:
1 Highlight the first entry to be deleted.
2 Hold down the <Shift> key on the keyboard, and then select the last entry to be deleted.
All entries between the first chosen and the last chosen are highlighted.
User Manual
3 Click Delete.
This message appears:
Figure 12-10 Deleting All Dynamic Routing Thread Connections

4 Click Yes.
All connections are removed from the list.
Optimizing Dynamic Routing Threads

Navigator automatically performs dynamic routing thread optimization for you after you
have performed an Add, Delete, Edit, or Inputs Access function. When you click Done to
return to the main window, Navigator creates and optimizes a dynamic routing thread
connection database, then generates a dynamic routing fabric database file (*.DRF) in the
database subdirectory.
This database file is used for the Dynamic Routing Fabric Monitoring software application.
Contact your dealer or our Sales Department for a copy of this application.
Downloading Dynamic Routing Thread Information

After dynamic routing threads have been created and edited, they must be downloaded to
the physical device before the new configuration can take effect.
Note: Remember! Download any device in the Device List that does not display an “OK”
status.
1 Highlight the device entry.

2 Click Download. Multiple devices may be selected using standard Windows selection
techniques (hold down the <Shift> or <Ctrl> keys to select multiple devices).
3 The About to Download dialog box opens.
 Choose the Selected Device radio button to download dynamic routing thread
information for the highlighted device only.
 Choose the Changed Device radio button to download dynamic routing thread
information for devices that have information that changed since the last
download.
 Choose the All Device radio button to download dynamic routing thread
information for all devices in the database.
4 Click OK.
182 Chapter 12
The Downloading Devices box appears.
 If the download process is completed without errors, a summary dialog box opens.
This dialog box lists the number of devices that were successfully downloaded. The
Device List is updated to reflect the current status of the devices (the devices are
marked “OK”).
 If there are errors during the download process, a Download Failures dialog
box opens. This dialog box lists the error or errors encountered for each device.
After all errors are corrected, download the devices again.
183
13 Using Database Editor Wizards
Database Editor Wizards Overview

The Database Editor contains two separate wizards for creating and defining device types:
the Device Type Wizard and the Insertion Wizard.
 The Device Type Wizard allows you to add device configuration information to your
database quickly and easily. Using a series of templates and menus, you can add,
update, and configure a customized device setup. You can access the Device Type
Wizard by clicking the Wizards icon on the Navigator Icon toolbar.
 The Insertion Wizard allows you to insert sources and destinations based on device type
definitions as created in the Device Type wizard. You can launch the Insertion Wizard by
accessing the shortcut menu, highlighting the Insert selection, and then choosing
Insert from Device Type.
Using the Device Type Wizard

The Device Type Wizard allows you to add device configuration information to your
database quickly and easily. Use the Device Type Wizard templates and menus to add,
update, and configure a customized device setup.
184 Chapter 13
Using Database Editor Wizards
Understanding the Device Type Wizard Dialog Box
Figure 13-1 Device Type Wizard Dialog Box
Each selection type on the dialog box has its own unique function, as follows:
 Edit Existing Device Type: This selection box lists currently available device types.
These available device types can be modified or deleted as desired. In addition, device
type configurations may be imported or exported as XML files. See Editing and
Managing Device Types on page 191 for more information.
 Create New Device Type from Existing Type: This selection box lists currently
available device types developed for your specific situation. These available device types
must be created via a template, but can be modified as desired.
 Create New Device Type From A Template: This selection box lists
customizable device type configurations set up as templates. You cannot create new
templates; however, you can create a new device type based on an existing template.
See Creating a New Device Type on page 185 for more information.
 Create New Custom Device Type: This selection box allows you to create an
“empty” device type (that is, a device type with no connection types associated with it).
See Creating a New Device Type on page 185 for more information.
 Device Details: The Device Details information box displays the characteristics of a
selected device type or device type template. This information allows you to determine
if this particular device type is the one you need or is easily modifiable for your specific
situation. You cannot modify this information.
Other dialog boxes are also associated with the Device Type wizard. These dialog boxes are
illustrated and presented in the sections that follow.
User Manual
Creating a New Device Type

Note: Before you create a new device type: If your sources and/or destinations will overlap,
we recommend that you delete all of the device types in the matrix display.
1 If necessary, delete the device types appearing in the matrix display:

a Highlight first line of the matrix, and then right-click the mouse.
b Click the Select All option.
All lines locations on the matrix are highlighted.
c Press the Delete key. (Alternatively, right-click again, and then select the Delete
option; or click the Delete icon from the toolbar.)
The Remove Options shortcut menu opens.
d Clear the Advanced Options check box.
All line locations are removed from the matrix.
2 Click the Wizard icon on the Database Editor toolbar to launch the Device Type Wizard.
The Select Device Type dialog box opens (see Figure 13-1 on page 184).
3 Available device type selection options are shown in Table 13-1.
Table 13-1 Create Device Type Selections

Item Description
Create New Device Type From A Copies an existing template to setup create a
Template new device
Create New Custom Device Type Sets up a device type specific to a particular
routing configuration environment
Selecting a Create Device Type Option

 Creating a New Device Type from a Template on page 185
 Creating a New Custom Device Type on page 186
Creating a New Device Type from a Template

CAUTIONPressing the Cancel button at any time will cause RouterMapper to cancel
all of the selection information made up to that point, and then close the Device
Type Wizard without saving changes. You cannot undo the cancellation.
1 Select the Create New Device Type From A Template radio button.
The device type template selections are highlighted.
2 Scroll through the template list to the configuration you want.
Note: To determine the characteristics of each template, select the template name in the
list box. The characteristics of the selected template appear in the Device Details
information box.
186 Chapter 13
The name of the selected template appears in a text box below the template selection list.
You can change the name of the selection to one that better describes your configuration
setup. You may leave the default name; however, if you select this template at another
time, Navigator will require you to change the selection name.
3 Select the desired template configuration, and then click Next.

The Select Connection Types dialog box opens.
4 Proceed to Selecting Connection Types on page 186.
Creating a New Custom Device Type

1 Click the Create New Custom Device Type radio button, and then enter a name for
the new device type in the Custom Type Name text box.
2 Click Next.
The Select Connection Types dialog box (Figure 13-2 on page 186) opens.
3 Proceed to Selecting Connection Types on page 186.
Selecting
Connection
Types
Figure 13-2 Select Connection Types Dialog Box
The display box at the left side of the dialog box shows the currently-selected connections
types. If desired, you can rename the connection types by clicking on the existing name, and
then overwriting the selection. (There is a 21-character limit on names.)
Note: The name information displayed on a NUCLEUS panel will mirror exactly the names
that appear in the text box.
User Manual
The button selections on the right side of the dialog box are defined in Table 13-2.
Table 13-2 Add Connection Type Button Selections

Button Selection Description
Add Connection Type From Template Adds connection types that are defined by a
pre-existing template
Add From Existing Connection Types Add connection types that were created from
an existing device configuration type
Delete Remove a highlighted connection type from the
display box
1 To add a connection type, click one of the Add Connection Type buttons.
The Add Connection Type shortcut menu opens.
Figure 13-3 Add Connection Type Shortcut Menu

The drop-down list box provides the names of the connection types available for a particular
device type.
Table 13-3 Connection Type Menu Selections

HD Embedded Adds a connection for PT-MXDX modules that include
high-definition embedded audio signals
Analog Audio Adds a connection for devices that include analog audio
signals
AES Audio Adds a connection for devices that include AES audio
signals
HD Video Adds a connection for devices that include high-definition
video signals
SD Video Adds a connection for devices that include
standard-definition video signals
Analog Video Adds a connection for devices that include analog video
signals
Optical Adds a connection for devices that include fiber optical
signals
Mono Audio Adds a connection for devices that include mono audio
signals
SD Embedded Adds a connection for modules that include
standard-definition embedded audio signals
2 Highlight the name of the desired connection type, and then click OK.
188 Chapter 13
The selected connection type appears in the display box.
3 When all desired connection types are selected, click Next.

The Level Selection dialog box opens.
Note: Depending on the device and connection types you selected, the Level Selection
dialog box may not open. In that case, proceed to Configuring Connection Types on
page 189.
Selecting
Levels
Figure 13-4 Level Selection Dialog Box
1 Select the device type starting level from the Please Select a starting level for the
device type drop-down list box.
2 If desired, enable the Be able to Breakaway Audio from Video check box, and then
choose the appropriate audio breakaway mapping radio button
Note: Use the Mono Breakaway selection to set up TDM applications where you want to
breakaway mono audio channels. Use the Stereo Breakaway option to set up stereo audio
channels in TDM applications where you want to breakaway channels or always move them
together.
3 After all Level selections are made, click Next.

The Configure Connection Type dialog box opens.
User Manual
Configuring
Connection
Types
Figure 13-5 Configure Connection Type Dialog Box
1 Select the connection type (that is, corresponding level) for each device type you selected.
You can rename components of the connection type by highlighting the component name
and then pressing F2 to open an Edit function.
2 Set up the connection types according to one of the scenarios defined in Figure 13-6.
190 Chapter 13
1 The “parent” component is assigned a level; that same level

assignment ripples through to the “child” components.
2 The “parent” component is left blank and the “child” components
are also left blank.
3 The “child” components have different levels assigned to them; the
“parent” component cannot have a level assigned to it, so the
“parent” component is left blank.
Figure 13-6 Configuration Examples
3 After the connection types are configured, click Next.

The Device Type Details dialog box opens.
User Manual
Selecting
Device Type
Details
Figure 13-7 Device Type Details Dialog Box
If you know that special level inputs need to be assigned (for example, BARS=20) you can
make the assignment here. These assignments are used when you insert Sources.
4 Click Finish when your selections are complete.
Editing and Managing Device Types

 Editing Device Types on page 191
 Deleting Device Types on page 192
 Managing Device Types on page 192
Editing Device Types

1 Click the Edit Existing Device Type radio button, and then select the desired device
type from the display box.
The name of the existing device type appears in a text box below the existing device type
selection list. You can change the name of the selection to one that better describes your
configuration setup.
2 Click Next.
The Select Connection Types dialog box (Figure 13-2 on page 186) opens.
3 Edit the device type according to the instructions provided for the different selections
available through the Device Type wizard.
 Editing connection type selections: page 186
 Editing connection type configurations: page 189
 Editing device type details: page 191
192 Chapter 13
Deleting Device Types

2 Click Delete Device Type.
A warning message opens.
3 Click Yes to continue.

An information message opens.
Click OK to continue.
4 The selected device is deleted from the Existing Device Type list.
Managing Device Types

2 Click Manage Device Type.
The Device Type Manager dialog box opens.
Figure 13-8 Device Type Manager Dialog Box

The buttons to the right of the Existing Device types list allow you to perform administration
functions.
 Move Up: Use the Move Up button to move a device up the assignment list.
 Move Down: Use the Move Down button to move a device down the
assignment list.
 Import:
 Export
3 When all device management tasks are complete, click OK to accept the changes.
User Manual
Using the Insertion Wizard

The Insertion Wizard allows you to insert sources and destinations based on device type
definitions created in the Device Type wizard.
Understanding the Insertion Wizard Dialog Box

Each selection type on the Insertion Wizard dialog box has its own unique function, as
follows:
Figure 13-9 Insertion Wizard Dialog Box
 The Device Type drop-down list box provides the names of any device types created
via the Device Type wizard.
 The Details information box displays the characteristics of a selected device type or
device type template. This information allows you to determine if this particular device
type is the one you need.
Other dialog boxes are also associated with the Insertion Wizard. These dialog boxes are
illustrated and presented in the sections that follow.
Inserting Sources and Destinations

1 Highlight the entire row where you want to add the new source or destination entries, and
then right-click the mouse.
2 Select Insert from Device Type.

The Select Device Type dialog box opens.
194 Chapter 13
Figure 13-10 Select Device Type Dialog Box
3 From the Device Type drop-down list box, select the appropriate device type to use for
the insertion, and then click Next.
The Basic Options dialog box opens.
Figure 13-11 Basic Options Dialog Box
Note: An item’s name consists of a prefix, an index or quantity number, and an optional
suffix, but cannot exceed eight alphanumeric characters. This information appears in the
device’s Source or Destination tab Name and Long Name columns.
User Manual
4 In the Name Options text box, enter a prefix that identifies the device.
5 Select the initial index number from the Starting Index Number spin box.
6 If desired, in the Name Suffix text box, enter a suffix that identifies the device more
specifically (for example, VTR-1-B).
7 In the Description text box, add a description of the device and/or device family. This
information appears in a device’s Sources or Destination tab Description column.
8 If more than one item should be inserted, select the total number from the Quantity to
Insert spin box.
Note: If the Quantity to Insert is larger than one, the number in the Name Preview box
will change to match the higher quantity. On the Source or Destination tab, however, the
names and numbers will correspond appropriately to the number of the inserted item in the
list location.
9 After the basic option entries are completed, click Next.

The Advanced Options dialog box opens.
Figure 13-12 Advanced Options Dialog Box
The Advanced Options dialog box allows you to assign certain advanced options for
your sources and destinations. It is especially useful for setting up mono switching or stereo
pair switching so you can address them on our control devices.
10 Select an initial video level number from the Starting Level Index Number spin box
within the Video Location box.
11 Select an initial audio level number from the Starting Level Index Number spin box
within the Audio Location box.
12 Enable (retain check mark) or disable (remove check mark) the Enable check box for each
connection type selection.
Note: If a level is disabled, that level will not be assigned when the items are inserted.
196 Chapter 13
13 If you want to create mono sources, click the Create Logical Sources for Audio
Breakaway Switching check box. (This only applies to inserting device types with audio
on the Sources tab.) A Mono source allows you to do special audio swaps from a control
panel.
14 Click Finish when your selections are complete.
The selections added via the Insertion Wizard appear on the Sources or Destinations
tab.
Figure 13-13 Insertion Wizard Selections on Destinations Tab

197
Physical Device Setup
Physical Device Setup Overview

Navigator supports downloading and managing Platinum, Integrator, and Panacea series
frames. Legacy frames (that is, XPlus, Hedco, Mixbox, NEO, VIA, and XPRESS) are not
configurable via Navigator, but they should be added to the database so that Navigator can
have a complete “view” of the control system and can operate properly. Imagine
Communications router frames and control hardware can be added to the database by
discovering devices or by polling the control network for installed devices.
For information about adding the following devices, see the appropriate sections as noted:
 Frame configuration
 IP3 frames: Chapter 23
 Platinum frames: Chapter 15
 Panacea frames: Chapter 16
 Integrator frames: Chapter 17
 Legacy frames: Chapter 18
 Control panel configuration1
 Alphanumeric breakaway (ABA) panels: Chapter 20
 Programmable (RCPp) panels: Chapter 21
 Edge configuration: Chapter 19
 Panacea or Edge web configuration: Chapter 22
Please keep in mind that these configuration procedures are for the frame definitions only.
For information on how to configure the database, see Logical Database Setup on page
77.
1 Configuration information for advanced programmable control panels is located in the panel’s specific
installation and operation manual.

198
Physical Device Setup
199
15 Configuring Platinum Frames
Platinum Frame Configuration Overview

Configuring a Platinum frame is a multi-step process that requires you to complete several
steps. See the following topics:
 Selecting the Frame Size on page 199

 Setting Up a Matrix on page 200
 Selecting Matrix Monitoring on page 222 (if you have optional monitoring modules
as part of your system)
 Selecting Controls on page 224
 (Optional) Setting up SNMP on page 228
The procedures are similar for adding or editing a frame. Some editing processes, however,
are not performed until after a Platinum frame is added to the routing matrix. Differences in
adding/editing procedures are noted. Information about dialog boxes accessible only in Edit
mode starts on page 242.
Please keep in mind that these configuration procedures are for the Platinum frame
definition only.
Note: Before configuring a router frame, you need to create a routing system and set up a
logical database. See Creating and Maintaining Routing Systems on page 13 and
Logical Database Setup on page 77.
Selecting the Frame Size

1 Create a routing system as described in Chapter 1.
2 Expand the Routers subdirectory under the newly-created routing system in the
Navigation pane, and then double-click on the Platinum router selection.
The routing configuration utility launches, and then the Select Router Type dialog box
opens.
3 Select the frame type.

A blue box appears around the selected frame type.
4 Click OK.
The Platinum Frame Size dialog box opens.
200 Chapter 15
Configuring Platinum Frames
5 Select the Platinum frame size you want.

A blue box appears around the selected type.
6 Click Next.
The Platinum Configured Matrices dialog box opens.
Setting Up a Matrix
Configured Matrices -- Add Mode Configured Matrices -- Edit Mode
Figure 15-1 Platinum Configured Matrix Dialog Box
This dialog box allows you to add a new matrix, or delete or configure an existing matrix for
a Platinum frame. The Output column and the Input column are set up with separate list
box controls. You can use standard Windows selection techniques to select multiple
modules on each, or both, lists.
You may “quick-add” one or more matrices, which are automatically assigns inputs,
outputs, and formats. You also may add new matrices one at a time, and select specific
numbers of inputs and outputs, and select a specific format.
 For information on how to quick-add matrices, go to page 200.

 For information on how to add matrices one at a time, go to page 201.
“Quick-Adding” a New Matrix

Note: This function is not available in Edit mode.
1 Move the cursor display somewhere within the matrix list control area, and then right-click
the mouse. A selection box opens.
User Manual
Figure 15-2 Add Matrices Selection Box
2 Select Add Multiple Matrices.

The Add Multiple Matrices dialog box opens.
Figure 15-3 Add Multiple Matrices Dialog Box
3 Fill in these fields via their associated drop-down list boxes:

a # of Matrices: Choose the total number of matrices you want in addition to the one
that already appears in the matrix description area. Navigator evenly divides the
remaining modules into the requested matrices.
b Starting Level: Choose the Level number that corresponds to the level number the
physical router frame occupies in the routing system.
c If you want all matrices to have the same Level, click the check box.
4 Click OK to return to the Configured Matrices dialog box.
The new matrix information appears in the description boxes. The matrix’s module
information is color-coded as shown in Table 15-1.
Table 15-1 Matrix Information Color Codes

Color Code Description
Blue Designates I/O slots (physical I/Os) assigned to the selected matrix.
Dark grey Designates I/O slots that are not selectable because they are assigned
to another matrix.
Light grey Designates I/O slots that are available to be assigned to any matrix.
Green Designates I/O slots highlighted to be assigned to (or unassigned from)
the selected matrix.
5 Click Next.
The Monitoring Matrices dialog box opens. Proceed to page 222 to continue.
Manually Adding a New Matrix

Note: This function is not available in Edit mode.
202 Chapter 15
1 At the Configured Matrix dialog box, click Add. (Alternatively, move the cursor display
somewhere within the matrix list control area, and then right-click the mouse. A small
selection box opens. Select Add Matrix.)
The Add WB Matrix dialog box (Figure 15-4) opens.
Figure 15-4 Add WB Matrix Dialog Box
Depending on the matrix type you choose, the appearance and selections for this dialog
box changes. See the following topics:
 Adding Wideband Matrices on page 202.

 Adding TDM Matrices on page 204.
 Adding HView SX Hybrid Matrices on page 207.
Adding Wideband Matrices

1 At the Add WB Matrix dialog box (Figure 15-4 on page 202), choose WB from the
Matrix Type drop-down list box.
2 In the Name field, enter a name that identifies this particular Platinum matrix.
3 Choose a matrix format from the Format drop-down list box.
4 In the Level box, enter a number that corresponds to the first level number the physical
router matrix occupies in the routing system.
5 Choose the appropriate number of inputs from the # of Physical INs drop-down list
box. (You cannot type information into this field.)
If you make changes to the # IN Slots selection, any changes you make are reflected in
the # of Physical INs selection as well. if you do not want to change the number of
physical inputs, please do not change the # IN Slots selection.
6 In the Input Offset box, enter a number that corresponds to the point at which input
numbering starts for the specified component in the logical database.
7 Choose the appropriate number of outputs from the # of Physical OUTs drop-down list
box. (You cannot type in the information into this field.)
User Manual
If you make changes to the # OUT Slots selection, any changes you make are reflected in
the # of Physical OUTs selection as well. if you do not want to change the number of
physical inputs, please do not change the # OUT Slots selection.
8 In the Output Offset box, enter a number that corresponds to the point at which output
Note: The Audio Type drop-down list box is only available for TDM matrix types.
9 If you want to automatically set up a monitoring matrix, click the Create And Link To A
Monitor Matrix check box. (Select this option only if your Platinum modules include a
dual output module such as the PT-HSR-DOB, PT-SR-DOB, or PT-ENC-DOB.)
Select this option only if you want Navigator to automatically create a monitoring matrix for
you. In addition, Navigator automatically updates the matrix to reflect any other changes
that you make. If you prefer to set up and update a monitoring matrix manually, do not
choose this option. You can manually set up a monitoring matrix at the Monitoring
Matrices dialog box. (See page 222 for more information.)
10 The I/O Card & Slots box allows you to choose slot assignments for your I/O modules.
 Click the Auto radio button if you want Navigator to automatically assign slots for
the I/O modules. If you select this option, you cannot change the Input Card
Type, Starting IN Slot, or # In Slots list boxes.
 Click the Manual radio button if you want to assign starting slots for the I/O
modules yourself. (If you select slot assignments that are incompatible with other
settings, Navigator warns you with appropriate error messages.)
Note: PM- series modules operate in 5RU and 9RU frames only. PT- series modules operate
in 9RU, 15RU, and 28RU frames.
a Select the correct item from the Input Card Type list box.
Some input modules (for example, PT-HS-IB+) have options available; if so, the Input
Plugins dialog box displays a list of available options. For more information about the
options available, please refer to the Platinum Installation and Operation Manual.
b Select the starting slot for your input modules from the Starting IN Slot drop-down
list box.
c Indicate the number of modules of this type you need in the # IN Slots drop-down list
box. Navigator automatically calculates the number of physical inputs you have for the
number of modules you selected. Changing this selection may change the number of
physical inputs required; if you do not want to change the number of physical inputs,
please do not change this entry.
d Select the desired type of output module from the Output Card Type drop-down list
box.
Some output modules (for example, PT-HS-OB+) have options available; if so, the
Output Plugins dialog box displays a list of available options. For more information
about the options available, please refer to the Platinum Installation and Operation
Manual.
e Select the starting slot for your output modules from the Starting OUT Slot
drop-down list box.
f Indicate the number of modules of this type you need in the # OUT Slots drop-down
list box. Navigator automatically calculates the number of physical outputs you have for
the number of modules you selected.
Changing this selection may change the number of physical outputs required; if you do
not want to change the number of physical outputs, please do not change this entry.
204 Chapter 15

The new matrix information appears in the description boxes. Matrix information is
color-coded as described in Table 15-1 on page 201.
Navigator displays the crosspoint locations associated with your matrix information. Make
sure you have crosspoint modules installed in these locations for crosspoint switching to
occur correctly. Go to page 212.
Adding TDM Matrices

1 At the Add WB Matrix dialog box (Figure 15-4 on page 202), choose time division
multiplex (TDM) from the Matrix Type drop-down list box.
The Add TDM Matrix dialog box opens.
Figure 15-5 Add TDM Matrix Dialog Box
2 In the Name field, enter a name that identifies this particular TDM matrix.
4 In the Level box, enter a number that corresponds to the first level number the physical
router matrix occupies in the routing system.
box. (You cannot type information into this field.)
If you make changes to the # IN Slots selection, any changes you make are reflected in
the # of Physical INs selection as well. If you do not want to change the number of
physical inputs, please do not change the # IN Slots selection.
6 In the Input Offset box, enter a number that corresponds to the point at which input
7 Choose the appropriate number of outputs from the # of Physical OUTs drop-down list
User Manual
If you make changes to the # OUT Slots selection, any changes you make are reflected in
the # of Physical OUTs selection as well. if you do not want to change the number of
physical inputs, please do not change the # OUT Slots selection.
8 In the Output Offset box, enter a number that corresponds to the point at which output
9 The I/O Card & Slots box allows you to choose slot assignments for your I/O modules.
the I/O modules. If you select this option, you cannot change the Input Card Type,
Starting IN Slot, or # In Slots list boxes.
a Select the desired type of input module from the Input Card Type list box.
list box.
c Indicate the number of modules of this type you need in the # IN Slots drop-down list
box. Navigator automatically calculates the number of physical inputs you have for the
number of modules you selected.
Changing this selection may change the number of physical inputs required; if you do not
want to change the number of physical inputs, please do not change this entry.
d Select the desired type of output module from the Output Card Type drop-down list
box.
Some output modules (for example, PT-HS-OB+) have options available; if so, the
Output Plugins dialog box displays a list of available options. For more information
about the options available, please refer to the Platinum Installation and Operation
Manual.
e Select the starting slot for your output modules from the Starting OUT Slot
drop-down list box.
f Indicate the number of modules of this type you need in the # OUT Slots drop-down
list box. Navigator automatically calculates the number of physical outputs you have for
Changing this selection may change the number of physical outputs required; if you do
not want to change the number of physical outputs, please do not change this entry.
10 The Options box allows you to set up audio types for AES or analog format selections. Since
you selected “TDM” as your matrix type, the Audio Type drop-down list box is enabled.
a Choose one of these audio types:
 Select Mono to route individual audio channels. With this selection you can
set 1-16 independent mono audio channels per device (via a drop-down list
box).
 Select Stereo to always route a stereo pair (two channels) of audio together.
With this selection you can set 1-8 stereo pairs1 per device (via a drop-down list
box).
1
In stereo pairs, “left” is one channel and “right” is one channel.
206 Chapter 15
b When you select the first check box (Breakaway audio from video), Navigator looks for
the first available level in the current database, and then puts the selected audio on that
level. The next check box becomes available for selection. If you disable this check box,
the other audio type options are no longer available for selection.
c When you select the second check box (Breakaway individual audio channels [mono]/
stereo pairs [stereo]), Navigator sets each partition to a different level so that the audio
can be broken away. On stereo audio types only, the next check box becomes available
for selection.
d When you select the third check box (Breakaway individual audio channels), Navigator
allows you to breakaway the left and right stereo audio channels.
Table 15-2 and Table 15-3 show examples of different selections, and the results of
those selections.
The new matrix information appears in the description boxes. Matrix information is
color-coded as described in Table 15-1 on page 201.
12 Navigator displays the crosspoint locations associated with your matrix information. Make
sure you have crosspoint modules installed in these locations for crosspoint switching to
occur correctly. Proceed to page 212.
Table 15-2 AES or Analog Stereo Audio Types
Selection
Breakaway
No. Stereo Breakaway Breakaway
Audio from Result
Pairs Stereo Pairs Channels
Video
2 No No No Two stereo partitions with same level as
video
2 Yes No No Two stereo partitions set to the same
level but on a different level from the
video to allow audio to be broken away
from the video
2 Yes Yes No Two stereo partitions, each set to a
different level to allow the audio to be
broken away from the video and/or
from the other audio pair
2 Yes Yes Yes Four audio partitions that allow for the
audio to be broken away from the
video and/or from any of the sub
channels of audio in either stereo pair
Table 15-3 AES or Analog Mono Audio Types

Selection
No. Mono Breakaway Audio Breakaway
Result
Channels from Video Stereo Pairs
2 No No Two mono partitions with same level as video
User Manual
Table 15-3 AES or Analog Mono Audio Types (Continued)

Selection
No. Mono Breakaway Audio Breakaway
Result
Channels from Video Stereo Pairs
2 Yes No Two mono partitions set to the same level but on a
different level from the video to allow audio to be
broken away from the video
2 Yes Yes Two audio partitions that allow for the audio to be
broken away from the video and/or from any of the
sub channels of audio in either partition
Adding HView SX Hybrid Matrices

This section explains how to add HView SX Hybrid device information to a Platinum router
database. You can also create destinations that represent actual PIPs or use existing
destinations and have the PIPs follow them. See Setting Up HView SX Hybrid Virtual
Destinations on page 259 for more information.
The Add WB Matrix dialog box (Figure 15-4 on page 202) opens.
2 Choose Multiview from the Matrix Type drop-down list box.

The Add HView SX Matrices dialog box (Figure 15-6) opens.
Figure 15-6 AddHView SX Matrices Dialog Box

3 Under Multiviewer Type, choose HView Sx Hybrid.
208 Chapter 15
If you make changes to the # IN Slots field, any changes you make are reflected in the
# of Physical INs field as well. If you do not want to change the number of physical
inputs, do not change the # IN Slots field.
6 Choose the appropriate number of modules from the # HView SX Modules drop-down
list box. (You cannot type in the information into this field.)
7 Select the starting slot for your HView SX modules from the Starting HView SX Slot
drop-down list box.
8 The I/O Card & Slots box allows you to choose slots assignments for your I/O modules.
a Select the desired type of input module from the Input Card Type drop-down list
box.
list box.
c Select the number of modules of this type you need from the # IN Slots drop-down
list box. Navigator automatically calculates the number of physical inputs you have for
Changing this selection may change the number of physical inputs required; if you do
not want to change the number of physical inputs, please do not change this entry.
The new matrix information appears in the description boxes. (Matrix information is
color-coded as described in Table 15-1 on page 201.)
Two different types of multiviewer selections have been added: one for the underlying video
matrix and one for PIPs (this is the virtual matrix).
User Manual
Figure 15-7 HView SX Hybrid Entries

Highlight HView SX Hybrid PiPs, and then click Advanced....The Matrix Partition
dialog box opens. Navigator by default assigns an output offset equal to the size of the
frame. The example in Figure 13-8 shows a matrix with 128 outputs as well as an output
offset of 128.
Figure 15-8 PIPs Matrix Outputs and Output Offset
Note: There are other setup options available with PIPs. See Setting Up HView SX Hybrid
Virtual Destinations on page 259 for more information.
210 Chapter 15
Navigator also displays the crosspoint locations associated with your matrix information.
Crosspoint modules must be installed in these locations for crosspoint switching to occur
correctly. Proceed to page 212.
Configuring HView SX Hybrid Audio

In the configuration table, select HView SX Hybrid.
1 Right click on the audio inputs, and select Assign to HView SX Hybrid V.
2 To configure the level and output offsets (if required, and if a TDM matrix is present),
highlight HView SX Hybrid V, and then click Advanced.
The Matrix Partition dialog box appears. By default the output offset is equal to the size
of the frame.
3 Make any necessary changes to this screen, and then click OK.
4 Highlight the same slots, right-click, and then select Change Format.
The Select I/O Card Type dialog box opens.
Figure 15-9 Changing Audio Input Format

5 Under Format, select the correct audio format, and then click OK.
This creates an HView SX A audio matrix.
6 Highlight the slots that contain audio input modules, and then right-click and select
Assign to HView PRO V.
Configuring a HView SX Pro Matrix

Note: Before discovering an HView SX Pro device, Navigator must be configured to
communicate using LRC. Navigator will not communicate with HView SX Pro without LRC
turned on in the router configuration. See Enabling Connections Group Box on page
238 for more information.
User Manual
When a HView SX Pro multiviewer is installed in a 28 RU frame, or when the Platinum

frame only has one crosspoint in the zone where the HView SX Pro is installed, it is
configured as a WideBand matrix. When installed in a 5-, 9-, or 15-RU Platinum frame and
configured in a WB matrix, HView SX Pro-16 actually has 8 discrete inputs, HView SX Pro-32
has 16 discrete inputs, and HView SX Pro-64 has 32 discrete inputs. See Adding
Wideband Matrices on page 202. An audio matrix can also be added. See Adding TDM
Matrices on page 204.
Note: You cannot configure HView SX Pro modules in a Multiviewer matrix in a 128 RU
Platinum frame.
When configured in a Multiviewer matrix in a 5-, 9-, or 15-RU frame, HView SX Pro-16 has
16 discrete inputs, HView SX Pro-32 has 32 discrete inputs, and HView SX Pro-64 has 64
discrete inputs. To configure redundancy, follow these steps:
The Add WB Matrix dialog box (Figure 15-4 on page 202) opens.
2 Choose Multiview from the Matrix Type drop-down list box.

The Add HView SX Matrices dialog box (Figure 15-6) opens.
Figure 15-10 AddHView SX Matrices Dialog Box

3 Under Multiviewer Type, choose HView SX PRO 16, HView SX PRO 32, or HView SX 64.
If you make changes to the # IN Slots field, any changes you make are reflected in the
# of Physical INs field as well. If you do not want to change the number of physical
inputs, do not change the # IN Slots field.
6 Choose the appropriate number of modules from the # HView SX Modules drop-down
list box. (You cannot type in the information into this field.)
212 Chapter 15
7 Select the starting slot for your HView SX modules from the Starting HView SX Slot
drop-down list box.
8 The I/O Card & Slots box allows you to choose slots assignments for your I/O modules.
a Select the desired type of input module from the Input Card Type drop-down list
box.
list box.
c Select the number of modules of this type you need from the # IN Slots drop-down
list box. Navigator automatically calculates the number of physical inputs you have for
Changing this selection may change the number of physical inputs required; if you do
not want to change the number of physical inputs, please do not change this entry.
The new matrix information appears in the description boxes. (Matrix information is
color-coded as described in Table 15-1 on page 201.)
When HView SX Pro is configured as a WB matrix and supports audio, a TDM (HView SX
PRO A) matrix is also created. This matrix has a maximum of eight partitions, each with
eight outputs. Other output cards can ban be assigned to this matrix, and those other cards
can have a maximum of 16 partitions.
Enabling Redundant Crosspoints

Note: The Enable Redundant Crosspoint function is available with 128×128 and 256×256
frames only.
Before enabling redundant crosspoints, set the crosspoint switching mode. (This option
requires an additional crosspoint card.)
To enable redundant crosspoints, at the Configured Matrices dialog box right-click the
mouse button, and then choose Redundant Switch Mode from the shortcut menu.
The default setting is None.
User Manual
Figure 15-11 Redundant Switch Mode Shortcut Menu
 Click Switch All to switch all current crosspoints to the new, active crosspoint
module.
 Click Switch Next to switch all new crosspoints to the new, active crosspoint module.
Existing crosspoints are not switched, but remain on their original crosspoint module.
Changing Sync Settings

1 Right-click the mouse button, and then choose Assign Syncs from the shortcut menu.
Default values are Sync 1, Sync 2, Sync 3, and Sync 4. You can change these default values
at the Control Settings tab. See page 227 for instructions on changing sync names and
settings.
Figure 15-12 Assign Syncs Shortcut Menu
2 Select the sync you want to assign to the selected slots. (All cards assigned with the same
sync number have the same sync characteristics.)
Changing Initial Source Mode Settings

Note: You may also set this function at the Monitor Matrix tab. See page 223 for more
information.
If you want to change the initial source mode settings, follow these steps:
1 In the Configuration box, highlight the configuration you want to set.

2 Right-click the mouse, and then choose Set On-Download Initial Source Mode from
the shortcut menu.
 Select Best Guess to allow the frame to either keep or disconnect outputs after
download.
 Select Disconnect to allow the frame to disconnect outputs in the matrix areas
after download.
 Select First Source to specify all outputs of the matrix to be connected to the
first input in the matrix.
214 Chapter 15
Partitioning the Matrix

1 Highlight the matrix you want to partition, and then click Advanced....
The Matrix Partition dialog box (Figure 15-13) opens.
At the top left of the dialog box pertinent matrix information appears. You can change the
name, the input partition display color, starting level, and input and output offsets.
Figure 15-13 Matrix Partition Dialog Box
At the top right of the dialog box is the Matrix Size information box. This display is for
informational purposes only; you cannot change the matrix size here.
At the middle right of the dialog box is the Partition Type drop-down list box. Select
from different partition type components as described under Selecting Matrix
Partitioning Types on page 214.
Under the matrix information display are the Physical Input View and Physical
Output View tabs. The information displayed on these tabs provides a graphic
representation of how your selected input and output partitions look, based on the
partition type components you selected.
Selecting Matrix Partitioning Types

Select the matrix partitioning type from the Partition Type drop-down list box, and then
configure it as described in one of the following sections:
 No Partitioning on page 215

 RGB/Stereo Partitioning on page 215
 Contiguous Partitioning on page 216
 Wild Partitioning on page 216
User Manual
 Shared Inputs on page 218

 Mono Breakaway on page 218
 Stereo Breakaway on page 219
No Partitioning
Choose this option if you do not want a different partition type. To choose this option,
select None from the Partition Type drop-down list box. You only have one partition
with this option, so the # of Partitions box is greyed out.
You can change the inputs and outputs connected to any physical component within the
None partition type.
 Move your mouse to the Physical View area, and then right-click the mouse button.
 Select Physical Map Order from the shortcut menu.
The Physical Map Order dialog box opens (see Figure 15-14 on page 221).
 Click the physical location number for the appropriate component input or output, and
then select a new physical location number from the drop-down list box.
 Navigator assigns the new number to the chosen component, and assigns the original
number from the chosen component to the component to which the physical number
was originally assigned.
Under the matrix partition information display are the Physical Input View and
Physical Output View tabs. The information displayed on these tabs provides a graphic
representation of your selected input and output partitions. Choose the appropriate tab to
view either the resulting input or output partitioning.
RGB/Stereo Partitioning
See page 487 for information about additional advanced functions associated with this
partition type.
To choose this option, select RGB/Stereo from the Partition Type drop-down list box,
and then select the number of partitions from the # of Partitions drop-down list box.
partition type.
 Navigator assigns the new number to your chosen component, and assigns the original
number from your chosen component to the component to which the physical number
 Under the matrix partition information display are the Physical Input View and
Physical Output View tabs. The information displayed on these tabs provides a
graphic representation of how the selected input and output partitions look, based on
the partition type components you selected. Choose the appropriate tab to view either
the resulting input or output partitioning.
216 Chapter 15
In some cases you may want to assign particular inputs and outputs to a different partition
(component). The steps for completing this function are the same for both inputs and
outputs.
 Highlight the component that contains the inputs you want to reassign.
 Using standard Windows selection techniques, select the inputs in the Physical
Input View that you want to assign to a different component.
 Right-click the mouse button, and then choose Unassign from <component
name> from the shortcut menu. Selections appear light grey.
 Highlight the component to which you want to assign the inputs.
 Using standard Windows selection techniques, select the inputs you just unassigned.
 Right-click the mouse button, and then select Assign to <component name>
from the shortcut menu.
Selections receive that component’s color assignment.
Contiguous Partitioning
partition type.
To choose this option, select Contiguous from the Partition Type drop-down list box,
The initial appearance of the matrix (as illustrated in the Physical I/O View box) shows
boxes equal in shape and size; the number of boxes match the number of partitions
selected. You can change the I/O number per partition:
 Click on the component box you want to expand or reduce.

A blue border with small “handles” on it appears around the component box.
 Drag the handles to the left and right to change the number of inputs in the selected
component. The selected component box grows larger and the contingent component
grows smaller. (Pull slowly to see a display message showing how many inputs and how
many outputs the component contains.)
 Drag the handles to the top or bottom to change the number of outputs in the selected
component. The selected component box grows larger and the contingent component
grows smaller.
 Drag the handles diagonally to change the number of inputs and outputs in the
selected component. The selected component box grows larger and both contingent
components grow smaller.
Wild Partitioning
partition type.
To choose this option, select Wild from the Partition Type drop-down list box, and then
select the number of partitions from the # of Partitions drop-down list box.
Wild partition type.
 Move the mouse to the Physical View area, and then right-click the mouse button.
User Manual

 Navigator assigns the new number to the chosen component, and assign the original
Under the matrix partition information display are the Physical Input View and
Physical Output View tabs. The information displayed on these tabs provides a graphic
representation of how the selected input and output partitions look, based on the partition
type components selected. Choose the appropriate tab to view either the resulting input or
output partitioning.
The default view for Wild partitioning is that the inputs and outputs for each component
are continuous (for example., inputs 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6...32) and contiguous to one another
(where the inputs from one component end the inputs from the next component begin; for
example, component 1 input 1...32; component 2 input 1,2,3,...; and so forth). You can
change that view to RGB, so that inputs 1, 2, and 3 from each component fall in a row;
then inputs 4, 5, and 6; and so forth. The steps for completing this function are the same
for both inputs and outputs.
To switch from Contiguous viewing order to RGB viewing order:
 Move the mouse into the Physical Input View space.

 Right-click the mouse button, and then button, and then select one of the following
from the shortcut menu:
 Click Make RGB Inputs to make the Physical Input View space appear in
RGB order. (The Physical Output View space remains in contiguous order.)
 Click Make RGB All to make the both the Physical Input View space and
the Physical Output View space appear in RGB order.
To switch from Contiguous viewing order to RGB viewing order:
 Move the mouse into the Physical Input View space.

 Right-click the mouse button, and then select one of the following from the shortcut
menu:
 Click Make Contiguous Inputs to make the Physical Input View space
appear in contiguous order. (The Physical Output View space remains in RGB
order.)
 Click Make Contiguous All to make the both the Physical Input View
space and the Physical Output View space appear in contiguous order.
In some cases you may want to assign particular inputs and outputs to a different
component. The steps for completing this function are the same for both inputs and
outputs.
 Right-click the mouse button, and then select Unassign from <component
218 Chapter 15
from the shortcut menu. Selections receive that component’s color assignment.
Shared Inputs
partition type.
To choose this option, select Shared Inputs from the Partition Type drop-down list box,
The initial appearance of the matrix as illustrated in the Physical I/O View box shows
boxes equal in shape and size; the number of boxes match the number of partitions
selected. You can change the I/O number per partition:
 Click on the matrix box you want to expand or reduce.

A blue border with small “handles” on it appears around the matrix box.
 Drag the handles to the left and right to change the number of inputs in the selected
matrix. The selected matrix box grows larger or smaller but contingent matrixes stay the
same size. Pull slowly to see a display message showing how many inputs and how
many outputs the matrix contains.
 Drag the handles to the top or bottom to change the number of outputs in the selected
matrix. The selected matrix box grows larger and the contingent matrix grows smaller.
 Drag the handles diagonally to change the number of inputs and outputs in the
selected matrix. The selected matrix box grows larger and the contingent matrix grows
smaller.
Mono Breakaway
partition type.
To choose this option, select Mono Breakaway from the Partition Type drop-down
list box, and then select the number of partitions from the # of Partitions drop-down list
box.
 Select the Physical Input View tab.

The initial setup of the matrix is that all inputs are shared. You can change the input
number per partition:
 Move your mouse to the Physical View area, and then right-click the mouse
button.
 Select Physical Map Order from the shortcut menu.
 The Physical Map Order dialog box opens (see Figure 15-14).
 Click the physical location number for the appropriate component input or output,
and then select a new physical location number from the drop-down list box.
Navigator assigns the new number to the chosen component, and assigns the original
number from your chosen component to the component to which the physical number
In some cases you may want to assign particular inputs to a different partition
(component).
 Highlight the component that contains the inputs you want to reassign.
User Manual
 Using standard Windows selection techniques, select the inputs in the Physical
 Right-click the mouse button, and then select Unassign from <component
 Highlight the component to which you want to assign the inputs.
 Using standard Windows selection techniques, select the inputs you just
unassigned.
 Right-click the mouse button, and then select Assign to <component name>
 Select the Physical Output View tab.
 Move your mouse to the Physical View area, and then right-click the mouse button.
 Select Physical Map Order from the shortcut menu.
 The Physical Map Order dialog box opens (see Figure 15-14 on page 221).
 Click the physical location number for the appropriate component input or output,
and then select a new physical location number from the drop-down list box.
In some cases you may want to assign particular outputs to a different partition
(component).
 Highlight the component that contains the inputs you want to reassign.
 Using standard Windows selection techniques, select the inputs in the Physical
 Right-click the mouse button, and then select Unassign from <component
 Highlight the component to which you want to assign the inputs.
 Using standard Windows selection techniques, select the inputs you just
unassigned.
 Right-click the mouse button, and then select Assign to <component name>
Stereo Breakaway
partition type.
To choose this option, select Stereo Breakaway from the Partition Type drop-down
list box, and then select the number of partitions from the # of Partitions drop-down list
box.
 The Physical Map Order dialog box opens (see Figure 15-14 on page 221).
number from your chosen component to the component to which the physical number was
originally assigned.
220 Chapter 15
In some cases you may want to assign particular inputs and outputs to a different partition
(component). The steps for completing this function are the same for both inputs and
outputs.
 Right-click the mouse button, and then select Unassign from <component
In some cases you may want to assign particular inputs and outputs to more than one
partition (component). The steps for completing this function are the same for both inputs
and outputs.
 Highlight the first component to which you want to assign the inputs.
Input View that you want to assign to the first component.
 Highlight the next component to which you want to assign the inputs.
Input View that you want to assign to the next component.
Assigning Under the matrix information display are the Physical Input View and Physical
Physical Map Output View tabs. The information displayed on these tabs provides a graphic
representation of how your selected input and output partitions look, based on the
Order partition type components you selected.
1 Choose the appropriate tab to view either the resulting input or output partitioning.
You can change the inputs and outputs connected to any physical component. Click
somewhere within the read-only area of the matrix partition list for the matrix you want to
change. (Alternatively, move your mouse to the Physical View area, and then right-click
the mouse button. A shortcut menu opens. Select Physical Map Order.)
The Physical Map Order dialog box opens.

User Manual
Figure 15-14 Physical Map Order Dialog Box
The Physical Map Order dialog box displays the physical I/O location of a particular
component. At this dialog box, you can change the input or output assignment of any
physical component.
To change I/O assignments, click the physical location number for the appropriate
component input or output, and then select a new physical location number from the
drop-down list box. Navigator assigns the new number to your chosen component, and
assign the original number from your chosen component to the component to which the
physical number was originally assigned. For example, if you want to change the
assignment of Component Input 9 from 179 to 187 (which is currently assigned to
Component Input 17), Navigator assigns 187 to Component Input 9 and 179 to
Component Input 17.
2 Click OK to return to the Configured Matrices dialog box, and then click Next.
The Monitoring Matrices dialog box opens.
222 Chapter 15
Selecting Matrix Monitoring
Figure 15-15 Platinum Monitor Dialog Box
Matrix monitoring is a Platinum feature that treats the matrix inputs and outputs as a set of
inputs on a separate matrix (which is called the monitor matrix). It allows you to monitor
what comes out of a particular output. If you have a monitoring module installed in your
Platinum router, you can set up monitoring information here. You can monitor input signals,
output signals, or both input and output signals. You can set up a matrix monitoring
configuration in one of two ways: via the Quick-Physical I/O selection list, or by
manually inputting the information desired. (If you prefer to set up a monitoring matrix that
is automatically created and updated, do not choose this option. See page 201 through
page 203 for information on having Navigator create a monitoring matrix automatically.)
“Quick-Adding” a Monitoring Matrix

1 Click Add to assign a default monitoring matrix to the list box.
2 In the Quick-Physical I/O Selection List box, highlight the name of the matrix to
assign to the monitoring configuration list.
3 Click the appropriate radio button to select input or output monitoring, or both.
4 Click Assign.
The selected matrix appears in the Monitoring Matrix Configuration list box.
 To remove the matrix, click Delete.

 To edit matrix information, highlight the name of the matrix assigned to the
monitoring configuration list, and then click Advanced.
The Monitor Matrix dialog box opens. (See step 5 through step 6, starting on page 223,
for more instructions on completing this dialog box.)
5 Click Next.
The Control Settings dialog box opens.
User Manual
Manually Creating a Monitoring Matrix

1 Click Add to assign a default monitoring matrix to the list box.
2 At the matrix list control area, highlight the desired input and/or output module slots to
include in the selected monitor matrix.
3 Right-click the mouse, and then select Assign to Monitor Matrix.
4 Click Advanced.
The Monitor Matrix dialog box opens.
Figure 15-16 Monitor Matrix Dialog Box
5 In the Properties box, make the following selections:

 Select the desired level on which this matrix operates from the drop-down list box.
 If you want input monitoring offset, set the desired input offset number.
 If you want output monitoring offset, set the desired output offset number.
 Select a display color.
Note: If you have already set this selection (as described on page 213), you do not have to
set it again.
6 In the On-Download Initial Source box, select one of the following options:
 Select Best Guess to allow the frame to either keep or disconnect outputs after
download.
 Select Disconnect to allow the frame to disconnect outputs in the matrix areas
after download.
 Select First Source to specify all outputs of the matrix to be connected to the
first input in the matrix.
If you have added more than one matrix, and some of the same modules are assigned to
both matrixes, an asterisk appears to the left of the name (see Figure 15-17). The asterisk
means that this particular matrix provides virtual output monitoring. See the Platinum
Frame and Modules Manual Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual for more
information on real and virtual output monitoring.
224 Chapter 15
Figure 15-17 Virtual Monitoring Indicators
7 Click Next.
The Control Settings dialog box opens.
Selecting Controls
Figure 15-18 Platinum Control Settings Dialog Box

User Manual
This dialog box allows you to set up frame identifiers needed for file transfer protocol (FTP)
functions, Ethernet network functions, I/O sync and reference settings, SNMP settings,
protocol and license key settings, TDM starting slot offset, and allowing database name
synchronization.
Setting up Platinum Frame Identification

1 In the Platinum Frame Identification box, select the frame ID (the frame’s physical
address) from the drop-down list box.
2 In the Frame Name box, enter the frame’s descriptive name.
Setting up Platinum FTP Functions

1 In the Platinum Communications Settings box, click Settings....
The Communication Settings dialog box opens. If necessary, select the FTP Login
tab.
Figure 15-19 FTP Login Tab

2 In the Username box, enter the user name used for FTP transfers. (The actual username is
set up or changed via Navigator.)
3 In the Password box, enter the user name used for FTP transfers. (The actual password is
set up or changed via Navigator.)
4 In the Confirm box, re-enter the password you just entered.
Setting Up Platinum Network Settings

1 In the Platinum Communications Settings box, click Settings....
The Communication Settings dialog box opens.
IMPORTANT: The ENET 1 and ENET 2 tabs control the Ethernet ports on your Platinum
router. The configuration steps you follow differ, depending on whether you use one or
both ports.
226 Chapter 15
The ENET 1 and the ENET 2 tabs’ network properties are divided into two sections: the
Current (read-only) section, which is displayed on the left side of Figure 15-20/
Figure 15-21; and the Programmed (editable) settings section, which is displayed on the
right side of Figure 15-20/Figure 15-21.
Note: You cannot change the MAC address at this tab. The MAC address is set up via
Navigator or card-edge controls.
Programmed settings include
 Frame IP address (this is necessary for transferring or upgrading files via an FTP site;
the actual frame IP address is set up via Navigator or card-edge controls.)
 Gateway address
 Subnet Mask address
Figure 15-20 ENET 1 Tab Showing Current and Programmed Selection Results
Figure 15-21 ENET 2 Tab Showing Current and Programmed Selection Results
To set up communication for Navigator to transfer configuration files to the Platinum frame
(this is not assigning an IP address to the frame):
a Fill in the FTP Login information as appropriate for your network.

b Select the ENET 1 tab.
User Manual
c Fill in the Frame IP address.

d Click OK to accept the changes.
To assign IP settings to the Platinum frame's ENET 1 and/or ENET 2 ports:
a Fill in the FTP Login information as appropriate for your network.
b Select the ENET 1 tab.
You cannot change the MAC address at this tab. The MAC address is set up via
Navigator or card-edge controls.
c Fill in the Frame IP address, Gateway address, and Subnet Mask address.
(The ENET 2 port is disabled by default; make changes only if you are using a second
Ethernet port on a Platinum router.)
d Select the ENET 2 tab.
e Select the Check to modify network settings for this port check box.
f Fill in the Frame IP address, Gateway address, and Subnet Mask address.
g Click Download to accept the changes and send the changes to the router. A series of
informational messages appear that show the progress of the download.
CAUTIONIf the IP address you changed from is already set up in the Comm Settings
menu, this download changes the selection at the Navigator Comm Settings menu.
If the IP Address you changed from is not already set up, this download does not
add the selection to the list.
Setting Up Platinum I/O Sync and References

Note: The I/O Type drop-down list box opens when the you select Standard radio button.
The Sync Pulse Delay box opens when you select the Advanced radio button.
If you want to configure the sync settings, in the Platinum I/O Sync and References
box, click Sync....
The Configure I/O Sync Settings dialog box opens.
Figure 15-22 Configure I/O Sync Settings Dialog Box (Standard Setting Selected)
You can configure separate settings for up to four separate sync ports. For each port,
choose the following settings:
1 Choose the desired sync (1 through 4) from the drop-down list box.
2 Enter a name by which to identify a particular sync port.
3 Choose Auto, Standard, or Advanced mode.
228 Chapter 15
 In Auto mode the switch point is determined by the detected sync type only,
based on SMPTE RP-168 specifications.
 Standard mode provides the option to pick a standard timing reference. Select
which one you want from the I/O Type drop-down list box.
 Advanced mode provides the option to enter a sync pulse (take) delay in
microseconds. Enter the delay time you want in the Sync Pulse Delay box.
4 Click OK to return to the Control Settings dialog box.
Setting up If you plan to use Simple Network Routing Protocol with your Platinum router, you must
SNMP select the appropriate SNMP settings and, if desired, set up advanced settings for updating
license key and map names information.
Note: To set up the SNMP Agent for your Platinum routing system, you must purchase
separate license support. The Platinum SNMP Agent is not supported for use with systems
configured with TDM and MX / DX cards.
See the Simple Network Management Protocol for Platinum, Panacea, and Edge Products
Installation and Configuration Manual for information on SNMP licensing, activating the
SNMP Agent, and using SNMP to control a Platinum router.
To enable this function, click SNMP... in the Platinum Protocol and License Settings
box (see Figure 15-18 on page 224).
The SNMP Agent Options window opens (see Figure 15-23). The SNMP Agent Options
window is a dialog box that allows you to set up all desired SNMP Agent settings.
Figure 15-23 SNMP Agent Options Window
Three separate group boxes are displayed on this window, and are described in the
following sections:
User Manual
 Trap Destination IP Addresses on page 229

 SNMP Agent on page 230
 System on page 231
Trap Destination IP Addresses

The Trap Destinations IP Addresses group box allows you to add, modify, or delete SNMP
Trap Destinations.
 To add or modify an SNMP Trap destination:

a Click Add... (or, to modify a destination, click Modify....).
The Add (or Edit) Trap Destination dialog box opens.
Figure 15-24 Edit Trap Destination Dialog Box

b Change selections as described in Table 15-4.
Table 15-4 Trap Destinations Selections

Item Function
IP Address IP address desired for the SNMP Trap destination
Port (Can be from 1 to 65535) Network port desired for the SNMP Trap
destination
Community SNMP read community string (in SNMP terms, a “Get” operation
Version SNMP version desired for the SNMP Trap
Timeout Desired time period (in seconds) before an SNMP Trap is sent to a
manager if the initial attempt failed
Retry Number of times to resend an SNMP Trap to a manager if the initial
attempt failed
c Click OK to accept the changes.

 To delete an SNMP Trap destination:
230 Chapter 15
a At the SNMP Agent Options window list control, select the IP address for the
SNMP trap destination you want to delete. Use standard Windows selection techniques
to select multiple devices.
b Click Delete.
The IP address(es) are removed from the list.
To completely clear the category list, click Delete All. You will be prompted to confirm
the deletion.
SNMP Agent
Table 15-5 shows the items and function descriptions for the items listed in the SNMP
Agent group box.
Table 15-5 SNMP Agent Items of SNMP Options Window

Item Function
SNMP agent
Read Community SNMP read community string (in SNMP terms, a “Get”
operation has to match this setting in the MIB browser in
Write Community SNMP write community string (in SNMP terminology, a
“Set” operation has to match this setting in a MIB
browser in order to write information to that device)
Enable Authentication Traps When checked, authentication traps are sent if the read
or write community does not match between the SNMP
agent and MIB browser
Permitted Managers Opens the Manager Address shortcut menu (see
Figure 15-25)
The Managers Address shortcut menu allows you to specify the addresses of the managers
whose requests will be processed by the SNMP Agent.
User Manual
Figure 15-25 Manager Address Shortcut Menu
 To add a manager address:

a Enter the IP address in the text box to the left of the Add button.
b Click Add.
c Click OK to complete the function.
 To modify a manager address:
a Highlight the manager address that you want to modify.
b Click Modify. The Permitted Manager Destinations dialog box opens.
c Modify the manager address as desired.
d Click OK to complete the function.
 To delete a manager address:
a Highlight the address you want to remove. Use standard Windows selection techniques
to select multiple addresses.
b Click Remove.
The IP address(es) are removed from the list.
To completely clear the address list, click Remove All. You will be prompted to
confirm the deletion.
System
The System group box fields describe the device that is currently selected in the
Navigation window. This is user-defined information that, once provided by an
administrator, is available on the device when it is retrieved by a MIB browser. Table 15-6
shows the fields and function descriptions for the items listed in the System box.
Table 15-6 System Fields of SNMP Options Window

Field Explanation
Description Device description; default is “Leitch Agent”
Location Device physical location
232 Chapter 15
Table 15-6 System Fields of SNMP Options Window (Continued)

Contact Device contact person
Name Device name
Updating License Keys and Logical Settings

To set up license keys and Map Names information settings for your Platinum router, click
Advanced....
The Advanced Settings window opens.
The Advanced Settings window is a tabbed dialog box that allows you to view the
configuration file names that are used to store frame’s configuration information; and
displays information and settings for Map Names and license options.
Map Names Tab

The Map Names Tab dialog box allows you to update a frame’s source and destination
“Names Mapping” file based on the current logical routing configuration utility database.
Figure 15-26 Map Names Tab
The Map Names tab allows you to make the following settings:
 From the Export Communication group box, you can select how to transfer the Map
Names file to the frame.
Table 15-7 Map Names File Transfer Selections

Selection Function
XY File Transfer Export a file by X-Y transfer based on the routing system’s
serial or TCP/IP communication setting
FTP Export a file by traditional File Transfer Protocol (you will
be asked to log in before the file transfer is initiate.)
User Manual
 From the Select File group box, you can choose how you want the Map Names file
to be generated.
Table 15-8 Map Names File Generation Functions

Selection Function
Auto Generate Generate a new file based on the current logical database
Use Existing File Generate a Map Names file based on an existing file
 When you click the Update button, the frame reboots after the file has been
transmitted. A frame must be rebooted for the frame to use the new transfer file.
License Tab
At the License Tab, you can activate SNMP Agent firmware licenses for up to two separate
Platinum resource modules (PT-RES-1 and PT-RES-2).
Figure 15-27 License Tab
The License tab allows you to make the following settings:
 From the Export Communication group box, you can select how to transfer the
license key to the frame.
Table 15-9 License Key Transfer Functions

Selection Function
XY File Transfer Export a file by X-Y transfer (based on serial or TCP/IP
communication setting)
FTP Export a file by traditional File Transfer Protocol (you will
be asked to log in before the file transfer is initiated)
 In the License Key box(es), enter the appropriate license activation code(s) you
received from your Customer Service representative.
transmitted. A frame must be rebooted before the SNMP license is recognized.
Changing To enable this function, click Protocols... at the Platinum Control Settings dialog box
Protocol (see Figure 15-18 on page 224).
Settings
234 Chapter 15
The Change Protocol Settings dialog box opens. This multi-tabbed dialog box allows
you to perform the following tasks:
 Enabling and Disabling Signal Presence Messages on page 234

 Enabling Message Filtering by Connections, Devices, and Level Inputs And
Outputs on page 235
 Enable Message Filtering by Server Connections, Devices, and Level Inputs and
Outputs on page 238
 Enabling Serial or X-Y Ports on the Platinum Communications Back Panel on
page 241
Enabling and Disabling Signal Presence Messages

To enable this function, select the Protocols tab at the Change Protocol Settings
dialog box. When you have finished filling out the selections as described, do one of the
following:
 Select the Connections tab to continue the changing protocol settings process.
 Click OK to return to the Control Settings dialog box, and then click OK to accept
the changes.
Figure 15-28 Protocols Tab
This tab shows you the available protocols that your Platinum frame currently supports. You
cannot disable any of these protocols; however, this tab allows you to enable and disable
signal presence settings for the X-Y pass through protocol1.
 When the Allow Input Signal Presence Messages check box is selected,
Navigator allows input signal presence messages to be sent.
When the Allow Input Signal Presence Messages check box is not selected,
Navigator filters out input signal presence messages.
1
For a detailed discussion of the X-Y pass-through protocol, see the Imagine Communications Routing
Switchers Serial Protocol Reference Operation and Reference Manual.
User Manual
 When the Allow Output Signal Presence Messages check box is selected,
Navigator allows output signal presence messages to be sent.
When the Allow Output Signal Presence Messages check box is not selected,
Navigator filters out output signal presence messages.
Enabling Message Filtering by Connections, Devices, and Level

Inputs And Outputs
To enable this function, select the Connections tab at the Change Protocol
Settings dialog box. When you have finished filling out the selections as described, do
one of the following:
 Select the Servers tab to continue the changing protocol settings process.
the changes.
Figure 15-29 Connections Tab
This tab allows you to make the appropriate selections to enable filtering out messages
based on specific connections, devices, and level inputs/outputs.
Enabling Connections Group Box

The Enable Connections group box displays all current connections available on your
Platinum frame. By default, a Platinum frame always has the following connections; default
connections show an asterisk at the end of the connection name.
Note: You can enable or disable any of the default connections. You cannot edit or delete
default connections. Any user-added (non-default) connections can be edited or deleted.
 XYSer1 uses X-Y pass through and X-Y terminal protocols on serial port 1 on the
Platinum communications back panel.
 XYSer2 uses X-Y pass through & X-Y Terminal protocols on serial port 2 on the
Platinum communications back panel.
236 Chapter 15
 XYCoax1 uses X-Y pass through protocol on XY port 1 on the Platinum

communications back panel.
 XYCoax2 uses X-Y pass through protocol on XY port 2 on the Platinum
communications back panel.
To enable a default connection, make sure the selection box to the left of the connection
name is checked.
To disable a default connection, make sure the selection box to the left of the connection
name is unchecked.
To add a connection, follow these steps:
1 Click Add under the Enable Connections group box.

The Add New Client Connection dialog box opens.
Figure 15-30 Add New Client Connection Dialog Box

2 Enter a connection name in the Name box, and then click OK.
The Connections tab opens and the Connections Property Settings box is
enabled.
At the Connection Property Settings box, you must specify a server IP and port
number because the Network Client selection uses the Ethernet port. See page 237 for
more information.
3 Make the appropriate selections for the Specifies Input & Output for Status
Message Postings group box.
Specifies Input & Output for Status Message Postings Group Box
The Specifies Input & Output for Status Message Postings group box allows
you to specify the level inputs and/or outputs for status message filtering per each
connection.
1 Select the desired connection from the Enable Connections list.

2 If necessary, select the input level to be modified from the Level drop-down list box.
3 Move the desired inputs from the Available Inputs list to the Allow Inputs list. Any
status messages for the inputs that are not assigned to the Allow Inputs list box are filtered
out from this connection.
Multiple inputs may be selected from the Available Inputs list using standard Windows
selection techniques. Move inputs between lists via the >, <, >>, and >> buttons.
If the Allow Inputs list box has no input specified, the status messages for all detected
inputs are allowed for the selected connection.
User Manual
4 Move the desired outputs from the Available Outputs list to the Allow Outputs list.
Any status messages for the outputs that are not assigned to the Allow Outputs list box
are filtered out from this connection.
Multiple outputs may be selected from the Available Outputs list using standard
Windows selection techniques. Move outputs between lists via the >, <, >>, and >>
buttons.
If the Allow Outputs list box has no output specified, the status messages for all detected
outputs are allowed for the selected connection.
5 If desired, click View Allowable Inputs & Outputs… to view the summary of all the
assigned level inputs and outputs.
The Input & Output Ranges box opens, with the selected Levels, inputs, and outputs
displayed.
6 When finished, click OK.

The Connections tab opens.
7 Make the appropriate selections for the Specifies Device IDs for Status Message
Posting group box.
Specifies Device IDs for Status Message Posting Group Box

The Specifies Device IDs for Status Message Posting group box allows you to
make selections to filter out status messages by devices.
1 Select the desired connection from the Enable Connections list.

A list of devices attached to that connection appears in the Specifies Device IDs for
Status Message Posting list box.
2 To allow status message postings for a specific devices:

 Enter the device ID number in the Device ID edit box.
 Click Add. Note that, for any device IDs already assigned to a panel, frame, or
Edge, the device’s name is shown next to the assigned ID.
If the Device IDs list box does not have a device ID assigned, check the Allow Status
Message Postings of All Detected Devices From This Connection check box
to allow the frame to post all status messages for all detected devices associated with the
selected connection.
3 To disable status message postings for a specific listed device:

 Select the appropriate device IDs from the Specifies Device IDs for Status
Message Posting list box. Multiple device IDs may be selected from the list
using standard Windows selection techniques.
 Click Delete to remove the selected device IDs from the list.
4 To disable status message postings from all listed devices, click Delete All.
All device IDs are removed from the list.
5 Make the appropriate selections for the Connection Property Settings group box.
Connection Property Settings Group Box

If you selected Network Client as a connection type, you must specify a server IP and port
number in this group box. You can also specify whether or not you want to let the frame
automatically reconnect if a server connection fails or is lost.
238 Chapter 15
Click the Allow Status Message Postings of All Detected Devices from This
Connection… check box to allow the frame to post status messages for all detected
devices for the selected connection. If the check box is unchecked, the frame uses the
assigned device IDs to determine which devices are allow status message posting.
Enable Message Filtering by Server Connections, Devices, and

Level Inputs and Outputs
To enable this function, select the Servers tab at the Change Protocol Settings
dialog box. When you have finished filling out the selections as described, do one of the
following:
 Select the Ports tab to continue the changing protocol settings process.
the changes.
Figure 15-31 Servers Tab
This tab allows you to filter out messages based on specific server connections, devices, and
level inputs/outputs. This tab functionality is very similar to the Connections tab; however,
server connections are for other devices (panels, frames, Edge, window application, and so
forth) to connect to Platinum frame through the Ethernet ports.
Enabling Connections Group Box

The Enable Connections group box displays all current server connections available on
your Platinum frame. By default, a Platinum frame always has the following connections;
default connections show an asterisk at the end of the connection name.
 XYNetSrv uses X-Y pass through protocol.

 XYTelnet uses X-Y terminal and X-Y pass through protocols.
 XYAdmin uses X-Y pass through protocol.
 XYStream uses X-Y pass through protocol.
 LRC uses LRC protocol.
User Manual
To enable a default server connection, make sure the selection box to the left of the
connection name is checked.
To disable a default server connection, make sure the selection box to the left of the
connection name is unchecked.
To add a server connection, follow these steps:
1 Click Add under the Enable Connections group box.

The Add New Server Connection dialog box opens.
Figure 15-32 Add New Server Connection Dialog Box

2 Enter a server name in the Name box.
3 From the Type drop-down list box, select a protocol type for the server connection.
 Select LRC TCP Server to use LRC protocol on a network server.
 Select Network Client to use X-Y pass through protocol on a network client.
 Select Network Server to use X-Y pass through protocol on a network server.
 Select Telnet Server to use X-Y terminal and X-Y pass through protocols on a
Telnet server.
4 Click OK to return to the Servers tab.
The Connections Property Settings box is enabled. (At the Connection
Property Settings box, you must specify a listening port number and the maximum
number of clients allowed. See page 239 for more information.
5 Make the appropriate selections for the Connection Property Settings group box.
Connection Property Settings Group Box

Each server connection requires that you specify a unique listening port (that other devices
and/or applications must know to connect to a this particular server from the frame); and a
maximum number of other devices and/or applications that the frame allows to connect to
this server at a time.
1 In the Listening Port box, enter the port number of the listening port.
2 In the Max Clients box, enter the maximum number of other devices and/or applications
allowed to connect to this server at one time.
3 Make the appropriate selections for the Specifies Input & Output for Status
Message Postings group box.
Specifies Input & Output for Status Message Postings Group Box
The Specifies Input & Output for Status Message Postings group box allows
you to specify the level inputs and/or outputs for status message filtering per each server.
240 Chapter 15
1 Select the desired server connection from the Enable Connections list.
2 If necessary, select the input level to be modified from the Level drop-down list box.
3 Move the desired inputs from the Available Inputs list to the Allow Inputs list. Any
status messages for the inputs that are not assigned to the Allow Inputs list box are
filtered out from this connection.
Multiple inputs may be selected from the Available Inputs list using standard Windows
selection techniques. Move inputs between lists via the >, <, >>, and >> buttons.
If the Allow Inputs list box has no input specified, the status messages for all detected
inputs are allowed for the selected connection.
4 Move the desired outputs from the Available Outputs list to the Allow Outputs list.
Any status messages for the outputs that are not assigned to the Allow Outputs list box
are filtered out from this connection.
Multiple outputs may be selected from the Available Outputs list using standard
Windows selection techniques. Move outputs between lists via the >, <, >>, and >>
buttons.
If the Allow Outputs list box has no output specified, the status messages for all detected
outputs are allowed for the selected connection.
5 If desired, click View Allowable Inputs & Outputs… to view the summary of all the
assigned level inputs and outputs.
The Input & Output Ranges box opens, with the selected Levels, inputs, and outputs
displayed.
6 When finished, click OK.

The Server tab opens.
7 Make the appropriate selections for the Specifies Device IDs for Status Message
Posting group box.
Specifies Device IDs for Status Message Posting Group Box

The Specifies Device IDs for Status Message Posting group box allows you to
make selections to filter out status messages by devices.
1 Select the desired server connection from the Enable Connections list.
A list of devices attached to that connection appears in the Specifies Device IDs for
Status Message Posting list box.
2 To allow status message postings for a specific devices, enter the device ID number in the
device ID edit box, and then click Add. Note that, for any device IDs already assigned to a
panel, frame, or Edge, the device’s name is shown next to the assigned ID.
If the Device IDs list box does not have a device ID assigned, check the Allow Status
Message Postings of All Detected Devices From This Connection check box
to allow the frame to post all status messages for all detected devices associated with the
selected connection.
3 To disable status message postings for a specific listed device:

 Select the appropriate device IDs from the Specifies Device IDs for Status
Message Posting list box. Multiple device IDs may be selected from the list
using standard Windows selection techniques.
 Click Delete.
User Manual
The selected device IDs are removed from the list.
4 To disable status message postings from all listed devices, click Delete All.
All device IDs are removed from the list.
Enabling Serial or X-Y Ports on the Platinum Communications

Back Panel
To enable this function, select the Ports tab at the Change Protocol Settings dialog
box.
Figure 15-33 Ports Tab
The currently enabled serial and Ethernet ports are displayed in the Enable Ports box.
The port selections that you cannot enable or disable are greyed out.
 To enable a port connection, make sure the selection box to the left of the port name is
checked.
 To disable a port connection, make sure the selection box to the left of the port name is
unchecked.
Enabling TDM Starting Slot Offset

The TDM starting slot offset selection allows you to specify the starting slot for Platinum
TDM matrices in 15RU and 28RU frames. It is especially useful when you use an
ATDM32-X28 or ATDM16-X15 crosspoint module.
The TDM starting slot offset is a number that indicates where the contiguous TDM modules
are placed in the frame.
 For a 15RU frame, slot numbers range from 1 to 17.

 For a 28RU frame, slot numbers range from 1to 33.
At the TDM Starting Slot drop-down list box, select the number that corresponds with the
slot where a TDM matrix is located.
242 Chapter 15
Completing the Control Settings Entries

When finished with all of your control setting selections, click OK to return to the Control
Settings dialog box, and then click OK to accept the changes.
Editing the Router Matrix

The Edit Platinum Frame dialog box includes all functions necessary for changing a
router frame configuration. Any of the tabs (Configured Matrices, Monitoring
Matrices, Detected Matrices, Firmware, or Control Settings) can be selected by
clicking on the appropriate tab.
Configured
Matrices Tab
Figure 15-34 Configured Matrices Tab
At the Configured Matrices tab, you can add a new matrix, or delete or configure an
existing matrix for a Platinum frame. Matrix information (name, inputs, outputs, format,
partition) is displayed in the matrix list control area. Corresponding input and output
modules are displayed on the right side of the dialog box. The Output column and the
Input column are set up with separate list box controls. The matrix’s module information is
coded as described in Table 15-1.
Table 15-10 Matrix Information Color Codes

Color Code Description
Blue Designates I/O slots (physical I/Os) assigned to the selected matrix
Dark grey Designates I/O slots that are not selectable because they are assigned
to another matrix
Light grey Designates I/O slots that are available to be assigned to any matrix
Green Designates I/O slots highlighted to be assigned to (or unassigned
from) the selected matrix
User Manual
There are two icons that show module information, as shown in Table 15-11. Navigator
may display both icons for a particular slot.
Table 15-11 Matrix Informational Icons

Icon Description
Indicates that a module has been detected in this slot; you can
identify its parameters via the Detected Matrices Tab
Indicates that the module detected in this slot is different from what
the slot was configured to be
Note: If you have several editing functions to perform, you may want to do them all at once
via the Advanced function (see page 244).
 To select items from the Input or Output column, use standard Windows selection
techniques to select multiple modules on each, or both, lists. The selected items appear
green until you deselect them. Unselecting removes the green color information from
the slot, but does not remove the slot from the assigned matrix.
 To deselect items from the Input or Output column, highlight the appropriate slot,
right-click the mouse, and then select Unselect from the shortcut menu. Unselecting
removes the green color information from the slot, but does not remove the slot from
the assigned matrix.
 To deselect multiple items at once, right-click the mouse, and then select
Unselect All from the shortcut menu. Unselecting removes the green color
information from the slot, but does not remove the slot from the assigned matrix.
Note: Input modules can be assigned to more than one matrix at a time. Output modules
cannot be assigned to more than one matrix.
 To assign a module to a different matrix, highlight the matrix you want to

assign a module to, highlight the available slot (displayed as light grey), right click the
mouse, and then select Assign to <matrix name>. The assigned slot displays green
color information until you unselect it.
Note: For HView SX Pro matrix:
 Select four contiguous available output slots to add a HView SX Pro64.

 Select two output slots to add a HView SX Pro32.
 Select one slot to add a HView SX Pro16.
 In other cases, multiple HView SX Pro16s will be added.
 To remove a module from a matrix, highlight the slot you want to remove from
the matrix, right click the mouse, and then select Unassign from <matrix name>.
The removed slot displays green color information until you unselect it.
 To change the matrix name, click the name box of the appropriate matrix, and then
type in a new name. (You may also click the right mouse button to copy the existing
name, paste in a new name, or delete the name completely.)
244 Chapter 15
 To change the matrix format, click the format box of the appropriate matrix, and
then select a new format type. Alternatively, highlight the appropriate slot, right-click
the mouse, and then select Change Format from the shortcut menu. Choose the
new format from the display list.
 To change the sort order of the listed matrixes, click the title of the column
by which you want to sort. Click the title box once to sort in ascending order (A-Z or
0-512); click the title box again to sort in descending order (Z-A or 512-0).
 To add a new matrix, click Add.
The Add Matrix dialog box opens. See page 201 for information on how to complete
this dialog.
 To delete an individual matrix, highlight the appropriate matrix, and then click
Delete.
 To delete all listed matrixes, click Delete All.
 To add a virtual matrix to an underlying multiviewer video matrix,
highlight the video matrix, right click the mouse, and then select Add HView SX
Hybrid PIPs. The HView SX Hybrid PIPs selection is added to the Configured
Matrices list.
 To perform multiple edit functions click Advanced....
The Matrix Partitioning tab opens. See page 214 for a description of this tab. At
this tab you can change these selections:
 Matrix name
 Matrix format
 Matrix sort order
 Color for matrix partitioning display
 Level
 Input offset
 Output offset
 Partition type
 Number of partitions
 Physical map order
 To assign dual outputs, highlight the appropriate slot, right-click the mouse, and
then select Dual Output from the shortcut menu. Select this option only if your
Platinum modules include a dual output module such as the PT-HSR-DOB, PT-SR-DOB,
or PT-ENC-DOB.
 To enable redundant crosspoints, right-click the mouse button, and then
choose Redundant Switch Mode from the shortcut menu.
Note: This function is available with 256×256 frames only.
 Click Switch All to switch all current crosspoints to the new, active crosspoint
module.
 Click Switch Next to switch all new crosspoints to the new, active crosspoint
module. Existing crosspoints are not switched, but remain on their original
crosspoint module.
 To set the crosspoint switching mode, right-click the mouse button, and then
choose Redundant Switch Mode from the shortcut menu.
 Click Switch Next to switch all new crosspoints to the new, active crosspoint
module. Existing crosspoints are not switched, but remain on their original
crosspoint module.
User Manual
 Click Switch All to switch all current crosspoints to the new, active crosspoint
module.
 To assign sync settings, highlight the appropriate slot, right-click the mouse, and
then select Assign Sync from the shortcut menu. Choose the new sync setting from
the display list.
You can change the default sync setting values at the Control Settings tab. See
page 227 for instructions on how to change the sync names and settings.
 To change module formats
a Highlight the appropriate matrix.
b Right-click on the appropriate module (or, using standard Windows selection methods,
select several modules at the same time), and then select Change Format....
The Select I/O Card Type dialog box opens.
Figure 15-35 Select I/O Card Type Dialog Box

c Select the format you want for the module(s). The card type automatically changes to
match the format you selected.
d If the card type includes options, click the check box next to the plugin.
 To change module parameter settings
a Right-click on the appropriate module (or, using standard Windows selection methods,
select several modules of the same format), and then select Parameter Settings....
The Configure Module Parameters dialog box1 opens.
The parameters listed in the Configure Module Parameters dialog box are
user-controllable. These parameters vary, depending on which type of module has been
selected. See the Platinum Routing Switchers Frames and Modules Installation,
Configuration, and Operation Manual for a list of each module’s parameters,
description, and user range.
b Double click the parameter instance you want to change, or double click the
appropriate parameter name to change all instances to the same value.
1
The Configure Module Parameters dialog box displays the same type of information as the Module
Parameters List component of the Detected Matrices tab (see Figure 15-38 on page 250). If you
change parameter information in the Configure Module Parameters dialog box, the values you select
become the default values after a device download is performed.
246 Chapter 15
Figure 15-36 Configure Module Parameters Dialog Box

c Depending on the type of parameter selected, either a drop-down list box or a text box
opens.
 In a drop-down list box, select the setting that you want.
 In a text box, enter the value you want.
 To clear module parameter settings
The Configure Module Parameters dialog box opens.
b Right click the parameter instance you want to clear.
OR
Right click the appropriate parameter name to clear all its parameter instances at the
same time.
c Click Clear.
Selected parameter instance values are cleared.
 To clear all module parameter settings
The Configure Module Parameters dialog box opens.
b Click Clear All.
All parameter instances values are cleared.
Enabling Matrix Partitioning

1 Double-click the name of the frame you want to partition.
The Configured Matrices dialog box opens.
2 Click Advanced....
User Manual
The Matrix Partition dialog box opens as shown on Figure 15-13 on page 214.
3 At the top left of the window is pertinent matrix information. You can change the name,
the input partition display color, starting level, and input and output offsets.
 To change the sort order of the listed matrixes, click the title of the
column by which you want to sort. Click the title box once to sort in ascending
order (A-Z or 0-512); click the title box again to sort in descending order (Z-A or
512-0).
 To change the matrix name, click the name box of the appropriate matrix, and
then type in a new name. (You may also click the right mouse button to copy the
existing name, paste in a new name, or delete the name completely.)
 To change the input matrix partition display color, click the color box of the
appropriate matrix, and then choose the color you want.
 To change the starting level of a matrix, click the drop-down list box under
the Levels column. (You cannot type in the information into this field.)
 To change the input offset number, type in the desired offset number into
the field under the Input Offset column.
 To change the output offset number, type in the desired offset number into
the field under the Output Offset column.
 To change the inputs and outputs connected to any physical
component, click somewhere within the read-only area of the matrix partition list
for the component you want to change. (Alternatively, move your mouse to the
Physical View area, and then right-click the mouse button. A shortcut menu
opens. Select Physical Map Order.) The Physical Map Order dialog box
opens (see Figure 15-14 on page 221).
Click the physical location number for the appropriate component input or output, and
then select a new physical location number from the drop-down list box. Navigator assigns
the new number to your chosen component, and assigns the original number from your
chosen component to the component to which the physical number was originally
assigned.
4 At the top right of the Matrix Partition window is the Matrix Size information box (see
Figure 15-13 on page 214). This display is for informational purposes only; you cannot
change the matrix size here.
5 At the middle right of the dialog box is the Partition Type drop-down list box. Select the
matrix partitioning type from the Partition Type drop-down list box, and then configure
it as described:
None
Choose this option if you do not want a different partition type.
 No Partitioning on page 215
 No Partitioning (With Advanced Settings) on page 485
RGB/Stereo Partitioning
Choose this option if you want to divide a matrix into components of equal size.
You can connect the RGB outputs from a component device to the first three
physical inputs on the router, and the RGB outputs of a second component device
to physical inputs four, five and six (each group of three inputs appears to the
control system as a single input, and are switched simultaneously).
 RGB/Stereo Partitioning on page 215
248 Chapter 15
 RGB/Stereo Partitioning (Advanced) on page 487

Choose this option if you want to divide a matrix into blocks of sources and
destinations; Navigator automatically assigns blocks of physical inputs and outputs
of the matrix to the appropriate components (this option differs from Shared Inputs
in that input blocks cannot overlap).
 Contiguous Partitioning (With Advanced Settings) on page 488
Wild Partitioning
Choose this option if you want to allow any input or output to be assigned to any
component.
Shared Inputs
Choose this option if you want to divide a matrix into blocks of sources and
destinations. Navigator automatically assigns blocks of physical inputs and outputs
of the matrix to the appropriate components (this option differs from Contiguous
in that input blocks can overlap).
 Shared Inputs on page 218
 Shared Inputs (With Advanced Settings) on page 489
Mono Breakaway
Choose this option if you want to divide a matrix into components of equal size
(that is, RGB) and allow any input or output to be assigned to any component, or
to more than one component at the same time. This option is useful when setting
up TDM applications where you want to breakaway mono audio channels.
 Mono Breakaway on page 218
 Mono Breakaway (With Advanced Settings) on page 490
Stereo Breakaway
Choose this option if you want to divide a matrix into components of equal size
(that is, RGB) and allow any input, channel, or output to be assigned to any
component, or to more than one component at the same time. This option is
useful when setting up stereo audio channels1 in TDM applications where you
want to breakaway channels or always move them together.
 Stereo Breakaway on page 219
 Stereo Breakaway (With Advanced Settings) on page 490
6 When all of your selections are complete, click OK to return to the Configured
Matrices tab, and then click OK to accept the changes.
1
Each AES signal consists of two audio channels. For example, in stereo pairs, “left” is one channel
and “right” is one channel.
User Manual
Detected
Matrices Tab
Figure 15-37 Detected Matrices Tab
When a system poll is initiated, Navigator queries all devices attached to the system to
determine the configuration of each. The properties of the detected frame are displayed on
the Detected Matrices tab. This information is read-only (it cannot be edited).
If the first output card in a matrix has failed, or if the wrong card has been placed into the
frame, the frame’s control card cannot determine a valid matrix. In this case, the graphic of
the frame shown on the Detected Matrices tab is empty. However, the frame still
reports exactly which cards it has found in each slot. This information can be viewed on the
Detected Cards tab, and can assist in troubleshooting the system.
To view the details of a particular matrix, click View Detail.
The Matrix Partition tab opens. Matrix information cannot be changed.
To copy the properties listed on the Detected Matrices tab to the matrix you are
configuring, click Copy to Configured Matrix.
You can view some hardware details at the Detected Matrices tab: module parameters,
frame settings, and the hardware snapshot file.
To determine the parameters for a particular module:
1 Position the screen cursor above the module in the Output or Input list box.
2 Right-click the mouse button, and then select View <type> Module. The Module
Parameters list box1 opens.
1 The
Module Parameters List displays the same type of information as the Configure Module Parameters dialog box (see Fig-
ure 15-36 on page 246). If you change parameter information in the Configure Module Parameters dialog box, the values you
select becomes the default values after a device download is performed.
250 Chapter 15
Figure 15-38 Module Parameters List Box for Modules

The parameters listed in the Module Parameters list box are user-controllable. These
parameters vary, depending on which type of module has been selected. Selections that are
greyed out are read-only and cannot be changed. See the Platinum Routing Switchers
Frames and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual for a list of each
module’s parameters, description, and user range.
To change a specific parameter instance for a particular module:
2 Right-click the mouse button, and then select View <type> Module.
The Module Parameters list box opens.
3 Highlight the specific parameter instance you want to change, right-click the mouse button,
and then click Set....
4 Depending on the type of parameter selected, either a drop-down list box or an editable
text box is displayed. Make the desired changes, and then click Set.
5 Click OK to return to the Module Parameters list box.
The change to the parameter instance is displayed.
To return to the default setting, highlight the specific parameter instance you want to
change, right-click the mouse button, and then click Refresh.
To change a specific parameter for a particular module:
2 Right-click the mouse button, and then select View <type> Module.
3 Highlight the specific parameter you want to change, right-click the mouse button, and
then click Set....
User Manual
4 Depending on the type of parameter selected, either a drop-down list box or an editable
text box is displayed.
Make the desired changes, and then click Set.
5 Click OK to return to the Module Parameters list box.

The same change for all instances in the selected parameter is displayed.
To return to the default setting, highlight the specific parameter you want to change,
right-click the mouse button, and then click Refresh.
To determine the settings for the frame in which a particular module is

located:
1 Position the screen cursor above the resource module entry (PT-RES) in the Control
Components section
2 Right-click the mouse button, and then select View Frame Settings.
Figure 15-39 Module Parameters List Box for Frames

252 Chapter 15
The parameters listed in the Module Parameters list box are user-controllable.
Selections that are greyed out are read-only and cannot be changed. Table 15-12 on
page 252 lists frame parameters, description, and user range.
Table 15-12 Application Parameters Available

(* denotes default setting; [RO] = Read-only parameter)
Parameter Description User Range
Frame Type [RO] Programmed frame size  PM-FR-5
 PM-FR-9
 PT-FR-15
 PT-FR-28
Detected Frame Type [RO] Actual, physical frame size  PM-FR-5
 PM-FR-9
 PT-FR-15
 PT-FR-28
Frame Id Number assigned to frame to allow it to  0 - 127
participate in the control system
Frame Name Alphanumeric string used to allow  23 characters
user-friendly naming of the Platinum frame;
it shows in the hardware list
CPU Id [RO] PT-RES serial number; allows licensing for  12 characters
optional features such as SNMP
Sync Mode1 Specifies sync settings for sync ports  Auto
• (see page 227 for descriptions of these sync  Standard
Sync Mode4 mode settings)
 Advanced
Sync Reference1 Only used if sync mode is “Standard”  None*
• (see page 228 for a description of this sync  1280×720/50P Line 7
Sync Reference4 mode setting)
 1280×720/60P Line 7
 1280×720/60P/1.001 Line 7
 1920×1080/24P Line 7
 1920×1080/24P/1.001 Line 7
 1920×1080/24PsF Line 7
 1920×1080/24PsF/1.001 Line 7
 1920×1080/25P Line 7
 1920×1080/30P Line 7
 1920×1080/30P/1.001 Line 7
 1920×1080/50I Line 7
 1920×1080/60I Line 7
 1920×1080/60I/1.001 Line 7
 Analog 525/60 Line 10
 Analog 525/60/1.001 Line 10
User Manual
Table 15-12 Application Parameters Available(Continued)

Detected Reference1 [RO] Sync reference that is automatically detected  None*
• by PT-RES (this is the sync reference used  1280×720/50P Line 7
Detected Reference4 [RO] when Sync Mode parameter is set to Auto)
 1280×720/60P Line 7
Four concurrent available sync references are
allowed  1280×720/60P/1.001 Line 7
If an external sync reference is removed from  1920×1080/24P Line 7
the frame, the Sync Presence parameter
 1920×1080/24P/1.001 Line 7
indicates that it is not present; however, the
Detected Reference parameter continues to  1920×1080/24PsF Line 7
show the previous detected reference to  1920×1080/24PsF/1.001 Line 7
prevent interruption in switching operations
 1920×1080/25P Line 7
 1920×1080/30P Line 7
 1920×1080/30P/1.001 Line 7
 1920×1080/50I Line 7
 1920×1080/60I Line 7
 1920×1080/60I/1.001 Line 7
 Analog 525/60/1.001 Line 10
Redundancy Mode Instructs PT-RES to automatically switch  Manual
crosspoints from a crosspoint module to its  Auto
redundant crosspoint module when the
active one is removed
This feature is not available for frames that
do not have redundant crosspoint modules;
when set to Manual, you must switch each
crosspoint to the redundant card by setting it
to Active by using the crosspoint active
parameter
Redundant Switch Mode Instructs PT-RES to switch all currently active  Switch All
crosspoints to the redundant crosspoint
module when the active one is removed
External Temperature [RO] Specifies external operating temperature in –128° to 120°C
degrees Celsius
General Alarm1 [RO] Alarm relay on PT-RES  No Alarm
•  Alarm
General Alarm3 [RO]
Alarm Enable1 Enables/disables General Alarm parameter  Enable
•  Disable
Alarm Enable3
254 Chapter 15

Active Crosspoint1 For frames that support redundant  On
• crosspoints, this parameter allows you to set  Off
Active Crosspoint8 the currently active crosspoint module
If Redundant Switch Mode is set to Switch
All” all active crosspoints switches through
the set crosspoint module and the
corresponding, previous active crosspoint
module becomes inactive
For all frames the value of this parameter
indicates whether the crosspoint module
installed is active (present and allowing
switched)
Sync Enable1 Allows you to select which sync references  On
• can trigger crosspoint switches  Off
Sync Enable4
Sync Presence1 Indicates which sync reference is presently  On
• detected by PT-RES  Off
Sync Presence4 If an external sync reference is removed from
the frame, the Sync Presence parameter
indicates that it is not present; however, the
Detected Reference parameter continues to
show the previous detected reference to
prevent interruption in switching operations
Active TDM Crosspoint1 Allows you to set the currently active TDM  On
Active TDM Crosspoint2 module  Off
Active Sync Module1 Allows you to set the currently active sync  On
• module  Off
Active Sync Module2
Internal Network1 Used with HView SX Hybrid , sets the  192.168.101.000*
• network address for internal Ethernet for
Internal Network4 each bank of HView SX Hybrid modules
do not have HView SX Hybrid modules
installed
Double Density Mode Used when a HView SX Hybrid double  7+1
density submodule is installed on a Platinum  8+1
IB+ module
 None*
do not have HView SX Hybrid modules
installed
User Manual

Temperature Threshold Indicates the temperature threshold for all 60°C* (-127° to +127°C)
the temperature sensors in/on a Platinum
frame
When a change in any external or internal
temperature sensor readings rises to the
same value or greater than the temperature
threshold value, the frame generates an
alarm on the PT-Alarm module
When a change in any external or internal
temperature sensor value results in all
temperature values drop to less than the
temperature threshold, the alarm indicator is
cleared
To view a “snapshot” of system settings:
1 Position the screen cursor above any module in the Output or Input list box.
2 Right-click the mouse button., and then select View Hardware Snapshot File.
A “snapshot” (non-editable) version of the frame's settings opens. You can use this image
as a diagnostics tool, to make sure that the frame configuration setup file corresponds with
your desired frame setup.
Figure 15-40 Hardware Snapshot File

256 Chapter 15
Monitoring
Matrices Tab
Figure 15-41 Monitoring Matrices Tab
Matrix monitoring is a Platinum feature that treats the matrix inputs and outputs as a set of
inputs on a separate matrix (which is called the monitor matrix). It allows you to monitor
what comes out of a particular output. If you have a monitoring module installed in your
Platinum router, you can set up monitoring information here. You can monitor input signals,
output signals, or both input and output signals. You can set up a matrix monitoring
configuration in one of two ways: via the Quick-Physical I/O selection list, or by
manually inputting the information desired.
The procedures for filling in the Monitoring Matrices tab are the same as for selecting
matrix monitoring when adding a Platinum router. See page 222 for details.
If you prefer to set up a monitoring matrix that is automatically created and updated, do
not choose this option. See page 223 for information on creating a monitoring matrix
automatically.
User Manual
Firmware Tab
Figure 15-42 Firmware Tab
The Firmware tab allows you to quickly update to the most current Platinum firmware
versions for detected, selected modules; or for all detected, installed modules.
To update the firmware for a Platinum module, follow these steps.
1 Download the firmware upgrade to the PC where the update procedure is performed.
You can check for firmware upgrades on our website. Download the upgrade to
<drive>\Leitch\RtrWrks\bin32\Firmware, as this is the location where the system first looks
for firmware upgrade files.
2 Perform a Poll on the selected frame to obtain the latest detected modules and firmware
versions.
3 Double-click the name of the frame that contains the modules you want to upgrade. If
necessary, switch to the Firmware tab.
4 From the selected matrix list, click the modules you want to upgrade. Multiple modules may
be selected using standard Windows selection techniques (hold down the <Shift> or
<Ctrl> keys to select multiple modules).
Note: A quick way to determine the installed firmware version is to “hover” the mouse over
the module icon to the right of the module name.
5 Right-click the mouse to bring up the shortcut menu, and then click Assign.
The selected module names appear in the firmware upgrade list. Note that in the firmware
upgrade list, the slot location and name of the module appears, as well as the installed
firmware version of that module and the version number for any known upgrades.
If you downloaded your firmware upgrade file to a directory different from the
recommended one:
 Right-click on the appropriate module in the firmware list.

 Click Change Firmware from the shortcut menu.
 Use standard Windows navigation techniques to move to the location of the
firmware upgrade file you want to use.
6 In the firmware list, click the module you want to upgrade, and then click Upgrade.
258 Chapter 15
OR
Click Upgrade All to upgrade all of the modules at once.
7 The Firmware Upgrade message box opens, which displays the steps in the upgrade
process as they occur.
Figure 15-43 Firmware Upgrade Message Window

If you need to stop the upgrade procedure, click Cancel. The window displays a message
that says “Aborting firmware upgrade...Please wait.”
8 When the process is complete, click the Close (X) box in the upper right corner of the
Firmware Upgrade message window.
Control
Settings Tab
Figure 15-44 Control Settings Tab
This dialog box allows you to set up identifiers needed for file transfer protocol (FTP)
functions, Ethernet network properties, I/O sync and reference settings, SNMP settings, and
protocol and license key settings.
The procedures for filling in the Control Settings tab are the same as for selecting
controls when adding a Platinum router. See page 224 for details.
User Manual
Setting Up HView SX Hybrid Virtual Destinations

Note: This section explains how to set up virtual destinations through Navigator for use
with your HView SX Hybrid in conjunction with other remote control devices. It does not
explain how to set up PIPs on your HView SX Hybrid device. See the HView SX Hybrid
Multiviewer Installation, Configuration, and Operation Guide for more information about
using the HView SX Hybrid on-screen application. See the pertinent control device manual
for information about using the control device to display HView SX Hybrid outputs.
Navigator allows you to create destinations that represent actual PIPs or use existing
destinations and have the PIPs follow them. To do this you must first set up the HView SX
Hybrid for your Platinum router database, as described in Adding HView SX Hybrid
Matrices on page 207.
Creating Destinations Representing Actual PIPs

1 Set up the HView SX Hybrid for your Platinum router database (see page 207).
2 At the Navigation pane, click Sources.
The Logical Sources tab appears. Select Matrix View from the Status Names
drop-down box.
3 Make sure the HView SX Hybrid video matrix (HView SX Hybrid V) and the virtual matrix
(HView SX Hybrid PIPs) are mapped to the same sources, as shown in Figure 15-45.
Figure 15-45 Verifying HView SX Hybrid Source Mapping

260 Chapter 15
4 Select the Destinations tab, and then scroll down to the PIP names. They start at the
same point as their corresponding destination offset (see Figure 15-46).
Destination Offset indicator
HView SX Hybrid PIP

destinations;
There are 32 PIP destinations
per HView SX Hybrid device
Figure 15-46 HView SX Hybrid Logical Destinations Mapping
5 Edit the PIP destinations as follows:

 Assign a different name1: see Assigning Destination or Status Names on page
122
 Assign an icon to a PIP: see Assigning Images to Destinations on page 122
 Delete a destination: Removing Logical Destinations on page 121
6 If necessary, check that the appropriate destination names appear (or are assigned) to the
desired control device.
Setting Up PIPs to Follow Destinations

1 If necessary, set up the HView SX Hybrid for your Platinum router database, as described in
Adding HView SX Hybrid Matrices on page 207.
2 At the Navigation pane, double-click on the name of the appropriate routing system entry.
The Configuration dialog box opens. Select the Levels tab.
3 In the Logical System Size Destinations spin box, change the number of
destinations to whatever (smaller) number of destinations you want the PIPs to follow.
Figure 15-47 Changing Level Destinations

1
This is the name that appears on ABA and IDe control panels, and on printed key caps for push button
control panels.
User Manual
4 At the Navigation pane, double-click on the name of the appropriate Platinum entry.
The Configured Matrices dialog box opens. (The Configuration dialog box remains
open in the background.)
5 Highlight the HView SX Hybrid PIPs entry, and then click Advanced.
The Matrix Partition dialog box opens.
Figure 15-48 Changing the PIP Offset Entry
6 Change the Output Offset entry to 0.

7 Click OK.
An information message appears. Click OK again to save the changes.
8 At the Configuration dialog box, select the Destinations tab.
Figure 15-49 PIPs Follow Destinations Display

Destinations are now mapped to the desired matrix and to the HView SX Hybrid PIP matrix.
From now on, when you switch a destination, you not only switch the output destination
but also the source displayed on the HView SX Hybrid PIP. This also changes the PIP 1
parameter available on a Navigator NUCLEUS device.
262 Chapter 15
263
16 Configuring Panacea Frames
Panacea Frame Configuration Overview

Configuring a Panacea frame is a multi-step process. See the following topics:
 Selecting a Frame on page 263

 Configuring the Routing Matrix on page 264
 Configuring the Control Card on page 271
 Editing Protocols on page 272
 Setting up the SNMP Agent on page 275
 Advanced Control Card on page 278
 Configuring Panacea Parametric Settings on page 293
are not performed until after a frame is added to the routing matrix. Differences in adding/
editing procedures are noted. Information about dialog boxes accessible only in Edit mode
starts on page 282.
Please keep in mind that these configuration procedures are for the Panacea frame
definition only.
Selecting a Frame
Navigation pane, and then double-click on the Panacea router selection.
opens.
3 Select the frame type Panacea.

4 Click OK.
The Select Frame Size dialog box opens.
264 Chapter 16
Configuring Panacea Frames
5 Select either a Standard1 or an Enhanced control style and a frame size (options are
1RU and 2RU).
6 Click Next.
The Router Frame dialog box opens.
Figure 16-1 Router Frame Dialog Box
Configuring the Routing Matrix

The following steps are involved in configuring a routing matrix:
 Selecting a Matrix Type on page 264

 Configuring the Matrix Type on page 266
 Changing Frame Properties on page 267
 Partitioning the Matrix on page 267
Selecting a Matrix Type

1 Select the matrix type from the Matrix Type drop-down list box. (The Max Matrix Size
options changes as the Matrix Type is changed.)
2 Click on the desired matrix size.
3 (Optional) If you have a configurable I/O submodule installed, select the proper check box
under Module Options. Table 16-1 lists matrix types with programmable I/O
submodules.
1A
standard Panacea frame cannot be downloaded.
User Manual
Table 16-1 Matrix Types and Supported I/O Submodules

Matrix Type Submodule Supported
AES EBU (all matrix sizes) Quiet switch
High Definition:
16×2, 32×2 only (HSC) HD clean switch
Clean-quiet switch
16×8, 32×8 only (HSCQ) Clean switch with bypass
16×8 only Reclocker
All sizes
SDI
16×2, 32×2 only (SC) SD clean switch
Clean-quiet switch
16×8, 32×8 only (SCQ) Clean switch with bypass
16×8 only Reclocker
All sizes
4 Click Add.
The matrix is displayed in the empty frame on the right side of the dialog box. For router
matrices with reclocking, clean-quiet switch, or relay bypass, an annotation (RC, CQ, CS,
or CQB) appears in the top left corner of the matrix frame setting.
Continue adding matrices until the frame is filled. You cannot select matrix sizes bigger
than the space remaining in the frame.
To remove a matrix from the frame, click the matrix in the frame. An outline appears around
the matrix to indicate that it is selected. The color of the matrix indicates the Matrix Type.
Click Delete.
Note: The Hardware button appears only if your Panacea router contains an enhanced
resource module.
5 (RES-H or enhanced modules only) Click HARDWARE… to change the I/O hardware
module default settings of a selected matrix in the empty frame.
The I/O Hardware Module dialog box opens. (See I/O Hardware Module Dialog Box
(page 289) for more information about this dialog box).
6 After you finish defining the matrices, click Next.

The Configured Matrices dialog box opens.
266 Chapter 16
Configuring
the Matrix
Type
Frame
Matrix 1 settings
Matrix 2
Figure 16-2 Panacea Configured Matrices Dialog Box
At the Configured Matrices dialog box, you can change the properties for each matrix
individually (as matrix properties), or for both at the same time (as frame properties). Frame
control style and frame size properties are displayed, but cannot be edited on this dialog
box. To change either the matrix type or matrix size, click on Back to return to the Frame
Size Selection dialog box.
1 Click on the matrix settings display area for the matrix you want to change (shown as
Matrix 1 and Matrix 2 in Figure 16-2).
2 Fill in the following fields:
 Frame ID1 is the physical address of the router frame. This setting must match the
DIP switches on the frame.
 Matrix to be defined (a matrix is selected for definition if it is outlined)
 Level number is the logical address at which the matrix resides. Matrices with
the same level number switch together. The matrices in a frame can have different
level numbers.
 First Destination is the same as Destination Offset; this setting determines the
point at which destination numbering starts for this matrix.
 First Source is the same as Source Offset; this setting determines the point at
which source numbering starts for this matrix.
 Signal Type: select a signal type for this matrix format as desired
 Matrix Name: define a new matrix name as desired
 Matrix Color: define a new matrix color as desired
 Signal Type describes how the matrix is used in the system, and is for
informational purposes only. Changing the signal type does not affect system
operation
 Matrix Name and Color identify the matrix by name instead of by ID number.
These settings are for informational purposes only; changing them does not affect
system operation.
1 This
item may not appear on some Panacea Configured Matrices dialog boxes.
User Manual
Changing Frame Properties

1 Click on the right side of the empty frame (shown in Figure 16-2 as “Frame Settings”).
The Frame Properties dialog box opens.
Figure 16-3 Frame Properties Dialog Box

 Level on which this frame operates
 First Destination is the same as Destination Offset; this setting determines the
point at which destination numbering starts for this frame
 First Source is the same as Source Offset; this setting determines the point at
which source numbering starts for this frame
 Frame ID (the frame's physical address); select the frame ID from the drop-down
list box
 Frame Name (default name is “Panacea [Frame ID]”); define the new frame
name as desired
Partitioning the Matrix

1 If the matrix needs to be partitioned1, click the Enable Matrix Partitioning check box.
The Matrix Properties group changes, as shown in Figure 16-4.
1 Matrix partitioning allows you to divide a frame’s matrices into smaller switching units. See Appendix 28, Matrix Parti-
tioning for descriptions of the matrix partitioning types.
268 Chapter 16
Figure 16-4 Enable Matrix Partitioning

2 Click Edit Components or (in Edit mode) select the Partitioning tab to edit the
individual components of the matrix.
3 Select the matrix partitioning type from the drop-down list box.
RGB Stereo Components Matrix Partitioning

1 Select RGB/Stereo from the Matrix Partitioning Type drop down list box.
The Partitioning dialog box opens, as shown in Figure 16-5.
Figure 16-5 Matrix Partitioning Type showing RGB/Stereo Partitioning

2 Select the number of components for this matrix. Note that the dialog box changes to
reflect the number of components selected. The component size is automatically
designated, and cannot be changed directly.
3 Click the component in the block diagram at the left of the dialog box to select it for
editing. The component is outlined when it is selected. All changes made in the component
properties group is applied to the component selected.
4 Set the first destination, first source, and level number for each component.
5 You may assign a unique name and color to each component if desired.
 Type a unique name into the Name edit box.
 Select a color for the component by clicking Color.
User Manual
6 Proceed to Finishing Matrix Partitioning on page 270.
Contiguous Components Matrix Partitioning

1 Select Contiguous from the Matrix Partitioning Type drop down list box.
The Partitioning dialog box opens as shown in Figure 16-6.
Figure 16-6 Matrix Partitioning Type, Contiguous Partitioning

2 Select the number of components for this matrix. Note that the fields in the dialog box
changes to reflect the number of components selected.
3 Select a component for editing by clicking on the component in the block diagram at the
left of the dialog box. A colored outline appears around the component to indicate that it is
selected. In the example above, component number one is selected. Note the nodes (the
squares) along the sides of the box outline. You can change the size of the component by
dragging these nodes into a new position.
4 Select the level number from the drop-down list box to specify the level on which this
component operates.
5 Select the First Destination for this component from the drop-down list box. (The First
Destination is like the Destination Offset in previous Imagine Communications product
manuals.) The First Destination setting determines the point where destination numbering
starts for this component.
6 Select the First Source for this component from the drop-down list box. (The First Source is
like the Source Offset in previous Imagine Communications product manuals.) The First
Source setting determines the point where source numbering starts for this component.
 Type the new name into the Name edit box.
 Select the color by clicking Color.
Wild Partitioning
1 Select Wild from the Matrix Partitioning Type drop down list box.
270 Chapter 16
Figure 16-7 Matrix Partitioning Type, Wild Partitioning

2 Select a component for editing by clicking on the component name in the list box at the left
of the dialog box. The component name is highlighted to indicate that it is selected. Specify
the level on which this component operates by selecting the level number from the
drop-down list box.
3 Select the First Destination for this component from the drop-down list box. The First
Destination setting determines the point at which destination numbering starts for this
component.
4 Select the First Source for this component from the drop-down list box. The First Source
setting determines the point at which source numbering starts for this component.
 Select the color by clicking on the Color.
6 Change the physical assignments to match the actual configuration of the matrix.
Finishing Matrix Partitioning

Make one of the following selections:
 If your Panacea frame has a standard resource card installed, click Finish.
The Panacea frame is added to the device list at the Navigator pane.
Note: The Protocols, SNMP..., and Advanced... buttons appear only if your Panacea
router contains an enhanced resource module.
 If your Panacea frame has an enhanced resource card installed, click Next.
The Control Card dialog box opens.
User Manual
Configuring the Control Card
Figure 16-8 Panacea Control Card Dialog Box
Figure 16-9 Edit Frame Dialog Box, Control Card(s) Tab
The Panacea Control Card(s) tab displays information about the control card(s) that are
installed in the frame. This information is read-only (except for the network programmed
section) and is presented as an aid in troubleshooting a system. The information is updated
on every Poll of the control system.
The dialog box shows information for the control card on the left, and the control card's
network and configuration files setup on the right. If the control card is installed, the details
for the active card is shown on the Control Card tab.
Card Settings
272 Chapter 16
 The mode of the active control card can be DIP Switch, Simple Partitioning, or
Advanced Partitioning. This mode is set via the DIP switches on the front of the
control card. (See the Panacea Series Frame and Modules Configuration Installation and
Configuration Manual for DIP switch settings.) The frame must be in Program mode to
operate with a downloaded configuration.
 The Firmware Version and FPGA Version controls display the versions of the software
installed on the active control card.
 The DIP switch controls show the current positions of the control card's DIP switches.
 DIP Switch, “Top” is the top switch of the three DIP switches on the front of the
control.
 DIP Switch, “Center” is the DIP switch in the middle.
 DIP Switch, “Bottom” is the last switch of the control card.
 A “0” indicates that a switch is in the down (or OFF) position. A “1” indicates that
a switch is in the (or ON) position.
The control card's network properties are divided into two sections: the Current (read-only)
and the programmed (editable) settings. Programmed settings include
 IP address
 Gateway address
 Subnet Mask address
 MAC address
Only IP, Gateway, and Subnet Mask addresses are configurable by clicking on the
Programmed radio button.
1 Fill in the network settings as desired.

2 Make one of the following selections:
 Click Protocols to access the Edit Protocols dialog box (see Editing Protocols on
page 272 for more information).
 Click SNMP... to access the SNMP Agent Options dialog box (see Setting up the
SNMP Agent on page 275 for more information).
 Click Advanced... to access advanced Control Card options (see Advanced
Control Card on page 278 for more information).
Editing The Edit Protocols dialog box allows you to view the protocol settings for the Panacea’s
Protocols serial and Ethernet ports, and set the automated database name synchronization function.
Editing Serial Protocols

The Serial Protocol tab allows you to view the protocol settings for the Panacea’s serial
ports. You can change some of the option values for a selected protocol.
1 At the Edit Protocols dialog box, select the Serial Protocols tab.
User Manual
Figure 16-10 Serial Protocols Tab Selected
2 Highlight the target port/protocol selection, and then click Edit (or double-click the item
selection).
The Options dialog box opens and the option values for the selection are displayed.
3 Highlight the value only of the option you want to change.

A shortcut menu opens (see Figure 16-11).
Figure 16-11 Changing Serial Protocol Option’s Value
4 Select the new value, and then click somewhere outside the drop-down list box.
The new selection appears in the Value column.
5 Click OK to return to the Serial Protocols tab, and then click OK to return to the
Control Card(s) tab.
6 At the Control Card(s) tab click OK to accept the changes.
274 Chapter 16
Editing Ethernet Protocols

The Ethernet Protocol tab allows you to view the protocol settings for the Panacea’s
Ethernet ports. You can change some of the option values for a selected protocol.
1 At the Edit Protocols dialog box, select the Ethernet Protocols tab.
Figure 16-12 Ethernet Protocols Tab Selected
2 Highlight the target port/protocol selection, and then click Edit (or double-click the item
selection).
Figure 16-13 Changing Ethernet Protocol Option’s Value

3 Select the new value.
4 Click somewhere outside the drop-down list box.
5 Click OK to return to the Ethernet Protocols tab; and then click OK again to return to
the Control Card(s) tab.
6 At the Control Card(s) tab click OK to accept the changes.
User Manual
Setting up the SNMP Agent

1 If you want to set up an SNMP Agent, click SNMP... on the Control Card(s) tab.
The SNMP Agent Options dialog box opens. This dialog box allows you to set up all
desired SNMP Agent settings.
 SNMP Agent Options Dialog Box on page 275

 Trap Destination IP Addresses on page 276
 SNMP Agent on page 277
 Systems on page 278
2 When all SNMP Agent selections are complete, click OK to accept all changes.
SNMP Agent Options Dialog Box

The SNMP Agent Options dialog box allows you to set up all desired SNMP Agent
settings. Three separate group boxes are displayed on this dialog box:

 Systems on page 278
Figure 16-14 SNMP Agent Options Dialog Box

276 Chapter 16

The Trap Destinations IP Addresses group box allows you to add, modify, or delete
SNMP Trap Destinations.
 To add or modify an SNMP Trap destination:

a Click Add... (or, to modify an destination, click Modify....).

b Change selections as described in Table 16-2.
Table 16-2 Trap Destinations Selections

Item Function
IP Address IP address desired for the SNMP Trap destination
Port (Can be from 1 to 65535) Network port desired for the SNMP Trap
destination
Community SNMP read community string (in SNMP terms, a “Get” operation
Version SNMP version desired for the SNMP Trap
Timeout Desired time period (in seconds) before an SNMP Trap is sent to a
manager if the initial attempt failed
Retry Number of times to resend an SNMP Trap to a manager if the initial
attempt failed
To delete an SNMP Trap Destination

a At the SNMP Agent Options list control, select the IP address for the SNMP Trap
Destination you want to delete. Multiple devices may be selected using standard
Windows selection techniques (hold down the <Shift> or <Ctrl> keys to select
multiple devices).
b Click Delete.
User Manual
The IP address(es) is removed from the list.
To completely clear the category list, click Delete All. A system prompt confirms the
deletion.
SNMP Agent
Agent group box.
Table 16-3 SNMP Agent Items of SNMP Options Dialog Box

Items Function
SNMP agent
Write Community SNMP write community string (in SNMP terminology, a “Set”
operation has to match this setting in a MIB browser in order
to write information to that device)
Enable Authentication When checked, authentication traps are sent if the read or
Traps write community does not match between the SNMP agent
and MIB browser
Figure 16-16)
The Managers Address shortcut menu allows you to specify the addresses of the
managers whose requests are processed by the SNMP Agent.
Figure 16-16 Manager Address Dialog Box

278 Chapter 16
To add a manager address

b Click Add.
To modify a manager address

b Click Modify.
The Permitted Manager Destinations dialog box opens.
d Click OK to accept the changes.
To delete a manager address

a Highlight the address you want to remove. Multiple addresses may be selected using
standard Windows selection techniques (hold down the <Shift> or <Ctrl> keys to
select multiple addresses).
b Click Remove.
The IP address(es) is removed from the list.
To completely clear the address list, click Remove All. A system prompt confirms the
deletion.
c Click OK to accept the change.
Systems
Navigation pane. This is user-defined information that, once provided by an administrator, is
available on the device when it is retrieved by a MIB browser. Table 16-4 shows the fields
and function descriptions for the items listed in the System box.
Table 16-4 System Fields of SNMP Options Dialog Box

Field Explanation
Name Device name
Advanced The Advanced Control Card is a tabbed dialog box that allows you to view the
Control Card configuration file names that are used to store frame’s configuration information; and
displays information and settings for virtual XY, time server, and Map Names options. See
the following topics:
 Config Files Tab on page 279

 Virtual XY Tab on page 279
 Time Server Tab on page 279
 Map Names Tab on page 280
User Manual
When all advanced selections are complete, click OK to accept all changes.
Config Files Tab

The Config Files tab shows you the locations of configuration files in the frame.
Figure 16-17 Config Files Tab
Virtual XY Tab
The Virtual XY tab allows you to set virtual X-Y and Telnet ports.
Figure 16-18 Virtual XY Tab

You can make the following settings:
 Maximum number of open Telnet connections (maximum allowable connections is 12)

 Telnet socket port ID
 Maximum number of open virtual XY connections (maximum allowable connections is
20)
 Virtual XY socket port ID
Time Server Tab

Note: This capability is only available for enhanced resource cards with Panacea Web
support installed.
280 Chapter 16
The Time Server tab allows you to change the frame’s time server settings for the web
support.
Figure 16-19 Time Server Tab

The Time Server tab allows you to make the following settings:
 Time server IP address (default server is 192.101.21.1)

 Maximum wait time for server connection
 Time zone based on Greenwich Mean Time (GMT)
Map Names Tab

The Map Names tab allows you to update a frame's source and destination “Names
Mapping” file based on the current logical database.

You can make the following settings:
Map Names file to the frame.
 With XY File Transfer you can export a file by X-Y transfer (based on Navigator’s
serial or TCP/IP communication setting).
 With FTP you can export a file by traditional File Transfer Protocol. (Log in before
the file transfer is initiated.)
to be generated.
 With Auto Generate you can generate a new file that is based on the current
logical database.
User Manual
 With Use Existing File you can generate a Map Names file based on an existing
file.
 When you select Reboot After Update, the frame reboots after the file has been
License Tab
At the License Tab, you can activate SNMP Agent firmware licenses. You must activate
the SNMP Agent firmware if you ordered it separately from your original product purchase.
If you ordered the SNMP Agent firmware at the same time as your original product
purchase, it is factory-installed and you do not need to activate it.
Note: Before you activate the SNMP feature, make sure you have obtained an appropriate
license activation code. Provide the Customer Service representative with the serial number
of your product.
When you select the License tab, Navigator attempts to retrieve the serial number for the
32×32 or 64×1 RCP-IDe control panel. If the serial number is found, it is displayed in the
Serial Number box. If the serial number is not found, “Unknown” is displayed in the Serial
Number box.
The License tab allows you to make the following settings:
 In the License Key box, enter the appropriate license activation code you received
from your Customer Service representative (see note).
 Select the Reboot after Update check box to reboot the frame immediately after
the Update button is clicked.
When you click Update, the frame reboots after the file has been transmitted. A frame
must be rebooted before the SNMP license is recognized.
If you do not select Reboot after Update, the file is transmitted but the frame is not
automatically rebooted.
282 Chapter 16
Editing a Frame’s Configuration

The Edit Frame1 dialog box includes all functions necessary for changing a router frame
configuration. Any of the following tabs can be selected by clicking on the appropriate tab.
 Router Frame Tab on page 282

 Configured Matrices Tab on page 283
 Partitioning Tab on page 287
 Detected Matrices Tab on page 288
 Detected Cards Tab on page 288
 Configuring the Control Card on page 271
Router Frame
Tab
Figure 16-22 Edit Frame Window, Router Frame Tab Selected
The type and size of the matrices in a frame can be changed, increased, or deleted from the
Router Frame tab. In addition, installed submodules can be indicated and edited.
Editing a Frame Matrix

1 Select the new matrix type from the drop-down list box. Valid options are listed below.
(Max Matrix Size options change as the Matrix Type is changes.)
 AES EBU
 Analog mono audio
 Analog video
 SDI
 High Definition (HD)
 Stereo audio
1 The Web Panels and Web Users tabs appear only if your Panacea router contains an enhanced re-
source card and you have purchased the optional Panacea Web license. See Chapter 22, Config-
uring the Web Router Application for more information about the web router application.
User Manual
2 Change the size of each matrix in the frame by clicking on the desired matrix size, and then
clicking Add.
To increase the size of a matrix, you may have to delete one or more matrices, as you
cannot select matrix sizes bigger than the space remaining in the frame.
Note: By default, the “Stuffed As” size is the same as the selected Max Matrix Size. In some
cases, however, you may override the default in order to save slots for future use. For
example, when adding a 64×64 matrix, two slots would be left empty by stuffing the matrix
as a 32×32.
Deleting a Frame Matrix

1 Click the matrix in the frame.
An outline appears around the matrix when it is selected.
2 Click Delete.
Indicate an Installed Submodule

1 If you have a configurable I/O submodule installed, select the proper check box in the
Module Options. The matrix types with programmable I/O submodule are listed in Table
16-1 on page 265.
2 Click Hardware… to change the I/O hardware module default settings of a selected
matrix in the empty frame.
The I/O Hardware Module tab opens. See I/O Hardware Module Dialog Box on page
289 for more information about this selection.
Configured
Matrices Tab
Figure 16-23 Configured Matrices Tab
The Frame ID, Level, First Source, First Destination and Signal Type can be changed from the
Configured Matrices tab. In addition, matrix partitioning can be set up through the
Configured Matrices tab.
284 Chapter 16
Editing the Matrix Configuration

Select a configuration from these drop-down list box(es).
 Frame ID1 is the physical address of the router frame. This setting must match the DIP
switches on the frame.
 Level number is the logical address at which the matrix resides. Matrices with the
same level number switch together. The matrices in a frame can have different level
numbers.
 First Destination is the same as Destination Offset; this setting determines the point
at which destination numbering starts for this matrix.
 First Source is the same as Source Offset; this setting determines the point at which
source numbering starts for this matrix.
 Signal Type describes how the matrix are used in the system, and is for informational
purposes only. Changing the signal type does not affect system operation
 Matrix Name and Color identify the matrix by name instead of by ID number. These
settings are for informational purposes only; changing them does not affect system
operation.
Changing the Frame Settings

Note: You cannot edit a Panacea frame’s level, starting destination, and starting source at
this window. These settings are automatically updated on every poll of the control system.
See Polling Devices on page 39 for more information.
1 Click the Frame Settings component of the 1|2RU Frame illustration on the
Configured Matrices tab (see Figure 16-24).
The information on the right side of the tab changes to reflect the frame properties for that
particular frame.
Figure 16-24 Panacea Configured Matrices Tab with Frame Properties Displayed
1 This
item may not appear on some Panacea Configured Matrices windows.
User Manual
2 Select a new configuration from these drop down list box(es).

 Frame ID is the physical address of the router frame. This setting must match the
DIP switches on the frame.
 Frame Name appears for informational purposes only. Changing the frame
name does not affect system operation.

1 Double-click the name of the frame you want to partition.
The Edit Frame dialog box opens.
2 If it is not already chosen, select the Configured Matrices tab.

3 Click the Enable Matrix Partitioning check box.
The Matrix Properties group changes, as shown in Figure 16-4 on page 268
4 To edit the individual components of the matrix, click Edit Components, or select the
Partitioning tab.
Note: See page 485 for descriptions of the matrix partitioning types.
RGB Stereo Partitioning

1 Select RGB/Stereo from the Matrix Partitioning Type drop down list box.
Figure 16-25 Partitioning Tab, RGB Partitioning Selected

2 Select the number of components for this matrix. The dialog box changes to reflect the
number of components selected. Component size is automatically designated and cannot
be changed directly.
editing. The component is be outlined when it is selected. All changes made in the
component properties group are applied to the component selected.
286 Chapter 16
5 Assign a unique name and color to each component if desired.

Figure 16-26 Partitioning Tab, Contiguous Partitioning Selected

2 Select the number of components for this matrix. The fields in the dialog box change to
reflect the number of components selected.
component operates.
Destination setting determines the point where destination numbering starts for this
component.
setting determines the point where source numbering starts for this component.
Wild Partitioning
of the dialog box.
User Manual
The component name is highlighted to indicate that it is selected.
3 Specify the level on which this component operates by selecting the level number from the
drop-down list box.
component.
Figure 16-27 Partitioning Tab, Wild Partitioning Selected

Partitioning
Tab
Figure 16-28 Partitioning Tab

288 Chapter 16
The Partitioning tab only opens when you select the Enable Matrix Partitioning
check box on the Configured Matrices tab. The procedures for filling in this tab are the
same as for enabling matrix partitioning. See page 287 for details.
Detected
Matrices Tab
“Detected Matrices” refers to the system configuration that a frame uses if it is in DIP
Switch mode. If the frame is in Program mode, it attempts to use the configuration reported
in the Configured Matrices tab.
Detected
Cards Tab
Figure 16-30 Detected Cards Tab

User Manual
The Detected Cards tab contains information on all modules found in the frame during
a system poll. This information is read-only. The tab shows a graphic of the frame filled with
the cards reported by the frame. Each card can be selected by clicking on it with the mouse.
Detailed properties are shown on the right side of the dialog box.
Note: The same elevators and back panels are used for different cards. For example, a video
output back panel can be used with an analog video output card or an SDI output card.
Also, the same elevator is used for analog video, SDI, and AES-EBU matrices. Detailed
information about which combinations are valid is not presented here. Please refer
questions to a Customer Service representative.
The router properties displayed include
 Type of I/O card (for example, analog video)

 Type of back panel interface
 Coaxial
 Balanced
 Balanced with 600
 FPGA version installed on the card (this information may be useful to Customer
Service when diagnosing a problem)
 Controls that present information about the daughter cards installed in the
selected slot (this information varies for each card type and is not detailed here;
however, it may be useful to Customer Service)
I/O Hardware Module Dialog Box

Note: The I/O Hardware Module dialog box is displayed only if the Panacea has an
enhanced resource card installed.
The I/O Hardware Module is a tabbed dialog box that allows you to change hardware
for a selected Panacea matrix. All of the tabs (Destinations, Sources, Alarm, and
General) can be selected by clicking on the appropriate tab. Information on using those
tabs can be found in pages 290 through 293.
You can “travel” to the I/O Hardware Module dialog box via the Edit Frame >
Router Frame path. At the Router Frame dialog box, click Hardware... to reach the
I/O Hardware Module dialog box.
You can change the input/output hardware for a Panacea matrix via the I/O Hardware
Module tab dialog box display (see Figure 16-34).
290 Chapter 16
Destinations
Tab
Figure 16-31 I/O Hardware Module Destinations Tab
The Destinations tab allows you to change the reclocker and slew rate settings for a
particular destination.
The Reclocker Settings list box on the left side of the tab shows all destinations’
reclocker settings available in the matrix.
To change the reclocker setting of a destination, follow these steps:

1 Select the desired destination.
2 Select the reclocker type from the Re-clocker drop-down list box.
To change the reclocker setting of more than one destination at one time, follow these
steps:
1 Press and hold down the <Shift> or <Ctrl> keys while selecting desired destinations.
2 Select the reclocker type from the Re-clocker drop-down list box.
The Slew Rate Settings list box on the right side of the tab shows all destinations’ slew
rates available in the matrix.
To change the slew rate of a destination, follow these steps:
1 Select the desired destination.

2 Choose either SD or HD rate from the Slew Rate drop-down list box.
To change the slew rate of more than one destination at the same time, follow these steps:
1 Press and hold down the <Shift> or <Ctrl> keys while selecting desired destinations.
2 Choose either SD or HD rate from the Slew Rate drop-down list box.
User Manual
Sources Tab
Figure 16-32 I/O Hardware Module Sources Tab
The Sources tab displays the EQ bypass settings for a matrix. You can turn the EQ settings
on or off at this tab.
The EQ By-Pass Settings list box shows all sources’ EQ bypass settings available in the
matrix.
To turn a source's EQ By-Pass on or off, follow these steps:

1 Select the desired source.
2 Choose either ON or OFF from the EQ By-Pass drop-down list box.
To turn the EQ By-Pass of more than one source on or off at the same
time, follow these steps:
1 Press and hold down the <Shift> or <Ctrl> keys while selecting desired sources.
2 Choose either ON or OFF from the EQ By-Pass drop-down list box.
292 Chapter 16
Alarm Tab
Figure 16-33 I/O Hardware Module Alarm Tab
The Alarm tab allows you to enable or disable any I/O alarms that the frame supports.
Click on the I/O Module drop-down list box to select an I/O module for which you want to
display the extended alarm names.
The main list box shows all available extended alarms in the matrix.
To enable or disable an alarm type, follow these steps:
1 Select the desired alarm.

2 Click either Enable or Disable.
To enable/disable more than one alarm type, follow these steps:
1 Press and hold down the <Shift> or <Ctrl> keys while selecting desired alarms.
2 Click either Enable or Disable.
User Manual
General Tab
Figure 16-34 Panacea I/O Hardware Module General Tab
The Synchronous Timing Mode, Source to be Used as a Restore Source after a Frame Reset,
and Module Options can be changed from the General tab. Fill in the desired information
as described below.
To change the synchronized timing mode, click on either the Auto, Standard, or
Advance radio buttons.
 In Auto mode, the switch point is determined by the detected sync type only
based on SMPTE RP-168 specifications.
 The Standard mode provides the option to pick a standard timing reference.
 The Advance mode provides the option to enter a Take delay in milliseconds.
To change the source to be used as a Restore Source after a frame reset, select an option
from the Misc. drop-down list box.
If you have a configurable I/O submodule installed, select the proper check box in the
Module Options area. The matrix types with programmable I/O submodule are listed in
Table 16-1 on page 265.
Configuring Panacea Parametric Settings

Note: The clean switch option is available on Panacea serial digital video routing switchers.
The quiet switch option is available on Panacea AES digital audio routing switchers. Both
clean switch and quiet switch options are available on Panacea P-SCQ and P-HSCQ routing
switchers.
Parametric settings are used to change clean switch and quiet switch support settings.
294 Chapter 16
You can only configure the parametric settings for a Panacea frame with matrices that are
configured with clean and/or quiet switch support. The matrix types with programmable I/O
submodule are listed in Table 16-1 on page 265.
To select the parametric settings option, follow these steps:
1 At the Navigation pane, highlight the name of the Panacea router that you want to modify.
2 Click the right mouse button to display a drop-down menu.
3 Scroll down to the Parametric Settings... option, and then click <Enter>.
4 The Parametric Settings tab opens.
Parametric The Parametric Settings tabbed dialog box allows you to change the parametric
Settings Tab settings for a selected Panacea matrix. The tab choices of this dialog box differ, based on
the matrix type you choose. See Table 16-1 on page 265 for information on matrix types
and supported I/O submodules.
 Clean Switch tab information appears as follows:

 Clean Switch Tab on page 294.
 Clean Switch Tab (P-SCQ and P-HSCQ Modules) on page 297
 Information on the Quiet Switch tab appears on page 296.
 Information on the Transitions tab for P-SCQ and P-HSCQ routing switchers
appears on page 298.
 Information on increased control over individual audio channels appears on
page 301.
Any of the tabs (Clean Switch, Quiet Switch, or Transition) can be selected by
clicking on the appropriate tab at the Parameter Settings dialog box.
Clean Switch Tab

Clean Switch Tab without Relay Bypass Clean Switch Tab with Relay Bypass
Figure 16-35 Clean Switch Tab
Note: Corresponding information for P-SCQ and P-HSCQ routing switchers appears on
page 297.
User Manual
You can include or remove autotiming support for a Panacea’s clean switch submodule at
this tab.
 The Matrix ID drop-down list box shows where the I/O module is located.
 The scroll-down list box shows all available sources in the matrix.
 The Bypass Router check box allows you to enable the relay bypass capability. (This
selection is only available if you configured the router matrix as clean switch with
bypass. See Table 16-1 on page 265 for a list of matrix sizes that support relay bypass.)
To include or remove the clean switching support of a source, follow these steps:

2 To include or remove the autotiming for a source, click either Enable or Disable.
OR
To include or remove the autotiming of more than one source at one time:
 Press and hold down the <Shift> or <Ctrl> keys while selecting desired sources.
 Click either Enable or Disable.
3 Click on the Auto Timing button to invoke the changes.
4 Click the Refresh button to get the current source’s vertical and horizontal timing, and the
status of the source’s autotiming.
5 To enable or disable relay bypass, do one of the following:
 To disable Panacea A/V processing (that is, enable relay bypass), select the Bypass
Router checkbox.
A Bypass Change message appears. Click Yes to enable the relay bypass
function.
 To enable Panacea A/V processing (that is, disable relay bypass), select the Bypass
Router checkbox.
A Bypass Change message appears. Click Yes to disable the relay bypass
function.
The Querying Status box displays the current source query/set operation.
296 Chapter 16
Quiet Switch
Tab
Figure 16-36 Quiet Switch Tab
Note: Corresponding information for P-SCQ and P-HSCQ routing switchers appears on
page 298.
You can include or remove support for a Panacea’s quiet switch submodule at this tab.
The Matrix ID drop-down list box shows where the I/O module is located.
The Quiet Switch Destination list box shows all available destinations in the matrix.
To include or remove the quiet switching support of a destination,

follow these steps:
1 Click on the check box to the left of the destination name of a desired destination (the
“check” mark toggles back and forth).
2 Move the slide bar from left to right to increase the fade duration/time (in milliseconds).
A module must have valid reference frequency to set a correct fade time. The following
frequencies are valid:
 32 kHz
 44.1 kHz
 48 kHz
3 Click on the Set button to invoke the changes.
4 Click on the Refresh button to get the current destination’s quiet switch support and
quiet switch fade duration.
The Querying Status box displays the current destination query/set operation.
User Manual
Clean Switch Tab (P-SCQ and P-HSCQ Modules)
Figure 16-37 Clean Switch Tab (P-SCQ and P-HSCQ Modules)
You can include or remove autotiming support for a Panacea’s clean switch submodule at
this tab.
The Matrix ID drop-down list box shows where the I/O module is located.
The scroll-down list box shows all available sources in the matrix.

2 To include or remove the autotiming for a source, click on either Enable or Disable.
OR
To include or remove the autotiming of more than one source at one time:
 Press and hold down the <Shift> or <Ctrl> keys while selecting desired sources.
 Click either Enable or Disable.
3 Click the Auto Timing button to invoke the changes.
4 Click the Refresh button to get the current source’s vertical and horizontal timing, and the
status of the source’s auto timing.
The Status box displays the current source query/set operation.
298 Chapter 16
Transition Tab (P-SCQ and P-HSCQ Modules)
Figure 16-38 Transition Tab
You can set up or change audio and video transition selections for a Panacea clean switch/
quiet switch at this tab.
1 At the Matrix ID drop-down list box select either 0 or 1:

 Select 0 for a 1RU setup
 Select 0 for the top frame in a 2RU setup
 Select 1 for the bottom frame in a 2RU setup
2 At the Output combo box in the Reclocker Settings group box, make these choices:
a In the first drop-down list box select either PGM 1 or PGM 2:
 Select PGM 1 if the matrix’s physical output is 1.
 Select PGM 2 if the matrix’s physical output is 5.
Note: A matrix’s physical output corresponds to its location on the back of the frame.
3 In the Reclocker drop-down list box, select the actual duration frequency you want.
Table 16-5 SD Format Actual Duration Frequency Valid Settings

Reference Standard Standard
ANY  Auto mode
 Delay Auto mode
NTSC  270 Mb/s (59.9 Hz)
 Delay 270 Mb/s (59.9 Hz)
PAL  270 Mb/s (50.0 Hz)
 Delay 270 Mb/s (50.0 Hz)
User Manual
Table 16-6 HD Format Actual Duration Frequency Valid Settings

Reference Standard Standard
ANY  Auto mode
 Delay Auto mode
NTSC  270 Mb/s (59.9 Hz)
 Delay 270 Mb/s (59.9 Hz)
 1.485 Gb/s (1080i – 59.9 Hz)
 Delay 1.485 Gb/s (1080i – 59.9 Hz)
 1.485 Gb/s (720p – 59.9 Hz)
 Delay 1.485 Gb/s (720p – 59.9 Hz)
PAL  270 Mb/s (50.0 Hz)
 Delay 270 Mb/s (50.0 Hz)
 1.485 Gb/s (1080ip – 50.0 Hz)
 Delay 1.485 Gb/s (1080ip – 50.0 Hz)
1080i-59.9 Hz  1.485 Gb/s (1080i – 59.9 Hz)
 Delay 1.485 Gb/s (1080i – 59.9 Hz)
720p-59.9 Hz  1.485 Gb/s (720p – 59.9 Hz)
 Delay 1.485 Gb/s (720p – 59.9 Hz)
1080i-50.0 Hz  1.485 Gb/s (1080i – 50.0 Hz)
 Delay 1.485 Gb/s (1080i – 50.0 Hz)
1080i-60.0 Hz  1.485 Gb/s (1080i – 60.0 Hz)
 Delay 1.485 Gb/s (1080i – 60.0 Hz)
720p-60.0 Hz  1.485 Gb/s (720p – 60.0 Hz)
 Delay 1.485 Gb/s (720p – 60.0 Hz)
4 At the Video Transition group box, make these choices:

a In the Transition Type drop-down list box, select the type of transition to use:
Table 16-7 Video Transition Types

Selection Function
Cross Fade Dissolves from current source to next source
Cut Cuts from current source immediately into next source
(can be either “hard” or “soft”)
Cut Fade Cuts from current source and fades to next source
Fade Cut Fades from current source to black and cuts into next
source
V Fade Fades-to-black from current source and fades-from-black
to next source
b For the transition duration speed, choose one of the following (you cannot do both):
 In the Frames box, type in the number of frames during which you want the
transition to occur. The number of corresponding seconds is adjusted
automatically.
300 Chapter 16
 Move the Transition Duration slider bar to indicate the number of seconds
for the transition to occur. The number of corresponding frames is adjusted
accordingly.
c If you want audio processing, click the Enable Audio Processing check box.
d If you want audio-follow-video, click in the Audio Follow check box. This allows an
audio signal associated with any given video signal to be recorded, switched, or mixed
with that video signal. If you make this section, skip to step 6.
5 If you do not want audio-follow-video, at the Audio Transition group box, make these
choices:
a In the Transition Type drop-down list box, select the type of transition you want to
use:
Table 16-8 Audio Transition Types

Selection Function
Cross Fade Dissolves from current source to next source
Cut Fade Cuts from current source and fades to next source
Fade Cut Fades from current source to black and cuts into next source
Cut Cuts from current source immediately into next source (can be
either “hard” or “soft”)
V Fade Fades-to-black from current source and fades-from-black to next
source
b For the transition duration speed, choose one of the following (you cannot do both):
 In the Frames box, type in the number of frames during which you want the
transition to occur. The number of corresponding seconds is adjusted automatically.
 Move the Transition Duration slider bar to indicate the number of seconds for
the transition to occur. The number of corresponding frames is adjusted
accordingly.
CAUTIONAudio transition settings is disabled if all PGM 1 and PGM 2 channels

have audio processing set to OFF (that is, the audio processing check box not
selected). See Audio Processing Settings on page 301 for more information.
6 Make one of the following selections:

 Click Advanced to access advanced audio processing settings. The Advanced
button takes you to these audio processing settings tabs: Audio Gain, Audio
Effect, and Audio Source. See page 301 for more detailed information on using
the advanced Audio Gain, Audio Effect, and Audio Source tabs for more
precise audio processing settings.
 Click Restore Defaults to set all transition settings back to the factory defaults.
 Click Set to send the changes you made in the Transition tab to the frame.
 Click Refresh to reset the tab entries to their current setting from the frame.
7 Click OK to leave the Parametric Settings dialog box.
User Manual
Audio Processing Settings

The audio processing settings allow you to have increased control over individual audio
channels. These settings provide you with selections beyond the basic audio transition types
provided in the Transition tab. To access the advanced settings, click Advanced on the
Transition tab.
Audio Effects
Figure 16-39 Audio Effects Tab
The Audio Effects tab allows you change the embedded audio for a given video signal
on the designated output.
To control the audio effects, follow these steps:
1 In the Output drop-down list box select either PGM 1 or PGM 2:

 Select PGM 1 if the matrix’s physical output is 1.
2 Select the radio button next to the group you want to control. (Always make sure that the
Audio Processing check box is selected.) Each group contains four separate channels.
3 At the Channel 1 & 2 drop-down list box, select the type of channel signal effect you
want. (See Table 16-9 for a list of effects and their corresponding results.)
Table 16-9 Channel Signal Effects

Channel Signal Result
Copy Left to Right Copies signal from left channel to right channel
Copy Right to Left Copies signal from right channel to left channel
302 Chapter 16
Table 16-9 Channel Signal Effects (Continued)

Channel Signal Result
Mute Channel No audio signal
None Allows audio group to pass through both channel pairs
without audio effects; any transitions, levels, and/or
sources takes effect (embedding and de-embedding takes
place)
Swap Left and Right Switches signal from left channel to right channel
4 At the Channel 3 & 4 drop-down list box, select the type of channel signal effect you want.
(See Table 16-9 for a list of effects and their corresponding results.)
Note: If you do not want to include the audio group in the output’s audio processing,
deselect (uncheck) the Audio Group Present In Output check box.
5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each group that you want to adjust.
6 Click Set to send the changes you made in the Audio Effects tab to the frame, or click
Refresh to reset the tab entries to the default settings from the frame.
7 Click OK to leave the Audio Processing Settings dialog box.
Audio Gain
Figure 16-40 Audio Gain Tab
The Audio Gain tab allows you more precise control of the strength of the audio signal.
To control the audio gain, follow these steps:
1 In the Output drop-down list box select either PGM 1 or PGM 2:

User Manual

3 For each channel in the group1 that you want to adjust, move the corresponding slider bar
up and down. You can adjust the slider bar between 6 dbV (the maximum voltage
expressed in decibels you can choose) and -INF (negative infinity, or no audio output). Any
negative number (that is, a number less than 0) should be preceded by a minus sign.
OR
If you know the exact amount by which you want to increase or decrease the gain, enter
the number into the box at the bottom of the slider bar.
4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each group that you want to adjust.
5 Click Set to send the changes you made in the Audio Gain tab to the frame, or click
Audio Source
Figure 16-41 Audio Source Tab
The Audio Source tab allows you to map input signals of the audio channels to a video
signal. To set the audio source(s) for a video signal, follow these steps:
1
A group consists of four audio channels, as defined in SMPTE 272M and SMPTE 299M.
304 Chapter 16
1 In the Output drop-down list box select PGM 1 (if the matrix’s physical output is 1) or
PGM 2 (if the matrix’s physical output is 5):
3 From the Channel 1 drop-down list box, select the audio channel for the video source you
selected at the Transitions tab. This maps the input signals of audio channels on a video
signal to the audio channels of the output.
4 Repeat step 3 for each channel and/or group that you want to adjust.
5 Click Set to send the changes you made in the Audio Source tab to the frame, or click
Panacea Web Panels Tab
Figure 16-42 Web Panels Tab for Panacea Web Configurations
For information about adding and editing a Panacea web configuration, see Adding Web
Router Application Devices on page 429.
User Manual
Panacea Web Users Tab
Figure 16-43 Web Users Tab for Panacea Web Configurations
For information about adding users for a Panacea web configuration, see Setting Up Web
Users on page 437.
306 Chapter 16
307
17 Configuring Integrator Frames
Integrator Frame Configuration Overview

Configuring an Integrator frame is a multi-step process. See the following topics:
 Selecting a Frame on page 307

 Configure a routing matrix:
 Selecting a Matrix Type on page 308
 Configuring Data Router Matrix Types on page 310
 Configuring Integrator Gold Matrix Types on page 314
 Setting Up Optional Output Monitoring on page 320
 Adding Combiner Systems on page 324
are not performed until after a frame is added to the routing matrix. Differences in adding/
editing procedures are noted. Information about dialog boxes accessible only in Edit mode
starts on page 328.
Please keep in mind that these configuration procedures are for the Integrator frame
definition only.
Logical Database Setup on page 77 for more information.
Selecting a Frame
Navigation pane, and then double-click on the Integrator router selection.
opens.
3 Select the frame type Integrator Series.

4 Click OK.
The Select Frame Size dialog box opens.
308 Chapter 17
Configuring Integrator Frames
5 Select an Integrator frame size. Options are 4RU, 6RU, 8RU, and Gold types.
A blue box appears around the selected type.
6 Click Next.
The Router Frame dialog box opens.
Figure 17-1 Select Router Frame Matrix Size Dialog Box
Configuring the Routing Matrix

The following actions are available:
 Selecting a Matrix Type on page 308

 Configuring Regular Matrix Types on page 309
 Configuring Data Router Matrix Types on page 310
 Configuring Integrator Gold Matrix Types on page 314
 Partitioning the Matrix on page 317
Selecting a Matrix Type

1 Select the Matrix Type from the drop-down list box. Options are
 SDI
 Analog video
 Analog stereo audio
 AES EBU
 Data router1 (the data router’s Configured Matrices dialog box is different from
other types of matrix format editing [see page 310 for instructions on adding data
router frames])
User Manual
 Integrator Gold multirate digital (the multirate digital router’s Configured

Matrices dialog box is different from other types of matrix format editing [see
page 314 for instructions on adding Integrator Gold frames])
Configuring Regular Matrix Types

1 After selecting the matrix type, click the desired matrix size. (The Max Matrix Size
options changes as the Matrix Type is changed.)
2 (Optional) If you have an output monitoring submodule installed, select the proper check
box.
See Setting Up Optional Output Monitoring on page 320 for more information on how
to set up the output monitoring function.
3 Click Add.
The matrix is displayed in the empty frame on the right-hand side of the dialog box.
Continue adding matrices until the frame is filled. You cannot select matrix sizes bigger
than the space remaining in the frame.
(To remove a matrix from the frame, click the matrix in the frame. An outline appears
around the matrix to indicate that it is selected. [The color of the matrix indicates the Matrix
Type.] Click Delete.)
By default, the Stuffed As size is the same as the selected Max Matrix Size. In some
cases, however, you may wish to override the default in order to save slots for future use. To
override the default, select the desired Matrix and Stuffed As sizes, and then click Add.
In the example shown in Figure 17-2 on page 309, “128×64” matrix size was selected as
the matrix size, and “32×48” was selected as the Stuffed As size.
Figure 17-2 Frame Matrix Size with Empty Slots (128×64 Max Matrix Size, 32×48 Stuffed
As Size)

1 For more information about data router hardware, see the Integrator™ Series Data Routing Switcher
Matrix Module Set Configuration and Operation Manual.

310 Chapter 17
5 The Configured Matrices dialog box opens.1 Matrix type and matrix size properties are
displayed, but cannot be edited on this screen. To change either the matrix type or matrix
size, click Back to return to the previous screen.
Figure 17-3 Configured Matrices Dialog Box

 Frame ID (the frame’s physical address): select the frame ID from the drop-down
list box
 Frame Name (default name is “Integrator [Frame ID]”): define the new frame
name as desired
 Level on which this matrix operates
 First Destination for this matrix (the First Destination is like the Destination
Offset in previous Imagine Communications product manuals)
The First Destination setting determines the point at which destination numbering
starts for this matrix.
 First Source for this matrix (the First Source is like the Source Offset described in
other Imagine Communications product manuals)
The First Source setting determines the point at which source numbering starts for
this matrix.
7 If the matrix should be partitioned, click the Enable Matrix Partitioning check box, and
then click Next. (See Partitioning the Matrix on page 317 for more information on this
process.)
8 Click Finish to accept the changes.
Configuring Data Router Matrix Types

1 Add the Integrator frame to your system, as described in steps 1 through 6 (page 308).
1 The Configured Matrices dialog boxes for the data router and the multirate digital router are different from other types of matrix
format editing. See page 310 for more information on the data router. See page 314 for more information on the multirate
digital router.
User Manual
2 At the Select Router Frame Matrix Size dialog box (Figure 17-1), select Data
router from the Matrix Type drop-down list box.
3 Click the desired matrix size.
4 Click Add.
You may continue adding matrices until the frame is filled. You cannot select matrix sizes
bigger than the space remaining in the frame.
By default, the Stuffed As size is the same as the selected Max Matrix Size. In some cases,
however, you may wish to override the default in order to save slots for future use.

The Configured Matrices dialog box (Figure 17-4) opens.
The data router's1 Configured Matrices dialog box is somewhat different from other
types of matrix format editing. There are two different items on this dialog box: a Data
Router Type list box and an Edit Ports button in the Signal Type field. (Other matrix
format editing shows a list box of signal formats instead.)
Figure 17-4 Data Router Configured Matrices Dialog Box

list box
name as desired
1 For more information about data router hardware, see the Integrator™ Series Data Routing Switcher
Matrix Module Set Configuration and Operation Manual.

312 Chapter 17
this matrix.
 The Matrix Name list box shows the data router matrix name.
7 Select the desired data router type from the drop-down list box. Data router types are as
follows:
 Dest to Controller — Point to point connection1; all previous connections using
the new source and destination are disconnected when a new switch is made.
When two “RS422 Auto” ports are connected to each other, the port used as a
source in the switch command is configured to connect to a device (tributary);
therefore, the port itself is a controller. The Destination is configured to be
connected to a controller; therefore, the port itself is a device (tributary). When
ports configured as “RS422 Auto” are connected to ports that are either “RS422
Controller” or “RS422 Device,” they take the opposite configuration (controller/
device) from the port to which they are being connected. “RS232 Auto” ports are
always configured as DTE when used as a destination and DCE when used as a
source.
 Dest to Device — Point to point connection; all previous connections using the
new source and destination are disconnected when a new switch is made.
source in the switch command is configured to connect to a controller; therefore,
the port itself is a device. The Destination is configured to be connected to a device
(tributary); therefore, the port itself is a controller. When ports configured as
“RS422 Auto” are connected to ports that are either “RS422 Controller” or
“RS422 Device,” they take the opposite configuration (controller/device) from the
port to which they are being connected. “RS232 Auto” signal types are always
configured as DCE when used as a destination and DTE when used as a source.
 Gang Dest to Controller — Ganged operation1; multiple destinations may be
connected to a source.
The “return path” connection (transmit to the source, receive from the destination)
is disconnected from previous destinations and connected to the current
destination when making a connection to a source that already has a connection.
Destinations may be switched away from a source. If the destination switched
away (or disconnected) is the “reverse path” then the first physical destination
connected to that source is chosen as the new “reverse path.” Disconnecting the
reverse path (that is, the destination associated with a source that has multiple
destinations) is not allowed. Disconnecting the reverse path when a source only has
one connection is allowed.
source in the switch command is configured to connect to a device (tributary);
therefore, the port itself is a controller. The Destination is configured to be
connected to a controller; therefore, the port itself is a device (tributary). When
configured as “RS422 Auto” are connected to ports that are either “RS422
Controller” or “RS422 Device,” then they take the opposite configuration
(controller/device). “RS232 Auto” are always configured as DTE when used as a
destination and DCE when used as a source.
1
For a more detailed explanation of point to point and ganged operations, see the Integrator™ Series
Data Routing Switcher Matrix Module Set Configuration and Operation Manual.
User Manual
 Gang Dest to Device — Ganged operation; multiple destinations may be

connected to a source. The “return path” connection (transmit to the source,
receive from the destination) is disconnected from previous destinations and
connected to the current destination when making a connection to a source that
already has a connection. Destinations may be switched away from a source. If the
destination switched away (or disconnected) is the “reverse path” then the first
physical destination connected to that source is chosen as the new “reverse path.”
Disconnecting the reverse path (that is, the destination associated with a source
that has multiple destinations) is not allowed. Disconnecting the reverse path when
the source only has one connection is allowed.
source in the switch command is configured to connect to a controller; therefore,
the port itself is a device. The Destination is configured to be connected to a device
(tributary); therefore, the port itself is a controller. When configured as “RS422
Auto” are connected to ports that are either “RS422 Controller” or “RS422
Device,” then they take the opposite configuration (controller/device). “RS232
Auto” are always configured as DCE when used as a destination and DTE when
used as a source.
8 Click Edit Ports.
The Edit Ports Signal Type dialog box opens (see Figure 17-5).
Figure 17-5 Edit Port Signal Types Dialog Box

9 Select the desired port.
10 Choose a signal type from the Signal Type drop down list box. (To change more than one
port’s signal type, press and hold down the <Shift> or <Ctrl> keys while selecting desired
ports.) Signal types are as follows:
 Data RS232 Auto — This port signal type must only be used for a port on a
RS-232 card. This port switches between DTE and DCE, based on Source/
Destination context.
 This port is set to DTE when the Data Router Type is set to “Dest to
Controller” and the port is used as a Destination.
314 Chapter 17
 This port is set to DCE when the Data Router Type is set to “Dest to
Controller” and the port is used as a Source.
RS-232 ports do not automatically take the opposite sense of the other port in a
switch.
 Data RS232 DCE — This port is always configured as DCE regardless of its use
as a Source or as a Destination in a crosspoint Take command. It communicates
with a DTE port through a 1:1 cable or a DCE port through a null modem cable.
 Data RS232 DTE — This port is always configured as DTE regardless of its use as
a Source or as a Destination in a crosspoint Take command. It communicates with
a DCE port through a 1:1 cable or a DTE port through a null modem cable.
 Data RS422 Auto — This port chooses its port configuration based on its use as
a source or destination in a switch command depending on the Data Router Type
setting. If the Data Router Type is set to “Dest to Controller,” the port is configured
as a tributary if used as a destination so that it may be connected to a controller,
provided that the source is not “RS422 Controller” or “RS422 Device.” Otherwise,
it take the opposite sense: If the source is “RS422 Controller,” the port is
configured as a controller so that it may be connected to a device. If the source is
“RS422 Device,” the port is configured as a device so that it may be connected to a
controller.
 Data RS422 Controller — This port is always configured as a device so that it
may be connected to a controller with a 1:1 cable.
 Data RS422 Device — This port is always configured as a controller so that it
may be connected to a device with a 1:1 cable.
then click Next. (See Partitioning the Matrix on page 317 for more information on this
process.)
12 Click OK to accept the changes and return to the Configured Matrices dialog box.
13 At the Configured Matrices dialog box, click OK to accept the changes.
Configuring Integrator Gold Matrix Types

1 At the Select Frame Size dialog box, select the frame type Integrator Gold.
2 Click the desired matrix size.
3 (Optional) If you have an output monitoring submodule installed, select the proper check
box. (See Setting Up Optional Output Monitoring on page 320 for more information on
how to set up the output monitoring function.)
4 Click Add.
5 Click Next.
The Configured Matrices dialog box (Figure 17-6) appears.
The Integrator Gold multirate digital router’s Configured Matrices dialog box is somewhat
different from other types of matrix format editing. Note that the I/O Signals field in the
dialog box shows an Edit button. (Other matrix format editing dialog boxes shows a list
box of signal formats).
User Manual
Figure 17-6 Integrator Gold Configured Matrices Dialog Box

list box
name as desired
this matrix.
 The Matrix Name list box shows the data router matrix name.
7 Click Edit.
The Edit Component Signal Type dialog box opens (see Figure 17-7). You can modify
only the level output reclocker and level input EQ fields.
316 Chapter 17
Figure 17-7 Integrator Gold Edit Component Signal Types Dialog Box
 The Frame static box shows the Integrator Gold frame name.
 The Component static box shows the Integrator Gold component name.
 The Level static box shows the Integrator Gold component level.
 The Destination Settings list view box shows all available level outputs for the
component. The list view also provides the level output reclocker setting that each
level output uses.
 The Source Settings list view box shows all available level inputs for the
component. The list view also provides the level input EQ setting that each level
input uses.
8 Modify the level output reclocker as follows:
a Highlight the desired level output.
b Choose a signal type from the Reclocker Setting drop-down list box. (To change
more than one level output reclocker, press and hold down the <Shift> or <Ctrl> keys
while selecting desired level outputs.) Reclocker settings are shown in Table 17-1
Table 17-1 Reclocker Settings

Reclocker Description
Setting
143 Mb/s Reclocker only locks to 143 Mb/s signal
1.485 Gb/s Reclocker only locks to 1.485 Gb/s signal
Auto pass ASI Reclocker locks to any of 143, 270, 360, 540 Mb/s or 1.485 Gb/s
(177 Mb/s is not allowed as harmonics of ASI signals may falsely
trigger the reclocker at 177 Mb/s)
User Manual
Table 17-1 Reclocker Settings (Continued)

Reclocker
Description
Setting
Auto pass 177 Reclocker locks to any of 143, 177, 270, 360, 540 Mb/s or 1.485 Gb/
s (ASI should not be used as harmonics of ASI signals may falsely
trigger the reclocker at 177 Mb/s)
By-pass SDI slew Reclocker is bypassed (no reclocking); output slew rate is hard coded
to the slower SDI slew rate
By-pass HD slew Reclocker is bypassed (no reclocking); output slew rate is hard coded
to the faster HD slew rate
c Click OK to return to the Configured Matrices tab.

9 Modify the level input EQ as follows:
a Highlight the desired level input.
b Choose a signal type from the EQ Setting drop-down list box. (To change more than
one level input EQ, press and hold down the <Shift> or <Ctrl> keys while selecting
desired level inputs.)
c Click OK to return to the Configured Matrices tab.
then click Next. (See Partitioning the Matrix on page 317 for more information on
matrix partitioning.)
Partitioning Matrix partitioning involves the following actions:

the Matrix
 Enabling Matrix Partitioning on page 317
 RGB Stereo Partitioning on page 318

1 If the matrix needs to be partitioned1, click the Enable Matrix Partitioning check box.
The Matrix Properties group changes, as shown in Figure 17-8.
1 Matrix partitioning allows you to divide a frame’s matrices into smaller switching units. See Appendix 28, Matrix Parti-
tioning for descriptions of the matrix partitioning types.
318 Chapter 17
Figure 17-8 Enable Matrix Partitioning
2 Click Edit Components or (in Edit mode) select the Partitioning tab to edit the
individual components of the matrix.
RGB Stereo Partitioning

1 Select RGB/Stereo from the Matrix Partitioning Type drop-down list box.
Figure 17-9 Matrix Partitioning Type showing RGB/Stereo Partitioning
2 Select the number of components for this matrix. Note that the dialog box changes to
reflect the number of components selected. The component size is automatically
designated, and cannot be changed directly.
editing. The component is outlined when it is selected. All changes made in the component
properties group is applied to the component selected.
User Manual

Figure 17-10 Matrix Partitioning Type, Contiguous Partitioning

2 Select the number of components for this matrix. Note that the fields in the dialog box
changes to reflect the number of components selected.
component operates.
5 Select the First Destination for this component from the drop-down list box. (The First
Destination is like the Destination Offset in previous Imagine Communications product
manuals.) The First Destination setting determines the point where destination numbering
starts for this component.
6 Select the First Source for this component from the drop-down list box. (The First Source is
like the Source Offset in previous Imagine Communications product manuals.) The First
Source setting determines the point where source numbering starts for this component.
Wild Partitioning
320 Chapter 17
Figure 17-11 Matrix Partitioning Type, Wild Partitioning

of the dialog box. The component name is highlighted to indicate that it is selected. Specify
the level on which this component operates by selecting the level number from the
drop-down list box.
component.
Setting Up Optional Output Monitoring

An optional output monitoring submodule may be installed on audio and/or video output
modules in an Integrator frame. Output monitoring is a feature that treats the matrix
destinations as a set of sources on a separate matrix (called the output monitoring matrix).
It allows you to monitor what comes out of a particular destination. For example, a 64×32
matrix with SDI format that has output monitoring, would have another matrix of 32×1
with SDI format.
To set up the output monitoring function, follow these steps:
1 Add the Integrator frame to your system, as described in steps 1 through 6 (page 308).
2 At the Select Router Frame Matrix Size dialog box
 Highlight the desired matrix size.
 Choose the check box for output monitoring, and then click Add. (Note the “OM”
that has appeared in the upper left corner of the added matrix. This “OM” may
appear at another location on the matrix, depending on which spigot the signal is
being driven to.)
User Manual
Figure 17-12 Output Monitoring Function Selected
3 Click Next.
4 Continue with steps 4 through 7 under Configuring Regular Matrix Types on page 309.
The Integrator frame is added to the device list at the Navigation pane. Notice that the
router level definition indicates one additional destination.
5 Double-click the Integrator with the output submodule attached.

6 At the Edit Frame dialog box, select the Output Monitoring tab.
Figure 17-13 Output Monitoring Tab
7 Set the Level, Destination, and First Source parameters. Like any other matrix, an
output monitoring matrix can be configured (such as assigning level control, starting
destination, and sources).
 Level: level on which this matrix operates
322 Chapter 17
 Destination: destination number for this matrix (the point at which destination
numbering starts for this matrix)
If you choose to have the output monitoring matrix on the same level as the matrix
on which the destinations are monitored, you must assign a different destination
number (for the output monitoring destination) that does not conflict with the
destinations that are monitored. See Figure 17-14 on page 322 for an example of
the output monitoring matrix on the same level as the monitoring matrix. See
Figure 17-15 on page 322 for an example of the output monitoring matrix on a
different level from the monitoring matrix.
 First Source: first source for this matrix (the First Source is analogous to the
Source Offset in previous Imagine Communications product manuals)
The First Source setting determines the point at which source numbering starts
for this matrix. The first source number must be the same as the first destination
number of the destinations that are monitored.
8 Click OK.
The Integrator frame is updated at the Navigation pane.
Figure 17-14 Output Monitoring Matrix — Same Level
Figure 17-15 Output Monitoring Matrix — Different Level

User Manual
Defining Destinations as Sources for Output Monitoring

On some occasions, you may need to define a particular destination as a source for output
monitoring. (This may happen when you are not using a control panel.)
1 Follow steps 1 through 8 under Setting Up Optional Output Monitoring on page 320.
2 At the Navigation pane, double-click the routing system name to launch the Database
Editor.
The Configuration dialog box opens.
3 Select the Levels tab, and then make sure that the logical router size can accommodate
both levels. (In the example shown in Figure 17-16, the logical router size is set for 64
sources and 33 destinations.)
Figure 17-16 Checking Logical Router Size

4 Click the Sources tab.
5 Scroll to the first available logical source entry to be assigned to a destination (the “first
source” entry from step 7 of Setting Up Optional Output Monitoring on page 320).
6 Set up names that match the destination names entered into the logical destination
database.
When assigning or editing source names, keep in mind that these characters are “illegal”:
the “~” character, the “\” character, and all non-printable ASCII characters (<Alt> and
<Ctrl> characters). These characters may corrupt the database, so they cannot be stored in
the database.
7 Delete all sources that precede your newly-named source(s) on the output monitoring
level only.
8 Starting at your first newly named source, redefine the levels (“1,” “2,” and so forth).
9 Right-click in the Levels field, and then select Clear Invalid Assignments.
10 Select the Destinations tab.
11 Right-click in the Levels field, and then select Clear Invalid Assignments.
324 Chapter 17
12 Delete all logical assignments for the output monitoring level.

13 Scroll down to the location of the destination you want to function as the output monitor
(usually the last name in the list).
14 Set up an easily-remembered name for the new output monitor.
15 Enter the same output monitor destination number you set at the Output Monitoring tab
for the output monitoring level.
16 Close the Configuration dialog box.
Figure 17-17 illustrates a matrix panel display that shows the output monitoring function.
Figure 17-17 Output Monitoring Function as Displayed in a Matrix Panel Display
Adding Combiner Systems

Note: You cannot edit or delete dynamic routing threads in a combiner system; however,
you can edit dynamic routing thread remote accessible sources in a combiner system.
The combiner option allows you to join several Integrator frames to provide a routing
system with more than 128 inputs. Setting up systems in this way allows you to have a
system with up to 512 inputs × 512 outputs.
User Manual
Internal connections for the combiner systems are managed through the Dynamic Routing
Fabric. See page 171 for more information about dynamic routing threads.
Restrictions Several restrictions exist in a potential combiner system:
1 You cannot partition any part of the combiner system.

2 All frames within the combiner system must be a single format. (You cannot have an analog
video frame and an SDI frame in one combiner system, for example.)
3 A 6RU frame size is the smallest “building block” for your potential combiner system.
Setting Up a Combiner System

Choose what size system you need; that is, how many inputs and how many outputs.
(Maximum combiner system size is 512×512.)
You may find it helpful to plan out your combiner system on paper. It is easier for you to
add and edit your choices if you have a system setup already defined. See Figure 17-18 and
Figure 17-19 for examples of the types of information you need to set up your system.
Adding Combiner System Components

opens.
3 Select the frame type Combiner System.

4 Click OK.
326 Chapter 17
The Edit Combiner System dialog box opens. (This dialog box looks slightly different,
depending on whether or not you are configuring a combiner system for an Integrator
Gold. Figure 17-19 shows a picture of the Edit Combiner System dialog box for an
Integrator Gold. Figure 17-18 shows a picture of the Edit Combiner System dialog
box for all other Integrators.)
Figure 17-18 Combiner Choices (Except Integrator Gold)

User Manual
Name and Matrix format

Level and signal types
Size
Figure 17-19 Combiner Choices for Integrator Gold
5 Make your selections from the drop-down list boxes as follows (see Figure 17-18 and
Figure 17-19 for the location of these selections):
 Name — what you want this combiner system to be named
 Level on which this combiner system operates
 Matrix format — select the signal format that the frame routes (all frames within
the combiner system must be a single format)
 Signal type — select the specific signal type within the format (analog audio,
mono audio, stereo audio, and AES formats use the same signal type for input and
output signals)
 Output signal1 — output signal type for Integrator Gold format
 Input signal1 — input signal EQ setting for Integrator Gold format
 Size — number of sources and number of destinations
 Source and destination offsets
 Combiner system input and output thread offsets — these offsets must
be above the Source and Destination Offsets’ values
 Dual Output
 Output Monitoring — allows you to set up a router feature that treats the
matrix destinations as a set of sources on a separate matrix
1
This option appears on the dialog box for Integrator Gold only.
328 Chapter 17
 Starting frame ID — the physical address of the first frame in the combiner
system. At any time you may click View Picture to see a block diagram and other
frame details.
6 When the configuration is complete, click OK.
Navigator adds frames to the device tree and automatically adds a set of dynamic routing
threads for the combiner system.
7 Physically set up the frames as they are specified in the database (set frame IDs and wire the
system).
Note: Navigator does not allow you to use the dynamic routing thread Edit function on a
connection within a combiner system.
8 Poll the entire system to verify that all frames are operating and detected correctly.
9 Download the new configuration to the frames.
10 Make sure that the combiner system crosspoints operate correctly.
Editing a Frame’s Configuration

The Edit Frame dialog box includes all functions necessary for changing a router frame
configuration. Any of the tabs [Router Frame, Configured Matrices, Partitioning, Detected
Matrices, Detected Cards or Control Card(s)] can be selected by clicking on the appropriate
tab.
Router Frame Tab

Router Frame Tab for All Integrator Frames Except Router Frame Tab for Integrator Gold
Integrator Gold
Figure 17-20 Edit Frame Window, Router Frame Tab Selected
The type and size of the matrices in a frame can be changed, increased, or deleted from the
Edit Router Frame tab. In addition, installed submodules can be indicated and edited.
User Manual
Editing a Frame Matrix

1 Select the new matrix type from the drop-down list box. Valid options are listed below.
(Max Matrix Size options change as the Matrix Type is changes.)
 AES EBU
 Analog stereo audio
 Analog video
 Stereo audio
 SDI
 Data router
 Integrator Gold multirate digital1
2 Change the size of each matrix in the frame by clicking on the desired matrix size, and then
clicking Add.
To increase the size of a matrix, you may have to delete one or more matrices, as you
cannot select matrix sizes bigger than the space remaining in the frame.
Note: By default, the “Stuffed As” size is the same as the selected Max Matrix Size. In some
cases, however, you may wish to override the default in order to save slots for future use.
For example, when adding a 64×64 matrix, two slots would be left empty by stuffing the
matrix as a 32×32.
Deleting a Frame Matrix

1 Click the matrix in the frame.
An outline appears around the matrix when it is selected.
2 Click Delete.
Editing the Router Matrix

Router matrix editing involves the following tabs:
 Configured Matrices Tab on page 329

 Partitioning Tab on page 331
 Detected Matrices Tab on page 332
 Detected Cards Tab on page 332
 Control Card(s) Tab on page 334
Configured The Frame ID, Level, First Source, First Destination and Signal Type can be changed from the
Matrices Tab Configured Matrices tab. In addition, matrix partitioning can be set up through the
Configured Matrices tab. The appearance of this tab varies, depending on the type of
Integrator router is selected.
1 This option appears on the dialog box for Integrator Gold only. Its Configured Matrices dialog box is
different from other types of matrix format editing. See page 314 for more information.
330 Chapter 17
Regular Integrator Routers
Figure 17-21 Edit Frame Window, Configured Matrices Tab Selected (Integrator Routers
Except Data Router and Integrator Gold)
The procedures for filling in this Configured Matrices tab are the same as for
configuring a matrix for a regular Integrator router. See page 309 for details.
Integrator Data Routers
Figure 17-22 Edit Frame Window, Configured Matrices Tab Selected (Integrator Data
Router Only)
configuring a matrix for an Integrator data router. See page 310 for details.
User Manual
Integrator Gold Routers
Figure 17-23 Edit Frame Window, Configured Matrices Tab Selected (Integrator Gold
Router Only)
configuring a matrix for an Integrator Gold router. See page 314 for details.
Partitioning
Tab
Figure 17-24 Partitioning Tab
The Partitioning tab only appears when you select the Enable Matrix Partitioning
check box on the Configured Matrices tab. The procedures for filling in this tab are the
same as for enabling matrix partitioning. See page 317 for details.
332 Chapter 17
Detected
Matrices Tab
“Detected Matrices” refers to the system configuration that a frame uses if it is in DIP
Switch mode. If the frame is in Program mode, it attempts to use the configuration reported
in the Configured Matrices tab.
Detected
Cards Tab
Figure 17-26 Detected Cards Tab (Except Integrator Gold)

User Manual
Figure 17-27 Detected Cards Tab (Integrator Gold Only)
The Detected Cards tab will contain information on all modules found in the frame
during a system poll. This information is read-only. The tab will show a graphic of the
Integrator frame filled with the cards reported by the frame. Each card can be selected by
clicking on it with the mouse. The detailed properties of the selected card will be shown on
the right side of the dialog box.
Note: The same elevators and back panels are used for different cards. For example, a video
output back panel can be used with an analog video output card or an SDI output card.
Also, the same elevator is used for analog video, SDI, and AES-EBU matrices. Detailed
information about which combinations are valid is not presented here. Please refer
questions to a Customer Service representative.
The router properties displayed include
 Type of card (for example, analog video)

 Whether the card is an input or an output card
 Type of elevator to which the card is connected (all cards of the same matrix should
report the same elevator type; if not, the card that is not reporting is probably
inoperable)
 Type of back panel attached to the card (this should match the card type)
 FPGA version installed on the card (this information may be useful to Customer
Service when diagnosing a problem)
 Whether the optional output monitoring card is installed in the selected slot.
 Controls that present information about the daughter cards installed in the
selected slot (this information varies for each card type and will not be detailed
here; it may, however, be useful to Customer Service)
Controls that present information about the daughter cards installed in the selected slot.
(This information varies for each card type and will not be detailed here; however, it may be
useful to Customer Service.)
334 Chapter 17
Control
Card(s) Tab
Figure 17-28 Control Card(s) Tab
The Control Card(s) tab displays information about the control card(s) that are installed
in the frame. This information is presented as an aid in troubleshooting a system. The
information is updated on every Poll of the control system.
The Control Card tab window shows information for the bottom control card (CPU A) on
the left, and the top control card (CPU B) on the right. If both control cards are installed, the
Present indicator will be “Yes” for both. However, only one of the two control cards is active
at one time. Only the details for the active card will be shown on the Control Card(s)
tab.
The mode of the active control card will be either DIP switch or Program. This mode is set
via the DIP switches on the front of the control card. See the frame manual for DIP switch
settings. However, note that the frame must be in Program mode to operate with a
downloaded configuration. The firmware version and FPGA version controls will display the
versions of the software installed on the active control card.
The DIP switch controls will show the current positions of the control card’s DIP switches.
 DIP Switch, Left is the leftmost of the two DIP switches on the front of the control.
 DIP Switch, “Right” is the switch on the right front of the control card. A “0”
indicates that a switch is in the down (or OFF) position. A “1” indicates that a
switch is in the ON position.
 DIP Switch, “Internal” indicates the settings of the DIP switch located on the center
of the card (this switch is only visible when the card is removed from the frame).
335
18 Configuring Legacy Frames
Legacy Frame Configuration Overview

Legacy frames (for example, XPlus, Hedco, Mixbox, NEO, VIA, and XPRESS) are not
configurable via Navigator; however, they should be added to the database so that
Navigator will have a complete “view” of the control system and will operate properly.
Please keep in mind that these configuration procedures are for the legacy frame definitions
only.
Adding Other (Legacy) Imagine Communications Frames

Follow these steps:

opens.
3 Select the Frame type. A blue box will appear around the selection
4 Click Next.
The Edit Frame dialog box opens.
336 Chapter 18
Configuring Legacy Frames
Figure 18-1 Edit Frame Window (Non-Integrator Frames)
5 Make selections from these drop-down list boxes:

 Number of Matrices for this frame
 Matrix properties:
 Select Matrix allows a specified matrix to be displayed on the dialog
 Matrix Type
 Matrix Size, which is the matrix dimension of the selected matrix
 Sources1, which is the number of sources for the selected matrix
 Destinations2, which is the number of destinations for the selected matrix
 Level on which this matrix will operate
 First Source for this matrix (same as Source Offset in other Imagine
Communications product manuals); determines the point where source
numbering for this matrix starts
 First Destination for this matrix (same as Destination Offset in other
Imagine Communications product manuals); determines the point where
destination numbering for this matrix starts
 Is Matrix Partitioned3 allows this matrix to partition into multiple
components
 Number of Components for this matrix to partition into
 Components1:
 Select Component allows the specified component to be displayed on the
dialog
 Component Size displays the matrix dimensions of the specified
component
 Component Level on which this component will operate
 Source Offset4 determines the point at which source numbering will start
for the specified component
 Destination Offset2 determines the point at which destination numbering
will start for the specified component
1 Generic
frames only
2 VIA and XPlus only
3
VIA with SDI format and XPlus only
4 VIA and XPlus only
User Manual

338 Chapter 18
Configuring Legacy Frames
339
19 Configuring Edge Protocol

Gateways
Edge Gateway Configuration Overview

The Edge protocol gateway provides external physical connectivity to any Imagine
Communications routing system, regardless of the type(s) of Imagine Communications
routing switcher involved. Use of standard TCP/IP communications allows the unit to provide
connectivity over most standard LAN, MAN, WAN, or Internet connections. The Edge
translates between our protocol and the protocols used by other manufacturers or
equipment. It can be used to integrate otherwise incompatible devices in a system, and it
may be used to expand a system beyond the normal limitations imposed by hardware or
system design. Edge serial port and Ethernet connection protocol assignments are
configurable in Navigator.
Note: Before configuring an Edge, you need to create a routing system and set up a logical
database. See Creating and Maintaining Routing Systems on page 13 and Logical
Database Setup on page 77 for more information.
Adding Edge Configurations

Navigation pane, and then double-click on the Edge selection.
3 The Add Edge dialog box opens.
340 Chapter 19
Configuring Edge Protocol Gateways
Figure 19-1 Add Edge Serial Protocols Tab
The Add Edge tabbed dialog box allows you to set protocol assignments and option
values for the newly-added Edge. Information on using those tabs can be found in pages
340 through 356.
Setting Serial Port Protocol Assignments and Options

Navigator allows you to set the protocol settings for the Edge’s serial ports. You can switch
from X-Y protocol to the “foreign” protocol resident on your Edge. In addition, you can
change some of the option values for a selected protocol.
1 At the Add Edge dialog box, select the Serial Protocols tab.
2 Highlight the target Edge selection, and then click Edit (or double-click the item selection).
Figure 19-2 Serial Protocol Options Dialog Box, Non Pro-Bel Configurations
User Manual
Figure 19-3 Serial Protocol Options Dialog Box, Pro-Bel Configurations
Assigned values for the default protocol’s baud rate, parity, data bits, stop bits, and serial
interface are displayed. On GVG-7000 configurations only, an assigned value for Map
Type is displayed. On Pro-Bel configurations only, a Mappings button is also displayed.
(See Setting Mapping Values for Pro-Bel Configurations on page 342 for more
information on setting the mapping values for a Pro-Bel configuration.) The Edge provides
bidirectional translation of the following router control protocols:
 Imagine Communications pass-thru protocol

 GVG SMS-7000 protocol1
 Jupiter ASCII protocol1
 Jupiter ESswitch protocol1
 NVISION protocol2
 NV 9000 protocol2
 PESA P1 protocol3
 Pro-Bel SW-P-02 protocol4
 Pro-Bel SW-P-08 protocol4
 Stagetec protocol5
 Utah Scientific RCP-1 protocol6
3 From the Protocol drop-down list, select the protocol you want to switch to. Supported
serial protocols include
 Leitch terminal X-Y
1
GVG SMS-7000, Jupiter ASCII, and Jupiter ESswitch protocols are product of Thomson Grass Valley,
headquartered in Paris, France.
2 NVISION and NV9000 protocols are products of NVISION Inc., headquartered in Grass Valley, Califor-
nia.
3
PESA CPU Link No. 1 (P1) protocol is a product of QuStream Corporation, headquartered in Toronto,
Canada.
4 SW-P-02 and SW-P-08 protocols are products of Pro-Bel Ltd., headquartered in Reading, Berkshire,
UK.
5 Stegetec protocol is a product of Salzbrenner Stagetec Mediagroup, headquartered in Buttenheim,
Germany.
6
RCP-1 protocol is a product of Utah Scientific, headquartered in Salt Lake City, Utah.
342 Chapter 19
 GVG 7000 server and GVG 7000 client

 Jupiter ESswitch server and client
 Jupiter ASCII server and client
 NVISION server and client
 NV9000 server and client
 NVision P0025 server and client
 PESA P1 server and client
 Pro-Bel SW-P-02 server and SW-P-02 client
 Pro-Bel SW-P-08 server and SW-P-08 client
 Stagetec server and client
 Utah RCP-1 server and client
4 The assigned values for the selected protocol appears. While all relevant protocol option
values are displayed, some values may not be configurable. These values are displayed for
informational purposes only; you cannot change them through Navigator. To change a
value:
a Highlight the value only of the option you want to change.
A drop-down menu appears (see Figure 19-4 on page 342).
b Select the new value.
c Click somewhere outside the drop-down list box.
d Click OK to return to the Edge Serial Protocol dialog box.
Figure 19-4 Changing a Protocol Option’s Value
Setting Mapping Values for Pro-Bel Configurations

Navigator allows you to set mapping values for Pro-Bel SW-P-02 and SW-P-08
configurations. To set the mapping values, follow these steps:
1 At the Serial Protocol Options dialog box, select the desired Pro-Bel protocol from the
Protocol drop-down list box.
A Mappings... button appears on the Options display (see Figure 19-3 on page 341).
User Manual
2 Click Mappings....
The ProBel Inputs and Outputs dialog box opens (see Figure 19-5).
Figure 19-5 Pro-Bel Inputs and Outputs Dialog Box
Note: The ability to set levels is only available for the SW-P-08 protocol. When the SW-P-02
protocol is selected, the Pro-Bel Level drop-down list box is greyed out.
3 Set up input and output information as follows:

Selecting Inputs
 From the Input Range’s Probel Level drop-down list box, select the level1 at
which you want the Pro-Bel router to start for the inputs specified for mapping.
 In the Input Range entry box (to the left of the Add button), enter the Pro-Bel
router inputs you want to map. You can enter single inputs (for example, 1), a
range of inputs (for example, 2-5), or a combination of both (for example, 1,2-5).
Separate entries with a comma, but without blank spaces.
 Click Add.
The input numbers appear in the Input Range display box.
Selecting Outputs
 From the Output Range’s Probel Level drop-down list box, select the outputs’
level1 at which you want the Pro-Bel router to start for the outputs specified for
mapping.
 In the Output Range entry box (to the left of the Add button), enter the Pro-Bel
router outputs you want to map. You can enter single outputs (for example, 1), a
range of outputs (for example, 2-5), or a combination of both (for example, 1,2-5).
Separate entries with a comma, but without blank spaces.
1 A database can include up to 16 independent router levels, numbered from 0 to 15. These level num-
bers correspond to the level number(s) that each physical router frame occupies in the routing system.
(For more information about levels, see Chapter 8, Configuring Levels on page 129.)
344 Chapter 19
 Click Add.
The output numbers appear in the Output Range display box.
4 Click Next.
The Mapped Matrices dialog box opens. In the lower left corner the Unassigned
Probel Inputs and Outputs notice appears.
Figure 19-6 Pro-Bel Mapped Matrices Dialog Box
5 Click Add.
The Add Matrix dialog box opens.
User Manual
Figure 19-7 Pro-Bel Add Matrix Dialog Box
a Enter a name for the new Pro-Bel matrix.

b If desired, click Color..., and then select a new color for the matrix.
c From the Level drop-down list box, select the level at which you want this matrix to
start.
d Enter the desired matrix size. This matrix size can include all or some of the inputs and
outputs to be mapped.
You can manipulate this matrix size to match the number of Pro-Bel inputs and outputs,
or you can change it so that some inputs and outputs remain unassigned, so as to add
them to different matrix(es).
e Enter the desired starting number for input and output offsets.
f Select the desired format from the drop-down list box.
g If you want to change the Pro-Bel input or output mapping assignments, click the
number for the appropriate component input or output, and then select a new input/
output number from the drop-down list box.
h Click OK to return to the Mapped Matrices dialog box.
If you have assigned all of your Pro-Bel inputs and outputs, the Unassigned Probel
Inputs and Outputs notice are no longer displayed.
If you have not assigned all of your Pro-Bel inputs and outputs, the Unassigned
Probel inputs and Outputs notice indicates the number of unassigned items
remain.
 Click View to see which inputs and/or outputs are unassigned.
 Click Clear to remove the unassigned list from the dialog box.
 Click Add to add the unassigned items to a new matrix.
 You may also add the unassigned items to an existing matrix: Highlight the
desired matrix, click Edit, and then change the matrix size to accommodate
the number of I/Os you want to add.
Click OK to return to the Mapped Matrices dialog box.
346 Chapter 19
6 If desired, click Probel View to view a “snapshot” of the Pro-Bel to Imagine

Communications mapping. It shows you which Pro-Bel I/Os are mapped to which Imagine
Communications I/Os, assigned levels, and assigned matrix names.
Figure 19-8 Pro-Bel to Imagine Communications Mapping
Setting Ethernet Protocol Option Values

Navigator allows you to change the protocol settings for either (or both) of an Edge’s client
and server Ethernet connection. You cannot switch between protocols, but you can change
some option values.
Figure 19-9 Edge Ethernet Protocols Tabs
1 At the Add Edge dialog box, select the Ethernet Protocols tab. The assigned values
for the default server and client protocols for the selected Ethernet port are displayed.
Supported protocols include
 GVG 7000 server and GVG 7000 client
 NVision server and NVision client
User Manual
 NVision 9000 server and NVision 9000 client

 Leitch virtual X-Y server and Leitch virtual X-Y client
 Leitch Telnet X-Y server
2 Highlight the target Edge selection, and then click Edit.
The Options dialog box opens (see Figure 19-10). The option values for the client or
server selection are displayed.
Figure 19-10 Ethernet Protocols Options Dialog Box
To change a value, take these steps:

A drop-down menu appears (see Figure 19-11).
d Click OK to return to the Edge Ethernet Protocols tab.
348 Chapter 19
Viewing the Detected Cards Tab
Figure 19-12 Edge Detected Cards Tab
The Detected Cards tab displays back panel information for the Edge. (This information
is read-only.) The tab shows the card type, back panel type, and version.
User Manual
Setting Network Information for Edge
Figure 19-13 Edge Control Cards Tab
The Control Cards tab displays information about the control card installed in the Edge
device. The information is updated on every Poll of the control system.
The dialog box shows system information for the control card on the left, and network and
configuration files setup on the right.
System  The Name field displays the Edge device name.

Information  The ID list box displays the Edge device ID.
 The Firmware Version and FPGA Version fields displays the versions of the
software installed on the active control card.
 The DIP switch fields shows the current positions of the control card's DIP switches. A
“0” indicates that a switch is in the down (or OFF) position. A “1” indicates that a
switch is in the (or ON) position.
 DIP Switch, Top displays information about the top switch of the three DIP
switches on the front of the control.
 DIP Switch, Middle displays information about the middle switch of the three
DIP switches on the front of the control.
 DIP Switch, Bottom displays information about the bottom switch of the three
DIP switches on the front of the control.
Network The Control Card’s network properties are divided into two sections: Current and
Information Programmed settings.
 Current settings are the IP, gateway, subnet mask, and MAC address settings that
are currently being used for the Edge. When you select the Current radio button, these
settings are displayed, but they are read-only.
350 Chapter 19
 Programmed settings are the IP, gateway, and subnet mask address settings that
you want used with the Edge. When you select the Programmed radio button, you can
edit these settings.
 IP Address: Enter an IP address for the Edge.
 Gateway: Enter the address for the gateway to which the Edge is attached.
 Subnet Mask: Enter the address used to identify the subnetwork to which the
Edge belongs.
SNMP If you want to set up an SNMP Agent, click SNMP....
The SNMP Agent Options dialog box (Figure 19-14) appears. The SNMP Agent Options
dialog box allows you to set up all desired SNMP Agent settings. See the following topics:
 SNMP Agent Options on page 350

Advanced If you want to set up advanced control options, click Advanced….

Control
The Advance Settings dialog box (Figure 19-17 on page 355) opens. The Advance
Options Settings dialog box allows you to view the configuration file names that are used to store
frame’s configuration information; and displays information and settings for virtual XY, time
server, and Map Names options. See the following topics:
 Time Server Tab on page 354

 Map Names Tab on page 355
SNMP Agent The SNMP Agent Options dialog box allows you to set up all desired SNMP Agent settings.
Options Three separate group boxes are displayed on this dialog box. See the following topics:

User Manual
Figure 19-14 SNMP Agent Options Dialog Box

The Trap Destinations IP Addresses group box allows you to add, modify, or delete
SNMP Trap Destinations.
To add or modify an SNMP Trap destination:
1 To add a destination, click Add... (or, to modify an destination, click Modify...).

352 Chapter 19
2 Change the IP address displayed to the one desired for the SNMP Trap destination.
3 Change the network port number displayed to the one desired for the SNMP Trap
destination. The port number can be from 1 to 65535.
4 From the Community drop-down list box, select the community name.
5 From the Version drop-down list box, select the SNMP version that you would like to use
for the SNMP Trap.
6 Set the Timeout option to the desired time period (in seconds) before an SNMP Trap is
sent to a manager if the initial attempt failed.
7 Set the Retry to the number of times to resend an SNMP Trap to a manager if the initial
attempt failed.
To delete an SNMP Trap destination:
1 At the SNMP Agent Options dialog box list control, select the IP address for the SNMP
Trap Destination you want to delete. Multiple devices may be selected using standard
Windows selection techniques (hold down the <Shift> or <Ctrl> keys to select multiple
devices).
2 Click Delete. The IP address(es) is removed from the list.
OR
To completely clear the category list, click Delete All. A system prompt confirms the
deletion.

User Manual
SNMP Agent
Agent group box.
Table 19-1 SNMP Agent Items of SNMP Options Dialog Box

Items Function
SNMP agent
Write Community SNMP write community string (in SNMP terminology, a
“Set” operation has to match this setting in a MIB
browser in order to write information to that device)
Enable Authentication Traps When checked, authentication traps are sent if the read or
write community does not match between the SNMP
agent and MIB browser
Figure 19-16)
The Managers Address shortcut menu allows you to specify the addresses of the
managers whose requests are processed by the SNMP Agent.
Figure 19-16 Manager Address Dialog Box
To add a manager address:

b Click Add.
c Click OK to return to the SNMP Agent Options dialog box.
To modify a manager address:

354 Chapter 19
b Click Modify.
The Permitted Manager Destinations dialog box opens.
d Click OK to return to the SNMP Agent Options dialog box.
To delete a manager address:

a Highlight the address you want to remove. Multiple addresses may be selected using
standard Windows selection techniques (hold down the <Shift> or <Ctrl> keys to
select multiple addresses).
b Click Remove. The IP address(es) is removed from the list.
OR
To completely clear the address list, click Remove All; a screen prompt confirms the
deletion.
c Click OK to return to the SNMP Agent Options dialog box.
Systems
Navigation pane. This is user-defined information that, once provided by an administrator, is
available on the device when it is retrieved by a MIB browser. Table 19-2 shows the fields
and function descriptions for the items listed in the System box.
Table 19-2 System Fields of SNMP Options Dialog Box

Field Explanation
Name Device name
Advance Settings Dialog Box

The Advance Settings dialog box allows you to view the configuration file names that
are used to store frame’s configuration information; and displays information and settings
for time server and Map Names options.
Time Server Tab

Note: This capability is only available for enhanced resource cards with Edge Web support
installed.
The Time Server tab allows you to change the frame's time server settings for the web
support.
User Manual
Figure 19-17 Time Server Tab
The Time Server tab allows you to make the following settings:
 Time server IP address (default server is 192.101.21.1)

 Maximum wait time for server connection
 Time zone based on Greenwich Mean Time (GMT)
Map Names Tab

The Map Names tab allows you to update a frame's source and destination “Names
Mapping” file based on the current logical database.
You can make the following selections:
Map Names file to the frame.
356 Chapter 19
to be generated.
 With Auto Generate you can generate a new file that is based on the current
logical database.
 With Use Existing File you can generate a Map Names file based on an existing
file.
 When you select Reboot After Update, the frame reboots after the file has been
License Tab
At the License tab, you can activate SNMP Agent firmware licenses.
Note: You must activate the SNMP Agent firmware if you ordered it separately from your
original product purchase. If you ordered the SNMP Agent firmware at the same time as
your original product purchase, it is factory-installed and you do not need to activate it.
Before you activate the SNMP feature, make sure you have obtained an appropriate license
activation code. Provide the Customer Service representative with the serial number of your
product. See the product manual for instructions.
 Use XY File Transfer to export a file by X-Y transfer (based on Navigator’s serial
or TCP/IP communication setting).
 Use FTP to export a file by traditional File Transfer Protocol. (Log in before the file
transfer is initiated.)
 In the License Key box, enter the appropriate license activation code you received
from Customer Service (see note).
transmitted. A frame must be rebooted before the SNMP license is recognized.
User Manual
Edge Web Router Application

The optional web router application uses standard web browsers to perform certain control
panel functions for Panacea routers and Edge protocol gateways that have an enhanced
resource module installed. The enabling software is purchased as a separate flash module;
to become operable, it requires the presence of an enhanced resource module.
The web router application flash module is available for retrofit into non-web enabled
Panacea or Edge frames. Web-enabled frames have the flash module already installed.
For more information about the optional web router application, see Chapter 22,
Configuring the Web Router Application starting on page 429.
358 Chapter 19
359
20 Configuring Alphanumeric
Breakaway (ABA) Panels
ABA Panel Configuration Overview

Alphanumeric breakaway panels are available in one rack-unit (1RU) and two rack-unit (2RU)
configurations. The descriptions for the different panels are as follows.
RCP-ABA The RCP-ABA (1RU) is available in three models: the XY, the SB, and the AFV/MB models.
1RU Models These panels differ in appearance and functionality, but use similar configuration
procedures.
 The ABA(1)-XY models provide X-Y operation and source selection with 4 levels of
breakaway. (The ABA1EXYp contains an Ethernet connector for use with CCS Gateway
products or with network-ready routers). The panel includes five display windows (one
destination, four sources) with associated select keys, four user-definable auxiliary keys,
and 16 user-definable destination/source select keys.
 ABA1EXYp X-Y bus control panels simultaneously provide control and status of 4
destinations. A specific destination is assigned to each display when the panel is initially
configured. Both sources and destinations are selected on the front of the control panel,
while the destination and sources may be monitored in the display screens. Sources may
be switched on all levels simultaneously (AFV switching), or independently (breakaway
switching).
 The ABA(1)-SB models provide control of a single destination with 4 levels of breakaway.
(The ABA1ESBp contains an Ethernet connector for use with CCS Gateway products or
with network-ready routers). The panel includes one destination display window, four
source display windows with associated select keys, four user-definable auxiliary keys,
and 16 user-definable source select keys.
 ABA1ESBp single bus control panels control and display the status of 1 router
destination. The controlled destination is assigned to the control panel when it is initially
configured and cannot be changed from the front of the control panel. The displays on
the panel show the sources connected to the destination on each of 4 levels. Sources
may be switched on all 4 levels simultaneously (AFV switching), or they may be switched
independently (breakaway switching).
 The ABA-AFV and ABA(1)-MB models provide audio-follow-video (no breakaway)
source selection on 4 destinations. (ABA1EMBp contains an Ethernet connector for use
with CCS Gateway products or with network-ready routers.) A specific destination is
assigned to each of the 4 display windows when the panel is initially configured. These
destinations cannot be changed from the front of the control panel. The source
connected to each destination is displayed in the control windows.
 ABA1EMBp multibus control panels simultaneously provide control and status of 4
destinations. A specific destination is assigned to each display when the panel is initially
configured. This destination cannot be changed from the front of the control panel. The
360 Chapter 20
Configuring Alphanumeric Breakaway (ABA) Panels
source connected to each destination is displayed in the control display, and can be
changed using the procedures outlined in the following sections. Sources will be
switched on all levels simultaneously (AFV switching).
RCP-ABA The RCP-ABA (2RU) provides X-Y operation and source selection on eight independent
2RU Models levels. The RCP-ABA (2RU) is available in three models: the XY, the SB, and the MB models.
These panels differ in appearance and functionality, but use similar configuration
procedures. These models include an Ethernet connector for use with CCS Protocol
products or with network-ready routers. Configuration information in this chapter applies
to all 2RU models, except where noted.
 The ABA2EXYp X-Y bus control panels include 5 display windows (1 destination, 4
sources) with associated select keys, 4 user-definable auxiliary keys, 48 user-definable
push button source/destination select keys, and a scroll knob. Sources and destinations
are selected from the front of the panel using push button keys or a scroll knob.
 The ABA2ESBp single bus control panels control and display the status of one router
destination. The controlled destination is assigned to the control panel when it is
initially configured and cannot be changed from the front of the control panel. The
displays on the panel show the sources connected to the destination on each of four
levels. Sources may be switched on all four levels simultaneously (AFV switching), or
they may be switched independently (breakaway switching).
 The ABA2EMBp multibus control panels simultaneously provide control and status of
four destinations. A specific destination is assigned to each display when the panel is
initially configured. This destination cannot be changed from the front of the control
panel. The source connected to each destination is displayed in the control display, and
can be changed using the procedures outlined in the following sections. Sources will be
switched on all levels simultaneously (AFV switching).
Accessing the Edit Panel Dialog

Note: Before configuring an ABA panel, you need to create a routing system and set up a
Logical Database Setup on page 77 for more information.

Navigation pane, and then double-click on the panel selection.
3 The Edit Panel dialog box opens (see Figure 20-1).
User Manual
Figure 20-1 Edit Panel Dialog Box
When an ABA panel is added, it is created with a panel definition. This definition may be
the default definition (if the panel was added before the database was edited) or it may be
a unique definition based on your particular database (if the panel was added after the
database was created).
If the ABA panel is added after the database edit, it is configured to access the complete set
of sources and destinations included in the database. All necessary category index keys are
assigned, and the panel is completely functional without further definition. In many cases, it
is not necessary to proceed further with the panel editing process. If, however, you want to
change anything in the definition (move the selection keys, limit access to a specific set of
sources or destinations, change the auxiliary key functions, and so forth), you can find the
information necessary in this chapter.
If the panel carries the default definition, the category/index keys, source selection keys,
sources available, destinations available and levels affected have to be manually edited. As
an alternative, the panel can be deleted from the database and then added back to the
database using the Poll method. All necessary categories are assigned at that time.
 Assigning a Category Key on page 381

 Assigning a Favorite Source or Destination to a Selection Key on page 369
 Changing the Panel Name, ID, Style, Brand, or Protocol on page 384
 Clearing Selection Key Assignments on page 371
 Limiting the Sources and Destinations Available to a Panel on page 363
 Moving a Selection Key on page 362
 Configuring the Auxiliary Keys on page 372
 Setting the Levels Affected on page 373
362 Chapter 20
Edit Button Function Dialog Box

The Edit Button Function dialog box is used to assign functions to user-definable
selection keys on the ABA and RCPp control panels. (Right-click the selection key to access
the dialog.)
Figure 20-2 Edit Button Function Dialog Box
The Edit Button Function dialog box includes a drop-down list box that is used to select
the function of the selection key, and a Properties group that is used to define the
specific parameters of the button. The appearance of the Properties group depend on
the type of button selected in the drop-down list box. The functions available in the
drop-down list depend on the type of panel being edited. Table B-1 on page 494 shows a
list of button functions available for ABA panels.
See Appendix B, Configuring Control Panel Buttons on page 493 for more detailed
information about the selections available with this dialog box.
Moving a Selection Key

To rearrange the order of the selection keys on an ABA panel, click the Assignments tab
at the Edit Panel dialog box.
A dialog box similar to that shown in Figure 20-3 opens (the actual appearance depends
on the style of the ABA panel being edited).
Note: The “drag and drop” operation does not move an index definition. To move the index
definition to a new key, you must reassign the key definition. For more information about
this function, see Editing Details of a Panel Definition on page 372.
User Manual
1 Position the cursor over the selection key to be moved.

2 Click and hold the left mouse button.
3 Drag the selection key to its new position.
4 Release the mouse button.
The selection key appears in its new position.
To move a selection key:

1. Select the key.
2. Drag it to the new position.
3. Drop it.
Figure 20-3 Moving a Selection Key
Limiting the Sources and Destinations Available to a Panel

When a panel is created, it has access to the complete set of sources and destinations in the
database (assuming the panel was created after the database was edited). It is possible,
however, to limit panel access to a specific set of sources and destinations. To change the
panel access list, click the Assignments tab at the Edit Panel dialog box. (The actual
appearance depends on the style of the panel being edited.)
364 Chapter 20
Figure 20-4 Edit Panel Dialog Box, Assignments Tab

User Manual
Assigning View Order for Assignments Tab and Panel

Navigator allows you to assign the type of view order you want to see on the
Assignments tab list boxes and on a particular panel. You may sort in either alphabetical
or logical order.
Destination Source
Status CAM SAT SAT EDIT Studio Uplink
Enable BETA 7 VTR 2 VTR 2 VTR 2 Preset A B C 1 2 3
TX
4
DDR
5
TAKE
Select XYp VTR TRUNK MIC AUX Mon QC Clear

Bkspc Lock Video Clear A1 Clear A2 Clear ABAAlphanumeric 9 0
Dest BreakAway D E F 6 7 8 All
Sorts Assignments tab lists in Sorts panel’s Source Selection and

alphabetical or logical order Destination Selection display lists
in alphabetical and logical order
Figure 20-5 Assigning View Order for 1RU ABA Panels

366 Chapter 20
DESTINATION SOURCES
Status
Group
BETA 7 VTR 2 Video Clear Preset 1
VTR CAM SAT DDR Studio Maint ESS 1 2 3
Group
VTR 2 A1 Clear
2
NET TX RX EDIT Uplink QC CG 4 5 6 Take
Levels Group Clear

VTR 2 A2 Clear Pg 1 3
Trunk ATR TEST MIC MON MGR AUX 1
7 8 9
All
Change Lock Levels Group XYp

Dest Dest VTR 2 T/C Clear Pg 2 4
Black Bars VTR 12 A B C D 0 Bkspc ABA2 Alphanumeric
BreakAway
Sorts Assignments tab lists in Sorts panel’s Source Selection and

alphabetical or logical order Destination Selection display lists
in alphabetical or logical order
Figure 20-6 Assigning View Order for 2RU ABA Panels
 When the Global Database and This Panel list boxes are sorted in
alphabetical order, the Assignments tab displays these lists in
numeric-alphabetic order (see Figure 20-6).
When the Global Database and This Panel list boxes are sorted in logical order,
the Assignments tab displays these lists in the order in which you first assigned the
sources and destinations (see Figure 20-6).
 When the Panel Sort Order is set to sort in alphabetical order, Navigator
“instructs” the panel to display Source Selection and Destination Selection
information in numeric-alphabetic order (see Figure 20-6).
 When the Panel Sort Order is set to sort in logical order, Navigator “instructs”
the panel to display Source Selection and Destination Selection information in the
order in which you first assigned the sources and destinations (see Figure 20-6).
Note: You must perform a download before this sort takes effect. See Downloading
Device Definitions on page 44 for more information.
User Manual
Denying Access to Specific Sources or Destinations

The simplest way to deny panel access to one or two sources or destinations is to remove
them from the access list by dragging them from the This Panel list to the Global
Database list (you can also remove a source or destination using the Delete button).
Deleting a source or destination from the access list only removes it from this panel’s
definition. It does not remove it from the database or from other panels based on this
database.
To remove a source or destination from the panel access list, follow these steps:
1 Click the source or destination name in the This Panel list box on the Assignments
tab.
2 Drag the source or destination from the This Panel list box and drop it in the Global
Database box (or click Delete).
The source or destination is removed from the panel list.
Allowing Access to a Limited Set of Sources and Destinations

To create a very limited set of sources and destinations to which the panel have access,
follow these steps:
1 Remove all source and destination assignments from the panel access list using Delete All.
All sources and destinations are removed from the panel list.
2 Add the desired sources and destinations to the panel access list by dragging and dropping
them in the This Panel box (or by using the Assign button).
To remove all sources and destinations, click Delete All.
All sources and destinations are removed from the panel list.
To add a source or destination to the panel access list, follow these steps:
1 Click a source or destination name in the Global Database list box.

2 Drag or double-click the source or destination from the Global Database box; drop it in
the This Panel box (or click Assign).
Note: When viewing the Assignments dialog box on a VGA monitor, the Assign and
Delete buttons may not contain text descriptions. See Figure 20-7 for the VGA
equivalents.
3 The source or destination are added to the panel list.

368 Chapter 20
Figure 20-7 Appearance of Buttons on VGA Displays

User Manual
Assigning a Favorite Source or Destination to a Selection Key

On ABA panels, you can select sources and destinations via Category/Index or Favorite
Key selection techniques. With Favorite Key selection, source or destination selection
requires only one key press. One of the user-definable selection keys is configured to select
a specific source or destination for rapid access. For example, a selection key could be
defined as MON2. When pressed, the key would select Monitor 2.
Destination Source
Status CAM SAT SAT EDIT TX
Enable BETA 7 VTR 2 VTR 2 VTR 2 Preset A B C 1
Studio
2
Uplink
3 4
DDR
5
TAKE
Select VTR TRUNK MIC AUX Mon QC Clear

Bkspc Lock Video Clear A1 Clear A2 Clear 9 0
Dest D E F 6 7 8 All
Selects the source and presets it

into all three selection windows 1 Press the desired Favorite Source key
The TAKE key blinks to indicate a pending source selection operation
Destination Source
Status CAM SAT SAT EDIT
Enable BETA 7 VTR 2 VTR 2 VTR 2 Preset A B C 1
Studio
2
Uplink
3
TX
4
DDR
5
TAKE
Select VTR TRUNK MIC AUX Mon QC Clear

Bkspc Lock Video Clear A1 Clear A2 Clear 9 0
Dest D E F 6 7 8 All
2 TAKE key confirms selection

Pressing TAKE key selects VTR 2 into all three levels
Figure 20-8 Selecting a Source via Favorite Key on an ABA 1RU Panel
DESTINATION SOURCES
Status
OUT 5 MON2 Video Clear Preset 7 8 9
MON2 A1 Clear 4 5 6 Take
Clear
MON2 A2 Clear VTR 1 VTR 2 AUX EDIT Studio Uplink TX DDR 1 2 3
All
Select Lock
Dest Dest MON2 T/C Clear CAM 1 TRUNK MIC AUX MON 2 QC B C 0 Bkspc
1 Press the desired

Favorite Source key
Selects the Source and presets it into the selection window
The TAKE key blinks to indicate a pending source selection operation
DESTINATION SOURCES
Status
OUT 5 MON2 Video Clear Preset 7 8 9
MON2 A1 Clear 4 5 6 Take
Levels Clear
MON2 A2 Clear Pg 1 VTR 1 VTR 2 AUX EDIT Studio Uplink TX DDR 1 2 3
All
Select Lock Levels XYp

Dest Dest MON2 T/C Clear Pg 2 CAM 1 TRUNK MIC AUX MON 2 QC B C 0 Bkspc Alphanumeric
BreakAway
2 Press the TAKE key
Figure 20-9 Selecting a Source via Favorite Key on an ABA 2RU Panel
To assign a Favorite Source to a selection key, follow these steps:

370 Chapter 20
1 Click the Assignments tab at the Edit Panel dialog box.

A dialog box similar to that shown in Figure 20-4 opens.
2 Select the source name from the panel list in the Source group.
3 Drag the source name to the selection key. The selection key changes to reflect the new
assignment.
A favorite source can also be assigned to a selection key via the Edit Button Function
dialog box1. (Right-click the selection key to access the dialog.)
To assign a favorite source:

1. Select the source from the panel list.
2. Drag it to the selection key.
3. Drop it in place.
Figure 20-10 Assigning a Favorite Source
To assign a Favorite Destination to a selection key, follow these steps:

1 Click the Assignments tab at the Edit Panel dialog box. A dialog box similar to that
shown in Figure 20-4 opens.
2 Select the destination name from the panel list in the Destinations group. The selected
destination is highlighted.
3 Drag the destination name to the selection key. The selection key changes to reflect the
new assignment.
A favorite destination can also be assigned to a selection key via the Edit Button
Function dialog box. (Right-click the selection key to access the dialog.)
1
See Appendix B, Configuring Control Panel Buttons for a detailed description of the Edit Button
Function dialog box.
User Manual
To assign a favorite destination:

1. Select the destination from the panel list.
Figure 20-11 Assigning a Favorite Destination
Clearing Selection Key Assignments

Note: A default index assignment cannot be removed by dragging the key to the trash can.
You must manually assign the key index to “None.” See page 381 for more information on
this function.
To clear a selection key assignment, drag the selection key to the trash can. The identifying
information in the selection key disappears, indicating that it is unassigned.
To clear a single selection:

1. Select the key.
2. Drag it to the trash can.
3. Drop it.
To clear all selections:

1. Press Clear All.
Figure 20-12 Clearing a Selection Key Assignment

372 Chapter 20
To clear all selection key assignments, click Clear All. The identifying information in the
selection keys disappears to indicate that they are unassigned.
Editing Details of a Panel Definition

If a panel is added before the database is edited, it is created with a default definition. Only
two categories are assigned (“In” and “Dest”). At this point, you can either create a panel
definition “from scratch,” or delete the panel from the panel list and add it again using the
Poll method. Adding a panel after the database is edited causes Navigator to automatically
create a panel definition that matches the database.
You may also need to perform more than just the basic editing functions described earlier in
this chapter. This section contains information on performing more complex editing
functions.
To create a panel definition “from scratch,” or to create a more complex panel definition,
double-click the panel name at the Navigation pane.
The Edit Panel dialog box (Figure 20-1 on page 361) opens. The actual appearance of
the dialog box depends on the style of the panel being edited.
Configuring the Auxiliary Keys

Note: You may also access the Edit Button Function dialog box from the Window +
Paging tab or the Assignments tab. To change any button’s function while on these tabs,
right-click the button.
All ABA panels include certain user-definable auxiliary keys.
When a new panel is added, the auxiliary keys are given default assignments (ENABLE,
BACK [if an SB panel, the default assignment is LOCK], TAKE, and CLEAR).
To change any of the key assignments:
1 Select the Auxiliary Keys tab at the Edit Panel dialog box.
A dialog box similar to the one shown in Figure 20-1 opens. The actual appearance of the
dialog box depends on the style of the panel being edited. The user-definable auxiliary keys
are circled in blue on the dialog and the arrows point to the buttons used to define the
auxiliary keys.
2 Click the button associated with the key you want to configure.
3 The Edit Button Function dialog box opens, as shown in Figure 20-2. You can find a
detailed description of this dialog (as well as instructions for creating various types of
buttons) in Appendix B, Configuring Control Panel Buttons on page 493.
Resolving Auxiliary Key Definition Errors

Note: When redefining the auxiliary keys, remember that you must have a Take key for the
panel to download and operate properly.
User Manual
If Navigator notes selection key definition errors that do not allow the panel to be
successfully downloaded, a Warning group appears on the Auxiliary Keys tab. To view
the error message(s), click View Errors. The Panel Errors dialog box opens, as shown
in Figure 20-13.
Figure 20-13 Panel Errors Dialog Box
Setting the Each source selection window on an ABA panel represents a different level and displays the
Levels source connected to the current destination on that level. For example, a panel may be
configured to control the Video, Audio 1, Audio 2 and Timecode levels. One window is
Affected configured to display the source connected to the current destination on the Video level;
the second window displays the source connected to the destination on the Audio 1 level;
the third window displays the source connected to the current destination on the Audio 2
level; and the fourth window displays the source connected to the destination on the
Timecode level.
An ABA-SB panel may be configured to control the Video, Audio 1, Audio 2, and Timecode
levels. One window is configured to display the source connected to the destination on the
Video level; the second window displays the source connected to the destination on the
Audio 1 level; the third window displays the source connected to the destination on the
Audio 2 level; and the fourth window displays the source connected to the destination on
the Timecode level.
On an ABA-AFV or ABA(1)-MB panel, each of the four source selection windows represents
a different destination and displays the source connected to that destination on each level
or group of levels.
Selecting a Level Associated with a Selection Window

1 Click the Windows + Paging tab at the Edit Panel dialog box.
2 A dialog box similar to Figure 20-14 opens. (The actual appearance of the dialog box
depends on the style of the panel being edited.)
374 Chapter 20
Figure 20-14 Setting the Levels Affected
When you move the mouse cursor over the graphic in the dialog, notice that the cursor
changes as it encounters “hot spots” on the graphic. When the cursor changes to a
pointing index finger, it indicates that the button can be configured from this dialog. If you
pause momentarily over a button, a text description of the button’s current assignment
appears.
To configure a Source Selection window, click the window. The configuration options
in the Edit Window x group changes to reflect the current assignments. On the Edit
Panel dialog, the Source Selection window reflects the current assignments.
The Controlled Levels check boxes are used to select the levels that are controlled by
the source selection keys for this window. Only those levels that have been enabled in the
database are displayed.
The Status Level group contains a Follow Lowest Controlled Level check box, and a
Level drop-down list box (the drop-down list box is enabled only if the check box is not
checked).
 If the Follow Lowest Controlled Level box is checked, the Source Select
window statuses the lowest level checked in the Controlled Levels group.
 If you want to select a different level to be statused, disable the Follow Lowest
Controlled Level check box, and then select the level from the drop-down list
box.
To configure the Source Selection window, follow these steps:
1 Click the Source Selection window.

A blue outline appears around the selected window and the Edit Window x group
changes to reflect the current settings for that window.
2 Enable the level(s) that are to be controlled by the source selection keys associated with this
window: Click the check box next to the Level Name. (A level is enabled if the check box
is checked.)
User Manual
 If the Source Selection window is to display the status of the lowest controlled
level, check the Follow Lowest Controlled Level check box.
The level drop-down list box is disabled.
 If the Source Selection window is to display the status of a level other than the
lowest level, uncheck the Follow Lowest Controlled Level check box, and
then select the desired level from the drop-down list.
3 Click Done to return to the Edit Panel dialog box.
Configuring Levels on Multiple Pages

To display and control more levels than would normally be available on a panel, multiple
pages can be created, each with a different definition. To create an additional page,
create a Page key as outlined in Creating a Page Key (ABA Series Panels Only) on page
505. Each page must have its own Page key. Any of the auxiliary keys or the selection keys
can be used. Right-click the button, and then define the key via the Edit Button Function
dialog; or double-click the button, and then select the Make Page Button option.
Determining Destinations Accessible to the Panel

Certain panels allow control of different numbers of destinations and associate functions.
ABA-XY and 2RU ABA panels allow control of one destination; ABA(1)-SB panels allow
control of one destination selection window with four levels of breakaway; and ABA-AFV or
ABA(1)-MB allows control of four destinations.
Determining Destinations Accessible to XY Models

ABA-XY or 2RU panel includes one destination selection window.
This window and its associated selection keys allow a user to select the destination being
controlled and statused. A panel can be configured to have access to all destinations in the
router database, or to only a limited subset of the destinations.
To define the set of destinations available to a panel, click the Assignments tab at the
Edit Panel dialog box. The following dialog box opens.
376 Chapter 20
Figure 20-15 Defining a Set of Destinations Available to a Panel
Destinations are assigned at the Destinations group on the left side of the dialog. The
Global Database list box displays all destinations available in the database. The This
Panel list box displays the destinations currently assigned to the panel. Assigning
destinations to a panel is a simple matter of transferring the destinations from the Global
Database box to the This Panel box.
To add a destination to the panel access list, drag it from the Global Database box, and
then drop it in the This Panel box, as shown in Figure 20-16.
To add a Destination:
1. Select the destination from the Global Database list.
2. Drag it to the panel list.
Figure 20-16 Adding a Destination by Dragging and Dropping
Note: When viewed on a VGA monitor, the Assign and Delete buttons may not contain
text descriptions. See Figure 20-7 on page 368 for the VGA equivalents.
User Manual
You may add destinations to the panel access list using the Assign and Delete buttons
located between the Global Database box and the This Panel box, or double-click a
destination from the Global Database box.
To give the panel access to all destinations in the database, click Assign All in the
Destinations group. All destinations are listed in the This Panel list box.
To add a destination to the panel, follow these steps:
1 Click the destination name in the Global Database list box.

2 Drag the destination to the This Panel list box (or click Assign).
The destination is added to the panel list.
To remove a destination from the panel, follow these steps:
1 Click the destination name in the This Panel list box.

2 Drag the destination to the trash can (or click Delete).
The destination is removed from the panel list.
To clear the panel access list, click Delete All. All destinations are removed from the panel
list.
Determining Destinations Accessible to SB Models

The ABA(1)-SB allows control of one destination with four levels of breakaway. To select the
destination available to this panel, click the Assignments tab at the Edit Panel dialog
box.
Figure 20-17 Edit Panel Dialog Box, Assignments Tab
The destination is assigned at the Destinations group on the left side of the dialog. The
Global Database list box displays all destinations available in the database. The This
Panel list box displays the destination currently assigned to the panel. To assign a
destination to a panel, transfer the destination from the Global Database box to the
This Panel box, as shown in Figure 20-16.
378 Chapter 20
To add a destination to the panel access list, drag it from the Global Database box to the
This Panel box, as shown in Figure 20-16.
You may add destinations to the panel access list using the Assign and Delete buttons
destination from the Global Database box.
To assign the destination, follow these steps:
1 Click the destination name in the Global Database list box.

2 Drag the destination to the This Panel list box (or click Assign).
The destination appears in the panel list.
Determining Destinations Accessible to AFV/MB Models

The ABA-AFV or ABA(1)-MB allows control of four destinations. Each is assigned to one of
the four status display windows on the panel. The source connected to the destination is
displayed in the window.
To select the destinations available to this panel, click the Windows + Paging tab at the
Edit Panel dialog box. The destinations are assigned via the Controlled Destinations
drop-down list box.
Figure 20-18 Edit Panel Dialog Box, Windows + Paging Tab
To assign the destinations on an ABA-AFV or ABA(1)-MB panel, follow these steps:
1 Click the status display window that is to be assigned to the destination.

2 Select the destination that is to be associated with this window by clicking on the arrow
located to the right of the drop-down list box. Scroll through the list of choices, and select
the destination.
3 Enable the level(s) on that this destination should switch.
User Manual
Determining Sources Accessible to a Panel

The source select windows and their associated selection keys allow a user to select the
source connected to the current destination. A panel can be configured to have access to all
sources in the router database, or to only a limited subset of the sources.
To define the set of sources available to a panel, click the Assignments tab at the Edit
Panel dialog box.
A dialog box similar to Figure 20-19 opens. (The actual appearance of the dialog box
depends on the style of the panel being edited.)
Figure 20-19 Defining the Set of Sources Available to a Panel
Sources are assigned via the Sources group on the right side of the dialog box. The
Global Database list box displays all sources available in the database. The This Panel
list box displays the sources currently assigned to this panel. To assign sources to a panel,
transfer the sources from the Global Database box to the This Panel box.
Note: You may sort the Assignments tab list boxes in alphabetical order (numeric, then
A-Z) or logical order (the order in which you assigned the sources and destinations).
Assigning Sources to a Panel

To add a source to the panel access list, drag it from the Global Database box and drop
it in the This Panel box, as shown in Figure 20-21.
Note: When viewed on a VGA monitor, the Assign and Delete buttons may not contain
text descriptions. See Figure 20-7 for the VGA equivalents.
You may add sources to the panel access list using the Assign and Delete buttons
source from the Global Database box.
To give the panel access to all sources in the database, click Assign All in the Sources
group. All sources are listed in the panel list.
380 Chapter 20
To add a source to the panel access list, follow these steps:
1 Click the source name in the Global Database list box.
To assign a Source to a panel:

1. Select the Source from the Global Database list.
Figure 20-20 Adding a Source to a 1RU ABA Panel by Dragging and Dropping
To assign a source to a panel:

1. Select the source from the Global Database list.
Figure 20-21 Adding a Source to a 2RU ABA Panel by Dragging and Dropping
2 Drag (or double-click) the source to the This Panel list box (or click Assign). The source
is added to the panel list.
To remove a source from the panel access list, follow these steps:
1 Click the source name in the This Panel list box.

2 Drag the source to the trash can (or click Delete). The source is removed from the panel
list.
To clear the panel access list, click Delete All. All sources are removed from the panel list.
User Manual
Assigning a On the ABA panels, sources and destinations can be selected via selecting either
Category Key Category/Index or Favorite Key category keys.
With category indexing, both a category (for example, VTR, CAM, and so forth) and an
index (for example, 21, 36, and so forth) are required to identify a device. The first press of
a button selects the category; the second and subsequent presses select the index. For
example, to select AUX9, a user would press the AUX button (the category), followed by
the number 9 key (the index 9).
The category (AUX)

is selected The index (9) is selected
DESTINATION SOURCES
Status
Preset
1 Press the Category 2 Press the Index

Select key Select key
Figure 20-22 Selecting a Source via Category Indexing
To assign a category to a selection key, follow these steps:
1 Click the Assignments tab.

2 A dialog box similar to that shown in Figure 20-23 opens.
Figure 20-23 Assigning a Category to a Selection Key
The Categories group is located on the far right side of the Assignments dialog. The
buttons at the top of the dialog box correspond to the Selection keys on the ABA panels.
382 Chapter 20
3 Select the category name from the Categories list box. The selected category is
highlighted.
4 Drag the category name to the selection key, as shown in Figure 20-23
The selection key changes to reflect the new assignment.
Note: Double-click a category in the Categories list box to assign the selected category to
the first available key.
To assign a category and an index to a selection key, follow these steps:
1 Click the selection key.

The Edit Button Function dialog box opens. (Category should be already selected in
the Button Function list box.)
2 From the Select Category list box, select the desired category name.
3 From the Select Index list box, select the index number.
4 Click Done to return to the Assignments tab.
Figure 20-24 Assigning a Category and an Index to a Selection Key

User Manual
Resolving Inaccessibility Errors

If sources or destinations on the Assignments tab are highlighted in red (or if the
Summary text indicates that one or more sources/destinations are “inaccessible”), there is a
potential problem with the selection key assignments. Those sources and/or destinations
that are in error (highlighted red) are available from the control panel using the current
selection key assignments. Figure 20-25 shows an example of such a problem and its
possible resolution.
Assigning the “VTR”

category to a Selection
Key would remove problem by
providing access to
the VTR1, VTR2, ...
sources and destinations
Destinations and Sources that
cannot be addressed based on the
current selection key assignments
are highlighted in red
Summary Indicator appears

to notify user that there are
inaccessible destinations
or sources
Figure 20-25 Resolving Inaccessibility Errors
Changing a Panel Definition

Panel definitions involve the following actions:
 Changing the Panel Name, ID, Style, Brand, or Protocol on page 384
 Changing Protocols on page 385
384 Chapter 20
Changing the Panel Name, ID, Style, Brand, or Protocol

Note: The capability of editing Ethernet information is available for RCP-ABAe control
panels only.
Click the Name, ID, Style tab at the Edit Panel dialog box to produce the dialog box
shown in Figure 20-26. The list boxes on the Name, ID, Style tab displays the current
Panel Name, Panel ID and Panel Style settings. The Version box displays the hardware and
software versions reported by the panel (the panel must have been polled previously for the
Version information to be correct).
Changes made to a panel’s definition do not take effect until the definition has been
downloaded to the physical panel. Download the new settings by clicking Download on
the Edit Panel dialog box. To print new key caps, click Print Key Caps.
Figure 20-26 Changing the Panel Name, ID, or Style
To change the panel name, enter a descriptive name in the Panel Name text box. Up to
15 characters can be used. Typically, the Panel Name indicates where the panel is located
(for example., Edit B, Master Control, and so forth)
To change the panel ID, follow these steps:
1 Click the arrow located to the right of the drop-down list box.
2 Scroll through the list of choices.
3 Select the new panel ID.
Note: The panel ID is the control panel’s physical address. If the ID is changed in the
database, it must also be changed on the physical panel (for information on changing the
ID on the physical panel, refer to the manual that was supplied with the panel).
To change the panel style, follow these steps:
User Manual
3 Select the new panel style.
CAUTIONA panel style change initializes the current configuration to the default
setting. All previous modifications are lost.
To change a panel brand, follow these steps:
 If a “Harris” logo appears on the front of the control panel, select the Harris radio
button.
 If you purchased the control panel after April 2007, select the Harris radio button.
 If a “Leitch” logo appears on the front of the control panel, select the Leitch radio
button.
 If you purchased the control panel before April 2007, select the Leitch radio button.
Changing On RCP-ABAe panels, Navigator allows you to set some of the option values for a selected
Protocols protocol. You can also download IP addresses for a selected panel.
Setting Serial Port Option Values

1 At the Name, ID, Style tab, click Protocol... in the Ethernet Information box.
2 The Edit Protocols dialog box opens. If necessary, select the Serial Protocols tab.
Figure 20-27 Edit Protocols Dialog Box, Serial Protocols Tab
3 Highlight the target selection, and then click Edit (or double-click the item selection).
4 Assigned values for the default protocol’s baud rate, parity, data bits, stop bits, and serial
interface are displayed.
While all relevant protocol option values are displayed, some values may not be
configurable. These values are displayed for informational purposes only; you cannot
change them through Navigator. To change a value, follow these steps:

A drop-down menu opens (see Figure 20-28 on page 386).
386 Chapter 20
Figure 20-28 Changing Serial Protocol Option Values

c Click somewhere outside the drop-down list box. The new selection appears in the
Value column.
d Click OK to accept the changes and return to Edit Protocols dialog box.
5 Click OK to return to the Name ID, Styles tab, and then click OK again to accept the
changes.
Setting Ethernet Port Option Values

1 At the Name, ID, Style tab, click Protocol... in the Ethernet Information box.
The Edit Protocols dialog box opens. If necessary, select the Ethernet Protocols tab.
The assigned values for the default server and client protocols for the selected Ethernet port
are displayed.
User Manual
Figure 20-29 Edit Protocols Dialog Box, Ethernet Protocols Tab
2 Highlight the target selection, and then click Edit (or double-click the item selection).
The Options dialog box opens (see Figure 20-30).
The option values for the client or server selection are displayed.
Figure 20-30 Changing Ethernet Protocol Option Values
While all relevant protocol option values are displayed, some values may not be
change them through Navigator. To change a value, follow these steps:

 If a drop-down menu opens, select the new value.
 If a drop-down list does not open, overwrite the existing value with the new
value.
b Click somewhere outside the Value column.
The new selection appears within the Value column.
388 Chapter 20
c Click OK to accept the changes and return to Edit Protocols dialog box, and then
click OK again to return to the Name ID, Styles tab.
Setting Network Information

At the Name, ID, Style tab, click Protocol... in the Ethernet Information box.
The Edit Protocols dialog box opens. If necessary, select the Control Card tab.
Figure 20-31 Edit Protocols Dialog Box, Control Card Tab
The Control Card tab displays information about the resource module installed in the
control panel. The information is updated on every Poll of the control system.
The dialog box shows system information for the control card on the left, and network and
configuration files setup on the right.
System Information
 The Name field displays the control panel device name.
Network Information
The Control Card’s network properties are divided into two sections: Current and
Programmed settings.
 Current settings are the IP, gateway, subnet mask, and MAC address settings that are
currently being used for the control panel. When you select the Current radio button,
these settings are displayed, but they are read-only.
 Programmed settings are the IP, gateway, and subnet mask address settings that you
want used with the control panel. When you select the Programmed radio button, you
can edit these settings.
 IP Address: Enter an IP address for the control panel.
 Gateway: Enter the address for the gateway to which the control panel is
attached.
control panel belongs.
User Manual
For changed network properties to be enabled, you must click Download IP Info.
A series of informational messages that inform you of the status of the download appear
onscreen.
3 When all changes are complete, click OK to return to the Name, ID, Style tab, and then
click OK again to accept the changes.
390 Chapter 20
391
21 Configuring RCPp Panels
RCPp Panel Configuration Overview

The RCPp series programmable panels are available in several different styles, and are
customizable for almost any system design. Panels are available in one- or two-rack units.
Models 1RU programmable panels are available in these configurations: 4×1, 4×4, 8×1, 8×8, 16×1,
16×1 LCD1, 16×4, 16×8, 16×16, 32×1, 32×8, and 32×8CQp.
2RU programmable panels are available in these configurations: 16×16 LCD1, 32×1 LCD1,
32×4, 32×32, 32×32 LCD1, 64×1, and 64×1 LCD1.
Note: Configuration information for these control panels can be found in their respective
installation and operation manuals:
RCP-16PBRCP-16LCD
RCP-48PBRCP-32LCD
RCP-96PBRCP-64LCD
RCP-32PB-OLEDRCP-24LCD-OLED
RCP-64PB-OLEDRCP-48LCD-OLED
Accessing the Edit Panel Dialog

Note: Before configuring a programmable panel, you need to create a routing system and
set up a logical database. See Creating and Maintaining Routing Systems on page 13
and Logical Database Setup on page 77 for more information.

Navigation pane, and then double-click on the panel selection.
The Edit Panel dialog box opens.
1 Available with RCP-IDe panels only.

392 Chapter 21
Configuring RCPp Panels
Figure 21-1 Accessing the Edit Panel Dialog Box
Note: The LCD Display tab appears for RCP-ID control panels only.
 Use the Auxiliary Keys tab to configure the user-definable auxiliary keys.
 Use the Destinations tab to define the destinations available.
 Use the Sources tab to define the sources available.
 Use the Levels tab to define the levels affected.
 Use the Address, Style tab to change the panel name, ID, or panel style.
 Use the LCD Display tab to set up and edit LCD displays on RCP-IDe control panels.
Edit Button Function Dialog Box

Note: Dual 32×1, 16×1, 8×1, 5 ×1, and 4×1 RCPp panels do not support the lock/protect
feature.
The Edit Button Function dialog box is used to assign functions to user-definable
selection keys on the ABA and RCPp control panels. (Right-click the selection key to access
the dialog.)
User Manual
Figure 21-2 Edit Button Function Dialog Box
The Edit Button Function dialog box includes a drop-down list box that is used to select
the function of the selection key, and a Properties group that is used to define the
specific parameters of the button. The appearance of the Properties group depends on
the type of button selected in the drop-down list box. The functions available in the
drop-down list depends on the type of panel being edited. Table B-1 on page 494 shows a
list of button functions available for RCPp panels.
See Appendix B, Configuring Control Panel Buttons on page 493 for more detailed
information about the selections available with this dialog box.
Configuring the Auxiliary Keys

All RCPp panels include two user-definable auxiliary keys. When a new panel is added, the
auxiliary keys are given default assignments (Enable and Lock). To change either
assignment:
1 Select the Auxiliary Keys tab at the Edit Panel dialog box.
A dialog box similar to the one shown in Figure 21-1 on page 392 opens. The actual
appearance of the dialog box depends on the style of the panel being edited.
2 Click the button associated with the key you want to configure.
The Edit Button Function dialog box (Figure 21-2 on page 393) opens. The functions
available in the drop-down list depend on the type of panel being edited. See Appendix B,
Configuring Control Panel Buttons on page 493 for more detailed information about
the selections available with this dialog box.
Defining the Destinations

To assign a destination select key, click the Destinations tab at the Edit Panel
dialog box.
394 Chapter 21
A dialog box similar to Figure 21-3 (Figure 21-4 for 32×8 CQ-X) opens. The actual
appearance of the dialog box depends on the configuration of the RCPp panel.
Destination Tab Assignments for all Panels Except 32x8 CQ-X

Panels
Destinations are assigned at the Logical Destinations group. The list box lists all
destinations available in the database. The button icon shows the key currently assigned to
each destination.
Figure 21-3 Destinations Tab

User Manual
Destination Tab Assignments for 32x8 CQ-X Panels
Figure 21-4 Destinations Tab for 32×8 CQ-X Panel Only
The Destination Tab of the 32×8 CQ-X panel has the default destination buttons defined as
follows:
 Button 1: Cut1
 Button 2: Crossfade1
 Button 3: Cut fade1
 Button 4: Fast1
 Button 5: Timing alarm1
 Button 6: V fade1
 Button 7: Fade cut1
 Button 8: Slow1
Assigning To assign a destination to a selection key, drag the destination from the Logical
Selection Destinations group and drop it on the desired key, as shown in Figure 21-5.
Keys
1
See Table 16-7 on page 299 for a description of this transition type.
396 Chapter 21
To assign a Destination key:

1. Select the Destination from the panel list.
Figure 21-5 Assigning a Destination
You may also create a destination select key by using the Edit Button Function dialog
box. See Creating a Destination Select Key on page 496 for more information.

To delete a destination select key, drag it to the trash can, as shown in Figure 21-6.
The key is “greyed” to indicate that it is unassigned.
To clear a selection key:

1. Select the key.
3. Drop it.
Figure 21-6 Clearing a Selection Key Assignment

User Manual
Defining the Sources

To assign a source select key, click the Sources tab at the Edit Panel dialog box.
A dialog box similar to that shown in Figure 21-7 (Figure 21-8 for 32×8 CQ-S;
Figure 21-9 for 32×8 CQ-X) opens. The actual appearance of the dialog box depends upon
the configuration of the RCPp panel.
Figure 21-7 Sources Tab
Figure 21-8 Sources Tab for 32×8 CQ-S

398 Chapter 21
Figure 21-9 Sources Tab for 32×8 CQ-X
Source Tab Assignments for all Panels Except 32x8 CQ-S and 32x8
CQ-X Panels
Sources are assigned at the Logical Sources group. The list box lists all sources available
in the database. The button icon shows the key currently assigned to each source.
Source Tab Assignments for 32x8 CQ-S Panels

The Source Tab of the 32×8 CQ-S panel has the default source buttons defined as follows:
 Buttons 1 to 16: Source Alarm buttons (Src1 to Src16)1

 Button 26: Cut1
 Button 27: Crossfade1
 Button 28: V fade1
 Button 29: Cut fade1
 Button 30: Fade cut1
 Button 31: Slow1
 Button 32: Fast1
Source Tab Assignments for 32x8 CQ-X Panels

The Source Tab of the 32×8 CQ-X panel has the default source buttons defined as
follows:
 Button 1 to 16: Cross-point buttons (PGM1 for Src1 to Src16)

 Button 17 to 32: Cross-point buttons (PGM2 for Src1 to Src16)
1 See
Table 16-7 on page 299 for a description of this transition type.
User Manual
Assigning To assign a source to a selection key, drag the source from the Logical Sources group
Selection and drop it on the desired key, as shown in Figure 21-10.
Keys
To assign a Source key:

1. Select the Source from the Logical Sources list.
Figure 21-10 Assigning a Source by Dragging and Dropping
You may also create a source select key by using the Edit Button Function dialog box. See
Creating a Source Select Key on page 495 for more information.

To delete a source select key, drag it to the trash can, as shown in Figure 21-11. The key is
“greyed” to indicate that it is unassigned.
To clear a selection key:

1. Select the key.
3. Drop it.
Figure 21-11 Clearing a Source Selection Key Assignment

400 Chapter 21
Configuring the Levels Affected

The Levels tab specifies what levels are affected when sources are selected from the
panel. If all levels are enabled on the Levels tab, pressing a source select button on the
panel affects all levels defined for that source.
The levels setting can also be used to limit selection of sources to specific levels on the
panel. For example, a panel could be created with only the video level enabled. In this case,
even if audio/video sources were selected, only the video level would be switched.
To assign the levels for the panel, enable the levels by checking the appropriate
check boxes. If a box is checked, the level is enabled for this panel.
Figure 21-12 Assigning Levels for a Panel
Changing Panel Name, ID, or Style

Note: Figure 21-13 shows this tab as it appears for a Harris- or Leitch-branded control
panel. For all other styles, Panel Brand selection is greyed out.
Figure 21-14 on page 401 shows this tab as it appears for a Panacea clean switch/quiet
switch control panel. For other panels, the “Associate with Frame” drop-down list box does
not appear.
Figure 21-15 on page 402 shows this tab as it appears for an IDe control panel. For other
panels, the “Add or Remove Pages,” “Page Tools,” “Ethernet Information,” and “Grouping
Mode” functions do not appear. When Grouping Mode is enabled, four new tabs appear
that allow the setup of Source and Destination grouping. See page 411 for more
information about grouping functions.
Click the Address, Style tab at the Edit Panel dialog box to bring up this tab.
User Manual
Figure 21-13 Address, Style Tab
Figure 21-14 Address, Style Tab for Clean/Quiet Switch

402 Chapter 21
Figure 21-15 Address, Style Tab for IDe Panels with Grouping Mode Enabled
 The list box on the Address, Style dialog box displays the current Panel Name.
 The two combo boxes display the Panel ID and Panel Style settings.
 The Panel Brand box displays the “branding” of the control panel.
 The Version box displays the hardware and software versions reported by the panel (the
panel must have been polled previously for the Version information to be correct).
 (For clean/quiet switch panels only) The Associate with Frame combo box displays the
controlling and monitoring Panacea P-SCQ or P-HSCQ frame associated with a
corresponding Panacea clean switch/quiet switch control panel.
 (For 32×32 and 64×1 IDe panels with a grouping license enabled) The Grouping Mode
box displays the Enable Grouping mode check box. Grouping mode is used for setting
up Source and Destination grouping functions, selecting options for groups, and
previewing grouping settings.
Changing a Panel Name

To change the panel name, enter a descriptive name in the Panel Name text box. The
descriptive name may contain up to 15 characters. Typically, the Panel Name would indicate
where the panel is located (for example, Edit B, Master Control, and so forth).
Changing a Panel ID
3 Select the new panel ID.
Note: The panel ID is the control panel’s physical address. If the ID is changed in the
database, it must also be changed on the physical panel (for information on changing the
ID on the physical panel, refer to the manual that was supplied with the panel).
User Manual
Changing a Panel Style

3 Select the new panel style.
CAUTION: A panel style change initializes the current configuration to the default
setting. All previous modifications are lost.
Changing a Panel Brand

To change the panel brand, select the appropriate Panel Brand radio button.
 If a “Harris” logo appears on the front of the control panel, select the Harris radio
button.
 If you purchased the control panel after April 2007, select the Harris radio button.
 If a “Leitch” logo appears on the front of the control panel, select the Leitch radio
button.
 If you purchased the control panel before April 2007, select the Leitch radio button.
CAUTION: If you set up alarms for your Harris-branded control panel, changing to a
Leitch-branded panel triggers a warning message:
If you click Yes, Navigator removes all alarm, source alarm, destination
alarm, and parameter buttons from the panel.
(For Panacea clean switch/quiet switch control panels only) To change the associated
Panacea frame, follow these steps:
3 Select the new frame to associate with the parametric buttons on this panel.
Enabling Changes to a Panel’s Definition

Changes made to a panel’s definition do not take effect until the definition has been
downloaded to the physical panel. Download the new settings by clicking Download on
the Edit Panel dialog box (or refer to Downloading Device Definitions on page 44). To
print new key caps, click Print Key Caps.
Setting Up Button Pages

Note: Standard RCP-IDe control panels do not support button paging.
404 Chapter 21
RCP-IDe LCD control panels support button paging, which allows you to select alternate
button definitions, or “pages,” for the same control panel.This allows panels with a limited
number or buttons to provide a virtual panel of much greater size. You can add up to 20
pages to RCP-IDe LCD control panels; page 1 is always the original, or default, setup.
MON MON MON AUX AUX AUX AUX AUX AUX AUX
Page 1 VR 1 VR 2 VR 3
1 2 3 Tx 1 Tx 2 O1 02 03 04 05 06 07 AIR
UP
Blac LOC
Page 2 Bars
k SAT A SAT B SAT C CAM 1 CAM 2 CAM 3 Rx 1 Rx 2 Rx 3 VTR 1 VTR 2 VTR 3 VTR 4 K
DN
Test Test Test Still Still Still Still Still Blac

Page 3 Bars
1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 k
12P
6PM
Salv Salv M XPT XPT XPT
Page 4 New Stat Shift
o1 o2 DUB ingest GoLive New 1 2 3
s
s
Figure 21-16 Example of 16×1 Panel with Four Button Pages
In the example shown in Figure 21-16, a 16×1 panel has been configured with 4 pages of
buttons. To access the additional pages, the operator presses the function buttons that have
been reconfigured as “Page Up/Page Down” keys. Pressing the “Page Up” key selects
lower-numbered pages, while the “Page Down” key selects higher numbered pages. When
the highest- (or lowest-) numbered pages have been reached, the selection “wraps” to the
lowest- (or highest-) numbered page.
The paging information section appears on the Address, Style tab (see Figure 21-17).
Figure 21-17 Paging Information
1 In the Number Pages spin box, enter the total number of pages (including the default first
page) you want to set up. For example, enter “4” in the Number Pages box if you want 3
pages in addition to the default page.
Note: When a panel has pages, each page requires a Page Up and a Page Down button.
If you do not want to use the auxiliary keys for these functions, you need to set up the Page
Up/Down activity via the Function Button function. See page 503 for more information.
User Manual
2 If you want the existing auxiliary keys to be reassigned to act as paging (page up and page
down) keys, click the Auxiliary Up/Down check box.
3 Click Apply.
4 Select the Destinations tab. In the lower right corner there is drop-down list box that allows
you to select whatever page you want to configure.
5 Define the Destinations for the appropriate pages. (See Defining the Destinations on
page 393 for instructions on how to define destinations.)
You can copy page definition information from one page to another. See step 8 on
6 Select the Sources tab. In the lower right corner there is a drop-down list box that allows
you to select whatever page you want to configure.
7 Define the Sources for the appropriate pages. (See Defining the Sources on page 397 for
instructions on how to define sources.)
You can copy page source information from one page to another. See step 8 on page 405
8 Select the Address, Style tab again. To copy information from one page to another:
a Select the page you want to copy from (highlight the page number in the From box).
b Select the page you want to copy to (highlight the page number in the To box).
c Choose one of the following options:
 Click Sources to copy the source setup from one page to another. For an
exact copy, uncheck the Increment Sources check box; otherwise, Navigator
automatically assigns the other active sources in increasing numerical order.
 Click Destinations to copy the destination setup from one page to another.
For an exact copy, uncheck the Increment Dests check box; otherwise,
Navigator automatically assigns the other active destinations in increasing
numerical order.
 Click Functions to copy the button function setup from one page to
another.
 Click LCDs to copy the LCD button setup from one page to another.
 Click From Page Smart Apply to copy source, destination, function, and
LCD setups from one page to all of the other pages.
9 Enter the control panel IP address, gateway address, and subnet mask (address used to
identify the subnetwork to which the control panel belongs).
Monitoring RCP-IDe panels allow you to monitor any specific serial devices or IP addresses to make sure
Device the associated device is still active. You can also enable an alarm condition to notify you
when the associated device is inactive (both auxiliary buttons blink simultaneously to
Addresses indicate the “inactive” alarm condition).
Serial Protocols
1 Click the Address, Style tab, and then click Protocols....
The Edit Protocols dialog box opens.
2 Select the Serial Protocols tab.

The assigned values for the selected serial port are displayed.
406 Chapter 21
Figure 21-18 Edit Protocols – Serial Protocols Dialog Box
3 Highlight the target selection, and then click Edit.

The Options dialog box opens (see Figure 21-19). The assigned options for the selected
serial port are displayed.
Figure 21-19 Serial Protocols Options Dialog Box
Note: While all relevant protocol option values are displayed, some values may not be
change them through Navigator.
You can change some of the option’s values at this dialog box. To change a value:

A drop-down menu opens (see Figure 21-23).
User Manual
Figure 21-20 Serial Protocols Options Dialog Box

c Click somewhere outside the drop-down list box. The new selection appears in the
Value column.
d Click OK to return to the Serial Protocols tab.
Ethernet Protocols
The Edit Protocols dialog box opens. If necessary, select the Ethernet Protocols tab.
2 The assigned values for the default server and client protocols for the selected Ethernet port
are displayed.
Figure 21-21 Edit Protocols – Ethernet Protocols Dialog Box
3 Highlight the target selection, and then click Edit.

408 Chapter 21
The Options dialog box opens (see Figure 21-22). The assigned values for the default
server and client protocols for the selected Ethernet port are displayed.
Note: While all relevant protocol option values are displayed, some values may not be
change them through Navigator.
Figure 21-22 Ethernet Protocols Options Dialog Box
You can change some of the option’s values at this dialog box. To change a value:

A drop-down menu opens (see Figure 21-23).

d Click OK to return to the Ethernet Protocols tab.
User Manual
Setting The Control Cards tab displays information about the control card installed in the
Network RCP-IDe LCD control panel. The information is updated on every Poll of the control system.
Information The dialog box shows the control card's network setup on the right.
The control card’s network properties are divided into two sections: Current and
Programmed settings.
Figure 21-24 Current Settings
 Current settings are the IP, gateway, subnet mask, and MAC address settings that are
currently being used for the panel. When you select the Current radio button, these
settings are displayed, but they are read-only.
Figure 21-25 Programmed Settings
 Programmed settings are the IP, gateway, and subnet mask address settings that you
want used with the RCP-IDe. When you select the Programmed radio button, you
can edit these settings.
 IP Address: Enter an IP address for the RCP-IDe.
 Gateway: Enter the address for the gateway to which the RCP-IDe is attached.
410 Chapter 21
RCP-IDe belongs.
Activating a Group License (RCP-IDe 32x32 and 64x1 Panels Only)

At the License Tab, you can activate the grouping licenses. You must activate the
firmware if you ordered it separately from your original product purchase. If you ordered the
grouping license at the same time as your original product purchase, it is factory-installed
and you do not need to activate it.
Note: Before you activate the Grouping license, make sure you have obtained an
appropriate license activation code. Provide the Customer Service representative with the
serial number of your product.

The Edit Protocols dialog box opens.
2 Select the License tab.

Navigator attempts to retrieve the serial number for the 32×32 or 64×1 RCP-IDe control
panel. If the serial number is found, it is displayed in the Serial Number box. If the serial
number is not found, “Unknown” is displayed in the Serial Number box.
3 From the Export Communication group box, you can select how to transfer the license
key to the frame.
 Select XY File Transfer to export the file by X-Y transfer (based on Navigator’s
 Select FTP to export the file by traditional File Transfer Protocol. (Log in before the
file transfer is initiated.)
4 In the License Key field, enter the appropriate license activation code you received from
your Customer Service representative (see note).
5 Select the Reboot after Update check box to reboot the frame immediately after the
Update button is clicked.
When you click Update, the frame reboots after the file is transmitted. A frame must be
rebooted before the Grouping license is recognized.
User Manual
If you do not select Reboot after Update, the file is transmitted but the frame is not
automatically rebooted.
Setting Up Grouping Functions

(RCP-IDe 32x32 and 64x1 Panels Only)
Grouping is a form of category indexing that allows multiple sources and/or destinations to
be grouped together to act as categories and indexes. (See Defining Category Indexing
on page 138 for a more in-depth explanation of categories and indexes.) When grouping is
enabled, a series of tabs appear to allow you to select grouping sources, destinations, and
options; and provide a preview of how the final grouping LCD display will appear as a result
of your choices.
1 Select the Address, Style tab, and then click the Enable Grouping Mode check box.
Note: When Grouping Mode is enabled, an information message appears to remind you of
firmware and licensing requirements.
A series of new tabs appear: Source Grouping, Destination Grouping, Grouping

Options, and Grouping Preview.
Figure 21-27 Grouping Selection Tabs Enabled
Creating groups involves adding and naming a group (both source and destination),
assigning sources or destinations to a group, and selecting miscellaneous options to assign
to each group. The way groups are named has no bearing on what items can be put under
a group. However, if you want the grouping to follow your already existing category
functions, you can use the Reset to Default button to help you there.
412 Chapter 21
Setting Up To access the Source Grouping function, enable Grouping Mode (if necessary) at the
Source Address, Style tab, and then select the Source Grouping tab.
Groups
Figure 21-28 Source Grouping Tab
On the left side of the dialog box is the Source Grouping box. It displays a list all of the
currently available source groups and the sources currently assigned to each group. (The
default group [Src] contains your categories that have sources and the sources that are
under it. The default group always appears, but you can change the default group name to
something more useful.)
You can hide the contents of a group by clicking the “-” indicator to the left of the group
name. The group assignments disappear but the group name still appears in the Source
Grouping box and a “+” indicator is displayed. Click the “+” indicator to expand the group
assignment list.
The buttons to the right of the Source Grouping list allow you to perform group
 New Group: Use the New Group button to create a new source group under the
current selected Group Node.
 Delete: Use the Delete button to delete a source group, or to delete an individual
source from a group.
 Rename Group: Use the Rename Group button to change the name of an
existing group.
 Move Up: Use the Move Up button to move a group (or an individual source within
a group) up the assignment list.
 Move Down: Use the Move Down button to move a group (or an individual source
within a group) down the assignment list.
Note: Assignment list placement affects the order in which source group buttons are
 Reset to Default: Use the Reset to Default button to restore the original name
and assignments to a group based on the original source category definitions.
User Manual
On the right side of the dialog box is the Available Sources box. It displays all of the sources
available for assignment to a group.
Use the Assign Selected Source(s) button at the bottom of the Available Sources box
to assign one or more sources to a selected group. You may also assign a source to more
than one group.
Note: You can view the Grouping Preview tab at any time during the process to see the
results of any selections you make. See Previewing Grouping Setups on page 419 for
more information.
Adding a Group
1 Highlight the ROOT directory name1, and then click the New Group button on the
Source Grouping tab.
A group entry with the title New Group appears.
2 Enter a name for the group being added, and then press the Enter key.
3 If desired, move the new group up the assignment list, highlight the group name, and then
click the Move Up button.
The Move Up button moves the group up one level at a time.
4 Assign sources to the new group.

5 When finished, do one of the following:
 Set up Destination groups as described starting on page 414.
 Click OK to save the selection.
Assigning Sources to a Group

1 In the Source Grouping box, select the name of the group to which the sources will be
assigned.
2 In the Available Sources box, select the source entry to be assigned to the group. Use
standard Windows selection techniques to select multiple sources.
To deselect an entry, click on it a second time. Use standard Windows selection techniques
to deselect multiple entries.
3 Click the Assigned Selected Source(s) button to add the sources to the selected
group.
Note: An individual source may be assigned to multiple groups.
Renaming a Group
1 Highlight the appropriate group name in the Source Grouping box.
3 Press the Enter key to accept the change.
414 Chapter 21
Deleting a Group
To delete a group, highlight the appropriate group name in the Source Grouping box, and
then click the Delete button.
The selection is removed from the Source Grouping box.
Deleting Sources from a Group

To delete source entries from a group, highlight the appropriate source assignment in the
Source Grouping box, and then click the Delete button.
The source assignment is removed from the Source Grouping box.
Note: Deleting a source assignment from a group does not delete the source from the
Available Sources box.
Setting Up When you have set up all of the desired source groups, select the Destinations
Destination Grouping tab.
Groups
Figure 21-29 Destinations Grouping Tab
On the left side of the dialog box is the Destination Grouping box. It displays a list all of the
currently available destination groups and the destinations currently assigned to each
group. (The default group [Dst] contains your categories that have destinations and the
destinations that are under it. The default group always appears, but you can change the
default group name to something more useful.)
You can hide the contents of a group by clicking the “-” indicator to the left of the group
name. The group assignments disappear but the group name still appears in the destination
Grouping box and a “+” indicator is displayed. Click the “+” indicator to expand the group
assignment list.
User Manual
The buttons to the right of the Destination Grouping list allow you to perform group
 New Group: Use the New Group button to create a new destination group.
 Delete: Use the Delete button to delete a destination group, or to delete an
individual destination from a group.
 Rename Group: Use the Rename Group button to change the name of an
existing group.
 Move Up: Use the Move Up button to move a group (or an individual destination
within a group) up the assignment list.
 Move Down: Use the Move Down button to move a group (or an individual
destination within a group) down the assignment list.
Note: Assignment list placement affects the order in which destination buttons are
 Reset to Default: Use the Reset to Default button to restore the original name
and assignments to a group based on the original destination category definition.
On the right side of the dialog box is the Available Destinations box. It displays all of the
destinations available for assignment to a group.
Use the Assign Selected Destination(s) button at the bottom of the Available
Destinations box to assign one or more destinations to a selected group. You may also
assign a destination to more than one group.
Note: You can view the Grouping Preview tab at any time during the process to see the
results of any selections you make. See Previewing Grouping Setups on page 419 for
more information.
Adding a Group
1 Highlight the ROOT directory name1, and then click the New Group button on the
Destination Grouping tab.
A group entry with the title New Group appears.
2 Enter a name for the group being added, and then press Enter.
3 If desired, move the new group up the assignment list, highlight the group name, and then
click the Move Up button.
The Move Up button moves the group up one level at a time.
4 Assign sources to the new group.

5 When finished, do one of the following:
 Set up group options as described starting on page 416.
 Click OK to save the selection.
Assigning Destinations to a Group

1 In the Destination Grouping box, select the name of the group to which the destinations
will be assigned.
416 Chapter 21
2 In the Available Destinations box, select the destination entry to be assigned to the group.
Use standard Windows selection techniques to select multiple destinations.
To deselect an entry, click on it a second time. Use standard Windows selection techniques
to deselect multiple entries.
3 Click the Assigned Selected Destination(s) button to add the destination to the
selected group.
Note: An individual destination may be assigned to multiple groups.
Renaming a Group
1 Highlight the appropriate group name in the Destination Grouping box.
3 Press Enter to accept the change.
Deleting a Group
To delete a group, highlight the appropriate group name in the Destination Grouping box,
and then click the Delete button.
The selection is removed from the Destination Grouping box.
Deleting Destinations from a Group

To delete destination entries from a group, highlight the appropriate destination assignment
in the Destination Grouping box, and then click the Delete button.
The destination assignment is removed from the Destination Grouping box.
Note: Deleting a destination assignment from a group does not delete the destination from
the Available Destinations box.
Setting Up When you have chosen all destinations to group, select the Grouping Options tab.
Group
Options
User Manual
Figure 21-30 Grouping Options Tab
By default, the miscellaneous options for control panel button displays are selected. These
buttons function like favorite destinations for easy accessibility and notification.
 The Enable Panel for Multi Bus Operation option allows the operation of a
control panel that simultaneously provides control and status of selected destinations.
(See Figure 21-33 for an example.)
Select the check box to the left of this option to enable the option. When this option is
enabled, the Available Destinations and Selection Destination boxes become active.
 Available Destinations are those destinations that are available for selection and
display. In Grouping mode, you can watch a maximum of 13 destinations at a time.
 Selected Destinations are those destinations that already have been selected for
display.
Use the < and > buttons to move destination selections between the Available and
Selected boxes. Use standard Windows selection techniques to move multiple
destinations.
 The Enable Level Breakaway Button on Panel option allows the display of the
level breakaway button option on the control panel. (See Figure 21-33 for an
example.) This option display appears in both Source Select Mode and Destination
Selection Mode on the Grouping Preview tab. These level breakaway buttons show the
current status for the selected destination on their level, and allow you to easily perform
breakaway operations.
Select the check box to the left of this option to enable the option.
 The Enable Take Button on Grouping Panel option allows the display of the
Take button on the control panel. (See Figure 21-33 for an example.) This option
display appears in both Source Select Mode and Destination Selection Mode on the
Grouping Preview tab. If the Take button is enabled, the panel functions like a preview
panel and forces the user to press the Take button to execute a crosspoint. When this
option is disabled, the user selecting a source button will execute a crosspoint.
418 Chapter 21
 The Auto-Boot into Panel Grouping Mode option enables a control panel to
automatically enter Panel Grouping Mode whenever the panel is powered up. If this
option is enabled, the user cannot enter Grouping mode on their panel, and then go
back to regular operation mode. If this option is disabled, the user must press a special
Grouping mode button to enter this mode.
When finished, click OK to save the selection.
User Manual
Previewing The Grouping Preview tab provides a quick view of how the control panel will appear
Grouping with the selected setup information from the Source Grouping, Destination
Grouping, and Grouping Options tabs. It shows a different display based on the
Setups chosen preview mode and any check boxes enabled at the Grouping Options tab. See
Figure 21-31, Figure 21-32, and Figure 21-33 for examples of appearance.
Figure 21-31 Grouping Preview Tab

420 Chapter 21
Figure 21-32 Grouping Preview Tab in Source Select Mode

User Manual
Figure 21-33 Grouping Preview Tab in Destination Select Mode
Editing LCD Button Displays (RCP-IDe Panels Only)

Click the LCD Display tab at the Edit Panel dialog box to bring up this tab. A series of
tabbed dialog boxes allow you to add or edit text, add or change button icon displays, and
change active or inactive button display brightness.
The default button setup is
 Text displayed
 Default Font
 Icon not displayed
 Color display green
 Color intensity brightest
422 Chapter 21
Figure 21-34 Edit Panel Dialog Box, LCD Display Tab
Setting Up Navigator allows you to customize your LCD buttons with different text information. You
Button Text can format the text in terms of font type, font size, and font features (bold, italics,
underline), as well as align text within a button. You can display text in conjunction with, or
instead of, icon display information.
This function does not have an Undo feature. To return to the original settings you must
select Cancel.
Adding Text
Note: The Button Definition box to the right of the Text tab shows how the selected button
was originally configured. This option is provided as a quick reference, so that you do not
have to refer back to another tab to see its original configuration.
1 Click an LCD button to which you want to add text.

2 The Show Text check box is selected, so that you can display the default or new text as well
as an image. (If you want display an image as well as text, you also have to set up the image
via the Icon tab. See Setting Up Button Images on page 424 for more information.)
If you want to display an image only, uncheck this box.
3 Click OB to provide an opaque background between the text and any image displayed. The
button stays depressed when this feature is on.
4 To use the default text entries, leave the Use Default Text box checked. Navigator displays
the text assigned via the logical source or logical destination setup. See Assigning and
Editing Names on page 110 for information on how to name logical sources. See
Assigning and Editing Names on page 122 for information on how to name logical
destinations.
5 To insert customized text
a Uncheck the Use Default Text box.
User Manual
b Enter any combination of up to eight letters and/or numbers in the Line 1 box. If
desired, enter any combination of up to eight letters and/or numbers in the Line 2 box.
6 Repeat steps 1 through 5 for each LCD button to which you want to add text.
7 Set up the text characteristics for each LCD button.
Setting Up Text Characteristics for Individual Buttons

1 Click an LCD button that you want to configure.
2 Choose the desired font type, font size, and font features (that is, Bold, Italic, Underline).
Please note that, if you use our recommended default font, you cannot modify its text size
or other features.
3 Click Center Text to align the button text in the center of the button. The button stays
depressed when this feature is on.
Note: The Align Text feature is especially useful when you want to align text within an
image.
You can also manually align text within a button (for example, you can move the text below
a button image). The arrow keys to the right of the Line 1/Line 2 boxes allow you to move
text within a button. You can move the text up, down, right, or left. If you would rather
align text manually, make sure the Center Text button is off, and then use the arrow keys to
manipulate text locations.
4 Repeat steps 1 through 3 for each LCD button you want to configure.
5 When you have completed your configurations, select from among these options:
 Configure button images (see Setting Up Button Images on page 424)
 Configure inactive and active button colors (see Setting Up Button Colors on
page 425)
 Download configuration information (see Finishing on page 427)
Setting Up Text Characteristics for Multiple Buttons

1 Click the first LCD button that you want to configure.
2 Using standard Windows selection techniques (hold down the <Shift> or <Ctrl> keys to
select multiple devices), select the other buttons that you want to configure.
3 Choose the desired font type, font size, and font features (that is, Bold, Italic, Underline).
Please note that, if you use our recommended default font, you cannot modify the text
type, size, or other features.
4 Click Center Text to align the button text in the center of the button. The button stays
depressed when this feature is on.
Note: The Align Text feature is especially useful when you want to align text within an
image.
You can also manually align text within multiple several buttons at once (for example, you
can move the text below a button image). The arrow keys to the right of the Line 1/Line 2
boxes allow you to move text within a button. You can move the text up, down, right, or
left. If you would rather align text manually, make sure the Center Text button is off, and
then use the arrow keys to manipulate text locations.
424 Chapter 21
page 425)
Setting Up Navigator allows you to customize your LCD buttons with different images, or icons. You
Button can display icons in conjunction with, or instead of, text display information. You can use
the default icons, or you can add customized icons.
Images
select Cancel.
Setting Up Images for Individual Buttons

1 If necessary, click on the Icon tab.
Figure 21-35 LCD Icons Tab
Note: The Button Definition box to the right of the Icon tab how the selected button was
originally configured. This option is provided as a quick reference, so that you do not have
to refer back to another tab to see its original configuration.
2 Click an LCD button to which you want to add an image.

3 Click the Show Icon check box to display an image on a button.
4 To use the default icon entries, leave the Use Default Icon box checked.
5 To insert a different icon
a Uncheck the Use Default Icon box.
b Click the icon you want from the drop-down icon list box.
6 The icon appears in the center of the LCD button. Move the Icon Size slider to the left to
decrease icon size, and to the right to increase icon size. The increased/decreased (in
percentage of original size) size appears in the Icon Size box.
User Manual
7 If desired, turn off the image text (at the Text tab, unclick the Show Text check box).
8 If necessary, align the image within the button. The arrow keys to the left of the drop-down
list box allows you to move an image up, down, left, or right within a button.
9 Repeat steps 1 through 8 for each LCD button to which you want to add an image.
 Configure button text (see Setting Up Button Text on page 422)
page 425)
Setting Up Identical Images for Multiple Buttons

Navigator allows you to simultaneously customize several LCD buttons with the same image
and image characteristics.
1 Click the first LCD button that you want to set up.
select multiple devices), select the other buttons that you want to set up.
3 Click the Show Icon check box to display an image on a button.
4 To use the default icon entries, leave the Use Default Icon box checked.
5 To insert a different icon
a Uncheck the Use Default Icon box.
b Click the icon you want from the drop-down icon list box.
6 The icon appears in the center of the LCD button. Move the Icon Size slider to the left to
decrease icon size, and to the right to increase icon size. The increased/decreased (in
percentage of original size) size appears in the Icon Size box.
7 If desired, turn off the image text (at the Text tab, unclick the Show Text check box).
8 If necessary, align the image within the button. The arrow keys to the left of the drop-down
list box allows you to move an image up, down, left, or right within a button.
page 425)
Setting Up Navigator allows you to customize your LCD buttons with different shades of three colors:
Button green, red, or amber. You can assign one color to all of the LCD buttons, or assign different
colors to individual buttons. In addition, you can adjust the color intensity for active and
Colors inactive display.
select Cancel.
Setting Up Colors for Individual Buttons

1 Click the first LCD button that you want to configure.
2 If necessary, click on the Color tab.
426 Chapter 21
Figure 21-36 LCD Display Color Tab
3 (If desired) Select the color you want from the drop-down list box. An example of how
buttons look with a new color assignment appears in the Inactive Preview box.
4 (If desired) Select a different inactive color intensity setting from the drop-down list box.
Intensity settings range from 1 (darkest) to 15 (brightest).
5 (If desired) Select a different active color intensity setting from the drop-down list box.
6 Click the next LCD button that you want to configure, and select its colors, as explained in
steps 3 through 5.
Setting Up Colors for Multiple Buttons

1 If necessary, click on the Color tab.
2 Using standard Windows selection techniques, select the other buttons that you want to
configure.
3 (If desired) Select the color you want from the drop-down list box. An example of how
buttons look with a new color assignment appears in the Inactive Preview box.
4 (If desired) Select a different inactive color intensity setting from the drop-down list box.
5 (If desired) Select a different active color intensity setting from the drop-down list box.
6 If you want the selected color and intensities to be assigned to all of the LCD buttons on the
panel, click Apply to All. (The selected color and intensities are assigned to all of the LCD
buttons on the panel, not just the selected buttons.)
User Manual
Finishing
1 Click Download to download all device configuration information (for example, changes
to sources and destinations), as well as the LCD display characteristics, to the RCP-IDe
panel.
OR
Click Update LCD Display to download the LCD display characteristics only to the
RCP-IDe panel
Controlling Backlight Intensity

In most cases, you do not need to adjust the contrast on your control panel buttons. As
your RCP-ID control panel ages, however, the degree of difference between the lightest and
darkest areas on a a button may fade. In such a case, you should adjust the Contrast.
CAUTIONAdjusting the backlight intensity too often causes the LCDs to burn out
prematurely.
Click the LCD Display tab at the Edit Panel dialog to bring up this tab.
Figure 21-37 Edit Panel Dialog Box, LCD Display Tab

428 Chapter 21
Changing Intensity for Auxiliary Keys

1 Click on the auxiliary key for which you want to change the intensity.
The Text, Icon, and Color tabs display disappear and the Brightness box opens.
2 Click on the drop-down arrow for the button state (active or inactive) you want to change.
A series of color gradation samples opens.
Figure 21-38 Adjusting Color Intensity for Auxiliary Keys
3 Click the color intensity you want. That color appears in the button state brightness display
box.
Changing Intensity for Panel Keys

1 Click on the Panel button on the lower left side of the LCD Display tab.
The Text, Icon, and Color tabs display disappear and the Panel LCD Contrast box opens.
Figure 21-39 LCD Contrast

2 In the Panel LCD Contrast box, move the Brightness slider.
 Move the slider to the left for greater backlight intensity.
 Move the slider to the right for less backlight intensity.
 Click Restore Default to restore the panel’s original backlight intensity.
429
22 Configuring the Web Router

Application
Web Router Application Configuration Overview

The optional web router application uses standard web browsers to perform certain control
panel functions for Panacea routers and Edge protocol gateways that have an enhanced
resource module installed. The enabling software is purchased as a separate flash module; to
become operable, it requires the presence of an enhanced resource module.
The web router application flash module is available for retrofit into non-web enabled
Panacea or Edge frames. Web-enabled frames have the flash module already installed.
Only P-RES-H (version 3.16 or higher) modules with licensed web protocols support the web
router application download properly.
Adding Web Router Application Devices

Note: If you have a Panacea or Edge device already set up in a database, you do not need to
re-add it. You can access the Web Panels and Web Users tabs via the device’s Edit function.
To successfully use the web router application, an Ethernet connection is required between a
Panacea or Edge device and a PC running Navigator. The web router application does not
operate via a serial connection. Before you can configure web panels or add web users, you
must add either a Panacea router or an Edge protocol gateway device.
 For information about adding a Panacea router configuration, see Configuring

Panacea Frames on page 263.
 For information about adding an Edge configuration, see Configuring Edge Protocol
Gateways on page 339.
430 Chapter 22
Configuring the Web Router Application
Before You Begin Setting Up Web Panels or Users

After you save any additions or changes to web panel or user information, you must
perform a download. When a download is performed, a file containing the user
information is downloaded, along with the other PWeb files, to the web-enabled frame.
This file overwrites the file that is already resident on the frame. If you do not want to
overwrite existing information, poll the appropriate web-enabled device
BEFORE making any additions or changes. When you poll a web-enabled device,
Navigator merges the information from the frame with corresponding information (if any)
currently listed in Navigator. One of these scenarios takes place:
 If a user exists on the frame and in the Navigator list, the poll updates user information
in Navigator with the values from the frame.
 If a user exists on the frame but does not exist in the Navigator list, the user information
is added to Navigator. An asterisk in front of the user name signifies the user
information is from the frame.
 If a user is deleted from the frame but is still listed in Navigator, that user is deleted
from Navigator.
Configuring Web Panels

The web router application allows you to set up virtual (or “web”) panels that have the
same characteristics as equivalent Imagine Communications hardware panels (see page 431
for a list of panel styles). These web panels can be customized to allow the system
administrator to control the types of functions available to individual web users. For
example, the system administrator can assign different access rights, accessible levels,
destination offsets, destinations, and sources, to two different users of the same panel.
Figure 22-1 Web Panels Tab for Panacea Products

User Manual
Figure 22-2 Web Panels Tab for Edge Products
Note: Make sure you review the information provided in Before You Begin Setting Up
Web Panels or Users on page 430 before you perform any of these functions.
At the Web Panels tab, you can add different web panel styles, delete existing panels,
select a default panel, and change the configuration of an existing panel. You can add these
panel styles:
 Pushbutton panels (a pushbutton panel is similar to a programmable panel)

 16×1
 16×4
 16×8
 16×16
 32×1
 32×4
 32×8
 32×16
 32×32
 Alphanumeric breakaway panels
 Index
Adding Pushbutton Panels

 If you are adding web panels for Edge Web, add an Edge, and then select the Web
Panels tab.
 If you are adding web panels for Panacea Web, double-click the appropriate
Panacea frame at the Navigation pane, and then select the Web Panels tab.
2 At the Web Panels tab, click Add.
The Panel Styles drop-down list box opens.
432 Chapter 22
Figure 22-3 Panel Styles Drop-Down List Box

3 Select the panel style you want from the drop-down list, and then click OK.
The Push Panel Configuration tab opens. If necessary, select the Destinations tab.
Figure 22-4 Pushbutton Panel Configuration Destinations Tab
4 Enter a unique name in the Configuration Name box. (This name also appears in the
Configuration Name box on the Web Panels tab). Using unique configuration names,
you can set up multiple panels of the same style (for example, several 16×1 or index panels),
but with different configurations, panel IDs, and/or assigned users.
5 Enter a unique panel ID number for this web panel configuration. This panel ID is used to
identify the panel type and specialized configuration you assign; you also use this panel ID
to assign specialized panel configurations to specific users (see Figure 22-11).
6 Assign the logical destination(s) to the desired button(s). You can drag and drop a
destination from the Logical Destinations list to any of the buttons to make an
assignment.
User Manual
To remove a logical destination assignment, drag and drop the selected button to the
Delete bin.
After you download the panel configuration, the destinations assigned to the DEST buttons
can be viewed on the appropriate push panel configurations in the web router application.
7 When destination assignments are complete, select the Sources tab.
Figure 22-5 Pushbutton Panel Configuration Sources Tab
8 Assign the logical source(s) to the desired Source Select Key button(s). You can drag
and drop a source from the Logical Sources list to any buttons to make an assignment.
To remove a logical source assignment, drag and drop the selected button to the Delete
bin.
After you download the panel configuration, the destinations assigned to the Source
Select Key buttons can be viewed on the appropriate push panel configurations in the
web router application.
9 When all source assignments are complete, select the Levels tab.
434 Chapter 22
Figure 22-6 Push Panel Configuration Levels Tab
10 Enable the levels by checking the appropriate check boxes. If a box is checked, the level is
enabled for this panel. (To disable a level, click the check box; the check mark disappears
and the level is disabled.)
11 When all level assignments are complete, click OK to return the Web Panels tab.
12 Click OK to accept all changes.
13 Click the Save icon (or press <Ctrl> S) to save the changes to the database.
14 Click Download to send the changes to the appropriate web-enabled device firmware.
Adding Index Panels

1 Click Add.
The Panel Styles drop-down list box opens.
2 Select the Index panel style from the drop-down list, and then click OK.
The Index Panel Configuration tab opens. If necessary, select the Assignments tab.
User Manual
Figure 22-7 Index Panel Configuration Assignments Tab
3 Enter a unique name in the Configuration Name box. (This name also appears in the
Configuration Name box on the Web Panels tab). Using unique configuration
names, you can set up multiple panels of the same style (for example, several 16×1 or index
panels), but with different configurations and/or assigned users.
4 Enter a unique panel ID number for this web panel configuration. This panel ID is used to
identify the panel type and specialized configuration you assign; you also use this panel ID
to assign specialized panel configurations to specific users (see Figure 22-11).
5 The top row of Index buttons on the dialog box correspond to the top two rows of
selection keys on a virtual index panel appearing in the web router application. The bottom
row of Index buttons on the dialog box correspond to the bottom two rows of selection
keys on a virtual index panel appearing in the web router application. After you download
the panel configuration, the category designators assigned to the Index buttons appear on
the index panel selection keys of the web router application.
At the Assignments tab you can assign the logical sources and destinations for the panel
to control, and what categories/indices are displayed on the web virtual panel’s buttons.
 When the Global Database and This Panel list boxes are sorted in
alphabetical order, the Assignments tab displays these lists in
numeric-alphabetic order.
 When the Global Database and This Panel list boxes are sorted in logical
order, the Assignments tab displays these lists in the order in which you first
assigned the sources and destinations.
select multiple devices), select the desired destinations from the Global Database list box
in the Destinations group, and then click Assign.
The selected destination assignments appear in the This Panel list box.
7 Using standard Windows selection techniques, select the desired sources from the Global
Database list box in the Sources group, and then click Assign.
The selected source assignments appear in the This Panel list box.
436 Chapter 22
8 The Categories group is located on the far right side of the Assignments dialog box.
The Global Database list includes all of the categories set up for the selected panel type.
Select the category name from the Categories list box, and then drag the category name
to the selection key.
The selection key changes to reflect the new assignment.
9 When all assignments are complete, click the Windows & Pages tab. To display and
control more levels than would normally be available on a panel, multiple pages can be
created, each with a different definition. You can assign up to four windows to a page; and
each window can have a different assigned level.
Figure 22-8 Index Panel Configuration Windows & Pages Tab
After you download the panel configuration

 Window assignments are associated with the desired pages.
 Window and page assignments appear on the index panel selection window
buttons of the web router application.
To add a page and corresponding windows:
 Click Add to create a blank page.
 Select the newly-added page, and then, from the drop-down list box to the right of
the Windows list, assign levels to the page’s windows.
 Click Apply Changes to apply the changes to the selected page.
To delete a page and corresponding windows:
 Select the page you want to delete (or, use standard Windows selection
techniques).
 Click Delete.
The selected page(s) and associated window assignments are removed.
10 When all windows and pages assignments are complete, click OK to return to the Web
Panels tab.
User Manual
13 Click Download to send the changes to the appropriate web-enabled device firmware.
Setting Up Web Users
Figure 22-9 Web Users Tab for Panacea Configurations
Figure 22-10 Web Users Tab for Edge Configurations
Note: Make sure you review the information provided in Before You Begin Setting Up
Web Panels or Users on page 430 before you perform any of these functions.
At the Web Users tab, you can
 Add users
 Edit existing user information
 Delete users
438 Chapter 22
 Assign specific panel configurations to available users
Adding Users
1 If necessary, navigate to the Web Users tab, and then click Add.
The Add PWeb User dialog box opens.
Figure 22-11 Add PWeb User Dialog Box

 Username: Add the desired user name here. The name should be no more than
20 alphanumeric characters and should not include special characters, spaces, or
non-printing characters.
Note: Special characters include the following:

/ \ // \\ , ~ . ! ? { } [ ] | % # @ * & ^ ` = + < > ; : $ ( )
 Password: Add the desired password for the assigned user name here. The
password should be no more than 20 alphanumeric characters and should not
include spaces or non-printing characters. Passwords can include special characters
so as to make the password more secure.
 Confirm: Re-enter the same information as you entered it in the Password
field.
 Idle Timeout: Assign the number of minutes to wait before an assigned user is
logged out when no screen activity is going on. Numeric values range from 0
(disable timeout) to 43200 minutes (30 days). The default value is 60 minutes.
 User Group: Assign the appropriate group access for the assigned user. User
groups may also allow limited administration rights as set up by the system
administrator. A user can belong to the Admin (group 1), User (group 2), or one
of 256 user-definable groups.
For users that also function as system administrators, assign Group 1.
 Panel ID: Enter the panel ID for the specific panel configuration that you want to
assign to this particular user. (Panel IDs and their corresponding configurations are
set up at the Panel Configuration tab. For pushbutton panels, see Figure 22-4.
For index panels, see Figure 22-7.)
To enable this selection, click the check box next to “Use a specific Panel ID for this
user.”
3 Click OK to accept all changes and return to the Web Users dialog box.
The name you added appears in the Available Users box.
User Manual
4 Select the user name you just added, and then select the desired configurations from the
appropriate Assigned Configurations drop-down list boxes.
7 Click Download1 to send the changes to the appropriate web-enabled device firmware.
After you download the information, the users are able to access their assigned
configurations via the Web Router application.
Assigning Configurations
1 If you haven’t already done so, set up the web panel configurations via the Web Panels
tab (or add the configurations via the Web Router application).
2 If you have not already done so, add the user’s name to the Available Users list (or add
the user’s name via the Web Router application).
3 At the Web Users tab, select the appropriate user name, and then select the desired
configuration from the appropriate Assigned Configurations drop-down list boxes.
After you download the information, the users are able to access their assigned
configurations via the Web Router application.
Editing User Information

1 At the Web Users tab, highlight the user name for which you wish to change
information, and then click Edit.
The Edit PWeb User dialog box opens.
Figure 22-12 Edit PWeb User Dialog Box

The Username field is greyed out, which indicates that you cannot change the user name.
1 The download directs Navigator to overwrite any user information that is already resident on the frame. See Before You Begin
Setting Up Web Panels or Users on page 430 for instructions on what to do if you want to avoid overwriting existing infor-
mation.
440 Chapter 22
2 Change one or more of the remaining fields as described in Adding Users on page 438. If
you change a user’s password, you need to make the same change in the Confirm field as
well.
3 Click OK to accept all changes and return to the Web Users dialog box.
5 Click Download1 to send the changes to the database and to the appropriate
web-enabled device firmware.
Deleting Users
1 Select the user’s name from the Available Users list, and then click Delete. The selected
user is removed from the list.
mation.
mation.
441
23 Configuring IP3
IP3 Configuration Overview

The IP3 controller is initially configured with Magellan CCS Navigator prior to routing control
using their silverlight web tools.
An IP3 routing system can route across its own levels, but can also interoperate with other
systems that use Levels to accept routing requests and to describe what was routed (status).
Status names and their grouping into Device Types, are tightly linked with attributes
associated with the components of each source/destination in the Attribute-Based Routing
Execution (ABRE) engine inside IP3. It is also tied into reporting of status back into legacy
protocols (such as XY).
Levels should be named appropriately, and organized in the Device Types wizard to create
device types for use in the IP3 database tools.
The IP3 Flat Matrix Editor is a tool used for defining the IP3 routing system logical
database. As the name suggests, the matrix created here is flat, with the ability to route
across levels freely. It can be launched only from Navigator.
Navigator’s Database Editor (or DB Editor) is a tool which, among other functionality,
creates Device Types. Device types can be created in Navigator even if the router offline.
Device types have to be consistent across an entire routing system.
Note: With IP3 routing system configuration, it is MANDATORY to use Device Types as the
basis for each logical source and destination. Defining them well and with consistent
nomenclature is critical because the attributes of the sources and destinations that drive the
routing behavior come from the definition of the Device Type.
Note: The IP3Controller can not be configured or controlled if the Navigator computer has
Windows 7 Operating system and User Access Control (UAS) is set to high or medium. From
the Start menu, choose Control Panel > User Accounts > Change User Account
Control Settings and set the slider to Low.
IP3 Controller Initial Configuration

The Controller runs on a separate device provided by Imagine Communications. The
controller can also be connected to by going to the controller device, launching a browser,
and accessing http://127.0.0.1.
442 Chapter 23
Configuring IP3
Here, you can discover IP3 routing system frames and elements such as frame devices, IP3
modules, and crosspoints. You can detect the type of card/module in a slot and then
determine available channels/ports. You can configure elements such as the IP address and
Gateway on discovered devices.
You can see this information in Navigator.
Preparing to Connect an IP3 Controller to a CCS Network

Prior to configuring IP3 in Navigator, you should configure IP addresses and network
settings for the Ethernet ports. You should add at least one frame to your IP3 routing
system and label the frames.
To configure the IP3, connect directly to it using a keyboard and mouse.
1 From the console of the IP3 Controller, launch a Web Browser and connect to the IP3
Controller at 127.0.0.1 (the universal IP address for “this computer”).
If you are prompted to add frames, click No.
2 Click Configure System > Manage IP3 Controller Settings > Network & Redundancy
> Network Settings.
A dialog box similar to the following appears.
Figure 23-1 Addresses and Network Parameters for All Ethernet Ports on IP3 Controller
ENET1—ENET4 communicate with devices separate from the IP3 system, and ENET5 and
ENET6 connect with PX-RES devices within IP3 frames. Navigator normally communicates
on ENET1. All six Ethernet connections must be enabled and have IP addresses assigned,
even if they are not in use. For best results, assign unused ports to an unused subnet on
your network and leave them physically unconnected.
3 To edit a row, click on a port on the left.

The panel at the right updates with that port’s information.
4 Edit the information in the right pane.

5 When all ports have been defined, click Set, and then Close and System Configuration.
6 Click Hardware Foundry and then Add Devices to add your IP3 frame.
User Manual
The following dialog box opens:
Figure 23-2 Add Devices to an IP3 System
7 Enter the IP address of the PX-RES (its default is 192.168.100.250), and provide a name in
the Label field.
The name you assign here will appear in every signal sent through this routing frame. For
best results, the name should be short and specific.
8 Click OK.
It can take up to 90 seconds for the IP3 Controller to pull in all of the details of the frame
and display them for the first time.Once complete, you will see your frame and other details
on the main page.
9 Select the row containing the frame.

If the power supply and fan indicators appear on the right in color, then you have
successfully added the frame.
10 Click Go to Device to check that all of the modules appear as expected within the frame.
This is described in depth in your IP3 controller manual. You are now ready to connect
Navigator to the IP3 controller and continue its configuration.
Connecting Navigator to an IP3 Controller

1 While in Build mode, right click on the Routers folder in the Navigation pane and
select Create > Routing System.
2 The Create Routing System dialog box opens.
444 Chapter 23
Configuring IP3
Figure 23-3 Add Host Dialog Box
3 Enter a name for the routing system and check Perform System Poll.
4 Enter the IP address of the IP3 controller and click OK.
Navigator polls the address provided, and when complete, adds a series of items to the
Routers folder in the Navigation pane.
Figure 23-4 Routing Components System Discovery
DBEditor IP3 Configuration

After you have completed the Polling process (see Connecting Navigator to an IP3
Controller on page 443) or otherwise added your IP3 routing system to the Navigator
Routers folder, you are ready to configure IP3 in DBEditor. Follow these steps:
User Manual
1 Double click the System Name (IP3) under Control Views in the Navigation pane’s
Routers folder.
The DBEditor dialog box opens.
Click here to select all rows in the tab.
Figure 23-5 DBEditor After Initial Discovery of an IP3 Frame
The DBEditor is initially filled with default sources and destinations. IP3 database entries are
created in the IP3 database editor, so you can delete these ones.
a Click the Sources tab and then click in the top left corner of the grid to select all
rows, and click Delete on your keyboard.
b Click the Destinations tab and then click in the top left corner of the grid to select all
rows, and click Delete on your keyboard.
c Click the Levels tab.
446 Chapter 23
Configuring IP3
2 On the Sources or Destinations tab of the DBEditor for an IP3 controller, click IP3 Matrix.
IP3 Matrix button
Figure 23-6 IP3 Matrix Destinations Tab with IP3 Matrix Button
The IP3 Matrix Settings dialog box opens.
Figure 23-7 IP3 Matrix Settings Dialog Box
On this screen, you can change the number of sources and destinations, and the source and
destination offset.
3 Click Wizard and set up the required device type(s) based on your modules.
User Manual
Figure 23-8 Device Type Wizard

See Using Database Editor Wizards on page 183 for more information.
4 Select Create a New Custom Device Type, provide a relevant name, and click Next.
5 In the Connection Types dialog, select your connection type, and click Next.
6 In the Level Selection dialog, ensure the starting level matches what you expect, and
click Next.
7 On the Configure Connection Types dialog, double-check the mapping of the
components to the levels and then click Next.
8 Click Finish on the last dialog.
9 Save
Note: Don’t Publish right now. Publishing at this stage would send an empty database to
the controller.
10 Close DBEditor.
IP3 Routing System Logical Configuration

The IP3 system logical configuration can only be done by launching the IP3 Flat Matrix
Editor tool from within Navigator.
1 Double-click the IP3 Routing System in the Router folder of the Navigation pane.
448 Chapter 23
Configuring IP3
Click here to open the IP3

Flat Matrix Editor
Figure 23-9 IP3 Routing Configuration
This starts the IP3 Flat Matrix Editor interface.
2 Click Add in the Sources tab and add your sources.

3 Click Add Rows.
 Add default sources
 Add Inputs corresponding to other Input Modules you may have in your system
4 On the Destinations tab, click Add
 Add the correct number of Outputs (Destinations) for your system.
 Define the correct number of other outputs.
 Define the Multiviewer Outputs.
See your IP3 Controller documentation for details on adding and refining Sources and
Destinations.
5 Click Save in order to commit these changes into the database.

6 Close the IP3 Flat Matrix Editor within Navigator by clicking the X in the corner.
7 Re-open Navigator DBEditor to synchronize and check that the synchronization has been
successful.
User Manual
The logical database appears configured as in the IP3 flat matrix. Sources, destinations, and
matrices are now displayed per device type, with IP3 items in green to indicate that the only
modification you can make is to change a row’s name.
Figure 23-10 IP3 in DBEditor After Flat Matrix Configuration
8 If no other changes are needed, click Publish in the DBEditor window.

The Publish function facilitates easy distribution of logical information, and allows
distribution of salvos and other database information in the names.txt file to all of the
devices in the routing system. All existing device list components are preselected; however,
you can uncheck any selection that you do not want to publish to.
Clicking Start Transfer (bottom left corner of the dialog box) starts the file transfer
process, during which, information messages are displayed in the Overall Status text box.
After each device has the names.txt transferred to it, Navigator's Database Editor sends an
X-Y command to the system to let the devices know to refresh their names.txt files. If some
devices fail to transfer or the command fails to send, click Retry to repeat the process for
the failed devices.
Adding an IP3 to a Legacy Router System

You can add an IP3 to an existing Legacy routing system, such as a Platinum or Panacea
router that already existed in Navigator before. This creates a hybrid system. Follow these
steps:
1 Configure your hardware so the routers are physically connected.

2 In Navigator, in the existing routing system, right-click on the Comm Settings and change
the IP to point to the new IP3 controller.
3 Make sure the IP3 controller was configured as a server for the existing (old) routing system.
450 Chapter 23
Configuring IP3
4 To connect IP3 and Platinum, do either of the following.

 Configure IP3 controller as a client to a legacy router (Platinum/Panacea/Edge) See the
documentation for that product to find out how to do that.
 or
 Configure legacy router to be a client to IP3 controller (Controller settings > XY Settings
(server IP type IP and SET)
Figure 23-11 Configuring an IP3 server as a Client
5 Repoll the routing system in Navigator.

The Routers folder here contains a hybrid routing system containing IP3 and a Platinum.
User Manual
Figure 23-12 IP3 and Platinum Frame in the Same Routing System
Routers folder.
The DBEditor dialog box opens.
7 On the Sources or Destinations tab of the DBEditor for an IP3 controller, click IP3 Matrix.
IP3 Matrix button
Figure 23-13 IP3 Matrix Destinations Tab with IP3 Matrix Button
452 Chapter 23
Configuring IP3
The IP3 Matrix Settings dialog box opens.
Figure 23-14 IP3 Matrix Settings Dialog Box
On this screen, you can change the number of sources and destinations, and the source and
destination offset.
8 Click Wizard and complete the steps for each NEW device type you need in your IP3 logical
configuration.
See Using Database Editor Wizards on page 183 for more information.
9 Save your changes and close the DBEditor.

10 Edit the IP3 Routing System Logical Configuration using the Flat Matrix Editor.
a Double-click the IP3 Routing System in the Routers sub-folder.
Click here to open the IP3

Flat Matrix Editor
Figure 23-15
This starts the IP3 Flat Matrix Editor interface.
b Click Add in the Sources tab and add your sources.

c Click Add Rows.
d Add default sources
e Add Inputs corresponding to other Input Modules you may have in your system
f On the Destinations tab, click Add
User Manual
g Add the correct number of Outputs (Destinations) for your system.

h Define the correct number of other outputs.
i Define the Outputs.
j See your IP3 Controller documentation for details on adding and refining Sources and
Destinations.
k Click Save on the Flat Matrix Editor in order to commit these changes into the
database, and then close the IP3 Flat Matrix Editor within Navigator by clicking the X
in the corner.
11 Double-click the routing system under Control Views in Navigator’s Routers folder to open
DBEditor toedit the hybrid routing system configuration, which now includes the IP3 logical
sources and destinations.
Sources, destinations, and matrices are now displayed per device type, with IP3 items in
green to indicate that the only modification you can make is to change a row’s name.
Figure 23-16 Platinum and IP3 Routers in DBEditor after Poll
12 Save and Publish to all the routing devices and panels in the hybrid routing system.
Update and re-download legacy control panels.
Reconfiguring a Hybrid Router System With an IP3

You may want to re-create a hybrid routing system (containing IP3 and also other Imagine
Communications routing systems) that has already been configured in another Navigator
session. This is normally done when setting Navigator to run on a new computer, or when
you add more hardware to the existing routing system and have to add more logical entries.
454 Chapter 23
Configuring IP3
1 In the Routers folder of the Navigation pane, right click and select Create > Routing
System, and then enter a name for the routing system and check Perform System Poll.
This name is just stored locally on the Navigator system.
2 Enter the IP address of the IP3 controller and click OK.

Navigator polls the address provided, and when complete, adds a series of items to the
Routers folder in the Navigation pane.
The Routers folder here contains the IP3 router and any other routers connected to it.
Routers folder.
The DBEditor tool opens.
4 Import names.txt from any already configured router in this hybrid system.
This also imports offset, levels, and the matrix size of the IP3 controller.
5 Make any necessary changes on both DBEditor for legacy routers, and Flat Matrix Editor for
IP3 routing systems.
6 Save and Publish (and eventually Download) to activate the modified configuration to all
routing devices in the hybrid routing system
Configuring Tielines
Tielines can be set between two IP3s, or IP3 and Platinum, or IP3 and Edge, but not
Panacea. The tieline connection needs to be defined on the same level.
Make sure the IP3 level is specified in the level tab and is configured properly (the # of
sources and destinations match the existing hardware).
After defining the tielines, you can perform the following operations:
 Deleting tielines
 Setting the tieline controller
For more information, see Managing Enhanced Tielines on page 151.
455
Basic Routing System Control
Routing System Control Overview

CCS Navigator can control and monitor routing equipment, such as Platinum, Integrator,
Integrator Gold, Panacea standard, Panacea advanced, future routing products, and various
traditional products, including Via, XPlus, and so forth This also includes combiner systems
(multiple Integrators combined together to create larger routing systems).
Navigator may be used as the only controlling device on a system, or it may be used in
conjunction with traditional hardware control panels. Note that you can access multiple
routing configurations with multiple logical views on the same workstation simultaneously.
Note: You must have a Device Control license to monitor and control devices.
Using Control Mode “Tools”

 Advanced Controls on page 455
 Basic Controls on page 455
Advanced Extensive and fully-featured routing control tools are available on the default software
Controls routing panels that appear in the Navigation pane. In most instances, these advanced
controls are the best tools to use for router control. For more information, see the following
topics:
 Grid and Bus Panel Operation on page 461

 Matrix Panel Operation on page 473
 Source Preview and Multi Display Page Operation on page 481
Basic A very basic control can be accessed in Control mode by double-clicking on the view.
Controls
The Router Control dialog box opens.
User Manual
Figure 24-1 Router Control Dialog Box
Control windows for routing views and NEO NSM router cards have a Router Control
dialog box that describe how to take the signals of a selected router source and direct these
signals to a selected router destination.
Categories and indexes used in the source and destination selection buttons are defined in
Navigator and are used to quickly access a source or destination in a large routing system.
Accessing the Router Control

To access the router control for a routing view, select the routing view in the navigational
tree and double-click or right-click and select Control in the menu.
Taking a Source to a Destination

To take a router source to a router destination in a Router Control window, complete these
steps:
1 In the Destination Selection section of the Router Control tab, click the browse (...)
button to the right of the Destination box to show the list of available router destinations.
Browse button
Figure 24-2 Destination Selection Section of Router Control Window

2 In the Source Selection section, click the button under the Breakaway label to toggle the
label to “Disabled.”
User Manual
Figure 24-3 Source Selection Section of Router Control Tab

3 Select a source from the sources list, and then click Take to send the take command to the
router.
The selected source LEDs update to show the status name of each selected source for each
level.
Doing a Breakaway Take

To do a breakaway take of router source levels to a router destination, complete these
steps:
1 In the Destination Selection section, select a destination from the list.

2 In the Source Selection section, click the toggle button under the Breakaway label to
change the button label to “Enabled.”
3 In the Set Individual Source section, select a source from each level that you want to be
part of the breakaway take.
4 Click Take to send the breakaway take command to the router; or click Clear to clear the
settings and reset them.
Taking a Disconnect Source

To take a disconnect source or breakaway disconnect source to a router destination,

2 In the Source Selection section, click the Browse button beside Source, and from the
Category menu, choose Disconnect.
Taking a Disconnect Breakaway Source

To take a disconnect source or breakaway disconnect source to a router destination,

2 In the Source Selection section, if the Breakaway button displays Disabled, click it so it
displays Enabled.
3 In the Set Individual Source section, select Disconnect s the source for each level that
you want to disconnect.
458
Locking and Protecting Router Destinations

You can lock or protect router destinations from the PC, so that others cannot use them
without permission.
Locking a Router Destination

Note: When a router destination is locked, you cannot send a different source to that
destination until the person who locked the router destination unlocks it.
To lock a router destination, complete these steps:

2 In the Write Protection section, click Lock so that the label “Lock On” appears.
Figure 24-4 Write Protection Section

The User Name updates to show the user name, and a padlock icon appears beside the
destination name.
Figure 24-5 Destination Selection Section
Unlocking a Router Destination

Note: When a router destination is locked, you cannot send a different source to the
destination until the user who locked the router destination unlocks it.
To unlock a router destination, complete these steps:

2 In the Write Protection section, click Lock so that the label “Lock Off” appears.

User Manual
Protecting a Router Destination

Note: Only the user who protected a router destination can unprotect it or send a different
router source to it.
To protect a router destination, complete these steps:

2 In the Write Protection section, click Protect so that the label “Protect On” appears.

The User Name updates to show the user name, and a shield icon shows beside the
destination name.
Figure 24-8 Destination Selection Section
Unprotecting a Router Destination

Note: Only the user who protects a router destination can unprotect it or send a different
router source to it.
To unprotect a router destination, complete these steps:

2 In the Write Protection section, Protect is a toggle control.
Click Protect so that the “Protect Off” label appears.
Platinum Control
Double-click a Platinum frame to open the Platinum-specific control window.
Double-click a component inside the Platinum frame to open a generic control window. A
generic control window allows you to adjust parameters and alarms just like a non-router
CCS device.
See the Platinum Wideband Digital Multirate Routing Switchers Frame and Modules
Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual for a complete list of parameters.
460
461
25 Grid and Bus Panel Operation
Grid and Bus Panel Operation Overview

Note: You must have a NAVIGATOR-SRV or NAVIGATOR-CLI license to use pages to monitor
and control devices.
The Grid, Single-Bus, Multi-Bus, and Multi-Bus with Salvo pages operate similarly. Available
functions include the following:
 Monitoring Signal Presence on page 461

 Performing Takes With a Grid or Bus Panel on page 462
 Crosspoint Restrictions on page 467
 Using Presets on page 468
 Using Salvos on page 468
 Locking and Protecting Destinations and Salvos on page 469
For a brief description of these various panels, see the following:
 Grid Panel on page 47

 Single-Bus Panel and Single-Bus Panel with Monitor on page 51
 Multi-Bus and Multi-Bus with Salvo Panels on page 50
For information on creating these panels, see Creating Grid, Single-Bus, Multi Bus and
Matrix Panels on page 56.
Monitoring Signal Presence

Grid and Bus panels can monitor signal presence. This feature is only available from routing
devices that support signal presence.
If a signal has been lost, this will be indicated on the panel by a Signal Lost icon.
Figure 25-1 Signal Lost Icon
With a Grid panel, if you click the Signal Presence icon, you can view a Status dialog box
that shows the status of the source signals.
462 Chapter 25
Grid and Bus Panel Operation
Figure 25-2 Grid Panel Status Dialog
Performing Takes With a Grid or Bus Panel

Depending on your panel, you may be able to perform different types of takes. See the
following topics:
 Takes with a Single-Bus Panel on page 462

 Takes With a Multi-Bus Panel on page 463
 Takes on a Grid Panel on page 465
Takes with a Single-Bus Panel

A single-bus panel can take an input to a single, pre-defined destination.
Optional buttons
Figure 25-3 Single-Bus Panel
Follow Take
A Follow Take takes all levels of an input to the Single-Bus panel’s one destination. To
perform a Follow Take, follow these steps:
1 Click the destination.

2 (Optional) If you have previously performed a breakaway switch, and your panel does not
reset to follow mode automatically, enable all Level buttons, by either right clicking on one
User Manual
of them and choosing Select All from the shortcut menu, or by pressing the Shift key on
your keyboard while clicking on each of them with a mouse. Each Level button should be
lit.
3 Click the desired Source button.
4 Click the Take button. The source will be switched on all levels simultaneously.
Performing a Breakaway switch

During panel creation, there is an option which asks Do you want to perform
breakaway take requests? If the answer to this question was Yes, then you can make
a switch on some levels, but not on others. If the answer is No, then you will not be able to
perform this operation.
Note: To unselect all Level buttons, you can right click on a Level button and choose
Unselect All from the shortcut menu that appears.
1 Click the button for the destination you want to take to.
If the desired destination is not visible on the screen, scroll through the list of available
destinations using the scroll bar immediately below the Destination buttons. The
destination name and icon will appear in each Status dialog box.
2 Click the Level button(s) corresponding to the level(s) that are to be switched
independently. To select multiple buttons, hold down the Shift key on your keyboard as you
click on each button with the mouse.
Only those buttons that have been enabled should be lit.
3 Click the desired Source.

4 Click Take. The source will be switched only on the selected breakaway level(s). Sources
connected on other levels will not be affected.
After a breakaway take, one of two things can happen, depending on settings that were
made during panel creation. If your answer to the question Do you want the panel to
automatically reset the level selection to follow mode? was Yes, then all levels
will automatically be selected the next time you perform a take. If you said No, the levels
that were selected for the previous take will continue to be selected. You can continue
switching using those levels, or you can manually select all the levels again to resume
normal AFV operation.
Takes With a Multi-Bus Panel

A multi-bus panel can take an input to multiple destinations. It can also have a salvo option.
For additional options when operating a Multi-Bus with Salvo panel, see Using Salvos on
page 468.
The following types of take are available with all Multi-Bus and Multi-Bus with Salvo panels:
 Performing an AFV switch on page 464

 Performing a Breakaway Switch on page 464
464 Chapter 25
 Performing a Multiple Take on page 465
Optional buttons
Figure 25-4 Multi-Bus Panel
Performing an AFV switch

An AFV switch stands for Audio Follows Video. In this type of take, all levels are taken.
1 Click the desired Destination button.

destination name and icon will appear in each status dialog box.
2 Enable all Level buttons, by either right clicking on one of them and choosing Select All
from the shortcut menu, or by pressing the Shift key on your keyboard while clicking on
each of them with a mouse. Each Level button should be lit.
Performing a Breakaway Switch

A breakaway switch only switches some inputs to the chosen destination.
User Manual

Performing a Multiple Take

The Multiple Take feature takes several destinations on selected levels to a single source.
Select as many destinations as you like by clicking on their buttons. Hold Shift as you click
and click the first and last destinations that you would like to choose in order to select a
range of destinations, or hold Ctrl as you click non-sequential destinations.
1 Select the source you want to take to.

2 Click Take.
Those destinations are all switched to the single source.
Takes on a A Grid panel has easy access to many destinations.

Grid Panel
Optional buttons
Figure 25-5 Grid Panel
Taking an AFV Switch

An AFV switch stands for Audio Follows Video. In this type of take, all levels are taken.
1 Click the button below the Destination you want to switch.

A menu opens, containing all the available inputs to that destination, and a Disconnect
option.
2 Choose your desired input.

466 Chapter 25
The button updates to display the input that is being taken to that destination. Your switch
takes effect immediately.
Breakaway Take
A breakaway switch only switches some inputs to the chosen destination.
3 Right click the Input field below the selected Destination.

4 From the shortcut menu that appears, choose the Input to switch to the Destination.
The levels that are selected on the grid below the destination fill with the input that was
switched to. Any levels that weren’t selected will not switch.
Switching a Single Level

2 Click in the cross-point between the destination and the level you want to switch.
3 From the shortcut menu that appears, choose the Input to switch to the Destination.
The level on that destination switches to that input. The grid updates accordingly.
Disconnecting a Destination
Disconnect takes are possible on Grid and Bus panels.
During panel creation, there is an option which asks Do you want to perform source
disconnect take? If the answer to this question was Yes, then you can disconnect the
destination from the current source without switching to another source. If the answer is
No, then if you want to disconnect from the selected source, you must select another
source and click Take.

User Manual
2 Select Disconnect.
Clearing a The Clear option is available on Bus panels only.

Selected
To clear a selected source without having to select another one, click Clear.
Source
Swapping When you swap destinations, you are switching the sources that are connected to two
Destinations destinations, so the source for destination A is changed to the one that was connected to
destination B, and vice versa.
1 Enable the two Destination buttons you want to swap by pressing the Ctrl key on your
keyboard while clicking on each of them with a mouse. Each Destination button you
want to swap should be lit.
2 Click the Swap button.
The two destinations now have traded their source inputs.
Crosspoint Restrictions
Crosspoint restrictions are available on Bus panels only.
Restricting a A restrict disallows you from selecting a particular source and a particular destination and
Crosspoint performing a take. This feature is only available from routing devices that support
crosspoint restrictions.

2 Click the appropriate source button. The source will be reflected in the Source status dialog
box, and the LEDs for that source will light to reflect the new connection. Click the scroll bar
located beneath the source buttons to view additional sources.
3 Click the Restrict button.
Now, when any panel tries to take this particular source to this particular destination, they
will not be allowed to do so.
A destination that is restricted for any source is indicated by a Restrict icon, as is a source
that is restricted for any destination.
Figure 25-6 Restrict Icon

468 Chapter 25
Unrestricting To remove a restriction between a particular source and destination, so you can perform
a Crosspoint takes between them, follow this procedure:

This crosspoint is available to all users.
Using Presets
You can use a preset to set up a source to quickly take to a destination, on Bus panels only.
Creating a Preset
3 Click the Preset button.
Taking a Preset
1 Click Preset on the Multi-Bus panel.
2 Click Take.
Using Salvos
Multi-Bus with Salvo panels have an extra set of buttons for pre-defined salvos. Salvos are
defined in the configuration file in Navigator.
A salvo is a predefined list of crosspoints that, when executed (take), occur simultaneously.
Salvos can be used to store commonly used complex router setups involving multiple
destinations for instant recall. For example, a salvo could be created that would send a test
signal to every monitor in an edit suite. Executing a salvo changes only the crosspoints
defined by that salvo. Other crosspoint connections in the system will not be affected.
To execute a salvo, follow these steps:
1 Click the Salvo(s) you want to execute.

User Manual
2 Click Take.
The salvo executes.
An active salvo is indicated by an Active Salvo icon.
Figure 25-7 Active Salvo Icon
Locking and Protecting Destinations and Salvos

You can lock and/or protect destinations and salvos on Grid, Single-Bus, or Multi-Bus panel
that include Lock and Protect buttons. To create a panel with Lock and Protect
buttons, see Selecting Routing Operations and Display Properties on page 62.
You can re-open a saved panel to add or remove a Lock or Protect button. See Using Panel
Information on page 67.
During panel creation, there is an option which asks Do you want the panel to
override lock and protect operations? If the answer to this question was Yes, then
the panel will always be able to unlock or unprotect the destination that has been locked or
protected by a different panel ID or by a different operator at another location. If the
answer is No, then locks will never be overridden by an operator at the panel, and protect
operations that are set by users at other access points to the router will not be overridden
by the panel.
Locking a Destination or Salvo

Note: Your panel must include a Lock button if you want to use this feature. See Selecting
Routing Operations and Display Properties on page 62.
Locking a destination prevents anyone from changing that Destination until it is unlocked. If
your panel has more than one destination, you can lock multiple destinations at the same
time by right clicking on one of them and choosing Select All from the shortcut menu, or
by pressing the Shift key on your keyboard while clicking on each of them with a mouse.
Locking a salvo prevents anyone from changing the salvo until it is unlocked.
To lock or protect a destination or salvo, follow these steps:
1 On the panel, click the destination(s) or salvo(s) you want to lock.

If the object you want to lock is not visible on the screen, scroll through the list of available
destinations or salvos using the scroll bar.
2 Click Lock. The selected items will be locked to all users.

They will be unavailable to everyone including the user who originally enabled the protect.
A salvo or destination that is locked is indicated by a Lock icon.

470 Chapter 25
Figure 25-8 Lock Icon
Unlocking a Salvo or Destination

Once a destination is locked, it must be unlocked if you want to switch its source again. If
your panel has more than one destination, you can unlock multiple destinations at the same
Once a salvo is locked, it must be unlocked to be executed again.
1 On the panel, click the destination(s) or salvo(s) you want to unlock.

2 Click Unlock. The destination or salvo will be unlocked to all users.
Protecting Destinations and Salvos

Note: Your panel must include a Protect button if you want to use this feature. See
Selecting Routing Operations and Display Properties on page 62.
The Protect feature prevents inadvertent changes to a destination or salvo, but differs from
a Lock in one respect. With the Protect feature enabled, the user who enabled the Protect
will be able to change the destination or salvo at will, but other users will not. The
protected salvo or destination will show up as a lock on their panel until the Protect is
removed or overridden.
If your panel has more than one salvo or destination, you can protect multiple items at the
same time by right clicking on one of them and choosing Select All from the shortcut
menu, or by pressing the Shift key on your keyboard while clicking on each of them with a
mouse.
1 Click the salvo(s) or destination(s) you want to protect.

2 Click Protect.
This salvo(s) or destination(s) will be unavailable to everyone except the user who originally
enabled the protect.
A destination that is protected is indicated by a Protect icon.
Figure 25-9 Protect Icon
Unprotecting Destinations and Salvos

User Manual
In order to make a protected destination or salvo available to other users, you must
unprotect it. If your panel has more than one salvo or destination, you can unprotect more
than one at the same time by right clicking on one of them and choosing Select All from
the shortcut menu, or by pressing the Shift key on your keyboard while clicking on each of
them with a mouse.
1 Click the salvo(s) or destination(s) you want to unprotect.

2 Click Unprotect.
The destination(s) or salvo(s) will become available to everyone.
A salvo that is protected is indicated by a Protect icon (Figure 25-9).

472 Chapter 25
473
26 Matrix Panel Operation
Using Matrix Panels Overview

Note: You must have a NAVIGATOR-SRV, NAVIGATOR-SNMP, or NAVIGATOR-CLI license to
use pages to monitor and control devices.
Matrix panels and Matrix Classic panels have the same basic features, the difference
between them being the position of the source and destination columns. On a Matrix panel,
the destination buttons are arrayed across the top of the panel and the source buttons are
along the right side. Conversely, on a Matrix Classic panel, source buttons are aligned across
the top of the panel and destination buttons appear along the right side.
For a brief description of Matrix panels, please see Matrix and Matrix Classic Panels on
page 48.
Optional
Buttons
Figure 26-1 Matrix Panel
See the following topics for things you can do on a Matrix or Matrix Classic Panel:
474 Chapter 26
Matrix Panel Operation
 Performing Takes with a Matrix Panel on page 474

 Locking and Protecting Destinations on page 475
 Disconnecting a Destination on page 478
 Clearing a Selected Source on page 478
 Swapping Destinations on page 478
 Using Salvos on page 478
Monitoring Signal Presence

If a signal has been lost, this will be indicated on the panel by a Signal Lost icon. THis
feature is only available from routing devices that support signal presence.
Figure 26-2 Signal Lost Icon
Performing Takes with a Matrix Panel

The Matrix panel can perform AFV (audio follows video) and breakaway takes.
Create a Preset using the Source and Destination Buttons

1 Click the desired destination(s) from the destination buttons. You can hold down Shift to
select multiple destinations.
If a desired destination is not visible on the screen, scroll through the list of available options
using the scroll bar adjacent to the buttons.
2 Click the desired Source from the source buttons.

If the desired source is not visible on the screen, scroll through the list of available options
using the scroll bar adjacent to the buttons.
Note: Depending on settings that were chosen during creation of the Matrix or Matrix
Classic panel, the level selection may revert to all levels, or it may contain the levels that
were chosen the previous time a preset was created. See Selecting Routing Operations
and Display Properties on page 62.
3 Enable the Level buttons for the levels you want to select, by either right clicking on one of
them and choosing Select All from the shortcut menu, or by pressing the Shift key on
your keyboard while clicking on each of them with a mouse. Selected Levels are lit.
4 Click Preset.
A circle appears at the point where the source and destination meet on the matrix grid. The
circle is divided into as many segments as there are levels available. Portions of the circle are
filled in depending on the levels that were chosen for the crosspoint.
Create a Preset using the Matrix Grid

Note: Depending on settings that were chosen during creation of the Matrix or Matrix
Classic panel, the level selection may revert to all levels, or it may contain the levels that
were chosen the previous time a preset was created. See Selecting Routing Operations
and Display Properties on page 62.
User Manual
1 Enable the Level buttons for the levels you want to select, by either right clicking on one of
them and choosing Select All from the shortcut menu, or by pressing the Shift key on
your keyboard while clicking on each of them with a mouse. Selected Levels are lit.
2 Click the intersection of the source and destination.
If the desired crosspoint is not visible on the screen, scroll through the list of available
options using the scroll bars adjacent to the source and destination buttons.
A circle appears at the point where the source and destination meet on the matrix grid. The
circle is divided into as many segments as there are levels available. Portions of the circle are
filled in depending on the levels that were chosen for the crosspoint.
Performing a Switch
1 Create as many presets as you like. See Create a Preset using the Source and
Destination Buttons on page 474 and Create a Preset using the Matrix Grid on
page 474. You can only have one preset per destination, but can have the same source to
as many times as you want.
2 Click Take.
All destinations are taken to their sources simultaneously.
Locking and Protecting Destinations

Your Matrix panel must include Lock and Protect buttons if you want to use these
features. To create a panel with Lock and Protect buttons, see Selecting Sources on
page 61.
You can re-open a saved Matrix panel to add or remove a Lock or Protect button. See
Editing a Router Control Panel on a Navigator Page on page 66.
the Matrix panel will always be able to unlock or unprotect the destination that has been
locked or protected by a different panel ID or by a different operator at another location. If
the answer is No, then locks will never be overridden by an operator at the Matrix panel,
and protect operations that are set by users at other access points to the router will not be
overridden by the Matrix panel.
Also during panel creation the panel Id was defined. This ID is used with locks, protects,
takes, and restricts to determine the appropriate access.
Locking Destinations
Locking a destination prevents anyone from changing the Destination until it is unlocked.
You may lock multiple destinations at the same time by right clicking on one of them and
choosing Select All from the shortcut menu, or by pressing the Shift key on your
keyboard while clicking on each of them with a mouse.
1 On the Matrix panel, click the destination(s) you want to lock.

476 Chapter 26
2 Click Lock. The destination(s) will be locked to all users.

This destination(s) will be unavailable to everyone including the person who originally
enabled the protect.
A destination that is locked is indicated by a Lock icon.
Unlocking Destinations
Once a destination is locked, it must be unlocked if you want to switch its source again. You
may unlock multiple destinations at the same time by right clicking on one of them and
1 On the Matrix panel, click the destination(s) you want to unlock.

2 Click Unlock. The Destination will be unlocked to all users.

This destination(s) will now be available to everyone.
Protecting Destinations
The Protect feature prevents inadvertent changes to the Destination, but differs from a Lock
in one respect. With the Protect feature enabled, the user who enabled the Protect will be
able to change the destination at will, but other users will be prevented from changing that
destination until the Protect is removed. You may protect multiple destinations at the same
1 Click the destination(s) you want to protect.

2 Click Protect.
This destination(s) will be unavailable to everyone except the person who originally enabled
the protect.
User Manual
Unprotecting Destinations
In order to make a protected destination available to other users, you must unprotect it. You
may unprotect multiple destinations at the same time by right clicking on one of them and
1 Click the destination(s) you want to unprotect.

2 Click Unprotect.
The destination(s) will become available to everyone.
Restricting a Crosspoint
A restrict disallows you from selecting a particular source and a particular destination and
performing a take.
1 Create a preset. See Create a Preset using the Source and Destination Buttons on
page 474 and Create a Preset using the Matrix Grid on page 474.
Now, when any panel tries to take this particular source to this particular destination, they
will not be allowed to do so.
A destination that is restricted is indicated by a Restrict icon. This feature is only available
from routing devices that support crosspoint restrictions.
Figure 26-5 Restrict Icon
Unrestricting a Crosspoint
To remove a restriction between a particular source and destination, so you can perform
takes between them.
1 Create a preset.
Now, this crosspoint is available to all users.
478 Chapter 26
Disconnecting a Destination
During panel creation, there is an option which asks Do you want to perform source
disconnect take? If the answer to this question was Yes, then you can disconnect the
destination from the current source without switching to another source. If the answer is
No, then if you want to disconnect from the selected source, you must select another
source and click Take.

2 Select Disconnect.
Clearing a Selected Source

To clear a selected source without having to select another one, click Clear.
Swapping Destinations
When you swap destinations, you switch the sources that are connected to those two
destinations, so the source for destination A is changed to the one that was connected to
destination B, and vice versa.
1 Enable the two Destination buttons you want to swap by pressing the Shift key on your
keyboard while clicking on each of them with a mouse. Each Destination button you want
to swap should be lit.
2 Click the Swap button.
The two destinations now have traded their source inputs.
Using Matrix panels have an extra set of buttons along the bottom of the dialog box. These
buttons are for pre-defined salvos.
Salvos
A salvo is a predefined list of crosspoint operations that, when executed, occur
simultaneously. Salvos can be used to s tore commonly used complex router setups
involving multiple destinations for instant recall. For example, a salvo could be created that
would send a test signal to every monitor in an edit suite. Executing a salvo changes only
the crosspoints defined by that salvo. Other crosspoint connections in the system will not be
affected.
Executing a Salvo
1 Click the Salvo you want to execute.
2 Click Take.
The salvo executes.
An active salvo is indicated by an Active Salvo icon.

User Manual
Figure 26-6 Active Salvo Icon
Locking and Protecting a Salvo

Your Single-Bus panel must include Lock and Protect buttons if you want to use these
features. To create a panel with Lock and Protect buttons, see Selecting Sources on
page 61.
You can re-open a saved Single-Bus panel to add or remove a Lock or Protect button. See
Editing a Router Control Panel on a Navigator Page on page 66.
the Matrix panel will always be able to unlock or unprotect salvos that have been locked or
protected by a different panel ID or by a different operator at another location. If the
answer is No, then locks will never be overridden by an operator at the Matrix panel, and
protect operations that are set by users at other access points to the router will not be
overridden by the Matrix panel.
Locking a Salvo
Locking a salvo prevents anyone from changing the salvo until it is unlocked.
1 On the Single-Bus panel, click the salvo.

2 Click Lock. The salvo will be locked to all users.
This salvo will be unavailable to everyone including the person who originally enabled the
protect.
A salvo that is locked is indicated by a Lock icon.
Unlocking a Salvo
Once a salvo is locked, it must be locked if you want to switch its source again.
1 On the Single-Bus panel, click the salvo.

2 Click Unlock. The salvo will be unlocked to all users.
This salvo will now be available to everyone.
480 Chapter 26
Protecting Salvos
The Protect feature prevents inadvertent changes to salvos, but differs from a Lock in one
respect. With the Protect feature enabled, the user who enabled the Protect will be able to
change the salvo at will, but other users will be prevented from changing that salvo until
the Protect is removed. You may protect multiple salvos at the same time by right clicking
on one of them and choosing Select All from the shortcut menu, or by pressing the Shift
key on your keyboard while clicking on each of them with a mouse.
1 Click the salvo.

2 Click Protect.
This salvo will be unavailable to everyone except the person who originally enabled the
protect.
A salvo that is protected is indicated by a Protect icon.
Unprotecting Salvos
In order to make a protected salvo available to other users, you must unprotect it.
1 Click the salvo.

2 Click Unprotect.
The salvo will become available to everyone.
481
27 Source Preview and Multi

Display Page Operation
Source Preview and Multi Display Page Operation Overview

Note: You must have a NAVIGATOR-SRV, NAVIGATOR-SNMP, or NAVIGATOR-CLI license to
use pages to monitor and control devices.
The key differences between Source Preview and Multi Display panels are that the Source
Preview panel has a Signal Monitor dialog box on it, while the Multi Display panel does
not, and the Source Preview is limited to four destinations, while the Multi Display panel can
have up to sixteen. Also, the Multi Display panel can connect one source to various
destinations at the same time.
For descriptions of the panels, see:
 Source Preview Panel on page 46

 Multi Display Panel on page 46
For instructions on creating these panels, see Creating a Multi Display or Source Preview
Router Page on page 53.
Performing Takes
Note: The Multi-Display panel uses the master destination (highlighted in green) to
determine which Source button to highlight as the current source. The panel ignores
breakaways - only takes that exactly match the source button on all levels that the source
uses will be indicated.
Example: the routing system uses a 32x32 Integrator, configured into two 16x16 levels, plus
a 16x2 Panacea router for a third level. Destinations 1 and 2 will each have three levels, but
Destinations 3 through 16 will have only two levels (the Integrator). If the operator uses
Destination 3 as the master destination, then all router status messages will only report back
status on two levels. The third level will not report back. The take will then be considered a
breakaway, and the Source button status will not change.
Your Source Preview or Multi Display panel must include a Take button if you want to use
this feature. To create a panel with a Take button, see Selecting Sources on page 54.
482 Chapter 27
Source Preview and Multi Display Page Operation
In Build mode, you can also edit the Source Preview or Multi Display panel. Adding a Take
button would involve first creating a button. The button would also need rules applied to it,
normally an On Mouse Click event. Associated actions would include setting properties for
a ‘Take Crosspoint’ action
1 Click the panel’s destination button (it will be labeled Destination X where X represents the
number of the destination).
The button will become highlighted.
2 Click the appropriate source button (it will be labeled Source X where X represents the
number of the source). The Source button will become highlighted.
3 Click Take. The source will be switched on all levels simultaneously.
Locking and Protecting Destinations

Your Source Preview or Multi Display panel must include Lock and Protect buttons if you
want to use these features. To create a panel with Lock and Protect buttons, see Selecting
Sources on page 54.
In Build mode, you can also edit the Source Preview or Multi Display panel. Adding a Lock
or Protect button would involve first creating a button. The button would also need rules
applied to it, normally an On Mouse Click event. Associated actions would include setting
properties for a ‘Lock Selected Destination’ action.
Locking a Destination
Note: Your panel must include a Lock button if you want to use this feature. See Locking
and Protecting Destinations on page 482.
Locking a destination prevents inadvertent changes to that destination.
You can lock a single destination at a time on a Source Preview panel. You can lock multiple
destinations on the Multi Display panel.
1 On the Source Preview or Multi Display panel, click the destination(s) you want to lock.
2 Click Lock. The destination(s) will be locked to all users.
This destination will be unavailable to everyone including the person who originally enabled
the protect.
A destination that is locked is indicated by a Lock icon.
Unlocking a Destination
You can unlock a single destination at a time on a Source Preview panel. You can unlock
multiple destinations on the Multi Display panel.
User Manual
Note: Your panel must include a Lock button if you want to use this feature. See Locking
and Protecting Destinations on page 482.
1 On the Source Preview or Multi Display panel, click the destination(s) you want to unlock.
2 Click Unlock. The Destination(s) will be unlocked to all users.
This destination will now be available to everyone.
Protecting Destinations
Locking and Protecting Destinations on page 482.
The Protect feature prevents inadvertent changes to the Destination, but differs from a Lock
in one respect. With the Protect feature enabled, the user who enabled the Protect will be
able to change the destination at will, but other users will be prevented from changing that
destination until the Protect is removed.
You can protect a single destination at a time on a Source Preview panel. You can protect
multiple destinations on the Multi Display panel.
1 On the Source Preview or Multi Display panel, click the destination(s) you want to protect.
2 Click Protect.
This destination will be unavailable to everyone except the person who originally enabled
the protect.
Unprotecting Destinations
You can unprotect a single destination at a time on a Source Preview panel. You can
unprotect multiple destinations on the Multi Display panel.
Locking and Protecting Destinations on page 482.
1 On the Source Preview or Multi Display panel, click the destination(s) you want to
unprotect.
2 Click Unprotect.
The destination will become available to everyone.
Clearing a Your Source Preview or Multi Display panel must include a Clear button if you want to use
Selected this feature. To create a panel with a Clear button, see Selecting Sources on page 54.
Source In Build mode, you can also edit the Source Preview or Multi Display panel. Adding a Clear
button would involve first creating a button. The button would also need rules applied to it,
normally an On Mouse Click event. Associated actions would include setting properties for
a ‘Clear Selected’ action.
484 Chapter 27
Source Preview and Multi Display Page Operation
To clear a selected source without having to select another one, click Clear. If there is a
destination selected, it is unselected as well.
Using a Source Preview Panel

The Source Preview panel makes up for its lack of destinations with a preview monitor on
the screen. In order to use the preview monitor, you must have a DirectX-compatible video
card. For more information, see “Required Hardware” in Magellan CCS Navigator:
Advanced Graphical Navigation Application.
485
28 Matrix Partitioning
Matrix Partitioning Overview

Matrix partitioning allows you to divide a frame’s matrices into smaller switching units called
components. This capability may be used in configurations where RGB signals are to be
switched (for example., the matrix is split into three separate components – one for red, one
for green, and one for blue), or in configurations where both component and composite
signals are to be switched within the same frame. Matrix partitioning allows each
component to appear to the control system as a different level.
Each component in a matrix has a level configuration, a first source, and a first destination.
Any physical input or output can be assigned to any component.
Instructions for selecting the different types of matrix partitioning are found in the chapters
related to the router being configured.
Matrix Partitioning Types

The following partitioning types are available:
 No Partitioning (With Advanced Settings) on page 485

 RGB/Stereo Partitioning (Advanced) on page 487
 Contiguous Partitioning (With Advanced Settings) on page 488
 Shared Inputs (With Advanced Settings) on page 489
 Mono Breakaway (With Advanced Settings) on page 490
 Stereo Breakaway (With Advanced Settings) on page 490
No Partitioning (With Advanced Settings)

Choose this option if you do not want a different partition type. To choose this option, select
None from the Partition Type drop-down list box. Only one partition is available with this
option, so the # of Partitions box is greyed out.
None partition type.
486 Chapter 28
Matrix Partitioning
 Select Physical Map Order.

The Physical Map Order dialog box opens.
Figure 28-1 Partitioning Tab Set to None
 Navigator assigns the new number to your chosen component, and then assigns the
original number from your chosen component to the component to which the physical
number was originally assigned.
Under the matrix partition information display are the Physical Input View and Physical
Output View tabs. The information displayed on these tabs provides a graphic
representation of how your selected input and output partitions look. Choose the
appropriate tab to view either the resulting input or output partitioning.
User Manual
RGB/Stereo Partitioning (Advanced)
Platinum Routers Panacea and Integrator Routers
Figure 28-2 RGB/Stereo Partitioning Tab Examples
Selecting RGB/Stereo partitioning divides a matrix into components of equal size. This
configuration allows a user to connect the RGB outputs from a component device to the
first three physical inputs on the router, and the RGB outputs of a second component device
to physical inputs four, five and six. Each group of three inputs appears to the control
system as a single input, and is switched simultaneously.
When you select RGB/Stereo, Navigator automatically assigns all physical inputs and
outputs of the matrix to appropriate components. For example, if 3 components are
selected, physical input 1 is assigned to the first red, physical input 2 to the first green,
physical input 3 to the first blue, physical input 4 to the second red, physical input 5 to the
second green, and so forth
488 Chapter 28
Matrix Partitioning
Contiguous Partitioning (With Advanced Settings)
Figure 28-3 Contiguous Partitioning Tab Examples
Selecting Contiguous Partitioning divides a matrix into blocks of sources and destinations.
When Contiguous partitioning is selected, Navigator automatically assigns blocks of physical
inputs and outputs of the matrix to the appropriate components. For example, if three
components are selected for a 32×32 matrix, physical inputs 1-10 is assigned to the first
component, physical inputs 11-20 to the second component, and physical inputs 21-30 to
the third component.
User Manual
Wild Partitioning
Figure 28-4 Wild Partitioning Tab Examples
In configurations where maximum flexibility is required, matrices can be partitioned to allow

wild mapping of physical inputs and outputs. Selecting Wild Partitioning allows any input or
output to be assigned to any component.
Shared Inputs (With Advanced Settings)

This partitioning option is available for Platinum routers only.
Figure 28-5 Shared Inputs Tab Example

490 Chapter 28
Matrix Partitioning
Selecting shared inputs divides a matrix into blocks of sources and destinations. When
Contiguous partitioning is selected, Navigator automatically assigns blocks of physical
inputs and outputs of the matrix to the appropriate components. For example, if three
components are selected for a 32×32 matrix, physical inputs 1-10 is assigned to the first
component, physical inputs 11-20 to the second component, and physical inputs 21-30 to
the third component. This option differs from Contiguous partitioning in that input blocks
can overlap, whereas in Contiguous partitioning the input blocks cannot overlap.
To enable this method, select Shared Inputs from the Partition Type drop-down list box.
Mono Breakaway (With Advanced Settings)

Figure 28-6 Mono Breakaway Partitioning
Selecting Mono Breakaway partitioning combines the features of RGB/Stereo partitioning

and Wild partitioning. With Mono Breakaway, in the default setup of the matrix all inputs
are shared. Outputs are sorted into components of equal size. Any input or output can be
assigned to any component.
To enable this method, select Mono Breakaway from the Partition Type drop-down list box.
Stereo Breakaway (With Advanced Settings)

User Manual
Figure 28-7 Stereo Breakaway Partitioning
Selecting Stereo Breakaway partitioning divides a matrix into components of equal size (that
is, RGB) and allow any input, output, or channel to be assigned to any component, or to
more than one component at the same time. This option is particularly useful for setting up
audio channels1 in TDM applications where you want to breakaway channels or always
move them together.
To enable this method, select Stereo Breakaway from the Partition Type drop-down list box.
1 Each AES signal consists of two audio channels. For example, in stereo pairs,
“left” is one channel and “right” is one channel.

492 Chapter 28
Matrix Partitioning
493
B Configuring Control Panel

Buttons
Control Panel Button Configuration Overview

Use the Edit Button Function dialog box1 to assign functions to user-definable selection
keys on the ABA and RCPp control panels.
The Edit Button Function dialog includes a drop-down list box that is used to select the
function of the selection key, and a Properties group that is used to define the specific
parameters of the button. The appearance of the Properties group depends on the type
of button selected in the drop-down list box. The functions available in the drop-down list
depends on the type of panel being edited.
To assign a button function, follow these steps:
1 If you have not done so already, set up a control panel.

2 In the Navigator pane, double-click the control panel name.
The Edit Panel dialog box opens.
3 Click on the tab (for example, Sources, Destinations, Auxiliary Keys) that contains the
buttons for which you want to assign functions.
4 Right-click on the specific button for which you want to assign a function.
The Edit Button Function dialog box (Figure B-1 on page 494) appears.
5 Select the button properties from the options available in the Properties group.
6 Click Done to return to the Edit Panel window.
1 You can access the Edit Button Function dialog box by right-clicking
on any button at the Edit Panel dialog box.
494 Appendix B
Configuring Control Panel Buttons
Figure B-1 Edit Button Function Dialog Box

7 Select the function from the drop-down list box.
The Properties group on the Edit Button Function dialog box change when the
selection is made. Possible button functions are shown in Table B-1.
Table B-1 Programmable Button Functions

Control Panels
(• = available)
RCP-16×1SBAp
RCP-12×2BAp
Button Functions RCP-ABA
RCPp
Alarm (page 509) — Monitors specified hardware alarms • • •

Breakaway-Follow (page 508) — Functions as either breakaway or follow button • • •
Category (page 498) — Functions as additional category/index key •
Chop (page 521) — Allows two sources to be rapidly switched on one destination, at a
predetermined or custom rate (RCP-ABAe and RCPp-LCD panels only)
• •
Command (page 501) — Functions as a command key • • • •
Crosspoint (page 497) — Functions as a crosspoint select key • •
Destination (page 496) — Functions as additional destination select key • • •
Destination Alarm (page 515) — Allows use of a push button panel to select logical
destination(s) for logical crosspoint switch(es); provides capability to monitor specified • • •
hardware alarms
Function Button (page 503) — Functions as a function button • • • •
Locks (page 506) — Prevents all users from changing the destination
(Dual 32×1, 16×1, 8×1, 5×1, and 4×1 RCPp panels do not support this feature.)
• • • •
None — Disabled • • • •
User Manual
Table B-1 Programmable Button Functions (Continued)

Control Panels
(• = available)
RCP-16×1SBAp
RCP-12×2BAp
RCP-ABA
Button Functions
RCPp
On-Air Swap (page 522) — Exchanges sources on one destination with sources on
another destination
•
Page (page 505) — Functions as a page key •
Panel Status (page 504) — Functions as a panel status key • •
Parametric (page 517) — Allows selection of individual parameters affecting inputs
and outputs (currently available for P-R(L)CP-32×8CQp panels only)
•
Protects (page 507) — Prevents all users from changing the destination except the
user who initiated the Protect • • • •
(Dual 32×1, 16×1, 8×1, 5×1, and 4×1 RCPp panels do not support this feature.)
Salvo (page 499) — Functions as a salvo select key • • • •
Source (page 495) — Functions as an additional source select key • •
Source Alarm Select (page 514) — Allows use of a push button panel to select
logical source(s) for logical crosspoint switch(es); provides capability to monitor specified • • •
hardware alarms
Creating a Source Select Key

1 Select the Source option from the Edit Button Function drop-down list box.
The Edit Button Function dialog box opens as shown in Figure B-2.
2 Click the arrow located to the right of the source box to select the source to associate with
the key.
3 Scroll through the list, and then select the desired source.
4 Click Done.
496 Appendix B
Figure B-2 Creating an Additional Source Select Key

On RCPp series panels, you also have an option to select Status-Only or Joystick Override
(these options are disabled on RCP-ABA series panels).
Use a Status-Only Source Select key to create a monitoring panel that is intended to display,
but not control, the status of a router. If Status Only is checked, the button lights when the
source is active, but the router is not affected if you press the button.
Check the Joystick Override option to make temporary changes. While you hold down the
button, the source is switched. When you release the button, the router switches back to
the previous source.
Creating a Destination Select Key

If this is the only change or the last change to be made to the panel, you can download the
new settings by clicking Download on the Edit Panel screen. To print new key caps, click
Print Key Caps.
1 Select the Destination option from the Edit Button Function drop-down list box.
User Manual
Figure B-3 Creating an Additional Destination Select Key

2 Click the arrow located to the right of the destination box to select the destination to
associate with the key.
3 Scroll through the drop-down list, and then select the desired destination.
4 Click Done.
Creating a Crosspoint Select Key

A crosspoint is a connection between a specific source and a specific destination. Whenever
a crosspoint key is pressed on an ABA panel, the associated source and destination are
connected.
1 Select the Crosspoint option from the Edit Button Function drop-down list box.
Figure B-4 Creating an Additional Crosspoint Select Key

498 Appendix B
2 Click the arrow located to the right of the destination box to select the crosspoint
destination.
3 Scroll through the list, and then select the desired destination.
4 Click the arrow located to the right of the source box to select the crosspoint source.
5 Scroll through the list, and then select the desired source.
6 Click Done.
On RCPp series panels, you also have an option to select Status-Only or Joystick
Override (these options are disabled on RCP-ABA series panels).
Use a Status-Only Crosspoint Select key to create a monitoring panel that is

intended to display the status of a router, but not control it. If Status Only is checked, the
button lights when the crosspoint is active, but the router is not affected if you press the
button.
Check the Joystick Override option to make temporary changes. While you hold down
the button, the crosspoint is switched. When you release the button, the router switches
back to the previous crosspoint.
Creating a Category/Index Key (ABA Series Panels Only)

For more detailed information on category indexing, see Creating and Managing
Categories on page 139.
1 Select the Category option from the Edit Button Function drop-down list box.
Figure B-5 Creating an Additional Category/index Key

2 Click the arrow located to the right of the Select Category box to select the category to
associate with the key.
3 Scroll through the list, and then select the desired category.
4 Click the arrow located to the right of the Select Index box to select the index to be
associated with the key.
User Manual
5 Scroll through the list, and then select the desired index.
6 Click Done.
Creating a Salvo Select Key

A salvo is a predefined list of crosspoint operations that occur simultaneously. Salvos can be
used to store commonly used, complex router setups involving multiple destinations for
instant recall with one button press. A salvo could be created, for example, that would send
a test signal to every monitor in an Edit Suite. Executing a salvo changes only the
crosspoints defined by the salvo. Other crosspoint connections in the system are not
affected.
1 Select the Salvo option from the Edit Button Function drop-down list box.
Figure B-6 Creating a Salvo Select Key

2 Click the arrow located to the right of the Select Salvo box to select the salvo to be
associated with the key.
3 Scroll through the drop-down list, and then select the desired salvo.
4 Click Done.
In newer version control panels, the salvo button lights up (tally) whenever the crosspoints
that are part of the salvo are initiated, no matter where the crosspoint Take occurs.
If any of the salvo’s crosspoints change status, the salvo button light turns off. For more
information about control panels, see the Programmable Panel Series Configuration and
Operation Manual.
Adding or When creating a Salvo Select key, new salvos may be added and existing salvos may be
Editing a edited from the Edit Button Function dialog.
Salvo  To add a new salvo, click Add.
 To edit an existing salvo, click Edit.
500 Appendix B
The Salvo Editor window opens (see Figure 1-7 on page 23 for an example of this
window).
The Salvo Editor is an off-line matrix panel. The sources and destinations in the database are
displayed as a row of control buttons along the top and right sides of the panel (sources on
the top, and destinations on the side). Each control button includes the source or
destination name and icon, although names and icons may not be readable in full-screen
view. For greater legibility, any portion of the panel may be enlarged using the Zoom-In
button.
Crosspoints on the panel are indicated via colored markers at the intersection of the source
and destination lines. The markers are displayed as pie-shaped wedges that correspond to
the level colors (for information on assigning level colors, see page 133). For example:
 If a video level is assigned the color blue, a blue marker at the intersection of a source
and destination line indicates that the source is connected to the destination on the
video level.
 If more than one colored marker is present at an intersection, the source is connected
on each level displayed.
 If a source is selected on all levels in the system (AFV switching), the marker appears as
a multicolored circle, consisting of all colors of the active levels.
Selecting a Crosspoint on the Salvo Editor Screen

1 Select the level(s) on which the source should be connected by clicking on the appropriate
level buttons (the level buttons are located at the top of the window). If a button is colored,
the level is enabled and the source is connected on that level.
2 Click the intersection of the source and destination lines.
A colored marker appear.
A salvo may be defined in one of several ways. The Capture option takes a “snapshot” view
of the current state of the router and stores it as a salvo. This salvo can then be edited
(crosspoints added or deleted) as needed.
A salvo may also be created by copying an existing salvo. The copied salvo may serve as a
starting point for the definition of the new salvo. Crosspoints can be added or deleted as
necessary.
A salvo may also be created “from scratch” by selecting the crosspoints (the sources and
destinations) on the off-line Salvo Editor panel.
Capturing the Existing State of the Router

1 Assign an appropriate name to the new salvo by highlighting the default name contained in
the Name Edit box and typing a new name in the box.
2 Click Capture at the Salvo Editor dialog box.
The current router crosspoint assignments are copied to the off-line Salvo Editor panel.
3 Edit the salvo displayed on the off-line panel by adding or deleting crosspoint assignments
as necessary.
4 Click Done to exit the Salvo Editor.
User Manual
Adding a Crosspoint to a Salvo

Click at the intersection of the source and destination lines.
The crosspoint is added to the salvo.
Deleting a Crosspoint from a Salvo

1 Position the cursor over the crosspoint to be deleted and click the right mouse button.
The Lock/Protect/Clear shortcut menu opens.
2 Select Clear at the Salvo Editor dialog box to delete the crosspoint.
Select Clear All at the Salvo Editor dialog box to clear all crosspoints.
Copying an Existing Salvo

1 Click Copy at the Salvo Editor dialog box.
The Copy Salvo dialog box opens.
2 In the Copy Salvo From box, select the salvo to be copied to the new salvo. The new
salvo name is already be displayed in the Copy To box.
 Click Overwrite to completely overwrite any crosspoints previously selected in the
new salvo. Any previously existing crosspoints are deleted from the new salvo.
 Click Merge to merge the two salvos. Existing crosspoints from both salvos are
stored in the new salvo. No crosspoints are deleted.
Figure B-7 Copying a Salvo
Creating a Command Select Key

The Command Select key allows you to assign an arbitrary X-Y command to a panel’s
key. For details on X-Y commands, refer to your Imagine Communications Serial Protocol
Reference, or contact Customer Service.
1 Select the Command option from the Edit Button Function drop-down list box.
502 Appendix B
Figure B-8 Creating a Command Select Key

2 Select the command to be associated with the key by clicking on the arrow located to the
right of the Select Command box.
3 Scroll through the drop-down list, and then select the desired command.
4 Click Done.
Adding Commands
1 Click Add Command.
A default name appears in the Edit Name box.
2 Type over the default name in the Edit Name box with a new name.
3 Select the type of command string you wish to use (ASCII or Hex) by clicking on the
appropriate radio button.
4 Enter the command string in the Edit Command box.
Editing Commands
1 Select the command by clicking on the drop-down arrow located to the right of the Select
Command box.
2 Scroll through the list of choices, and then select the command to be edited.
3 Highlight the name and/or command string and type over with the new information.
Deleting
Commands
1 Select the command by clicking on the drop-down arrow located to the right of the Select
Command box.
2 Scroll through the list of choices, and then select the command to be deleted.
3 Click Delete.
User Manual
Creating a Function Key

In the RCP-IDe and RCP-12×2BAp panels, several radio button selections are “greyed” to
indicate that they are not available as an option.
1 Select the Function option from the Edit Button Function drop-down list box.
Figure B-9 Creating a Function Key

2 Select the function to be associated with the key by clicking on the appropriate radio
button. Available options are shown in Table B-2 on page 504.
504 Appendix B
Table B-2 Edit Button Function Key Options

Option Description
Take Executes any preset crosspoint assignments
Panel Enable When enabled, causes the panel to function normally; when
disabled, source polls are performed, but no crosspoint changes
are made
Shift Requires you to press the <Shift> key to fire a salvo (to prevent
inadvertent execution of salvos)
Clear All Clears all preset crosspoint assignments
Back Space Clears the last preset crosspoint assignment entered (not available
on RCP-12×2BAp)
Scroll Up Increments the source by one
Scroll Down Decrements the source by one
Window Select* Allows you to select which panel window (display) you want to
preset
Window Clear * Allows you to clear any presets from a panel window (display)
Page Up† Increments set-up button pages by one
†
Page Down Decrements set-up button pages by one
Destination Status† Displays the status and bitmap of a particular destination
†
Source Status Displays the status and bitmap of the lowest level source
connected to a particular destination
* ABA panels only
†
RCP-IDe panels only
Creating a Panel Status Key

A Panel Status key is used to indicate whether the control panel is connected to a
routing switcher. With a Panel Status key configured, the router system is polled periodically
to determine if the panel is connected. If the key on the control panel is lit, the panel is
connected to a router. If the key is not lit, the panel is not connected to a router. Pressing a
Panel Status key has no effect on the router.
1 Select the Panel Status option from the Edit Button Function drop-down list box.
User Manual
Figure B-10 Creating a Panel Status Key
Polling the system uses bandwidth, so the time interval should be as long as possible to save
bandwidth for other operations such as firing salvos.
2 In the Poll Interval list box, select the time interval in seconds at which the system should
be polled. (For example, if “5” is selected, the router is polled every 5 seconds.)
3 Click Done.
Creating a Page Key (ABA Series Panels Only)

Although ABA panels have only four display windows and can status a limited number of
levels at one time, it is possible to create multiple pages, each with a different definition. For
example, one page on an ABA-XY panel might be configured to display the video, audio
and time code levels separately (one in each window); a second page could be configured
to display the video in one window, the left and right channels of audio in one window, and
the time code in the third window. To create multiple pages, first create a Page key.
You can also create Page keys by double-clicking on any selection button displayed on the
control panel bitmap on the Windows + Paging tab.
1 Select the Page option from the Edit Button Function drop-down list box.
506 Appendix B
Figure B-11 Creating a Page Key

2 Click the up or down buttons to the right of the Number of Pages box to select the
number of pages to be included on this panel.
3 Click the drop-down arrow located to the right of the Page Number box to select the
page number that is to be associated with this selection key.
4 Scroll through the list of choices and select the appropriate page number.
Creating a Lock Key

Dual 32×1, 16×1, 8×1, 5×1, and 4×1 RCPp panels do not support the Lock feature.
The Locks option allows a Destination to be locked to prevent inadvertent changes to the
Destination. Locking a destination prevents anyone from changing the Destination.
1 Select the Locks option from the Edit Button Function drop-down list box.
User Manual
Figure B-12 Creating a Lock Key

2 Click the appropriate Properties – Destination Function radio button (any features
not applicable to your panel is greyed out).
 Choose XY to allow a panel to lock the current selected destination.
 Choose Dual to allow a panel to lock up to two specified destinations.
Creating a Protect Key

Dual 32×1, 16×1, 8×1, 5×1, and 4×1 RCPp panels do not support the Protect feature.
The Protects option allows a Destination to be locked to prevent inadvertent changes to

the Destination. With the Protects feature enabled, whoever enabled the Protect can
change the destination at will, but other users are prevented from changing that
destination until the Protect is removed.
1 Select the Protects option from the Edit Button Function drop-down list box.
508 Appendix B
Figure B-13 Creating a Protect Key

2 Click the appropriate Properties – Destination Function radio button (any features
not applicable to a panel are greyed out).
 Choose XY to allow a panel to protect the current selected destination.
 Choose Dual to allow a panel to protect up to two specified destinations.
Creating a Breakaway/Follow Key

The Breakaway/Follow option defines a selection key to function as either a Breakaway
or a Follow key.
 A Breakaway key allows the operator at a push-button panel to select only the
levels assigned to the button. For example, if a video breakaway button is pressed,
and then a source is selected, the source are connected to the current destination,
but only on the video level. The audio level are unaffected.
 A Follow key allows the operator to return the panel to AFV mode with a single
key press.
1 Select the Break-away/Follow option from the Edit Button Function drop-down list
box.
User Manual
Figure B-14 Creating a Breakaway/Follow Key

2 Click the appropriate radio button to select either Breakaway or Follow.
3 For a breakaway button, also select the levels that are controlled by the button.
The lowest level is statused.
Creating an Alarm Key (RCP Panels, RCP-IDe, RCP-32x8CQp, 16x2CS,

and 32x2CS Panels Only)
The Alarm option allows you to monitor specified hardware alarms.
1 Select the Alarm option from the Edit Button Function drop-down list box.
Figure B-15 Creating an Alarm Key

2 In the Edit Name box, type over the default name with a new name.
510 Appendix B
3 Click Configure....
The Edit Source Alarm list box opens to allow you to define an alarm definition for the
new alarm key. (See Using the Alarm Editor for more information about using this
function.)
4 After the Alarm Editor list box returns you to the Edit Button Function list box, click
OK to accept all changes and additions.
Using the
Alarm Editor
Figure B-16 Edit Source Alarm List Box
The Edit Source Alarm list box shows the alarm type(s) for an associated alarm key. That
alarm key is monitored by the pushbutton panel.
The list box also displays the following types of information about existing items:
 Device ID
 Device type
 Level
 Alarm type
 Alarm description
Adding At the Edit Source Alarm list box, click Add....

Alarm Types
The Add Alarm Entry dialog box opens. (The Add Alarm Entry dialog box defaults to
a “General” detection style.)
 Use the “General” default detection style (Figure B-17) for all panels (except ABA
panels) when you want to monitor alarms for an entire frame.
 Use the “Extended” detection style (see Figure B-18 on page 512) when you want
to monitor alarms for a specific module’s behavior.
The “Extended” detection style currently works only with Panacea or Integrator Gold
modules.
User Manual
Using the General Detection Style
Figure B-17 Add Alarm Entry Dialog Box (General Detection Style Selected)
1 Leave the radio button selection at “General.”
2 Click the arrow to the right of the Level drop-down list box, and then select the Level to be
associated with the alarm type.
3 Click the arrow to the right of the Frame ID drop-down list box, and then select the frame
address to be associated with the alarm type.
4 Select the alarm type from the Alarm list box:
Table B-3 Alarm Types

Alarm Type Description
0x1 Fan 1 failure
0x2 Fan 2 failure
0x4 Power supply 1 failure
0x8 Power supply 2 failure
0x100 System power supply 1 failure
0x1000 System fan 1 failure
512 Appendix B
Table B-3 Alarm Types

Alarm Type Description
0x40000 XY bus 1 error
0x80000 XY bus 2 error
0x100000 No flash
0x200000 Old database
Clicking on a second alarm type does not deselect the first alarm type you chose. You must
deselect an Alarm type by clicking on its name so that it is no longer highlighted.
5 Click OK to return to the Edit Source Alarm list box, and then click OK to accept the
changes.
Using the Extended Detection Style
Figure B-18 Add Alarm Entry Dialog Box (Extended Detection Style Selected)
1 Click the radio button selection next to “Extended.”
2 Click the arrow to the right of the Level list box, and then select the Level to be associated
with the alarm type.
3 Click the arrow to the right of the Frame ID list box, and then select the frame address to
be associated with the alarm type.
User Manual
4 Click the arrow to the right of the Frame Type list box, and then select the frame type to
be associated with the alarm type.
The “Frame Type” list box currently lists only Panacea or Integrator Gold.
5 Click the arrow to the right of the Module list box, and then select the module type to be
Clicking on a second alarm type does not deselect the first alarm type you chose. You must
6 Select the alarm type from the Alarm list box.

Extended alarm values range from decimal number 0 to 255. The actual meaning of each
alarm value is defined differently, depending on the module type that is “stuffed” in the
frame. See the specific frame's configuration and operation manual for details.
7 Click OK to return to the Edit Source Alarm list box, and then click OK to return to the
Edit Button Function dialog box.
8 At the Edit Button Function dialog box click OK to return to the Edit Panel dialog
box, and then click OK to accept the changes.
Editing Alarm Types

The Edit Alarm Entry dialog boxes look almost exactly like the Add Alarm Entry dialog
boxes. Only the dialog box title is different. Figure B-17 on page 511 and Figure B-18 on
page 512 show what these dialog boxes look like.
The process for editing an alarm type is similar to that for adding an alarm type.
1 At the Edit Source Alarm list box, highlight the alarm entry that you want to edit, and
then click Edit....
The Edit Alarm Entry dialog box opens. (The Edit Alarm Entry dialog box defaults to
 Use the “General” default detection style for all panels (except ABA panels) when
you want to monitor alarms for an entire frame.
modules.
 Use the “Extended” detection style when you want to monitor alarms for a specific
module’s behavior.
4 (If using the “Extended” detection style only) Click the arrow to the right of the
Frame Type drop-down list box, and then select the frame type to be associated with the
alarm type.
514 Appendix B
5 Select the alarm type from the Alarm list box, and then click OK to return to the Edit
Source Alarm list box.
6 At the Edit Source Alarm list box click OK to accept the changes.
Deleting Alarm Types

1 At the Edit Source Alarm list box, highlight the alarm entry that you want to delete. To
select more than one alarm types, using standard Windows selection techniques (hold
down the <Shift> or <Ctrl> keys while selecting the alarm entries.)
2 Click Delete (to delete a single alarm type) or Delete All (to delete all alarm types).
A system prompt appears and asks you if you want to continue.
3 Click Yes to return to the Edit Source Alarm list box, and then click OK to return to
the Edit Panel dialog box.
4 At the Edit Panel dialog box click OK to accept the changes.
Creating a Source Alarm Select Key

This option is not available for ABA panels.
The Source Alarm option allows you use a push button panel to select a logical source for a
logical crosspoint switch. It also provides you with the capability to monitor specified
hardware alarms.
1 Select the Source Alarm option from the Edit Button Function drop-down list box.
Figure B-19 Creating a Source Alarm Select Key

2 Click the arrow located on the right of the Source box, and then select the desired source.
3 To enter a new name, type over the default name in the Edit Name box, and then click
Configure....
User Manual
The Edit Alarm Entry dialog box opens. (The Edit Alarm Entry dialog box defaults to
modules.
Click the arrow to the right of the Frame ID drop-down list box, and then select the frame
(If using the “Extended” detection style only) Click the arrow to the right of the Frame
Type drop-down list box, and then select the frame type to be associated with the alarm
type.
5 Select the alarm type from the Alarm list box, and then click OK to return to the Edit
Source Alarm list box.
Clicking on a second alarm type does not de-select the first alarm type you chose. You must
6 At the Edit Source Alarm list box click OK to accept the changes.
Creating a Destination Alarm Select Key

This option is not available for ABA panels.
The Destination Alarm option allows you use a push button panel to select a logical
destination for a logical crosspoint switch. It also provides you with the capability to monitor
specified hardware alarms.
1 Select the Destination Alarm option from the Edit Button Function drop-down list
box.
516 Appendix B
Figure B-20 Creating a Destination Alarm Select Key

2 Click the arrow located on the right of the Destination box.
3 Scroll through the drop-down list, and then select the desired destination.
4 To enter a new name, type over the default name in the Edit Name box, and then click
Configure....
5 The Edit Alarm Entry dialog box opens. (The Edit Alarm Entry dialog box defaults to
modules.
(If using the “Extended” detection style only) Click the arrow to the right of the Frame
Type drop-down list box, and then select the frame type to be associated with the alarm
type.
8 Select the alarm type from the Alarm list box.
Clicking on a second alarm type does not de-select the first alarm type you chose. You must
9 Click OK to return to the Edit Destination Alarm list box, and then click OK to accept
the changes.
User Manual
Creating a Parametric Key

If a selected frame is not a Panacea clean switch/quiet switch router, the only two available
options are signal presence (source) and signal presence (destination).
The Parametric option allows you to set up individual parameters affecting inputs and
outputs for Platinum frames and Panacea frames.
1 Select the Parametric option from the Edit Button Function drop-down list box.
Figure B-21 Creating a Parametric Key

2 In the Edit Name dialog box, enter a name for the parametric key being created.
3 To access the Parametric Editing Setup main display, choose one of the following options:
 Click on Configure... in the Control combo box to create or edit a list of
parametric settings assigned to control buttons. (If the associated frame does not
have clean/quiet switch routing capabilities, the Edit Parametric Information dialog
box (Figure B-23) only allows you to change the Frame ID. All other selections for
that frame are greyed out.)
 Click on Blink... or Monitor... in the Monitor combo box to create or edit a list of
parametric settings assigned to monitoring/alarm or blinking/alarm buttons on a
control panel.
4 The Parametric Editing Setup list box appears and the Parametric Editing Setup list box
opens to allow you to define a controlling, monitoring, or blinking setup for the new
control key. (See Using the Parametric Editing Setup Capability for more information
about using this function.)
5 After the Parametric Editing Setup list box returns you to the Edit Button Function list
box, click OK to accept all changes and additions.
518 Appendix B
Using the Parametric Editing Setup Capability
Figure B-22 Parametric Editing Setup List Box
The parametric setup list boxes for configuring, monitoring, and blinking look almost
exactly alike. Only the dialog box title is different.
The Parametric Editing Setup list box shows the parametric settings for an associated
control panel key. That key is monitored by the pushbutton panel. If you chose Monitor...
or Blinking... setups, the control panel reports alarm conditions via a steady or a blinking
light on the button. The list box also displays the following types of information about
existing items:
 Frame ID
 Parameter
 Matrix/Level
 Input/Output
 Parameter
 Condition
 Value
 Logical Operator (Blink and Monitoring options only)
Adding Parametric Settings

1 At the Parametric Editing Setup list box, click Add....
The Edit Parametric Information dialog box (Figure B-23) appears.
User Manual
Figure B-23 Edit Parametric Information Dialog Box

2 From the Frame ID box, select the Platinum or Panacea router associated with this control
panel button.
3 From the Parameter box, select the appropriate parametric setting. Descriptions of the
parameters available for the different setups (Configure, Monitor, or Blinking) are
shown in Table B-4 on page 519.
4 From the Matrix box, select the matrix ID number that corresponds to the one you selected
at the Transitions tab.
5From the Input box, select the desired physical input. The drop-down list contains an entry
for each of the inputs currently available on the level selected. (This option may not appear
for all Parametric selections.) Panacea clean/quiet switch routers are limited to 16 inputs.
Table B-4 Setup Mode Parameter List
Mode
Parameter Description
Configure Blink/Monitor
Signal presence (source) Source signal is present or not present No Yes
Signal presence (destination) Destination signal is present or not No Yes
present
Reference type Sync reference types No Yes
Clean switch: source in time Source is locked and timed-up with No Yes
the external sync reference
Clean switch: source H timing Source is locked, but is x amount of No Yes
pixels out of time with the external
sync reference
Clean switch: source V timing Source is locked, but is x amount of No Yes
lines out of time with the external
sync reference
Clean switch: invoke Send a command to the QS to Yes Yes
auto-timing perform an autotime to determine the
timing of the sources against the
external sync reference input
Reclocker data rate Rate at which data is reclocked (see Yes Yes
Table 16-5 on page 298 and Table
16-6 on page 299 for actual duration
frequencies)
Reclocker lock Reclocker is locked to a set data rate No Yes
520 Appendix B
Table B-4 Setup Mode Parameter List (Continued)

Mode
Parameter Description
Configure Blink/Monitor
Quiet switch: reference status Indicates to Navigator or the RS-232 No Yes
port that a reference is present, and
what format it is
Quiet switch: reference Indicates to Navigator or the RS-232 No Yes
frequency port which external sync reference
type is present; this is a combination
of the number of lines, interlaced or
progressive scanning (i or p), and the
frame refresh rate in Hertz (Hz); for
example, 1080i/59.94Hz, or 720p/
50Hz
Video transition type Selects type of video transition from Yes Yes
current source to next source (see
Table 16-7 on page 299 for a list of
video transition types and their
corresponding functions)
Video transition duration Number of frames during which a Yes Yes
selected video transition type occurs
Audio transition type Selects type of audio transition from yes Yes
current source to next source (see
Table 16-8 on page 300 for a list of
audio transition types and their
corresponding functions)
Audio transition duration Number of frames during which a Yes Yes
selected audio transition type occurs
Auto transition Reserved for future use – –
Audio effects Changes the embedded audio for a Yes Yes
given video signal on the designated
output (see Table 16-9 on page 301
for a list of effects and their
corresponding results)
Audio gain Allows more precise control of the Yes Yes
strength of the audio signal
Audio source Allows mapping input signals of the Yes Yes
audio channels to a video signal
6 From the Output box, select the physical output location on the frame back panel. (This
option may not appear for all Parametric selections.) Panacea clean/quiet switch routers are
limited to 2 outputs – PGM1 and PGM2.
7 From the Condition box, select the monitoring condition you want to associate with this
control panel button. The conditions listed vary, depending on whether you selected
Configure, Blink, or Monitor at the Edit Button Function drop-down list box.(In
addition, the conditions listed may or may not be appropriate for your selected parameter.)
 If you are in Configure mode, choose the appropriate condition.
 If you are in Monitor or Blink mode, choose the appropriate mathematical
operator.
User Manual
8 From the Value box, select the item value that corresponds to the Condition you chose.
9 (Monitor and Blink modes only) From the Operator box, choose the appropriate Boolean
operator that corresponds to the Condition you chose.
10 Click OK to return to the Edit Button Function dialog box, and then click OK to
accept the changes.
Editing Parametric Settings

1 At the Parametric Editing Setup list box, click Edit....
The Edit Parametric Information dialog box (Figure B-23) appears.
2 Change the setting for the list box you want to edit. Descriptions of the list box drop-down
options are described in Adding Parametric Settings on page 518.
Deleting Parametric Settings

1 At the Parametric Editing Setup list box, highlight the parametric setting that you want to
delete. To select more than one setting, using standard Windows selection techniques (hold
down the <Shift> or <Ctrl> keys while selecting the setting entries.)
2 Click Delete.
The setting disappears from the list box.
accept the changes.
To delete all parametric settings, follow these steps:
1 At the Parametric Editing Setup list box, click Delete All.

The settings disappear from the list box.
2 Click Yes to return to the Edit Button Function dialog box, and then click OK to
accept the changes.
Creating a Chop Key (RCP-ABA and RCPp-LCD only)

The Chop key allows two sources to be rapidly switched on one destination. A Chop
alternately switches the controlled Destination (on all applicable levels) between two
Sources, in a repetitive manner. Applications include signal timing and camera matching.
1 Select the Chop option from the Edit Button Function drop-down list box.
522 Appendix B
Figure B-24 Creating a Chop Key

2 From the Predefined Chop Rates drop-down list box, select one of the following:
 Select Fast for a switch rate of 10 frames per second.
 Select Medium for a switch rate of 20 frames per second.
 Select Slow for a switch rate of 30 frames per second.
 For a customized switch rate (that is, a rate different from 10, 20, or 30 frames per
second):
 Select Custom.
 Set the switch rate you desire in the Chop Rate spin box.
accept the changes.
Creating an On-Air Swap Key (RCP-12×2BAp only)

The Swap function allows you to take the sources on one destination and exchange them
with sources on the other destination. This function enables you to use one destination as a
preview (or cue) bus and the other as an on-air bus.
1 Select the On-Air Swap option from the Edit Button Function drop-down list box.
User Manual
Figure B-25 Creating an On-Air Swap Key

2 Click the drop-down list arrow next to the Destination A icon box.
A drop-down list containing icons for currently defined destinations appears.
3 Using the scroll bar, scroll through the list of sources for Destination A, and then click the
destination you want to swap the resources from.
4 Click the drop-down list arrow next to the Destination B icon box. A drop-down list
containing icons for currently defined destinations appears.
5 Using the scroll bar, scroll through the list of sources for Destination B, and then click the
desired destination you want to swap the resources to.
To disable this function, select None from the Edit Button Function drop-down list
box.
524 Appendix B
525
C Troubleshooting and
Frequently Asked Questions
Troubleshooting Router Panel Problems

Routing Components Fails to Execute Certain Router Actions
If you create sequential rules for an action to query router status (a select or query action)
and an action to invoke a router command (a clear, lock, protect, or take action), you must
use different types of event triggers for the two actions.
This gives Routing Components sufficient time to process the status action fully before it
tries to implement the command action.
If rules with the same event trigger list sequentially on the Rules tab, Routing Components
actually processes them simultaneously.
Routing Components Fails to Execute a Crosspoint Restriction

Some features provided in router control panels require support by the routing devices. If the
device you are using does not support crosspoint restriction then performing a Restrict
command will have no effect. Check the device documentation provided with the routing
product to determine if it supports this feature.
Different GUIs Show Different Lock/Protect Status for the Same

Destination
Your Routing Components Router Control GUI may show a Protect status while a Matrix
Panel page shows Lock for the same destination. This occurs because when one user or
panel protects a certain router destination, all the other panels or users that have a different
ID than this one are locked for that destination.
A Routing Components Router Control GUI identifies who has applied a Protect status via
their user ID, while a Matrix Panel identifies who has applied the protect status by using the
panel’s address. You can set the panel to the same address as the user ID, following this
procedure:
1 Choose Options > User Accounts from the main menu.

The Login Options dialog box opens.
2 Select your user ID from the Users list.

3 In the User Information section of the dialog box, make note of the ID number for this
User ID.
526 Appendix C
Troubleshooting and Frequently Asked Questions
4 In Build mode, right click on the Matrix panel and select Component Wizard... from the
menu that appears.
5 From the Address drop-down menu, choose the same number as the user ID you noted in
step 3.
6 Click Finish to save the change to the Matrix panel.
A Matrix Panel’s address can be set when the page is created using the Router Wizard. For
more information, see Creating Grid, Single-Bus, Multi Bus and Matrix Panels on
page 56.
If you have RouterWorks installed, you will see the same sort of behavior. See your
RouterWorks manual for information on setting the address of a panel.
Logical Source Info From On Crosspoint Status Event is Blank

For example, the source ID and name may be blank.
In Routing Components, you can extract the information from the 'On Crosspoint Status'
event and use it in an action (for instance, you might want to use the logical source name
provided by the event to update a text element in your page). The logical source
information from the 'On Crosspoint Status' event is assembled based on the input values
provided by the event. As you might have inputs on the crosspoint event that do not
correspond to your logical source configuration, the event matching algorithm is not able to
determine which logical source corresponds to the input values in the 'On Crosspoint
Status' event, assigning blank values to both Source ID and Source Name event parameters.
You can change the way the event matching algorithm operates by using the 'Set
Crosspoint Match Type' action. By default, the 'On Crosspoint Status' event uses the 'Full
Match' type when extracting the logical source information from the event.
My system is still quite busy even though Navigator is closed.

The router Service, which handles all communication to routers, runs all the time and might
be still connected to a frame. Implement Task Manager (Run > taskmgr), select
RouterService.exe at the Processes tab, and then click End Process.
Can’t publish to Platinum or Magellan panel

If publishing to a Platinum or Magellan panel fails, you may need to disable the proxy server.
1 From the Start menu, select Control Panel > Internet Options.
2 Click the Connections tab, and then click Lan Settings.
3 Under Proxy server, uncheck Use a proxy server for your LAN.
4 Click OK twice to close all the open dialog boxes, and try publishing again.
Frequently Asked Questions

 Database Editor Sources and Destinations on page 527
 Database Editor Advanced Functions on page 527
User Manual
Database Editor Sources and Destinations

Why do I not see all available levels on my Sources and Destinations
tabs or why are columns missing?
Ensure that all columns are not hidden. A hidden column can be located by missing
sequential column headers. To unhide a column, select the Show All Columns icon from the
toolbar. (See Manipulating Columns on page 99 for instructions.)
When I deselect a check box for Advanced options while inserting and
deleting rows, why are my settings not retained?
In order to retain your Insert or Delete Advanced option settings, you must select these
options in the Options dialog box. This will allow your Advanced Options settings to be
retained in the workspace.
What is the difference between “X” and “ ” for Source Indexes?

The “X” indicates that a particular source when switched will cause the selected output to
disconnect the active crosspoint. The blank space (“ ”) indicates that a particular source,
when switched, will not affect the current crosspoint since it is, in effect, not mapped.
Why can’t I see the physical level(s) index on the logical source or
destination tabs?
By default the levels section displays the levels name you assigned to that level and not the
physical level index. To display the physical index, change the setting in the toolbar for the
status name drop-down to physical index or matrix index.
Why am I not able to see status names I have set for destinations?
Currently none of our control surfaces expose such functionality as status names for
destinations. However, in the future this new information can and will be utilized on new
control surfaces.
Why doesn’t the Insert Options dialog box appear when I insert a new
device type?
The Show Dialog selection in the Options dialog box is not enabled. To enable the
selections, click the Options icon, and then check the Show Dialog selections for the desired
tabs and functions.
Database Editor Advanced Functions

Can I copy and paste my current input and output names from a
Microsoft Excel spreadsheet into Database Editor?
Yes, the steps below explain how to import spreadsheet data into Database Editor.
1 Open the Logical Database Editor dialog box, and then select the Levels tab.
If your current matrix size is smaller than the number of names you need to paste into the
grid, increase your logical system size sources and destinations to correspond to your system
size. See Specifying Logical Router Size on page 130 for instructions.
2 Click Apply, and then go to the corresponding level(s) row(s) you would like to paste the
names into.
528 Appendix C
Troubleshooting and Frequently Asked Questions
Increase that level(s) size accordingly.
3 Click Save.
4 Switch to Excel, and then copy the information you want to paste into Database Editor.
Logical source or destination field length is 8 characters, so you should modify your naming
conventions to fit into the Database Editor fields prior to pasting data.
5 Switch to Database Editor, and then open the Source and or Destination tab, as
appropriate.
6 Paste your spreadsheet information into the Database Editor.
When I wild-partitioned my system in Navigator, and then open it in

Database Editor, my logical sources and destination tabs look like they are
missing data?
The Database Editor did not lose any data but is simply presenting it in a different way. The
physical indexing is the only portion that looks different with the new software but your
system will still behave appropriately.
How do I make my sources/destinations appear in the same order as I

see when I sort by a certain column on the Sources tab?
The source number column governs the order in which sources appear on panels. If you
want to use a different ordering, have the Sources tab sorted in the order you want; then,
click the Resync List icon to put the Source numbers in that new order. When configuring
new panels they will use this order of sources.
529
D Function Mapping:
RouterMapper to Navigator
Function Mapping Overview

Experienced RouterMapper users will find virtually all of the same functions and features
within Navigator. These features have been remapped, as shown in Figure D-1 on
page 529.
Double click on
Communication Tab  Properties Options  Plug Ins…
routing node in
of a Routing System Advanced Routing
Navigation window
Control  Configure…
 Preferences
Configuration Name
Folder Naming and shortcut creation all

done by creating shortcuts and folders in
the Navigation window
Other notable feature – firmware

upgrade of P-Res-H devices done in
Control tab of P-Res-H (Panacea,
All devices show up in the Navigation Panels, Edge)
windows under the configuration they
are found or created in
Select the device(s) and select

Delete in the Navigation window
Double click on a Discovery handled by Right click under a routing system

Double click on device and select Create 
routing system in Build MAC Address Scanning
in Build mode in the You are then presented with
mode to launch the and routing devices in
Navigation window Control Panel, Router, or Edge
logical database editor Discovery window
Right click on device(s) or system Right click on device(s) or system

and select Poll in Navigation and select Download in
window Navigation window
Figure D-1 Quick Reference Chart: Finding RouterMapper Features in Navigator

530 Appendix D
Function Mapping: RouterMapper to Navigator
531
Index
A Application parameters, Platinum 252

Assigning 110, 114, 122, 125, 131, 132, 134, 139,
Accessing destinations and sources 367
Add icon 86 143, 220, 439
Add New Level icon 87 category keys 381
Adding 121, 135, 139, 207, 502 destination selection keys 369, 395
dual outputs 244
categories 139
favorite sources to selection keys 369, 399
commands 502
descriptions 135 level names 132
destinations 121, 125 level numbers 131
devices module to Platinum matrix 243
adding manually 13, 18, 335 names to destinations 122
generic Harris routers. See Legacy frames, adding names to sources 110
Hedco (HD-16) series. See Legacy frames, adding source selection keys 369, 399
MixBox series. See Legacy frames, adding sources 379
NEO series. See Legacy frames, adding sync settings 245
output monitoring setup 320 view order 365
Prophecy series. See Legacy frames, adding web router application configurations 439
Via series. See Legacy frames, adding Assigning group items 149, 413, 415
XPlus series. See Legacy frames, adding Audio effects 301
XPRESS series. See Legacy frames, adding Audio gain 302
dynamic routing threads 172 Audio processing settings 301, 302, 303
groups 149, 413, 415 Audio source 303
HView SX Hybrid matrices 207 Available destinations 56
indexes 143 Available sources 54
levels 131
parametric settings 518
Platinum matrix 200, 244 B
salvos 22, 499 Backup 4, 37
sources 109 databases 4, 37
tielines 154, 156 devices 4
web router application Breakaway switch 463, 464
devices 429 Breakaway take 457
panels 430 Breakaway take request option 63, 463, 464, 466
users 437 Breakaway•Follow key 508
Addresses, monitoring device 405 Bus panels 50, 51, 56
Advanced controls, Edge protocol gateway 350, 354 Buttons 72, 493
Advanced Router Control plug-in 31 cloning 73
AFV switch 464 themes 55, 56
Alarm editor 510
adding alarm types 510
deleting alarm types 514
C
editing alarm types 513 Categories 27, 137
Alarm key 509 Categories tab 82–83
532 Index
creating 139 adding commands 502

managing 139 Command Select key 501
viewing deleting commands 502
destinations 142 editing commands 502
sources 142 Configuration 4
Category indexing Configure Device Types icon 86
adding categories 139 Configuring 151, 171, 199, 263, 307, 335, 339,
assigning 359, 391, 429
destinations 139 auxiliary keys 372, 393
sources 139 control panels 359, 391
associating index names 140 Destinations 119
changing names 141 Edge protocol gateway 339
defining 138 Integrator frames 307
deleting categories 142 legacy frames 335
generating names 140, 144 levels 400
viewing destinations affected by categories 142, Panacea frames 263
144 Platinum frames 199
viewing sources affected by categories 142, 144 Sources 107
Category•Index key 498–499 tie lines 151, 171
CENTRIO web router applications 429
creating actual PIP destinations 259 Contiguous partitioning 216, 248, 286, 319, 488
setting up PIPs to follow destinations 260 Control panels 359, 391
Changing
adding salvos 499
category names 141
Alarm key 509
index names 143
allowing access to destinations 367
level names 132
allowing access to sources 367
level numbers 131
assigning button functions 493
matrix format 244
assigning category keys 381
matrix name 243
assigning destination selection keys 369, 395
matrix sort order 244
assigning source selection keys 369, 399
module format, Platinum 245
assigning sources 379
module parameter setting, Platinum 245
assigning view order 365
panel brands 384
Breakaway•Follow key 508
panel IDs 384, 400
Category•Index key 498–499
panel names 384, 400
changing panel brands 384
panel styles 384, 400
changing panel IDs 384, 400
protocol settings 233
changing panel names 384, 400
Clean switch 294, 297
changing panel styles 384, 400
Clear source 484
clearing destination selection keys 371, 396
Clearing 467, 478
clearing source selection keys 371, 399
destination selection keys 371, 396
Command Select key 501
module parameter setting, Platinum 246
configuring auxiliary keys 372, 393
source selection keys 371, 399
configuring levels 400
Clearing selected sources 478
creating panel definitions 372
Clears 525
Crosspoint Select key 497
Clears, creating button for 54, 71, 76
defining destinations 393
Clone buttons 73
defining sources 397
Color codes 104
denying access to destinations 367
Color codes, Platinum matrix 242
denying access to sources 367
Colors 133
Destination Alarm Select key 515
Columns 99
Destination Select key 496
filling 102
determining destinations accessible to panels 375
hiding 99
determining sources accessible to panels 379
sorting 101, 102
Edit Button Function key 503
unhiding 100
editing salvos 499
Combiner system, router 455
Fusion 391
Commands 502
limiting available destinations 363
pNavigator Routing Components 533
User Manual
limiting available sources 363 levels 131

Lock key 506 matrix 244
moving a selection key 362 parametric settings 521
network information, setting 388 routing configurations 36
On-Air Swap key 522 sources 109
Page key 505 web router application users 440
Panel Status key 504 Denying access 367
Parametric key 517 Destination Alarm Select key 515
Protect key 507 Destination groups 414
RCP-ABA 359 adding 415
RCP-IDe 391 assigning destinations 415
RCPp 391 deleting 416
resolving auxiliary key definition errors 372 renaming 416
resolving inaccessibility errors 383 Destination groups for tielines 166
Salvo Select key 499 Destination Select key 496
setting levels associated with selection Destination selection 456
windows 373 Destination swap 64, 478
Source Alarm Select key 514 Destinations 64, 71, 119, 121
Source Select key 495 accessing 367
Control position 66 adding 121
Control tools 84 assigning 139
Controlling routing systems 2, 455 icons 122
Controlling tielines 158 level outputs 125
Copy icon 86, 153 names 122
Create new routing system 13, 15, 18 physical outputs 125
Create submenu 5 configuring 119
Creating 18, 37, 53, 56, 259 defining 393
actual PIP destinations 259 deleting 121
categories 139 Destinations tab 81
control panel definitions 372 disconnecting 466, 478
indexes 143 editing names 122
routing systems 1, 15 levels
Crosspoint restriction option 65, 525 adding 125
Crosspoint Select key 497 hiding 126
Crosspoint switching mode 212, 244 removing 125
Crosspoints, multiple take requests options 63 unhiding 126
Crosspoints, redundant 212, 244 locking 469, 475, 476
Custom page properties 72 mapping 127
Cut icon 86 removing 121
viewing destinations affected by categories 142
virtual destinations for HView SX Hybrid 259
D Determining accessible destinations 375
Databases Determining accessible sources 379
backing up 4, 37 Device addresses, monitoring 405
backup 4 Device Type wizard 183
restoring 4, 38 Devices 1, 197
setup 1, 77
backup 4
wizards 77, 183 configuration 4
Defining category indexing 138
discovering 7
Delete icon 87, 153
downloading 4
Deleting 109, 121, 131, 142, 502
polling 4, 39
categories 142
reloading 4
commands 502
running a discovery 11
destinations 121
setting discovery options 7
dynamic routing fabric manager threads 179
setting discovery save options 10
groups 150, 414, 416
setting host IP addresses for discovery 7
indexes 144
setup 1, 197
534 Index
Devices, discovering 1 Crosspoint Select 497

Diagnostics 68 destination alarm select 515
Disconnect 457, 466 destination select 496
Disconnecting tielines 166 edit button function 503
Discovery 1, 7 editing salvos 499
Display tally status option 64 lock 506
Download 4 on-air swap 522
Download Tielines icon 87 page 505
Downloading panel status 504
corrective actions 44 parametric 517
device definitions 44 protect 507
dynamic routing fabric manager thread salvo select 499
information 181 source alarm select 514
problems 44 source select 495
Dual outputs, assigning 244 control panels
Dynamic routing fabric manager 151, 171 RCP-ABA 359
adding threads 172 RCP-IDe panels 391
deleting threads 179 RCPp 391
downloading thread information 181 databases 79
editing remote access lists 176 adding icons 89
editing threads 175 dynamic routing fabric manager 151, 171
optimizing threads 181 removing icons 92
restoring default icons 92
E dynamic routing fabric manager
remote access lists 176
Edge protocol gateway 339 threads 175
advanced controls 350, 354 frame definitions
configuring 339 audio processing settings 301
detected cards 348 detected cards 288, 332
Ethernet port protocol option values 346, 348 detected matrices 249
mapping values, Pro-Bel 342 firmware upgrades 257
network information 349 I/O hardware module 289
serial port protocol assignments 340 parametric settings 293
serial port protocol option values 340 router matrices 329
setting network information 349 parametric settings 521
SNMP 350 salvos 499
SNMP Agent 353 Editing router control panel 66
supported Ethernet protocols 346 Editing web router application user information 439
supported serial protocols 341 Embedded message 105
system information 349 Enabling redundant crosspoints 244
Edge. See Edge protocol gateway Error feedback 104
Edit button function dialog box 362, 393, 493 color codes 104
Edit Button Function key 503 embedded messages 105
Edit Images icon 88, 154 messages 105
Edit panel dialog box summary list 105
RCP-ABA 360 Ethernet port protocol
RCP-IDe 391 assignments 274, 386
RCPp 391 option values 274, 346, 348, 386
Editing 66, 79, 359, 439, 502 Export icon 88, 154
commands 502 Exporting
control panel button functions levels 132
adding salvos 499
Alarm key 509
assigning functions 493 F
breakaway•follow 508 Features 1
category•index 498–499 Fill Series icon 99
Command Select 501 Filling columns 102
User Manual
Filtering Options icon 88 Edit Images 88, 154

Find icon 87 Export 88, 154
Finding text 103 Fill Series 99
Firmware upgrades 257 Filtering Options 88
Follow mode 63 Find 87
Follow take 462 Go to 99
Fonts 65 Help 88, 154
Frames, editing definitions 282, 328 Hide Selected Column 87
Frames, editing matrices 329 Hide Status Names 87
Fusion control panels 391 Import 88
Insert 86
Options 88, 154
G See also Options dialog
Gateway. See Setting network information Paste 86, 153
Generic Harris routers. See Legacy frames, adding Platinum matrix 243
Go to icon 99 Poll Tielines 87
Graphical tools 84 Print 86, 153
Grouping functions
Publish Logical Names to Devices 86
adding items 149, 413, 415
redo 86
assigning items 149, 413, 415
Refresh Threads 87
deleting 150, 414
removing 92
destination groups 414
Replace 87
Grouping tab 83
restoring defaults 92
options 416
Resync List 88
preview 419
Save 86, 153
RCP-IDe control panels 411
Show All Columns 88
renaming 150, 413
Show Tielines Columns 87
source groups 412
Sort 87
toolbar 85
H Undo 86
Hedco (HD-16) series. See Legacy frames, adding Import icon 88
Help icon 88, 154 Importing
Hide Selected Column icon 87 levels 132
Hide Status Names icon 87 Indexes 27, 137
Hiding columns 99 adding 143
Hiding destination levels 126 changing names 143
Hiding source levels 115 creating 143
HView SX Hybrid 207, 259 deleting 144
adding matrices 207 managing 143
virtual destinations 259 Indexes tab. See Categories Tab
HView SX Pro 210, 243 Indicators, polling status 39
Insert icon 86
Insert router control panel 66
I Insertion wizard 193
Icons 110, 122, 134 Integrator frames 307
Add 86 IP address. See Setting network information
Add New Level 87
adding 89
assigning
L
destinations 122 LCD buttons
levels 134 See also RCP-IDe control panels
sources 110 controlling backlight intensity 427
Configure Device Types 86 editing displays 421
Copy 86, 153 setup 421
Legacy frames, adding 335
Cut 86
Levels 63, 114, 115, 125, 129, 463, 464, 466, 482
Delete 87, 153
adding 131
Download Tielines 87
adding descriptions 135
536 Index
assigning MixBox series. See Legacy frames, adding

icons 134 Monitoring device addresses 405
names 132 Monitoring tielines 158
numbers 131 Mono breakaway partitioning 248, 490
changing Moving a selection key 362
names 132 Multi bus panels 50, 56, 468
numbers 131 Multi bus with salvo panels, operation 468
colors 133 Multi Display panels 46, 53, 481
deleting 131 Multiple crosspoint take requests option 63
destinations Multiple edit functions, performing 244
hiding 126 Multiple take 465
unhiding 126
exporting 132
importing 132 N
Levels tab 27, 28, 81, 129 Names 110, 122, 132, 140
removing 131 associating 140
setting inputs 135 changing 141
setting outputs 135 generating 140
sorting. See Sorting columns Navigation pane 15
sources Navigator page 66, 72
hiding 115 NEO series. See Legacy frames, adding
unhiding 115 Network information settings 225, 272, 388
specifying logical router size 130 Network port 15
Licenses, SNMP 233, 281, 356 Network settings information 349
Limiting sources and destinations 363 New routing system 18
Lock destination 458 Node functionality 3
Lock key 506
Lock/Protect Status, troubleshooting 525 O
Lock/unlock operations option 64
On crosspoint status events 526
Locking destinations 469, 475, 476
On-Air Swap key 522
Locks 64, 494, 506
Operations tools 4
creating button for 54
Optimizing threads 181
destination 482
Options dialog, using 97
executing 525
Options icon 88, 154
salvos 479
See also Options dialog
troubleshooting 525
Options, grouping 416
Logical source, troubleshooting 526
Output buttons 75
Output monitoring 320
M Override lock and protect option 65
Managing categories 139
Managing indexes 143 P
Map names 232, 280, 355
Page key 505
Mapping destinations 127
Page Wizard 53
Mapping sources 116
Panacea 263
Matrix Classic panels, operation 473
editing frames 282, 283, 328
Matrix panels 48, 56
Ethernet port protocol assignments 274
creating 56
Ethernet port protocol option values 274
operation 473
serial port protocol assignments 272
Matrix partitioning 485
serial port protocol option values 272
contiguous 216, 248, 286, 319, 488
SNMP Agent 275
Mono breakaway 248, 490
Panel address 67
RGB 285
Panel background 66
RGB/Stereo 247, 487
Panel info 67
shared inputs 218, 248, 489
Panel name 67
Stereo breakaway 219, 248, 490
Panel Status key 504
Wild 216, 248, 269–270, 286, 319–320, 489
Panels, web router application 430
User Manual
Parameters 252 taking 468, 474

Parametric editing setup 518 Preview monitor 484
adding settings 518 Preview, grouping 419
deleting settings 521 Previewing tielines 161
editing settings 521 Print icon 86, 153
Parametric key 517 Product information contact information xix
Parametric settings 293 Prophecy series. See Legacy frames, adding
Parking tielines 165 Protect 54, 64
Partitioning destinations 470, 476, 483
contiguous 216, 248, 286, 319, 488 salvos 480
Mono breakaway 248, 490 troubleshooting 525
physical map order 221 Protect destination 459
RGB 285 Protect key 507
RGB/Stereo 247, 487 Protect/unprotect operations option 64
shared inputs 218, 248, 489 Protocol settings 233, 384, 385
Stereo breakaway 219, 248, 490 Proxy server 526
wild 216, 248, 269–270, 286, 319–320, 489 P-SC modules. See Clean Switch; Quiet Switch
Paste icon 86, 153 P-SCQ modules. See Clean Switch; Transition
Performing multiple edit functions, Platinum 244 Publish Logical Names to Devices icon 86
Performing switches 475 Publish, troubleshooting 526
P-HSC modules. See Clean Switch; Quiet Switch
P-HSCQ modules. See Clean Switch Q
P-HSCQ modules. See Clean Switch; Transition
Physical devices setup 1, 197 Quiet switch 296
Physical map order 221
PIP follow destinations 260 R
Platinum 199
RCP-ABA control panels 359
crosspoint switching mode, setting 244 auxiliary keys
dual outputs, assigning 244 configuring 372
matrix definition errors, resolving 372
adding matrix 200, 244
category keys, assigning 381
assigning module to matrix 243 destination selection keys
changing matrix format 244 assigning 369
changing matrix name 243 clearing 371
changing matrix sort order 244 destinations
color codes 242 allowing access 367
deleting matrix 244 denying access 367
icons 243 determining accessibility 375
removing module from matrix 243 Ethernet port protocol assignments 386
modules inaccessibility errors, resolving 383
assigning module to matrix 243 levels, setting 373
changing module format 245 models 359, 360
changing parameter settings 245 panel brands, changing 384
clearing parameter settings 246 panel definitions, creating 372
removing module from matrix 243 panel IDs, changing 384
multiple edit functions, performing 244 panel names, changing 384
redundant crosspoints, enabling 244 panel styles, changing 384
sync settings, assigning 245 protocol settings 384, 385
TDM starting slot offset 241 selection keys, moving 362
Plug-in, advanced router control 31 serial port protocol option values 385
Poll Tielines icon 87 source selection keys 369, 371
Polling 4, 39, 41, 42 sources
polling problems and corrective actions, combiner allowing access 367
system 41 assigning 379
status indicators 39 denying access 367
Presets 474 determining accessibility 379
creating 468 limiting 363
538 Index
view order, assigning 365 inaccessibility errors 383

RCP-IDe control panels 391 Restoring databases 4, 38
auxiliary keys, configuring 393 Restricting crosspoints 65, 467, 477
destination selection keys Resync List icon 88
assigning 395 RGB partitioning 285
clearing 396 RGB/Stereo partitioning 247, 487
destinations, defining 393 Router components on Navigator page 66
grouping functions 411 Router configuration file 67
destination groups 414 Router control page 70, 72
options 416 Router interfaces 45
preview 419 matrix panel 48
source groups 412 multi display panel 46
LCD buttons setup 421 multi-bus panel 50
levels, configuring 400 single-bus panel 51
panel IDs, changing 400 source preview panel 46
panel names, 400 Router page context menus 484
panel styles, changing 400 Router size, specifying 130
source selection keys Router view 67
assigning 399 RouterMapper function remapping 2, 529
clearing 399 RouterMapper, finding features in Navigator 529
sources, defining 397 Routers folder 15, 17
RCPp control panels 391 Routing configurations
auxiliary keys, configuring 393 Categories 27, 137
destination selection keys deleting 36
assigning 395 Destinations 119
clearing 396 Grouping 147
destinations, defining 393 Indexes 27, 137
levels, configuring 400 Levels 129
panel IDs, changing 400 Sources 107
panel names, changing 400 Routing systems 2, 455
panel styles, changing 400 controlling 2, 455
source selection keys creating 1, 13, 15, 18
assigning 399 adding components 19
clearing 399 via discovery 17
sources, defining 397 editing 21
Rediscover 4 node functionality 3
Redo icon 86 Rules, router 72
Redundant
crosspoints 212, 244
switch mode 212 S
Reference standard 298, 299 Salvos 22, 64, 468, 478, 499
Refresh Threads icon 87 capturing existing states 500
Reload 4 Copying existing salvos 501
Removing creating 22
destination levels 125 editing 25
destinations 121 input right click options 26
levels 115, 131 locking 479
source levels 115 menu buttons 24
sources 109 quick select buttons 25
Removing module from Platinum matrix 243 Salvo Select key 499
Rename control system 5 selecting crosspoints 500
Renaming groups 150, 413, 416 Save icon 86, 153
Replace icon 87 Selected source 467
Replacing text 103 Selecting destinations 55
Reset to follow mode option 63 Serial port 15
Resolving Serial port protocol
auxiliary key definition errors 372 assignments 272, 340, 385
User Manual
option values 272, 340, 385 Sources tab 80

Setting status names 110
level inputs 135 viewing sources affected by categories 142
level outputs 135 Specifying logical router size 130
levels associated with selection windows 373 Stereo breakaway partitioning 219, 248, 490
network information 388 Subnet mask. See Setting network information
Setting up databases 1, 77 Supported routers 455
Setting up physical devices 1, 197 Swapping destinations 64, 467, 478
Settings, application parameters 252 Switching mode, crosspoint 212, 244
Shared inputs partitioning 218, 248, 489 Sync settings, assigning 245
Shortcut menus 98, 99 System information, Edge protocol gateway 349
Show All Columns icon 88
Show Tielines Columns icon 87
Signal Lost icon 461
T
Signal monitor 54 Tabs 80
Signal monitoring 461, 474 Categories 82–83
Signal presence 45 Destinations 81
Single bus panels 51, 56, 465 Grouping 83
SNMP 228, 275, 350 Levels 27, 28, 81, 129
SNMP Agent Sources 80
Edge protocol gateway 353 Take button 54, 71, 76, 481
licenses 233 Take router source to destination 456
Panacea frames 275 Takes 462, 474, 482
Platinum frames 230 executing 525
Sort icon 87 preset 468
Sorting columns 101, 102 with Multi Display panel 481
Source button 482 with Single Bus panel 462
Source disconnect take option 63 with Source Preview panel 481
Source groups 412 Tally status 64
adding 413 TDM starting slot offset 241
assigning sources 413 Technical support contact information xix
deleting 414 Text, finding 103
renaming 413 Text, replacing 103
Source Preview panels 48, 53 Tielines
Sources 71, 107 activation 154
accessing 367 adding threads 154
adding 109 advanced functions
assigning 139
disconnect 166
icons 110
park 165
level inputs 114
preview 161
names 110
tracing destinations 162
physical inputs 114
tracing threads 159
configuring 107
troubleshooting 160
defining 397
weight 164
deleting 109
controlling 158
deleting logical sources 109
editing names 110
levels disconnect 166
adding 115 monitoring 158
hiding 115 park 165
removing 115 previewing 161
unhiding 115 Tielines tab
components 152
mapping 116
functions 152
removing 109
tracing
sharing level inputs 118
destinations 162
Source Alarm Select key 514
threads 159
Source Select key 495
540 Index
troublehooting 160 salvos 480

weight 164 Unprotect routing destination 459
TLCMonitorShell.exe 158 Unrestricting a crosspoint 468
Tools 4, 84 Upgrades, firmware 257
Tracing Users, web router application 437
destinations 162
threads 159
Transition 298
V
Transparent background style 65 Via series. See Legacy frames, adding
Troubleshooting 41, 42, 525
download problems 44 W
polling problems 41 Web router applications 429
polling problems, combiner system 41 adding
Troubleshooting tielines 160 devices 429
panels 430
U users 437
assigning configurations 439
Undo icon 86
deleting users 440
Unhiding 100, 115, 126
editing user information 439
columns 100
Weight, tielines 164
destination levels 126
Wild partitioning 216, 248, 269–270, 286, 319–
source levels 115
320, 489
Unicode 108, 120
Wizards 45, 183
Unlock 64, 483
destinations 462, 470, 476
salvos 479 X
Unlock routing destination 458 XPlus series. See Legacy frames, adding
Unprotect 64, 483 XPRESS series. See Legacy frames, adding
destinations 471, 477

Magellan CCS Navigator: Installation and Operation Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Magellan CCS Navigator: Installation and Operation Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Installation

Chapter 1 Introduction to Magellan CCS Navigator Device Control ................... 1

Chapter 2 Installation ............................................................................................................... 7

If Setup Detects No Previous Installations ................................................................. 15

Chapter 3 Logging In and Account Administration .................................................. 23

Chapter 4 Interface Overview .............................................................................................. 37

Working with Layouts .............................................................................................. 56

Chapter 5 Communication Options and SNMP Configuration .............................. 59

Chapter 6 CCS Device Discovery.......................................................................................... 75

Chapter 7 Network View Construction ............................................................................ 93

Adding Resources to the Navigation Pane ................................................................ 99

Chapter 8 CCS Device Configuration ............................................................................... 127

Setting SNMP Options .............................................................................................. 150

Chapter 9 NUCLEUS Configuration .................................................................................. 161

Selecting Displays for Your CENTRIO Panel ............................................................. 183

Chapter 10 EDGE-DPS575 Gateway

Chapter 11 NEO Frame Configuration ............................................................................. 221

Chapter 12 LCP and RCP Configuration ........................................................................... 227

Chapter 13 Network Event Diagnostics ........................................................................... 237

Chapter 14 CCS Device Control............................................................................................. 255

Checking the Active Window Type ......................................................................... 258

Chapter 15 Streaming in Control Windows .................................................................... 277

Chapter 16 Video Output Monitoring................................................................................ 287

Chapter 17 Device Control through HTTP ....................................................................... 293

Appendix A Troubleshooting .................................................................................................. 295

Common Problems ................................................................................................ 295

Card Slot View Fails to Report Card Alarms ............................................................ 313

Appendix B Frequently Asked Questions ......................................................................... 323

Appendix C Copyright, Trademark, and Warranty Information ........................... 329

Appendix D Glossary ................................................................................................................... 337

Table i-2 Conventions

Obtaining the User Manuals

1 Introduction to Magellan CCS

Magellan™ CCS Magellan CCS Navigator Overview

Figure 1-1 Magellan CCS Navigator Screen

 CCS control panels

 NAVIGATOR-DEV License on page 2

The NAVIGATOR-SRV license allows administrators to use Graphical Navigation tools to

Figure 1-2. Sample Magellan CCS Navigator Pages

A PC with a NAVIGATOR-SRV license will normally be operated by an Administrator user.

 Graphical Navigation pages

NAVIGATOR-CLI installations operate only in Control mode. A user with a NAVIGATOR-CLI

Though some data is stored on the NAVIGATOR-SRV PC, a PC with a NAVIGATOR-CLI

Information that is stored on a NAVIGATOR-CLI-licensed system includes:

For more information on configuring and controlling routers, see Volume 6.

For more information, see Volume 4.

Basic CCS Magellan CCS Navigator System (No Licenses)

Software Installation Overview

 Required Hardware on page 7

It is not recommended to run Magellan CCS Navigator Server on a PC that is running or

Configuring a PC Monitor for Best Display

Required Operating System and Software

 Microsoft Windows 8.1 Professional, 64 bit

Before installing Magellan CCS Navigator Software on a PC running Windows XP

See the following topics for more information:

 Installing Other Required Software on page 10

Installing Other Required Software

Table 2-2 Required Third-Party Software

Note: For best results, do not use Internet

Table 2-2 Required Third-Party Software (Continued)

Order of Installation for Software and Firmware

1 First, upgrade all NEO 3901-RES-E and ICE6800+ modules.

Requirements for Using MPEG-4 Streaming